Document III-2 - Volume 1 of 3 (Division 1 To Division 12)

Ministry of Health
Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

Cooperative Center for Children
for the Treatment and Research of Genetic Disorders
Tender Documents
Document III-2 : Particular Specifications
Volume 1 of 3 (Division 1 to Division 12)
20th October, 2021
Gulf Consult
The Advisory Group
Cooperative Center For Children for the Treatment
and Research of Genetic Disorder
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT III-2 : PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

SECTION NO.
VOLUME 1 OF 3 : DIVISION 1 TO 12
DOCUMENT III-1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Page III-1/1
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 09 Special Notes, Priority of Documents Overriding Clauses etc. 01 10 09–1 – 2

Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work 01 11 00–1 – 7
Section 01 14 00 Work Restriction 01 14 00–1 – 7
Section 01 26 00 Contract Modifications Procedures 01 26 00–1 – 3
Section 01 31 10 Project Coordination 01 31 10–1 – 2
Section 01 31 20 Mechanical and Electrical Coordination 01 31 20–1 – 3
Section 01 31 30 Project Meetings 01 31 30–1 – 4
Section 01 31 40 Construction Photographs 01 31 40–1 – 2
Section 01 32 30 Construction Schedule & Progress Monitoring 01 32 30 –1– 7
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00–1–19
Section 01 33 30 Shop Drawings, Record Documents & As-Built Drawings 01 33 30–1 – 5
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 40 00–1–12
Section 01 40 10 Regulatory Requirements 01 40 10–1 – 2
Section 01 40 60 Reference and Standards 01 40 60–1 – 7
Section 01 41 00 Mock-Ups 01 41 00–1 – 2
Section 01 45 80 Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 80–1 – 4
Section 01 50 50 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 50 50–1 – 10
Section 01 51 70 Temporary Telecommunications 01 51 70–1 – 2
Section 01 52 10 Field Offices and Sheds 01 52 10–1– 20
Section 01 54 00 Construction Aids 01 54 00–1 – 6
Section 01 55 00 Vehicular Access & Parking 01 55 00–1 – 2
Section 01 55 50 Traffic Control 01 55 50–1 – 7
Section 01 56 20 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 01 56 20–1 – 2
Section 01 58 00 Project Identification 01 58 00–1 – 2
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 60 00–1 – 4
Section 01 63 00 Substitutions and Approved Equal 01 63 00–1 – 3
Section 01 72 00 Project Record Documents 01 72 00–1 – 3
Section 01 73 50 Safety 01 73 50 –1– 13
Section 01 74 20 Cleaning 01 74 20–1 – 3
Section 01 74 50 Cutting and Patching 01 74 50–1 – 3
Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 01 78 00–1 – 4
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-i

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
Section 01 88 70 Product Warranties/Guarantees 01 88 70–1 – 4

Section 01 91 00 Final Cleaning 01 91 00–1 – 2
Section 01 91 13 Commissioning 01 91 13–1 – 6
Section 01 92 00 Closeout Procedures 01 92 00–1 – 3
Section 01 93 00 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 93 00–1 – 3
Section 01 94 00 Maintenance Period Duties 01 94 00–1 – 3
DIVISION 2 – EXISITING CONDITIONS
Section 02 02 00 Site Preparation 02 02 00 –1 – 3

Section 02 30 00 Subsurface Investigation 02 30 00 –1 – 52
Section 02 41 00 Demolition 02 41 00 –1 – 2
Section 02 52 18 Hydrogen Sulphide Treatment 02 52 18 –1 – 3
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03 10 00 – 1 – 10

Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 00 – 1 – 7
Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 – 1 – 33
Section 03 41 00 Structural Precast Concrete 03 41 00 – 1 – 17
Section 03 52 00 Lightweight Concrete Fill 03 52 00 – 1 – 4
Section 03 53 05 Concrete Screed 03 53 05 – 1 – 6
Section 03 54 00 Self Leveling Screed 03 54 00 – 1 – 3
Section 03 60 00 Grouting 03 60 00 – 1 – 4
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 – 1 – 13
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 12 00 – 1 – 10

Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00 – 1 – 9
Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 – 1 – 8
Section 05 52 13 Pipe & Tube Railings 05 52 13 – 1 – 9
Section 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings 05 73 00 – 1 – 4
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-ii

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 05 24 Decorative Plastic Laminate Finishes 06 05 24 – 1 – 5

Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 – 1 – 6
Section 06 40 00 Architectural Woodworks 06 40 00 – 1 – 6
DIVISION 7– THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Damp-proofing 07 11 13 – 1 – 4

Section 07 13 13 Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 07 13 13 – 1 – 7
Section 07 13 54 Thermoplastic (PVC) Sheet Waterproofing 07 13 54 – 1 – 9
Section 07 14 00 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07 14 00 – 1 – 8
Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 – 1 – 9
Section 07 24 20 External Insulated Finishing System (EIFS) 07 24 20 – 1 – 13
Section 07 46 40 WPC Wall Cladding 07 46 40 – 1 – 5
Section 07 55 00 Composite Roofing System 07 55 00 – 1 – 8
Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 07 62 00 – 1 – 5
Section 07 84 00 Fire Stopping 07 84 00 – 1 – 11
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 0 0 –1 – 14
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
Section 08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 00 – 1 – 6

Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 – 1 – 6
Section 08 31 13 Access Doors and Panels 08 31 13 – 1 – 4
Section 08 42 27 Interior Glass Partition 08 42 27 – 1 – 4
Section 08 42 29 Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors 08 42 29 – 1 – 8
Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall 08 44 13 – 1 – 12
Section 08 51 13 Aluminium Doors & Windows 08 51 13 – 1 – 7
Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 71 00 – 1 – 23
Section 08 80 00 Glass and Glazing 08 80 00 – 1 – 9
Section 08 81 13 Decorative Glass 08 81 13 – 1 – 4
Section 08 91 00 Louvers 08 91 00 – 1 – 5
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-iii

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 – 1 – 8

Section 09 22 16 Non Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 – 1 – 7
Section 09 24 00 Cement Plaster 09 24 00 – 1 – 6
Section 09 30 00 Tiling 09 30 00 – 1 – 10
Section 09 65 16 Rubber Sheet Flooring 09 65 16 – 1 – 8
Section 09 65 19 Resilient Flooring 09 65 19 – 1 – 7
Section 09 65 66 Resilient Sport Flooring 09 65 66 – 1 – 7
Section 09 67 00 Epoxy Coating 09 67 00 – 1 – 5
Section 09 68 00 Carpeting 09 68 00– 1 – 7
Section 09 91 00 Painting 09 91 00 – 1 – 11
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10 14 53 Traffic Signs 10 14 53 – 1 – 4

Section 10 26 13 Corner Guards and Crash Railings 10 26 13 – 1 – 2
Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 28 00 – 1 – 27
Section 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 10 44 13 – 1 – 6
Section 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 10 44 16 – 1 – 5
DIVISION 12 – FURNITURE & FURNISHINGS
Section 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 24 13 – 1 – 8

Section 12 36 62 Solid Polymer Vanity Counter Tops 12 36 62 – 1 – 7
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-iv

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14 00 00 Conveying Equipment 14 00 00 – 1 – 16

Section 14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevators 14 21 23 – 1 – 35
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPRESSION
Section 21 00 00 Fire Suppression 21 00 00 – 1 – 9

Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 00 – 1 – 18
Section 21 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Fire Suppression Piping 21 05 16 – 1 – 3
Section 21 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping 21 05 23 – 1 – 8
Section 21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 21 05 29 – 1 – 12
Section 21 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Fire Suppression Piping
and Equipment 21 05 48 – 1 – 7
Section 21 05 53 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 21 05 53 – 1 – 5
Section 21 12 00 Fire Suppression Standpipes 21 12 00 – 1 – 5
Section 21 13 13 Wet-pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13 – 1 – 9
Section 21 13 39 Foam-Water Systems 21 13 39 – 1 – 10
Section 21 22 00 Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing Systems 21 22 00 – 1 – 11
Section 21 30 00 Fire Pumps 21 30 00 – 1 – 11
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
Section 22 00 00 Plumbing 22 00 00 – 1 – 8
Section 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 00 – 1 – 10
Section 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 22 05 16 – 1 – 5
Section 22 05 19 Meter and Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19 – 1 – 6
Section 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 – 1 – 7
Section 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 29 – 1 – 12
Section 22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 48 – 1 – 4
Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 – 1 – 6
Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 – 1 – 6
Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 16 – 1 – 13
Section 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19 – 1 – 6
Section 22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 23 – 1 – 6
Section 22 12 00 Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks 22 12 00 – 1 – 11
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-v

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
Section 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16 – 1 – 10

Section 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19 – 1 – 9
Section 22 13 29 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps 22 13 19 – 1 – 4
Section 22 14 13 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 13 – 1 – 8
Section 22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 23 – 1 – 5
Section 22 14 29 Sump Pumps 22 14 29 – 1 – 4
Section 22 32 00 Domestic Water Filtration Equipment 22 32 00 – 1 – 5
Section 22 33 00 Electric Water Heaters 22 33 00 – 1 – 5
Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 40 00 – 1 – 8
Section 22 60 00 Medical Gas Systems 22 60 00 – 1 – 25
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 00 00 – 1 – 17

Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 00 – 1 – 6
Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13 – 1 – 15
Section 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 23 05 16 – 1 – 4
Section 23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 23 05 19 – 1 – 6
Section 23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 05 23 – 1 – 8
Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 29 – 1 – 10
Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Noise Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 – 1 – 8
Section 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 – 1 – 6
Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 – 1 – 13
Section 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 13 – 1 – 7
Section 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation 23 07 16 – 1 – 5
Section 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 07 19 – 1 – 6
Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 08 00 – 1 – 7
Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 00 – 1 – 15
Section 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC 23 09 23 – 1 – 14
Section 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 23 21 13 – 1 – 15
Section 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties 23 21 16 – 1 – 7
Section 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps 23 21 23 – 1 – 7
Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00 – 1 – 8
Section 23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment 23 25 00 – 1 – 7
Section 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 31 00 – 1 – 9
Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00 – 1 – 7
Section 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 34 00 – 1 – 13
Section 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23 – 1 – 8
Section 23 34 33 Air Curtains 23 34 33 – 1 – 5
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-vi

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 36 00 – 1 – 7

Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 – 1 – 6
Section 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 40 00 – 1 – 8
Section 23 57 00 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 23 57 00 – 1 – 6
Section 23 64 26 Air Cooled Liquid Chillers (Glycol) 23 64 26 – 1 – 14
Section 23 71 19 Ice Thermal Storage 23 71 19 – 1 – 8
Section 23 72 00 Energy Recovery Equipment 23 72 00 – 1 – 9
Section 23 74 13 Air Handling Units 23 73 13 – 1 – 12
Section 23 81 23 Computer-Room Air-Conditioner 23 81 23 – 1 – 11
Section 23 82 16 Air Coils 23 82 16 – 1 – 4
Section 23 82 19 Fan Coil Units 23 82 19 – 1 – 5
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls 25 50 00 – 1 – 44
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 00 General Provision for Electrical Installation 26 00 00-1 – 18

Section 26 00 50 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 00 50-1 – 3
Section 26 05 19 Wires and Cables 26 05 19-1 – 14
Section 26 05 26 Earthing System (Grounding and Bonding) 26 05 26-1 – 5
Section 26 05 33 Conduits (Raceway and Boxes) 26 05 33-1 – 8
Section 26 05 33.23 Surface Metallic Raceway System 26 05 33.23-1 – 3
Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays 26 05 36-1 – 4
Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 – 5
Section 26 09 13 Power Management System 26 09 13-1 – 8
Section 26 09 43 Smart Lighting Control System 26 09 43-1 – 12
Section 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 13-1 – 13
Section 26 25 00 Busway 26 25 00-1 – 7
Section 26 27 16 Distribution Boards 26 27 16-1 – 5
Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 – 6
Section 26 28 00 Switches, Disconnectors and Fuse-Combination Units 26 28 00-1 – 4
Section 26 32 13 Diesel Generator Set 26 32 13-1 – 21
Section 26 33 23 Central Battery System 26 33 23-1 – 5
Section 26 33 53 Uninterruptible Power System 26 33 53-1 – 17
Section 26 33 56 Rack Mount Uninterruptible Power Supply System 26 33 56-1 – 6
Section 26 35 13 Capacitor Banks 26 35 13-1 – 29
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-vii

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
Section 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 36 23-1 – 10

Section 26 41 00 Lightning Protection System 26 41 00-1 – 10
Section 26 50 00 Lighting 26 50 00-1 – 32
Section 26 60 90 Electrical BMS Points Schedule Summary 26 60 90-1 – 3
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling System (Category 6A) 27 10 00-1 – 35

Section 27 20 00 Active System Equipment 27 20 00-1 – 17
Section 27 26 00 Integrated Services 27 26 00-1 – 57
Section 27 31 23 Internet Protocol Voice Switches (IP-PABX) 27 31 23-1 – 19
Section 27 41 00 Audio Visual System 27 41 00-1 – 44
Section 27 41 36 IP TV System 27 41 36-1 – 17
Section 27 51 16 Public Address System 27 51 16-1 – 25
Section 27 52 23 Nurse Call System 27 52 23-1 – 22
Section 27 53 13 IP Clock System 27 53 13-1 – 5
Section 27 53 22 Queue Management System 27 53 22-1 – 4
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Section 28 00 00 Security System, Alarm System and Access Control System 28 00 00-1 – 36
Section 28 31 11 Fire Alarm and Detection System 28 31 11-1 – 17
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKS
Section 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 11 00– 1 – 6

Section 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 31 23 00– 1 – 10
Section 31 23 19 Dewatering 31 23 19– 1 – 16
Section 31 23 20 Landscape Excavating and Backfilling 31 23 20– 1 – 2
Section 31 23 33 Trench Excavation 31 23 33– 1 – 34
Section 31 31 16 Termite Control 31 31 16– 1 – 3
Section 31 41 00 Earthwork Support Shoring 31 41 00– 1 – 3
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-viii

20th October 2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO.
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 01 95 Landscape Maintenance 32 01 95– 1 – 11

Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16– 1 – 6
Section 32 14 13 Precast Concrete Unit Paving 32 14 13– 1 – 6
Section 32 15 00 Aggregate Surfacing 32 15 00– 1 – 8
Section 32 16 14 Precast Concrete Kerbs 32 16 14– 1 – 3
Section 32 17 23 Roadway and Parking Marking 32 17 23– 1 – 2
Section 32 18 16.13 Playground Surface 32 18 16.13– 1 – 3
Section 32 33 00 Site Furnishing 32 33 00– 1 –9
Section 32 39 13 Metal Bollards 32 39 13– 1 – 4
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation 32 80 00– 1 – 27
Section 32 90 00 Planting Procedures and Materials 32 90 00– 1 – 7
Section 32 91 00 Landscape Works 32 91 00– 1 – 5
Section 32 91 01 Soil Preparation and Soil Mixes 32 91 01– 1 – 5
Section 32 93 00 Plants 32 93 00– 1 – 7
Section 32 93 01 Plant Procurement and Delivery 32 93 01– 1 – 5
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Section 33 31 01 Reinforced/Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings 33 31 01– 1 – 8

Section 33 31 02 HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings 33 31 02– 1 – 8
Section 33 31 03 Polymer Concrete Pipes 33 31 03– 1 – 9
Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities 33 40 00– 1 – 23
Section 33 46 22 Geotextile Filter Fabric 33 46 22– 1 – 2
Section 33 49 16 Storm Drainage Manholes 33 49 16– 1 – 6
Section 33 52 13 Liquid Fuel Distribution System 33 52 13– 1 – 9
Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-ix

20th October 2021
DOCUMENTIII-1: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following General Specifications are necessary while executing the project. They are considered to
be valid without any reference. These Specifications are to provide overall guidance in the execution of
the works and shall apply except otherwise contradicted by the Particular Specifications.
1. For Road, Parking (Asphalt & Concrete Road), Traffic Markings & Signs and Site works
(Stormwater & Sanitary Sewer, Landscape & Irrigation, Fencing works etc.) The GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS FOR KUWAIT ROADS AND HIGHWAYS of the Ministry of Public Works,
Road Administration, of the State of Kuwait in the year 2012.
2. Similarly for “Fresh Water Networks”, and “Electrical Works” and other related works the
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER WORKS and GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS as issued by the Ministry of Electricity and Water of the State of Kuwait.
3. For Fire Fighting and Fire Protection Works including the requirements of Fire Doors, the
Specifications and Regulation of the KUWAIT FIRE FORCE (KFF) shall be followed when
applicable and otherwise is not provided.
4. For Telephone Works, the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS of Ministry of

Communications shall be followed when applicable and otherwise is not provided.
5. For Fuel Distribution System, the SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS of the Kuwait
National Petroleum Corporation (KNPC) shall be followed when applicable and otherwise is not
provided.
6. Specifications and Regulations of other Ministries and Statutory Authorities of the State of
Kuwait shall also be taken into account where appropriate, which may be including but not
limited to the followings:
(i) Ministry of Public Health Instructions regarding labour protection against climatic
conditions.
(ii) Ministry of Public Health Regulations regarding provision and preparation of food on
contract.
(iii) Special Conditions for Public Services, Safety Regulations for Individuals, Properties
and Public Utilities.
(iv) Special Conditions and Tendering Rules of the Central Agency for Public Tenders, of
the State of Kuwait.
7. The Particular Specifications shall take precedence over General Specifications wherever there
is a conflict between the two Documents.
8. Notwithstanding anything herein the Contractor shall be responsible for complying in all
respects with such By-Laws and Regulations as may be in force at the time of execution of the
works. Such references shall in every case be deemed to include latest edition or issue of such
standards and bye-laws including all revisions issued up to the date of signing of the contract.
Gulf Consult General Specifications Page III-1/1

20th October 2021
Division 1
General Requirements
SECTION 01 10 09
SPECIAL NOTES, PRIORITY OF DOCUMENTS ETC.
1. For any works not covered by this Particular Specifications, The General Specifications
alongwith Laws, Bye-Laws, Rules and Regulations issued by the various Ministries and Statutory
Authorities having jurisdictions shall apply.
It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to ascertain the names of all the Ministries and Authorities
having jurisdictions, the details of their applicable statutes, and the methods to ensure
compliance with them in consonance with other Tender/Contract Documents.
In absence of Statutory Authorities Specifications, requisite Standard Specifications (following

local and international codes and standards) shall apply. In such case, the Contractor shall
provide the material specifications for Engineer’s approval before procurement, fabrication or
installation.
2. Priority of the Documents:
The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another. For
the purpose of interpretation, the priority of the documents shall be in accordance the conditions
of contract.
If an ambiguity or discrepancy is found in the documents the Engineer shall issue any necessary
clarification or instruction. In this regard the Engineer’s decision shall be considered as final.
Also, if any ambiguity or discrepancy is found inside the above prioritized documents; For
example say in Document III - 3 : Drawings : Ambiguities found between plans/sections/detail
drawings and Finishing Schedule; in this case, the Engineer has the right to insist on the costliest
interpretation to which a reading of the Contract Documents can lead. This will follow for all
documents.
3. Study of the Tender Documents:
The Contractor shall carefully study, review and compare the documents with each other and
with information provided in the Tender. In case of any inconsistencies, ambiguities or
discrepancies, missing information, typing/spelling errors etc. in the Tender drawings,
Specifications, Bills of Quantities and other Contract Documents, and if the Contractor has any
doubt regarding the meaning and intent of the contract in respect of the work in whatsoever
nature, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer during tendering period or in the Pre-tender
meeting(s), the Engineer who shall then take measure for correction, adjustment or explanation
as may be necessary. If the Contractor does not inform such inconsistencies during tendering
period or at the latest before signing of the Contract the contractor shall abide by the decision of
the Engineer in this regard and shall bear any attributed cost for correction and rectification of
such inconsistencies as may be necessary. If the contractor performs any construction activity
after awarding the contract knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in
the contract documents the contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such
inconsistencies and performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributed cost for
correction and execution
4. The Contractor shall take approvals from all the Concerned Authorities having
jurisdication prior to commencing their construction/execution works.
Gulf Consult Special Notes, Priority of Documents etc. III-2/01 10 09-1

20th October 2021
5. The Contractor shall also take the approval of Kuwait Environment Public Authority(KEPA) prior
to commencing their construction/execution works. The Contractor shall perform all the Tests
required as per KEPA for the water which is obtained from Dewatering before and make sure that
it can be discharged into the sea, all as per the KEPA requirements.
6. Other Imporatnt Issues to be taken into consideration:

 Curing Material: Only water shall be used for curing
 Hot Weather : A shade Temperature of 42° C and above is defined as Hot
weather.
 Readymix concrete shall be wet and not dry when it leaves the readymix plant.
7. The Date of Enterprise shall be the Date on which the Contactor obtains the
possession of Site from the Employer.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Special Notes, Priority of Documents etc. III-2/01 10 09-2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF THE WORKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Summary
B. Location of the Site
C. Works performed under this Contract
D. Construction Sequence
E. Standards
F. Abbreviations and Symbols
G. Samples of Work
H. Contract
I. Inspection and Investigation of Site
J. Contractor use of Site and Premises
K. Work Performed under other Contracts
L. Existing Services
M. Protection of Existing Utilities, Services and Adjacent Properties
N. Authorities Approval
O. Special Conditions
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Division 1 of this specification identifies the project and provides a general description
of the work covered by the contract documents, the work scheduled to be done by
other Contractors, the referenced standards used in specifying the work and other
general matters including coordination, attendance, material substitutes and
approved equal requirements for testing work and materials and providing plant.
B. Specifications given in Division 1 shall apply to all other Divisions (Division 2 to 49)
unless otherwise stated.
C. In examining the requirements of any section of the Specifications, the Contractor

shall examine all other sections of the Specifications and the other Documents and
Drawings, which affect the work of that section.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying in all respects with Reference,
Codes standards such as (ACI, ASTM, ANSI, BS, NFPA, ASHRAE, KFF etc.)
mentioned in all divisions of the specifications. These references codes and
Gulf Consult Summary of the Works III-2/01 11 00 - 1

20th October 2021
standards shall in every case be deemed to include latest edition or issue of such
standards including all revisions up to the date of signing of the Contract.
E. The manufacturers and sub-contractors once approved by the Engineer cannot be

changed without the Engineer’s approval.
F. The term “Owner” where used in the specification shall also be understood to mean
the “Employer / Engineer” as used elsewhere within the documents.
1.03 LOCATION OF THE SITE
A. Genetic Research Center is located in the area of Al Amiri Hospital Campus. The
location is as shown on the drawings.
B. The project is composed of Basement, Ground, First, Second and Third Floors.
1.04 WORKS PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT
This Contract comprises of but not limited to, as briefly detailed below:
A. The work under this Contract comprises of construction, completion, handing-over

and maintenance of Genetic Research Center, as detailed and described in the
Drawings, Specifications, Bills of Quantities and other Tender/Contract Documents, all
related to this Contract. All the Contract Documents shall be complementary to each
other in defining the scope of the Work.
1. Building works complete (Civil, Mechanical, Electrical), all as detailed in the

Tender Documents.
2. External Works (Hard & Soft Landscape) and services, surface parking,
roads, utilities within and outside the boundary, all as shown on the drawings.
3. Surface parking
4. Demolition Works
5. Contractor shall investigate and execute all the works required to demolish, in
order to complete the contract in all aspects.
6. The Contractor shall take over the Site and Site Coordinates from the Kuwait
Municipality / Employer as the case may be.
7. Furniture, Medical Equipment, Medical Furniture are Not in Contract (NIC).
8. Document III-7 – Technical Requirements (Medical Equipment details,

specifications) is included in the Tender Document. This Document is for
information and coordination only.
9. A complete picture of the works shall, however, be obtained from a study of

all the tender documents taken together.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE
A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the complete description of the project

construction method statement and development of the schedule of work. The
contractor is also responsible for the sequence of work and interface between
different tasks during construction.

20th October 2021
1.06 STANDARDS
A. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Contract

Documents shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment or
revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of submission of Tender
Documents. The Contractor shall have a copy of the latest edition of all codes,
standards and technical literature referenced in the Contract Documents kept on the
Site, maintained in good order and available to the Engineer and his Representative
at all times. Within 15 days from the date of signing the Contract, the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative adequate proof that the
referenced codes, standards specifications etc. have been ordered or are in the
Contractor’s possession and available for use on site. Failure to provide this proof
within the said 15 days or to have the codes etc. on site within 30 days from the Date
of Enterprise shall entitle the Engineer to purchase the referenced codes, standards,
specifications and the like and the costs will be recovered from the Contractor.
1.07 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
A. Reference to any Technical Society, Institution, Association, or Government Authority

is referred to in the Specifications in accordance with internationally recognized
abbreviations.
1.08 SAMPLES OF WORK
A. Reasonable samples of all work shall be executed on Site for the approval of the
Engineer or Engineer’s Representative all at the expense of the Contractor. All
materials and workmanship thereafter shall conform fully to the approved samples.
See “Sample and Mock-up” in the individual Specifications Sections.
1.09 CONTRACT
A. The object of this contract is to construct, equip, handing over and maintain the
Project as described specified in the Drawings, Specification, Bills of Quantities and
all other Contract Documents.
B. The Particular Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the other Contract
Documents. Specifications given in one Division shall apply to other Divisions unless
otherwise stated.
C. Not with standing anything contained herein, the contractor shall be responsible for
complying in all respects with such Bylaws and Regulations as may be in force at the
time of execution of the Works.
D. The Contractor shall provide and do everything necessary for the proper execution of
the Works according to the intent and meaning of the Tender, Contract Documents
and Drawings, whether the same may or may not be particularly shown on the
Drawings or included in the Documents provided that the same is reasonable to be
inferred there from.
E. The Works shall be completed in strict accordance with the Documents and Drawings
and any further drawings or instructions issued or approved by the Engineer during
the execution of the Works.
F. The work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is not necessarily limited
to, the furnishing of all supervision, labor, materials, temporary works, false-work,
plant, machinery, equipment, parts, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities ,
construction facilities, incidentals and logistic support necessary for the performance
and maintenance of the Works, accomplishing the same in a workmanlike manner.

20th October 2021
G. All work shall be executed by skilled tradesman who shall be thoroughly acquainted
with all aspects of their trade including any special local customs and modes of
operation.
H. The Contractor shall be deemed to have based his tender on the information in
respect of hydrological, Physical and climatic conditions of the site and have
inspected the site and its surroundings and satisfied himself before submitting his
tender. The Engineer and any person authorized by him shall at all times have
access to the works and to the site and to all workshops and places where work is
being obtained for the works.
I. The Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all the existing
conditions of the site and include for all the requirements required to complete this
Contract in his Tender Price.
J. If any work/s are not shown on the drawings, and not measured in the Bills of Quantities,
but are required to be executed in order to complete the Contract in all respects, these
shall be executed, and the price of these works shall be included in the Tender Price.
1.10 INSPECTION AND INVESTIGATION OF SITE
A. Soil Investigation Report is included in the Tender Documents. This Report is

intended to be indicative only of the conditions of various points within the contract
area, and the Employer does not guarantee the accuracy of the data in the Report,
nor does he guarantee it is typical of the ground conditions likely to be encountered. It
is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the accuracy of this report and include its
cost in the Tender Price.
B. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of the ground and sub-
soil, the quantities and nature of the works and materials, tools and equipment
necessary for the Completion of the Works.
C. The information and details given on the Drawings are not guaranteed to be accurate
or correct and are given for guidance in compiling the tender. The contractor shall
make his own investigations and inquiries of the various Government, Ministries, and
other Authorities to ascertain the exact positions, sizes, numbers, and details of all
obstacles to be encountered.
D. The rates given in the Bills of Quantities by the tenderers shall include for all costs
involved in the negotiating obstacles and no claim will be considered for additional
expenses the contractor may incur on account of any unforeseen obstacle of
whatever nature.
E. Any excavations needed to determine the exact location and levels of obstacles shall
be done by the Contractor, and shall be deemed to be included as part of the rates
for related work in the Bills of Quantities.
F. The Contractor shall take full responsibility of the coordination to fit his work with
other constructions and utilities on the same site.
G. The elevations and co-ordinates used in the Drawings are not related to Municipality
or any other system but have been defined for the purpose of this Project only.
H. The Contractor shall obtain all further information required as to the risk ,
contingencies and other circumstances, which may influence or affect the execution
of the Works and include the costs thereof in his Tender.

20th October 2021
1.11 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Access to the Site shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement and
maintained by the contractor who shall be responsible for all damage resulting from
the use of this access.
B. All construction operations and site establishment facilities shall be confined to within
the Site Boundaries unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding all structures and the like in the
vicinity of the Site. Also he shall ascertain from the Public utility Authorities positions
of all existing underground services; maintain and protect or divert as required.
D. The Contractor shall have full possession of the Site at the location of the works only,
and be responsible for arranging his own working space, the storage of materials,
setting of all temporary accommodation, etc.; locations are to be agreed with the
Engineer. No claim whatsoever will be entertained for any reason regarding the
setting or location of any working space regardless of the distance.
1.12 WORK PERFORMED UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Co-operate fully with other separate contractors engaged by the Employer, within and
outside the site boundaries, so that work under those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying the work under this contract. This
Contractor shall include for all the Coordination with the other Contractors employed
by the Employer.
1.13 EXISTING SERVICES
A. The contractor shall notify the various Ministries, Establishments, and Departments
which have certain services at the Site of Works, at least two weeks before any works
are carried out, near, above or under the services of these Ministries and
Establishments. The Contractor shall submit a detailed program of each area on
which the work shall be commenced and the anticipated date of commencement in
addition to a report, signed by the Engineer, to the Engineer of the respective
Ministry/Establishment to whom the services belong and the Contractor's
representative, confirming this Notice of intent.
B. It should be noted that the contractor shall not be allowed to work in any area where
services are still covered and the Engineer shall have the right to stop the work in any
part of the Works where the contractor fails to take the necessary measures to
uncover or protect the services and the Contractor shall not claim for compensation in
time or money.
C. The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the current Regulations and
Specifications of Public Utilities Authorities before commencing any works adjacent
with equipment, plant, cables, etc. The above requirement will not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility for taking every precaution to avoid damage to
equipment, plant, cables, etc. and he will be held responsible for the cost or repair of
all damage in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Specifications.
Payment for complying with the above requirements will be deemed to have been
included in the rate for Works included in Bills of Quantities.
D. The contractor shall include for rerouting, diverting the service required as approved
by the engineer in the Tender price.

20th October 2021
1.14 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES, SERVICES AND ADJACENT PROPERTIES
A. During construction, the Contractor shall provide all protection for existing utilities,
services, and adjacent properties as may be required for his construction operations,
including protection for the construction of detours and diversions, as directed by the
Engineer and as required by the Contract Documents.
B. In addition to the requirements as specified in the other Contract Documents, the

Contractor shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Use of all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to

maintain the existing utilities, services, adjacent properties, buildings etc.,
and appurtenances. In particular, the Contractor shall take adequate
measures to prevent undermining of utilities and services whether they are
presently in service or not.
2. Protect existing or new utilities and services when considering necessary and
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for bracing and
supporting utilities and services to prevent settlement, displacement, or
damage to the same .The protection of utilities and services as specified
herein will not be paid for separately but shall be included in contractor's
Contract Price.
3. The Contractor shall recover, remove, or abandon redundant utility and

service lines as required by the Contract Documents and/or as directed by
the Engineer.
4. The contractor shall not remove any utility or service line, conduit or structure
until he has received written permission from the Engineer.
5. The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the Works, afford
facilities to properly accredited agents of any Authority for access to all or any
of their apparatus situated in or under the Site, as may be necessary for
inspecting, reporting, maintain, removing, renewing or altering such
apparatus in connection with the construction of the Works or for any other
purpose whatsoever.
6. Prior to commencing construction and subsequent to the Contractor's

determination of the location of the existing utility and service lines and the
condition of the adjacent areas, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer for his review shop drawings complete with the description of
procedure and materials and related data of the Contractor's proposed
method of protection for the said lines. Review, comments, and approval by
the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the full responsibility for
all protection and precautions required during the Works.
7. All cost for the above requirements shall be included in the contractor’s
tender price.
1.15 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the relevant authorities approval.
B. The Contractor shall observe and comply with all statutory obligations, by laws, rules
and regulations prevailing at the Date of Tender and shall allow for all costs incurred.
C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately if the statutory obligations
conflict with other requirements of the Contract Documents.

20th October 2021
D. The Contractor shall provide for any Governmental inspections as required and
applicable fees therefore during various phases of works.
E. During Construction, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, copies of all
Certificates of Approval, Permits of Licenses from the Authorities having jurisdiction.
F. The Contractor shall pay any fees, taxes or levies as required by the Authorities for
permits and connections. The Contractor shall include the details and costs as levied
by the Authorities in its monthly statements, for reimbursement by the Employer.
G. For temporary facilities, utilities and the like, all costs, including any fees for permits
licenses etc. shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.16 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. The plans and specifications form a guide for a complete installation/execution of the
Contract. Any item/s reasonably necessary to complete the Contract shall therefore
be furnished even if such item/s is not specifically noted in the plans or tender
documents.
B. Any ambiguity, repetition, similarity or confusion shall be clarified by the Engineer in

response to queries raised by the tenderer during the Tender Period.
C. Should the Contractor not solicit clarifications and/or interpretation before tender date
this shall signify full and correct understanding of the tender documents by the
Contractor. Further interpretation or clarification during the contract shall be left to the
Engineer who shall have the right to insist on the costliest interpretation to which a
reading of the contract documents can lead.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. The Contractor shall not use the Site for any purpose other than carrying out the Works.
B. Access to the Site shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement. The
Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure the safety of all authorized persons.
In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from the use of
the agreed access.
C. All construction operations and Site establishment facilities shall be confined to within
the Site boundaries as shown on the Drawings unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for safeguarding all structures and the
likes in the vicinity of his work and the Site.
D. Should any work performed under the Contract expose previously unknown or
unforeseen conditions whose presence could cause additional construction cost or
endanger the Project in any way, such work shall be stopped and the matter reported
immediately to the Engineer, for instruction. However, the Contractor shall immediately
use measures or methods necessary to ensure safety and prevent any threatened or
further damage, injury or loss.
E. The Contractor shall have possession of the Site at the location of the Works only and
be subject to the rights and obligations of other contractors and shall be responsible for
arranging his own working space, the storage of materials, locating all temporary
accommodations, utilities and other logistical issues at locations to be agreed with
the Engineer. No claim whatsoever will be entertained for any reason regarding the
location, allocation or relocation of any working space regardless of the distance.
F. The Contractor shall perform his Works in a manner as not to cause danger,
inconvenience, or difficulties road users, private and public vehicles, in and around the
Site.
G. The Contractor shall ensure that his activities are conducted not to interfere with
vehicular traffic. Lights, markers, notices, traffic management systems and other such
provisions shall be exhibited at all times and places as required by the Employer,
Municipality, Works departments, Traffic Police etc. and in accordance with relevant
regulations.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for consulting regularly through the Engineer with
the relevant authorities to confirm that his method of working is not such as to
impede in any way vehicular road traffic and for modifying his method of working if
any operations or activities are adversely affected by his activities. On the instruction
of the Engineer, the Contractor shall promptly remove any vehicle or equipment and
plant within his control that may be causing obstruction to the use of the existing
facilities by others.
1.02 INSPECTION AND INVESTIGATION OF SITE
A. The elevations of the Site indicated in the Drawings shall be verified by the Contractor.
No guarantee be given to the Contractor that the elevation details shown on the
Drawings are accurate.
B. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the Site and its surroundings and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of the ground and sub-
soil, the quantities and nature of the Works and materials, tools and equipment
necessary for the completion of the Works.
Gulf Consult Work Restrictions III-2/01 14 00 - 1

20th October 2021
C. The information and details given on the Drawings regarding obstacles are not
guaranteed to be accurate or correct and are given only for guidance in compiling and
submitting a Tender. The Contractor shall make his own investigations and inquiries of
the Municipality, other authorities and utility companies to ascertain the exact
positions, sizes, numbers and details of all obstacles to be encountered.
D. The Contractor’s Tender Sum shall include for all costs involved in negotiating
obstacles. In addition, no claim of any kind will be considered for additional expenses
the Contractor may incur on account of any unforeseen obstacle of whatever nature,
over and above those which would have been incurred had the existence of the
obstacle been known at the time of preparing the Tender Drawings.
E. The Contractor shall obtain all further information required as to the risks,
contingencies and other circumstances, which may influence or affect the execution
of the Works and include the costs thereof in his Tender.
1.03 EXISTING SERVICES

A. The extent, position, size and type of public utilities shown on the Drawings have
been based on information extracted from the records of the various public utilities,
Ministries and the Project survey and must be regarded as approximate and
indicative only. The Contractor shall refer to the record of preliminary utility
drawings that are available with the Employer. The Contractor shall note that these
records do not normally identify smaller branches of utilities. The Contractor shall
be responsible to obtain and/or renew any other No Objection Certificates as
required from various authorities to perform the Works in a timely manner. The
Contractor shall ascertain from the public utility authorities positions of all existing
underground services and he shall maintain and protect or divert as required.
B. Any information provided by the Employer as to the whereabouts of services is
believed to be correct but no warranty is given as to the accuracy or completeness of
that information.
C. The Contractor shall contact the government and/or semi-government and/or private
utility authorities to determine the exact locations of the services which may affect or be
affected by the Contractor’s works.
D. Locations of services shown on the drawings are for guidance only and do not
necessarily show the exact locations, depths and spacing, nor the smaller branches of
services which are not normally indicated on such drawings. The Contractor shall
uncover and verify locations of all services and be in accordance with any special
requirements of the Municipality and/or the utility authorities concerned.
E. The Contractor shall not be allowed to work in any area where services are still
covered and the Engineer shall have the right to stop the work in any part of the Works
where the Contractor fails to take the necessary measures to uncover these services
and the Employer shall not entertain any claims from the Contractor resulting from
such instruction.
F. The Contractor shall, before using mechanical plant in the vicinity of existing services,
carry out full and adequate preliminary investigations by means of hand-dug trial holes
and the like, to verify the location of existing services.
G. All drains, pipes and cables, whether above or below ground, that are encountered during
the course of the work shall be left in position and be carefully supported and guarded
from damage by the Contractor shall the satisfaction of the Employer and the authorities
so that such drains, pipes and cables may continue in use until completion of the Works
or until no longer required.
H. The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the current regulations and
specifications of utilities authorities before commencing any works adjacent to
equipment, plant, cables, pipelines, etc. The above requirement will not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility for taking every precaution to avoid damage to

20th October 2021
equipment, plant, cables, pipelines, etc. and he will be held responsible for the cost or
repair of all damage in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Specification.
Payment for complying with the above requirements will be deemed to have been
included in the Contract Sum.
1.04 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND SERVICES

A. During construction the Contractor shall provide all protection for existing utilities and
services as may be required for his construction operations, including protection for the
construction of detours and diversions, as indicated on the Drawings, as directed by
the Engineer and as required by the Contract Documents.
B. Permanent protection of certain items shall be as included under other sections of the
Specification. In addition to the requirements as specified elsewhere, the Contractor
shall comply with the following explicit minimum requirements: Use of all necessary
precautionary and protective measures required to maintain existing utilities, services
and appurtenances. In particular, the Contractor shall take adequate measures to
prevent undermining of utilities and services, whether they are presently in service or
not.
1. Protect existing or new utilities and services when considered necessary
and directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
bracing and supporting utilities and services to prevent settlement,
displacement or damage to the same. The protection of utilities and services
as specified herein will not be paid for separately but shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum.
2. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for any diversion or removal
of existing services which he may require for his own convenience or because
of his proposed method of working and shall in all cases inform the Engineer
in advance of his proposals.
3. The Contractor shall recover, remove or abandon redundant utility and service
lines as required by the Drawings and Specification and/or as directed by the
Engineer.
4 The Contractor shall not remove any utility or service line, conduit or structure
until he has received written permission from the Engineer.
5. The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the Works, afford
facilities to properly accredited agents of any Authority for access to all or any
of their equipment situated in or under the Site, as may be necessary for
inspecting, reporting, maintaining, removing, renewing or altering such
equipment in connection with the construction of the Works or for any
other purpose whatsoever.
C. Prior to commencing construction and subsequent to the Contractor’s determination of
the location of the existing utility and service lines and the condition of the adjacent
areas, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for his review shop
drawings complete with the description of procedure and materials and related data
of the Contractor’s proposed method of protection for the said lines. Review,
comments and approval by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of the full responsibility for all protection of services and precautions required
during the Works.
1.05 DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITIES AND PROPERTIES

A. The Contractor shall provide, prior to commencement of work, a detailed video and
photographic survey of all existing structures within or immediately adjacent (twenty
(20) meters) to the limits of work. Further, the Contractor shall provide updates of this
survey every thirty (30) days for the duration of the Contract, as directed by the
Engineer.
B. These video reports will be used to monitor any damage that may occur to the
existing structures as a result of the execution of the Contract and for which the
Contractor shall be liable for repairing at his own cost, to the approval of the Employer.

20th October 2021
C. The Contractor shall exercise the greatest care during the execution of the Works to
avoid damage to or interference with any existing services and shall be responsible for
any such damage caused by him or his agents directly or arising indirectly from
anything done or omitted to be done. The Contractor shall carry out all temporary
works necessary to adequately support and protect any existing services.
D. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage may be caused by the operation of
mechanical plant over or adjacent to existing services, the Contractor will be
required to excavate by hand in their vicinity.
E. Any damage to mains or services shall be notified immediately to the Engineer.
F. In the event of any damage to utilities or properties as a result of work carried out by
the Contractor, his agents, employees, or by any sub-contractors or their agents, or
employees, the Contractor shall be responsible for indemnifying the Employer and
Engineer against such damages.
G. The Employer and/or the Engineer shall have the right, upon receiving any claims from
the party concerned in respect of such damages, to deduct the actual costs charged to
the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor without it being
necessary to serve a notice or warning or to take any legal action and the Contractor
shall not be entitled to object, refrain from or suspend the work on account of such
deduction.
H. In the event of any damage whatsoever to any existing or relocated utility and/or
service lines, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer, the Engineer and
the relevant utility or service Ministries, authorities or companies. The Contractor shall
co-operate with the Employer and the Engineer of such utility or service and take
whatever steps necessary to repair and restore such utility or service all in accordance
with the requirements of the Drawings and Specification. The decision of the
Employer and/or the Engineer regarding responsibility for any damage or
interruption of any utility or service shall be final.
I. The Employer may make such arrangements as in his opinion are necessary, whether
by employment of the Contractor or otherwise, to effect rapid repair of any service
which may be damaged in the execution of the Works. Such arrangement shall not
affect the extent of the liability of the Contractor in respect of such damage.
1.06 RESTRICTION ON USE OF HIGHWAY

A. The Contractor shall not make use of roads for depositing or storing plant, materials,
tools or implements other than such plant, materials, tools and implements as
may from time to time be required for immediate use on the Works. For which prior
written approval must first be obtained from the Engineer.
B. Plant, materials, tools implements and temporary works shall be placed in such a
way as to cause minimum interference with the use of any right of way by the
Employer or other parties and the Contractor shall maintain those parts of the roads not
temporarily occupied by the Works in a clean, passable and safe state at all times.
1.07 BLASTING
A. NOT ALLOWED
1.08 ADVERTISING
A. The Contractor shall not display or permit any signs, posters, or other advertising
on or about the premises without the prior written approval of the Engineer and the
Employer.
1.09 WORKING HOURS

A. The normal working hours of the Engineer are from 0800 to 1300 and 1400 to1700
hours on Saturdays through Thursdays.

20th October 2021
B. The Employer shall approve the starting and finishing times, lunch and tea breaks of
the day shift proposed by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall be allowed, subject to the prior approval of the Employer to work
in multiple shifts as necessary to meet the construction schedule, any additional
manpower and or overtime, including the Engineer staff required will paid by the
Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall note that staggered work hours may be required to be adopted to
ease congestion on the site, access road routes, security gates, and elsewhere on the
Site, at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.10 ACCIDENT PREVENTION
A. Refer to section 01 73 50.
1.11 ADJOINING PROPERTY
A. All reasonable precautions must be taken by the Contractor shall prevent damage to
adjoining property.
B. The Contractor shall obtain permission as necessary from owners of adjoining
property if requiring to erect scaffolding or otherwise use adjoining property, and shall
pay all charges and shall clear away and made good on completion or when directed.
C. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect existing structures, fences,
gates, walls, paving and other site features from damage during the currency of the
Contract.
D. Fences, walls, etc. crossed by the Works and forming boundaries of plots outside the
area occupied by the Works shall not be cut through or destroyed for more than the
distance necessary to permit the erection of new fencing etc. and the Contractor shall
make the ends of the cut fences reasonably secure. Where fences or walls are
damaged or destroyed, the whole shall be restored and reinstated with like materials
to the satisfaction of the owners or occupiers and the Engineer.
1.12 STRUCTURAL FABRIC
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the execution of the Works all
shoring, strutting, needling and other supports as may be necessary to preserve the
stability of the buildings, whether new or existing, on the Site or adjoining that may be
endangered or affected by the Works.
1.13 ROADS AND FOOTPATHS
A. The Contractor shall ensure that no damage is caused by Site traffic to roads and
footpaths outside the site boundaries and shall adequately maintain approaches to the
Site. Each contractor shall be required to repair damage directly attributable to his
work, such as, excavation and trenches access the site access road including
replacing and making good street paving around the site boundary. The Contractor
shall comply with all procedures laid out by statutory authorities having jurisdiction
and costs arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.14 LABOR RECORD
A. The Contractor shall provide a daily record to the Engineer in a format to be

approved by the Engineer, showing the number and description of craftsmen, laborers
and other persons employed on or in connection with the Works, including those
employed by sub-contractors. This record shall be incorporated in the “Daily Report”
(hereinafter referred to as Daily Report) and should be submitted on daily basis
before start of the works on the following day.
B. The Contractor shall deploy only workmen legally permitted to work in the State of
Kuwait, who shall hold valid employment permit and residency visa under the

20th October 2021
sponsorship of the Contractor.
1.15 PLANT RECORD
A. The Contractor shall provide a daily record to the Engineer in a format to be

approved by the Engineer, showing the type, model and capacity of all mechanical
and power-operated plant employed on the works. The Contractor will not be
permitted to remove any plant or material unless written approval is obtained from
the Engineer. This record shall be incorporated in the Daily Report.
1.16 VISITORS RECORD
A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of visitors and VIP visitors to the Site.
1.17 OVERTIME WORKING
A. Whenever working outside normal hours is proposed, the Contractor shall request
approval from the Engineer giving not less than one (1) working day notice, specifying
times, types and locations of work and approximate number of men involved, all
additional costs incurred by the Engineer for the contractors overtime work to be paid
by the contractor. The notification period of one (1) working day may be relaxed under
special circumstances, as determined by the Engineer.
B. Concealed work executed outside normal hours for which approval has not been given
may be required to be opened up for inspection and reinstated at the Contractor’s
expense.
1.18 TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary communications with all relevant
authorities.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and maintain a communication system,
including telephones until the completion of the works.
1.19 AVOIDANCE OF NUISANCE
A. The Contractor shall ensure at all times that spillage does not occur of concrete, oils or
other deleterious material into any new or existing drainage, duct system or water
course. Nevertheless, should any drainage or duct system or water course be
fouled by such materials the Contractor shall clean the drainage or duct system or
water course at is own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no spillage of oil or other contaminant on to
the public roads.
1.20 EXISTING GROUND LEVELS
A. The Contractor shall before commencing work, check, verify and satisfy himself as to
the existing levels of the Site and existing structures and agree them with the Engineer.
Before any excavation or breaking out, the Contractor shall define reference lines for
setting out the Works.
1.21 EMERGENCY ARRANGEMENTS
A. The Contractor shall maintain arrangements whereby he can quickly call labor outside
normal working hours to carry out work needed for an emergency associated with the
Works. The Employer and the Engineer shall be provided at all times with a list of
addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor's staff who are currently
responsible for organizing emergency work.
B. The Contractor shall acquaint himself and his employees with any relevant local
arrangements that are in existence for dealing with emergencies (Medical arrangements

20th October 2021
etc.).
1.22 CLEARANCE OF SITE ON COMPLETION
A. The Contractor shall leave the whole of the Works clean and tidy on completion, all to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor's site compound shall be reinstated to the original or to a better
condition as approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for making

clarifications and proposals for change, handling and processing contract
modifications.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements for the Contractor's

Construction Schedule.
1.02 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. The Engineer or Engineer's Representative will issue instructions authorizing minor

changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or Time(s) for
Completion.
1.03 PROCEDURE
A. The Contract Modification Procedure will follow a predefined path and is controlled by a
set of approved control forms instituted by the Engineer.
B. Notice to Claim Form: Refer to relevant clause in Document II for giving notice of
intention to claim. Use prescribed forms provided by the Engineer for giving notice to
claim.
1.04 REQUESTS FOR PROPOSAL (RFP)
A. Employer-Initiated Request for Proposals: The Engineer will issue a detailed

description of proposed changes in the Works that will require adjustment to the
Contract Sum and/or Time(s) for Completion. If necessary, the description will include
supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. RFP approved by the Engineer are for information only. Do not consider these
as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed
changes.
2. Within 15 days of receipt of a RFP, submit an estimate of cost and/or time

necessary to execute the change to the Engineer with a copy to the Engineer’s
Representative.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the
total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish
survey data to substantiate quantities and/or costs.
b. Indicate applicable duties, delivery charges, equipment rental, and

amounts of trade discounts.
c. Include a preliminary programme indicating the impact of the proposed

change to the works in progress as well as its impact on the Time(s)
for Completion for the whole of the Works or Sections thereof.
3. RFP: The Engineer shall approve these using predefined forms for release to
the Contractor.
Gulf Consult Contract Modification Procedures III-2/01 26 00 - 1

20th October 2021
4. RFP Submissions: Use prescribed forms instituted by the Engineer for this
purpose. All RFP submissions from the Contractor shall be submitted to the
Engineer with a copy to Engineer's Representative.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require

modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a
Request For Variation (RFV) to the Engineer with a copy to Engineer’s Representative.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change(s) and the impact of
the proposed change(s) on the Works. Provide a complete description of the
proposed change(s). Identify the impact of all the proposed change(s) on the
Contract Sum and/or Time(s) for Completion.
2. Include a re-measurement of quantities for all the impacted works and unit
rates, with the total amount indicated. State specifically wherever BOQ rates
are not applicable and why. Where requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. RFV Submissions: Use prescribed forms instituted by the Engineer for this
purpose. All RFV submissions from the Contractor shall be submitted to the
Engineer with a copy to Engineer's Representative.
4. Request for Alternative Substitution (RAS) Submissions: Comply entirely with

requirements in Section "Alternate" if the proposed change required
substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. Use
prescribed RAS forms instituted by the Engineer for this purpose. All RAS
submissions from the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer with a
copy to Engineer's Representative.
5. Upon review of the above proposals, the Employer’s acceptance thereof shall
be communicated through the Engineer’s approval of the Engineer’s Instruction
(EI).
C. Pricing Submissions: Once the above works are completed, the Contractor will be
required to corroborate their RFP Submissions with a pricing submission Use forms
provided by the Engineer for as enumerated below.
1.05 ALLOWANCES
A. Unit Rate Adjustment: For unit rates cost adjustment refer to applicable clauses in
Document II-1 Legal Clauses and Conditions and Document II-2, Particular Conditions.
B. Quantities: The Employer reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-
place by independent quantity survey, measure or count.
1.06 ENGINEER’S INSTRUCTION (EI)
A. Upon the Engineer’s preliminary approval of the Request for Proposal, the Engineer’s
Representative will prepare an EI for Engineer’s review, approval and signature. This
instructs the Contractor to proceed with the works including where such instructed
works are a variation to the Works. The Engineer’s Instruction shall contain complete
description of the change to the Works.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on time, quantity and unit rate basis of work
required by the Engineer’s Instruction. The Contractor should not delay the submission
of any cost or time implications pursuant to any EI.
C. Engineer’s Instruction: This shall be issued using pre-defined forms instituted by the
Engineer.

20th October 2021
1.07 VARIATION ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Engineer’s approval of EI, the Engineer's Representative will eventually
prepare a EI Variation Order for signatures of the Contractor, Engineer and Employer
generally as a culmination of the following
1. As soon as possible after receiving the EI, the Contractor should submit, using
prescribed forms provided by the Engineer, an itemized account and
supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the
Contract.
2. Include re-measurement of quantities, built-up of rates if necessary, sketches,

drawings, quotations and all necessary documents to substantiate the
Variation Order.
3. Whenever the impacted works are completed, attach final re-measurement of

the works, copies of invoices for verification of incurred costs wherever BOQ
rates are agreed to be not applicable, etc.
4. Contractor shall co-ordinate with Engineer/Engineer’s Representative to agree

upon the minimum Cost and/or Time impact as a direct result of the issued EI.
5. Obtain necessary authorities approval prior to signing a Variation Order.
B. A Variation Order may be issued combining the impact of several EIs pertaining to a
common scope/area.
C. It is not necessary that each and every EI will entail an adjustment to the cost and/or
time to the Contract. However, all EIs shall be concluded by a Variation Order.
D. Variation Order Form: This shall be issued using pre-defined forms instituted by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 31 10
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for

coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the
following:
1. Coordination
2. Procedures
3. Submittals
4. General Coordination Provisions
1.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications

to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations with other Contractors if any for proper installation, connection,
and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence coordinated with other
Contractors if any, for approval to obtain the best results where installation of
one part of the work depends on installation of other components, before or after
its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility
for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Coordinate with other Contractor(s) employed by the Employer, for all activities
interfacing or interfering with this work.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each Contractor involved,

outlining special items required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,
reports, and attendance at regular coordination meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Employer and separate Contractors where
coordination of their work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly
progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Schedules Preparation
2. Delivery and processing of submittals.
3. Progress meetings.
4. Project closeout activities.
Gulf Consult Project Coordination III-2/01 31 10 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall comply with the procedures required by the Contract Documents for
the day to day administration of the Contract with respect to submittals, safety,
inspection, meetings, correspondence, payment schedule, progress reports, etc. and the
contract sum is deemed to include all costs associated herewith.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Composite Drawings: Prepare composite drawings where needed for installation of

products and materials. Prepare composite drawings where limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components.
1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
1.05 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both
the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B. Co-ordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
C. Conduct regular coordination meetings
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Project Coordination III-2/01 31 10 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 31 20
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for

coordinating construction operations including but not necessarily limited to the
following:
1. Mechanical and Electrical Coordinator
2. Submittals
3. Coordination required
4. Coordination documents
5. Coordination of submittals
6. Coordination of substitutions and modifications
7. Observation of Work
8. Documentation
9. Equipment start-up
10. Inspection and acceptance of equipment
11. Preparation of Manuals
12. Documentations
13. Liaise with local authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section:
1. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work
2. Section 01 26 00 - Contract Modification Procedures
3. Section 01 31 10 - Project Coordination
4. Section 01 31 30 - Project Meetings
5. Section 01 32 30 – Construction Schedule and Progress Monitoring
6. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
7. Section 01 33 30 - Shop Drawings, Record Documents and As-built Drawings
8. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
9. Section 01 72 00 - Project Record Documents
10. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
11. Section 01 88 70 - Product Warranties/Guarantees
12. Section 01 93 00 - Operations and Maintenance Data
1.02 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK COORDINATOR
A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of a person(s) fulltime, technically
qualified and administratively experienced in design, engineering, and field
coordination for the type of mechanical and electrical work required for this Project, for
the duration of the Contract.
Gulf Consult III-2/01 31 20 - 1

Mechanical and Electrical
20th October 2021
Coordination
1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Submit name and resume with qualifications for Coordination before starting of any
work.
B. Contractor shall perform coordination and composite drawings prior to shop drawings
submission. If required by the Engineer, Contractor shall submit proof of coordination
and composite drawings’ compliance.
1.04 COORDINATION REQUIRED
A. Coordinate electro-mechanical work of all Divisions of CSI 2016.
B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of
Products.
C. Conduct meetings among sub-contractors, suppliers, separate contractors, and others

concerned with the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to
resolve coordination matters in dispute.
D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on Progress of Work, to be adjusted under

coordination requirements and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes
of meetings and reports to concerned parties.
1.05 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare coordination drawings (composite drawings) to organize installation of

Products for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to
identify potential conflicts.
B. Prepare a master schedule to identify responsibilities under each section of CSI 2012
of the Contract Documents for activities which directly relate to this work, including
submittals and temporary utilities.
C. Identify electrical power characteristics, loads and control wiring required for each item
of equipment, per applicable codes.
D. Maintain documents for the duration of the Work, recording changes due to site
instructions, modifications or adjustments.
E. After Engineer's review of original and revised documents, reproduce and distribute
copies to the concerned parties.
1.06 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for compliance with Contract
Documents and for coordination with work. Transmit for review, copy reviewed
documents to Engineer.
B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationships to available space and
anchors.
C. Check field provisions of installation, lab and wall openings, access provisions, and
sleeves.
D. Check compatibility with equipment and work of other sections, electrical
characteristics, and operational control requirements.
E. Check motor voltages and control characteristics.
F. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of pneumatic switches and relays.
G. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams.
H. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections.
I. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents.

20th October 2021
Coordination
1.07 COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Review proposals and requests from trade subcontractors and separate contractors.
B. Verify compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with Work and
Products of other sections.
C. Submit with recommendation for action.
1.08 OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. Observe Work for compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects; promptly submit to Engineer.
1.09 DOCUMENTATION
A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record:

1. Specification Section Product and name of supplier or specialist or trade
subcontractor
2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector.
3. Name of manufacturer's representative present.
4. Date, time and duration of tests.
5. Type of tests, and results.
6. Retesting required.
B. Submit copies of documentation to Engineer's upon request.
1.10 EQUIPMENT START-UP
A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operation
condition as required, Notify the relevant authorities as required.
B. Observe start-up and adjustments; record time and date of start-up, and results.
C. Observe equipment demonstrations to Employer; record times and additional

information required for operation and maintenance manuals.
1.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT
A. Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, safe and ready
for operation.
B. Assist Engineer's Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Coordination
SECTION 01 31 30
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Pre-construction Conference
2. Progress Meetings
3. Co-ordination Meetings
4. Pre-installation Conferences
1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Pre-construction meeting: The Pre-construction Meeting will be held within 15 days of

the order to commence the work and should be attended by the Contractor and such of
his major subcontractors who have been approved by the Engineer/Engineer's
Representative. The meeting shall be chaired by the Engineer.
B. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Items requiring long delivery periods
4. Long hold-ups like backfill; curing periods; weatherproof enclosement of
spaces; etc.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures for processing field decisions and variation Orders.
7. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
8. Distribution of Contract Documents.
9. Lines of Communications
10. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
11. Preparation of record documents.
12. Procedure for Maintaining Record Documents
13. Use of the premises.
14. Parking availability.
15. Office, work, and storage areas.
16. Construction equipment deliveries and priorities.
17. Procedures for Testing
18. Safety procedures.
19. First aid.
Gulf Consult Project Meetings III-2/01 31 30 - 1

20th October 2021
20. Security.
21. Working hours - Normal/Ramadan/Severe Summer/Other
22. Housekeeping.
1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Progress Meetings: Work site progress meetings will be held as agreed with the
Engineer, to review the Contractor's Construction Schedule and to discuss work
progress. Attendees at this meeting shall include the Engineer, Engineer’s
Representative, Contractor, approved Subcontractors and other Contractors as
required. The work site progress meetings shall be convened as directed by the
Engineer or Engineer’s Representative. Such meetings will be chaired by the Engineer.
The Contractor must attend meetings adequately prepared to discuss, address and answer all
items as detailed in this clause and to report on action required from previous meetings.
B. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Maintenance of progress schedule.
4. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
5. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
6. Field observations, problems and decisions.
7. Identification of problems impeding planned progress.
8. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
9. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Safety plan, procedures and issues relating to safety on site.
14. Other business relating to work.
C. Pre-Meeting Submittals: Three (3) days before each meeting, the Contractor must
submit the following information to the Engineer / Engineer's Representative:
1. List of completed activities.
2. List of current activities, with an estimate of time required for completion.
3. List of any variations in starting dates and duration of outstanding activities
from planned dates and times.
4. Percentage completion in every activity.
5. List of activities that the Contractor plans to start during the following period.
6. Three (3) back-up copies on electronic media CD’s.
7. Other information required by the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative.

20th October 2021
8. Shop drawings submittals status log.

9. Material and equipment submittals status log.
10. Material Procurement status log.
11. Other information requested by the Engineer / Engineer’s Representatives till
three days before the pre-meeting submittal date.
1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct Work coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties
involved. Work coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for
routine purposes, such as regular progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in

coordination or planning for the construction activities involved.
1.05 MINUTES OF MEETINGS
A. The proceedings of all meetings attended by the Engineer or the Engineer’s

Representative shall be recorded and minuted by the Engineer. Distribution of the minutes
of meeting shall be done by Engineer to all attendees and the concerned parties by not
later than three (3) days before the beginning of the next meeting.
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Works Site before each construction

activity that requires coordination with other construction.
B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved

in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other works,
materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.
Advise the Engineer / Engineer's Representative of scheduled meeting dates.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference,
including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
g. Conditions of installation.
h. Preparation and installation procedures.
i. Review of mock-ups.
j. Possible conflicts.
k. Compatibility problems.
l. Time schedules.

20th October 2021
m. Weather limitations.
n. Manufacturer's recommendations.
o. Warranty requirements.
p. Compatibility of materials.
q. Acceptability of substrates.
r. Temporary facilities.
s. Space and access limitations.
t. Governing regulations.
u. Safety.
v. Inspecting and testing requirements.
w. Required performance results.
x. Recording requirements.
y. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each

conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the
meeting to everyone concerned, including the Engineer.
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully

concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible
date.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 31 40
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Construction

Photographs.
B. Compare with the requirements listed elsewhere and comply with the total combined
requirements.
1.02 ASSISTANCE TO OTHERS
A. The Contractor shall allow all reasonable facilities for the responsible Government
Authorities to take photographs and films or televise the works at no additional
expense to the Employer.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engage a qualified commercial photographer approved by the Engineer to take all

photographs.
B. Photographer's Qualifications: Photographer shall be an individual of established

reputation who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer for not less
than 5 years.
C. All photographs shall be in high resolution printed on high quality photo papers as
approved by the Engineer
1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Before beginning the works at the site, take thirty (30) coordinated colour photographs
and submit in albums same as construction photographs detailed below.
1.05 PHOTOGRAPHS ETC. DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Photographs and Albums
1. Take forty (40) colour project photographs (3 sets) in accordance with

requirements as indicated, to best show the status of construction and
progress since taking previous photographs.
 Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cut-off date
associated with each Application for Payment.
 Vantage Points: Comply with the Engineer / Engineer's
Representatives directions concerning desired vantage points for
shots.
 Use the same vantage points each time to create a time-lapse
sequence when so directed.
Gulf Consult Construction Photographs III-2/01 31 40 - 1

20th October 2021
2. Identification: Provide an attached narrative underneath each photograph

indicating:
 Name of the Contract.
 Number of Photographs.
 Date the photograph was taken.
 Vantage Point: Description of vantage point, in terms of location,
direction (by compass point), and elevation or storey of construction.
 Vantage Point: Provide notation of vantage point marked for location
and direction of shot on a key plan of the site and building. Indicate
elevation (storey height).
3. Prints: Submit 3 album mounted and labelled prints of size 120 x 180mm of
each view required directly to the Engineer and Engineer's Representative
within 7 days of taking photographs.
4. Each Album shall have a key (site) plan that carries the numbers of submitted
photographs in that album and identification of their locations.
5. Each album shall have a printed cover to the approval of the Engineer /
Engineer’s Representative.
1.06 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. At the completion of the works and after the removal of all temporary works and
clearance of the site, take forty (40) coordinated photographs and submit in albums
similar to the ones taken during construction.
1.07 ELECTRONIC COPIES
A. With each submittal as described above, include electronic copies viz CD’s/DVD’s in
protective envelopes with date indicated and put them in one or more CD/DVD box/es
whose capacity shall be sufficient to contain all the CD’s/DVD’s provided in the contract
for record purposes. The electronic copy shall become the property of the Employer
and copyright shall be vested in him.
1.08 EXTRA PRINTS
A. When requested by the Engineer / Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall

prepare the requested extra prints of photograph at no extra cost to the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Construction Photographs III-2/01 31 40 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 32 30
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS MONITORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the critical path
method (CPM) of scheduling and reporting progress of the Work.
1. Refer to the Conditions of Contract and other Contract Documents for definitions
and specific dates for Contract Time.
2. The work under this Section consists of the scheduling and reporting procedures
required to be carried out by the Contractor in conjunction with the progress of the
project.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Path Method (CPM): A method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships and network calculations to
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.
B. The Construction Programme (if any) depicts in general the key activities and milestones
and the duration allotted for the same. The Contractor shall be required to plan, perform
and coordinate his works with that of other direct Contractors to meet the time
requirements of the project.
C. Construction Schedule(s): The Contractor's developed schedule(s) for execution of the

Contract that meets the contract requirements for the performance of this contract and the
requirements of the Construction Program.
D. Contractor's cost loaded Construction Schedule: The Contractor's approved CPM

schedule with assigned cost values based on the priced Bill of Quantities and Schedule of
rates that total the contract lump sum price and where applicable under the conditions of
contract, to be used as the basis for calculating interim payments.
E. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of interdependent activities through the
network schedule that establishes the minimum overall project duration.
F. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing the activities and
activity relationship.
G. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction
schedule that consume time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path or contain no float.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be started and/or completed before a
given dependent successor activity can be started.
3. Successor activities are activities that cannot commence before given or defined
predecessor activities have been started and/or completed.
Gulf Consult Construction Schedule and Progress Monitoring III-2/01 32 30-1

20th October 2021
H. Event: An event is the starting or ending point of an activity.
I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
J. Float is the measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float time belongs to
the Employer.
1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely
affecting the early start of the following activity or violating a programme constraint
2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned project completion date or violating any
programme constraint that would affect such a completion.
K. The Contract includes the following milestones as follows:
 Milestone 1: Complete Concrete Structure

 Milestone 2: Complete Building Construction and Finishes
 Milestone 3: Deliver and Install all Equipment.
 Milestone 4: Obtain all Authorities Approvals for Power Supply.
 Milestone 5: Complete Startup and Commissioning on Generators/Issue
Substantial Completion Certificate.
 Milestone 6: Obtain Power from MEW.
1.03 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting adequate planning data and acceptable
cost distribution information for the development and maintenance of the Contractor's cost
loaded construction schedule (hereinafter referred to as the "Construction Schedule"), all
to the approval of the Engineer’s Representative as detailed herein. The Contractor shall
also be responsible for:
1. Specifying the Programme Calendars

2. Ensuring adequate Activity Code Descriptions
3. Ensuring adequate details of the Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) are available to all relevant parties
B. The Contractor shall use a computerized precedence Diagram CPM technique in

preparing the Construction Schedule. The software to be used in accordance with item
1.09 of this section is to be approved by the Engineer’s Representative prior to generation
of the Construction Schedule.
C. The construction schedule shall be updated monthly or when required by the Engineer’s
Representative at joint meetings with the Engineer’s Representative, the Contractor,
Subcontractors, and other direct contractors who may be required to attend.
D. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this section shall be grounds
for recommendation by the Engineer’s Representative that no further progress payment
shall be made until the contractor is in compliance.

20th October 2021
E. Each revision of the construction schedule shall be signed by the duly authorized
representative of the Contractor and these documents, upon approval by the Engineer &
Engineer’s Representatives, shall thereupon become incorporated in to the contract
documents of the project.
A. Contractor's Representative: The Contractor shall designate a Scheduling Representative

who shall be responsible for the content and development of the Contractor's Construction
schedule. This representative shall have direct control and complete authority to act on
behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of the Construction Schedule
requirements and such authority shall not be interrupted throughout the duration of the
contract.
1.05 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT
A. Within 7 days of the Date of Commencement, the Contractor shall meet with the
Engineer’s Representative to review the scheduling requirement of the project. This
review will include the specific requirements of the Contractor regarding restraints and
milestones, including the interrelation with other direct contractors, as they relate to the
overall construction program. The Contractor will present restraints, if any, foreseen by
himself in the proposed Construction Schedule that may affect the construction program.
B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit a preliminary Construction Schedule within 14

days of the Date of Commencement. The preliminary Construction Schedule shall outline
activities for the first 90 (Ninety) days of construction. Include a summary schedule for the
remaining duration of the Works within the Contract Scope.
1. Include each significant construction activity. Coordinate each activity in the

schedule with other activities. Schedule each construction activity in proper
sequence according to the level of details set by the Engineer’s Representative
2. Indicate completion of the Work on the date established for Taking Over of the
Works, unless the Employer agrees otherwise.
3. The Preliminary schedule shall be used to plan and monitor the work progress
until approval is obtained for the Contractor’s Detailed Critical Path Method Time
Programme. The Preliminary schedule is required to be updated every month
prior to each progress meeting and shall always be projected for 1 month look
ahead at each update until the Contractor’s Detailed Critical Path Method Time
Programme is approved.
C. Within Seven (7) (days of the approval of Preliminary Construction Schedule or within 14
days of Date of Commencement whichever is the earlier, the Contractor shall submit for
the Engineer & Engineer’s Representative approval, the Contract Construction Schedule
in an approved format, to show the sequence and interdependence of activities required
for complete performance of all items of work under the contract or portion thereof.
Further, this schedule shall reflect the milestones required by the contract documents. In
preparing the construction schedule, the Contractor shall:

20th October 2021
1. Exercise care to produce a clear, legible and accurate diagram. Activities related
to specific areas of the project shall be grouped together on the diagram for ease
of understanding, and simplification. The diagram shall show the following for
each construction activity, where applicable:
a. Concise description of the work items, including, but not limited to:
(i) Mobilisation & Demobilisation Periods
(ii) Authority Submissions and Approvals
(iii) Preparation, Submission and Approval of Shop drawings
(iv) Preparation, Submission and Approval of Material and
Equipment
(v) Fabrication and Delivery Periods
(vi) Installation (and monitoring if any)
(vii) Work by other contractors or the Employer
(viii) All Testing & Commissioning
b. Early start and finish dates
c. Number of working days required
d. Cost Loading
e. Manpower Loading
f. Equipment & Machinery Loading
g. Total Float of each activity.
h. Calendar days.
2. Include any trade or material restraints to indicate the movement of trades who
are performing major work.
3. Demonstrate work activities in the Contractor's Construction Schedule to have

maximum duration of fifteen (15) days with not more than 2% exceeding these
limits, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer & Engineer’s Representative
except as to non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials,
delivery of equipment, etc.).
4. The Construction Schedule developed above shall not be changed throughout the
duration of the project without obtaining prior approval from the Engineer and
5. All submittals (of whatever nature) should be included in the Contractor

Construction Schedule (CPM) to enable the prioritizing of submittals by the
Engineer's Representative and to give the Engineer's Representative sufficient
time to plan its activities and avoid delays to the Works. No extension of Contract
time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer's
Representative sufficiently in advance of the work or in accordance with the
Construction Schedule (CPM) to permit timely processing
D. At monthly intervals the Contractor shall submit for the review of Engineer’s & Engineer’s
Representative approval, a detailed schedule developed and updated from the approved
Construction Schedule, covering a period of the next 30 days and relating the Contractor's
daily work activities.
E. Failure to include any element of the works required for the performance of the contract
shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable

20th October 2021
completion date of each phase or the whole of the project, notwithstanding the Engineer’s
& Engineer’s Representative approval of the Construction Schedule.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE COST LOADING
A. Within Seven (7) days of obtaining approval of the Construction Schedule, the Contractor
shall submit for the Engineer’s Representative approval a cost loaded Construction
Schedule with a fully detailed schedule of values and all necessary supporting details of all
activities in the cost loaded Construction Schedule based upon the priced Bills of
Quantities (Document III-4), and the total shall equal the contract price.
B. The approved cost loaded Construction Schedule shall be the basis for calculating
progress payments pro-rata to the work performed.
C. Revision to the Construction Schedule may require re-allocation of costs. Revised activity
cost data shall be submitted with the updated Construction Schedule.
D. Cost allocation per activity shall be spread throughout the duration of the activity on a
direct linear relationship i.e. if any activity costs KD. 1000/- for 10 days, the cost is KD.
100/- per day.
E. No single activity shall have a cost allocation greater than KD. 20,000/- except
procurement items as may be provided in the Bills of Quantities and Schedule of Rates, or
where greater cost allocation for specific activities have been approved by the Engineer’s
Representative.
1.07 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor shall submit an updated Construction Schedule within 21 days of when
required by the Engineer & Engineer’s Representative.
B. Acceptance of the updated construction schedule and all supporting data is contingent
upon compliance with all other articles of this clause and any other previous agreements
or requirements made with or by the Engineer & Engineer’s Representative.
C. The Contractor shall update the Construction Schedule using the “Retained Logic” option
only as it doesn’t disrupt the network logic
1.08 ADJUSTMENT AND REVISIONS
A. The contract duration will be adjusted only in accordance with the provisions of
Document ll, conditions of particular application. In the event the Contractor requests an
adjustment of the contract duration, he shall furnish such justification and supporting data
as the Engineer & Engineer’s Representative may deem necessary for evaluation by the
Engineer’s Representative as to whether or not the Contractor will be entitled to an
extension of time for completion. Submission of proof which shall be based on the Critical
Path in the Construction Schedule, and on revised activity, logic, duration and costs is
obligatory with any request.

20th October 2021
B. The Contractor shall submit with every request, his revised Construction Schedule
whenever the actual field progress of the work does not conform to the latest approved
Construction Schedule in force at the time of the alleged delay.
C. The Engineer & Engineer’s Representative shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of
a request for extension of time, advice the Contractor of his decision.
D. When the Engineer’s Representative has not yet made a decision as to any extension of
time, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be
reflected in the Construction Schedule and should the Contractor choose to reflect the
requested amount of time adjustment in this Construction Schedule, he will do so at his
own risk. Such reflection of time adjustment shall only serve the purpose of monitoring the
schedule of the works until such time as the Employer has made the final determination as
to any extension of time. The Contractor will revise his Construction Schedule thereafter
in accordance with the Engineer’s Representative decision and act and perform the works
accordingly.
E. The Contractor shall submit, as requested by the Engineer’s Representative, a revision to

the Construction Schedule for any of the following reasons:
1. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are encountered which

make re-planning or re-scheduling of the work necessary.
2. When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and progress of the
works as being performed in the field.
1.09 SCHEDULING SYSTEM
A. The Engineer’s Representative has established that Primavera Project Manager software
P6 (for windows) will be the standard scheduling application for this project. The latest
version of this software shall be used to develop all CPM construction schedules.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. All Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, shall consist of the
following:
1. Electronic and hard copies of the Construction Schedule with distinctive Schedule
number and date of issue.
2. Copies of supporting data.
3. Back-up copies on DVDs or CDs.
B. The Contractor has to submit the following reports:

1. Monthly status report which shows detailed activities, actual start and completion
dates, percent complete or remaining duration, and any other requirement by the
2. Material monthly status report which includes material description, unit, material
delivered (during the month, accumulation), material planned (during the month,
accumulation), adjusted by V.O., variance (quantity, %) and any other
requirements requested by the Engineer’s Representative.

20th October 2021
3. Weekly Manpower Report that includes the following in accordance with the
approval of the Engineer’s Representative:
a. Profession
b. Average Number
c. Average working days
d. Average working hours
e. Total man-hours
f. Total man-days.
4. Weekly production report which includes the following:
a. Description of major work items

b. Contract quantity
c. Quantity installed during the week
d. Quantity installed to-date
e. Percent of the above
The number and type of the description of the work items shall be as required by the
C. Delay Penalty for Contactor’s Submission of Schedule: If the Contractor fails to submit or
obtain the approval on the Detailed Critical Path Method Time Programme (Construction
Schedule), or any update thereof, within the specified time, then the Employer shall deduct
from its next interim payment the amount specified in the Contract Agreement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Not used
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes :
1. Submittal Procedures
2. Construction Progress Reports
3. Proposed Product List
4. Change of Durations
5. Shop Drawings
6. Product Data and Manufacturer’s Data
7. Samples
8. Design Data
9. Test Reports
10. Certificates
11. Quality Assurance Submittals
12. Site Layout, Site Staff Organisation Charts and Method Statement
13. Overtime Work
14. Cash Flow Estimate
15. Digital Record
16. Engineer & Engineer’s Representative Action
B. Other Submittals: Also refer to other sections in Division for additional requirements
and other Specifications Divisions and other Contract Documents for requirements for
other submittals.
1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities at the Contractor's cost. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in
advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequencing.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of

the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
The Engineer / Engineer's Representative reserves the right to withhold action

on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related
submittals are received.
3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time

required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review,
including time for resubmittals.
Gulf Consult Submittal Procedures III-2/01 33 00 - 1

20th October 2021
a. Allow 14 days duration to review all submittals related to Divisions

1 to 9. Allow 21 days to review all submittals related to Divisions 10 to
49.
b. Allow the same periods in (a) above again for reprocessing each
submittal when resubmitted. Allow additional time if the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative delay processing any submittal to
coordinate with other submittals or for other similar reasons.
c. No extension of Time for Completion will be allowed because of failure

to transmit submittals to the Engineer/Engineer's Representative
sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label
or title block. Submit draft for approval by the Engineer.
1. Provide a space approximately 100 x 125mm on the label to record the

Contractor's review and signature and for the Engineer’s/Engineer’s
Representative action and remarks.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording
action taken.
a. Contract name
b. Date
c. Name and address of the Engineer's Representative
d. Name and address of the Contractor
e. Name and address of the Sub-Contractor
f. Name and address of the supplier
g. Name of the manufacturer
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
3. Contractor's Review:
a. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field
measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogue numbers,
& conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents.
b. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work & of Contract
Documents.
c. Sign or initial each page of product data, and each sample label to certify
compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, identify as
Coordinated Submittal. Notify Engineer / Engineer's Representative in
writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of
Contract Documents.
d. Contractor's submission to contain complete information regarding all
drawings, materials used and related items.
e. Do not fabricate products or begin work, which requires submittals until
return of submittal with Engineer / Engineer's Representative
acceptance.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Pack each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal to the Engineer / Engineer's Representative using a transmittal

20th October 2021
form approved by the Engineer. The Engineer / Engineer's Representative will not
accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
On the transmittal, record all relevant information. On the form, or separate sheet,
record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and
limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract
Document requirements.
D. Submittal Procedures by Contractor
1. Samples: Three (3) sets of samples of each material or prefabricated

component with transmittal forms to the Engineer/Engineer's Representative.
Two (2) sets will be returned marked with the action taken.
Maintain one (1) set of samples, as approved by the Engineer's Representative, at

the Works Site/sample room available for quality control comparisons throughout
the course of the construction activity.
2. Catalogues: Three (3) published copies of technical (not commercial) brochures,

one of which must be an original with transmittal forms to the Engineer /
Engineer's Representative. Brochures shall be in English or accompanied by a
certified English translation. Brochures in Arabic shall be acceptable at the
Engineer / Engineer's Representative discretion.
1.03 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. The drawings issued with the Tender are issued solely to show the basic principles
on which Tenders are to be prepared. The drawings are not to be taken as coordination,
shop, or working drawings.
B. Coordination, shop, or working drawings and, where specified, design drawings are to
be prepared and submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Tender
Documents. Certain progress drawings included in the Tender are for Contractor’s
guidance in the evaluation of coordination and installation interface requirements.
The Engineer / Engineer’s Representative shall issue updated, more complete
construction documents as they become available. The Employer shall entertain no
request for Contract Sum adjustment if the modifications do not materially change the
original design intent.
C. Dimensions should not be scaled from Drawings. The Contractor shall obtain from
the Engineer any dimensions required but not given in figures on the Drawings nor
calculable from figures on the Drawings.
D. The Contractor shall note that the construction documents provided represent the
extent of design information available at the time of Contract Award and it is the
Contractor’s responsibility to prepare shop drawings with all relevant information
and details prior to submission as detailed shop drawing or working drawing for the
review of the Engineer. The Contractor shall schedule the submittal of shop
drawings in a timely manner to achieve the requirements of the Milestone Dates,
Sectional Completion Dates and the Time for Completion.
E. The Contractor shall include for additional shop drawings other scales as required
for detailed coordination.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of detailed bar bending
schedules, to be tabulated alongside layout plans, and working drawings to detail the
reinforcement as designed. The Contractor shall submit detailed equipment schedules,
hardware schedules, sanitary ware and accessories schedules, door schedule, etc.
G. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to plan and prepare detailed working

drawings to supplement the design information and facilitate the re-measurement of

20th October 2021
the Works, where so defined in the Contract Documents. Such responsibility shall
also extend to the re-measured works of his subcontractors.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between the various trades to
provide copies of drawings, schedules, etc. that are required for the re-measurement of
the Works.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor’s Checking of Submittals: Thoroughly check submittals for completeness and

for compliance with the Contract Documents before submitting them for review
of the Engineer, and mark them with the Contractor’s stamp certifying that they
have so been reviewed. Any submittal without such stamp shall be returned to
the Contractor without review.
(a) Shop Drawing Coordination: In checking shop drawings, verify the

dimensions and field conditions and check and coordinate the shop drawings
of each section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades
whose Work is related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation
of the Work.
B. Identification of Submittals: Mark, tag, or otherwise properly label each submittal item
with the name of the Contractor, name of the project, the date, and a reference to the
applicable specification section number for identification of each item. Accompany each
submittal with a letter of transmittal containing similar information, together with the
purpose for which the submittal is being made. Each submittal item, or the label affixed
thereon, shall have a clear space suitable to receive the stamps of the Contractor and
the Engineer.
1. Numbering of Shop Drawings: Consecutively number the shop drawings

for each portion of the Work, and retain the numbering system throughout all
revisions.
2. Labeling of Samples: Identify each sample item with the name of the
manufacturer and the product name or number, in addition to the other
information required on the tag or label.
C. Completeness of Submittals: Make complete submittals for each separate and

definable system or subsystem of the Work, and include in each submittal all the items
necessary to completely define and explain the system or subsystem including its
performance and installation. Such items shall consist of the shop drawings, product
data, supplementary product literature, samples, calculations, statement of
manufacturer’s review, or other information as required by the technical specification
sections. Unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer, combine the submittal items
required for each system or subsystem and furnish together at one time in a single
submission.
D. Submittals to be Returned Unreviewed: A submittal which, in the Engineer’s opinion, is

incomplete or deviates significantly from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, or contains numerous errors, or has not been checked or only
checked superficially, will be returned without being reviewed by the Engineer and the
Contractor shall make a new submittal. A submittal which is not required by the
Contract Documents will be returned without review.
1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and timely provision of
coordination drawings showing the coordination of the work of sub-contractors and all
other contractors. The coordination drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show
overall dimensions of structural members, architectural features, including finishing,
ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, fixtures, etc., and show clearance between each

20th October 2021
work.
B. Coordination drawing shall bear a signature block with the following certification: The
work represented on this drawing has been coordinated with all sub-contractors and
other affected contractors. Contractors’ Representatives Date Initials
C. The signature block shall include spaces for the company names and signatures of
sub-contractors and contractors.
D. Reproducible, original, coordination drawings shall be signed by each affected sub-

contractor, other contractors and the Contractor indicating agreement that the work
has been coordinated. The Contractor shall then distribute a copy of signed
coordination drawings to each of the affected sub-contractors and contractors. All
coordination drawings shall be submitted for review of the Engineer.
E. For the purposes of coordination each contractor and subcontractor shall provide
other contractors whose work is affected with the required information and drawings
for coordination of their work.
F. Shop Drawings: The term “Shop Drawings” includes graphic representations which
document the required type, number and location of each system component in the
Work. Such drawings and other illustrations, including fabrication and layout drawings,
diagrams, and related schedules, shall establish the actual detail of manufactured or
fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amplify design details,
and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions.
Shop drawings shall not be reproductions or tracings of the Contract Drawings.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and timely provision of
shop drawings which shall indicate proposed materials and methods of construction,
fabrication, erection, layout and setting out, diagrams on various systems, equipment
control, and other descriptive data, catalogues and brochures required to show that
materials, equipment and system and position thereof shall conform to the
Drawings and Specification. Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all
assembled, manufactured or fabricated items, coordinate and indicate proper
relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and electrical
equipment in proper relation to physical spaces within the structure and
incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions. Shop
drawings review by Engineer is for general conformance only. The Contractor shall
be solely responsible for interpretation and execution of such shop drawing documents.
H. Shop drawings shall be taken to mean the same as detail drawings, fabrication
drawings, working drawings, erection drawings, assembly drawings, or any
drawing required to supplement the design drawings and/or the Contractor’s
coordination drawings.
I. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings following the distribution of the signed
coordination drawings.
J. All shop drawings shall bear the following certification:
K. This drawing has been checked for completeness, accuracy, coordination, and
compliance with the Contract Documents. All dimensions and field conditions have
been verified. Contractor’s Representative Date
L. Shop drawings should include a title box that indicates the Project Name, Project
Location, revision number and date, drafter's signature, checker's signature, and
drawing description, signed off for co-ordination by other contractors, all as per
format established by the Engineer.

20th October 2021
1.06 PRODUCT DATA (CATALOGUES, BROCHURES, TECHNICAL DATA, ETC.)
A. Product Data: The term “Product Data” includes technical data which document the
primary performance for each system and material component in the Work. Primary
product data shall consist of a Material List, together with manufacturers’ literature
if any, which is necessary to clearly identify the primary function, quality and
performance of the products. Product data shall be custom prepared for the project
and made specific for the Work. Manufacturers’ literature which does not document
the primary performance characteristics shall be deemed to be supplementary data and
“for information only”.
1. Material List: With each submittal, furnish a Material List which stipulates the
primary performance characteristics of the materials as required by the
Contract Documents. Arrange the Material List in a vertical schedule format.
Specifically identify materials by manufacturer’s name, product name or model
number, reference to applicable section of the technical Specifications and any
related shop drawings, specific location(s) of use in the Work, and the primary
performance characteristics.
1.07 PRODUCT DATA AND MANUFACTURER’S DATA
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers

specifications, manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly,
installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. Also submit standard colour charts,
catalogues cuts, standard wiring diagrams, painted performance curves, operational
range diagram, mill reports.
B. Submit to Engineer/Engineer’s Representative for review, conformance certificates

from manufacturers to verify their compliance with Contract Documents. Provide copies
and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article in this section
and for Project Record Document purposes described in Section 01 72 00.
C. Submit 3 numbers of copies.
D. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Contract.
E. Study the Manufacturers instructions and Contract Documents, to combine the two to
produce the most stringent requirements to form the basis of contract price, execution
method, material and time.
F. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements,

and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
G. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and

special enviironmental criteria required for application or installation.
H. After review distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and
provide copies for Project Record Documents described in Section 01 72 00.
I. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction of system.
Mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the Works.
1. Where Product Data includes information on several similar products, some of
which are not required for use on the works, mark copies clearly to indicate
which products are applicable.
2. Where Product Data must be specially for required products, materials or
systems because standard printed data suitable for use, submit shop drawings
instead of Product Data.
3. Include the following information in Product Data

20th October 2021
a. Manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Compliance statement with contract specifications
e. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
f. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
g. Notation of co-ordination requirements.
4. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.
J. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all product data such as
catalogues, brochures, and technical data or any other descriptive data required by the
specification or the Engineer.
K. The Contractor shall submit eight (8) sets of all product data such as
catalogues, brochures, and technical data (in original). One set with the Engineer’s
review stamp shall be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit
documents also in electronic format in CD’s.
1.08 CALCULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any design or design calculations which may
be specified, or required by the Engineer, in order to establish or demonstrate that his
submittal conforms to the requirements of the Contract for quality, performance or in any
other aspect. Further, any design or engineering consultant employed by the Contractor
shall possess license to practice in the Kuwait; and five (5) year local experience. A
proof of such credentials shall be submitted for Engineer’s review.
B. The Contractor shall provide for the design, engineering and calculations for temporary
and permanent supports, miscellaneous bracing, scaffolding, props, temporary
construction, leave-outs in structure, supports for construction equipment and
machinery, including removal after permanent installation of the equipment if
necessary. The design shall be carried out by licensed professional engineers.
C. The Contractor shall provide design and engineering for those works specified
under performance-based specifications complying with stated requirements and as
per established practices in the industry.
D. The Contractor shall provide for any design and engineering work associated with
the builders’ work and coordination with other contractors.
E. Submittals for Temporary Work: When specifically required by governing code or

local authority, certain information relative to temporary construction systems, such as
structural loading diagrams including specific points of load application, shall be
submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer’s review. Each such submittal shall be
prepared and sealed by the Contractor’s qualified professional/structural engineer, who
is registered in the Kuwait. The Engineer’s review will be limited solely to the effects
of the temporary construction systems upon any permanent building component.
The design, installation, use, and maintenance of such temporary construction
systems are solely the responsibility of the Contractor
1.09 SAMPLES
A. Submit full size, fully fabricated samples, cured and finished in the manner specified,
and physically identical with the material or product proposed for use.
1. Mount, display or pack samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of

qualities indicated. Prepare samples to match a designated sample where so
indicated. Include the following information.

20th October 2021
a. Generic description of the sample.

b. Size limitations.
c. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Compliance with governing regulations.
g. Availability.
h. Delivery time, measured from the date of the Engineer / Engineer's
Representative approval till the delivery on Works Site.
2. For review of kind, colour, pattern and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these
characteristics between the submittal and the actual component as delivered
and installed:
a. Submit full range of manufacturers standard finishes (except when
more restrictive or definite requirements are specified for colours,
textures and patterns) for Engineer's selection.
b. Where variation in colour, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is
inherent in the material or product represented by a sample, submit
multiple units that show full range of the variations.
B. Submission of Material Samples
Submit three samples of each material for the Engineer’s/Engineer’s Representative’s

approval, each sample at least 300 x 300mm in size unless the actual size of the
materials is smaller. No sample will be reviewed if it is submitted in sizes smaller than
stated above.
C. Submission of Material Samples in System Application
Submit three samples to the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative for approval of finish

building materials, shown assembled in the proposed application for the Works. The
application samples must be at least 600 x 600mm in size to show the total
assemblage of the intended materials. No sample would be reviewed if the size of the
assembly is submitted in sizes smaller than stated above.
D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing
work.
E. Include identification on each sample, with full information of Works.
F. Should requirements relating to samples be mentioned in the Tender Documents

elsewhere, the combination and more stringent requirement shall govern.
G. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal

Procedures article and for Record Document purposes described in Section 01 72 00.
1. Samples: The term “Samples” includes various natural materials, fabricated
items, equipment, devices, appliances or components thereof, as may be
required to verify visual appearance of such items for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
2. Samples of all materials and workmanship proposed to be employed in the
execution of the Works comprised in this Contract may be called for at any
time by the Employer or the Engineer and are to be furnished by the
Contractor without delay. The samples, when approved will be kept by the
Employer. The Engineer will reject all materials or workmanship not

20th October 2021
corresponding in quality and character with the approved samples. Suitably

labeled boxes for the storage of samples shall be provided by the Contractor
without additional charge.
3. Samples of materials shall be furnished in manufacturer’s standard
containers bearing manufacturer’s descriptive labels and printed application
instructions. Samples not submitted in manufacturer’s standard containers
shall be furnished with manufacturer’s descriptive labels and application
instructions. Submitted samples must be fully traceable to the manufacturer
and production batch trough stamping or indelible markings on the
samples.
4. Samples shall be properly identified with Contractor’s tag or sticker, as
directed by the Engineer and submitted with approved transmittal form.
5. Samples for testing shall be taken at the place of origin, mixing plants or
working site from the Works, as appropriate, and as required by the Engineer
/Engineer’s Representative. After inspection/approval the sample shall be
marked for identification as shall be required by the Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative.
1.10 METHOD STATEMENTS

A. Construction Method Statement is required to be submitted as a part of the Tender, to
cover major aspects of construction. This shall encompass the Tenderer’s management
and implementation plan for the Works including but not limited to, organization, staffing,
general approach to engineering, fabrication, installation, quality control, safety,
schedule control, security, access control, site logistics, storage, distribution,
methodology for fabrication and erection of Works with particular attention to special
details, etc. The method statement shall detail the sequence of operations and
strategy to be utilized in order to achieve completion within the Schedule. This
shall address clearly all major components of the Tenderer’s scope and this shall
be used to demonstrate and evaluate the technical capabilities and expertise of the
Tenderer.
B. Upon award of Contract, and prior to commencement of any work at Site whatsoever,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit a more detailed method statement
addressing all aspects of the work listed above. This shall be exhaustive and cover all
major components of execution, all to the approval of the Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative.
C. The Contractor shall not be permitted to commence the Site work until he has
submitted all details regarding the execution of work as listed below. Particular
attention shall be paid to coordination of the work with other contractors and
subcontractors, quality, safety and schedule requirements in the preparation of the
detailed method statement. The Method Statement shall be clearly titled, with
revisions numbered and dated, the format for which shall be as approved by the
Engineer.
D. The Contractor’s Construction Method Statement, as a minimum, shall:

1. Describe the management and implementation methods for the engineering,
fabrication, transportation, Installation and testing of major materials.
2. Describe the methods of construction.
3. Identify specific coordination/interface requirements with other contractors’ work.
4. Address specific safety related precautions and measures proposed to be taken
and describe emergency procedures.
5. Address security procedures and access control.
6. Identify the access routes and site logistics.

20th October 2021
7. Describe all temporary construction requirements including detailed locations of

construction equipment, their capacities, clearances, etc. supplemented by
relevant sketches.
8. Identify areas for storage of materials and detail handling procedures.
9. Identify existing services, structures, etc. in the proximity of works to be carried
out and detail the methods of execution.
10. Detail how the works are to be set-out.
11. Describe the procedures for verification of construction and erection
tolerances, and the stages at which checking of constructed works shall be
done.
12. Detail the proposed construction equipment and manpower to be utilized.
E. The Construction Method Statements shall be submitted to both the Engineer and the
Engineer’s Representative for review and approval. The details such as site logistics,
storage of materials, construction equipment and manpower, security, safety
precautions, or any other details etc., shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer /
F. In addition to the above method statement, the Contractor shall submit for the review of
the Engineer, when requested, more detailed method statements for specific portions of
the work not clearly identified previously.
G. In scheduling the Works, the Contractor shall allow a sufficient period for the review
and approval of the Detailed Construction Method Statements.
H. The Contractor shall note that the methods proposed by the Contractor may not
necessarily be approved in its entirety. Any modifications or changes suggested by the
Engineer / Engineer’s Representative shall be complied with, by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Employer.
I. All method statements shall be reviewed and approved in writing by the Contractor’s
Project Manager, QA/QC Manager, and Safety Manager prior to submission.
1.11 OTHER SUBMITTALS
A. Supplementary Product Literature: Supplementary technical literature shall be

used to document the characteristics of various building system components or
products. Such literature may include manufacturer’s catalogue information, product
specifications, standard illustrations, diagrams, and standard details. The
supplementary product literature shall describe physical characteristics such as size,
weight, finish, material analysis, electrical requirements, and also furnish other
information such as load tables, test results, and industry quality standards.
B. Certifications: Certified reports, prepared by the Contractor, verifying either a) the

Contractor’s review of certain existing conditions and/or existing information prior to
commencing with the next phase of construction work, or b) the chemical and
physical properties of various building materials, as noted. Materials reports shall state
compliance of each item with respect to the technical requirements of the Contract
Documents.
C. Preconstruction Testing Reports: Technical reports, prepared by the Contractor,

which record the results of the Contractor’s testing of certain building systems,
system components, and/or materials, as required by the Contract Documents,
prior to the installation of such systems and products. The report shall state
compliance with the technical requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. Quality Control Testing and Inspection Reports: Technical reports which have been
made in summary of quality control tests and inspections as performed by the

20th October 2021
Contractor’s agencies for the fabrication and installation of various materials and
systems as required by the Contract Documents. Such reports shall clearly state
conformance or non-conformance with the technical requirements of the Contract
Documents, for each respective item which has been tested and inspected. (Refer
Section 01 40 00).
E. Warranties/Guaranties: Specific warranties and guaranties for system and materials

components verifying the technical performance, as required by the Contract
Documents, for the time durations noted.
F. Record Documents: Documents prepared by the Contractor recording the as-built

conditions of the systems and/or materials, and specifically defining the variations from
requirements of the Contract Documents, as described in Section 01 72 00.
G. Operation & Maintenance Manuals: Manuals prepared by the Contractor, as

described in Section 01 93 00 and to be used by the Employer, for the Employer’s
maintenance and operations of various building systems and/or components thereof
resulting in the technical performance required by the Contract Documents.
H. Commissioning Reports: Technical testing and commissioning reports, prepared by

the Contractor or independent testing agency, verifying that each component of the
system, in each specific area served, has been tested and commissioned such as
to obtain the technical performance required by the Contract Documents.
1.12 ASSET DATABASE
A. The Contractor shall provide electronically a database compatible in approved

formats, of all materials, equipment, assemblies, products, etc., as a comprehensive
data for maintaining a log of all assets. The format for the database shall be provided
by the Engineer /Engineer’s Representative. The database shall contain the following
information, as a minimum:
1. Asset Number
2. Description
3. Category
4. Make
5. Model
6. Serial Number
7. Asset location
8. Warranty period
9. Warranty end date
10. Warranty details
11. Reference to Spare parts list
12. Manufacturer’s Name, Contact person, Address, Telephone, Fax & Email
addresses
13. Vendor Name, Contact person, Address, Telephone, Fax & Email addresses
14. Local Agent Name, Contact person, Address, Telephone, Fax & Email
addresses
15. Drawing reference
16. O & M Manual reference
17. Remarks

20th October 2021
B. The asset information database shall be submitted monthly in soft and hard copy
(as required) on a cumulative basis, i.e. updated database (that supersedes the
earlier submission) shall be provided at the end of each month.
C. The Employer shall confirm the Asset Coding structure and procedure to the
Contractor. The Asset Coding shall be designed to provide information (at first glance)
on the type of equipment and location of installation.
D. The Contractor shall identify all tangible assets by their respective unique Asset Codes
in all Contractor submitted shop drawings, and submittals. It is imperative that the final
As Built documentation refers to all assets by their unique Asset Codes.
1.13 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, CALCULATIONS,

SAMPLES & MOCK-UPS, CONSTRUCTION METHOD STATEMENTS, ETC.
A. Except for finish, color and other aesthetic matters left to the Engineer’s decision by
the Contract Documents, the Engineer’s review of shop drawings, catalogues,
samples, mockups and method statements submitted by the Contractor is only
for general conformance with the design concept and information given in the
Drawings and Specification. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for any deviations from the requirements of the Drawings and
Specification.
B. Certain materials, products and equipment submittals are likely to be reviewed

and approved by both the Employer and the Engineer. The Contractor will be
instructed accordingly by the Engineer. The Contractor shall present such
materials and samples as required by the Employer for review. The Contractor shall
make his submittals for such items with ample time for review of the Employer and the
Engineer.
C. The Engineer’s review and approval shall not be construed as a complete check nor
shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any kind in shop
drawings, method statements, or schedules, or from the necessity of furnishing any
work required by the Drawings and Specification, which may have been omitted on
the shop drawings. The Engineer /Engineer’s Representative will review shop
drawings and samples with promptness and will return them to the Contractor with the
Engineer stamp applied thereto. No acceptance or approval of shop drawings or
samples, nor any indication or request marked by the Employer or the Engineer on
any shop drawing, catalogue, sample or mock-up shall constitute an authorization for
any increase in the Contract Sum or Time for Completion.
D. Notations by the Engineer which may increase Contract Sum or Time for Completion
shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention with adequate details and substantiation
before proceeding with the works; otherwise any claim regarding this subject matter will
not be considered. All specific information regarding cost and schedule impacts, if any,
shall be provided at the time of notification. A general statement that there are cost and
schedule implications shall not be admissible at any time and the Engineer is not
obligated to respond to such statements from the Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall indicate on resubmitted shop drawings or method statements

or product data, all revisions not just those requested by the Employer and/or the
Engineer/ Engineer’s Representative.
F. The Contractor shall remain responsible for any and all inaccuracies in the
tabulation of quantities with in the shop drawings and all such quantities shall
correspond to the layout drawings submitted and shall be computed from the layout
drawings using computer software programs. The review and approval of such
submittals by the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative does not imply verification of
quantities shown on drawings.
G. The shop drawings approved or otherwise, shall not be the basis for measurement

20th October 2021
of quantities for evaluation of cost variations, unless expressly agreed by the Engineer.
H. The Contractor shall bear the cost of all reviews made by the
Employer/Engineer /Engineer’s Representative for all submittals made after three
(3) repeated reviews, unless they have been made due to reasons beyond the control
of the Contractor.
1.14 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall submit all his submittals such as shop drawings,
coordination drawings, catalogues, brochures, technical data, calculations, samples,
mock-ups, asset database, etc., at his own cost and in such sequence so as to cause
no delay in the Works or in the work of other contractors or subcontractors. No
extensions of time will be granted because of the Contractor’s failure to have these
submitted in ample time to allow for processing and review. Sub-contractors shall
submit shop drawings, coordination drawings, catalogues, brochures, technical data,
etc., through the Contractor. All submittals shall be sent to the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his Works, irrespective
of approval by the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative and shall pay all costs and
expenses incurred by the Employer as a consequence of the improper location of his
Works.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay (at no extra cost to the Employer)
for any alterations to the Works due to discrepancies, errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him whether such drawings and
particulars have been approved by the Engineer or not.
D. Following approval of the Engineer, the shop drawings and samples shall not be
departed from unless modified by variation order as provided under the Conditions of
Contract.
E. The shop drawings for concrete and structural steel and long delivery items shall
be submitted in advance of the start of the fabrication. This requirement should allow
sufficient time for review and any necessary revisions.
F. All shop drawings (for concrete and structural steel members and assemblies, curtain
wall assemblies, stone works and finishes) shall be stamped and approved for co-
ordination by all other associated contractors prior to submission by the Contractor.
G. All shop drawings for Contractor designed work such as structural steel connections /
details, curtain wall / cladding, stone works, etc., shall be stamped by licensed
professional engineers performing the design and engineering.
H. Elevations of walls shall indicate all electrical, telephone and other outlets, switches,
push buttons and any other accessories. The Contractor shall obtain the actual
dimensions from related contractors.
I. The Contractor shall submit detailed floor and ceiling plans, along with elevation
drawings of all walls and any associated special details in scale per ISO standards (1:20
minimum) for final acceptance of proposed work prior to proceeding with the
installation. The drawings should indicate the locations where the Contractor’s scope
requires co-ordination with other contractors.
J. A consistent and logical numbering system has been used for construction documents
and must be used for Contractor drawings and site drawings as directed by the
Supervision
K. Contractor shall be responsible for producing, updating and issuing a drawing index
monthly to Engineer, in soft and hard copies. The format shall be approved by the
Project Manager and the Engineer.

20th October 2021
L. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for the preparation of all
drawings necessary to provide those amplifications of drawings needed for
completion of the construction
1.15 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 30 days after the Date of Enterprise, submit list of major products proposed for
use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, provide names of manufacturer,

trade name, model or catalog designation including reference standards.
1.16 CHANGE OF DURATIONS
A. The Engineer may change any of the durations (other than the Contract Period) mentioned
in this section if he considers the change to be in the interest of the Contract.
1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: The Contractor, certain Subcontractors and

suppliers are required, as described elsewhere, to provide design, co-ordination,
installation, shop and builder’s working drawings, composite drawings for services co-
ordination with architectural and structural works and other information as appropriate,
collectively referred to as “shop drawings”. Allow for completion of all such drawings,
checking, inspection by the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative and any subsequent
amendment(s), re-submission(s), and re-inspection(s) when preparing the Construction
Schedule for the Works.
B. Checking by Contractor: Obtain all drawings in time to meet the programmed dates.
Thoroughly check all drawings from all sources to ensure that the various works,
installations and services do not conflict with each other or with the building structure,
fabric or finishes, either during construction or in the finished building. Note any such
discrepancies or divergences on one copy of the drawings, date and sign to show that
they have been checked then submit to the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative with
the required number of additional unmarked copies.
C. Engineer / Engineer’s Representative Review: The Engineer / Engineer’s

Representative will note any comments on one copy of the drawings, date and sign to
show that they have been inspected, then return to the Contractor. Review of drawings,
and any comments made by the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative will not relieve
the Contractor, subcontractors and/or suppliers of responsibility for compliance with
Contract requirements, design, documentation and checking as appropriate.
D. Amendments: Ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are made in

accordance with any comments of the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative and
resubmit without delay. Unless and until the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative
confirms that resubmission is not required, obtain copies of amended drawings, check,
resubmit to the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative ensuring incorporation of
necessary further amendments all as before.
E. Distribution of final version: Obtain final version of all drawings, submit the required
number of copies to the Engineer additional copies as appropriate to all concerned
subcontractors and suppliers, and keep at least one copy on Site. Ensure that work is
carried out in accordance with the final drawings.
F. Dimensions: Metric measurements shall be used in all documents and drawings.
G. Variations: If submitted drawings differ from requirements of the Contract Documents,

each such difference must be the subject of a request for substitution or variation,
supported by all relevant information. Should any amendment to drawings required by
the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative or any discrepancy or divergence that he

20th October 2021
may find be considered to involve or be a variation, notify the Engineer / Engineer’s

Representative without delay and in any case within 7 days, and do not proceed with
ordering, fabrication, erection or installation until subsequently instructed. Claims for
the extra cost of such work, if made after it has been carried out, may not be allowed
however any savings may be deducted from the Contract Sum.
H. Shop Drawings shall include detailed fabrication and erection drawings, setting out
drawings, diagrammatic drawings and materials schedules, together with relevant
samples.
I. Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which product or item is being
submitted for consideration and each product or item shall be marked for identification
with the applicable page and paragraph number of the Specification and/or the detail
and sheet number of the Contract Drawings.
J. Shop drawings shall include types, gauges and finishes of materials and show the
brand name and manufacturer’s type identification number where a shop coat of paint
is required.
K. Each set of shop drawings shall include sufficient data to permit a detailed study of the
product or system submitted.
L. Submit manufacturer’s or fabricators pre-printed product literature and data sheets,

normally transmitted in booklet or brochure form, in bound and indexed brochures. If
brochures contain sheets longer than A4, they shall be bound to allow them to be
unfolded for reading without being removed from the binding.
M. Composite Coordinated Drawings: Immediately after approval of individual trade

drawings, the Contractor shall submit composite drawings duly coordinated showing
cross sections, elevations, reflected plans, etc., resolving all conflicts in level,
alignment, access, space, etc.
N. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal

Procedures article and for Record Document purposes described in Section 01 72 00
1.18 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit to the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative Design data for the purpose of
assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in
Contract Documents.
1.19 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit to the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative Test Reports for information for the
purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept
expressed in Contract Documents.
1.20 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit Certification by

manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Engineer /
Engineer’s Representative, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1.21 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Quality Control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer’s

instructions, manufacturer’s field reports, and other quality-control submittals as
required under other Sections of the Specifications.
B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a

product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a

20th October 2021
notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified

requirements.
1. Certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer’s officer, or other individual

authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.
2. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test
reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Section 01400
Quality Requirements.
C. Manufacturer’s Certificates:
1. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s

certificate to Engineer / Engineer’s Representative for review, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
2. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference, date, affidavits and certifications as appropriate.
3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but

must be acceptable to Engineer / Engineer’s Representative.
1.22 SITE LAYOUT, SITE STAFF ORGANIZATION CHARTS AND METHOD STATEMENT
A. Site Layout and Safety Plan
1. Prepare and submit to the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative for approval

before commencing any construction activities a Site Layout and Safety Plan
and any modifications or relocations thereafter showing the Contractor’s
proposed layout of facilities on the Site.
2. The layout of facilities shall demonstrate safety considerations and provide

clear full details of location, capacity, etc., and shall include but not be limited
to:
a. Temporary facilities including site accommodations, storage areas,
Project ID signage, site fences, and gates, fixed cranes, hoists,
sanitary and toilet facilities, manholes, drain lines and pits.
b. Access points and access routes
c. Plant, generators, water tanks, storage areas.
d. Access for other Contractors, visitors and the like.
e. Temporary firefighting equipment types and locations.
f. First aid stations
g. Construction cleaning facilities and equipment.
B. Location of Contractors Facilities: The layout of the Contractor’s site offices and
storage areas is subject to the approval of the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative.
C. Contractor’s Site Staff Organization:
1. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date of commencement of the

mobilization period and before commencement of construction activity on site,
the Contractor shall submit a full listing of his proposed site staff for the
organization, management and supervision of the Works. The list shall include
all personnel from Project Manager through to foreman level and shall amplify
and reflect the details already given by the Contractor in the Site Organization
Chart submitted with his Tender and incorporated in the Contract. Such listing
shall be supported by authenticated details of the qualifications and experience

20th October 2021
of such personnel, (to the extent not previously submitted with the Tender and
incorporated in the Contract) for review and approval by the Engineer.
2. Before approving any Contractor’s staff, the Engineer shall have the right to
interview any of the Contractor’s proposed staff. Notwithstanding their approval
the Engineer retains the right to instruct the Contractor to remove any person
employed by him in or about the Works, who in the opinion of the Engineer,
misconducts himself, or is incompetent, or negligent in the proper performance
of his duties.
1.23 OVERTIME WORK
A. Whenever working outside normal hours is proposed, the Contractor shall request
approval from the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative giving not less than two
working days notice, specifying times, types and locations of work and approximate
number of men involved.
B. Concealed work executed outside normal hours for which approval has not been given
may be required to be opened up for inspection and reinstalled at the Contractor’s
expense.
1.24 CASH FLOWS ESTIMATES
A. From the Date of Enterprise the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer / Engineer’s
Representative monthly cash flow estimate covering the period from the Date of
Enterprise to end of the Defects Liability Period. Monthly cash flow estimates shall
show net figures after deduction of retention and shall compare actual against
estimated cash flows as work progresses.
1.25 DIGITAL RECORD
A. From the Date of Enterprise until issuance of certificate of substantial completion, the
Contractor shall digitally record using a proprietary system all correspondence, submittals
and written communications issued to the Contractor by the Engineer I Engineer’s
Representatives and issued by the Contractor to / through the Engineer / Engineer’s
Representatives. The digital recording system shall enable users to search the database
using key words for fast and easy retrieval of related correspondence. The digital recording
system shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative.
B. Only the following software shall be used for Contract related documents:
1. Drawings - Latest version of AutoCAD and Architectural Desktop - (from
Autodesk).
2. Correspondence - Microsoft Word from Office XP suite or later version.
3. Scheduling - Primavera Project Planner Latest Version.
4. Schedule related matrices, spreadsheets, and similar reports - Microsoft Excel
from Office XP suite or later version.
5. Project System - Primavera Contract Management (V13) or latest version. The
Contractor must provide and use this software in all Project coordination and
administration.
a) All information related to the scheduling, cost engineers, field,

document control, and any other related information must be stored on
the Primavera Contract Management database and must be available
any time through a local area network and internet connection for the
use of the Engineer, his representatives and any authorized personnel
by the Engineer in writing.

20th October 2021
b) The Contractor must purchase adequate number of licenses of the

specified software for the Engineer, the Engineer’s Representative,
plus adequate licenses for use by himself and his subcontractors' staff.
c) The Contractor must assure that his staff has knowledge and
experience on using the specified software and any other system
required for proper administration of the project. In case his staff
requires any training, then the Contractor must arrange for training
courses and must bear all expenses arising from such training
courses.
d) The Contractor must allow in his staff a full-time trained data entry
personnel to reside in the Engineer's offices for the collation and entry
of project data to the specified system.
e) The Contractor must provide install and confirm high-speed Internet

connection that can host a web server and can be accessed using
LAN network in the offices via an Internet server allowing all the staff
connected to the LAN to have access to the Internet. The connection
must be a minimum 10 MB bandwidth or higher with static IP address
and a registered domain name for the Project. The connection must be
running for 24 hours 7 days a week without any stop or interruption.
f) The Contractor must provide all software upgrades and maintenance

and bear all expenses arising from such upgrades as required.
C. On a monthly basis until substantial completion, the Contractor shall deliver to the
Engineer / Engineer’s Representative 3 sets of the complete updated digital record
database. Three (3) copies of the necessary software for accessing and reading the
material shall be delivered with the first month’s submittal.
1.26 THE ENGINEER AND ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE ACTION
A. The Engineer/Engineer's Representatives will review each submittal and return

promptly, compatible with the requirements of the review.
B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
C. Responsibility for Review:
1. The Engineer / Engineer's Representative’s review of submittals by the

Contractor is for general conformance with the design concept and information
given in the contract Documents and such review or approval shall not relieve
the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the requirements of
Contract Documents.
2. The Engineer / Engineer's Representative’s review shall not be construed as a

complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors
of any kind in submittals, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required
by the Contract Documents, which may have been omitted on the submittals.
The Engineer / Engineer's Representative will review and will return them to
the Contractor with the stamp applied thereto. No acceptance or approval of
submittals, nor any indication or request marked by the Engineer / Engineer's
Representative on any submittal, shall constitute an authorization for any
increase in the Contract Sum or Time for Completion or a change in the
Contract requirements.
3. The Contractor will not be relieved from responsibility for any deviation from
the requirements of the Contract after approval of submittals by the Engineer /
Engineer's Representative or such deviation at the time of submitting
submittals. The Contractor shall indicate on resubmitted submittals, all

20th October 2021
revisions as well as those requested by the Engineer / Engineer's

Representative.
4. Comments by the Engineer / Engineer's Representative which increase

Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention
before proceeding with the Works.
D. Action Stamp:
Each submittal will be returned to the Contractor stamped or marked by the Engineer /
Engineer's Representative indicating the appropriate action as follows:
1. “A” ACTION: The Contractor is advised that “A” action means “Approved”, and
that fabrication, manufacture, supply, construction or installation may be
undertaken, providing the work is in compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. “B” ACTION: The Contractor is advised that “B” Action means “APPROVED AS
NOTED” and that fabrication, manufacture, supply, construction or installation
may be undertaken, providing the work is in compliance with the Engineer’s
notations and the Contract Documents.
3. “C ACTION”: The Contractor is advised that “C” Action means “Revise and
Resubmit” and that fabrication, manufacture, supply, construction or installation
may not be undertaken until compliance with the Engineer’s notations and the
Contract Documents.
a. Submittals stamped “C” Action are not permitted on the Site and are
not to be used. The Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit no
later than (7) seven days of receipt of the reviewed submittal.
4. “R” ACTION: The Contractor is advised that “R” Action means “Rejected”
which means that submittals do not comply with the drawings and
specifications.
a. Submittals stamped “R” ACTION are not permitted on the site and are
not to be used. The Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit no
later than seven “7” days of receipt of the reviewed submittal.
b. If it becomes apparent that a submittal has not been coordinated by

the Contractor, it will be returned “R” ACTION for re-submittal without
any revisions or comments noted except “Drawing not coordinated-
resubmit“. No claim for delay to work at Site shall be accepted as a
result of unapproved submittals and/or due to delay in submittals or re-
submittals by the contractor.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his works
irrespective of approval by the Engineer and shall pay all costs and expenses
incurred by other Contractors, if any, due to improper location of his works.
6. After submittals have been approved by the Engineer they shall not be departed
from, unless resubmitted and approved by the Engineer or modified by Variation
Order as provided under the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 33 30
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of Shop Drawings,

Record Documents and As-Built Drawings and other miscellaneous quality control
submittals.
B. Shop Drawings, Record Documents and As-Built Drawings include, but are not limited
to the following:
1. Fabrication drawings
2. Installation drawings
3. Setting diagrams
4. Shopworn manufacturing instructions
5. Templates and patterns
Drawings prepared with standard information without specific reference to the Works
will not be approved as Shop Drawings, Record Documents and As-Built Drawings.
C. Quality control submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Design data
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. "Shop Drawings" shall establish actual plans, section and details of all construction
assembled, manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining
work, amplify design details whether or not included in contract drawings of all work
including but not limited to civil, architectural, interiors, mechanical, electrical and site
works in proper relation to physical spaces and incorporate minor changes of design
or construction to suit actual conditions at no increase in Contract Price.
B. As Built Drawings: “As Built Drawings” are drawings prepared by the Contractor
incorporating all the variations/changes/deviations to the contract drawings. They
represent the As-built conditions of the works completed.
C. "Record Documents" are a record of the works actually installed as the work
progresses including records of all changes and deviations from the Contract
Documents.
D. "Mock-ups" as specifically required and defined in the relevant specification sections

and in BOQ are either full size and scaled down assemblies for review of construction
sequencing, coordination, testing or operations computer and furniture.
1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES BY CONTRACTOR
A. Drawings - For approval, every time: Four (4) paper prints of each Shop Drawings,
As-Built Drawings and Record Documents with transmittal forms to the Engineer /
Engineer’s Representative. Four soft copies are required which includes CAD
drawings as well.
Gulf Consult Shop Drawings, Record Documents III-2/01 33 30 - 1

20th October 2021 & AS Built Drawings
B. Drawings - After approval, for record and distribution: Three (3) paper prints to the
Engineer / Engineer’s Representative and more to all concerned sub-contractors as
necessary. Four soft copies are required which includes CAD drawings as well.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS IF ANY
A. Should the Contractor be required to carry out any design, then design layouts
provided shall be for the purpose of general guidance. The Contractor is required to
submit full design shop drawings, complete with calculations, catalogues etc. Method
Statements are required for the Engineer’s review and approval before ordering
materials or proceeding with the work on site.
1.05 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING RESPONSIBILITY (AS APPLICABLE)
A. For any design work in the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
review and approval, names and credentials of their designers, including Professional
Indemnity Insurance cover, who will perform design services on behalf of the
Contractor and clearly identify the scope elements and areas covered therein. The
Contractor is also required to furnish the names of such designers, the equipment
and material they will be specifying with his Tender. The Contractor shall include, as
a minimum, the following design and engineering responsibilities.
1. All work items and systems noted in the specifications as the design and
engineering responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Work items and systems that are described in the specifications with
requirements to comply with certain performance parameters.
3. Concrete work that is modified by the Contractor.
4. Structural steel work modified by the Contractor.
5. Masonry work.
6. Structural steel connections, miscellaneous metal work and architectural
metal work.
7. Secondary steel, embeds, concrete and/or rebar work necessitated to install
mechanical, electrical, curtain wall, cladding and conveying systems.
(Secondary work includes works that are not part of the structural system, but
are required for installation of other building systems).
8. Any design and engineering of systems as indicated in Specification
Divisions 02 to 49 and as noted in Drawings, to provide a complete
installation.
9. All necessary design and engineering of supports for mechanical and
electrical installation, equipment and piping, including the provision of
additional bracing of structures as required in line with imposed loads.
10. All temporary facilities, equipment and installations; including any
modifications, reinforcements, supports, etc., to the permanent Works.
1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information drawing accurately to scale. Do not reproduce

Contract Documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of Shop
Drawings.
1. Include the following information on Shop Drawings.

a. Dimensions using SI units.

b. Identification of products and materials included.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Number shop drawings for each section of the works consecutively and the
numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.
3. Dimension: Metric measurements shall be used in all documents and

drawings.
4. The size of shop drawings will be either A0 or A3 depending upon the

content of the drawing and as agreed by the Engineer / Engineer’s
Representative.
5. Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's stamp and signature certifying that
they have been coordinated and checked by the Contractor for completeness
and compliance with the Contract and all respective Sub-Contractors, Vendors
and each subcontractor and each other contractor shall indicate his approval on
the original shop drawing/composite shop drawing.
In the event any one of the other Contractor’s employed or to be employed by

the Employer’s not on board in a timely manner, then coordination is to be
done based on design drawings made available by the Engineer. The
Engineer will not accept any shop drawing without this necessary
coordination step having been completed.
6. Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which product or item
is being submitted for consideration and each product or item shall be
marked for identification with the applicable page and paragraph number of
the Specification and/or the detail and sheet number of the Contract
Drawings.
7. The Contractor shall submit composite Shop Drawings coordinating the work
of his Sub-Contractors for mechanical, electrical, structural architectural and
site work. The composite drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall
dimensions of ductwork, piping conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural
members and related architectural features, and shall show clearance
between such works. The Contractor will, apart from individual trade
drawings submit composite co-coordinated shop drawings showing sections,
elevations, reflected plans etc. resolving all conflicts in level, alignment,
access space etc.
8. Shop Drawings shall show in detail, materials, dimensions, thickness,

assembly, joints, attachments, relation to adjoining work, and all other
pertinent data and information. In checking shop drawings, the Contractor
shall verify all dimensions and site conditions and shall check and coordinate
the shop drawings of any Section or Trade with the requirements of all other
Sections or Trades of other Contractors if any; as related thereto, as required
for proper and complete installation and execution of the works. The works
shall conform to the Contract Drawings or to such other Drawings as may be

issued from time to time during the progress of the Works by the Engineer /
Engineer's Representative.
9. The Contractor is required, as described elsewhere, to provide design (where

it is Contractor's responsibility to carryout design), co-ordination, installation,
shop and builder's drawings, Method Statements, composite drawings co-
ordinated between architectural, structural and services works and other
information as appropriate, collectively referred to as shop drawings. Allow
for the completion of all such drawings, checking and inspection by the
Engineer / Engineer's Representative and any subsequent amendment, re-
submission(s), and re-inspection(s), when preparing the Construction
Schedule for the Works and checking by Contractor.
10. Engineer / Engineer's Representative Review: The Engineer / Engineer's

Representative will note any comments on one copy of the drawings, date
and sign to show that they have been inspected, then return to the
Contractor. Review of drawings, and any comments made by the Engineer /
Engineer's Representative will not relieve the Contractor, Subcontractors
and/or Suppliers of responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements,
design, documentation and checking as appropriate.
11. Amendments: Ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are made
in accordance with any comments of the Engineer / Engineer's
Representative and resubmit without delay. Unless resubmission is not
required, obtain copies of amended drawings, check, re-submit to the
Engineer / Engineer's Representative ensuring incorporation of necessary
further amendments all as before.
12. Distribution of final version: Obtain final version of all drawings, submit the
required number of copies to the Engineer / Engineer's Representative
additional copies as appropriate to all concerned Subcontractors and
Suppliers, and keep at least one copy on Site. Ensure that work is carried
out in accordance with the final drawings.
13. Variations: Should any amendment to drawings required by the Engineer /

Engineer's Representative, or any discrepancy, or divergence be considered
a variation, notify the Engineer / Engineer's Representative without delay and
in any case within 7 days, and do not proceed with ordering, fabrication,
erection or installation until subsequently instructed.
1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. As the work progresses the Contractor shall maintain on a continuous basis a

complete and accurate record of all changes and deviations from the Contract
Documents which shall be kept at the Site for inspection by the Engineer or
B. The Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda, written amendments, variation/change orders and
written interpretations and clarifications in good order and indexed and annotated to
show all changes made to the works during construction.
C. These record documents together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all
approved shop drawings will be available to the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative
for reference. Upon completion of the Works, these record documents, samples and

shop drawings will be delivered to the Engineer / Engineer’s Representative for

Employer’s record.
D. After the Contractor has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates
or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record
documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for the
Substantial Completion Payment Application.
1.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish for the approval of the Engineer / Engineer's
representative accurate as built drawings incorporating the latest amendments
(Variations/Changes/ Deviations) to the Contract Drawings.
B. The as built drawings shall show the works as executed complete with existing and
finished levels and all other things necessary to form an accurate pictorial record of
the finished work.
C. Prior to the preparation of as built drawings the Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the Engineer / Engineers representative as to the list of the required drawings, size
of drawings, method of drawing and other relevant details.
D. All as built drawings shall be numbered and shall have a number series approved by
the Engineer /Engineers representative. A drawing index shall be provided.
E. The Contractor shall submit and resubmit till final approval by the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative, four numbers of copies during each submittal
and four soft copies are required which includes CAD drawings as well.
F. Finally submit after approval, properly identified in a permanent manner, hard copies
of sizes A0 and A2 (four sets each) with two sets hung in parts for the Engineer’s
approval, in mobile drawings racks, two sets hard bound and two sets as sepia
copies. Submit also two sets of CD’s in PDF format stored in box/es also properly
identified in a permanent way, of all as-built drawings using the latest format of
AutoCAD.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General
B. Additional Staffing
C. Quality Control of On-Site Construction
D. Quality Control of Off-Site and On-Site Operations
E. Schedule of Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan
F. Testing of Materials
G. Quality Control Reports
H. Latest Documents
I. On-site and Off-site Testing of Materials and Works.
J. Workmanship
K. Manufacturer’s Field Services.
L. Engineer’s Checking and Contract Administration Procedures.
M. Transportation and Handling
N. Installation Requirements
O. Product Acceptance Standards
P. Works Control Forms
Q. Tolerances
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work of other sections with the
work of this section. Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
specification includes but is not restricted to:
1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

2. Section 01 40 60 - Referenced Standards
3. Section 01 41 00 - Mock-ups
4. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
5. Section 01 72 00 - Project Record Documents
6. Section 01 91 00 - Final Cleaning
7. Section 01 92 00 - Closeout Procedures
Gulf Consult Quality Requirements III-2/01 40 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 GENERAL
A. Maintain Quality Control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, Site

conditions, workmanship and sub-contractors, to produce work of specified quality.
B. Provide and maintain effective Contractor Quality Assurance and Quality Control
(CQC) programs and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work,
including those of Sub-Contractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents.
Include surveillance and tests specified in the Sections of work of the Specifications.
Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments and testing devices required for
performance of the Quality Control function. Controls must be adequate to cover
construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence.
C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions in full detail, including each step in

sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, the most stringent
of them will apply.
1.04 QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. The Contractor’s Quality Management Plan shall include all activities of the overall
management function that determine the quality policy, objectives, and responsibilities
and implements them by means of quality planning, quality assurance, quality
control and quality improvement, within the quality system.
1.05 QUALITY PLANNING AND ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor’s Quality planning shall identify the quality standards that are
relevant to the Project and determine the ways to satisfy them. The Quality planning
shall identify the inspection and testing needs of materials and construction.
B. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance shall enable evaluation of the overall

performance on a regular basis.
1.06 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. The Contractor shall establish a Project specific Quality Management Plan based on
proven systems and standard procedures in conformance with ISO 9001 requirements.
B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer as soon as practicable and in no event
later than fifteen (15) days after receiving the Letter of Acceptance, a Project
specific Quality Management plan which shall include the procedures, instructions,
and records to be used.
C. Prior to submittal of the Quality Management plan for acceptance, the Contractor shall
meet with the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative to discuss the Quality system. The
meeting shall develop mutual understanding relative to details of the system,
including the forms to be used for recording the QC operations, inspection,
administration of the system, and the interrelationship of Contractor and Engineer’s
inspection.
D. The Contractor’s Quality Management Plan shall include the following:
1. Introduction addressing the Quality statement, policy, scope, purpose,

references, definitions, etc.

20th October 2021
2. Contractor’s organization and responsibilities. Specific QA/QC organization

relating to the Project.
3. Project specific Quality Planning, Assurance and Control.
4. The ISO 9001:2000 - 20 point Project Quality System requirements.
E. The elaborated Project Quality System requirements shall include as a minimum, the
following:
1. The QA/QC organization and qualification requirements of personnel.
2. Authority and area of responsibilities of the Contractor’s personnel. The

Contractor’s QA/QC Manager shall not have any duties other than the
implementation of the Quality program.
3. Plan for accomplishing Quality Control inspections including that for his
subcontractor’s work. (How, what, where, when and why).
4. Detailed listing and designation of all tests to be performed, list of Inspection

and Test Plans to be generated to cover all inspection and test activities.
(Include specimens of inspection and test formats). The Engineer will indicate
which tests may be performed by technicians employed by the Contractor
and those that must be performed by an approved independent testing
laboratory.
5. Documentation procedures for Quality Control operations, inspections and

testing.
6. A copy of a letter of direction to each Contractor’s representative responsible

for QA/QC, outlining his duties and responsibilities and signed by a
responsible officer of the Contractor.
7. A narrative discussion of how the Contractor’s QA/QC staff will accomplish

their assigned tasks.
8. An explanation as to how the Contractor’s QA/QC Plan relates to other staff

elements with regards to the shop drawing submittals, as-built drawings,
revisions to the Contract.
F. Subcontractors shall not have a separate Project quality plan. The Contractor shall
include any specific requirement of his subcontractor in his QA/QC Plan. In doing so,
the Contractor shall ensure that he fully coordinates with his subcontractors.
G. Construction operations will not commence until the Quality Management plan has
been approved by the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative. However, at the
instruction of the Engineer, the Contractor may be allowed to proceed on a specific
phase of construction for which the plan has been submitted and approved.
H. The Quality Management system shall be implemented by the establishment of a

separate QA/QC organization whose sole duty will be to ensure conformance to
the Contract of all contractual activities.
I. The Contractor’s QA/QC organization shall be sufficiently staffed to perform the

following tasks:

20th October 2021
1. Prepare detailed inspection and test plans for approval of Engineer.
2. Conduct phased inspections (preparatory, initial and follow-up) and approve

inspection and test plans.
3. Perform all testing required, witness and document.
4. Review and approve all shop drawing submittals.
5. Inspect materials as they are delivered on site to insure compliance with

approved shop drawings and Contract Specification.
6. Conduct off-site inspections of supply items fabricated or assembled

and services to be incorporated into the work. Provide monthly report of off-
site QC activities. The Contractor’s QC representative at the fabricating
plant shall be responsible for the release of the fabricated items for
shipment to the job site.
7. Maintain record of all QC activities. These records shall be available for the
Engineer’s and Engineer Representative’s use.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE - REVIEWS AND AUDITS
A. The Contractor shall establish processes for Quality reviews and audits.
B. The Contractor shall call in external third party quality auditors from an approved
agency to conduct audits at random, but not exceeding a period of two months to
audit the implementation of the Contractor’s Quality system employed on the Project.
1.08 QA / 1.QC ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall have a QA/QC Manager who shall have an experience of at
least fifteen (15) years in the field with extensive job specific experience.
B. The QA/QC Manager shall as a minimum be a qualified engineer with additional

qualifications and training pertaining to Quality Management.
C. The Contractor’s QA/QC Manager shall require prior approval of the Engineer’s
Representative and the Engineer.
D. The QA/QC Manager shall report directly to the Contractor’s Senior management in
Kuwait and in no case come under the hierarchy of the Contractor’s Project Manger’s
team.
E. The team of QA/QC personnel under the QA/QC Manager shall not report to the
Contractor’s Project Manager.
F. The Engineer/Engineer’s Representative have the authority to ask the Contractor to

remove any staff in the Contractor’s QA/QC team if the performance of the said
staff is not satisfactory. The replacement of such staff shall take place within ten (10)
days of the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative’s notice.
G. No staff shall be changed without the Engineer’s written consent. The Contractor’s
and sub contractor’s senior site Staff shall be fluent in technical English.
H. The Contractor shall have the full responsibility to ensure implementation of his

20th October 2021
subcontractors’ Quality Management system.
I. The QA/QC personnel employed by the subcontractors to the Contractor shall not
communicate directly with the Engineer or the Engineer’s Representative.
J. The QA/QC teams of the subcontractors shall perform their functions directly under
the authority of the Contractor’s QA/QC Manager.
K. No QA/QC personnel, either of the Contractor or his subcontractors shall take any
direction from the Contractor’s Site team that works under the authority of the
Contractor’s Project Manager.
1.09 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor’s Quality Control resources shall commensurate with the

requirements of the Project at any time, including provision for necessary mitigation
measures to counter own delays to any direct/subcontract activity. The Contractor
shall retain overall responsibility for this important coordination and shall be deemed
to have allowed for this in his Contract Price.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that all technical documentation are properly
produced, reviewed, controlled and submitted in accordance with the Project
specific requirements.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that the work is completed in accordance with the
quality requirement and in a safe manner.
D. The Contractor shall provide, in a timely manner, access to the inspection area,
instruments to carry out the tests, etc., for inspection of works, as well as copies
of relevant submittals and shop drawings, to the Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative.
E. The Contractor shall perform re-testing of materials or system where tests do not
meet the project specification. Any re-testing shall be done by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Employer and any time lost shall be mitigated at his own cost.
F. The Contractor shall arrange for internal and external training as required for their
staff to carry out the individual’s scope of works to meet the quality standards
required on this Project.
G. The Contractor shall provide for quality control by the employment of skilled
and competent management, supervisors and operatives. Only fully compliant work
shall be offered for inspection unless prior written (specific) approval of the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative has been obtained and in all such cases,
relevant documentation shall be presented during those inspections.
H. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Quality Control system that
complies with the Conditions of Contract and as further described herein. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that his subcontractors and suppliers
conform to the quality requirements as provided in the Contract Documents.
I. The Contractor shall establish a "Quality Control" (hereinafter referred to as QC)

system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of
his Sub-contractors, to ensure construction, finish, functional performance, and

20th October 2021
identification. This control shall be established for all construction work performed
pursuant to the Contract except where the technical provisions of the Contract
provide for specific control by inspections, test, or other means. The "Contractor's
Quality Control" (hereinafter referred to as CQC) system shall specifically include the
surveillance and tests required in the technical provisions of the Specification.
J. The CQC system is the means by which the Contractor assures himself that his
construction complies with the requirements of the Drawings and Specification. The
controls shall include as a minimum at least three phases of inspection for all
definable phases of construction as follows:
1. Preparatory Inspection: This inspection shall be performed prior to beginning

any work on any definable phase of construction and as shown in the
Contractor's schedule. It shall include a review of Contract requirements; a
check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,
submitted, and approved; a check to assure that provisions have been made
to provide required control testing; and plan mock ups when appropriate;
examination of work area to ascertain that all preliminary work has been
completed; and a physical examination of materials and equipment to assure
that they conform to approved shop drawings or submittal data and that all
materials and/or equipment are on hand. The Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative shall be notified at least twenty four (24) hours in advance of
the preparatory inspections and such inspections shall be made a matter of
record in the CQC documentation as required by paragraph hereinafter in this
section, entitled CQC reports.
2. Initial Inspection: This inspection shall be performed as shown in the

Contractor's Schedule and as soon as a representative portion of the
particular phase of construction has been accomplished and shall establish
the acceptable standard of workmanship, including a review of control testing
for compliance with Contract requirements, review of mock up, use of
defective or damaged materials, omissions, and dimensional requirements.
The Engineer/Engineer’s Representative shall be notified at least twelve (12)
hours in advance of the initial inspection and such inspection shall be made
a matter of record in the CQC documentation as required by paragraph
CQC Reports of this section.
3. Follow-up inspections: These inspections shall be performed daily to assure

continuing compliance with contract requirements, including control testing,
until completion of the particular phase of construction. The Contractor shall
give a notice period of at least twelve (12) hours in advance of each
inspection. Such inspections shall be made a matter of record in the CQC
documentation as required by paragraph CQC Reports of this section.
K. The Contractor shall give not less than one working day notice to the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative before covering up any works.
L. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) days of Letter of Acceptance (Date of
Enterprise), or contract signing, whichever comes first, report to the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative, the names and qualifications of personnel
assigned full-time to the QA & QC function for approval. The named personnel shall
prepare and submit, within thirty (30) days of Letter of Acceptance or contract signing

20th October 2021
whichever comes first, the QA/QC programs to the Consultant for approval and shall
remain as the basis of the QA/QC staff and program. The Contractor cannot
commence any work until the QC staff and program are approved.
M. If at any time during the life of the Contract the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative
determines the CA/QC staff is not capable of performing all the tasks listed above,
the Engineer may direct the Contractor to revise and/or supplement the present
organization structure at no additional cost to the Employer.
N. The Contractor shall not remove or relocate key CQC staff either within the Site or to
somewhere else, without the express approval of the Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative.
O. CQC Reports: The Contractor shall submit weekly QC report in triplicate not later
than the end of the following Saturday. The report shall contain a record of
inspections and tests for all work accomplished subsequent to the previous report
and shall include the following information:
1. Phase(s) of construction underway during the time frame of the report (i.e.
earthwork, concrete work, structural steel erection, etc.).
2. Phase inspection (preparatory, initial, or follow-up), phase of construction and

location of inspections and/or tests that were made.
3. Results of inspection, including nature of deficiencies observed and

corrective actions taken or to be taken.
4. Report of tests performed, including those specified, with the results of the
tests, including failures and remedial action to be taken. Test results,
including all computations shall be attached to the report form. Where test
results cannot be completed by the time the report is submitted, a notation
shall be made that the test was performed and the approximate date test
results will be available. Delayed test results shall be submitted with the
report form on the date received.
5. Results of inspection of materials and equipment upon arrival at the Site and
prior to incorporation into the work for compliance with submittal approvals,
damage and proper storage.
6. Instructions received from the Engineer’s Representative or inspector.
7. In all cases, the report must be verified and signed by the one person
delegated this responsibility by the Contractor. The verification is to contain
the statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in the work are in
compliance with the terms of the Contract except as noted.
P. The Contractor shall establish and maintain Quality records filing system, which shall
include, but not limited to the following:
1. Quality Assurance & Quality Control Plans/Programs.
2. Inspection and Test Plans.
3. Work and Material Inspection records.

20th October 2021
4. Test certificates, Mill certificates, Calibration certificates etc.
5. Concrete records, reinforcement records and structural steel erection

records.
6. Non-conformance reports, daily QC reports
7. Training records, on or off Site inspection records etc.
Q. Laboratories used to perform tests shall be approved by the Engineer/Engineer’s

Representative.
R. The Engineer or Engineer’s Representative reserves the right to utilize the

Contractor's control testing laboratory and equipment to make spot tests and to check
the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost
to the Employer.
S. If recurring deficiencies indicate that the CQC system, personnel, inspections, tests
and/or records are not providing adequate control, the Contractor shall take corrective
action as deemed necessary and directed by the Engineer or Engineer’s
Representative. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take
corrective action. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative
at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor
fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative may
issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has
been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the
subject for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
T. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed change to the
CA/QC system. No such change shall be implemented prior to concurrence in writing
by the Engineer.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL OF OFF-SITE AND ON-SITE OPERATIONS
A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit manufacturer's certificate,

in duplicate, those products meet or exceed specified requirements.
B. The CA/QC representative at the fabricating/manufacturing/assembling plant shall be

responsible to certify compliance with the contract requirements and for the release of
the related item for shipment to the Site. The CA/QC representative at the Site shall
note any damage incurred during shipment when the item is received at site. The
CA/QC shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition
throughout the period of on-Site storage and during erection, installation and
maintenance. Although any item may or may not be found to be faulty and may or
may not be rejected before it is used, final acceptance of an item by the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the
works and acceptance in the completed Contract.
1.11 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR QUALITY ASSURANCE & QUALITY CONTROL (CA/QC)

PLAN
A. Furnish a schedule outlining the procedure, instructions and reports to be used as

follows:

20th October 2021
1. Quality Control Organization.
2. Qualification of personnel.
3. Authority and responsibility of personnel.
4. Schedule of inspections and tests with personnel assigned to each task and
duration of each task.
5. Test methods.
6. Methods of performing and documenting control operations.
1.12 TESTING OF MATERIALS
A. All materials and work will be tested as required in the Specifications and or as and
when required by the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative. Testing shall be
performed by the Government Centre for Testing and Laboratories – MPW, or an
independent agency approved by the Engineer and the Contractor shall pay all fees
in connection therewith.
B. The Contractor shall allow for all necessary labour, containers, wrappings and
labelling in connection with the samples for testing and for all transport charges.
C. Samples for testing will be taken at the place of origin, or working site or from the
works as appropriate and as required by the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative.
D. The Contractor shall provide all facilities required on site, for testing work which will
be
1.13 CONTRACTOR’S ASSISTANCE TO EMPLOYER
A. Assistance for Employer’s Testing Laboratory: The Employer may engage, at its
own expense, qualified testing laboratories to monitor the Contractor’s Quality
Control Program. The activities of the Employer’s testing laboratories are solely at
the discretion of the Employer and in no way relieve the Contractor of sole
responsibility for maintaining the Quality Control Program. The Employer’s testing
laboratories will perform independent inspections and tests, interpret and evaluate the
results for compliance with the Contract Documents, record observations and
submit reports. The Contractor is responsible for the following items.
1. Notify the Employer’s Testing Laboratory and the Consultant at least 1 day in
advance before installing Work to be tested.
2. Furnish casual labor required to facilitate testing
3. Furnish material samples and access materials as required for testing
4. Furnish storage facilities for material test samples
5. Furnish full and ample means of assistance for monitoring the Contractor’s
Quality Controlperformed by the approved Testing Agency and paid for under
this Contract.

20th October 2021
1.14 QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS
A. Inspections shall be recorded and submitted daily on approved forms certifying items
correctly installed and items found to be defective with a statement on corrective
measures taken.
1.15 LATEST DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor's Quality Assurance & Quality Control program shall provide for
procedures which will assure that the applicable portions of the Contract Documents,
Shop Drawings and instructions required by the Contract are used for fabrication,
testing and inspection.
1.16 ON SITE AND OFF-SITE TESTING OF MATERIALS AND WORKS
A. All materials and work will be tested as required in the Specifications and Testing
shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense at approved testing agency or
laboratory.
The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer to the tests to be
conducted at any or all of the above facilities.
B. The Contractor shall allow for all necessary labour, containers, wrappings and
labelling in connection with the samples for testing and for all transport charges.
C. Samples for testing will be taken at the place of origin, or working site or from the
works as appropriate and as required by the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.
D. The Contractor shall provide all facilities including testing equipment in connection
with tests required to be conducted at site.
E. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all measuring and testing devices,
equipment, instruments and supplies necessary to accomplish the required on site
and off-site testing and inspection. All measuring and testing devices shall be
calibrated periodically against certified standards.
1.17 WORKMANSHIP
A. Work to be carried out by and under supervision of experienced trade persons skilled
in their field, to produce workmanship of specified quality.
B. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, racking, physical distortion or disfigurement.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples.
E. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids or
date specified in Product Sections.
F. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents and submit them
to Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.

20th October 2021
G. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
H. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the
Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.18 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, required material or product

suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of
equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer/Engineer’s Representative thirty (30)

days in advance of required observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or

installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.19 ENGINEER'S CHECKING AND CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION PROCEDURES
A. To facilitate the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative checking of the quality of

workmanship, compliance with Specifications, etc., the Contractor shall submit signed
"Request for Inspection" or "Check" lists, in a format approved by the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative. The list shall be deemed to constitute:
1. A request by the Contractor for the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative to

inspect the preparation or completion of a certain element of the work in a
particular location before proceeding with the next stage in such work.
2. A representation by the Contractor to the effect that the work for which he is
requesting inspection has been properly coordinated between all trades,
complies with the applicable Specifications, shop drawings and other data
included in the Contract or approved by the Enginner/Engineer’s
Representative, and is complete in itself and ready for such inspection and for
the next stage of related work.
B. "Check Lists” shall be dated and numbered in approved sequence and submitted for
each of the elements of the Works. Each "Check List" shall be signed by all
concerned Sub-Contractors thereby warranting that all trades have been properly
coordinated and completed prior to the "Check List” submission.
C. Contractor shall allow for atleast “24 hours” for approval of any checklist.
D. Signature of all concerned electrical and mechanical subcontractors required by the

preceding sub-clause, such sub-contractors shall also submit, to the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative through the Contractors, “Request for
Inspection” for all electrical and mechanical elements of the works upon completion
and testing of sections thereof, prior to embedding in concrete and covering up with
finishes. Mechanical and Electrical “Request for Inspection” shall be signed by the
Contractor and his concerned sub-contractor on a form and in a manner as required
and approved by the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.

20th October 2021
1.20 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packaged and protected to

prevent damage during transportation and handling.
B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the
Technical Sections.
1.21 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,

connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective
manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1.22 PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 01600: Product Requirements
1.23 WORKS CONTROL FORMS
A. Format of required Works Control Forms to be provided to the Contractor at the

commencement of the Works and updated/supplemented as may be necessary from
time to time thereafter. The Contractor will be required to utilize these formats/forms
as directed by the Engineer.
1.24 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installations tolerance control of products to produce

acceptable work. Do not permit tolerance to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers tolerances: When manufacturers’ tolerances conflict with

Contract Documents, contractor to request clarification from Engineer’s
Representative before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions position before securing products in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 40 10
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 BUILDING CODES
A. All reference to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to in the

Contract Documents shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition,
amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these
Tender Documents. The Contractor shall have a copy of the latest edition of all
codes, standards and technical literature referenced in the Contract Documents, kept
on the project site, maintained in good order and available to the Engineer and
Engineer's Representative at all times.
B. The following standards and codes, in their latest edition unless specified otherwise,
shall be particularly applied to the works covered by these Specifications. Where no
such standard exists, as for example in the case of patents or special materials, all
such materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality, and full details of the
materials and any tests to which they are subject, will be submitted to the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative for approval.
1.02 GOVERNMENT AGENCIES
A. The following list of Government Agencies is not intended to be exhaustive and the
Contractor shall carry out all works in strict accordance with current Codes and
Regulations of all Government Agencies, whether listed hereunder or not.
a. The Kuwait Municipality (KM).
b. The Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
c. The Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW).
d. The Ministry of Communication (MOC).
e. The Kuwait Fire Force (KFF).
f. The Roads and Drainage Department of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
g. The Kuwait Oil Fueling Company (KOFC)
h. The Ministry of Health (MOH)
i. The Ministry of Interior (MOI)
j. Kuwait Oil Tankers Co. (KOTC)
k. Kuwait National Petroleum Company (KNPC)
l. Kuwait Oil Company (KOC)
m. Ministry of Defense (MOD)
Gulf Consult Regulatory Requirements III-2/01 40 10 - 1

20th October 2021
n. Environmental Public Authority, Kuwait (EPA)
o. Public Authority for Agriculture & Fish Resources (PAAFAR)
p. Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA)
1.03 TECHNICAL LITERATURE
A. Provide to each, the Engineer and Engineer's Representative with one complete, latest
edition copy of standard specifications referred to in these documents and one copy of all
manufacturer's catalogues and the like dealing with proprietary products specified or
proposed as substitutes. Make such submissions within three months of the Date of
Enterprise or, in the case of substitute materials, as soon thereafter as is reasonably
practicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Regulatory Requirements III-2/01 40 10 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 40 60
REFERENCE AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of Contract

Document II. Supplementary definitions are as noted below.
B. Where "as shown", "as indicated", "as detailed", or words of similar import are used, it
shall be understood that reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specifications is
made, unless otherwise stated.
C. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful
orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and
agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
D. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
E. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site, including the actual
unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring,
applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar
operations.
F. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use.
G. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor,

either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular
construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to
perform.
1. The term "experienced", when used with the term "installer", means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and
scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated;
and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain
construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter". It also does
not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades persons of the
corresponding generic name.
3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that

specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are
recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for
those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the
Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling
contract requirements remains with the Contractor.
a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing

building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also
not intended to interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional
settlements and similar conventions.
H. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction
activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part
Gulf Consult Reference and Standards III-2/01 40 60 - 1

20th October 2021
of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may
not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
I. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform

specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on
and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
J. Abbreviations and Symbols: The following abbreviations are used in the Documents
and Drawings:
Kg Kilogram
m or M Meter
mm Millimeter
cm Centimeter
m2 or M2 Square meter
m3 or M3 Cubic meter
No Number
IT or Item Item
t or T Tonne
Hrs Hours
Mths Months
L Liter
LS Lump sump
Should different but similar abbreviation/s be used in the various Tender Documents,
the Tenderer shall obtain confirmation about its/their true meaning during the Tender
Period.
1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
based on the 49-Division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.
B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used
in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other

Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted
as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the
sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words
interpreted as singular as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective
language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled
indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall", "shall be", or "shall comply with", depending on the
context, are implied where a colon { : ) is used within a sentence or
phrase.

20th October 2021
1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry codes, regulations, specifications and
standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the
Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such codes, regulations, specifications
and standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by this reference and the
Contractor shall comply therewith.
B. Publication Dates: All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards

referred to in the Contract Documents shall, unless otherwise stated, mean .the latest
edition amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of
these Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified

and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities
or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement or as directed by the
Engineer. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently equal
to the Engineer/Engineer's Representative for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or

specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation
may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may
exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the
Engineer" Representative for a decision before proceeding.
D. Within 21 days from the date of signing the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer adequate proof that the referenced codes, regulations and standards have
been ordered or are in the Contractor's possession and available for use on site.
Failure to provide this proof within the said 21 days or to have the codes etc. on site
within 30 days of the Date of Enterprise shall entitle the Engineer to purchase the
referenced codes, regulations and standards and the costs will be recovered from the
Contractor.
E. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product

complies with Federal Specification, British Standards Institute, American Society of
Testing and Materials, American National Standards Institute or other association,
standards, etc., the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer
certifying that the product complies therewith. Where requested or specified, submit
supporting test data to substantiate compliance.
F. Where reference standards referred to herein are in the form of a recommendation or

suggestion, such recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory
under this Contract, unless conflicting with the particular specifications contained
herein.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for adherence to referenced standard requirements by

Subcontractors and suppliers.
H. Decision as to acceptability of a proposed alternative referenced standard will be solely the

Engineer’s Representative’s prerogative.
I. Where reference is made to manufacturer’s directions, instructions or specifications they

shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing, erecting,
applying or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their use in the Works and
their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated.

20th October 2021
J. Submit a copy of each code, referenced standard and specification, and manufacturer’s
directions, instructions and specifications, to which reference is made in the Specification to
the Engineer’s Representative.
K. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards
are frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the
trade association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or
other entity applicable to the context of the text provision.
L. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards
are frequently abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in
the Contract Documents, mean the associated names. Unless otherwise stated the
following abbreviations and names are from the U.S.A.:
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADC Air Diffuser Council
AFI Air Filter Institute
AGCA Association General Contractors of America
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIMA Acoustical & Insulating Materials Association
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Eng.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALS American Lumber Standards
AMCA American Moving & Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
OAC Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
AWl Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPI American Wood Preservers institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

20th October 2021
BrA Brick Institute of America

BRI Building Research Institute
BRE Building Research Establishment (UK)
BS British Standard Specification
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
BSI British Standard Institute
CDA Copper Development Association
CEE International Commission on Rules for Approval of Electrical
Equipment (Europe)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
DIN Deutsches institute for Normung
EWS Engineered Wood Association
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
FS Federal Specification
FSIW A Federation of Sewage & Industrial Waste Association
FTI Facing Tile Institute
GA Gypsum Association
GTA Glass Tempering Association
HPMA Hardwood plywood Manufacturers Association
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers of London (UK)
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineering (UK)
IES Illuminating Engineering Society (UK)
ISO The International Organization for Standardization
KFF Kuwait Fire Force
KSS Kuwait Standard Specification
MEW Ministry of Electricity and Water (Kuwait)
MIA Marble Institute of America
MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturers Association
MPW Ministry of Public Works (Kuwait)
MSSVFI Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
Industries
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NAFM National Association of Fan Manufacturers
NAPF National Association of Plastic Manufacturers
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association

20th October 2021
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association

NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code (NpF A No.70)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMI National Elevator Manufacturing Industry, inc.
NFC National Fire Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NHPMA National Hardwood & Pine Manufactures Association.
NPA National Particleboard Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSC National Safety Council
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
NWC National Water Council (UK)
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PCI Pre-stressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (USA)
PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
PS Product Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
RTI Resilient Tile Institute
SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joint Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SMFMA Sprayed Mineral Fiber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation U. S Dept of Commerce
SSPC Steel Structure Painting Council
SWFPA Structural Wood Fiber Products Association
TCA Tile Council of America
TEC Touristic Enterprises Company(Kuwait)
TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturing Association
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
TPI Truss Plate Institute

20th October 2021
UL Underwriters Laboratories, inc.

UPC Uniform. Plumbing Code
USGS U.S. Geodetic Survey
WCLB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
1.04 TECHNICAL LITERATURE
A. Provide to each, the Engineer and the Engineer's Representative with one complete,
latest edition copy of all standard specifications referred to in these documents and
further copies as necessary of all manufacturers' catalogues and the like dealing with
proprietary products specified or proposed as substitutes. Make such submissions
within three months of the Date of Enterprise or earlier as required by the Contractor's
construction schedule or in the case of substitute materials, as soon thereafter as is
reasonably practicable.
1.05 GOVERNMENT AGENCIES (LOCAL AUTHORITIES)
A. The following list of Government Authorities is not intended to be exhaustive and the
Contractor shall carry out all works in strict accordance with current Codes and
regulations of all Government Authorities whether listed hereunder or not:
a. The Touristic Enterprises Company(TEC)
b. The Kuwait Municipality (KM).
c. The Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
d. The Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW).
e. The Ministry of Communication (MOC).
f. The Kuwait Fire Services Directorate (KFSD).
g. The Roads and Drainage Department of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
h. The Kuwait Oil Fueling Company (KOFC)
i. The Ministry of Health (MOH)
j. The Ministry of Interior (MOI)
k. Kuwait Oil Tankers Co. (KOTC)
l. Kuwait National Petroleum Company (KNPC)
m Kuwait Oil Company (KOC)
n. Ministry of Defense (MOD)
o. Environmental Public Authority, Kuwait (EPA)
p. Public Authority for Agriculture & Fish Resources (PAAFAR)
q. Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 41 00
MOCK-UPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. General: Provide and coordinate mock-up assemblies at Project site for Engineer's
review and acceptance, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for mock-up requirements. Generally, without
limitation, mock-ups on site include the following:
1. Mock-ups of individual pieces and assemblies of the work, as specified herein,

and/or within individual Specification Section.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the work of the related
Specification Sections so that each mock-up meets the specified requirements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings of Mock-Ups: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication,
installation and erection of all parts of each mock-up. Provide plans, elevations, and
details of anchorages, connections and accessory items.
B. Photographs of Mock-Ups: Submit photographs of mock-ups after completion of

installation and acceptance of each mock-up.
C. Samples: Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements of

mock-up components and coordinate accordingly.
A. Design Modifications: Make design modifications to work only as required to meet

performance requirements and to coordinate the work. Indicate proposed design
modifications on shop drawings. Maintain original design concept without altering
profiles and alignments indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide materials, components, and products for exterior wall assembly mock-up as
specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to PART 3, EXECUTION portions of the various Specification Sections for specific
requirements regarding condition of surfaces installation, erection, and erection
tolerances.
Gulf Consult Mock Ups III-2/01 41 00 - 1

20th October 2021
3.02 MOCK-UPS
1. Materials: Use identical materials and finishes, details, and anchorage systems
proposed for use in each required system of work. Simulate actual construction
conditions as accurately as possible. Provide extra materials as may be required to
replace any that may fail during tests. Glass used in the mock-up shall be cut to
minimum tolerances expected in the final curtain wall installation.
2. Correct any deficiencies in the mock-up observed during construction. Incorporate

corrective measures into the final wall assemblies after review by the Engineer.
3. Timing of Mock-Up: Mock-up shop drawings must be submitted within Forty-five (45)
days of the Date of the Commencement of the Work.
3.03 OTHER MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-ups of types and sizes required by individual Specification Sections to

evaluate and set the standard of quality for that work. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of
visual qualities prior to commencing work that individual mock-up is intended to
represent. Protect and maintain approved mock-ups throughout the work of the
Contract. Locate mock-ups at the Project site as directed by Engineer.
1. Provide as many mock-ups as required until Engineer's approval has been

received.
2. When indicated in individual Specification Sections, approved mock-ups may

be incorporated into the finish work.
3.04 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
A. Demolish and remove mock-ups from site at the completion of the Project. Legally
dispose of demolished mock-up materials.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Mock Ups III-2/01 41 00 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 45 80
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating

construction operations including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Selection and payment.
2. Quality Assurance
3. Contractor submittals.
4. Laboratory responsibilities.
5. Laboratory reports.
6. Limits of testing laboratory authority.
7. Contractor’s responsibilities.
8. Laboratory at Site
9. Schedule of inspections and tests.
10. Out of Country Equipment Inspection or /and test witness
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C802 Practice for Conducting and Interlaboratory Test Program to Determine
the Precision of Test Methods for Construction.
B. ASTM C1021 Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants.
C. ASTM C1077 Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
D. ASTM C1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
E. ASTM D290 Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.
F. ASTM D3740 Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
G. ASTM D4561 Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing
Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.
H. ASTM E329 Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing Agencies as
Used in Construction.
I. ASTM E543 Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing
Agencies.
J. ASTM E548 Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing
Laboratories and Inspection Bodies.
K. ASTM E699 Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing,
Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building. Components in Accordance
with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E6.
Gulf Consult Testing Laboratory Services III-2/01 45 80 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Employment and payment for services of either the Government Centre for Testing and
Laboratories - MPW or any other testing laboratory approved by the Engineer’s
Representative to perform specified inspecting and testing, shall be by Contractor.
B. For landscaping Works, employ or pay for services to laboratories of Public Authority for
Agriculture and Fisheries (PAAF) or Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research (KISR) or any
other testing laboratory approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
C. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves the Contractor of obligation to perform

Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C802, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM
D3740, ASTM D4561, ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM E548, ASTM E699.
B. Laboratory: Authorised to operate in the State of Kuwait for a minimum of five years.
C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
D. Testing Equipment: Equipment shall be generally as specified in General Specifications for

Kuwait Motorway/Expressway System of the Roads Administration of the MPW, 1987 edition
and to the standards specified in the latest editions of ASTM’s for the Materials and Products
not covered by the said MPW edition. Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an
accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural
physical constants.
1.05 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and
names of full time registered Engineer.
1.06 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Test samples of materials and products submitted by Contractor.
B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer's Representative and Contractor
in performance of services.
C. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified
standards.
D. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Promptly notify Engineer's Representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work Products.
F. Perform additional inspection and tests required by Engineer's Representative.
G. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

20th October 2021
1.07 LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two (2) copies of laboratory report to
Engineer's Representative and to Contractor.
B. Include:
1. Date issued,
2. Contract title and number,
3. Name of inspector,
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection,
5. Identification of product and specifications section,
6. Location in the Contract,
7. Type of inspection or test,
8. Date of test,
9. Results of tests,
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
C. When requested by Engineer's Representative provide interpretation of test results.
1.08 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract

Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, samples of materials and products proposed to

be used which require testing.
B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
C. Provide incidental labour, transport and facilities:

1. to provide access to Work to be tested
2. to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested
3. to facilitate tests
4. to facilitate inspection by the Engineer's representative.
5. to provide storage of test samples.
D. Notify Engineer's Representative and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring inspecting and testing services.
E. Re-testing and re-inspection required because of non-conformance for specified requirements

shall be performed by same independent firm on instruction by the Engineer or Engineer’s
Representative. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be the full responsibility of the
Contractor and at no extra cost to the Contract Sum. Any re-inspection cost incurred by the
Employer will be deducted from the Contract Sum.
1.10 LABORATORY AT SITE
A. Provide Type ‘C’ laboratory on site for tests to be conducted on site.

20th October 2021
B. The Contractor shall also note that tests which cannot be conducted in the site laboratory
shall be conducted at an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer’s Representative
for products and installations as listed below and/or as specified in the Technical
Specifications.
1.11 SCHEDULE OF TESTS
A. Third Party Testing Agency for Investigation and Certification
The Contractor shall note that the Third Party Testing Agency/Certification shall mean any
Agency or Professional Body or Consultant or Testing Agency, anywhere in the world that is
hired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer to carry out any specialized but not
limited to Inspection, Review, Testing, & Commissioning etc. of the respective works executed
by the Contractor.
Contractor shall appoint Thirty Party Testing Agency for Investigation and Certification for the
works as detailed in the Documents. The Third Party Testing Agency shall be appointed by
the Contractor and approved by the Employer. The required Tests for the Equipment, or any
other requirement shall be tested by this Agency for acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 50 50
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Temporary Utilities:
1. Temporary light and power
2. Temporary heating.
3. Temporary cooling.
4. Temporary ventilation.
5. Telephone service.
6. Facsimile service.
7. Temporary water service.
8. Temporary sanitary facilities.
9. Temporary Drainage
10. Temporary Fire Protection
11. Temporary Coverings
12. Temporary Construction Openings
13. Temporary Storage and Plant
14. Temporary Stairs, Scaffolding, Ladders, Ramps etc.
15. Temporary Material and Personnel Hoists
B. Temporary Vehicular Access and Parking Facilities

1. Vehicular access.
2. Parking.
C. Temporary Kitchen Facilities
D. Temporary Site Security
E. Temporary Controls:
1. Barriers and Enclosures
2. Security.
3. Water control.
4. Dust control.
5. Erosion and sediment control.
6. Noise control.
7. Pest control.
8. Pollution control.
9. Rodent control.
F. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.
G. Protection Against Exposures
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's Representative's approval, fully
dimensioned details of his proposed layout (based on drawing and/or information
provided) of temporary site accommodations and storage materials areas,
Gulf Consult Construction Facilities & Temporary III-2/01 50 50 - 1

20th October 2021 Controls
showing access routes to or upon the site, fences and gates, (only as required)
location of Contractor's offices with accommodation, details, personnel
accommodation (senior and junior) including canteen facilities, sanitary
accommodation, location of Fire Fighting, first aid stations and the like, storage
areas and all other things necessary for the execution of the Contract.
2. Except as stated otherwise, all such temporary work shall be executed,
maintained, operated and relocated whenever necessary by the progress of work,
and under the Engineer's Representative direction, at the Contractor's own
expense. All shall be cleared away and the areas cleaned on completion of the
Contract and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for providing, maintaining and
operating an approved system for refuse collection surface water drainage and
sewage disposal for the duration of the Contract and for clearing away. De-
odorizing, sterilizing and backfilling same as necessary upon completion to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
4. Adequate and proper provision shall be made for the storage and protection of
materials, plant and equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.
5. All temporary facilities shall be constructed to the standards for similar permanent
facilities.
6. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed the cost of his office in the Tender
Price which shall be reasonable. The Contractor offices shall be taken away by
the Contractor as his property at the end of the Contract.
7. Provide and maintain all temporary connections to utilities and services in
locations and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, Engineer's Representative
and local authorities having jurisdiction thereof. Remove temporary installations
and connections, and restore the services and sources of supply to proper
operating condition at the completion of the Works.
8. Temporary fencing and gates to areas of work and storage to details indicated on the
drawings and to temporary site accommodation and storage and workshop areas.
Barricades around hazardous open areas, openings in slabs, stair wells, excavations,
etc.
9. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the relevant authorities' approval to
construct all temporary facilities and include any necessary fees and/or charges.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary Light and Power

1. Make all arrangements for temporary electrical service to the construction site,
pay all expenses, provide all equipment necessary for temporary power and
lighting. The electrical service shall be of adequate capacity for all construction
tools and equipment (including welding equipment) without overloading the
temporary facilities and shall be made available for power, lighting and
construction operations of all trades. All temporary supply shall be through
Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW) intakes and the required power shall
cover HVAC, Mechanical and all other loads as required. However, if temporary
supply is not granted by the Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW), then the
Contractor must make his own arrangements through Generators for providing
supply of electricity in order to complete the works.

2. Provide main feeding power points, as required throughout the Works for power
tools of all kinds. Termination of power distribution shall be at locations approved
by the Engineer's Representative. Termination shall be provided complete with
circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as required to
protect the power supply system.
3. Temporary lighting system shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as
required to satisfy minimum requirements of safety and security. Temporary
lighting system shall be adequate for illumination with minimum 500 lux in office
area and 200 lux in corridors. Where work is being performed at night, increase
the illumination level. The Contractor shall provide adequate outdoor lighting to
illuminate staging, stockpiles, trenches, projections, etc., to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative and general illumination throughout, adequate for
watchmen and emergency personnel and all other persons.
4. Temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance
with the applicable provisions of the governing codes. Temporary wiring shall be
maintained in a safe manner and utilized so as not to constitute a hazard to
persons or property.
5. All temporary light and power installations shall conform to the requirements and
standards of MEW.
6. At the completion of the works remove all temporary electrical equipment and
wiring.
B. Temporary heating.
1. Refer Section 01 52 10 for Field Offices and Sheds
C. Temporary cooling.
D. Temporary ventilation
1. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity and
so prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapours or gases.
E. Telephone service
F. Facsimile service
G. Temporary Water Service

1. Furnish all water required for the performance of the Contract. All water shall be clean,
drinkable and free of deleterious substances. No brackish water is allowed to be
used for construction of the Works. Water outlets shall be conveniently located for
Sub-Contractors and other Contractors, about the Site at ground level. All costs
of providing temporary water and running costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
Provide an adequate supply of drinking water from approved sources of
acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled, for employees. where required, furnish
drinking water in suitable containers and provide hygienically clean cups for use
of employees. Drinking water dispensers shall be conveniently located where
work is in progress.
2. Make provisions for drainage or collection of excess or spilled water.

3. These facilities to remain in operation until the completion of the Works, then
remove all temporary water service equipment and piping.
H. Temporary Sanitary Facilities

1. The sanitary accommodation at the ground level shall comprise temporary toilet
building(s) in an approved location, of approved construction in compliance with
the local authority having jurisdiction.
2. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the
facilities ready for inspection by such authorities whenever requested.
3. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary.
4. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than this facility shall be
immediately removed from the site.
5. Remove at completion of the Works.
I. Temporary Drainage
1. Upon taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for draining rainwater, ground water and water arising from construction
processes. Also the Contractor shall provide and maintain such temporary
drainage installations as may be necessary during the period of construction in a
manner approved by the Engineer's Representative and so as not to adversely
affect the permanent works or adjacent areas and properties.
2. Temporary drainage installations (storm water and foul water) may be connected
to existing drains provided written permission is obtained from the local
authorities that have jurisdiction thereof, and provided such connection work is
executed and maintained in strict accordance with those authorities' regulations
and directions.
3. At completion of the work, or at such times as the Engineer's Representative may
direct, remove all temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the
Engineer's Representative satisfaction and as required by the concerned
authorities.
J. Temporary Fire Protection

1. Provide all fire fighting facilities and equipment required by the Kuwait Fire Force,
whether or not specifically detailed herein.
2. Ensure that no fires are lit, in or about the Site, and take all reasonable
precautions to avoid outbreaks of fire on the works, temporary works, offices,
stores and other places and things connected therewith. Especially with respect
to the safe storage of petroleum products, paints, explosives and other
combustible, dangerous or hazardous goods. Comply with all rules, regulations
and orders, which are made by local authority having jurisdiction, and provide and
maintain in good order and hold available at all times, and in all places connected
with the works a sufficiency of efficient fire fighting facilities and equipment
together with personnel trained in its use.
3. The type, location and sufficiency of the fire fighting facilities and equipment shall
be to the Engineer’s or engineer’s Representative’s satisfaction. Such
facilities/equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following :-
a. Temporary standpipe system (min. 100mm dia steel) with landing valves
and 30m cradled fire hoses with nozzles. The number of hose stations

around the site shall be approved by the Engineer, or Engineer’s

Representative and shall be sufficient to ensure that all parts of the
permanent works are within effective reach of water hoses.
b. Provide one 4.5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher (non CFC type) adjacent
to each hose station and at any other location requested by the Engineer
or Engineer’s Representative.
4. Take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and torch cutting
operations as follows:
a. Welding or torch cutting operations shall be carried out only in well
ventilated spaces having no combustible materials in the vicinity, and
preferably in an area designated and used exclusively as a 'welding
shop.'
b. Where welding or torch cutting operations are carried out in-situ,
surrounding areas shall be suitably protected by the covering or
screening off, and suitable portable fire extinguishers shall be kept
immediately available with an attendant standing-by.
c. The number of gas cylinders in any working area and the storage of such
cylinders, full or empty, shall be in accordance with the FOC leaflet,
"Precautions to be observed in connection with the use of gas or electric
welding and cutting apparatus".
5. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from 'UL'
listed safety containers and in conformance with requirements of the local fire
authority. Storage shall not be within the building.
6. Tarpaulins used during construction work shall be made of material, which is
resistant to fire, water and weather. Tarpaulins shall have 'UL' approval and
comply with US Federal Specifications CCC-D-746.
7. Make all arrangements for statutory inspection by Kuwait Fire Department and
Insurance Inspectors, co-operate with these authorities and experts and promptly
carry out their recommendations.
8. Ensure that adequate, unimpeded means of egress from all parts of the Works,
are available at all times in case of fire.
9. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer's Representative
may direct, remove all temporary fire fighting installations and equipment and
replace all worn or damaged parts of the permanent systems leaving such
systems in first-class condition similar to new.
K. Temporary Coverings
1. Protect finished surfaces including jambs and soffits of openings used as
passageways or through which materials are handled against possible damage
resulting from conduct of work by trades.
2. Tight wood sheeting shall be laid under all materials stored on finished surfaces.
Planking shall be laid before moving materials over finished areas. Wheelbarrows
used for such areas shall have rubber-tyre wheels.
3. Finished surfaces including factory finished and job-finished items shall be clean
and not marred upon delivery of the Contract to the Employer. The Contractor
shall without extra compensation refinish such spaces where such surfaces prove
to have been inadequately protected and are damaged.

4. Waterproofed and roof surfaces shall not be subjected to heavy traffic nor used
for storage of materials. Where some activity must take place in order to carry
out the work, adequate protection, subject to approval by the Engineer's
Representative, shall be provided.
5. Provide all necessary protection to executed work to the approval of the
Engineer's Representative, including but not limited to temporary coverings and
protective measures stated herein.
L. Temporary Construction Openings

1. Provide openings in slabs, walls and partitions where required for moving in or
out large pieces of equipment and plant. Close or restore and finish all openings
after the equipment and plant is in place or removed. Structural modifications
shall be subject to review by the Engineer's Representative.
M. Temporary Storage and Plant

1. Contractor’s Storage and Plant :
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good condition, suitable open and
watertight storage all at the Contractor's cost and responsibility required for
materials that may be damaged by storage in open. Provide adequate Fire
Protection as approved by the Engineer's Representative.
2. The Employer will permit reasonable use of open space within the property limit
for this purpose. Any additional space required is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
3. Include for timely obtaining all permissions from all statutory authorities having
jurisdiction and for paying all charges and fees.
4. On completion of the works, or when directed by the Engineer's Representative,
clear away all temporary storage, plant and reinstate areas to their previous
condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
N. Temporary Stairs, Scaffolding, Ladders, Ramps, Runways etc.
1. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, scaffolding,
ladders, ramps, runways, chutes, tower cranes and/or other hoisting facilities etc.,
as required for the proper execution of works.
2. As soon as permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary protective treads,
handrails and shaft enclosures.
O. Temporary Material and Personnel Hoists

1. Provide temporary material hoists to the Engineer's Representative's approval
and as required facilitating the execution of Works. Such hoists shall be erected
and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance with
ANSI A10.5 "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists", and shall not be used for
transporting personnel.
2. Hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations
and in accordance with ANSI A10.4 "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists".
3. All hoists shall be constructed, maintained and removed so as not to cause
damage, staining or marring of the permanent work.
1.04 TEMPORARY VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING FACILITIES
A. Vehicular Access

1. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself regarding the suitability
and availability for his use during the Construction Period of access routes and
the like and shall be entirely responsible for the provision of any signs or
directions on such routes that may be considered necessary for the guidance of
his personnel, Sub-Contractors, suppliers and the like and for obtaining all
necessary permission from Government, Ministry or other authorities etc.
concerned, for the use of such routes or the provisions of such signs or
directions. The Employer shall not be held responsible for any claims that may
be made by any others.
2. The Employer will not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular
access routes and will not entertain any claim in respect of the non-suitability or
non-availability for continuous use during the Contract Period of any such route.
3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary means of access to the
Site from the nearest permanent roadway together with any necessary
crossovers and all necessary temporary site roads leading to or upon the site
and/or working areas. The Contractor shall take over the existing temporary
roads, utilize them and maintain the same during the Contract Period, but the
Contractor must co-ordinate and co-operate and share these roads as necessary
with the Employer, the Engineer, the Engineer's Representatives and other
Contractors.
4. The means of access, crossovers and temporary roads shall be maintained,
altered, adapted, etc., as may be found necessary during the course of the
Contract and excavated and cleared away upon completion including forking over
and leaving same to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
5. Access to the site storage area for delivery of construction material or equipment
shall be made only from locations approved by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative.
6. Contractor must ensure that access remains clear to provide access to other
users such as may be required for emergency vehicles, service vehicles and
other Contractors.
B. Parking
The Contractor shall provide a temporary covered Car Park for a sole use of the Engineer
and Engineer’s Representatives staff The number of Car Park shall be as per Section 01
52 10 plus Ten extra for visitors.
The contractor shall provide, as a minimum :
1. Surfacing of asphalt concrete on compacted sub-base, paved to falls and drained
to prevent water accumulation.
2. Shade structure, corrugated metal type, with allowance for 1 No. nameplate and
chain to each space.
1.05 TEMPORARY KITCHEN FACILITIES
A. Food and beverages served from all kitchens shall be prepared and provided in
conformance with the latest requirements of the Ministry of Public Health and the Kuwait
Municipality etc.
1.06 TEMPORARY SITE SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide a guard house with W.C. and A.C. at each entrance, to be
continually manned during all hours.

B. Night watchman shall be on site after normal working hours.
1.07 TEMPORARY CONTROLS:
A. Security
1. Protect work, products, materials, plant, temporary work, and Employer’s
operations, from theft, vandalism and unauthorised entry.
2. Safeguard Engineer's and Engineer’s Representative’s staff
3. Initiate programme at job mobilisation, maintain throughout construction period
until Engineer occupancy or Engineer acceptance precludes the need for
Contractor security.
4. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Work site. Allow entrance only to
authorised persons with proper identification. Maintain log of workmen and
visitors, make available to Engineer or Engineer’s Representative on request.
5. Coordinate access of Employer’s personnel to site.
6. Maintain traffic and parking areas including that of the Engineer's Representative
in a sound condition free of excavation material, construction equipment,
products and mud.
B. Water Control
1. Rough grade site and provide all necessary drainage to prevent standing water
and to direct surface drainage away from excavations, trenches, adjoining
properties, and public right-of-way until permanent drainage is accepted.
2. Allow for removal of temporary drainage upon acceptance of the whole work.
3. Maintain excavations and trenches free of water. Provide and operate pumping
equipment of a capacity to control water flow.
4. Provide dewatering system to maintain excavations dry and free of water inflow
on a 24 hours basis.
5. Provide piping to handle pumping outflow to discharge in a manner to avoid erosion.
6. Remove equipment and installation when no longer needed.
7. Comply with the Local Authorities Regulations.
C. Dust Control
1. Execute work by methods to minimise raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
2. Add calcium chloride to all access roads when directed by the Engineer/
Engineer’s Representative or when site conditions warrants.
D. Erosion and Sediment Control

1. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and
fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
2. Minimise amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
3. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes and drains, to prevent water
flow.

4. Construct waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays.
5. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation;
promptly apply corrective measures.
E. Noise Control
1. Fit all generators, compressors, percussion tools and vehicles with effective
silencers of a type recommended by manufacturers of generators, compressors,
tools, or vehicles.
2. Comply with Municipality Regulations.
3. Electrical generators and other heavy equipment are to be housed in soundproof
enclosure.
F. Pest Control
1. Provide proper measures to control pests in occupied temporary accommodation
and storage areas.
G. Pollution Control
1. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water,
and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants
produced by construction operations.
H. Rodent Control
1. Provide proper measures to control rodent in occupied temporary
accommodation and storage areas.
I. Fire Control
1. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent nuisance for smoke, dust, trash
and the like.
2. Provide temporary fire protection system for the site. Allow for removing
temporary fire protection on completion and acceptance of the whole works.
1.07 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. At completion of specified period and subject to Engineer’s approval remove furniture,

buildings, foundations, utility services and debris. Restore areas. Obtain and submit
Municipality Certificate for clearance.
B. As a minimum the offices shall be maintained until all work including remedial works,
additional work and testing and commissioning are completed to the approval of the
C. Obtain Engineer’s Representative approval to discontinue facilities and services and to

remove buildings.
D. Remove underground installations. Grade site as indicated on Drawings.
E. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
F. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1.08 PROTECTION AGAINST EXPOSURES :
A. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such
exposures include. but are not limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures-
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Air contamination or pollution.
7. Water, hailstone, ice
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Combustion.
19. Electrical current.
20. High-speed operation.
21. Improper lubrication.
22. Unusual wear or other misuse.
23. Contact between incompatible materials.
24. Destructive testing.
25. Misalignment.
26. Excessive weathering.
26. Unprotected storage.
27. Improper shipping or handling.
28. Theft.
29. Vandalism.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 51 70
TEMPORARY TELECOMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: The temporary telephone to the Engineer and Engineer's

Representative’s Site Offices. The Contractor shall also arrange for and provide
separate temporary service for his own and his Subcontractors' use. Work Includes:
1. Temporary telephone services.
2. Maintenance.
3. Removal.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work
2. Section 01 52 10 - Field Offices and Sheds
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Direct Telephone Lines :

i) Five external direct lines (three for telephone, one for fax machine and one
for internet) and an automatic fax machine working on one of the lines.
All the above connected to an exchange.
B. Telephone for Engineer, and Engineer’s Representative offices:
i) KX – T7633 - For Engineer, and Engineer’s Representative
ii) KX – T7636 - For Secretary
iii) KX – T7665 - 1 No. instrument for each desk station and for the kitchen.
Make: Panasonic, Toshiba, Alcatel, Nortel or equivalent
C. PABX Systems
i) KX – TDA100 or as required of Panasonic, Avaya, Philips, Siemens, CISCO
or equivalent.
D. These telephones to be from the date the site offices become operational till the
substantial completion of the Contract plus 3 months from the date of substantial
completion and the penalty for non-provision will be KD.50/- per day per telephone
line/set.
The Contractor must supply the above, of the latest model make. The type and make
to be submitted for the Engineer/Engineer’s Representatives approval. All charges
including the cost of equipment, all installation and maintenance shall be borne by the
Contractor. In case of repair or maintenance a re-placement equipment will be
provided for maintenance period.
Gulf Consult Temporary Telecommunications III-2/01 51 70 - 1

20th October 2021
E. The international call facility shall be disconnected from all the telephones.
F. A telephone instrument shall be provided at every work station/meeting and other

rooms/kitchens (1 no. at every kitchen) (but not in prayer room) and all these
instruments shall be interconnected to enable all staff to talk to each other and/or to
the Kitchen.
1.03 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit all relevant product data for approval by the Engineer/Engineer's

Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Must be new and adequate for the purpose subject to approval by the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Products locally used or specialty devices compatible with Ministry of

Communications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 The Contractor shall remove these equipment upon completion except for MOC lines which
upon instruction of the Engineer, shall be transferred to the name of the Owner/Employer for
their later use. The Contractor shall allow for all such cost in his Tender Sum.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Temporary Telecommunications III-2/01 51 70 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 52 10
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes: Adequate air conditioned/heated and furnished and serviced office

accommodation for the use of the Engineer, the Engineer’s Representatives and their
staff. The location of the Site Offices shall be approved by the Engineer.
1. Temporary Field Offices and Furniture, Office Equipment, stationery and
Telephones
2. Hospitality Services
3. Car Sheds
4. Maintenance and Cleaning
5. Removal
B. System Description
1. Design, supply and erect in accordance with statutory requirements and
instructions of the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative the project's field
offices and sheds. These offices shall be designed as per the latest IBC
Code.
2. The Contractor shall rent land from the relevant Kuwait Authorities for
construction/ erection of all the office accommodation to be provided for the
Engineer’s and Engineer’s Representative’s staff, at location as approved by
the Engineer and pay all the charges.
3. Obtain permissions and approvals from all the relevant Authorities having
jurisdiction, pay fees and provide guarantees as required.
C. Submittals
1. Manufacturers Data: Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall submit for
Engineer / Engineer's Representative review and approval, copies of
manufacturer's specifications for all field offices and equipment substantiating
that products comply with the requirements.
2. Shop Drawings: Prior to procurement Contractor shall submit layout plans for
all field offices to Engineer’s Representative for review and approval.
3. Prepare and submit for approval shop drawings for the Engineer’s /
Engineer’s Representative site office accommodation of sufficiently large
scale to indicate complete layout furniture, equipment, services and all other
items and requirements covered by this Sub-clause. Submit brochures and
catalogue cuts of proposed furniture and equipment for approval. In addition,
one directory plaque shall be provided at the entrance of the office and
toilet/door signs shall also be provided.
D. Materials
Gulf Consult Field Offices and Sheds III-2/01 52 10 - 1

20th October 2021
1. New and adequate for required purpose for the Engineer's and Engineer's
Representative offices.
2. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above
ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance
doors.
3. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office
and storage-spaces. Offices preferably double storied, with the Engineer’s
and the Engineer’s Representatives' offices on First Floor and the
Contractors on the Ground Floor.
4. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings:
Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.
5. Exterior Materials: Weather-resistant, and heat insulated finished in one
colour acceptable to Engineer's Representative.
6. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat
and sound insulated pre-finished or painted. Provide false ceiling and
recessed type light fittings in all rooms.
7. Lighting for Offices: Fluorescent to all rooms, 500 Lux at desk-top height,
exterior lighting at entrance doors.
8. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office area and
each storage area. Comply with authorities' regulations.
9. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified
conditions for storage of products.
10. Interior Flooring: Carpeting in all rooms including corridors. Carpets shall be
of good quality as approved by the Engineer. For wet areas (floor and walls)
provide ceramic tiles as approved by the Engineer.
11. Windows: Minimum of size approximate 15% of floor area with operable sash
and insect screens. Locate according to approved shop drawings to provide
views of construction area wherever practical. All windows shall be provided
with venetian blinds.
12. Electrical Distribution Panel: MCB and number of ways as required.
13. Provide three 13A, 240 volt, and single convenience outlets, per person in
each room at appropriate locations.
14. Sanitary and Kitchen Facilities: as specified.
15. Furniture and equipment: New as specified including maintenance.
16. Telephone: Provide one set of telephone per person.
17. Ceiling Height: Shall be minimum 2500mm.
E. Environmental Control
1. Heating, Cooling and Ventilating for Offices and Meeting rooms: Automatic
equipment to maintain conditions of MEW regulations by split unit A/C system
with built-in heating element.
2. Storage Spaces: Ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with
Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of
products.
3. Exhaust fan with automatic shutter, one per W.C. and one per kitchen

20th October 2021
1.02 SITE ACCOMMODATION - INITIAL AND FINAL
A. Within seven (7) days of the "Date of Enterprise" provide a new air-conditioned
"Portacabin" as “initial” accommodation for the Engineer’s Staff. The "Portacabin"
shall have four rooms suitably furnished to the approval of the Engineer/Engineer’s
Representative; in addition it shall have suitable toilet and kitchenette facilities. On
completion of the main site office accommodation remove "Portacabin" from the site.
Failure to provide this initial accommodation within the specified time shall incur a
penalty of KD. 300/- per day.
B. Within 30 days of the "Date of Enterprise" provide and fully maintain throughout the
Contract period, fully furnished, fully serviced air conditioned “final” accommodation for
the use of all the staff of the Engineer and the Engineer's Representative’s all as
approved by the Engineer. The office accommodation shall be constructed of new
materials throughout and all furniture and furnishings shall be new and of
executive/good/site quality and approved by the Engineer / Engineer's Representative.
Provide vertical sun blinds to all windows. The sizes of rooms are minimum and
indicative only and shall have to be increased as per the furniture sizes and layouts.
Complete office accommodation, office equipment, telephones, consumables etc. etc.
shall be provided for the duration of contract plus three months and shall become the
property of the Contractor after the completion of the Contract. Furnish the offices as
detailed in this section.
Failure to provide this final accommodation, equipment, consumables and other

deliverables within the specified time shall incur a penalty of KD. 750/- per day.
C. All accommodation listed below is subject to the Engineer’s Approval.

Room Designation Furniture and Equipment Requirements
Employer’s / Engineer’s Offices (Approximate Area)
1. Employer’s  Executive desk with side return

Office  Executive chair
(Size – 32 m2 )  Visitors chairs (2 No)
 Sofa set comprising one 3-seat sofa + one 2-seat sofa
 Coffee tables (1 No. of size 600x600mm, 1 No of size 1200x600mm).
 Full height, standard width & depth glass fronted cupboard units (2 No)
 4 chairs and 140 dia meeting table
 Heavy duty fire proof full height metal cabinet with lock, 1 No.
 Drawing table – inclined and twice the length of the largest drawing with
divided shelves under plus one stool.
 Pin boards (area 10m2).
 Refrigerator 1 No., Japanese make and capacity 6 cu.ft.
 Coat Hanger
2. Employer’s  1 No. WC Suite and flexible hose
Toilet  Wash hand basin
(Size – 10 m2 )  Toilet paper holder
 Mirror
 Soap dispenser
 Towel dispenser
 Waste bin
 Cupboard unit
 Coat Hanger on Door
 Towel Rack

20th October 2021
3. Secretary’s  Secretary's desk with side return and chair

Office  Executive visitors chairs (3 No)
(Size – 20 m2 )  Full height, sliding full glazed door lockable, steel cupboard units (5 No
max.)
4. Filing Room  A room of size 22m2 with floor mounted open shelving all round with 5
(Size – 22 m2 ) shelves.
 Aluminium ladder
 Mobile Trolley of size as requested
Engineer’s Representative’s Offices etc. (Approximate Area)

1. Resident Engineer ‘s  Executive desk with side return
Office  Executive chair
 Sofa set comprising one 3-seat sofa
 Coffee tables (1 No. of size 600x600mm, 1 No of size 1200x600mm)
 Full height, standard width & depth glass fronted cupboard units (2
No)
 4 chairs and 140cm dia meeting table
 Heavy duty fire proof full height metal cabinet with lock, 1 No.
 Drawings table – inclined and twice the length of the largest drawing
with divided shelves under plus one stool.
 Pin boards (area 10 m2).
 Refrigerator 1 No., Japanese make and of capacity 6 cu.ft
 Coat Hanger
2. Resident Engineer’s  1 No. WC Suite and flexible hose
Toilet  Wash hand basin
(Size – 9 m2 )  Toilet paper holder
 Mirror
 Soap dispenser
 Towel dispenser
 Waste bin
 Cupboard unit
 Coat Hanger on Door
 Towel Rack
3. Secretary’s/  Secretary's Desk with side return
Document  Chair
Controller’s Office +  Single sofa (3 No)
Waiting Area for 3  Executive filing cabinets (3 No.)
persons  Non fire-rated metal cupboards (2 No.)
(Size – 30 m2 )  Heavy duty fireproof metal lockable cupboard (1 No.)
 Full height, sliding door, full glazed steel cupboard units, 2 Nos.
 Pin Board (area 3 m2)
 3-tier filing trays (2 sets)
 Note: also, the space provided must be sufficient to accommodate
office equipment. i.e. 2 Photocopy machines, 2 Printers.
4. Filing Room  A room of about 17m2 size, with about 15 meter long floor mounted
(Size – 18 m2 ) open shelving each with 5 shelves.
 Aluminium ladder (1 No.)
 Mobile Trolley of size as requested.
5. Quantity Surveyor  Office desk with side return and chair
One Office  Visitors chairs (2No)
(Size – 22 m2 )  Pin boards (area 3 m2)
 Open fronted shelving with 5 shelves (1 No)
 Metal cupboard ; should be glazed, lockable, fire proof, with sliding
door of size 1x2m high (1 No)
 Drawings Table as for Resident Engineer

20th October 2021
Engineer’s Representative’s Offices etc.
6. Planning Engineer/  Same as Quantity Surveyor.

Scheduler
(One Office)
(Size – 16 m2 )
7. Landscape Architect  Office desk with side return
One Office  Chair
 Metal cupboard ; should be glazed, lockable, fire proof, with
sliding door of size 1x2m high (1 No)
 Pin boards (area 3 m2)
 Drawings Table, as above
8. Civil/Structural Engineer  Office desk with return and chair (1No)

One office  Visitor's chairs (2 No)
(Size – 16 m2 )  Open fronted shelving with 5 shelves (1 No)
 Metal cupboard ; should be glazed, lockable, fire proof, with
sliding door of size 1 x 2m high (1 No.)
 Drawings Table - As above
9. Mechanical Engineers Same as Structural Engineer for each office

(2 Nos.) (One is HVAC
and One is Plumbing and
Fire-fighting)
One Office for Each
(Size – 16 m2 )
10. Electrical Engineer Same as Structural Engineer
(1 No.)
(Size – 16 m2 )

20th October 2021
11. Safety Engineer  Office desk with side return

One Office  Chair
 Metal cupboard ; should be glazed, lockable, fire proof, with sliding
door of size 1 x 2m high (1 No)
12. Meeting Room  Fully furnished meeting room to provide seating for 20 persons around
(Size – 60 m2 ) a meeting table plus six additional chairs as required.
 Slide projector
 Multimedia projector 1500 watts.
 Ceiling mounted screen
 White board with pens and erasers, as requested
 Manual and laser pointer
 System suitable for hanging presentation boards on walls.
13. Sample Room  With about 15MR of floor mounted open shelving each with 5 shelves.
(Size – 30 m2 )  Aluminium ladder (1 No.)
Mobile trolley as requested
14. Prayer Room  Carpet with lines for worshippers

(Size – 20 m2 )  Clock – 4 No. spread out in corridors and 1 in the room itself.
 Coat Hooks – 6 No.
 Shoe shelving of face width 1.00m, height 0.60m, depth 0.30m with
2 shelves, 3 No. full height
15. Project Record Documents  A room with adequate lockable glazed fire proof cupboards all along
Room with walls.
(Size – 30 m2 )  Drawing Record Card Filing Boxes
 Mobile drawings hanging racks
 Telephone set (1 no.)

20th October 2021
16. Toilet (Male)  Incorporating four WC suites with flexible hoses.

(Size – 19 m2 )  Three wash hand basins with hot & cold water, mirror and soap
holders.
 Paper towel holder & receptacle; in each WC.
 Extract fan(s) to suit.
17. Toilet (Female)  Incorporating two WC suites with flexible hoses.
(Size – 14 m2 )  Two wash hand basins with hot & cold water, mirror and soap holders.
 Paper towel holder & receptacle; in each WC.
Extract fan(s) to suit.
18. Kitchen  Sink Unit incorporating working surface and 2 sinks;
(Size – 15 m2 ) Floor and wall cupboards, 4m long; Refrigerator – Japanese make
and capacity to be 300 litres, gas rings or hot plates as required; hot
and cold (filtered) water supplies; dish washer, microwave, extract fan
to suit, telephone set heavy duty vacuum cleaner with stowaway
storage arrangement, preparation counter, crockery, cutlery,
glassware for coffee and tea preparation and serving, water filter all to
suit.
D. Prepare and submit for approval shop drawings for the Engineer's and Engineer’s
Representative’s site office accommodation of sufficiently large scale to indicate
complete layout furniture, equipment, services and all other items and requirements
covered by this Sub-clause. Submit brochures and catalogue cuts of proposed
furniture and equipment for approval. In addition, one directory plaque shall be
provided at the entrance of the office and toilet/door signs shall also be provided.
E. Following is the minimum standard of quality of material and finishes for the furniture
in the above offices. The Contractor shall provide the specified furniture or equal
approved.
Furniture items not specified below, shall nevertheless be provided, and be of

executive, good or site quality, be of quality compatible with the quality of specified
furniture pieces in the same room or area;
F. All the furniture and offices shall become the property of the Contractor after the
substantial completion date plus three months.
1. Definitions
1. Desk or Executive Desk shall include side return, modesty

with side return panels, drawer units, locks and keys
2. High Cabinets shall include all shelves, doors, locks
and keys.
3. Low Cabinets shall include all shelves, doors, locks
and keys.

20th October 2021
2. Furniture specifications; all subject to the above definitions shall be

provided as follows:
• Engineer’s Office
1. Desk
2. Chair
3. Visitor’s Chairs (1) Ali Abdul Wahab
4. Sofa (2) Mahdi Habib
5. Corner Coffee Table
6. Cupboard
• Executive Meeting Room
1. Executive Meeting Room Table (1) Ali Abdul Wahab

2. Meeting Room Chairs (2) Mahdi Habib
3. Meeting Room Cabinets
• Project Manager’s / Engineer’s Representative Office
1. Desk
2. Chair (1) Ali Abdul Wahab
3. Visitor’s Chairs (2) Mahdi Habib
4. Cabinets/Cupboard Unit
• Senior Engineer’s Office
1. Desk with side return

2. Desk chair (1) Ali Abdul Wahab
4. Cabinets/Cupboard Unit
• The Site Meeting Room
1. Table, complete (1) Ali Abdul Wahab
2. Chairs (2) Mahdi Habib
• All other offices
1. Desk, with return
2. Desk chair (1) Ali Abdul Wahab

4. Cabinets (high/low)

20th October 2021
3. A waste bin, an ashtray and two desktop 3-tier filing trays shall be provided at
each desk station.
I. COMPUTER
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Contract plus Ninety
(90) days, the following new computer systems (shall be the latest technology at the
time of placing the order) to be installed at the site offices as directed.
1. Engineer’s Offices
2. Engineer’s Representative’s Offices
B. Reference Standards
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
a. IEEE 1062 - Recommended Practice for Software Acquisition
2. International Organization for Standardization
a. ISO/IEC 24762 - Information technology -- Security techniques --

Guidelines for information and communications technology disaster
recovery services
b. ISO/IEC 27001 – Information Security Management Systems (ISMS)

Standard.
c. ISO/IEC 27002 - Information technology -- Security techniques -- Code
of practice for information security management.
C. The Computer systems shall comprise of the following:-
1. Computer Network
a. Computer Network for all offices as
i. Network for Employer’s (Engineer’s) office
ii. Network for Engineer’s Representative offices
b. All networks shall be interconnected on a dedicated fiber backbone
link of at least 1 Gbps redundant links
c. All distribution network shall be labeled and connected with a
minimum of 1 Gbps Cat 6 cabling and where necessary and
identified by IT Auditor and subsequently by Engineer the contractor
shall provide such upgrades at no extra cost
d. All cabling shall be labeled and terminated in patch panels before
connected to network equipment
e. 15% extra network points shall be provisioned and maintained
f. All network related cabling shall be consolidated in a dedicated
cabinet and
shall be maintained accordingly
g. Contractor shall provide updated & necessary network schematic
and layout diagrams to facilitate support teams of all offices in

20th October 2021
mitigation of network related problems

h. Contractor shall clearly identify and implement specific network
routes for application services, data connectivity, internet service and
other related network related services.
i. All network equipment and points shall be clearly marked for easy
readability, access and shall be shown in layout diagrams
j. Contractor shall maintain the whole Computer Network and shall
mitigate problems arising from time to time
k. All primary networking equipment shall be protected against any
power failures through UPS protection
l. Spares shall be kept onsite for immediate replacement of faulty
equipment including switches and related equipment
m. All network and system related equipment shall be identified through
static IPv4 addressing schemes; which shall include below but
limited to:
i. Each office (Engineer, Engineer’s Representative, and
Contractor shall have their private network and be secured
from other networks
ii. All servers shall be accessible to all network segments
through relevant security implementation
iii. A complete report of logical network architecture shall be
prepared and submitted.
n. Wireless access to the network and internet shall be provided for

Engineer and his Representative and where ever Engineer may request.
o. All servers’ accessibility from internal or external networks shall be
made secure through dedicated firewalls and traffic shall be routed to
specific required destinations only.
p. Each room for staff use to have a minimum two or more hardwired
internet connection point.
q. Approved Vendors
i. CISCO Catalyst Series
ii. HP ProCurve
2. Servers
a. The contractor shall provide servers (Hardware + software +

operating system) for smooth running of infrastructure as below but
not limited to
i. Active Directory DNS Servers shall be installed with as two

(02 Servers)
ii. Two servers for storing project data on site.
iii. Virtualization technology can be used to reduce the cost but

at least 2 physical servers shall be provided for hardware

20th October 2021
protection requirements.
iv. Minimum of 12 TB shared storage for data and file sharing

required on the site
b. Hardware required shall be provided as below or latest at the time of

inception
i. Contractor shall provide Dual Socket, multicore, rack

mountable latest servers (in all manners) with a minimum
RAM of 32GB ECC to run required applications for which a
formal approval of configuration shall be sought at the time of
deployment
ii. All provided servers shall be housed in environment

controlled facility identified by Engineer
iii. All servers shall be in kept in a secure server room
accessible only through secure access passes
iv. All Servers shall be housed in a dedicated & secure server
rack
v. All servers shall be complete functional units including
storage and other necessary parts
vi. All servers shall be tested for all of their functionalities every
quarter and a detailed report shall be submitted to auditor
vii. All servers must have all required components for
applications including multiple Ethernet cards, multiple power
supplies or any other part required to maintain high level of
availability
viii. All accessibility of servers either internal or external shall be
audited and reported to engineer Approved vendors for
servers and storage
ix. Approved Vendors for server
1. IBM
2. Dell
3. HP
x. Approved vendors for storage
1. IBM
2. Dell
3. HP
4. Synology
3. Backup and Recovery Solution must be provided (separate in both locations)

20th October 2021
for all servers and related data, systems and solutions provided with below
mentioned features but not limited to:
a. Full backups of systems must be made in 3 copies with a report

enlisting content of that particular backup media (hard copy as well
as soft copy), to be provided as one copy for the Engineer (Client)
One for the contractor (to be kept in a fireproof safe on site) and one
for Engineer’s Representative.
b. All primary backups shall be taken on disks.

c. Backup solution must be capable of handling backups for the whole
project items for full project tenure without any break points
d. The backup solution shall support continuous Data Protection
e. Shall Support “bare metal” restore
f. The backup solution must contain system state backups for any
required recovery of systems onto other physical nodes
g. Backup system shall be designed to perform an onsite recovery
when needed and offsite recovery as well. The backup schedule
must contain.
i. Yearly full back up
ii. Quarterly full back up
iii. Monthly full back up
iv. Incremental backups
h. A full log of backup routines shall be kept and relevant backup media
shall be identified through barcodes attached to backup media /
tapes
i. Any media / tape submitted as official backup of system shall not be
returnable and shall be kept in the custody of relevant receiver for
any later compliance requirements
j. Approved Vendors
i. Symantec Backup Exec
ii. Unitrends Backup (with adequate storage)
iii. Any other as approved by Engineer
4. Workstation and relevant software applications shall be provided for

Engineer’s & Engineer’s Representative’s office as per below specifications
or latest at the time of inception of project.
a. All operating systems and applications provided with workstations

shall be provided with latest versions released by the specific vendor
for which contractor shall provide necessary licensing mechanism
shall be provisioned for the whole project tenure

20th October 2021
b. Any upgrades or updates released for installed / provided operating

systems or applications shall be provided immediately with
necessary licensing mechanism at no extra cost.
c. A minimum of 3 sets (or more where necessary) for original

installation Media for operating system and applications shall be
provided
d. All type of licenses shall be acquired in the name Engineer
e. Workstations for all staff with below specs or latest at the time of
inception of project
i. Intel Pentium Core i7
ii. 16GB Non-ECC RAM
iii. 1TB STATA (7200 rpm) HDD
iv. Arabic/English Keyboard.
v. 23” LED Display Panel with DVI/ VGA/HDMI inputs.
vi. Discrete Graphics Card with minimum 2 GB dedicated

memory with HDMI out and dual display
vii. UPS Power Back for atleast 15 minutes.
viii. Windows 8 pro 64bit
ix. Microsoft Office 2013 Pro
x. Antivirus (latest with update subscriptions)
xi. Approved Product Vendors:
1. Dell
2. IBM
3. HP
f. Software Applications
i. 02 Network licenses Autodesk® Building Design Suite 2014

Ultimate (or latest at the time of enterprise)
ii. 1 Licenses of Primavera (Latest Version at the time of

enterprise)
D. Internet Connectivity shall be provided for the full project tenure, which will be
featured as but not limited to:

20th October 2021
1. Internet connection to all designated users
2. Minimum 5 MBPS primary connection with equal backup connection through

a secondary source (Internet Service Provider) and internet traffic shall be
load balanced through necessary means
3. Internet connectivity shall be protected through dedicated redundant firewalls
E. Consumable Supplies
The Following supplies shall be supplied by the contractor for the duration of project
plus 3 months
1. Rewritable DVD
2. LaserJet printer and color printer paper, toner/cartridges etc. as required. If
due to any reason the supplier repeatedly fails to meet these contractual
requirements and is so notified in writing, the Engineer’s Representative may
procure the required item or service from another source and deduct the
amount plus 15% for overhead costs; from the Contract.
3. Toner Cartridges, Consumables and all accessories for the smooth
functioning of the photocopiers (including color copier)
F. SUBMITTALS
1. Three (3) copies of the following shall be submitted under provisions of the
General Conditions of Contract. These, being a critical part of the job, shall
be prepared in a professional manner and submitted in one or more file(s) /
book(s) each (A4 size open flat files or hardbound volumes), if single volume
will limit its use.
Project Plan to be submitted within 1 month from date of Signing of Project

while approvals will be done during project kickoff meetings and system shall
be ready for production on date of enterprise and solution must be on site
before mobilization of project. This submittal shall contain information and
details required at time of inception of project:
a. The plan must contain all technical details related to selected

systems and their datasheets.
b. The plan shall contain a implementation schedule for all items

c. This shall contain full network plan with IP addressing scheme to be
used onsite
d. Shall contain internetwork connectivity details through which all three
stakeholder’s networks are going to be interconnected and relevant
security details shall be provided
e. Drawings: Supplied in plastic drawing covers and clipped into the

volume, containing:
i. Verified / approved System Flow diagrams of network, data

and its related modules

20th October 2021
ii. Verified / approved for Schematic diagrams of the location of

all hardware and system components.
iii. Network layout showing how all Computer equipment

connected by wired network and specific names and IP
addresses of connected network and system resources and
their accessibility.
f. Full Backup and recovery plan including disaster recovery plan with
measures and requirements of disaster recovery and schedule of all
project with related data structure being planned on the backup
media.
g. File and folder naming scheme for each Project Information Items
and its revision control mechanism for each Electronic Document
Format shall be enumerated.
h. User management schemes including roles management and user

management plan with hierarchal structure.
i. After the installation of all equipment is completed a formal approval

shall be obtained from Engineer
2. The contractor shall provide reports on a monthly basis for the items below.
a. Detailed system Status, Health and activity report – including details

of operations and changes made to the system during the reporting
month
b. Backup activity report with backup media for the reporting month
c. Backup and recovery demonstration and test reports – if required

any such demonstration with approvals during the reporting month.
G. INSTALLATION
The solutions shall be installed by experienced professionals and during the process
of installation following shall be entertained:
1. Initial IT hardware Infrastructure shall be prepared before any installation of

applications and other related servers
a. All network laying and designing shall be done in view of overall

requirements of the project and hence an approval shall be obtained
for all layouts and network installations from IT auditor first and a final
approval from Engineer shall be sought
b. All necessary networking equipment used for distribution of network

connectivity like Switches, routers or related equipment shall be
housed in safe and secure wall mount racks
c. The contractor shall keep dedicated hardware backups for core

network distribution equipment duly installed and in running

20th October 2021
condition; which may be used for load balancing where necessary
d. After network installation is completed all hardware servers shall be

installed in engineers specified location (server room) and the room
shall be prepared as climate control environment for servers and an
approval shall be obtained from IT auditor first and a final approval
shall be sought from Engineer
e. Servers shall be installed in a secure server rack.
f. All wiring and connectivity shall be installed in such a way that

minimizes coupling of electromagnetic and electrostatic interference
on low voltage signals and data wiring.
g. All network points and paths shall be clearly mentioned on the actual
installation as well as this shall be replicated in all network layout
diagrams
h. The contractor shall install camera mounting poles and other related
initial connectivity requirements for initial locations of Construction
site camera and such locations shall be identified by Engineer. While
location of one camera which will be used for Time Lapse
photography shall be identified in collaboration with all stake holders
to give clear view of construction activities.
i. Contractor shall provide backbone network connectivity all stake

holder networks through fiber links duly terminating on the
stakeholders server rack (if any). It is the responsibility of contractor
to install necessary equipment and wiring; which shall facilitate all
stake holders to connect to main servers and other related network
resources
j. All operations performed shall be documented and approvals for all

installations shall be subject to approval from IT Auditor and
Engineer.
2. Installation of Infrastructure and servers shall be started once all aspects of

hardware installation are duly approved.
a. The contractor shall install all servers operating systems as specified

and shall be updated to latest patches and service packs
b. The contractor shall install all necessary infrastructure services like

directory services, DNS services, File servers and backup systems
as provided in the plan
c. The contractor shall setup required internal and external connectivity

of installed services and it is the responsibility of contractor to provide
all necessary connectivity to all stake holders and their networks
d. The contractor shall at this stage install all internet related equipment
and provide mentioned internet connectivity
e. The contractor shall at this stage install Construction site cameras

20th October 2021
and provide necessary connectivity to video server and complete the

Camera installation plan provided as shown in the project plan
f. The contractor shall install all required camera controls and camera
viewing panels in identified locations
g. All approved installations shall be documented with all configuration

details shall be included in the final installation report which shall
serve as primary document for any future references and any
changes to the network and infrastructure at any given stage of
project shall be replicated in this document while protecting older
configuration details through versioning
H. TESTING
For the purpose of testing the installed solution a testing team shall be constituted in
collaboration with Engineer which shall consist as one member from each stake
holder with IT Auditor and Lead Tester appointed by Engineer. Any replacement of
team member shall seek approval of Engineer and the tasks shall be executed as
follows.
1. The contractor shall inform the test team in advance of at least two working
days about the upcoming test schedule.
2. The contractor shall demonstrate the functionalities defined in system

description and seek unanimous approval from all stake holders. In case of
any changes required all stake holders must agree upon such and final
approvals from Engineer.
3. Any modules or items which are a part of the change request shall be
considered for retest and an approval from team shall be obtained.
4. All test reports, being critical part of the job, shall be prepared in a
professional manner and submitted in one or more file(s) / book(s) each (A4
size open flat files or hardbound volumes), if single volume will limit its use
5. Any changes requested during the project tenure shall be constituted as

eligible for full functional tests by the same testing team and shall follow the
normal testing mechanism mentioned above.
I. TRAINING
Training for all personnel shall be provided to facilitate understanding of deployed

system this shall include
1. System data backup and restoration

2. Use of all peripherals like Printers and scanners
3. Installation of software for new users
4. Troubleshooting and System maintenance procedures
J. MAINTENANCE

20th October 2021
In addition to the general conditions of contract maintenance includes the following

items
1. Provide necessary replacement parts and labor for the duration of the project
to maintain the systems in good working order. The Contractor must respond
to notification from the Engineer's Representative to correct any part of the
malfunctioning system within 24 hours.
2. Updates shall be made from time to time when new updates / patches from
the vendors are available including OS and application updates.
3. Timely replacements for all hardware and software shall be provided and
rolled out where necessary, required and approved by Engineer.
4. If any part of the system is not able to function for any reason whatsoever,
immediate corrective shall be taken or malfunctioning components replaced
or maintained within 36 hours.
5. Any component is non-operational for longer than 36 hours, the contractor
shall replace the malfunctioning component with a new unit or provide a
temporary equivalent substitute system before it is replaced. Failure to
correct the malfunction within 36 hours from receipt of the Engineer's
Representative written notice shall be cause for a penalty of KD 200 /- Two
Hundred Kuwaiti Dinars per day of delay to be deducted from the Contract
amount
1.03 OTHER EQUIPMENT
A. Photocopier:
1. Provide and maintain one black and white heavy duty, automatic, digital fast
feed photocopier with full options, A4 to A3 sizes with 20 bin sorter as selected
by the Engineer for the Office of the Engineer and for the use of Engineer’s
Representative’s office.
This machine shall be provided with a facility of printing from each and every
work station; and should be connected to the network.
Specifications:a) 75 pages per minute

b) Full options including Document feeder, scanning,
duplexing.
Make: a) Xerox
b) Konica Minolta
c) Toshiba
d) Canon
e) Ricoh
2. Provide and maintain one full colour digital laser photocopier with scanner and
printer as selected by the Engineer one for the Office of the Engineer and for
the use of Engineer’s Representative’s office. This machine shall also be
provided with a facility of printing from each and every work station; and should
be connected to the network.
Specifications: a) Minimum 35 pages per minute A4 Colour Copies

b) Multi-function colour display Editor Board

20th October 2021
c) 3 front loading paper drawers/cassettes (A4/A3/Universal)

+ bypass facilities
d) Copier should have all facilities like zoom magnification
0.250-4.000 or above (in 1% increments) and scanning and
duplexing.
Make: a) Xerox
b) Konica Minolta
c) Toshiba Estudio 210C
d) Toshiba Estudio 25X
e) Canon, CLC 1100, 1130, IR 2800 and 3300
f) Ricoh
B. Shredder: Dahle 20506 of Dahle or equivalent (1 No)
C. Binding Machine: Model – 16 Master of IBICOAG or equivalent (1 No)
D. Lamination machine (A4/A3 compatible), 1 No.
E. Heavy duty stapler (Rexel Giant), 1 No.
F. Automatic Fax Machine RICOH 3700 or Pana fax UF-590 or latest model of
Panasonic or equal approved (1 No)
G. Presentation projector latest model 3M (X75) or latest (1 No)
H. Wall mounted remote controlled screen 84x84 3M or equivalent. (1 No)
I. External / Portable Iomega CD-RW 52X24X52X USB 2.0 32650 (or equal) (1 No.)
J. PC Toolkit (2 Nos.)
K. One Camera + 32 GB Memory as approved by the Engineer.
1.04 CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES
A. Provide all office accessories and stationery including but not limited to photocopy
papers (A4 & A3), pens, pencils, erasers, mechanical pencils, note pads (various sizes),
staplers, staples, punches, box files and other files and clips (various types), white pens,
commercial and scientific calculators etc. suiting the requirements of Engineer’ and all
the other complete staff throughout the period of contract plus three months free of cost.
1.05 CLEANING AND ATTENDANCE FOR THE SITE OFFICE ACCOMMODATION
A. Provide for the period of contract plus three (3) months daily cleaning and full time
attendance for the Site Office including providing minimum two (one for the Engineer,
and one for Engineer’s Representative) tea boys/messengers (farash services) to
attend upon the requirements of the staff of the above. The cost of cleaning
equipment and consumable stores such as, cleaning materials, paper towels, soaps,
paper tissues, toilet rolls, tea, coffee, sugar, mineral water, beverages etc., shall be
paid for by the Contractor.
1.06 REMOVAL
A. At completion of Work obtain Engineer’s approval to discontinue facilities and to

remove furniture, buildings, foundations, utility services and debris.
B. Restore areas. Obtain and submit Municipality Certificate and Employer’s clearance
certificate.
C. As a minimum the field offices shall be maintained until all work including remedial
works, additional works, testing and commissioning are completed to approval.

20th October 2021
D. All provided office furniture and equipment remain the property of the Contractor and
shall be returned at the completion of the work and after obtaining Engineer’s
approval.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 54 00
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Specification for the proposed temporary hoists and cranes that would be used
as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B. The design, fabrication, installation, testing, commissioning, operation, maintenance

and eventual removal of the temporary hoists and cranes shall be performed by the
Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall note that the requirements of construction aids detailed in this
section are a minimum to be supplied, installed and operated by the Contractor. Any
other hoisting and cranage that may be required for the performance of the work
shall be provided by each contractor. The applicability of this section will be approved
by the Engineer.
D. This section also includes requirements for early installation and operation of
permanent elevators for construction use. See Section 01 40 00 for additional
requirements.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and services required for the supply, installation,
maintenance and operation of temporary hoists and accessories as indicated in the
Drawings and as specified herein; this is inclusive of but not limited to:
1. Combination personnel and material hoists
2. Personnel hoists
3. Material hoists
4. Landing platforms with adjustments where required for raised floors, protective
floor gates and fencing, guard rails, etc. Gates to be complete with fail-safe
interlocks.
5. Hoist base enclosure.
6. Communication system.
7. Loading deck, overhead protection, etc.
8. Installation, maintenance, operation, removal and salvage value of the above.
9. Any associated testing, permits for operation, etc. as required by the local
authorities and safety requirements in section 01 73 50 of this Division 01.
Testing and certification of the same by internationally recognized agencies will
also be required.
10. All necessary engineering by a licensed engineer.
11. All necessary temporary construction and modification that may be
required to the permanent structure.
Gulf Consult Construction Aids III-2/01 54 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Provide all labor, material, equipment and services required for the supply,
installation, maintenance and operation of cranes and accessories as indicated in the
Drawings and as specified herein; this is inclusive of but not limited to:
1. Communication system to tie-in with the respective Contractor.
2. Loading deck, overhead protection, etc.
3. Installation, maintenance, operation, removal and salvage value of the above.
4. Any associated testing, permits for operation, etc. as required by the local
authorities and safety requirements in section 01735 of these General
Requirements. Testing and certification of the same by internationally
recognized agencies will also be required.
5. All necessary engineering by a licensed engineer.
6. All necessary temporary construction and modification that may be required to
the permanent structure.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting the work of this section include but are not limited to the
Conditions of Contract, General Requirements Division 01 and Scope of Works.
A. Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of unit.
B. Coordinate the installation with other trades.
C. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following reference

standards, except as otherwise indicated.
1. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction
2. AWS - American Welding Society
3. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute, Inc
5. Kuwait Municipality Requirements.
D. Other Kuwait and international codes and standards will be acceptable subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Not withstanding the requirements of this specification, the
Contractor providing the hoists shall be responsible for the safe and adequate
operation of the same until removal from the Site.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Section 01 33
00 of General Requirements - Division 01.
1. All shop drawings shall be certified by a licensed structural engineer in
Kuwait.
2. The shop drawings shall contain all detailed information such as hoist
arrangements, platforms, loading deck, mast sections, hoist equipment,

20th October 2021
details of attachment to building, gates, fences, wiring diagrams, safety

devices, overload protection, etc.
3. Similar details as above for tower cranes.
4. Indicate all load reactions at the base of the equipment, tiebacks, etc.
Indicate modifications required, if any, to the permanent building construction
to accommodate all such reactions.
5. Submit at least one high quality reproducible drawing and four prints for
coordination.
6. Complete manufacturer’s data including operation and maintenance
instructions, list of recommended spare parts for five (5) year operation of the
hoists along with a corresponding price list.
7. All submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
8. The Contractor is to provide, install and maintain a tower crane anti-Collision
system for their site tower cranes, which must be integrated with all adjacent
sites tower cranes. Furthermore, the contractor must provide an experienced
tower crane anti-collision specialist/coordinator, to be assigned full time with
a minimum of 10 years experience with tower crane placement, erection,
operations and anti-collision systems. These Specialists/Coordinators must
be approved by the Engineer and PM. Then they are to submit their tower
crane operation strategy and anti-collision program to the Engineer for
approval with the tower crane(s) layout before placing any tower crane
foundations.
1.06 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. The equipment manufactured shall be designed to withstand all the dead loads, live
loads, wind loads, etc., normal to the region, including but not limited to the seismic
conditions and that are normal to the area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL
A. For fabrication of metal work that will be exposed to view, use materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names and roughness.
B. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36.
C. Steel bar grating: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36.
D. Steel tubing: cold formed. ASTM A500, or hot rolled, ASTM A501.
E. Structural steel sheet: hot rolled, ASTM A570; or cold rolled, ASTM A611, Class
1; or grade required for design loading.

20th October 2021
F. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade as selected by fabricator as required for
design loading, black finish unless otherwise indicated, standard weight (schedule
40), unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
B. Bolts and nuts: regular hexagon type, ASTM A307, Grade A.
C. Lag bolts: square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D. Machine screws: cadmium plated steel, FS FF-W-92.
E. Plain washers: round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
F. Lock washers: helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
2.03 PRIME PAINTING
A. All ferrous metal (except galvanized steel) shall be cleaned and shop painted with
one coat of ferrous metal primer. No shop prime paint is required on galvanized steel
or aluminum work.
B. Cleaning: Conform to Steel Structure Painting Council Surface Preparation

Specification SP-3-63 “Power Tool Cleaning” for cleaning of ferrous metals which are
to receive shop prime coat.
C. Application: Apply shop prime coat immediately after cleaning metal. Apply paint in dry
weather or under cover. Metal surfaces shall be free from frost or moisture when
painted. Paint all metal surfaces including edges, joints, holes, corners, etc. Paint
surfaces which will be concealed after shop assembly prior to such assembly. Apply
paint in accordance with approved paint manufacturer’s printed instructions. Paint
shall uniformly and completely cover the metal surfaces, 2.0 mm dry film thickness. No
work shall be shipped until the prime coat thereon has dried.
D. Touch-up: In the shop, after assembly and in the field, after installation of work in
this section, touch up, damaged or abraded portions of shop prime paint with specified
ferrous metal primer.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. The general quality of fabrication shall be comparable to industry-wide standards for

this type of equipment.
B. Form exposed connections with flush, hairline joints, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Cope intersections or rail and posts, weld joints, and grind smooth,
butt weld end-to-end joints of railings or use welding connectors.
C. Bend pipe without collapsing or deforming its walls, and to produce a smooth, uniform
curved section and to maintain uniform sectional shape.
D. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to the weather to exclude water, or provide
weep holes wherever water or condensation may accumulate.

20th October 2021
E. Cut, reinforce, drill, punch, thread and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to
receive finish hardware and similar items of work.
F. The electrical installation including the motors, cabling and controls used shall be
suitable for the region and be able to withstand normal abuse due to exposure to the
elements and continuous operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Examine area where work of this section is to be carried out and advise the Engineer
about conditions which may affect the timely and proper execution of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the installation schedule, frequency of jumps, etc. to the approval of the
Engineer.
B. All work shall be performed by experienced, qualified, hoist and crane erectors using
skilled craftsmen in a plumb, level and secure manner.
C. The site installation shall be supervised by an authorized hoist and crane supplier’s
representative familiar with the equipment being erected.
D. All other materials and equipment required to remove the hoist will be with the hoist
(i.e. the tower cranes will be dismantled before the hoists).
E. All warning lights and instructions for operation and routine maintenance of the
equipment shall be in Arabic, English or any other language that is used by the
workforce.
F. Hoist and tower crane mast sections required after initial installation shall be stored
off site and delivered and erected as required for each jump.
G. Installation shall be on a phased basis as determined by the Engineer.
H. Installation shall also include all the associated testing and demonstration as well as
operator training.
I. The location of the tower crane foundation and any sacrificial foundation and sections
of tower crane mast shall be decided only upon prior approval of the Engineer and
Engineer.
J. The Contractor shall allow in his Contract Sum for any additional structural
support and modifications to the structure as may be required for the installation
of hoists and tower cranes. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for the design and
engineering of such modifications and support structure. The Contractor shall
employ a qualified and licensed engineer to perform the design and all design
calculations and drawings are to be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

20th October 2021
K. Any temporary openings that need to be left out in the structure for the installation
and/operation of tower cranes and hoists (including any for access and loading) shall
be engineered by the Contractor. The calculations shall be forwarded to the Engineer
for approval.
3.03 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
A. The Contractor shall include within the Contract Price for recommended spare parts
and maintenance.
B. The Contractor shall provide an adequate number of operators to ensure twenty-four

(24) hour service if required.
C. Each hoist and tower crane operator must be capable of being contacted during any
emergencies.
D. The Contractor shall arrange to provide men and materials hoists and associated
hoisting facilities, at level/levels as required to complete the Contract. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the installation, maintenance and operation of
the hoists and hoist platforms, including the installation of integral temporary ‘wet’
services.
E. The hoists shall be operational as required but be available twenty four (24) hours
per day, every day excepting approved holidays. Material hoist time shall be
programmed by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. Material hoist
schedule will be strictly followed, and no unscheduled deliveries will be permitted.
F. The hoists will be left in place at least until the elevators are available for construction
use at which time the hoists can be removed. The schedule for removal of hoists shall
be approved by the Engineer.
G. The Contractor is required to schedule placement of all major equipment and

materials prior to the removal of the hoists and tower cranes. All contractors shall
coordinate this requirement with the Contractor.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 55 00
VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Requirements and restrictions for access and parking of vehicles.
A. Related work specified under other sections within Section 01 50 50, 01 52 10,
01 55 50 and 01 56 20.
1.03 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall construct and maintain temporary access roads to the Site,
access roads to the construction areas and to the Site offices, lay down areas.
The temporary access roads shall be formed by proper roller compacted earth with
compacted granular material topping. The granular course shall be at least 150mm
thick and shall last for the period of construction of the Works.
B. The access to Site shall at least be through two access points, in addition to the
access to the Site offices.
C. The access shall be through designated access roads and entry gates only. The
Contractor shall install manual control barricades. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible for all access related issues as detailed in Section 01 56 20.
D. The construction vehicles and equipment shall not enter areas designated for site
offices.
E. All vehicular entries and exits shall be through security outposts and gates. Only
authorized Vehicles and equipment are allowed entry to Site.
F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a list of all vehicles and equipment he
intends to use for construction purposes. Prior permission is to be obtained from the
Engineer for entry of all his vehicles and equipment.
G. Passenger vehicles are not allowed entry to construction areas. Limited number of
‘four wheel drive’ passenger vehicles may be allowed in the construction areas,
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
H. The Contractor shall construct covered parking areas near the Site offices of the
Engineer. The number of Car parking shall be each and every staff of Engineer
plus Ten (10) extra for the visitors. Asphalt, Shaded Structures etc.etc. shall be
maintained throughout the complete Contract period plus three months. These
shall be removed after this period, as approved by the Engineer.
I. All security procedures as detailed by the Engineer shall be followed for entry,
parking and exit of vehicles from and to the Site, including the areas designated
for site offices. Violation of security procedures shall result in barring future entry of
the violated vehicle to the Site.
Gulf Consult Vehicular Access and Parking III-2/01 55 00 - 1

20th October 2021
J. The Contractor shall provide for sufficient number of guards, barricades, etc. to direct
traffic and public as required for carrying out works in his Contract.
K. The Contractor shall be responsible for dust control. All access roads to Site
shall be watered on a regular basis and as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall also keep the surrounding roads, and sidewalks free from
construction debris.
L. Ready mix concrete trucks shall not be allowed to discharge any left over concrete
at the Site. Any discharge from the concrete pump should be disposed off in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
M. TRAFFIC REGULATION:
1. The Contractor shall ascertain from the relevant Authorities what

restrictions and regulations exist concerning the flow of traffic to and from
the Site, and shall pay all charges in connection therewith. The Contractor
shall provide all temporary diversions, traffic signals, signs and the like as
required. The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles abide by the
restrictions and regulations imposed by the relevant Authorities.
2. The Contractor shall obtain at his cost all permits required for oversize
loads, over-weight vehicles, and shall arrange for all necessary police
escorts.
3. Movement of materials and workmen to and around the Site shall be

scheduled and coordinated with the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Vehicular Access and Parking III-2/01 55 00 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 55 50
TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope
1. Maintenance and protection of vehicular and pedestrian traffic through areas

of construction and furnishing, erecting and maintaining temporary traffic
control devices including barriers, barricades, cones, drums, warning signs
and lights.
2. No work shall be performed during the hours of darkness unless otherwise
authorized in writing by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times
to properties and facilities affected by the works.
As a minimum, accesses shall be replaced with the same width, standard
and surface type as the existing access facilities, but in all cases a minimum
width of 3 m shall be provided. The layout, width and construction of all
accesses shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to construction.
The locations of accesses to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings,
and the Contractor shall understand that any existing access whether public
or private, paved or unpaved shall be maintained at all times during the
contract period unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Engineer in
writing.
4. Detours Works shall comprise but not be limited to necessary field surveys,
The construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour
carriageways including all earthworks, the provision and installation of metal
beam, safety barricades, guardrails, barriers, adequate drainage, lighting,
traffic signals, signs, and other traffic control devices, on proposals submitted
by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the
Engineer.
Where required, temporary protection of existing services, in accordance with

the requirements of the concerned Service Authority or Company, shall form
part of the Detours’ Works.
Restoration of the Detour sites to their original condition or such other

condition as directed or approved by the Engineer will be required on
completion of use of the Detours.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. Flagmen
1. Persons acting as flagmen shall be physically and mentally qualified, trained

in their duties and courteous. Each flagman on duty shall be identified with
appropriate and distinctive apparel approved by the Engineer and shall be
equipped with a STOP/GO sign conforming to these Specifications.
Gulf Consult Traffic Control III-2/01 55 50 - 1

20th October 2021
Reflective apparel is required for flagging during darkness. Traffic Batons are
to be used a Darkness / Night time.
B. Reference Standards
1. General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait,

Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012.
2. Kuwait Traffic Signs Manual.
3. Institute of Transportation Engineers.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings for all areas of traffic regulation whether shown on the contract
drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
B. Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Survey of existing conditions identifying levels, existing services and access

to existing properties or facilities, 1:200 scale.
2. Areas where services are congested shall be detailed at 1:100 scale.
3. Details of vehicular and pedestrian segregations.
4. All drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1.04 DUST CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall, to the maximum extent possible, prevent nuisance as a result of
dust raised from the works. Dust Control shall be by watering by tanker trucks with
spray attachments or other approved methods.
1.05 REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT
A. On completion of the works or when no longer required the Contractor shall remove
all equipment from the works. Except that, if so required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall hand over equipment in place to other persons or authorities
designated by the Engineer.
1.06 FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY
A. Should the Contractor fail to provide satisfactory maintenance and protection of

vehicular and pedestrian traffic through areas of construction, or fail to adequately
maintain access to properties and facilities affected by the work, or fail to furnish,
maintain, repair or replace any traffic control devices within 24 hours of being given
written notice by the Engineer, the Employer shall apply a penalty of KD 250.00 per
day in respect of said failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Traffic control devices shall conform to the requirements of the General

Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry of Public
Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012 and the “Kuwait Traffic Signs Manual”.

20th October 2021
All traffic control devices shall be approved by the Engineer before installation on the
site. After initial use is complete the Contractor may reuse any approved item as the
need arises.
B. All sign Panels, barricades, drums, vertical panels and flagmen’s paddles shall be
reflectorised by using reflectorised sheeting that meets the minimum requirements of
Type 1, enclosed lens as Specified in General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and
Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administrations –
January 2012. Painting shall not constitute an approved substitute for achieving
reflectorisation.
C. Construction Signs
1. Sign panels shall conform to General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and
January 2012 and to the “Kuwait Traffic Signs Manual” and shall be as
shown on the drawings.
2. Sign posts shall be of 100 x 100mm nominal sound seasoned softwood free
of excessive knots, acceptable to the Engineer and conforming to General
Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry of
Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012. Sign posts shall be
drilled with breakway holes as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
D. Barricades shall be made of metal or plastic and shall collapse when tipped over.
Barricades made of wood will not be permitted.
E. Cones shall be manufactured of a material capable of withstanding impact without

damage to the cones or vehicles. All cones shall be red coloured with a white
reflectorised band as indicated on the drawings. The band shall have a reflective
intensity complying with the minimum requirements of Type 1, enclosed lens sheeting
as specified in General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of
Kuwait, Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012. Cones shall
be capable of remaining upright during normal traffic flow and wind conditions in the
area where they are used.
F. Vertical panels shall be constructed of metal or plastic and those of wood will not be
permitted.
G. Temporary metal beam guardrails shall conform to the applicable Clauses of General
Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012. Used guardrail material will be
permitted providing it is neat in appearance, straight, and is approved by the Engineer.
H. Warning lights shall be Type A (low intensity flashing), Type B (high intensity flashing), or
Type C (steady burn), and shall meet the minimum requirement of the Institute of
Transportation Engineers “Standard for Flashing and Steady-Burn Barricade Warning
Lights”, insofar as the I.T.E. Standard does not conflict with the “Kuwait Traffic Signs
Manual”.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making the necessary arrangements with the
Electrical Distribution Network Section of the Ministry of /Electricity and Water (MEW)
for the connection of the control cabinets of the lighting systems to the power supply

20th October 2021
network. A formal application for connection must also be made to (MEW) through
the Engineer. Adequate notice shall be given to the Engineer to permit the processing
of this application. Connection to the network will be carried out by (MEW). , Any
connection charges shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost of electricity
used for temporary lighting systems will be borne by the Contractor.
All regulations of the Ministry of Electricity and Water shall be strictly observed in the
distribution and use of the supply. Under no circumstances shall any installation be
connected to the mains supply until authorized by the Engineer.
The nominal voltage of the mains power to be supplied by the Ministry of Electricity
and Water is 240 volts, single phase at a nominal frequency of 50Hz.
I. Temporary traffic signals are to be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved
by the Engineer. The signals used shall be multi-pole units complete with a controller
covered by a sunshade. The poles shall be fitted with either one or two sets of three
lanterns.
All temporary traffic signal installations shall be to the approval of the Engineer and
the Traffic Department of the Ministry of Interior, and shall be in general conformance
with General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry
of Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012.
Pre-timer control or alternative methods of vehicle detection may be proposed by the

Contractor where signals are proposed for short-term operation. The proposals shall
be approved by the Engineer and the Traffic Department of the Ministry of Interior
before being implemented.
Arrangements, responsibilities and charges for power supplies shall be as described

for item 2.01 H herein.
J. Road works etc. in connection with detour and the like shall be executed in
compliance with the under mentioned Sections of the General Specifications for
Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry of Public Works, Roads
Administrations – January 2012
1. Section Il - Earthworks
2. Section Ill - Sub-base and Base Courses
3. Section IV - Asphalt Works
4. Section VI - Temporary Drainage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
A. Traffic control devices shall be provided and maintained both inside and outside the
Contract Limits as needed to facilitate traffic guidance and to ensure that all traffic,
whether vehicular or pedestrian, will be accommodated safely.

20th October 2021
B. Prior to start of construction operations, the Contractor shall erect such signs,
barricades, and other traffic control devices as may be required in the Contract
Documents, on proposals submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer
or as directed by the Engineer. During non-working hours and following completion of
a particular construction operation, all warning signs, except those necessary for the
safety of the public, shall be removed or entirely covered with either metal or plywood
sheet so that the entire sign panel will be invisible to traffic.
C. Traffic control devices shall be in place and operated only as long as they are
needed. Only those devices that apply to conditions actually in existence shall be in
place. If not needed, the traffic control devices shall be transported to a storage area
for further reuse on the Works.
D. Reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall be kept
clean, free from dirt, mud and road grime. Scratches, rips, and tears in the sheeting
shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Reflective
sheeting materials shall maintain a reflectivity of not less than 50% of the minimum
intensity values specified in General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways:
State of Kuwait, Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012
E. Sign panels, barricades, cones, vertical panels and drums shall be installed as shown
in the Contract Documents, on proposals submitted by the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
F. These devices shall be supplied and maintained by the Contractor and they shall be
relocated, realigned or replaced as necessary. Any traffic control devices provided
under this Clause which are damaged, lost, stolen, destroyed or deemed
unacceptable while their use is required on the Contract shall be promptly replaced
by the Contractor without additional payment or compensation.
All traffic control devices referred to in this Clause shall remain the property of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall not remove any item from the site without the
Engineer’s written agreement.
G. Temporary metal beam guardrails shall be installed on proposals submitted by the

Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall maintain the guardrails and shall promptly replace all damaged
sections.
During construction of the Works, the temporary metal beam guardrails may be
required to be removed and reinstalled in other locations as directed or approved by
the Engineer.
H. Type A warning lights shall be securely fixed to barricades or drums used singly or
installed as shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
I. Type B warning tights shall be securely fixed to warning signs, barricades, and
independent supports shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals submitted by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer’ s Representative or as directed by the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, Type C warning lights shall be securely fixed to

barricades, temporary concrete barriers or drums as shown in the Contract

20th October 2021
Documents, on proposals submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer

or as directed by the Engineer.
3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Temporary lighting shall be installed, as shown in the Contract Documents, on

proposals submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed
by the Engineer. The location and spacing of light standards shall be approved by the
Engineer unless the required spacing is indicated on the Contract Drawings.
The Contractor shall maintain the temporary lighting installations and shall carry out
routine inspections to ensure all installations are functioning satisfactorily.
The Contractor shall promptly replace or repair any faulty or malfunctioning lamps or
installations. The Engineer shall be informed promptly of any traffic damaged
installation and such installation shall be replaced or repaired as directed by the
Engineer. During the construction of the Works, temporary lighting may be required to
be removed and reinstalled in other locations as directed or approved by the
Engineer.
3.03 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNALS
A. Where the maintenance of traffic schemes requires the installation of traffic signals at
a junction where there are no existing signals the Contractor shall supply and install
all temporary signal control equipment.
At existing signal-controlled junctions the Contractor shall utilize the existing

equipment and shall supply and install such additional equipment required for any
modified road layout or traffic management system at the junction.
The Contractor shall modify the temporary signal installation to suit the various detour
and traffic management stages and shall supply and install all additional equipment
required to maintain continuous operation of the traffic signals while transferring from
one detour or traffic management stage to another.
The Contractor shall maintain the temporary traffic signal installation and shall
replace promptly any broken lamps and shall replace and repair any damaged or
malfunctioning equipment.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer the new permanent’ traffic signal
equipment shall not be installed at a junction until the permanent carriageway works
are complete at the particular junction.
3.04 FLAGMEN
A. Employ flagmen only where approved by the Engineer and relevant Authorities.
Flagmen shall be used for night-time operations, as necessary.
3.05 DETOURS
A. Execute detours of the following types as shown in the Contract Documents, on

proposals submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed
by the Engineer.

20th October 2021
1. Type I - Temporary Unsurfaced
2. Type II - Temporary Reinforced
B. Type I - Temporary Unsurfaced Detour The existing ground surface shall be graded
and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure satisfactory dust control in accordance with General
Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012.
C. Type II - Temporary Surfaced Detour: The surface of the Detour shall be prepared as
noted for a Type I Detour and shall then be treated with a prime coat as described in
the General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and Highways: State of Kuwait, Ministry
of Public Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012 followed by a 50mm thick
layer of asphaltic concrete Type II laid and compacted in accordance with General
Works, Roads Administrations – January 2012.
D. The application of other parts of this section shall apply to detour work.
E. Earthworks shall be constructed as shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals

submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the
Engineer. Acceptable grades and grade transitions shall be provided where Detours
join existing pavements.
F.On completion of the Works or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Detours are no
longer required, the Contractor shall remove all temporary constructions, materials
and structures as specified in the General Specifications for Kuwait Roads and
January 2012, and shall restore the Detour sites to their original condition, or to such
other condition as shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 56 20
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provision of safety fence to the site perimeter and (2 No.) lockable
gates for the two access points, work includes the following:
1. Installation
2 Maintenance
3. Removal
B. Existing Situation
1. Examine the site to familarise with the existing situation where there is no
existing boundary wall of required height, provide safety fence as required by the
various statutory authorities having jurisdiction.
C. System Description
1. Safety fence and gates 2.50 m high above the final site level/s after fill is
completed of braced construction with fully closed panel construction to
completely enclose the site and prevent unauthorized persons violating the
works site area. The site shall also include all areas and lands approved by the
Engineer’s Representative for the use by Contractor for storage or as borrow
pits, etc.
2. The safety fence and gates should be positioned to comply with the following
requirements:
a. To provide sufficient and secure access gates as necessary

b. To make any adjustments as necessary to suit the various phases of the
works, and to suit the Contractor's approved Construction Schedule.
c. To comply with any instructions of the Engineer's Representative in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. Submittals
1. Submit to the Engineer's Representative shop drawings under provisions of

Section 01 33 00.
2. Show layout, details of construction, foundations, sizes, and grades of members.
Submit design of foundations, support system, design calculation etc. for
approval.
3. Obtain Engineer's Representative approval and approvals of Authorities.
E. Quality Assurance
1. Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of

Contract.
F. Materials
1. Fence shall be such that it can withstand a wind speed of 80 miles/hour, as per
UBC’97.
2. Post and Gate Construction: Shall be primed and painted steel and shall be
structurally sound.
Gulf Consult Temporary Barriers and Enclosures III-2/01 56 20-1

20th October 2021
3. Fence Panels: 2.50 m high Steel Sheet Panels atleast 24 gauge Kirby or similar
factory painted finish, colour to be approved by Engineer's Representative.
4. Gate Hardware: Secure locks and bolts to all gates.
5. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. Colours designated by Engineer's
Representative.
G. Installation
1. Install safety fence and gates complete before any work may commence.
2. Erect safety fence and gates in approved location as approved on Site Layout
Organization Chart submitted by Contractor.
3. Install safety fence surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.
4. Paint sight-exposed surfaces of safety fence, posts and gates.
H. Maintenance
1. Maintain safety fence and gates including cleaning and repairing deterioration
and damages throughout the contract period, as required by the Engineer's
Representative at no extra cost.
2. Repaint as necessary and whenever instructed by the Engineer's
Representative.
I. Removal
1. Remove safety fence and gates upon the completion of the Contract, after
getting permission from the Engineer's Representative.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Temporary Barriers and Enclosures III-2/01 56 20-2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes: Provide Two (2) numbers well lit project identification signs, each in both English and
Arabic, of types as approved by the Engineer, at locations as shown on the drawings.
1. Design
2. Installation
3. Maintenance
4. Removal
B. System Description
1. Each project identification sign board will have the following information:
i. Perspective of Contract as provided by the Engineer.
ii. Name of the Employer
iii. Name of the Contract
iv. Date of Enterprise and Contract Period
v. Value of Contract
vi. Name of Consultant
vii. Name of Contractor etc.
viii Names of Approved Sub-contractors, one per slat.
2. The size of each board shall be 3.000 meter x 7.000 meter including the size of
Perspective of project which shall be 2.560 meter x 1.940 meter. The English
letters shall be in capital, of approx. size 20cm high x 1.25cm thick x 1cm distant
within the same word and 2cm distant between adjacent words; the Arabic digits
and letters shall be similar and shall match; all to the approval of Engineer.
3. The lettering shall be in black colour, over white background.
4. The sign boards shall be erected at locations as approved by the Engineer and
shall be dismantled and cleared away after completion of the Works and the
ground below made good.
5. The signboards should be sufficient as shown on the drawings. The Contractor
to connect and provide all means of power supply.
C. Submittals
1. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for approval.
2. Submit design calculations of sign surface metal plates, foundations, supports,
framing etc. to the Engineer for approval. For wind speeds etc. follow 80
miles/hour, as per UBC ’97.
3. Show content, layout, lettering, colours, foundation, structure, sizes and grades
of members.
4. Obtain approval of Engineer and of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction.
Gulf Consult Project Identification III-2/01 58 00 - 1

20th October 2021
D. Quality Assurance
1. Engage professional installer with not less than five years experience in similar
kind of work. Submit details to the Engineer for approval.
2. Design in accordance with statutory requirements and instruction of Engineer.
E. Sign Materials
1. Structure and Framing : Steel, structurally sound.
2. Paint and Primers : Exterior quality, two coats. Colours as approved by the
Engineer.
F. Installation
1. Ensure that project identification signs are installed to the Engineer approval.
2. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to
resist wind loadings.
3. Install sign surface in plumb and level and anchor securely.
4. Provide required level of illumination including all connections and power supply.
G. Maintenance for the duration of the Contract.

1. Maintain signs and supports, clean and repair where deterioration or damages
have occurred to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no increase in Contract
Price.
2. Repaint as necessary.
H. Removal
1. The project identification and signs shall be removed after obtaining the
Engineer’s approval.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Project Identification III-2/01 58 00 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Products
B. Product Delivery Requirements
C. Product Storage and Handling Requirements
D. Installation Requirements
E. Identifying Markings
F. Product Acceptance Standards
G. Undecided Colours or Similar Other Things
H. Testing of Materials
I. Products List
J. Product Substitution Procedures
1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall use extreme care in the transportation and handling of materials to
and within the Site. The materials shall be transported in a manner that does
not hinder progress of other contractors' work at the Site, and that inconvenience is
avoided to any occupied tenants. Depending on the availability of storage areas within
the Site, it may be necessary for the Contractor to store his materials elsewhere,
outside the Project limits, until they are needed for immediate installation. The
Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the Engineer for arranging all storage areas
on and off Site.
B. All contractors and subcontractors shall provide his own craneage / forklifts for
unloading of their materials in their storage yards and Site.
C. The Contractor shall provide craneage and hoisting to move materials and equipment
to the building for the materials and equipment supplied by him and his subcontractors
and suppliers.
D. The Contractor shall provide reasonable craneage, loading/unloading and moving
facilities for any Employer supplied materials, without any additional cost to the
Employer.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Products: means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and
systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for
preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.
B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar
components.
C. Include in Tender Price for all instructions of manufacturers and all good practices
recommended by the manufacturers.
D. Include in the Contractor's Construction Schedule for the time gap
required/recommended by the manufacturer between successive operations.
Gulf Consult Product Requirements III-2/01 60 00 - 1

20th October 2021
E. Whenever a brand name or manufacturer is specified in the Contract or is proposed

by the Contractor, the only accepted Country of manufacture (provided manufacturing
facilities exists in more than one country) shall be that where the corporate
headquarters of the manufacturer is located.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packed and protected to prevent
damage during transportation and handling.
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling

or damage.
C. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,

quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
D. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the
Specification Sections.
1.05 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain
within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well drained area; prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
E. The Contractor shall use only designated spaces in the Site for storage of his
materials, as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for any off-site
storage and schedule deliveries of the materials on an as-needed basis. The mode,
routing and time of delivery of materials shall be reviewed with the Engineer, prior to
actual deliveries.
F. The Contractor is responsible for marshalling and staging his materials. All costs
associated with a storage yard including receiving, unloading shake-out, reloading
and delivery to the Site are to be included in the Contractor’s Contract Sum.
G. The Contractor shall provide covered and secured storage of samples as may be
required on the Project.
H. Project from time to time. Should the Contractor’s materials stored on Site
interfere with the permanent construction, he shall promptly move these
materials when directed by the Engineer; all related costs shall be borne by the
Contractor.
I. The Contractor shall handle, store and fix products to manufacturer’s instructions with
care to ensure that they are not damaged when incorporated into the work, to
the Engineer’s approval.
J. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of manufacturing test
certificates and quality control certificates.

20th October 2021
K. The Contractor shall provide insulated and air-conditioned storage rooms for materials
that require to be stored in a controlled environment.
L. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of stored materials from weather,
negligence and other trades, until their installation in the Works and hand over of
the completed facilities to the Employer.
M. The Contractor's materials may require to be relocated from time to time as directed
by the Engineer, to accommodate construction by other trades, at no additional cost to
the Employer.
N. The Contractor shall take delivery of any Employer supplied materials, put them in
proper storage and be responsible for protection of the materials.
1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,

connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective
manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1.07 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS
A. Name plates and other identifying markings (except as otherwise instructed in these
Documents) shall not be affixed on exposed surfaces of manufactured items installed
in finished spaces.
1.08 PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

A. The term "product" shall include material, equipment, assembly methods,
manufacturer, brand, trade name, or other description.
B. Products with exposed finishes require the Engineer approval prior to incorporation in
the Works.
C. The sum named in the accepted Tender shall be deemed to include the materials
described by proprietary designation. Materials described in the Specification by
proprietary designation shall be provided as specified subject to the provisions of the
Conditions of Contract.
D. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product
complies with British Standards, Kuwaiti Standards, (U.S.) Federal Specification,
ASTM Designation, ANSI Specification or other Government or association standard,
the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the
product complies therewith. Where requested or specified, submit supporting test
data to substantiate compliance.
1.09 UNDECIDED COLOURS ETC.
A. When colours or similar other things are to be selected by the Engineer after the
Contract is signed, than in such cases the Tenderer shall quote for the costliest
alternative from the manufacturer’s published range.
1.10 TESTING OF MATERIALS
A. Refer Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements.

20th October 2021
1.11 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Transmit four copies of a list of all products which are proposed for installation,
including name of manufacturer within 30 days after the date of enterprise.
B. Be responsible to ensure that the listed products comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
C. Tabulate products by Specifications section number, title, and Article number.
D. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name,
model or catalogue designation, and reference standards.
E. Engineer shall reply in writing within (21) days stating whether there is reasonable
objection to listed items. Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute a waiver
of requirements of Contracts Documents.
F. Submitting the product list will not relieve the Contractor from submitting of each
product individually.
1.12 PRODUCTS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. refer Section 01 63 00 Substitution and Approved Equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 63 00
SUBSTITUTIONS AND APPROVED EQUAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling

requests for approving “substitutions” and “approved equal” products presented by
the Contractor.
A.02 DEFINITIONS
A. The term "product" shall mean any material including proprietary goods, equipment
and manufactured items.
B. “Approved Equal” term for product selection will be applicable in this Contract subject
to the Engineer’s approval. However, in selecting the product the Contractor shall
give due preference to the “Design Intent”.
References herein to “approved equal” term shall mean that the review and approval
of the Engineer is mandatory for any approved equal product proposed by the
Contractor. Such proposed product shall be equal or better than the specified in all
respects to the quality, durability and performance characteristics including its
origin/source. The Engineer’s decision to consider, reject or approve the proposed
“approved equal” Products/Manufacturers shall be final.
‘The Contractor’s freedom, however, to propose “approved equals” for the Engineer’s
review and approval shall not be limited to those products in respect of which the
term “or approved equal” has been used in the Contract Documents except where it
is specifically stated otherwise in individual specification sections. The Contractor, in
accordance with the above, may propose “approved equals” to any specified
products provided such proposed products are equal in all respects to the quality,
durability and performance characteristics of the specified product.
C. “Substitute” Products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the named product or

named manufacturer’s product (specified in the Part 2 Product of specification
section) or approved equal product (refer to 1.02 B above) in spite of his
demonstrated sufficient (in the opinion of the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative)
endeavors, he may propose a substitute for the Engineer’s review and approval,
which substitute shall be similar or better to the specified ones in performance,
quality, maintenance and shall be in line with the design intent.
D. Manufacturer: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired,

drawings and specifications have been based on the products of particular
manufacturers specified in the respective sections of the specifications or noted on
the related drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. “Substitution” Request Submittal: The Engineer will receive requests as follows:
Gulf Consult Substitutions and Approved Equal III-2/01 63 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for consideration. Submit requests in the form
and according to procedures required.
2. Identify the manufacturer and product, the fabrication, installation method in
each request. Include related Specification Sections and Drawing numbers.
3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements
and the following as appropriate:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications
needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by
the Employer and Other Contractors, if any that will be necessary to
accommodate the proposed “substitution”.
b. A detailed comparison of all the specified and significant qualities of
the proposed “substitution” with those of the Work specified.
Significant qualities will include elements, such as performance,
weight, size, durability, and visual effect etc.
c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
d. Samples, where applicable or requested.
e. A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net saving if any in the
Contract Sum. Additional costs are not accepted. This should be
substantiated by comparative quotations with complete rate
breakdown for both the proposed alternative/substitute item and the
specified item.
g. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that
may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the
“substitute” to perform adequately.
h. Warranty
i. Reimbursement for review and redesign services, if applicable in the
opinion of the Engineer/Engineer’s Representative.
B. Engineer’s Action: The approval of any “substitute” or “approved equal” product shall
in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and obligations under the
Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as to the suitability of any
product shall rest with the Contractor. The Engineer may request and the Contractor
shall provide such supporting data, carryout such tests, etc., as the Engineer may
reasonably require in order to satisfy him as to such suitability. Any extra costs of
delay by the Contractor, because of his failure to propose “substitute” or “approved
equal” in a timely manner, so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or
because of rejection of the proposed products for “approved equal”” or “substitute”
found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,
and he shall not be entitled to additional payment nor to extra time for this reason.
C. Cost effect in approving “substitutes” (refer 1.02 C above): Should any “substitute”
product be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, any increase

20th October 2021
in cost over and above the specified product shall be borne by the Contractor.
However, any saving in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.
1.04 SUBSTITUTES
A. Specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue number,

etc., shall not amount to relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to meet other
specification requirements, or from his responsibility to make material submittals for such
other requirements for approval.
B. “Substitute” products where permitted and approved, must conform to the Contract
Documents space requirements. Any such product that does not meet such space
requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense
and any modification of replaced systems thereby arising shall also be made at his
expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 72 00
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples.
B. Recording
C. Submittal
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. In addition to requirements in General and Particular Conditions maintain in the Project

Record Document Room at the site for the Engineer, one record copy of:
1. Contract Drawings
2. Project Manual
3. Addenda
4. Variations and other modifications to the Contract
5. Reviewed and stamped shop drawings, product data, and samples
6. Record Documents
7. Field test records
8. Inspection certificates and checklists
9. Manufacturer's certificates
B. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and
samples.
C. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number
listings in Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT
RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.
D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record
Documents for construction purposes, and do not remove Record Documents from
room without prior approval from the Engineer.
E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by the Engineer.
1.03 RECORDING
A. Record daily "as-built" information on drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual.
B. Provide separate colours for each major system, for recording information.
C. Record daily information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any
work until required information is recorded.
D. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
Gulf Consult Project Record Documents III-2/01 72 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor

datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations and sizes of underground utilities
and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by Modifications.
6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
7. References to related shop drawings and Modifications.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
2. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
F. Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's instruction manuals and certifications,

inspection certifications, field test records, and other Documents required by individual
Specifications sections.
G. Labour Record
1. Each day, provide for verification by the Engineer a record showing the
number and description of craftsmen, labourers and other persons employed
on or in connection with the Works including those employed by Assigned
Subcontractors.
H. Visitors Record
1. Maintain a record of visitors to the Site, and submit at weekly intervals to the
Engineer.
I. Weather Records
1. Keep an accurate record of:
a. Daily maximum and minimum air temperatures (including overnight).
b. Number of hours per day in which work is prevented by inclement
weather.
2. Provide at least two maximum and minimum thermometers at agreed locations

inside the buildings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. A minimum of 60 days prior to the Date of Substantial Completion, for each of the
relevant portions of the Work, submit As-built drawings as detailed in Section 01 33 30
– Shop Drawings, Record Documents, Product Data and Samples. Note: as built
drawings are to be submitted monthly to the Engineer for review, throughout the
duration of the contract.
B. Transmit with transmittal in duplicate, listing:

20th October 2021
a. Date
b. Contract Title and Number
c. Contractor's Name, Address, and Telephone Number
d. Number and title of each Record Document and arrange in correct sequence
e. Signature of Contractor or Authorized Representative
C. Where provision of "record" drawings is required by Ministries or the Municipality as a
precondition to providing their service connections, approvals and the like, submit
drawings at the correct time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 73 50
SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General requirements for planning and implementation of safety on the Site.
1.02 APPLICABILITY OF THE SECTION

A. It is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor to implement all safety precautions and
procedures to the requirement of each task performed on the Site. Approval,
agreement, endorsement or the like if provided by the Employer and/or the Engineer
shall not limit or absolve any responsibility of the Contractor and no other party except
the Contractor is liable for any mishaps at the Site during the period of construction.
B. This section shall act as guidelines only for implementation by the Contractor a
proper safety program during the construction of the Works. This section
describes certain minimum safety requirements for the Contractor to employ on the
Project. The responsibilities of the Contractor are not limited to the provision of
requirements identified in this document.
C. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to all safety rules, regulations and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, such as Ministry of Defense
(MOD), Ministry of Public Works (MPW), Ministry of Public Health (MOH), Ministry
of Electricity & Water (MEW), Kuwait Municipality, Kuwait Fire Force (KFF),
Environmental Public Authority (EPA) etc. The Contractor shall follow all safety
procedures prescribed in the AGC (Associated General Contractors) of America
Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) of USA and all other local codes and regulations.
D. Where any requirement explained in this section varies from that prescribed in any
rules, regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, more stringent of
the requirement shall apply.
E. Where any requirement explained in this section varies from that prescribed in the
laws of the State of Kuwait. AGC Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction
and/or OSHA manual, more stringent of the requirement shall apply.
1.03 SAFETY
A. Within twenty-eight (28) days of issue of Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit, for the Engineer’s review, his “Safety Program” (hereinafter referred to as
Safety Program), naming the key person in his organization who will be responsible for
administering the program. This Safety Program shall incorporate in it all the
requirements for Project safety and accident prevention and in particular the safety
requirements listed in the safety checklist.
B. The program shall indicate how the Contractor’s workers, subcontractor personnel
and others working at the Site and equipment and materials will be protected. This plan
should address, but not be limited to, organization, personnel, inspections, items
such as temporary flooring, handrails, personnel and safety equipment’s, netting, fire-
watch, etc.
C. All employees shall be physically qualified for performing the duties to which they
are assigned. Operators of equipment and vehicles shall be able to read and
understand the signs, signals and operating instructions in use.
D. Prior to start of work, arrangements shall be made for assistance from medical services
in existence in the vicinity of the Site.
Gulf Consult Safety III-2/01 73 50 - 1

20th October 2021
E. Communication and transportation to effectively care for injured workers shall be

provided as necessary. First aid kits, in the ratio of one (1) unit for each twenty-five (25)
persons or less, shall be provided on the Site. They shall be easily accessible to all the
workers.
F. The Contractor shall integrate an overall Safety Program incorporating all his
subcontractors’ specific safety requirements. All subcontractors shall support the
Contractor by providing their input and requirements, fully detailed. The Safety
personnel detailed in this section shall be provided by the Contractor and also by all
subcontractors.
G. The Contractor shall organize a “Site Crisis Management Team” that shall be headed
by the Contractor’s Safety Officer. The Contractor’s Safety Officer shall be suitably
qualified and shall have extensive experience (at least ten (10) years) in managing
safety on building construction projects. The Site Crisis Management Team shall
comprise Safety Engineers representing all contractors and subcontractors. In
addition, a number of foremen shall be identified, to liaise and coordinate with the
Safety Engineers. The foremen shall be suitably trained by the Safety
Officers/Engineers, who shall be responsible for clearly identified tasks, during
emergencies. The Contractor shall submit a detailed organization and tasks of each
individual forming the Site Crisis Management Team for the review of the Engineer.
H. Safety Engineer shall mean Safety Officer.
1.04 SAFETY PROGRAM
A. The Safety Program established and maintained on the Project shall incorporate the
requirements of safety and health of the Kuwait authorities, the AGC Manual of
Accident Prevention in Construction, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) of USA, and all other local codes and regulations.
B. The purpose of the Safety Program is to elicit the interest and efforts of all
personnel, both management and supervisory, required for the prevention of injuries
and accidents, through proper and thorough training and instructions to employees.
C. All contractors and their supervisors/foremen are responsible for the

administration of a comprehensive Safety Program.
D. The Safety Program shall embody the prevention of accidental injury, occupational
illness and property damage. Each contractor shall provide and maintain a safe, hazard
free workplace for their employees, for fellow workers and the general public. As a
minimum, the Contractor’s Safety Program shall incorporate all of the principles of
this section. In addition the Contractor shall comply with any additional safety
requirements suggested by the Engineer.
E. The Safety Program shall ensure the involvement and active participation of all project
employees by requiring safety training, which will promote recognition of unsafe
acts, potential and actual hazards and the immediate corrective action to be taken. All
employees shall be constantly aware of their responsibility to work in a safe manner.
F. Each contractor, and his sub-contractors, has a contractual obligation to perform their
work using safe methods and to comply with the Project Safety Program.
G. Subcontractors to the Contractor shall not have a separate safety program. The
Contractor’s Safety Program shall incorporate any special requirements of his
subcontractors’ safety program. The Contractor shall fully coordinate such
requirements with his subcontractors.
H. Specific principles for protection requirements of each contractor are as follows:

1. Protection of Works until issue of Taking Over Certificate
2. Protection of work of others adjacent and below during construction

20th October 2021
3. Protection of own personnel and other personnel working below
1.05 MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION
A. A Safety Officer shall be employed by the Contractor who shall have the overall
responsibility to implement all safety measures on Site. The Safety Officer and the entire
safety organization shall report directly to the Contractors Senior Management in Kuwait
and in no case come under the hierarchy/authority of the Contractor’s Project
Management Team.
B. A Safety Officer/Engineer from each contractor will be designated at the Site. He will
have full authority to direct work stoppages and to expend funds, as necessary, to
eliminate hazards and imminent danger conditions on the Site.
C. The Contractor’s Safety Officer is responsible for the implementation and further
development the Safety Program. His duties will include the following:
1. Conduct monthly safety meeting with Site personnel and Sub-contractors.
2. Inspect the Project daily, and record all visible safety hazards, including
identification of violators.
3. Follow through on timely correction of safety hazards, making immediate
corrections as necessary.
4. Monitor on Site safety meetings and report same on his Daily Report.
5. Foster ‘Safety Awareness’ in all tradesmen and supervisors on the Project.
6. Follow up, for insurance purposes, all relevant safety reports.
7. Check all areas at least once a day for housekeeping and cleanup. Take
immediate action to ensure compliance with requirements.
8. Submit job hazard analysis for each major phase or element of work as
necessary.
9. Post safety signs on the Project.
10. Conduct employee indoctrination for all new personnel.
11. Ensure training is carried out for specific tasks, especially work of a “non
standard” nature.
D. The Safety Engineer will be a member of the Site Crisis Management Team organized
to deal with emergencies.
E. The Contractor’s Safety Engineer shall have an experience of at least fifteen (15) years
in the field.
F. The Safety Engineer shall as a minimum be a qualified engineer with additional

qualifications and special training duly accredited to internationally recognized
bodies pertaining to Safety implementation.
G. The Safety Engineer shall report directly to the Contractor’s top management in Kuwait
and in no case come under the hierarchy of the Contractor’s Project Manager’s team.
H. The team of Contractor’s Safety personnel under the Safety Engineer shall not
report to the Contractor’s Project Manager and/or the Contractor’s Construction
Manager.
I. The Engineer has the authority to ask the Contractor to remove any staff in the
Contractor’s Safety team if in the opinion of the Engineer, the performance of the
said staff is not satisfactory. The replacement of such staff shall take place within
ten (10) days of the Engineer notice.
J. The Contractor shall have the full responsibility to ensure implementation of his

20th October 2021
subcontractors’ Safety Management System.

K. No Safety personnel, either of the Contractor or his subcontractors shall take any
direction from the Contractor’s Site team that works under the authority of the
Contractor’s Project Manager and/or the Contractor’s Construction Manager.
L. Any and all staff of the Contractor’s construction or site team shall abide by the
instructions of the Contractor’s Safety personnel, without any approval or direction
from the Contractor’s Construction Manager.
M. The authority of the Safety personnel shall not be overruled by any of the Contractor’s
staff including the Contractor’s Construction Manager and the Contractor’s Project
Manager. Violation of this rule shall have serious implications on the Contractor.
1.06 SUBCONTRACTOR PARTICIPATION
A. The officers and personnel of all subcontractors shall be responsible for compliance
with this Safety Program. This will entail indoctrinating their Site representatives with
a working knowledge of the Safety Program on the Site. They are further
responsible to have their firms represented at all Project safety meetings.
1.07 SAFETY MEETINGS
A. The Contractor shall hold Safety meetings at least once a month at the Site. Such
meetings will be convened and conducted by the Safety Officer. All Safety Staff,
supervisors and foremen shall attend these meetings. Each subcontractor will have a
responsible representative present to follow through on information and resolutions
discussed and adopted at these meetings. The Engineer may choose to attend any or
all of these meetings. Minutes of meetings shall be issued by the Contractor and
distributed to the Engineer.
B. The agenda for the safety meetings will generally include inter alia:
1. Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety bulletins,
signs and notices.
2. A review of the Contractor’s Safety Engineer’s inspections.
3. Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month and discussion and
implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.
4. Appointment of safety representatives for sub-contractors.
1.08 SAFETY REPORTS
A. The Contractor shall submit weekly Safety reports to the Engineer. The format and
contents of the report shall be agreed with the Engineer. As a minimum, the Safety
report shall include:
1. Average number of men / day during the week. Number of man hours during
the week.
2. Total number of man hours until the date of reporting
3. Number of lost-time injuries
4. Number of accidents
5. Workmen indoctrination statistics
6. Safety bulletins / topics issued
1.09 ACCIDENT PREVENTION RESPONSIBILITY
A. All supervisors and foremen are responsible to plan and accomplish their work with due
regard for the safety of all individuals on the Site. They will be expected to eliminate
all possible accident hazards when planning the work under their control. It is

20th October 2021
expected that all contractors and sub-contractors will observe and correct any
accident producing practices before injury occurs. If an accident does occur, they will
investigate to determine the cause and take the required corrective action to prevent
a recurrence. All accidents shall immediately be reported to the Contractor’s
representative, Engineer.
1.10 ACCIDENT REPORTING
A. All lost time injuries, property damage accidents (excluding off Project vehicle
accidents) and material losses in which the property damage exceeds KD 40/= will be
reported in writing to the Engineer within forty-eight (48) hours of the accident or
incident. Immediate notification will be provided in advance of the written report.
B. In the event of any employee being sent to a doctor for treatment, a release will be
obtained from the doctor stating whether:
1. The employee is not fit for duty;
2. The employee is fit for light duty; Or,
3. The employee is fit for duty.
C. A copy of this release will accompany the accident report.
1.11 PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
A. Minimum requirements for protective equipment shall be the wearing of hard hats and
safety shoes at all times, by all Contractor’s and subcontractors’ personnel, as well
as protective clothing for workmen, as warranted. Supplemental requirements for
protective equipment shall be developed to cover specific areas of the work for such
items as eye protection, protective clothing, life safety harnesses and lifelines as
per the requirements of this safety specification. No sandals will be permitted on the
Site. Closed footwear with heavy-duty side and steel toecap must be worn by all
personnel. Provide adequate protection to the personnel and equipment adjacent to the
Contractor’s area of work as well as those working below at all times.
B. While the Contractor provides, at his cost, all personnel protective equipment to the
workers under his employ, all subcontractors shall provide, at their cost, similar
equipment to their workmen. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
strictly implement the rules set out for all parties.
C. Each worker shall sign receipt indicating that he has received hard hat and safety
shoes from the Contractor’s stores. Copy of these receipts shall be provided to the
Engineer if specifically requested.
D. The Contractor’s and his subcontractors’ workmen shall wear uniforms or overalls that
are suitable for construction sites with clear identification of the company with
whom he works for. The subcontractors’ workmen shall have identification of the
Contractor’s company worn on their uniform. All hard hats shall bear the identification
of the Contractor.
E. The Safety Engineer and other safety personnel shall wear Red colored hard hats
and OSHA Orange colored safety jackets with the Contractor’s identification. (Safety
Jacket shall be constructed with a shell of windproof/water resistant/ fire-resistant
cotton based material and shall feature 2" reflective tapes for high- visibility- shall
meet ANSI/ISEA 107-1999 Standards, Class 3/Level 2). Other personnel wearing
safety jackets, as required, such as banks men, and workers performing road works,
pipelines, etc., shall wear Lime Green colored safety jackets.
1.12 FIRE PREVENTION
A. SMOKING shall be allowed only in designated SMOKING AREAS.

20th October 2021
B. No burning of rubbish or debris will be permitted.
C. All fuel storage tanks shall be properly grounded and vented, provided with proper type
fire extinguishers, placed on posts, 3.00 m to 5.00 m from tanks. DANGER or NO
SMOKING signs shall be prominently placed at these tanks. Storage tanks above
ground shall be diked or kerbed to prevent the spread of liquids, in the event of
leakage in tanks and located at a safe distance from the construction area.
D. A PERMIT TO WORK system shall be operated by the Contractor for all hot works
including welding and brazing. Pro-forma permits shall be issued by the
Contractor confirming the work to be undertaken and that screens, protection and
suppressant devices are in place. The Safety Manager shall inspect the work area and
affix his signature to endorse his satisfaction to the arrangements in place. A copy of
such permit shall be issued to the Engineer twelve (12) hours prior to work
commencing. No work shall be carried out without a permit prepared by the responsible
Foreman of the Contractor. Adequate fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided in
the immediate vicinity of welding operations whenever combustible material is
exposed. Workmen will be shielded from welding rays, sparks, slag and the like.
E.. All compressed gas cylinders and acetylene cylinders shall comply with the
requirements of the American AGC Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction as
to requirements for construction, use and storage. All oxygen and acetylene cylinders
will be kept separately in the storage area, stored upright, tied off, and capped. The
storage area shall be designated as a NO SMOKING zone.
F. Fire protection is required for all materials and equipment on the site. Protection
gear including suitably rated goggles, gloves & shields shall be used by each of the
Contractor’s personnel carrying out operations such as welding, etc.
G. Twenty-four (24) hour fire-watch shall be provided as part of the Contractor’s scope.
The fire-watch inspections shall be carried out in all areas, including shafts, openings,
concealed areas, non-work areas, etc. Provide for fire protection and dedicated fire
watch in the service tunnels. Special fire watch is required during any cutting, burning
and/or welding performed at the Site.
H. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary lighting and identify escape routes
within the Site buildings and structure under construction.
1.13 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall provide good quality safety, location, directional, traffic and
warning signage on Site. Provide signs to identify Employer and Engineer offices,
Contractor premises, substations, site laboratory, first aid centre etc. on the Site.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for temporary construction for the safe execution
of the works including barricades, warning signs, scaffolding, etc. General perimeter
cable or rail protection, with toe boards, at slab edges as well as safety fans to protect
personnel working below will be provided by the Contractor. Temporary removal and
replacement or repair resulting room damage caused by any subcontractor shall be the
respective subcontractor's responsibility.
C. The Contractor shall, prior to starting and during the progress of his work, be
responsible for the prevention of hazards to personnel and property including that of
the Employer, the Engineer, Contractor, other sub-contractors, the neighborhood and
the public.
D. The Contractor shall set up and operate a permit-to-access/ permit-to-work

system for all ‘live’ electrical works, temporary and permanent. The Contractor’s Safety
Manager shall inspect the work area and satisfy himself of the arrangements in place
and affix his signature as endorsement prior to commencement of work in that area.
Up-to-date logs of the ‘permit to access / permit to work shall be kept on Site and be

20th October 2021
available for inspection, at any time.
1.14 SCAFFOLDS AND ACCESS WAYS

A. Scaffolds shall be provided by the Contractor for any work that cannot be accomplished
safely from the ground.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that safe and defined access is provided to all work areas.
Ladders and scaffolding shall conform to applicable standards and be inspected on a
monthly basis and recorded. Details for erection and use of scaffolds will be worked
out by the Contractor, with all calculations and drawings approved by the Contractor
employed licensed engineer, and submitted to the Engineer for review. The Engineer
review comments, if any, shall not remove any responsibility for scaffolding from the
Contractor.
C. Positive fall prevention will be employed by the Contractor when workers of any trade
are working on elevated platforms 1.20 m or greater from the ground and other
permanent or substantial footing.
1.15 EXCAVATION
A. All excavation shall comply with requirements for trenching and shoring, as
established by the Contractor’s Safety Program, with special attention to the following:
1. Excavations over one and half (1.50) meters deep must be shored, benched or
battered.
2. Excavated material must be stored at least two (2.00) meters from the sides of
excavations.
3. Guard rails or barricades must be provided.
4. Access/egress facilities will be provided.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, maintaining and removing safe and
stable working ramps, in and out of the excavated areas.
1.16 CONFINED AREAS
A. Care must be exercised when working in or near live sewers, and tests must be made
to verify that no hydrogen sulphide or other poisonous gases are present, before
anyone enters an existing manhole or confined space. The Contractor shall
install adequate ventilation system prior to performing any work in confined areas.
B. Particular attention is drawn to the dangers of poisoning, asphyxiation or explosion while

working in or near, or inspecting, sewers, manholes, chambers, treatment units,
pumping stations or any confined space. In this connection, the Contractor shall obtain
appropriate safety equipment and acquaint all personnel of the dangers involved and
precautions to be taken. The Contractor’s Safety Manager shall be the sole authority
for approval of established safety precautions.
1.17 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The Contractor shall follow all the EPA procedures and regulations for Handling
Hazardous Materials. These procedures can be obtained/purchased from the Offices of
EPA. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all the information from EPA.
The Contractor shall inform Employer/Engineer of any hazardous material and/or

hazardous condition encountered during execution of the works. Employer/Engineer
shall determine if the Contractor must perform additional tests and if the work for the
particular material or condition shall cease. Works shall recommence at the director of
Employer/Engineer.
The Contractor shall be familiar and continuously comply with all applicable HSE codes,
standards, and Kuwait Environmental laws and regulations applicable to the works. In
the event Contractor has any queries about its responsibilities under such laws, he (the

20th October 2021
Contractor) shall contact the EPA for information in this regard.
The type of waste and its quantity and quality shall be specified in manifest along with
details. Waste shall be transferred to special sites determined by EPA Kuwait.
The Contractor shall be responsible for clean-up or remediation activities and cost
incurred in case of any waste (hazardous/non-hazardous) leak or spillage due to their
activities within site premises or outside the road/any other places while shifting the
wastes.
1.18 WORKING ON HEIGHTS
A. The Contractor shall identify and develop a fall protection system to prevent any injury to
the personnel or damage to materials and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all perimeter protection, protection of work
and workmen adjacent to and below his work and protection around openings until such time
that their need is eliminated by permanent construction. The perimeter safety protection shall be
installed at all times and at all floors including, roofs and setbacks and openings. Such protection
shall be removed only after the installation of the permanent protection, in the form of parapets,
walls, etc. Toe-boards shall be installed along with perimeter guard rails at all times.
C. The Contractor shall submit all information regarding the materials that he intends to use for
the safety measures such as netting, railing, planking, etc., to the Engineer who shall have the
right to reject the proposed materials if they are found unacceptable, in which case the
Contractor shall propose alternate materials.
D. Any safety cables or guard rails removed by the Contractor to facilitate construction shall be
re-installed promptly after completion of the work. All safety cables and turnbuckles shall be coiled
and center piled on each level by others in the course of performing their work for removal
by the Contractor.
1.19 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS
A. All hand tools and portable power tools to be used by the Contractor shall be of good order and
shall be used for the purpose intended. All electric power tools shall be grounded and will be
inspected and recorded on a monthly basis. Where temporary power is difficult to achieve or
where associated power leads may cause safety hazards, the contractors shall use portable
battery operated tools.
B. Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose cutting edges. Radial
arm power saws shall be equipped with automatic brakes. Explosive actuated tools must
have prior written approval of the Contractor’s Safety Manager BEFORE DELIVERY by the
Contractor to the Project. Only trained operatives shall be operating such tools to ensure safe and
proper usage of the same. All parties involved with the Project shall be informed prior to use of
such tools.
1.20 MACHINERY & MECHANIZED EQUIPMENT
A. All machinery and mechanized equipment to be used for this Project by the Contractor shall be
inspected for compliance with safety requirements and proper reports, certifications, etc. shall be
completed and submitted, as required.
B. Supplemental requirements covering operating rules shall be established prior to start of work
using mechanized equipment and machinery.
C. The machinery and mechanized equipment are inclusive of and not limited to cranes, derricks,
hoists, etc.
D. All construction machinery, plant and equipment shall be fitted with spark arrestors and silencers.
Air compressors shall be fitted with “whisperizers”. Air hose couplings shall have safety ties on
each coupling to prevent their separation.

20th October 2021
E. All material handling equipment shall have rubber-tired wheel and rubber-tired protection at the
front end, rear ends and protruding corners.
F. Wind velocity meter, aircraft warning lights and Lightning arrestors are to be included on cranes,
and maintained in good working order until all cranes are removed
G. The Contractor shall perform all the engineering, have all the hoisting equipment inspected
as required by local and government regulations as well as any agency having jurisdiction and
obtain all required permits. Copies of all inspection reports and crane certifications must be
transmitted to Engineer as soon as possible. Weekly inspection of all hoisting equipment and
cranes is necessary and the corresponding checklists shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
H. The Contractor shall arrange with an independent testing company for testing of all cranes,
hoists and other lifting equipment, at frequencies dictated or suggested by the manufacturers or
in shorter frequencies if required by regulations. In addition, the Contractor shall provide the
following for cranes:
1. Torque crane masts. Forward inspection checklist to the Engineer
2. Adequate fire protection
3. Annual certification from manufacturer of crane or independent inspection firm.
I. The Engineer reserves the right to have all hoisting equipment periodically inspected by an
independent agency at the Contractor’s cost. Corrections must be made within three days
of receiving the report. Engineer will not assume any responsibility for the safe operation of the
cranes or any other equipment by exercising this right. The Contractor shall co-operate with
the inspecting agency by allowing time for inspection. The Contractor will be notified 48 hours prior
to the time of actual inspection.
1.21 WORKER INDUCTION
A. Minimum protective clothing for all personnel on the Site shall be:
1. Hard hats are required at all times.
2. Protective eye covering will be worn when welding, hammering metal, stone, or concrete,
grinding or cutting metal units.
3. Safety footwear shall be worn by all personnel and operatives at all times.
4. Safety overalls.
B. Minimum safety observances:

1. Work areas and access ways are to be free of debris, materials, and all tripping hazards.
2. Temporary electrical wiring will be protected from damage by traffic, be in good condition and
protected by ground fault circuit interrupters.
3. All portable containers for gas and other inflammable liquids shall be appropriate for the liquid
or gas with self-closing lids. No plastic containers are allowed.
4. Maximum speed for automobiles and vehicles on the Site is twenty-five (25) kilometers per
hour.
C. All accidents are to be reported directly to supervisors, Engineer. If serious injury is apparent or
suspected, utilize pre-established emergency hospital service. The telephone number shall be
prominently displayed at all Site telephone locations. For small cuts, scratches, etc. first aid kits
are to be available from each subcontractor and the Contractor.
D. In the event of fire, if it cannot be immediately contained, sound the fire alarm, notify the nearest
Kuwait Fire Brigade and evacuate all personnel. The telephone number shall be prominently
displayed at all Site telephone locations. Then attempt to put out the fire with available fire
extinguishers and water hoses until help arrives. Do not endanger personnel in fighting the fire.
E. Use of heavy equipment must have prior clearance of the Contractor’s Safety Manager before

20th October 2021
commencement of their work.
F. All equipment must meet the safety standards, described in the Specification.
G. No Site visiting during nights, week-ends or holidays without prior permission.
H. The following will NOT be permitted on site including but not limited to:
1. Radios
2. Cassette players
3. CD players
4. Music systems
5. Walkmans
6. Televisions
7. Any other devices deemed to be disruptive or distracting by the Engineer.
1.22 SAFETY CHECK LIST
A. The Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days of commencing work on the Site, prepare a
checklist incorporating the following items and submit the same to the Engineer after it has
been signed off signifying completion of the related activities. The check list shall be updated
monthly and be available for the Engineer review every month as the Contractor’s work area
changes and additional subcontractors are employed.
1. Prepare safety program.
2. Post safety program on Site bulletin board.
3. Prepare and post Fire Prevention Program.
4. Analyze Site for potential hazards and hazardous procedures.
5. Establish plan for location of shanties, material storage, personal facilities and traffic flow.
6. Arrange for sanitary facilities.
7. Arrange for debris removal.
8. Establish procedure to obtain Sub-contractor safety program.
9. Arrange for doctor.
10. Arrange for hospital.
11. Arrange for ambulance service.
12. Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical and ambulance service at each of the on Site
telephone locations.
13. Obtain claims forms.
14. Contact loss prevention department of insurance carrier.
15. Arrange for exposure checks by insurance carrier.
16. Obtain approval from the Engineer of a report format for reporting accidents and injuries.
17. Establish adequate first aid kit and stretcher facilities.
18. Post chart to signify weekly checks of first aid kits.
19. Hire qualified first aid personnel, if more than ten minutes from a medical facility with which an
emergency medical service has been established.
20. Prepare and post at each on Site telephone location “off hours emergency notification list”.
21. Arrange for watchman service, if required.

20th October 2021
22. Prepare a watchman’s log.

23. Obtain any required local authority forms and posters.
24. Verify insurance coverage for Subcontractors, prior to starting work at the Site and also prior to
execution of sub-contracts.
25. Procure and issue safety equipment appropriate to operations:
a. Hard hats
b. Safety harness
c. Goggles
d. Ear protection
e. Carbon monoxide tester
f. Safety shoes
26. Post sketch and signs showing locations of fire alarm boxes, hydrants and first aid facilities.
27 Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs. Establish weekly toolbox safety talks.
28. Set up an accident control chart.
29. Establish monthly safety meetings.
30. Appoint a Safety Supervisor and set date for the first safety meeting.
31. Establish Assembly Points in the Site for Contractor’s personnel to meet in case of
emergencies. Conduct fire drill and roll call to ensure all employees of Contractor have
been accounted for. This shall be done at least once in a month.
1.23 SAFETY GEARS
A. All safety gears should be as to the approval of Kuwait Fire Service Directorate and
KNPC Standards.
B. Products and Manufacturers specified herein are the only products that will be
acceptable.
1. Safety Shoes - Redwing, USA
2. Safety Helmets - SEI, Kuwait - model certified by KNPC to
ANSI – Z89, Jan. ’86, Class A
3. Belts, Goggles, Ear
Protection , Gloves etc. - These should be as to the approval of Kuwait
Fire Service Directorate and KNPC Standards.
C. Provide safety gears to each and every staff employed by the Engineer plus ten extra
for the visitors.
1.24 NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL
1. Where the Contractor violates any of the safety provisions described within this division, the
Employer shall take the appropriate remedial action, and all costs associated therewith shall
be at the Contractor’s expense.
2. On the occurrence of the first violation, the Contractor shall be warned in writing by the
Engineer and shall be instructed to remedy the violation within a specified time. Where the
Contractor fails to remedy the violation within the time stipulated, the Contractor shall
be prohibited from carrying out any further work within the affected area until the specific
exposure has been corrected.
3. On the occurrence of all further violations, the severity of each violation shall be considered

20th October 2021
by the Engineer and the Contractor instructed accordingly. Where the Contractor
unreasonably ignores the Engineers instructions, then the foreman responsible for
operations in the area where the safety violations are occurring shall be dismissed from
the site.
B. SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS

1. The Contractor’s Safety Plan shall address scaffolding, guard rails, ladders,
appropriate connections for power tools, grounding of temporary electrical system, safety
provisions, such as safety switches and cover guards for blades of saws, including other
similar items which are required to ensure that the Site working area is safe for carrying out
the works without risk to human life.
2. Where any of the Contractor’s employees violate any of the safety provisions within this
category, the offending employee shall be warned and prevented from continuing working
until he is properly attired. Should the same employed person be caught a second time, he
shall be dismissed from the Site. In each case of a warning or dismissal, the responsible
foreman shall be notified. Should more than two (2) employees be sent off the Site during any
week, then the responsible foreman shall also be dismissed from the Site.
3. If more then two (2) foremen are dismissed from the site then the responsible superintendent
shall also be dismissed from the site.
C. FACILITIES
1. The Contractor shall provide all emergency facilities such as first aid equipment, fire-fighting
equipment within work and material storage areas, and accessible sanitation facilities
for employees in compliance with municipal requirements.
2. All these facilities are required prior to the commencement of work on Site by the Contractor.
Should these facilities not be provided within the time specified by the Engineer, then the
Employer shall provide these facilities and the costs incurred by the Employer may be
deducted by the Employer from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor or
be recoverable as a debt.
D. CONTINUOUS BREACH
1. Should the Contractor persistently breach the safety requirements with undue reason, then the
principal of the Contractor shall be summoned to the Site and instructed to take the
appropriate action to ensure that his employees comply with the safety requirements of the
Contract. In the event of continuous breach, the Employer shall also notify the insurance
companies who have provided the insurance policies under the Contract.
1.25 SUMMARY OF EMPLOYER/ENGINEER ACTION IN THE EVENT OF THE CONTRACTOR’S

NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. GROUP 1:
1. Items: Scaffolding
a. Guard Rails
b. Excavation Protection
c. Safe Hand & Power Tools
d. Temporary Electric Grounding
e. Machinery & Mechanical Equipment
2. Action:
a. Contractor warned to rectify.
b. If Contractor fails to rectify, Contractor is barred from working in exposed area.
c. In the case of continuous breach, employees and foreman responsible for exposed area
shall be dismissed from Site.

20th October 2021
B. GROUP 2:
1. Items: Personnel Protection

a. Head Protection
b. Eye Protection
c. Hearing Protection
d. Protective Garments
e. Respiratory Protection
f. Foot Protection
g. Body Protection
2. Action:
a. Responsible employee prevented from continuing work until properly attired.
b. When same employee is in breach a second time, he will be dismissed from the Site.
c. When more than two (2) employees are dismissed per week, then responsible foreman
shall be dismissed.
C. GROUP 3:
1. Items:
a. First Aid
b. Sanitation Facilities
c. Material Storage
d. Fire Protection
2. Action:
a. Contractor warned to supply.
b. If Contractor fails to supply, Employer shall supply and deduct the cost from the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 74 20
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General requirements for job Site cleaning during construction and prior to handover
of completed facilities.
A. Related work specified under other sections but not limited to, such as Section
01 91 00 and Section 01 78 00.
1.03 JOB SITE CLEANING
A. Contractor shall ensure implementation of all measures detailed in this

document by his subcontractors. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall be
responsible to maintain the work areas clean and pollution free. Throughout the
period of construction of the Works, the
B. Contractor shall maintain the whole area of his operations in a clean, tidy and safe
condition by arranging his materials in an orderly manner.
C. Each contractor is required to keep his work area clean on a daily basis and center
pile construction debris at designated locations in the Site. The Contractor shall
remove all debris from the Site for disposal.
D. Each contractor shall clean up his own debris as the work progresses. Each
contractor shall break apart and remove all crates and packaging, miscellaneous
cardboard, paper wraps, Styrofoam, etc., and box all loose materials in
manageable sizes and center pile at designated locations, for the Contractor to
cart away and dispose from the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and
all damages resulting from any debris blown away from the floors.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for dust control and pollution control. The
Contractor shall carry out regular cleaning of all areas of construction site including all
access roads within and around the Site. The areas shall be kept clear of dust, mud,
water, silt and other materials.
F. The Contractor shall clean all vehicles and plant before they leave the Site to ensure
that no earth, mud or other objectionable matter is deposited by them on roads.
G. If earth, mud or other objectionable matter is deposited on public or private rights of

way as a result of the Works, the Contractor shall provide sufficient labor, plant,
equipment, etc., as is necessary and as required by the Engineer to ensure that
deposits are immediately removed.
H. The Contractor shall ensure that material is stored and kept in a manner that does not
create any fire hazard or any other encumbrances. All rubbish, waste materials,
debris, and the like shall be systematically cleared off the working areas as it
accumulates. Disposal should be done in a timely manner, as a minimum, on a daily
basis in order to maintain a clean and safe work area.
Gulf Consult Cleaning III-2/01 74 20 - 1

20th October 2021
I. The Contractor shall dispose all demolition and construction debris, waste, excess
excavated earth / soil per Kuwait Municipality requirements including transportation
to designated Municipality dumping grounds. Any cost associated with the disposal
is to be borne by the Contractor.
J. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing broom cleaning, machine

vacuuming and/or street sweeping to ensure a safe and clean work environment.
K. The Contractor shall specifically be responsible for cleaning, garbage removal and
pest control. The Contractor shall arrange and provide for trash chutes, skips for
debris collection and identify suitable locations to place them. The disposal of debris
and construction waste including reinforcement steel etc. shall be carried out
regularly. The Contractor at the end of each day’s work shall empty out the skips and
haul out the garbage and debris off site.
L. If the the Employer and/or the Engineer find that cleaning is not satisfactory,
instructions will be issued to the Contractor for taking appropriate actions
immediately. On failure to conform to the issued instructions, the Engineer shall
deploy an outside agency or third party to carry out the necessary tasks for which the
costs shall be payable by the Contractor. The incurred costs shall be deducted from
the monies due to the Contractor.
M. All materials, products, assemblies and installed works and finishes shall be
kept clean and protected, during the course of work. Non-conformance by the
Contractor to the instructions of the Engineer to clean the installed work items may
result in those items being rejected from Site.
N. The Contractor shall have, at the minimum, the following number of workmen
engaged exclusively for Site cleaning:
1. 1 person for every 50 workmen when the manpower is up to 2000 men at
Site.
2. Additional 1 person for every 75 workmen when manpower is between 2001
& 4000 men at Site.
3. Additional 1 person for every 100 workmen when manpower is more than
4000 men at Site. The Contractor shall provide uniforms or overalls that are
of distinctly different color to the men engaged for cleaning operation.
1.04 GENERAL
A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during
handling and installation.
B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as

necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate
operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide covered containers and chutes for deposit of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish and include in the Site Layout Plan.

20th October 2021
B. Cleaning materials for products to be cleaned shall be according to the

recommendations of the manufacturer of the product and as approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING
A. Maintain areas, floors and buildings under Contractor's control free of waste
materials, debris, and rubbish at all times. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space.
C. Clean interior areas and all floors and stairs daily to provide suitable conditions for
work.
D. The Contractor must keep all working areas clear of obstructions, surplus materials
unused plant and debris that are unsightly as determined by the Engineer, obstructive
and/or hazardous to the safety of all persons-expected to be on the premises at any
time.
3.02 DISPOSAL
A. Comply with regulations of the local Authorities.
B. Provide cover as necessary, place and relocate at site as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 74 50
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Contractor is responsible for all his cutting and patching works, if any.
B. The Contractor will coordinate with Employer or other Contractors or statutory

authority/ies if he requires to carryout any cutting and patching works.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request seven (7) days in advance of cutting or alteration which
affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Employer or separate Contractor.
B. Include in request:
1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used.
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching, if available.
6. Effect on work of Employer or separate contractor or statutory authority, if
and as involved.
7. Written permission of Employer or other Contractor or statutory authority/ies,
if and as involved
8. Date and time the work will be executed.
1.04 APPROVAL
A. Do not proceed with cutting and patching works until approval in writing is received
from the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.
Gulf Consult Cutting and Patching III-2/01 74 50 - 1

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to

damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide

devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection to other works or installations.
C. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.
D. Maintain surfaces and places of work free from water.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching to complete work.
B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.
C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work with
required temporary support to hold in position.
G. Provide openings in finished works, as marked by Employer or other contractors or

statutory authority/ies, if and as involved
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
B. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill as approved by the Engineer.
Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
C. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents.

20th October 2021
E. At penetration of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely

pack voids with 96kg/cu.m density fibreglass material to full thickness of the
penetrated element and seal both ends with approved fire rated sealant. All complete
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to

nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General requirements regarding contract closeout submittals. In addition, specific

requirements are given in other sections of Division 01 and particular specifications.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The close-out requirements are inclusive of and not limited to the following:
1. As-Built Drawings
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3. Spare Parts and Maintenance Products
4. Warranties/Guarantees
5. Maintenance Service, as and if called for elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
6. Asset Database
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining “clearance”, “approvals”
and/or “Occupancy permits” from authorities having jurisdiction (such as
Kuwait Municipality, etc.) confirming that the Project may be used for the
purpose intended prior to the request of the Taking over Certificate for the
whole of the Works or Sections thereof.
1.03 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. As the Works progress the Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate record
of all changes and deviations from the Drawings, shop drawings and Specification,
indicating the Works actually installed. This record set of prints of Drawings, shop
drawings and Specification shall be kept at the Site for inspection by the Employer,
the Engineer’s Representative and the Engineer.
B. Towards the completion of the Works the Contractor shall certify that each of the
revised prints for the Drawings and documents stated above is complete and
accurate and shall submit them to the Engineer for review and approval.
C. At least sixty (60) days prior to request for a Taking Over Certificate for the Works, or
for Sections thereof, the Contractor shall submit one (1) high quality reproducible
drawing and five (5) printed sets of the record “As Built” (hereinafter referred to as
As-Built) drawings and three (3) copies of manufacturer’s descriptive data for
materials, equipment and fixtures including performance characteristics, capacities,
technical information and operating manuals and other pertinent data necessary to
enable the Employer to operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble and adjust all parts
of the Works. A comprehensive index of all As-Built drawings shall be included.
D. As Built drawings should include updated Contract drawings and show all approved
changes. The As-Built drawings shall be in hard copies as well as electronic copies.
Gulf Consult Closeout Submittals III-2/01 78 00 - 1

20th October 2021
As-Built drawings shall have all revision clouds and revision triangles removed and
the words “As Built” shall be written in the revision box above the title block. The
latest revision and date shall be indicated in the appropriate spaces.
E. Close out submittals shall include a detailed site survey showing as-built piles and
retaining walls and these shall be certified by an independent professional surveyor
approved by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall also supply three (3) full document sets on CDs/ DVDs The CD’s
/ DVD’s to be from reputable, acceptable and single manufacturer, containing all
drawings in “.dwg” and “dwf” (latest AutoCAD and Architectural Desktop (ADT)
software from AutoDesk, as approved by the Engineer) formats. Certain drawings
may need to be in “.dgn (Microstation format per the requirements of local authorities).
G. Drawings shall be grouped as per the agreed structure of hard copy sets, each
group contained within an appropriately named folder. No folder shall be split
between CD’s / DVD’s. File structure and nomenclature system shall be submitted
for separate approval.
H. All CDs / DVDs shall be provided in plastic case of acceptable quality. Graphics
and Title inserts to be submitted for approval, showing as a minimum, the following:
Project Name
Employer
Engineer’s Representative
Design Consultant
Engineer Contract Number & Title Contractor
Index of Contents
I. Each CD / DVD and case shall be clearly and indelibly marked by title referred to in
the index. CDs / DVDs shall be collated and delivered to the Engineer in purpose
made containers of approved material and design. Each container shall have a
hinged top with locking devices to ensure a secure and dust tight seal to the main
body of the container. The containers shall be labeled as above on the outside of the
lids.
J. All As-Built drawings, copies (on film and paper) and each copy of CDs shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor, at his own cost, shall
replace any item that is not approved by the Engineer.
1.04 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. At least sixty (60) days prior to request for a Taking Over Certificate for the Works,
the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer approval one draft copy and softcopy
of all operation and maintenance manuals which shall provide all necessary
information for the proper upkeep of all the installed works by the Contractor, including
but not limited to:
1. List of all shop-drawings with description.
2. Relevant Specification number.
3. Description of material or equipment including tag number, if applicable.

20th October 2021
4. Quantity and location.

5. Catalogue cuts, if applicable.
6. Manufacturers preventive maintenance procedures.
7. Methods and materials to be used in above (e.g. cleaning).
8. Parts lists.
9. List of recommended spare parts.
10. Name and address of supplier.
11. Expiration date of warranty.
12. Name and address of manufacturer.
B. After review and approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a minimum of
four (4) bound copies in a format acceptable to the Employer.
C. The Contractor shall also submit two (2) soft copies on CDs / DVDs of Operations
and Maintenance Data in a contemporary version of Adobe Portable Reader
format (.pdf) or similar approved, including all graphics, catalogue cuts, etc.,
scanned at A4 size and included as high resolution ‘.jpg’ (JPEG) files. Resolution
of scan shall be minimum 300dpi. CD manufacturer, labeling and file structure shall
be similar to that described for As-Built drawings.
D. The Contractor shall undertake the training of the Employer’s Facility

Management and Maintenance teams to ensure that the Operations and
Maintenance Manual, and the equipment are familiar and understood. Notes of the
training sessions shall be incorporated into the final manuals.
1.05 ASSET DATABASE

A. At least seventy-five (75) days prior to request for a Taking Over Certificate for
the Works, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, one draft
copy of the Asset Database in soft and hard copies.
B. The Asset database shall be comprehensive and accurate. Refer to Section 01
32 00 for periodic submission of Asset database. As a closeout submittal, the
database shall be updated with full and final details, with all fields accurately filled-in
and reference documents (drawings, specifications, O&M manual, warranty
certificates, etc.) identified.
C. After review and approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a minimum of
six (6) bound copies of the hard copy of database and two (2) sets of soft copies in
CDs / DVDs
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty for any equipment, material, product or system shall be submitted by the
Contractor as required by the Contract.
B. Warranty period, as noted in the specifications, for any equipment, material, product
or system shall be calculated from the next day of the completion of the Defects
Liability Period. Until the Defects Liability Period is complete, the Contractor shall hold
necessary warranties from their subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers as
required by him. In effect, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain warranties
that shall be valid throughout the duration and time as calculated in this clause.

20th October 2021
C. The Contractor shall provide warranties durations indicated in the particular

specification section. All package subcontractors shall obtain and/or provide
warranties under their scope as joint or multi-party warranties to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide warranties to the Employer wherein he shall be one of the
parties, who shall be jointly and severally be obliged to provide the required
assurance. All warranties shall be in the format provided by the
Engineer/Engineer’s Representative or the Employer.
D. The warranty for all trades shall cover the materials supplied and installed and the
workmanship. Samples of warranties shall be obtained from subcontractors
and vendors immediately upon placement of orders with them for submission to
the Engineer and the Engineer’s Representative for approval. The Engineer’s
Representative and the Engineer shall verify the contents of the warranty seek
modifications if required and return it back to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
then prepare Final Warranty document in the same format and words as
approved by the Engineer’s Representative and the Engineer. Payment for the
completed work shall not be released completely without the approval of the Final
“Original” warranties.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Where maintenance of any system is called for in the Contract, unless
specifically detailed, all maintenance shall be comprehensive that shall include
preventive maintenance, breakdown maintenance and emergency maintenance.
B. Maintenance period shall commence the day after the issue of Taking Over Certificate.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 88 70
PRODUCT WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract
Documents both here and elsewhere, including manufacturers standard warranties on products
and special project warranties. Compare the various requirements as stated here and elsewhere
and provide for the more/most stringent combination of the requirements.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Warranties shall be submitted exclusively by the Contractor.

Warranties shall not contain any Disclaimers and Limitations contrary to this Contract nor shall
warranties be vitiated by such disclaimers and limitation that might have escaped attention at the
time of their receipt by the Engineer.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the
Employer.
B. Warranties under this Contract are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater
rights for the Employer. All Warranties issued by the manufacturer shall be transferred to the
name of the Employer before Substantial Completion.
1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or remove
obstacles including surrounding construction to provide access for correction of warranted
construction.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work
regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its
anticipated useful service life.
D. Employer's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in
which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E. Where the contract documents require a special project warranty, or similar commitment on the
work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the work, until the
contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are wiling to
do so.
Gulf Consult Product Warranties / Guarantees III-2/01 88 70 - 1

20th October 2021
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Form of Submittals
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable vinyl-covered

loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive A4
paper.
a. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and
telephone number of the Installer.
b. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "Warranties",
Contract title and name of the Contractor.
c. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required
manual.
2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title
of Contract; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and the subject of the
warranty bound within.
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in
which specified, and the name of Product or work item.
4. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,
Supplier, and Manufacturer, with name, address, telephone and fax numbers of responsible
agent in Kuwait.
B. Preparation of Submittals
1. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
2. Verify that documents are in proper form and contain full information.
3. Execute warranties and bonds in duplicate by the Contractor within fourteen days after
completion of the relevant item of work. Except for items put into use with Employer's
permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Substantial Completion is
determined.
C. Time of Submittals
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Employer's permission, submit documents within fourteen days after acceptance, listing the
Date of Substantial Completion as the beginning of the warranty period.
2. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond Substantial Completion, submit within
fourteen days after acceptance, listing the Date of Acceptance as the beginning of the
warranty period.
3. Make all other submittals within fourteen days after Substantial Completion, listing the
Substantial Completion as the beginning of the warranty period.
4. Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of
Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the Substantial
Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon
request of the Engineer.

20th October 2021
a. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the
Employer by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,
submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within two weeks of completion of
that designated portion of the work.
5. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor to execute a special
project warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft to the Engineer for approval prior to final
execution.
6. List of special warranties and form formats for special project warranties are included at the
end of this section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for
execution.
a. Refer to Divisions 2 through 49 sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special project warranties.
7. Form of Submittal: At Substantial Completion compile three (3) copies of each required
warranty properly executed by the Contractor. Organize the warranty documents into an
orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
1.05 LIST OF WARRANTIES
A. Provide Warranties on products and installations as specified in the respective sections in the
specifications.
1.06 WARRANTY FORM
A. The Contractor shall submit warranty forms in the format shown:
CONTRACTOR LETTER HEAD

Special Project Warranty
Date:
Contract Ref. No.:
Name of Project:
Employer:
Contractor:
Warranted System:
Validity:
Contract Specification Ref.:
Commencement Date: _______________ Expiry Date:_______________
We the undersigned (insert full name and address of company):
Contractor:__________________________________________________
Sub-contractor/Installer:________________________________________________
Installer: _________________________________________________
Manufacturer: __________________________________________________
Agree to provide the special project warranty of the (description and location of product/system)
.................................... agreeing to repair or replace subject to the warranty requirements below
and conditions stated in the contract documents during the period of (state period) from the

20th October 2021
above mentioned commencement date at our own complete cost and expense to the full
satisfaction of the Employer or his approved Representative.
Warranty Requirements:
1. We shall remove, replace and/or repair at our own expense and at the convenience of the
Owner, any faulty, defective or improper work, material or equipment, discovered within the
warranty period above, from the date of substantial completion of the project.
2. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction or
product/s, we will remove and replace construction or product/s that has/have been damaged
as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction
of warranted construction or product/s.
3. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by this warranty has failed and been
corrected by replacement or rebuilding, we will reinstate the warranty by written
endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an
equitable adjustment for depreciation.
4. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work or product/s covered by this warranty has
failed, we will replace or rebuild the work or product/s to an acceptable condition complying
with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of
replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from
use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
5. Employer's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time
in which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
a. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
6. Where the Contract Documents require the provision of special project warranty, or similar
commitment on the work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to
accept the work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign
such commitments are willing to do so.
Signatures and stamps Date
Contractor _________________________________ _________________
Sub-Contractor/
Installer ___________________________________ _________________
Manufacturer _____________________________ _________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 91 00
FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Final cleaning of Works at Substantial Completion.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Execute final cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of each

designated portion of the Work.
1.03 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not
damage surfaces.
B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturers of materials being

cleaned. Submit to Engineer for approval.
1.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. To be executed by an industrial cleaning (Specialist) Subcontractor (and not by the

Contractor’s own staff) with at least five years of related experience immediately prior
to handing over the works at Substantial Completion. Cleaning operation shall include:
1. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean
interior and exterior exposed to-view surfaces.
2. Remove temporary protection, wrappings, markings and labels not required to
remain.
3. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, paint films and mortar splashes and other
foreign substances.
4. Clean transparent and glossy materials inside and out to a polished condition;
remove foreign substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
5. Clean, scrub, damp, mop or wax, polish resilient and hard surfaced floors as
specified.
6. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
7. Clean and polish plumbing fixtures and equipment to a sanitary condition.
8. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters
when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts,
blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during
construction.
9. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
10. Maintain cleaning until Substantial Completion.
11. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, area, and
drainage systems.
Gulf Consult Final Cleaning III-2/01 91 00 - 1

20th October 2021
12. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds;
remove stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep
clean. Rake clean other exterior surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Final Cleaning III-2/01 91 00 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 91 13
COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Procedures for pre-startup, startup, startup documentation, pre-commissioning, testing,

and commissioning of equipment, systems and facilities. The building systems shall include
all types of Electromechanical (MEP) systems, Conveying systems, Irrigation system etc.
1.02 PROCESS
A. The process of Startup and Commissioning includes the following steps:
1. Planning
2. Pre-startup and Equipment Readiness
3. Equipment Startup
4. System Operation
5. Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
6. Commissioning
B. This Section primarily explains the requirements relating to planning, pre-startup and
equipment readiness, equipment startup and system operation. The technical
requirements for the testing & balancing and commissioning of equipment and systems
shall be as per the Contract. The testing of all computer bases systems, including but not
limited to Telecommunications Systems is to include extensive interface and integration
testing as part of the overall commissioning process. These technical requirements are
explained in respective Divisions.
1.03 PLANNING
A. The planning of the Startup and Commissioning exercise shall include listing of all
equipment, performing system analysis and scheduling the startup and commissioning
activities.
B. The Contractor shall list all equipment and identify in three categories, namely,
equipment that do not require startup, equipment requiring manufacturer startup services
and equipment that can be started up by the installation contractor or subcontractor.
C. Equipment such as emergency generators, large air handlers, motor control centers,
cooling towers, control systems, booster pump systems, chillers, switchgears, etc., will
need manufacturer startup service. Manufacturer startup service may also be required
to ensure warranties are not compromised.
D. It is critical that the Contractor identify the startup procedures for each piece of
equipment. The Contractor shall compile a comprehensive listing of all equipment from the
Specifications, Drawings, Equipment Schedules and other Contract documentation.
The equipment listing may be broken down into trade disciplines, but where a piece of
equipment forming part of a trade discipline is part of a system that comes under a
different discipline; these shall be identified clearly and included within the system. Each
Gulf Consult Commissioning III -2 / 01 91 13- 1

20th October 2021
piece of equipment shall be identified by its unique asset code.
E. Identify special startup requirements in the list for equipment such as those that have
certain control functions, powered by high voltage, controlled by automatic control system,
require programming or calibration, etc.
F. Be aware of the Project schedule requirements when listing equipment. Identify long
lead time items, the sequence of installation, special protection requirements, pecial
power needs (permanent or temporary), or particular environmental requirements
(temperature, humidity). Schedule equipment startup in line with the Contract Schedule.
G. Upon generating the equipment list, the Contractor shall group individual components
together by system in order to evaluate the complete system operation.
H. Establish the sequence for starting up each piece of equipment and system in a
coordinated manner that supports the startup of the other equipment and systems that rely
on it.
I. Ensure that adequate resources of qualified and certified professionals and

technicians and sufficient number of tools and instruments are provided by the
Contractor, his subcontractors, specialist installers, Commissioning Agency and
TAB Agency. The Contractor shall establish the number of teams required for each
system based on the schedule requirements.
J. Conduct startup meetings and establish sequences, schedule the work, and gather
data required to schedule the startup of the equipment and systems. The startup
schedule must be part of the broader Project schedule and fit into the overall dates
established for the Project.
K. Startup meetings should focus specifically on the system being discussed. Multiple
startup meetings may be necessary, depending on the number of systems involved in the
Project. Startup meeting topics shall include:
1. System in question
2. Startup sequences
3. Participants and their schedules
4. Teams and resources
5. Type of startup - factory, manufacturer's representative, or subcontractor
6. Drawing and specification review
7. Safety considerations during startup
8. Sequence of testing
9. Post-testing considerations
10. Schedule considerations
11. Documentation requirements
1.04 PRE-STARTUP AND EQUIPMENT READINESS
A. The purpose of pre-startup and equipment readiness is to:
1. Verify that the equipment installation is complete.

2. Verify that the distribution system is complete.

20th October 2021
3. Coordinate the different trades to ensure that everyone will be ready at the
same time.
4. Maximize efficiency and maintain the startup schedule.
B. The Startup meetings at this stage shall address the following topics:
1. Coordination between the Contractor and his subcontractors

2. Update construction progress, in particular, the MEP and specialist systems
3. Review startup schedule
4. Maintain awareness of safety issues and measures
C. Safety shall be one of the most important issues during the startup meetings.
The process of energizing and starting up equipment and systems is inherently risky. Set
the safety expectations and address all safety concerns for the upcoming activities.
The Contractor shall reinforce the basic safety policies regarding safety issues such as
electrical work, LOTO (lock-out tag-out) procedures, equipment guards, and emergency
response procedures during the startup meetings. Perform specific job hazard analyses
and develop activity-specific safety plans.
1. Energizing the Electrical Systems: The Contractor shall understand and implement
the specific tasks required to be complete before energizing the electrical
systems.
2. Energized Electrical Work (EEW): Another important electrical risk that must be
managed is energized electrical work (EEW). EEW is defined as any work that
requires the worker's hand to pass through the plane of the electrical panel
over or cover plate when the panel is energized. During startup, workers
may need to perform EEW tasks such as taking voltage/amperage
readings, adjusting control devices, installing or removing control system jumper
wires inside live electrical panels, motor starters, or equipment control panels.
3. Before the work commences, the Contractor shall, in coordination with the
subcontractors, develop a project-specific plan to address the potential for EEW.
D. The Contractor shall physically and visually inspect every equipment and distribution
system to verify readiness prior to startup. Use equipment manufacturer’s pre-startup
check lists. In addition, the Contractor shall prepare detailed check lists for distribution
systems.
E. By reviewing the systems analysis, the Contractor shall inspect each complete system
to verify that all of the components, equipment, and support services are functional and
ready to support the startup. Typical inspection and verification include:
1. Piping systems have been pressure-tested as specified. Piping systems have

been flushed and cleaned as specified, reports submitted, and then the systems
are filled or charged as required.
2. All piping and duct insulation is installed and sealed.
3. All air systems are cleaned as required, including all ducts, grills, louvers, dampers
etc. and the specified air filters are in place. Pay particular attention to construction

20th October 2021
grade pre-filters on all air-handlers.

4. All vibration isolation and seismic restraints have been installed and adjusted.
5. The electrical services are complete and ready for energizing.
6. All control instruments, automatic valves, and actuators are installed.
7. All Safety controls are installed and ready for startup.
F. Once the system is inspected, the Contractor shall prepare an "Incomplete Work List"
that identifies all the deficiencies found. Review the list with the appropriate
subcontractors to make sure all items are completed promptly so the startup occurs on
time.
1.05 EQUIPMENT STARTUP
A. There are three main points to consider during Equipment startup.
1. Verify that each piece of equipment is operating properly.

2. Document the startup procedures.
3. Prepare the individual pieces of equipment to begin to function as a
system.
B. Verify that equipment functions properly and fix any problems detected during startup.
Ensure that each piece of equipment will function as per contract.
C. The Contractor or his subcontractor or the manufacturer’s authorized person

(depending on the equipment and specification requirements) shall perform an Operational
Acceptance Test (OAT) on each piece of equipment. The OAT shall, at the minimum,
cover basic operations and safety shutdowns independent of the complete system.
D. During equipment startup, the Contractor or his subcontractor must document the
procedures used and results obtained when the equipment was actually started. This
information may be critical to maintain the equipment manufacturer's warranty. It is
important for a thorough pre-startup check and documenting the conditions during and
after the startup.
E. The Contractor shall maintain all original documentation. A copy of all startup
documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for record.
F. Prepare the individual pieces of equipment to begin to function as a system. In some

cases, certain pieces of equipment must be operational before the next piece of
equipment in the system can be started. The Contractor shall ensure that each
piece of equipment is started in a logical and organized manner to support the startup
of the entire system.
1.06 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Upon completion of the equipment startup, the Contractor shall focus on system operations.

20th October 2021
This part of the process covers issues such as the purpose of system operation
verification, testing, coordination between the Contractor, subcontractor and specialist
controls subcontractor / supplier, and special considerations for electrical systems.
B. Verify system operation and evaluate automatic operation sequences by performing

a comprehensive Functional Acceptance Test (FAT) on each system.
C. To verify that the system is operating properly, the Contractor shall ensure that his
specialist controls subcontractor performs the following operations:
1. Controls System Installation Inspection:

a. Inspect all of the instruments and devices that are installed in the system.
Make sure that all of the devices are installed correctly and are in the
proper locations. Inspect each device or instrument to make sure that it is
the correct device and that it has been wired correctly. Inspect the control
panel to make sure that all of the wires have been landed and terminated
properly at the correct location in the panel.
2. Point-to-Point Wiring Check:
a. Perform a point-to-point wiring check.

b. Verify that each control point in the system is wired to the correct
instrument or device in the field.
c. Verify that the instruments are responding accurately and if required,
calibrate the instruments.
d. Verify that the control signal properly operates the controlled device.
e. In case of automatic controls, make sure that the control system can
function as required by the Sequence of Operations (SOO).
3. System Startup:
a. Install the control programming and initialize the system with a Start
command.
b. Certain amount of de-bugging may be required to get the system to
operate as per contract; perform such de-bugging.
4. System Operation Verification:
a. Demonstrate and verify that the systems are operating as defined in

the SOO.
b. As the system is tested, each step of the process shall be signed-off
by the independent Commissioning Agency.
1.07 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) shall be scheduled to commence at least six
(6) months prior to completion of each zones or sections.
B. TAB shall be performed by a specialist agency employed by each Subcontractor, in

20th October 2021
particular, by the MEP Subcontractor for works under his scope. The independent third-
party Commissioning Agency shall not be employed to perform TAB, but will supervise and
sign-off all TAB reports.
C. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall perform preliminary TAB work prior to
boarding ceilings and final TAB prior to commissioning of the systems.
D. Appropriately schedule TAB works on different systems that can have effect on each
other; for example the fire-alarm system and HVAC system. Systems required for
environmental control and protection of communication rooms to be maintained in
operating conditions for remainder of construction period.
E. The Main Contractor and the Cladding Subcontractors shall ensure timely building closure
to perform proper TAB works on HVAC system.
F.Following TAB works for equipment in communication rooms, temporary filters and other
consumables to be replaced and humidifiers flushed.
G. All TAB reports shall be submitted to the Engineer; the original reports shall be
maintained in safe custody by the Main Contractor until handover to the Employer.
1.08 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning of MEP systems shall be performed by an independent third-party

specialist Agency employed by the MEP Subcontractor.
B. The technical requirements for Commissioning are detailed in Specifications for each
discipline.
C. All Commissioning reports shall be submitted to the Engineer; the original reports shall
be maintained in safe custody by the Main Contractor until handover to the Employer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 92 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Substantial Completion
B. Closeout Submittals
C. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts
D. Contractor’s Obligations
E. Final Cleaning
F. Adjusting
G. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers work is about to be substantially complete, submit written

notice with list of items to be completed or corrected and the expected date of
substantial completion.
B. Should Engineer’s inspection find Work is not substantially complete, he will promptly
notify Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies, citing his own date of
completion of deficiencies snags etc.
C. Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
D. When Engineer finds Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of

Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of the Contract Conditions and
Documents
E. Works will be considered substantially complete when all works and systems and
particularly the electromechanical systems are tested and found to be acceptable to
the requirements of Engineer and the Statutory Authorities.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities, and as

requested by the Engineer and other sections in Division 1.(lll-2)
B. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01 72 00.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of Section 01 93 00.
D. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
F. Evidence of Payment: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
G. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed
Operations: In accordance with Particular Conditions.
Gulf Consult Closeout Procedures III-2/01 92 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.04 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating:
1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Previous variations
3. Deductions for uncorrected work
4. Deductions against Advance Payment if any
5. Deductions for delays penalties
6. Deductions for Engineer's fees
7. Other adjustments to Contract Sum
8. Total Contract Sum as adjusted
9. Previous payments
10. Sum remaining due
B. Engineer will issue a final Variation List reflecting approved adjustments to Contract
Sum not previously made by variations, for Employer Authorization.
1.05 CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS
Contractor's Obligations during the last weeks of the Contract Period and during the
Period determined by the Engineer to enable the Contractor to attend to the Snag List
A. Make good all damages consequent upon the work.
B. Touch up minor faults in newly painted/re-painted work, carefully matching colour, and
brushing out edges. Repaint badly marked areas back to suitable breaks or junctions.
C. Adjust, ease and lubricate moving parts of new work as necessary to ensure easy and
efficient operation, including doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances and controls.
D. Leave the Works secure with all accesses locked. Account for and adequately label all
keys and hand over to the Employer with itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule
signed by the Employer as a receipt.
E. Where any section of the Works will, after its practical completion, depend for its adequate
functioning on work located elsewhere in the Work, complete such other work in time to
permit Sectional Completion as required.
F. During execution of the remainder of the Works insure that completed sections of the
Works have continuous and adequate provision of services, fire precautions, means of
escape and safe access.
G. Make arrangements with the Employer's Representative and give him reasonable
notice of the precise dates of access to the various parts of the Works for purposes of
making good defects. Inform the Engineer when remedial works to the various parts of
the Works are completed.
1.06 FINAL CLEANING
A. Description: Execute final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 91 00.

20th October 2021
1.07 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Products Required
1. Submit master spare parts list for review.
2. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and

maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to
Employer, in addition to that required for completion of Work.
3. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original

purchase from supplier or manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.
B. Storage, Maintenance
1. Store products with products to be installed in the work, under provisions of

Section 01 60 00.
2. After delivery of products to site, maintain spare products in same space and
condition as products to be installed in the Work.
3. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of

maintaining conditions required for storage and not required for Contract work
or storage, spare products may be stored in available space.
4. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible,
until delivery to Employer
C. Delivery
1. Coordinate with Employer: Deliver and unload spare products to Employer at

Work site or designated storage location and obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
2. Contractor to provide adequate storage racks, shelves, trays, boxes,

cupboards, work benches etc, to store spare parts.
3. Contractor to provide suitable spare parts (card index) inventory system.
4. Contractor is not allowed to use spare parts, maintenance tools and materials
during Defects Liability Period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 93 00
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section is applicable to this contract to the extent that this contract includes such systems
which require operation and maintenance data.
A. Quality Assurance
B. Format
C. Contents, each volume
D. Manual for Materials and Finishes
E. Manual for Equipment and Systems
A. Prepare instructions and data by approved personnel experienced in maintenance and operation
of described products.
1.04 FORMAT
A. Prepare data in the form of an instruction manual.
B. Binders: Commercial quality, size A4 three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers;
25mm maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent
groupings.
C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Contract and identify subject matter of contents.
D. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product
and major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Contract; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems
indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
Suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
Gulf Consult Operation and Maintenance Data III-2/01 93 00 - 1

20th October 2021
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of

instructions for each procedure.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in a copy of each.
1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of
Work. Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operation by Employer, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit two copies of completed volumes fifteen days prior to final inspection. Draft copy shall be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of draft.
D. Submit four (4) sets of revised final volumes in final form within ten days after final inspection.
E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Provide product data, with catalogue number,
size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom
manufactured products.
F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning
agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended
schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Provide product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations
for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
I. Provide listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabled fly sheet and space for insertion
of data.
1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents before start
of Work. Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Employer, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit two copies of completed volumes fifteen days prior to final inspection. One draft copy be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of
document sets as required prior to final submission.
D. Submit four (4) sets of revised final volumes in final form within ten days after final inspection.
E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component
parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include
performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
commercial number of replaceable parts.
F. Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.

20th October 2021
G. Include as-installed colour coded wiring diagrams.
H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include
summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassemble instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and
checking instructions.
J. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
M. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required
for maintenance.
N. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
O. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as installed colour coded piping diagrams.
P. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
Q. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
R. Include test and balancing reports.
S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.
T. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
- NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
- NOT USED
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 01 94 00
MAINTENANCE PERIOD DUTIES
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Preventive Maintenance of all the works carried out by the Contractor for a period of two
years starting from the date/s the works area certified as substantially complete
comprising:
1. Administrative, logistical and supervisory requirements for co-ordinating
activities during the said 2 years period
2. Keeping rooms areas of work clean and tidy from the uncleanliness resulting
from the Contractor’s activities.
3. Maintenance of Records
4. Completion Certificate
B. All maintenance period duties mentioned anywhere else in the Tender/Contract.
1.02 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Owner/Employer will supply water from the date of substantial completion for
complete needs of the project and its occupants, free of cost to the Contractor.
B. Similarly, the Owner/Employer will supply all power needs of the project and its
occupants from the MEW also free of cost to the Contractor.
1.03 RELATED WORK(S)
A. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
B. Section 01 88 70 – Product Warranties
C. Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures
D. Section 01 93 00 – Operation and Maintenance Data
E. All other sections where maintenance period duties and staff etc. are mentioned.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE), UK.
A. Maintenance manuals shall be used as the basis for maintenance.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval of maintenance manuals with
respect to each and every work system, sub system etc. requiring such a manual, listing
or maintenance program, method, tools, consumables, spares etc.
Begin this submittal process six months before and complete it minimum one month
before the Date of Substantial Completion.
Gulf Consult Maintenance Period Duties III-2/01 94 00-1

20th October 2021
B. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval the CVs of the staff proposed for
the maintenance works.
Begin this submittal process three months before and complete it minimum one month
before the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.07 REMEDY OF CONTRACTOR’S FAILURE
A. The attention and diligence that the Contractor shall bestow on calls from the Owner
and/or the Engineer shall be as follows:
(i) First visit by the Contractor to site and meetings with the Owner
- Within a reasonable period, or
- Maximum, within one calendar day of the Owner's call to the Contractor.
(ii) Completion of work
- Within a reasonable period, or
- Maximum, within the time agreed with the Owner when the first visit was
paid by the Contractor.
The Owner shall be free to consider that the Contractor had defaulted on his obligations
if the time designated in (i) and/or (ii) above elapses and the first visit is not made and/or
the work is still not completed satisfactorily.
B. At the end of the maintenance period, or soon thereafter, and provided either that all
works during that period had been attended to promptly and satisfactorily by the
Contractor or that the Owner is satisfied that the costs of the works that the Owner, had
to carry out, consequent upon the failure of the Contractor to attend to them, shall not
reasonably exceed the retention amount, the Owner shall release the retention amount
to the Contractor.
C. However, If the Owner in his sole discretion, had already released a certain amount
against a bank guarantee then the Contractor shall be at liberty to allow the said bank
guarantee to lapse at the end of its validity unless he receives a written communication
from the Owner, within the said validity period, instructing the Contractor to extend the
said bank guarantee for the reason that the works that had arisen during the
Maintenance Period & which were being carried out by the Owner for the reasons
hereinabove, were expected to cost an amount exceeding the retention.
D. The Owner shall then be at liberty, to encash the said bank guarantee, spend the
necessary and certified amounts as detailed hereinabove and pay the residue to the
Contractor promptly upon the completion of the relevant works.
1.08 CONTRACTOR’S STAFF DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide staff as warranted by the requirements of the work during
the Maintenance Period.
Position Qualification Exp. Duration of Availability Delay

at Site Penalty
KD/Day
1. Maintenance Graduate Civil 10 To be on call at any time 50
Manager Engineer
2. Civil Supervisor Diploma in Civil 10 To be on call at any time 30

Engineer
Note: 1. If a person requires more than one person to fill, the Contractor shall provide these
according to the Kuwait labour laws.

20th October 2021
2. A “day” means a “calendar day”

3. “Exp” shall mean Experience in building/similar works/services, at least 50% of
which shall be in maintenance of works/services relevant to this contract.
B. The penalty noted above will be levied if, in the knowledge/opinion of the Owner:
1. The staff is absent, or
2. The staff fails to perform his duty inspite of being present.
C. The Owner/Employer shall provide free of cost the offices space and stores space for
the Contractor’s maintenance period staff.
D. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide all his maintenance period staff with all
their other requirements such as furniture, mobile telephones, tools, instruments,
stationery, etc. complete.
E. Please also see other parts of the Tender Documents for further requirements in this
regard.
F. The above positions and their hours of work are the minimum. Additional hours or
additional staff will have to be provided without additional cost if it becomes necessary in
the reasonable opinion of the Employer/Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOT USED
3.01 GENERAL
Following activities shall be carried out and allowed for by the Contractor.
A. Repair/replacement of works or components which may prove defective due to
workmanship etc. as per the Contract.
B. If the Contractor fails to carry out the repairs within an agreed/stated time, the Owner/
Employer shall employer another party for the repairs and deduct the cost from any
retained monies. The Employer shall also charge 15% administrative fees.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 2
Existing Conditions
SECTION 02 02 00
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work covered by this Section as indicated on the drawings and as
specified here in, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete but not limited to the following:
1. Area Demarcation
2. Peripheral Fencing gates and access control.
3. Field-Offices and Lab layout.
4. Vehicles and Transport parking.
5. Equipment Storage
6. Material Storage
7. Utility Services – Toilets, Electrification, Water supply and Air-conditioning.
8. Erosion and Sedimentation Control
9. Demolition of existing but unnecessary structures and features.
10. Cleaning and Removal of Topsoil.
11. Uprooting of trees and plantation.
12. Any other issues that may be required for the execution or enhancement of
works.
B. Related Sections: The Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the work of other
sections with the work of this section. Related work to be coordinated and used in
conjunction with this specification includes but is not limited to:
1. Section 01 50 50 – Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
2. Section 01 52 10 – Field Offices and Sheds
3. Section 01 55 50 – Traffic Control
4. Section 01 56 20 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.
5. Section 01 73 50 – Safety
6. Section 01 74 20 – Cleaning
Gulf Consult Site Preparation III-2/02 02 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Photographs, sufficiently detailed of existing conditions including building landscape

and other special features, adjoining structures and constructions and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the Site
Preparation.
C. Layout planning of Site office-premises, peripheral fencing and gates, field-offices

and Labs, Vehicles and Transport parking, Equipment storage, Material storage for
approval by the Engineer.
D. Erosion and Sedimentation Control plans for initial and interim stages, excavation
plans etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining from his own thorough
examination of the Site and coordination with the working team of the Engineer. He
will have a reconnaissance survey of the area including the topography, physical
features, forestation, depression etc. occupying the site. While carrying out this job
the Contractor must examine the presence of hazardous creatures like snakes,
reptiles, termites or unusual substances like contaminated soils or wastes etc. In
case any such finding is noted, necessary steps shall have to be accorded by the
Contractor to solve the problem and also to get rid of any risk and hazards
3.02 PREPARATION
A. The task of Site preparation is not at all the minor work under the contractual volume
of works but its importance one should not ignore. To start the main work the
Contractor must take up the site preparation to build a strong base for the system
advancement of the main contractual performance. The team of the first crew
workforce shall go to site and take up the task of the Site preparation. They will have
to initiate and execute the following tasks in the interest of Contract as well as for
their own needs and necessities.
1. The whole contract area has to be demarcated in accordance with the limit of
Contract Drawings.
2. Necessary steps have to be accorded for ascertaining proper security of

contract premises including the execution of peripheral fencing works, gates
and access control system.
3. Layout plan of field office, testing laboratories and vehicle–parking area shall
be prepared and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

20th October 2021
4. Storage for materials and equipment shall have to be established in

accordance with the approval of the Engineer.
5. Arrangements for utility services, electrification, sewerage, water supply, air-

conditioning and telecommunication services also shall be made in sound
engineering practices, to facilitate the site offices and site staff including all
involved personnel in the project.
6. Careful steps shall have to be initiated to establish methods to prevent all

possible erosion and sedimentation phenomenon due to the new cut and fill
work at site.
7. Any new site will demand some demolition works due to the presence of
some abandoned structures, utilities, dead plants as well as unnecessary
living plants including obstructing plants. The Contractor shall asses all of
them in a careful and precise manner to remove them perfectly without
creating any potential harm, loss or damage at site.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. To facilitate the Site in respect of essential utility services the Contractor shall have to
install a good number of machineries at site. From a gigantic Diesel generator unit to
a precise Thermometer etc, a long list of machineries shall constitute the list of such
essentials. The Contractor shall install all of them in a fault proof manner to get the
results or products of the machineries in good reliance and confidence. Spares for all
parts as well as the machineries themselves should also be guaranteed at site
because at the time of failure, immediate repair or replacement may be a serious
problem.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall engage sufficiently skilled crews and manpower to carry out the
exclusive works of the maintenance at site, The routine-cleaning, operation of
machineries and equipment, maintaining proper vigilance and security to the site-
personnel and properties etc. should be considered and handled with due
importance. Any negligence may lead to serious damage and danger.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 02 30 00
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SOIL REPORTS AND BORE HOLES:
1. Soil Reports attached (52 pages) have been prepared for guidance and
convenience only.
2. The availability of these reports to the Contractor does not relieve the
Contractor of obligations to thoroughly investigate the nature of the Site and
the Sub-soil conditions therein, nor does it relieve the Contractor of any
obligations and responsibilities under the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.
B. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site prior to submitting his Tender
and made all necessary inspections and investigations and, to have decided for
himself, the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the presence of existing foundations or
other hidden obstructions, the level of the water table, the extent of rock, support to
existing services and structures and all factors affecting the Work and shall be
deemed to have allowed for these in his Tender. Any information made available to
the Contractor, either in these documents or the soil reports will not relieve the
contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself the nature and extent of the work,
nor will it guarantee that similar conditions will apply on other parts of the Site.
C. If at any time during the execution of the works, the Engineer instructs the Contractor
to make boreholes and/or carryout exploratory excavation, which are necessary for
the execution of the works, then the Contractor shall carryout these works, without
any extra cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Subsurface Investigation III-2/02 30 00 - 1

20th October 2021
Sf)II..
11ll7J~S'I,It-1l'I,IC)1l
Ill~ PC)ll'l,
,JOII NO : Sl~~l/202l/7HU5Li
Client: Dar Gulf Consult

Project : AMIRI-GRC BUILDING
Location : Sharq
51h July 2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No
1. INTRODUCTION 1
2. GENERAL GEOLOGY OF THE AREA 1
3. SCOPE OF WORKS 2
4. FIELD INVESTIGATION PROGRAM 3

s. LABORATORY INVESTIGATION PROGRAM 4
6. SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND BACKFILLING 6

7. DEWATERING 7
8. EXCAVATION AND SHORING 7
9. SOIL PARAMETERS 8
10. CALCULATED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE AND

SUBGRADE MODULUS 10-15
11. RECOMMENDATION & CLOSING REMARKS 16
12. REFERENCES 17
APPENDICES
I. BORE HOLE LOGS 18-23
II. SIEVE ANALYSIS TEST RESULTS 24-28
III. ATTERBERG'S LIMIT TEST RESULT 29-33
IV. WATER CONTENT TEST RESULTS 34-35

v. DIRECT SHEAR TEST RESULTS 36-40
VI. CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS 41-42
VII. ACI CODE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CONCRETE 43-47
VIII. BORE HOLE LOCATION PLAN 48-49

SEMATCO
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co.W.L.L.
SOli!. INVESTIGAliiON REPORT

FOR
AMIRI- GRC B~ILDING
AT
Sti~RQAREA
1.0 INTRODUCTION:
M/s. Dar Gulf Consult requested SEMATCO Soil and Engineering

Material Testing Co. W.L.L. to conduct a soil investigation program to
explore the subsurface stratigraphy, soil characteristics and accordingly,
recommended allowable net soil bearing pressures and criteria to be used
in the foundation design and construction for the project.
2.0 GENERAL GEOLOGY OF THE AREA:

Kuwait lies on deep sedimentary basin that forms the majority of the
Arabian Peninsula and is underlain by a considerable thickness of
sedimentary rocks. In Kuwait, the upper formation is relatively young
deposits. It is called Dibdiba formation (upper Miocene to Pleistocene
Epochs).
These deposits are underlain by the Dammam Limestone formation

(upper Eocene Epochs), which consists of variable soft chalky and hard
dolomitic limestone. The normally intervening deposits of the Fars
formation are absent except in northern Kuwait. The Dammam formation at
Kuwait city occurs at great depths. Dammam Formation ranges from 120m
to 280m within Kuwait. The soil profile typically consists of a surface layer
of wind-blown loose to medium dense silty sand extending to approximately
6m below ground surface. It is underlain by a dense to very dense silty
sand. The soil in the formation is sometimes called "Gatch".
SEM/2021/76854 - SEMATCO
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
SEMATCO
Gatch is a granular soil with fine content as low as 5 % to an excess of

35%. Gatch is generally uncemented. However, discontinuous cemented
bands are frequently found near the surface. The cementatious material is
usually calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate or calcium sulphate.
3.0 SCOPE OF WORKS:
The work requested by M/s. Dar Gulf Consult includes both field
investigation and laboratory tests.
The field investigation program includes:
• Hand Excavation of a total of 2 inspection pit at the boreholes locations

prior to drilling operation in order to inspect all underground utilities.
• Drilling a total of 2 boreholes 20.0 meters deep. A borehole location plan is

shown in Appendix VIII.
• Performing Standard Penetration Testing (SPT) according to ASTM D1586-

11 for every one meter interval to the end of the borehole depth. The SPT
results are shown along with the boreholes logs in Appendix I.
• Identifying the depth to the Ground Water Table at each borehole.
• Collection of small disturbed samples using split spoon sampler and

undisturbed samples using Dames & Moore (D&M) sampler.
• Collection of water sample.
The laboratory investigation program requested includes the

following:
• Carry out soil description for samples collected from different strata
according to BS 5930.
• Carry out sieve analysis test for soil samples according to ASTM D6913 for
100% of the boreholes (in thi s case for 2 boreholes) at different depths.
• Carry out atterberg's limits test for soil samples according to ASTM D4318
for 100% of the boreholes (in this case for 2 boreholes) at different depths.
• Carry out moisture content test for soil samples according to ASTM D2216
for 100% of the boreholes (in this case 2 boreholes) at different depths.
• Carry out direct shear test for soil samples according to ASTM D3080 for
100% of the boreholes (in this case 2 boreholes) at different depths.
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
2
SEMATCO
• Carry out chemical test comprised of sulphates, chlorides, pH value, and

organic matters content for soil samples according to BS 1377 for 100% of
the boreholes (in this case 2 boreholes) at different depths.
• Carry out chemical test comprised of sulphates, chlorides, and pH value, for
water samples according to BS 1377 for 50% of the boreholes (in this case
for 1 borehole).
It is also requested to evaluate the soil bearing capacity based on (N) value
at the designated depth intervals according to Meyerhof equation assuming
the footing width B= l.Sm, 2.0m, and 3.0m and calculate soil bearing
capacity using raft foundation and modulus of subgrade reaction.
4.0 FIELD INVESTIGATION PROGRAM:
In this program 2 boreholes are drilled at the locations assigned by M/s.

Dar Gulf Consult. The site is located at Sharq area.
The borehole logs are shown in Appendix I. In the boreholes, Ground Water
Table (GWT) was encountered during drilling operations at depth of 5.75 to
6.10 meters from existing ground level. The SPT is done according to ASTM
D-1586. The SPT values are shown on the same logs.
Drilling Method: Drilling was carried out using two methods. Auger drilling
was used up to signs of borehole collapse or up to ground water level
followed by rotary drilling.
Auger drilling method: Auger boring is used at this site. Auger boring is
continued up to signs of borehole collapse or up to ground water level.
Rotary Drilling: Drilling for the remaining of the borehole is advanced by

rotary drilling where a rapid rotation of the drilling bit cuts, chips and grinds
the material at the bottom of the borehole into small pieces. The cuttings
are removed by pumping water or drilling fluid (mud) down through the
drill rods and up through the hole. By rotary drilling method a uniform clean
hole with relatively little disturbance of the soil below the bottom of the
hole is produced.
SEM/2021/76854- SEMATCO
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
3
SEMATCO
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co.W.L. L.
Standard Penetration Testing and Samples collection: After the boring has
been advanced to the desired sampling elevation and excessive cutting has
been removed, a split spoon sampler was attached to the sampling rods
and lowered into t he borehole. The sampler was driven with blows from
63.5 kilogram hammer and the number of blows required to penetrate
through 15 em increment were counted.
The first 15 em was a seating drive and the sum of second and third 15 em
increments is termed "The standard penetration resistance" or the "N-
Value".
Disturbed samples were collected and were placed in plastic bags and each
sample labeled with proper designations and transported to laboratory for
testing.
5.0 LABORATORY INVESTIGATION PROGRAM:

5.1 SOIL DESCRIPTION (BS-5930) :
In the course of this program tests are performed on soil samples

collected from the boreholes to determine visual classification of different
soil strata according to BS 5930. The results of these tests are shown on
the soil boreholes logs.
5.2 SIEVE ANALYSIS (ASTM D6913):
In the course of this program 4 sieve analysis tests are performed on

4 soil samples collected from the borehole according to ASTM 06913. Tests
are performed on soil samples collected according to the following table:
BH# Depth ( m} BH# Depth {m}

GBH-1 4.0 GBH-1 8.0
GBH-2A 2.0 GBH-2A 6.0
Sieve analysis test results are shown in Appendix II.
SEM/2021/ 76854 - SEMATCO

AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
4
SEMATCO
5.3 ATTERBERG LIMITS (ASTM 04318):
In the course of this program 4 Atterberg Limits test are performed

on 4 soil samples collected from the boreholes according to ASTM D4318.
Tests are performed on soil samples collected according to the following
table:
BH# Depth(m) BH# Depth (m)

GBH-1 4.0 GBH-1 8.0
GBH-2A 2.0 GBH-2A 6.0
Atterberg limits test results are shown in Appendix III.
5.4 MOISTURE CONTENT (ASTM D2216):
In the course of this program 4 moisture content tests are performed

on 4 soil samples collected from the boreholes according to ASTM D2216.
Tests are performed on soil samples collected according to the following
table:
BH# Depth (m) BH# Depth (m)

GBH-1 4.0 GBH-1 8.0
GBH-2A 2.0 GBH-2A 6.0
Moisture content test results are shown in Appendix IV.
5.5 DIRECT SHEAR TEST (ASTM D3080):
In the course of this program 2 direct shear tests are performed on 2

soil samples collected from the boreholes according to ASTM D3080. Tests
are performed on soil samples collected according to the following table:
BH# Depth (m) BH# Depth (m)

GBH-1 4.5 GBH-2A 7.5
Direct shear test results are shown in Appendix V.
SEM/ 202 1/76854 • SEMATCO

AMIRI· GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
5
SEMATCO
5.6 CHEMICAL TEST (SULPHATES, CHLORIDES, PH, ORGANIC,

8S1377):
In the course of this program 2 chemical tests comprised of

sulphates, chlorides, pH value, and organic matters performed on 2 soil
samples collected from the boreholes according to 851377. Tests are
performed on soil samples collected according to the following table:
8H# Depth (m) BH# I Depth (m)

G8H-1 5.0 G8H-2A 8.0
Chemical tests results on soil are shown in Appendix VI.
5.7 CHEMICAL TEST (SULPHATES, CHLORIDES, PH, 8S1377):
In the course of this program 1 chemical test comprised of

sulphates, chlorides, and pH value is performed on 1 water sample
collected from the boreholes according to 851377. Tests are performed on
water samples collected according to the following table:
8H#
GBH-1
Chemical tests results on water are shown in Appendix VI.
6.0 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND

BACKFILLING:
When excavation has reached required elevation, the subgrade
should be submerged with clean water free from chemicals and salts.
Subsequently, compaction of the soil should begin. The soil below the
fou ndation must be compacted to 95% of modified proctor and according
to ASTM D -1556.
All backfilling above the foundation should be done in layers not

exceeding 20 em and compacted to 95% of modified proctor.
The material used for backfilling shall be clean material free from
plant roots and any unsuitable material.
SEM/202 1/76854- SEMATCO

AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
6
SEMATCO
Suitability of soil for use as a backfill material is based on the general

specifications for building and engineering works issued by the Ministry of
Public Works (1990) Volume 1, Division 02 (Site Work), Excavation and
Backfill Works of Buildings (02220), pages 02220-3 and 02220-4.
These requirements can be summarized as :
Soil Classification : Coarse Material

Liquid Limit (LL) : <= 25
Plasticity Index (PI) : <= 6
Swelling : <= 1%
Soil description : Should be clean from dirt or organic materials.
7.0 DEWATERING:
Deep wells or well points are suggested to dewater soils to required
elevations.
8.0 EXCAVATION AND SHORING

To minimize excavation effects to the adjacent structures and facilities,
the excavation should be limited within a shored area. H piles with lagging or
other suitable retaining structure is recommended for areas requiring shoring.
Shoring is recommended for any excavation carried out at site. This is to
ensure the safety of workers and work done at that location. Temporary
shoring system of H piles and timber lagging can be used. The shoring system
should be designed by the contractor for each specific location. The design
should be reviewed and approved by a geotechnical engineer to ensure the
safety of workers and works. If the excavation is deeper than the ground
water table, then shoring system should be combined with a dewatering
system. Dewatering system should be applied first and then the shoring
system is installed before any excavation is done.
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
7
SEMATCO
9.0 SOIL PARAMETERS:

Based on the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and by using the
values of the field blows number for the soil layers, the recommended
soil parameters are as follows:
• Late ral Earth Pressure Coefficients:
The Rankine Active and Passive Earth Pressure Coefficients are

according to the following table:
RELATIVE
. DENSITY Ka Kp
Very Loose 0.361 2.770
Loose 0.307 3.255
Medium Dense 0.228 4.395
Dense 0.198 5.045
Very Dense 0.180 5.550
Where,
Ka is the earth active pressure coefficient.
Kp is the earth passive pressure coefficient.
• Soil f riction a ngle:
The average values for soil angle of friction are according to the
following table:
RElATIVE DENSITY <1>0
Very Loose 28
Loose 32
Medium Dense 39
Dense 42
Very Dense 44
SEM/ 2021/ 7685'1 - SEMATCO

AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
8
SEMATCO
• Soil Bulk Unit Weight:
The average soil bulk unit weight values based on the SPT blows
numbers of the drilled bore holes are as the fol lowing table:
Ybulk,avg
RELATIVE DENSITY 3
kN/m
Very Loose 13.5
Loose 16
Medium Dense 18.5
Dense 20
Very Dense 22
• Elastic Modulus. Shear Modulus. and Poisson's Ratio:
The values of the Elastic Modulus (E5 ), the Initial Shear Modulus
(Gmax ), and the Passion's Ratio (11) based on the SPT blows
numbers of the drilled bore holes are as the follows:
(a) Elastic Modulus (E 5 ):
Type of Soil Es (N/mm2 )

Silty Sand 7- 21
Loose Sand 10 - 24
Dense Sand 48-81
(b) Shear Modulus (Gmax):
For the silty sand soil type, the initial Shear Modulus Gmax ranges
between 27600 kPa to 138000 kPa.
(c) Poisson's Ratio (/1):
Typical values for Poisson's ratio (11) for soils:
Type of Soil /1
Clay (saturated) 0.4 - 0.5
Clay (unsaturated) 0.1 - 0.3
Sandy clay 0.2 - 0.3
Silt 0.3 - 0.35
Sand (dense) 0.2 - 0.4
Course (void ratio = 0.4 - 0. 7) 0.15
Fine grained (void ratio = 0.4 - 0. 7) 0.25
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
9
SEMATCO
• Open Slope Excavation:
For slope stability, it is recommended that the slope ratios are as

shown below:
RELATIVE DENSITY H:V

Very Loose Loose 2.1:1
Medium Dense 1.7:1
Dense, Very Dense 1.4:1
10.0 CALCULATED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE AND

SUBGRADE MODULUS:
A. Isolated Footing
The net allowable soil bearing pressures are calculated based on the
equation of Meyerhof using the Standard Penetration Resistance (N).
According to Meyerhof (1956, 1974) and the modification done by Bowles

(1977):
Qnet(all) (kN/m 2) = 19.16 N Fd (for B ~ 1.22 m)
2
Qnet (all) (kN/m ) = 11.98 N
128
+
(3.28B B 1)
2
Fd (_§_J
25
.4 (for B > 1.22 m)
Where:
D
Fd = depth factor = 1 + 0.33 _i_ ~ 1.33
B
S =Tolerable settlement in mm (5 =25.4 mm in this case)
The calculations are done assuming:
B = 1.5, 2.0 and 3.0 m
N = Blow Count Field Values
Accordingly, the allowable net soil bearing pressures are calculated for the
N values measured in the field in all bore holes.
AMIRI· GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulr Consult
10
SEMATCO
B. Raft Foundation
The net allowable soil bearing pressures for raft foundation based on
equation of Meyerhofff using Standard Penetration Resistance (N).
Qall (net) (kN/m 2 ) = 25.0 (N1) 60 for maximum raft settlement of 2"
(50.80 mm)
C. Coefficient of Subgrade Modulus
The calculation of Coefficient of Subgrade Modulus is based on the work of

Terzaghi (1955), for foundation on sandy soils.
K = Ko.3 ( B2~ .3)2
Where, K0.3 (MN/m 3 ) = 1.8 (N1) 60 as proposed by Scott (1981)
SEM/2021/76854 • SEMATCO
AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
11
SEMATCO
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co.W.L. L.
CAL CULATED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE
[Accord ing to Mayerhof (1956, 1974) and modification done by Bowles (1977))
JOB NO : SEM /202 1/76854
CLIENT :Dar Gu lf Consult
PROJECT :A M IRI-G RC BU ILDING
AREA :Sharq
GBH- 1 2
q net all (kg/em )
Depth "N " 8 =1.5 m 8 =2.0 m 8 =3.0 m

Dt. m valu e
1.00 25 3. 00 3.00 3.00
2.00 27 3. 00 3.00 3.00
3.00 22 3. 00 3.00 3.00
4.00 33 3.00 3.00 3.00
5.00 37 3. 00 3.00 3.00
6.00 28 3.00 3.00 3.00
7.00 26 3. 00 3.00 3.00
8.00 21 3.00 3.00 3.00
9.00 20 3.00 3. 00 3.00
10.00 32 3.00 3. 00 3.00
11.00 38 3. 00 3. 00 3.00
12.00 50 3.00 3. 00 3.00
13.00 50 3.00 3. 00 3.00
14.00 47 3.00 3. 00 3.00
15.00 32 3.00 3. 00 3.00
16.00 31 3.00 3.00 3.00
17.00 31 3.00 3. 00 3.00
18.00 31 3.00 3.00 3.00
19.00 46 3.00 3.00 3.00
20.00 50 3.00 3.00 3.00
12
SEMATCO
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co.W. L.L.
CALCULATED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE
[According to Mayerhof (1956, 1974) and modification done by Bowles (1977)]
JOB NO : SEM/202 1/76 854
CLIENT :Dar G ulf Consult
PROJECT :AM IRI -G RC BU ILD ING
AREA :Sharq
GBH-
2
2A q net all (kg/em )
Depth "N" 8=1.5 m 8=2.0 m 8=3.0 m

Dt. m value
1.00 25 3.00 3.00 3.00
2.00 18 3.00 3.00 3.00
3. 00 16 3.00 3.00 3.00
4.00 16 3.00 3.00 3.00
5.00 18 3.00 3.00 3.00
6.00 20 3.00 3.00 3.00
7.00 37 3.00 3.00 3.00
8.00 50 3.00 3.00 3.00
9.00 42 3.00 3.00 3.00
10.00 33 3.00 3.00 3.00
11.00 36 3.00 3.00 3. 00
12.00 31 3.00 3.00 3.00
13.00 31 3.00 3.00 3.00
14.00 29 3.00 3.00 3.00
15.00 29 3.00 3.00 3.00
16.00 32 3.00 3.00 3.00
17.00 31 3.00 3.00 3.00
18.00 32 3.00 3.00 3.00
19.00 36 3.00 3. 00 3.00
20.00 38 3. 00 3. 00 3. 00
13
SEMATCO
ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY

FOR
RAFT FOUNDATION
JOB NO : SEM/2021/76854
CLIENT : Dar Gulf Consult
PROJECT : AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
AREA : Sharq
DEPTH y' cr' GBH·1

3
( m) ( kN / m ) (kN/ m 2) N (Field) N6o
1 18.62 18.62 25 25.36

2 18.62 37.24 27 27.38
3 18.62 S5.86 22 25.29
4 20.58 76.44 33 37.93
5 20.58 97.02 37 47.53
6 8.81 105.83 28 35.97 0.96 35 w ~ }%/ :,.
7 8.81 114.64 26 33.40
8 8.81 123.45 21 26.98
9 8.81 132.26 20 27.05
10 10.77 143.03 32 43.27
11 10.77 153.80 38 51.39
12 10.77 164.57 50 67.62
13 10.77 175.34 50 67.62
14 10.77 186.11 47 63.56
15 10.77 196.88 32 43.27
Recommendations for GBH - 1

k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 1m= 23.51 MN/m3 @ 23510 kN/m
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 2m= 20.61 MN/ m3 @ 20605 kN/m 3

k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 3m = 15.54 MN/m3 @ 15537 kN/m 3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 4m= 19.92 MN/m3 @ 19922 kN/m
3
k (Mod ulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 5m= 22.16 MN/m 3 @ 22159 kN/m 3

k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction)@ 6m= 16.06 MN/m 3 @ 16056 kN/m
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 7 m= 14.32 MN/m 3 @ 14325 kN/m

3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 8m= 11.15 MN/m 3 @ 11150 kN/m3

k {Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 9m = 10.80 MN/m 3 @ 10799 kN/m
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 10m= 16.61 MN/m 3 @ 16615 kN/m

3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 11m = 19.03 MN/m 3 @ 19027 kN/m3

k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 12m = 24.20 MN/m 3 @ 24202 kN/m
3
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 13m = 23.45 MN/m @ 23447 kN/m3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 14m = 21.39 MN/m 3 @ 21393 kN/ m3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 15m = 14.16 MN/m3 @ 14162 kN/m
3
REMARKS:
A. The modulus of subgrade reaction was calculated according to DM7 Manual #02 Foundations and
II
earth stuctures Revalidated by changel, September 1986

II
8. The Raft width assumed in calculations is 20 meters.
14
SEMATCO
Soi l and Engineering Materi al Testing Co.W.L. L.
ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY

FOR
RAFT FOUNDATION
JOB NO : SEM/2021/76854
CLIENT : Dar Gulf Consult
PROJECT : AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
AREA : Sharq
D,EPTH y' a' GBH-2A

3
(m) (kN/m ) (kN/m 2) N (Field) N6o
1 18.62 18.62 25 25.36

2 18.62 37.24 18 18.26
3 18.62 55.86 16 18.39
4 18.62 74.48 16 18.39
5 18.62 93.10 18 23 .12
6 8.81 101.91 20 25.69
7 10.77 112.68 37 47.53
8 10.77 123.45 so 64.24
9 10.77 134.22 42 56.80
10 10.77 144.99 33 44.63
11 10.77 155.76 36 48.68
12 10.77 166.53 31 41.92
13 10.77 177 .30 31 41.92
14 8.81 186.11 29 39.22
15 8.81 194.92 29 39.22
Recommendations for GBH - 2A

k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 1m = 23 .51 MN/m 3 @ 23510 kN/m 3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 2 m = 13.74 MN/m 3 @ 13737 kN/m 3
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 3 m = 11.30 MN/m @ 11299 kN/m 3
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 4m = 9.79 MN/m @ 9785 kN/m 3
3
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 8m= 26.55 MN/m 3 @ 26547 kN/m3

3 3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 9m = 22.51 MN/m @ 225 11 kN/m
3
3
3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 13m= 14.46 MN/m @ 14457 kN/m3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 14m = 13.20 MN/m 3 @ 13200 kN/m 3
k (Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) @ 15m= 12.90 MN/m 3 @ 12898 kN/m 3
REMARKS:
A. The modulus of subgrade reaction was calculated according to DM7 Manual #02 Foundations and
II
earth stuctures Revalidated by changel, September 1986

II
B. The Raft width assumed in calculations is 20 meters.
15
SEMATCO
11.0 RECOMMENDATIONS AND CLOSING REMARKS:

• The soil in general is silty sand, SM.
• Ground Water Table was encountered during drilling operations at
depth of 5. 75 to 6.10 meters from existing ground level.
• It must be recognized that the fluctuations of the groundwater table

may occur due to changes in tide levels, seasonal variations in the
amount of rainfall, runoff and other factors not evident at the time the
borings were performed.
• In general, the soil is medium dense, dense and very dense up to the
end of borehole depth.
• The recommended allowable net bearing capacity for isolated footings
for the tested area is 3.0 kgjcm 2 assuming that the foundation level is at
5.0 meters from existing ground level.
• The recommended bearing capacity for raft foundation for the entire
plot area is 6.0 kg/cm 2 assuming the foundation level is at 5.0 meters
from existing ground level and the modulus of subgrade reaction is 11.0
MNfm3 at the same level.
• The anticipated settlement for the isolated footings is less than 25.4 mm
and the anticipated differential settlement is less than 19 mm.
• The anticipated settlement for the raft foundations is less than 50.8 mm.
• Concrete work and concrete protection:
For the tested area, sulphate content range in soil is 1721.86 to

2064.86 ppm which is greater than 2000 ppm (0.2% by weight). Sulphate
content range in water is 2627.38 ppm which is greater than 1500 ppm
(0.15% by weight) Here sulphate exposure condition is severe. Chloride
content range in soil is 158.15 to 197.51 ppm. Chloride content range in
water is 910.65 ppm. Hence, for the tested area it is recommended to use
sulphate resistant cement Type (V) with minimum concrete cylinder
compressive strength 353 kg/cm 2 and wjc ratio is 0.40 (according to ACI
318 - 2005 table 4.3.1 & 4.2.2 for cylinders Appendix VII). Increase
concrete cover for reinforcement in foundation, ground beams, and
column necks to not less than 7.7 em (3 in.). If ground beams or column
necks are partially buried and partially exposed to weather, the minimum
concrete cover can be used is 5.0 em (2 in.). (according to ACI 318/318R-
74- 7.7.1 Appendix VII). Organic matters content in soil range is 0.12% to
0.58% which is less than 2% by weight.
SEM/ 2021/ 76854 - SEMATCO

AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
16
SEMATCO
General Note:
It should be noted that the recommendations contained in this report are

based on the data obtained from the test borings. The borings indicate soil
conditions only at Specific locations and times and to only depths
penetrated. They do not necessarily reflect strata variations that may exist
between the boring locations. If variations in subsurface conditions from
those described are noted during construction, recommendations in this
report may need to be re-evaluated. All samples of this soil investigation
will be disposed of after 4 months from the date of testing.
This report is done exclusively for M/s Dar Gulf Consult by SEMATCO Soil
& Engineering M erial Testing Co. W.L.L.
For/ SEMATC , General Manager.
12.0 REFERENCES:
• Bowles, J.E. (1977) "Foundation Analysis and Design" 2nd edition, Me
Graw-Hill, New York.
• Meyerhof, G.G. (1956) "Penetration tests and bearing capacity of

cohesionless soils" Journal of the Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol 82, No SM1, PP 1-19
• Meyerhoff, G.G. (1974) "Ultimate bearing capacity of footings on sand

layer overlying clay, "Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol 11, No 2, pp
224-229
• Scott, R.F. (1981) "Foundation Analysis"

Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., U.S.A.
• Terzaghi, K. (1955) "Evaluation of the Coefficient of Subgrade Reaction"

Geotechnique, Institute of Engineers, London, Vol 5, No 4, pp 187-226.
• Ralph B. Peck, Walter E. Hanson, Thomas H. Thornburn (1974)

"Foundation Engineering", 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
SEM/2021/ 76854 - SEMATCO

AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Sharq
Dar Gulf Consult
17
APPENDIX - I
Bore Hole Logs
18
LEGEND AND SYMBOLS
Legend:
COAAL
........<:k .. .. .. .
~@i ~~~j
1''"\.1''""'''""'"•
r-=-=~-:J :(1 (I (I 0:
~(l(l(li
:------~
~~
:(1(I (I 0:
:------~ ~(l(l(li
:(1(I (I 0:
~(I (I ( I :
i.9. ...9. .. J!...9.'
SrLT
: .x·····x·····x.. ··
: )I' )t )(
•
0
:)( . X X
: : X X )C
0 :x X X
0 : X X X
:x M )(
0
: X X )I'
I
0
:)(
: .................. ,.,.
X X
r. . . X91.L .. .
:................. .'
SYMBOLS
CH: High Plasticity Clay SC: Clayey Sand
CL: Low Plasticity Clay SC-SM : Silty, Clayey Sand
GC: Clayey Gravel SM: Silty Sand
GC-GM: Silty, Clayey Gravel SP: Poorly graded sand
GP: Poorly graded Gravel SP-SM; Poorly graded sand with silt
GP- GM: Poorly graded Gravel with silt SW: Well graded sand
GW- GM: Well-graded gravel with silt SW-SM : Well-graded sand with silt
TERM INDICATING RANGE OF PERCENTAGES (ASTM D 2488)

Term Percentage
Traces < 5
Few 5 to 10
Little 15 to 25
Some 30 to 45
Mostly 50 to 100
ASSESSMENT OF RELATIVE DENSITY/ CONSISTENCY

for Coh esion less soils for Cohesive soils
Term SPT 'N' Va lues Term SPT ' N' Values qu, kPa
Very loose 0-4 Very soft <2 < 25
Loose 5 - 10 Soft 2-4 25- 50
Medium dense 11 - 30 Medium Stiff 5-8 50 -100
Dense 31 - 50 Stiff 9 - 16 100- 200
Very dense Over 50 Very stiff 17 - 32 200 - 400
SPT-N : Blows for 300mm penetration Hard >32 >400
USCS CLASSIFICATION (ASTM D4 22/ASTM-D2487)
0.002 0 . 06 2 6 0 rrm
collo ids fine medium coarse

CLAY SILT SAND GRAVEL COBBLES
Particle Size 1 5 75
I
4 25 rm 2. 1 0 4'{5
NO. 2 00 NO. 40 NO. 10 NO . 4
SIEVE DESIGNATION U. S .A. A STM 0422
LEG 100-ASTM NEW 2
19
Log of Bore Hole: GBH-1
E: 498789 .355
Job No: SE M/202 1/76854 Date: 15/06/2021
N: 325209 1.128
Client: Dar Gulf Consult Dril led by : A. Shams
H: 5.52 1 Rig No: 1667 4

Owner: AMIRI-GRC BUILDING
Water Depth: 5.75m@8:30AM
Area: Sharq
Depth: 20.0m Drilling Time*
Page No: 1 of 2
SUBSURFACE PROFILE
.<::.
.
•QJ
Soil a.
a.
QJ Description Profile
>-
1- BlowCount/15 em
_§_ 0 QJ Standard Penetration Test
0 Type
.<::. .D a.
a.
QJ
E
>-
E
10 20 30 40 50
0 (/) "'
(/)
Ground Surface
0
silty SA ND
0.5 '. '. ·. Medium dense,yellowish brown,fine to M Dense SS 7 11 14 25
....
. '
.. . . ·, medium,poorly graded,smooth,
..
I I . , •X
·.: ·. subrounded, moisture,dry,weak reaction
with HCL,silty SAND ss 12 15 27
1.5 9
...
•, I • ',
. • . J
,1• • . •
2 ~
'• ·•. becomes yellowish grey,moisture,moist
•, ', X ,
.•.·
2.5 .·•. ss 8 10 12 22
3
.... ..
l
I • · .
. ·'
. . . ~.
·.· .·~~: D and M Sampler@ 3.50m to 3.95m DM 10 18 32 50

.,•.
.•.·. .
3.5 i •.: ~ I :
....... becomes dense Dense ss 22 18 15 33

4
.•. ~- : D and M Sampler@ 4.50m to 4.87m DM 20 26 24/7 50 }
:r:·
4.5
5
ii'.
'
. ,.
. ·.: ·.•·
.. .. ss 10 15 22 37 I<
becomes medium dense

5.75m .. •.·•..
5.5 M Dense SS 8 13 15 28
5L I• ' ,
6
becomes moisture,wet
6 .5 ss 9 12 14 26
7
7.5 ss 9 8 13 21 I.
8
8.5 ... .··. ss 6 9 11 20 A
...·.·
• I .·.
,'• I
.•..·
9 I .. • I ,
~ • • ·.I •
·. becomes dense
9.5 ....:. :1;. Dense ss 13 15 17 32
•· .
10 '. 'x:
·....::
I •
10.5
.·• · . .... ss 12 14 24 38
11 .·
.·.•.
KEY AND NOTES:

Standard : IISTM D·1586
' Reponed deplh ci water. represents depUl measured from the ground surface jus\ after drilling \he b01e hole. Actual deplh can be determined lhrollgh inslalllng piezometer .
'AI\ samples collecled during lhis imesl igation wilt be d1sposed oft afler 4 monlhs ~om I he date or tes11ng.
Soillesl represmls lhe soil allhe t:oroholc localion only.
'SS: Splil Spoon V. Looso:Vcry Loose
M. D onso. Medium Dense V Dense: Very Dense
G S. Ground Surface
20
Log of Bore Hole: GBH-1
E: 498789 .355
Date: 15/06/2021
Job No: SEM/202 1/76854
N: 3252091.128
Client: Dar Gulf Consult Drilled by: A. Shams
H: 5.52 1 Rig No: 16674
Owner: AM IRI-GRC BU ILDING
Water Depth: 5.75m@8:30AM
Area: Sharq
Depth: 20 .0m Drilling Time*
Page No: 2 of 2
SUBSURFACE PROFILE
.
'w
Soil a.
>.
Blow Count / 15 em
I
.r;
0
Description Profile
Type
1-
Q)
a.
Standard Penetration Test
.0
c. E E
ro
0
Q) >- 10 20 30 40 50
C)) C)) I
.. I
•:.: : becomes very dense

11 .5 ~.: ..
',
. 1•.
.·.: V Dense SS 17 24 26/11 50
....
.. .. ·ll ,
12 • . ·.x .
12.5 ......··.
..
. ss 19 29 21/7 50
13
. .·..
I
'•
, ·1,
.• ·.: . becomes dense

·.·.',' Dense SS 17 20 27 47
13.5
14 I
... :''·
.,• 1 ,
·.•:.:: becomes grey,fine to coarse,well

14.5 .
•: • . • graded, rough
• 1 ..
',
>.
ss 13 15 17 32
15 I '• ,"1 ,
.·.·.::
15.5 a. • ..
X •
...
' , .
•'I
ss 11 14 17 31
16 a '· ·. x
16.5 •.
I
....
. a•
.
•·
, ,• I ,
ss 10 15 16 31
17
·:
~ .. ·::·.:
17.5 .....
·.· '.· ·.
·
,1• ••
ss 10 12 19 31
I ' • • I ,
18
I':·'•..' poorly graded,smooth
I •, ·, 1 ,
becomes yellowish grey, fine to medium,

18.5 ss 17 20 26 46
19
.......
, 1•
• . :x
.·
becomes very dense

19.5 V Dense SS 19 23 27/12 50
20
End of Borehole
20.5
21
21.5
22
KEY /\ND NOTES:

Standard : ASTM 0·1506
'Heported depth a water. represents depUl measured from tile grolllld surface jus t after drilling tile bore hole. /\ell•a! depth can be determined th rough installing piezometer
'/\11 samples colected during this irnesligation will be disposed off after 4 months from the date of tes t1ng
So,ltcst rcpresoots tho soil al Ule borehole location only.
' SS:Spht Spoon V. Loose.Very Loose
M. Denso:MO<fium Dense V. Donso· Very Dense
G S:Ground Surface
21
Log of Bore Hole: GBH-2A
E: 498776.393
Job No: SEM/202 1/76854 Date: 26/06/2021
N: 3252 050.112
Client: Dar Gulf Consult Drilled by: A. S ham s
H: 6. 147 Rig No: 16674

Owner : A MIRI -G RC B UILDIN G
Water Depth: 6 . 1 Om@8:00AM
Area: S harq
Page No: 1 of 2
SUBSURFACE PROFILE
~
.Q)
Soil a.
a.
Q) Description Profile ~ Blow Count /15 em
.§. 0 Q) Standa rd Penetration Test
0 Type
~
2ro .0 a.
a. E E
Q)
0 s >.
(/)
Ill
(/)
10 20 30 40 50
I
0 ....·•· silty SAND Ground Surface
0.5 ... ... Medium dense, yellowish brown,fine to M Dense SS 7 13 12 25

........·•.·,·. medium,poorly graded,smooth,
subrounded,moisture,dry,weak reaction
•. . ··. with HC L,with construc tion debri s, silty ss
.·,. ... SAND
1.5 6 8 10 18
2
..· becomes yellowish grey,without ss
2.5 ..·, .··. construction debris
•. 7 7 9 16
3
... ·.•·'·
3.5 ...... ·~ ss 6 8 8 16
4 .•·. ..::·
4.5 ...·..
..
'· ss 5 7 11 18
5
...· 0 and M Sampler@ 5.50m to 5.95m
: ·•.
5.5 .
6.10m .
··.
:,
OM 6 9 14 23
6 5L ..
·•.
becomes moisture,moist ss 4 7 13 20 t
becomes dense
. ··. ss
....... ..·•. 0 and M Sampler@ 7.50m to 7 .63rn
6.5 Dense 12 17 20 37 ~
7 ·, x .
7.5 ......· . becomes very dense

·. a .
OM 50/13 50
.. ss 23 50/13 50
.....·. : becomes dense
V Dense
8 :
8.5 .
.·..... .·...•· ·
Dense ss 16 19 23 42
9.5 ... .. ~
ss 12 15 18 33
10 .....·•
'•
10 .5 ...•. ... ss 11 17 19 36
11 .... .·..
... -· ·.x .
KEY AND NOTES:

Standard : AST M D· 1586
a
'Reponed deplh w• ter. represenls deplh measured from the ground swface just aft er drilling the bore l1ole. Actual depth ca n be determined through installing piezometer.
'All samples co lac led during this irr.t estigation will be disposed off after 4 montl1s hom the dale of tes ting.
Soil test rcpreS<>11s lhe soil al lhe borehole loca tion only.
'SS:Sphl Spoon V l.ooso Very Loose
M Densc:Med1um Dense V Dense· Very Dense
G S:GrOlll1d Surface
22
Log of Bore Hole: GBH-2A
E: 4 98776.3 93
Job No: S EM/20 2 1/76854 Date: 26/0 6/2 0 2 1
N: 32520 50 . 112
Client: Da r G ulf Consult Drilled by: A.S ham s
H: 6 .147 Rig No: 16674
Owner: A MIRI-G RC BUILDIN G
Water Depth: 6. 10m@8:00AM
Area: Sharq
Page No: 2 of 2
SUBSURFACE PROFILE
.s::
..
(\)
a.
a. Soil
>-
Blow Count / 15 em
.s.s:: (\)
0 0
Description Profile
Type
1-
(\)
a.
Standard Penetration Test
a. 2ro .D
E E
0
(\)
s (/)
>- ro
(/)
10 20 30 40 50
I I I I
becomes moisture,wet
11.5 ss 10 14 17 31
12
becomes rough
12. 5
... ss 11 15 16 31
13 .
II
•· ' •
•.
•1,
'.'·
x .·~:·. becomes medium dense
13.5 M Dense SS 10 13 16 29 /,
14
..
.·
.. ·
·•
·
ss 12 14 15 29
I • ·, ·
I ' • •I
15 I '•
_, _· : ..
•.I
becomes dense,grey,fine to coarse,well

~ .. .. •. ss 9
15.5
... ..
..• . graded
.•
Dense 15 17 32
16
..·.•·. ,
' •
.·
ss
16.5
•
.... . ·
• • 11: ,
.
.
12 15 16 31
.·.·. .
17 I, ·. 1 .
•.··.. ··.
...·•·.. ss
17.5 . 10 14 18 32
.
r ·.
.'...·
• J:.
18
·.
18.5 . ss 11 16 20 36
..
, J • . •
I '• • I,
19 ~ .. -:
ss
.. .•.
19.5 .. •. 13 15 23 38
'. '
. 20
End of Borehole
20.5
21
21.5
22
K EY AND NOlES:
Standard: ASrM 0 · 1586
"R ep01ted depU1 cl w ater. represents depU1 measured fr om the ground sw face jus t after drrlling the bore hole. Actual depth can be determ ined through installing piezometer.
'All samples colec ted during this investigation wilt be disposed off after 4 months from the date of tes ting
Soil test repres o11s the soil at tho borehole location only.
·ss:Sphl Spoon V Loose.Vcry Loose
M. Donsc. ModrumOcnsc V. Donso Vory Donsc
I G.S:Ground Surface
I
23
APPENDIX - II
SIEVE ANALYSIS TEST RESULTS
24
SEMATCO SEM-TECH-SA-REP-1
Version 1.0
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co. Release 1.0
GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS

( as per standard ASTM D 6913)
Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Client : Dar Gulf Consult Date : 19/ 06/2021
Project : AMIRI- GRC BUILDING Sample : BH#1 at 4.0m depth
Location : Sharq Done By : Mohamed Taha

Checked by : Eng. Rania Ja'areh Entered by : Mohamed Taha
From GraDh: Sieve Diameter Total%

No. (mm) Finer
%Fines= 11.3 4 4.75 95.8
DlO= 0.07 mm 10 2 85.1
D3o= 0.32 mm 20 0.84 67.6
D6o= 0.71 mm 40 0.42 42.5
Cu= 10.19 60 0.25 21.6
Cc= 2.03 100 0.15 13.9
140 0.106 16.1
200 0.075 11.3
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION CURVE

SAND
GRAVEL 1-C-, --..-M
o-urs·c -e~dit=lm~~-F-
in-e---1 SILT &
100
9Q ~~r+_,~T~~_,~++,_~~+4~
80 ""\ -
70
60 ~~r+~~++~~~~~~~,_-1
50 -
40
30 ~+Hrr-m~~~~~\~_,~~~
~~ :~ - ~~
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
100 10 1 0.1 0.01

Diameter (mm)
Soil Classification (USCS): Well Graded Sand or Silty Sand, SW-SM
* Note: Please note that standard ASTM 0 422 is withdrawn , No replacement
25
SEM-TECH-SA-REP-1
SEMATCO
Version 1.0
GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS

Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Client : Dar Gulf Consult Date : 19/06/2021

Checked by : Eng. Ran ia Ja'areh Entered by : Mohamed Taha
From Gragh: Sieve Diameter Total %

No. (mm) Finer
%Fines= 11.4 4 4.75 98.2
D10= 0.07 mm 10 2 88.6
D3o= 0.30 mm 20 0.84 70.0
D6o= 0.67 mm 40 0.42 45.4
Cu= 9.56 60 0.25 23.7
Cc= 1.92 100 0.15 14.9
140 0.106 14.3
200 0.075 11.4
I GRAVEL Course Me~~~DI Fine ~SILT &

100
90 -·~+Hr+~rrH+.....
-~r\~ "'
~~ffl+~~-m~H-~
80 -- -- I"
70 1- -
0')
c 60 ~~~~~+++-~~~~~~4-~
(/)
(/)
50
cu --
c. 40 '
30 -~+r+-ffirr~+-~~+-~H+~
-;je.
20 - 1- f- ~~ --
1o
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I I
100 10 1 0.1 0.01
Diameter (mm)
Soil Classification {USCS}: Well Graded Sand or Silty Sand, SW-SM
* Note: Please note that standard ASTM D 422 is withdrawn , No replacement
26
SEM-TECH-SA-REP-1
SEMATCO
Version 1.0
GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS

Job No : SEM/2021/76854

From Gragh: Sieve Diameter Total%

No. (mm) Finer
%Fines= 23.3 4 4.75 94.9
DlD= N/A 10 2 89.9
D3o= 0.18 mm 20 0.84 82.2
DGo= 0.43 mm 40 0.42 59.5
Cu= N/A 60 0.25 33.2
Cc= #VALUE! 100 0.15 28.5
140 0.106 31.0
200 0.075 23.3
100
I GRAVEL
I
SAND
Courscl Medium I Fine ISILT &
90 ""'~U
-t+t+1r+-t-t-t---+l't+++t--P'l~~t+H+H-t-l-----+H++-H-+-!---I
80 -
70
'
60 -IH*~~-ffl#+H-r--t+t+1r~ ~-r-ffl*H~~
~
40
30 :a
~
iV
r
20 -- 1 --·~ - - c-
10 1-
0 ~~~~~~~~~~_,~~~~
100 10 1 0.1 0.01

Diameter (mm)
Soil Classification (USCS): Silty Sand, SM
* Note: Please note that standard ASTM D 422 is withdrawn, No replacement
27
SEM-TECH-SA-REP-1
SEMATCO
Version 1.0
GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS

Job No : SEM/2021/76854

From Gragh: Sieve Diameter Total%

No. (mm) Finer
%Fines= 8.8 4 4.75 100.0
DlO= 0.11 mm 10 2 98.3
D3o= 0.32 mm 20 0.84 82.2
D60= 0.59 mm 40 0.42 44.2
C=
u 5.43 60 0.25 20.8
Cc= 1.54 100 0.15 11.7
140 0.106 9.9
200 0.075 8.8

GRAVEL
SAND
I ~ SILT &
100 I Course! Medium Fine
90 '~
80 - - 1-
70 - - - r- -
C')
60
·-c:
U)
50 - ·- - ·--
r-
U)
C'IS 40 - - 1- - -
a.
~ 30
r- ~
0
20 -t - 1- - - - -
10 1- -
~~ - -
0
100 10 1 0.1 0.01
Diameter (mm)
Soil Classification (USCS): Poorly Graded Sand or Silty Sand, SP-SM
* Note: Please note that standard ASTM D 422 is withdrawn , No replacement
28
APPENDIX - Ill
ATTERBERG'S LIMIT TEST RESULTS
29
SEMATCO SEM-TECH-ABL-REP-1
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co. Version 1.0
Release 1.0
ATTERBERG 'S LIMITS
Job No. : SEM/2021/76854 Date : 28/06/2021
Client : Dar Gulf Consult Sample : BH#1 at 4.0 m depth
Project : AMI RI- GRC BUILDING

Area : Sharq
STANDARD : ASTM D4318
PLASTIC LIMIT NIL

PLASTICITY INDEX NP
LIQUID LIMIT NIL
FLOW CURVE
50
48
46
44
42
~
40
c
1- 36
38
z
w 34
1-
z 32
0 30
u 28
w
0:: 26
::;)
1- 24
1/) 22
0 20
:iE 18
16
14
12
10
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
B LOWS CO UNT, N
Remarks:
*Based on the Atterberg's Limits Test done as per ASTM 04318, the sample is Non-Plastic (NP) .
Test Done By: Mohamed Taha Entered by : Mohamed Taha

Checked by :Eng. Rania Ja'areh
30
SEMATCO SEM-TEC H-ABL-REP-1
Release 1.0
ATTERBERG'S LIMITS
Job No. : SEM/2021/76854 Date : 28/06/2021

Project : AMIRI- GRC BUILDING
Area : Sharq
PLASTIC LIMIT NIL

PLASTICITY INDEX NP
LIQUID LIMIT NIL
FLOW CURVE
50
48
46
44
42
~
40
c 38
1- 36
z
w 34
1-
z 32
0
u 30
w 28
0:: 26
:J
1- 24
(/) 22
0 20
~ 18
16
14
12
10
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
BLOWS COUNT, N
Remarks:
*Based on the Atterberg's Limits Test done as per ASTM 04318, the sample is Non-Plastic (NP).

31
Release 1.0
ATTERBERG'S LIMITS
Job No. : SEM/2021/76854 Date : 28/06/2021

Area : Sharq
PLASTIC LIMIT NIL

PLASTICITY INDEX NP
LIQUID LIMIT NIL
FLOW CURVE
50
48
46
44
42
-?!. 40
38
1-
z 36
w
1-
34
z 32
0 30
u 28
w 26
0::
::> 24
1-
I/) 22
6 20
:E 18
16
14
12
10
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
BLOWS CO UNT, N
Remarks:
*Based on the Atterberg' s Limits Test done as per ASTM 04318, the sample is Non-Plastic (NP).

32
Release 1.0
ATIERBERG'S LIMITS
Job No. : SEM/2021/76854 Date : 28/06/202 1

Project : AMI RI - GRC BUILDING
Area : Sharq
PLASTIC LIMIT NIL

PLASTICID INDEX NP
LIQUID LIMIT NIL
FLOW CURVE
50
48
46
44
42
40
~ 38
1- 36
z
w 34
1-
z 32
0 30
u 28
w
0:: 26
::> 24
1-
1/) 22
0 20
~
18
16
14
12
10
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
BLOWS CO UNT, N
Remarks:
*Based on the Atterberg's Limits Test done as per ASTM 04318, the sample is Non-Plastic (NP).

33
APPENDIX - IV
WATER CONTENT TEST RESULTS
34
SEM·TECH·MCT·REP·l
SEMATCO Version 1.0
Soil Engineering Material Testing Co. W.L.L. Release 1.0
Moisture Content Test

ASTM D 2216
Job No : SEM/2021/76854 Date : 28/06/2021
Cl ient : Dar Gulf Consult No of page : 1/1
Project : AMIRI- GRC BUILDING Done By : Mohamed Taha

Area : Sharq Entered by : Mohamed Taha
Checked By : Eng. Rania Ja'areh
Water
BH No. Depth (m)
Content(%)
1 4.0 5.56
1 8.0 16.77
2 2.0 4.32
2 6.0 9.83
35
APPENDIX - V
DIRECT SHEAR TEST RESULTS
36
SEM-TECH-DST-REP-1
SEMATCO Version 1.0
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Co.W.L.L. Release 1.0
DIRECT SHEAR TEST

(According to ASTM 03080/98)
Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Client : Dar Gulf Consult
Area : Sharq
Page : 1/2
BN NO 1
Depth 4.5m
Sample Type Undisturbed
Initial Moisture Content (%) 8.79
Initial Bulk Density 1.83 gm/cm3
Initial Dry Density 1.68 gm/cm 3
Rate of Horizontal Displacement 0.50 mm/min
115 119.2
234 229.3
469 431.1
Shear Stress Vs Normal Stress

500 ~~--~~--~~--.--.--,--,--.--.--.
450 -I-
400
350 1- - + - - --~
--+---+--t---+/ /- - J . - - 1 - - - j
300 ~---+-+--+-+---f-~L/-f---f--f---f--f---1
250 +--+-+--+-+-~~~ ~-~_,-~~-~_,
200 . _,1r 1-
150 r-- v-+---jl--+v
/ .,.__.
= 0.9 261 + 8 27S
100 -7~1--1--l---!
50 -~~-~-+-+--+-+--+-+--+-+--+~
o /
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
Normal Stress (kPa)
Friction Angle (<D) = 42.38• C = 0 kPa
37
SEM·TECH-DST-REP-1
SEMATCO Version 1.0
DIRECT SHEAR TEST

(According to ASTM D3080/98)
Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Area : Sharq
Page : 2/2
BN NO 1
Depth 4.50m
Initial Moisture Content(%) 8.79
Initial Bulk Density 1.83 gm/cm 3
Initial Dry Density 1.68 gm/cm 3
Rate of Horizontal Displacement : 0.50 mm/min
Stress - Strain Relationship

500
450 - ... ..
·-"' ~
&..> ·-;•·
400
IV 350
0..
~ 300 j
~ -·
-
t/)
I
-
t/)
~
r J)
250
I --- -- -
- -
- r- ~ 115 kPa
..._234 kPa
:; 200
~~
~
Q)
~ 150 469 kPa

~
....
......
... .... .... .... ~
100
50 -~ 1-
0 IJ
P
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Shear Displacement
Test Done by: Mohamed Taha Entered by: :Mohamed Taha

Date 19/06/2021
Checked by Eng. Rania Ja'areh
38
SEM·TECH-DST-REP-1
SEMATCO Version 1.0
DIRECT SHEAR TEST

Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Area : Sharq
Page : 1/2
BN NO 2
Depth 7.5m
Initial Moisture Content(%) 13.65
initial Bulk Density 2.08 gm/cm3
Initial Dry Density 1.83 gm/cm3
Rate of Horizontal Displacement 0.50 mm/min
:. N~rm.:a f$ir~ss:{i<P.af:
.
. .. . .. . .
::$~~~r.:~~r~~s::ci<~a.>.::
. .. . . . .....
115 82.6
234 183.4
469 376.1
Shear Stress Vs Normal Stress

400
350
./
v l--f.-.- -1 -
IV
Q.
300
:. 250 1-
Ill
........
Ill
Qj
200
-- ~
f/)
"'
Qj
.s:.
f/)
150
100
v v~ ,___
=
,____ _ f-- y 0.81 8x _1.7h65
5o - V
0./
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
Normal Stress (kPa)
Friction Angle (<D) = 38.94• C = 0 kPa
39
SEM-TECH-DST-REP-1
SEMATCO Version 1.0
DIRECT SHEAR TEST

Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Area : Sharq
Page : 2/ 2
BN NO 2
Depth 7.5m
Initial Moisture Content (%) 13.65
Initia l Bu lk Density 2.08 gm/cm 3
Initial Dry Density 1.83 gm/cm3
Rate of Horizontal Displacement : 0.50 mm/min
Stress - Strain Relationship

400
~~
,.._..~ ..
350 J ~,.__. -•
~
300
cv
a..
~25 0
I
VI
VI
ll! 200 I -- -- - ...-115 kPa
U5 - ..,II
... I ~ - 234 kPa
~ 150
..c:
(/)
100 1/ 469 kPa
50 ll ~ .......
0 ,V
0 50 100 150 200 250
Shear Displacement
Test Done by: Mohamed Taha Entered by: :Mohamed Taha

Date 28/06/2021
Checked by Eng. Rania Ja'areh
40
APPENDIX -VI
CHEMICAL TEST RESULTS
41
Version : 1.0
Soil and Engineering Material Testing Company WLL
Release : 1.0
Kuwait
Chemical Content Determination for Soil Samples. Release Date:

BS1377,part3,1990
SEM-CHTL- ChSOPH-FRM - 1 1/1/2019
Pa e 1 of 1
Chemical Content Determination for Soil & water Samples

Job No : SEM/2021/76854
Client :Dar Gulf Consult

Area : Sharq
Tested by : M.Taha
Checked by : Ahmed Atta
Date of Test : 3/7/2021
Determination of :
1- Organic matter by Loss on ignition% (BS 1377,part 3,1990)
2- Sulphate content as S0 3-- in mg/L ( BS 1377,part 3,1990)
3- Chloride content as Cl" in mg/L ( BS 1377,part 3,1990)
4- PH Value ( BS 1377,part 3,1990)
Soil Samples :
BH Depth Sulphate Chloride Orqanic PH

as so:\-- cr Matter
No. m mq/L mq/L % Value
1 5.00 2064.86 158.15 0.12 7.88
2 8.00 1721.86 197.51 0.58 7.85
Water Samples :
BH Sulphate Chloride PH
as so~-- C:l -
No. mg/L mg/L Value
1 2627. 38 910.65 7.36
42
APPENDIX - VII
ACI CODE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CONCRETE
43
318/318R-42 CHAPTEK 4
CODE COMlYIENTARY
·4.2 - Fre·ezing ~nd _thawing exposures R4,2- Freezi.Jig and
.
thawing
. . .
exposul'es
. .
4.2.1 - Normalweight and lightweight concrete · · Rit2.1 -A table of req·ulrecl llir cop tents for frost-resistant
exposed to freezing and thawing or deicing chemicals conc.rete is included in the code, based o")1 "Standard ~rae-
shall be air-entrained with air . content indicated in . tice t'ot· Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,
Table (2: 1. Tolerance on E!ir content a§ delivered shall nn-~1 1'11nss ·Concrete'~' (ACl 21 1,'1}.43 Values arc. provided
be ± ·1.5 percent. For··speCified com.pressive strength ·for both. severe and ·mode.rate exposut:l<S d.epel)ditig· on the ·
fc' greater than 5000 psi, reduction of air content indi- expo~ure to ·moisture or de!cing salts. EnlrniiH~d air will _not
cated in Table 4.2:1 by.~ .o percent sti.all be_permhteci. · prct~ct c"!)Jicrete ~ontainiJ1g coarse _aggre~at~~ . that uo~er~o
disi:upti'~e'y~lu~~ changes when frqzen j~ a sat~ rated_con-
diti6o:·Jn Table 4."2.1, n·severe expos~i·e is ·where the con~
TABLE 4.2..1-:TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR FROST-
~t:ete· ii/~ ~cold ;cJimate may_tie in almbst contiJWo.u~_·c ontact .
RESiSTM·J'f. CONCRET.E · . ... ·: . .. . .
. . · with IJ1oistt;r_e p;i~r ." tci· fi"~ziog; or"\Vllere ueicing S<lltS nre
Nom iDa! ffia)(i.mum· Air .content, percent used. Examples · Me. pav.eme.n.ts-."· bridge :decks, sidewalks,
· e_v..:...er..:.e_e-xp-o~s:.;
aggregat.e size, .in.:. 1-:s::: llr:....e....::·:.;.::...M!:.:o....::d:.:e....::ra:.:.te_e..,.ic_po_s_u-re-
prirking garag~. - ~·nci \•tal.er tanks;_ A.mod.erat~ .exposu~e i_s ..
. 3/8 . . . . . 7.5 6
w.here· the concrete"in a-:cOJd cJiJi1ate will be only OCC3SI9ll-
. "'112. . . . .7 . : 5.9 .· aJi}/ei_Pos6d-to im~istu~e.:pi:ior'· t~·. freeiing. and. where "t\o
, ..... . . qdo.ing·.~-~~~~·· aie..·t.i_se9.)~mnpl_es ·ru·e ·c,ertoin_.extei:io~:walls, .·. ··-·.. ·.
·. ., ·. bem:iis
~·,,•-,.:._,· ': .• ~
~irders;·ano
...o. , : ; •,"
$labs n.ot in ..qirect" c·onta~t with s~1l. Sec-·
°
·.· o , ·
0
s.s·
' 0 0 ' ' , , ,• , • • 0 I , '
0
...·. .·:· : : ·' <·.-.·. 4.5 . t~01(4:2.I."p¢rmHs· l·:p~rcent ·lqw~t:.aiJ<cpntet1t "(~r ~con~rete· . , .
0 0
·:. : ..... ?1:,.·~: .• . :'5· . .. . . : 4'<\. ·_ ..:. ·· · with J;~ greai_e( thail .5.Q90 p_si; S_ uch,higl~-s~'~ngtl!• cO:n~rete~ · .., · : ·
·. at ·. . ·.· ··4:5 . · 3~s.: . ~ · .·· wiii : h~ve··· ) Ower ·Wilter~cemen"iitiOllS: matenals ratiqs · and : .·· ..
' · ~ See A$TM C ·33·for tolerance on oversile lor various nq_mlnal maximum poro~ity alid,.Lherefof~, i.~1proved fros~ .re.sistance, . . .
size deslgnations. . . · · ~ · : . · ·. ·. ·· : ·.' ' '.' · · · . · .. .· . . . . . ·. . .. ·.. ~ . .. . . . :-
ot .Thes_e- ~lr~OI)ienls apply 16 total mix, as lor lhe.wecedlng" aggregat~ slz~s.
:.. Whef) testlng _tli.ese. c.oncreles;how~ve r, ~~~g{ega.t~._Ja rger t~an1·1~ in. IS
re!'loved ·by.. ~all~Picklng_ or sieving. and atr ~iltent Is determined on ·the. ··. ·.
mlflUS 1-i/21~;-lractlon of.m~ (toler!IOCB·QO Qlr COfitent asdeiJi{ered applle~ to
-· . ~ .. - ~ - ·-: : :
lh!s value.). A1r content of total mix 1s compuled from. yalue determined"orl th"e , •_ ·; ..
m10us 1-1f21n. fraction. . . .. . . . . · . .
4.2.2 -Concrete t!wr"will be subject to the exposures R4:2:2 - MaxtmUJ~l water-cenie~utious mat~!dal~.rati~ls nrc
given in Tab I~ 4.2.2 sliall conform to the" corresponding not sp~cified .for ligi1tw~ighr aggreg~te conci"ete liec;iUse ;
. maximum· watfir..:ce·mehtitious matedals · ratios and · deterrrii1iation ~f the. absorption of tlie~e aggrcg·a.tes is uncer- ·'
. miniil)wrn . specified concrete com"pr.essive ·strength tain, !)laking caicillation of the·wt~tei'-ce·ti·)ctititiouir ·matet'iuls ~
. requirenieri\s ·ot "ttiat t!l.Pie.· In.addition, concrete. that ratio tJJJCCit~lri." .The t.ise of a :mini;ilfitil i pec.illetl streng-th
.. Will be exposed.to deicing.chemicals· sh~lr ·conform to will eil~ure the "use· of.a. high-qu.~lify. ceiJieiil p;l_Sl~. . For llOF
.. the limila:tions·. 6f 4."2.3. · ·· · · · mttlweinht aooreoate coticrete · use. of. both · JliiniJl)tim
. b . _. 00 . ' ~
.. . - .. . . •
.· . -· .... . .. .strength ant! lllliXiinUlll water-CeJtJiillitiOUS material:; ratiO

:pi:6vitle additipnai as~uranc.e tl)nt (~is. objective is met.
. .TABLE 4.2.2..:....REOUIREMENTS FOR.SPECIAL .. ·: . . .
:~ ~.;. . . : : . . . .- :_ .. : . . ; ·. . .: -.:·
exF>qsu"RE
. . ...
~.<)Noir!or\l.
. ..
s ···,.. . · .. . ...... ..._
. . . . .. ·Maximum wat!li"-:' . Minimum f;{, normal· . •;;

.
..
· c;:~m enti tio us .
materials r!Jtip•, PY weight an·d.lfght·
weight aggregate
r·
·. weight, no!Tl:lalwelghl ~~-
. '. Exposure condition aggregate concrete concrete., ps(
Concrete inlended to ..
f.
i
have tow. per.meabil-
ity when exposed to
water 0.50 4000
Concrete exposed to
·freezing and thawing
in a moist condition or
to deicing chemicals 0.45 . 4500
For corrosion protec·
lion of reinforcement
in concrete exposed
to chlorides from de-
icing chemicals, salt,
salt water, brackish
water, seawater, or
spray from these
.sources. 0.40 5000
~ .When ·bolh
Table 4.3.1 and Table 4.2.2 are constder~d . the lowest apphcable
maximum 1'.1cm and highest applicable minimum lc' shall be used.
AC! 318 Building Code and Commentary .
44
. CODE · COM1Y1ENTARY
.4.2.3 - For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, R4.2.3- Section 4.2.3 and Table 4.2.3 establish limitations
the maximum .weight of fly ash, other po.zzolans, silica . on the amount of fly nsh, ·other pozzolans, ·silica fume, ond
fume, or slag that is include.d in the concrete shall not slag that can be included in concrete exposed to deicing ·
. :,. . exceed _the percentages of the total Weight of. cem·enti- chemicals.4.4-4.6 Recent reseoich .has demonstrated ·that ihe .
lious materials given in Table 4.2.3. · ·use ~f fly ash, slog, and silica fume produce concrete with a
finer pore s.tructure and, therefore, lower penneability. 4·7·4·9
TABL:E 4.2.3-REQU.JREMEN.TS FOR CONCRETE·
'-~-- . - . EXPOSED T~ D.EICiNG CHEMICA.L$
. Maximum percent. ot
· total cementi)lous mate-
~; ·Cemenlitious· maierh;l ls· rials.by \'l~ight·
. Fly ash oi other pozzqJans· coriiorming to : ·· · . .. . . '
. ASTM C 6\8 . · . · · · · . . _. ?5. ·.. .

S~g.conlormi.ng t~· ASTM 9 989 . ·. :_ · 5Q .. ·
~ :. . _su~_·ca.·__r_
ume conforming to ASTM G .~ 24.0 · 1o .
~~.. . ToiRI ollly ash or other pozzolans, slag,
'.· ·.
I . · ,·
ond sillcc;~ fume. .' . • · . · . s ot · .
!olaf _o{ fly ash or'othet pozzol~ns:an~ .sil·
1 I..
.. , · .. :
'· . 1ca !ume . •. . . . . . ·· . · . . : . . 35t · ·· . ·· - :-:· .· . ·.
i!< .~i . The,lolal.c~meDti.li0_\.1; maierlaf ~ISO fnci~de~ AiTrq c 1·5~. c:sgs, c .845, . ·' ..
~!ff · pndCl157ceJ11§lnt: . · -: ··· . . . ·· . · . ·. . · .· ..
61·. · The ma~imum percentage~ above,shelf. ln~lude: . _. -' ·. : :. ',.. . · · .: : •' ·.. .··: ~ ..~ ·. ·. ... -
f ..': .. ,Ia) FJy.ash.o~ olher_ pozzolans. ptes.ent ln'Typ.e.IP or l(PM)·blended cement, ,' .-· .·.- ..
. . . ..
·. . : · , ASTIIlC-59S,orASTM'C·1157;· ...·. ·: ·. ·. . : ·.. · . . . . ' '. . · . ' '.
.. · - ~J) Siag used ln . lh~ ma.nulaelu(e of ~.IS of[(SM) blended:cetrient; ASTM c ·:_..; · - . . .. . .: -~ ... ·-: , ..
'I_ rc!'~~i~.il~~t~~~X~~~ ~7{24o·. pra~~h; ;~ ~bie~ded. c~(Tl~~t.' . :. : . .. . .. ·· . . . : · . ·.
' :!
.. . ...
. ..
;'
1Fly ashpr.olher poz~olans·l!nd·smca lui:nll shall consli.lule·n6 more than 25'

.ftnd 10 perc.~ nt_._ r.~specllvefy; of the tot~f .welght· of lha:cemenlitlous ma_
le'rl!ils. .·,.
·. ·.,
. .. . ·. ·.
· 4.3·....:.:·sulfa_t~. ~xposures' ·· ·· , . : :.
R4-.3 ...:.::sulfate exposures .
·. . ··· : .. ·. ·. . ·. ·. .
; ·.
4.3.1 -Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-cont~ining R4.3·.~ .-··concrete exposed to injuriou~ ~oncentrati~ns: of · · . · . . ··

solt.Hions or soils sha'n conform to; 'ri:iquireiments' of sulfates .from soil.and water should be ·made with n sulfate-
Table 4.3:1. or.·s hall be conc.rete made with. cement ·a r~sistl~g cenierit. Table 4.3:1 lists. tbeapprop1iat~ types..of
.lliat· pro~ides s ulfate r~sist~nce and that'·tias m~i- . a. cement .and the .maximum . water-cen1imtitious rilateripis
mum \;;.,ater-cementi_ti_()l!~ materials .nitici ~h-d rni'nirrnirri .. ratiO$ and.ininimum S~engths ·for.\'8.liOUS·exposu.re. CQndi-
. compressive strength from Table 4.~ ..1: ·. . · : iions. In selectingacem.ent for solfate resistance, tlie'prind-
pai c·Qnslderation·i~.lts · tricalciuni aluminate (C3A) ~onte.nt.
. · . .. ... For m<;>9era·t~· exposures; Type II cement is limited.tci. a max-.
i mu.1i1C) A·6ontc;nt <;>f ~.0. perce1it under AST:M. C 150;. The·
. . ., . . ·1 ~!ended cc.i11.ent~ ui1de;· AST~ C S95 with.the:MS tle~ignn~·
. .· . . .'
. . uon .are ilP,propnate foruse ·m·mqderate. sulfate .exp.ostl.r&s .
The .appropriate _types.. un~~r .ASTM C.595 ;,l:e .I'P{MS);
. . ,, . IS(M_S kf(PM)(MS), .und f (SM)(~S): For s~~ere cx·posul·~s • .
..\
. Type V cement.wiili a maximum C3A content ci(5 percen t:i~ ·
specified~ In cerlaih' areas , the C3A'content. of other avail~
.·. •'
TABLE 4.3.1-REQUIREMENTS FOR .CONCREJE EXPOSEt:i TO SULFATE-CONTAINING

..
SOLUTIONS .
. •
Maximum water-cementi-
Water soluble -sui- ··uous materials ratio, by Minimum f~, normal-.
Sulfate fate (S04) In ~oil , Sulfate (S04) in water, weight, norma1weight weight and lightWeight
exposure percent by weight ppm Cement type aggregate concrete( . aggregate concreie, p'si'
Negligible o.oo s.so4 < 0.10 o sso4 < 150 - - -
II, IP~S), IS(MS); P(MS), ..
Moderatet · o.1o s S04<. o.2o 150 s so4 < 150o I(P )(MS), I(SM)(MS) 0.50 4000
Severe o.2Q s so4 s 2.oo 1soo s so4s 1o,ooo v 0.45 450.0
..
Very severe so4> 2.oo 804 > 10,000 V plus pozzolani
0.45 4500
..
·When both Table 4.3.1 and Table 4.2.2 are considered, the lowest applicable max1mum wtcm and highest applicable m1mmum lc' shall be used.
I Seawater. ·
1Pozzolan lhal has been determined by lest or seiViCe record lo improve sulfate resislance when used in concrele coniaining Type V cement.
ACI 318 Building Code and Commentary
45
CODE· COlY!M~N'lARE
7.7 - Concrete protection for reinforcem¢nt R7 .7- Concrete protection for ~inforce ment
7,7,1 ~Cast-in-place concrete (nonprestressed) Concrete· .c'over as protection of reinfurcement against
wcathCI; amlother ctTcc.;t:; is li1t~t1Sli[Cd l'rom the C!lll~l'ytC sur-
The following minimum concrete cover shali be pr~- face to. the outermost surface of the steel lD wi1ich the cover
vided for reinforcement, but shall not tie less than reguirem~nt applles. Where minimum cover is prescribed
1 requireq by 7.7.5 and 7.7.7: . . .- . for ·a chfss of slructi.tral member, it is·measured to the outc1:.
. ·Minimtim· or
--~-cJge of stirru'ps, ties, sp_irals. j_f lrall.SV¥Se reinforcement
cover, in. enc los~~~ main bars; to the outermoSt Jnyer of bn!'s if inore
· .·than_o11e layer is used wi thout sthn1ps .orli~; or to the me.taf
(a) Con~rete c~stag.ainst and
.· e;1d fi!tlngor duct on post~tensiooed pre~lre.ssing steel,
permanently expos$d to earth ... ;.:·.. ;...... ,.... :....... ;... 3· .
·.· . : . . .. ) . . .
: . ':
·(b) Concrete ·exposed to e·aYth or weather: Th~: COJidili~!l . "cohci"~!e ~urfaceS ·eXprised ' io earth Or .
w·eatii~r" refers to direct·# posu.ni to ·-moisture changes ai1d . _.
No. 6 through No. 18 bars ..:...... ::.: ............. ::. 2 / . ;r!o.d u,st to temperati.J{e "chailg_Cs. Slab orihln sheJI soffiL5 ni:c
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wi re . . .. . not usually considered .directly exposed unless subject to
..-~qHer.:.....,._..-.. :·.._:·· ... ~_:.-:·.:;····:· ;-_ .. ....
.. a nd s_ _ ;.1-112_. alteBiate wetting and dryi_ ng, including ll)at due t_o con~en·-
. . ~ntion cgnclitions .or direct leakag~ frot~ exposed top sur:
.(c) Concrete not exposed to weather.·· . . · .. . . • ·· · ·· · · -
or io co.nta.ct with-ground:·. .._ : _. _·. ··.:· __.· . -_: · ·. · :- fnte,.run_off,o r similar ~ff~i:ts. · . , :-· · · '· ,.. .
- Slabs, walls,·j6!st~: . . .:_·-. ·, . _- ·_ ·. -_ .. ::_/__;_'. -···_AI;~t;nntive m~th~d~ <iP.;.-ot¢c'tiii g u;e:~i~forc~iii~rit.Jh)~ll_· .. _.

. . ·' N9: 14 and No.
1&·bars ..:.-..::·..._.. :; ..:.'.. ~.'i. f-1/ 2 < ·~eatnermay b~,. proyjded_ ~fth_ey at:~:~9.~v._alent_ tt1 ._tbe adtl1: ~:·.-.: : ·
· . .N.o: ·11 bar' and smaller-:. ~..-...... :.::.:..... :.:. _·3i4 . · · ·-tJ.onal·.concreteco'{er:requtred by the ·code. Whe'! approv_~~~ . . -<:
·• · , . · . ·.. . ·. .·· . ·· . :.. . ·. · ·. . .-_ ·. ·_. · by the built.ling cifliciat llntlcr the. provisions ol .1._.4, n:m- · .. ·.
· .Beams, columns: : . . . ·· . . · forcem_ e)1t witbalt~i·native prqtection.ft:om the wenth.~r may ~-
_. ·. Prirna)y (Sil)forcernel:)t,:ties, · :-. . hav~ ~oncrete cover J)Ol'less 'tliaJi the co'vec requ ired for rein-.' .. : .
. ~ ... . .' . Stir~ups, s~frar9· .~ ...~ . ~. ~~- ~; ...~ .::..:.-... ~_.-.:..:·~.; 1:.. 112 fOr_cerilenr-ilot.expos~·d ~Q\.veather. :. ·._ · · : · :·
Shells; folded plate memb-ers; . . . · ·. ·. · .. . · · ·..·; · ·
· · ... :............·:...,.......· ·3/4 .. The qev.elopment iepgtl~ given in Chnpter J2.is now a func- :,:.' ·
No. 6 bar: and 1·arger.:
s
. _·No. bar, W31 or.D;31 wire, ·· · · ·ti6n of the bar' cover. As a result, it may be desir~ble tri usc ~
· · · · ·
:·_ and sm_aller ......................... :................. 1/2 · · . larger
. tl1an miliimum
· cover.in some
· . cases. ~-
·-~'.
7:7.2 ~Cast-in-place ~o.ncret~ (pr~~tress~d) .

Th.e:. t~llo~i~g-- rry.inimum .co~crete \:ave~ shali b e i:>:ro- .
vided . for prestr~ssed and nopprestressed reinforce~ .
ment, dt:icts,:arid end.fittings, ·but shall·riot be less than
.-..
.• \
· _.req\Jired. by·7.7.5,
' ..
·~. . 7.7..5.1,
_.-. . 7.7.7:
arid . . . _,. ., ~
. ·.·
·...· . , , •, . .·· Mjnimum
(a) c ·oricrete cast against and . . ·

permanently exposed to e.arth ...... ::...................·~ ... 3
(b) Conc·rete exposed to earth or weather:
Wall panels, slabs, Joists .. ............:.._.......... :..... 1

Other members ........·...... :......... :.......... ...:.. 1-1/2
(c) Concrete not exposed to

weather or in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists ...................................... 3/4

Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement... ..:..................... 1-1/2
Ties, stirrups, spirals ................................... 1
ACI 318 Buildin g Code and·commentary
46
CODE COMMENTARY
.Shells, folded plate members:
.. No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire,
. : and smaller .... :............:.......... ;...........,..... 3/8 ·
, Other reinforcement .. db but not less than 3/4 ·
:,...:... Precast concrete (manufactured under R7.7.3 - Precast concrete (manufactured under plant
plant control Gonditions) .control conditions)
I m.inimum· COncrete COVer. shall be pro- The .l e~ser c~v~/fuicknes~es: for prec~st cons~ction reflect
prestres~ed and nonprestressed reinforce- . the gr~at~r conveni~nee .of control for proportioning, placing, .
ducts, and end fittings, but shall not be less than · and ·ctirincr
. . b
inherent
.•
in prei::asting
.
... .The term "manufa~tured
d by 7.7.5,7.7.5.1, and 7.7.7: · · · un.der· plant. con.trol ,conditions;' doe:f not specifically im~ly
that' preca~t members"-sbould. be.· manufa~l;ure<f.in a plant. .
Minimum· · Structural ~Jein.e.~ tdirecasq.t ·the. job site will ~so qualify
.cover;in. ·~ridet·.this 'S~cti~n.if the. cqntrol 6! form di.mei#]q~s. placing
oncrete exposed to earth or weather: · of reinf~r~einent, ,quality Cdntro~ of conct:ete, and curing'pro-
cedure ar~ equ.ai to that llOmlally expected in ·a plant... . ·
·Wall panel~:. . . . .
. No:· 14·and No.'r~·bars; prestressin·g . . : · . :coric~ete· to' pieten.sio;i,ed 'strand a:s des~riped j~ this ..
coybr.
· · tendons larger thari 1·.1/2 iri: . · ·. · ·. · · . · · . '~ecticin· it int~ridel to' prin~i(}e ·nlinunum prote~tion against :
:·;:. .d'i~mater·· :·.:.. :....... :.~.~:·~:·: :: ...;...:~.:;·.:.':::;:.:. 1~112 : :.weaiher.~d ptb~retfe~ts.''Such i:o'verinay not b~·stiffidenno ...
· . No. ·1.1-b·?r-.and ·sm~ller, pres-tressing·::. . '· ·, ··transf¢.r.or deyelop the stress ill the strand, and it' may be nee· .
:essaifto Jncreas.etli~·cqver :acebrctingly. · .· · ..... · · ·.. · .. :. ·..:
· tendons 1·1/2'in. diamete'rtind smaller·;, · ·. • '• •• • • '• ,• . • • ••• • • 1
·: · w~.l ~·nt(D.31. wire· a·nd.:s!l1alleir ..:...:.:;.:.. 3/4
:·Other. members:
N_o•.14 and No:.18..bars, prestressing ·. · . . . . : .
. ·.. ·
tendons larger.than 1· 1/2 in. diameter.:.... 2 ·
No. 6.through No. 11. oars, prestressing
ten dons larger than 5/a·in.. diameter ·
. through 1-1/2 in. d[amete'r ..... ;........ :.... 1 ~1/2
. No. 6:b'9-r and"sm~ller, prestressing
. tend.on.s ·s;a in~ diameter and smalier, .. ·
W31 and 031 wire; andsmalier ;; ....... 1-1/4
..··
:nn,,...,,.,.· not exposed to weather
· · contac(with ground:
. ~. ..
Slab~,.walls, joists: . . ..
No...
14 ari·d Na. · 1 ~ ~ars, prestressing ·: :·
tenclcins larger than 1-1/2 in. · · ·
diam.eie'r ... ~ ................·: ....... :....... :......... 1-1/4
Prestr.essing tendons 1 ·1/~ ifl.
di9.meter and smalier .............. :•. :...... :.... 3i4
No. 11 bar and smaller,
W31 or 031 wire, and smaller .............. 5/8
.· · Beams, columns: ·
· ~ rim~ry reinforcement ........ db but not less · .
than 5/8 and need not
· exceed 1-1/2
Ties, stirrups, spirals ............................. 3/8
Shelis, folded plate members:
Prestressing tendons ........... :................ 3/4
No. 6 bar and larger ........ :.................... 5/8
No. 5 bar and smaller,
. W31 or 031 wire, and smaller ........ :...... 3/8
ACI 318 Buil ding Code and Commentary
47
APPENDIX - VIII
BORE HOLE LOCATION PLAN
48
·~
~~ I
I
I
~
z
co
'
l
--
'' '
/ '
? l·
~
U/G Elec. Line
ConcrP.RC
BUILDIN
1838 m2 s]
GBH-2
..
~· :---
!;z
s +
-
I''
- ~ - -~
-----
---=
-- 0=4.60
-----
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this section as indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein, comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials,
and performing all operations in connection with demolition works, and disposal of all
debris to an authorized dump and all useable materials out of the site as Contractor's
property.
B. Perform all the demolition works in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
Determine the extent of demolition, based upon the requirement of the chosen
procedures and method. The work includes the required demolition of structures,
architecture and utilities to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.
C. Perform cutting as per the drawings and as per the statutory regulations in this
regard.
D. In case of conflict with other specified requirement, the most restrictive and costliest
requirement shall govern, to the approval of Engineer.
E. Related sections:
1. All sections as affecting this section and affected by this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. Section includes Demolition works all as shown on the drawings / or as required to

complete the Contract even if not showing in the Drawings.
B. Prior to any demolition:
- Locate and mark positions of services affected by the work.
- Arrange with the appropriate authorities and/or other Contractors for

disconnection at a later stage as specified or as appropriate.
3.02 SCHEDULES & PROCEDURES FOR DEMOLITION & RELATED OPERATIONS ETC.
A. Submit & resubmit till Engineer's approval, schedules & methods to carryout demolition
works, propping & supporting works, for keeping services operative, for installing &
maintaining safety measures, for abating noise, dust and other pollutants, for allowing
operations to continue with minimal hindrance etc.
Gulf Consult Demolition III-2/02 41 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval, shop drawings providing all
details such as locations etc. where the demolition is to be carried out.
C. Contractor shall remain responsible for all works regardless of the Engineer's approval
to any of his schedules & methods.
D. Carryout demolition, without damaging works, equipment and services like telephone,
electrical, mechanical and other services which may not be required to be demolished.
E. Repair / replace damage caused during demolition without any extra cost to the
Employer.
F. Reinforcement required at drilled location shall be executed in correct procedure and as

per Engineer’s instruction.
G. Take all steps to keep noise to an absolute minimum.
3.03 SAFETY AND NUISANCE
A. The following duties shall be performed by the Contractor to protect persons and
properties and avoid nuisance.
B. When demolishing structures against adjoining property or structures provide

adequate support and protection at each stage.
C. Cover and protect all dangerous openings as necessary.
D. Ensure adequate precautions to prevent fire or explosion caused by gas, vapour or

flammable substances.
E. Reduce dust by providing temporary dust-proof screens as required or as instructed by

the Engineer.
F. Demolition activities shall be performed in such a manner so as not to disturb the

structural stability of the existing structures and the newly built structures.
3.04 DISPOSAL
A. Debris and rubbish arising from demolition shall include removal from the site to the
dumping areas selected by the Contractor and approved by the Municipality.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Clean up all areas on a regularly scheduled basis or whenever deemed necessary by

the Engineer, as well as upon completion of the work.
B. Remove waste materials daily. This work shall be incidental to all other work, and no
additional compensation shall be paid for it.
C. Protect all existing facilities not required to be demolished.
D. Keep the road surfaces, all access areas etc. clean during the execution of works.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Demolition III-2/02 41 00 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 02 52 18
HYDROGEN SULPHIDE TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Tenderer must make his own full enquires as to the nature of the ground and the
sub soil conditions and take all necessary steps to deal with these as per the
regulations and requirements of all statutory authorities having jurisdiction particularly
the Environment Public Authority – State of Kuwait which he should obtain, study and
allow for in his Tender price.
B. This Section specifies general requirements for control of ground water and includes,
but is not limited to, the following:
1. General Requirements
2. Qualified Personnel
3. Monitoring
4. Contractor’s Responsibilities
5. Submittals
6. Tests
C. Related sections
The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work of other sections with the
1. Section 31 23 19 - Dewatering
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Dewatering operations shall comply with the following references, unless otherwise
specified or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. CIRIA Report 113 - Control of groundwater for temporary works.
A. Install Environment Public Authority approved system of a capacity to treat hydrogen

suphide from level found through to the EPA acceptable level, through approved
equipment.
B. All water must be removed in a manner to avoid damage to property and minimize
nuisance or menace to the public and in compliance with all rules and regulations of
the EPA, the MPW and municipality.
Gulf Consult Hydrogen Sulphide Treatment III-2/02 52 18 - 1

20th October 2021
1. Dewatering system and contaminated water treatment system shall be

designed and operated to prevent emission of H2S gas or solution into the
environment at levels acceptable to the rules and regulations of the EPA.
2. The Contractor shall treat the contaminated water prior to discharge so that it
is in compliance with EPA Standards and requirements.
3. The treated water shall be discharged into a storm water drainage system
that has been approved by the Ministry of Public Works.
4. All water discharge shall be properly treated so that it is safe and harmless to
the marine life.
5. The Contractor shall continuously monitor the atmosphere at the project site
when H2S is present in the ground water to ensure that EPA regulations are
met.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Method Statement
1. Submit method statement for treatment of H2S and/or other contaminants.

Contractor shall include in the Tender all cost for treatment including, but not
limited to, treatment works, power, chemicals and labor.
1.05 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor must provide experienced, qualified personnel to perform the

treatment operations.
1.06 MONITORING
A. Where required to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a specified

number of monitoring stations as required by EPA for the area of this project, at site,
which will be observed during the work.
B. These shall be located as directed by the Engineer.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall be deemed to visit the Site prior to submitting his Tender and to
have made all necessary inspections and investigations and allowed in his Tender for
the following:
1. Presence of H2S and other contaminants in the groundwater.
1.08 TESTS
A. The Contractor shall conduct a Hydrogen Sulphide Study of the content of (H2S) in
the underground water. He shall obtain the information about acceptable levels of the
same as desired by the Environmental Public Authority – State of Kuwait.
B. All the tests shall be tested at Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research (KISR) or any
other laboratory approved by the Engineer.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. All treatment shall be performed as per the latest EPA regulations.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 3
Concrete
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and services necessary to complete but not limited to the following:
1. Perform all operations in connection with the formwork for cast-in place
concrete, with propping, bracing, and anchorage; openings for other work;
form accessories; and form stripping.
2. Products Installed but not furnished under this section.
3. The responsibility for the design, fabrication, erection, striking, safety and
adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest entirely with the Contractor.
1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement
2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction

and Materials.
2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
B. American Forest and Paper Association:
1. AF&PA - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.
C. The Engineered Wood Association:
1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood.
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials:
Gulf Consult Concrete Forms and Accessories III-2/03 10 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
2. ASTM D 1599 – Standard Specifications for Machine Made Fiber Glass

Flanges Test Method
3. ASTM D 5685 – Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic Pressure

Design for Fiber Glass
4. ASTM E 119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
5. ASTM C 873 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete

Cylinders Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds.
6. ASTM C 803 – Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of

Hardened Concrete.
7. ASTM C 1074 – Standard Method for Estimating Concrete Strength by the

Maturity Method.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL 263 – Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, ACI 318.
B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with applicable
provisions of AF&PA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.
C. Formwork design and construction shall be executed and supervised by fully qualified
personnel having a minimum of five years’ experience on similar sized projects.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures are

required
1. Submit samples, design & shop drawings as listed below:
2. Samples and Information
a. Materials proposed for use in formwork.
b. Ties proposed for use in the following situations:
i. Water retaining structures
ii. Above water table in general situations
iii. In fair faced concrete.

20th October 2021
3. Design and Shop Drawings
a. Submit shop drawings of formwork design, including plans and

sections, giving the following minimum information for each level:
i. Location of joints for plywood facing
ii. Position, size and spacing of adjustable steel props.
iii. Position, size and spacing of soldiers, ties and the like.
iv. Details of formwork for columns, beams, parapets, slabs and

kickers.
v. Details of formwork for column, beam junctions.
vi. Details of construction and expansion joints.
vii. General assembly details.
viii. Full calculation sheets.
ix. Details at the penetrations through concrete
x. Proposed sequence of de-propping beams and slabs for

different spans and floor heights and number of floor heights
and number of floors propped, and the striking time for
supported and suspended structural elements, clearly
identifying the supported element and suspended element.
b. Scales of shop drawings:
i. Details 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20.
ii. Construction 1:50, 1:100.
iii. Layout and Site Plan 1:100 or 1:200
c. Should proprietary form system be proposed to be used, there

should be no mix up of two or more systems.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. All formwork systems including proprietary/prefabricated formwork shall be properly

designed to meet the duty imposed on it.
B. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and
other defects.
C. Design shall take into account:
1. Height of pour
2. Thickness of member
3. Rate of pour
4. Concrete slump

20th October 2021
5. Placing temperature
6. Texture of finish
7. Concrete density
8. Construction joints
9. Wind load
10. On soffit forms (in addition to concrete weight)
a. An additional live load of 2.5 KN/sq.m,
OR
b. If a motorized cart is used, an additional live load of 3.75 KN/sq.m.
11. Minimum design load for combined dead and live load:
a. 6.50 KN/sq.m.
b. If a motorized cart is used, 7.75 KN/sq.m.
12. The worst combination of:
a. Self-weight
b. Formwork forces
c. Reinforcement weight
d. Wet concrete weight
e. Construction loads
f. Wind loads
g. Incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting

concrete.
h. The use of externally applied vibrators.
13. Methods of concrete discharge.
14. Different types of Cement, use of pozzolanic materials and use of retarders
and other admixtures, affect the setting time and prolong the time concrete
remains wet. This should be considered in design as per ACI 347.
D. Design formwork to be:
1. Sufficiently rigid to maintain the correct position shape and profile so that the
final concrete structure is within the dimensional tolerance specified in ACI-301,
Chapter 4.
2. Demountable without shock, disturbance or damage to concrete. Soffit

formwork, properly supported on props only, shall be capable of being
retained in position during concrete maturing period.

20th October 2021
E. Adjustable steel supports and props shall allow form-boards and framework to be
accurately adjusted to line and level. Design shall allow free movement and accessibility
under formwork.
F. Props for abnormal ceiling heights shall be specially designed.
1.06 MOCK-UP, IF REQUIRED
A. Construct mockup, in size as required by the Engineer including form accessories.
B. Locate where directed by Engineer.
C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
B. If used, deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of

components to formwork.
B. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover

over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS
A. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use good quality, locally available (concrete
form) wood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm thick. Before reusing forms,
withdraw nails and thoroughly clean surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
B. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use good quality, exterior Coated Type
locally available, Grade A-B plywood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm
thick OR density (60-60) overlay ply-form, Class 1 EXTDFPA, sanded grade trade
marked by the American plywood Association having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre
overlay on both sides, minimum 19 mm thick and constructed so that finished
concrete will be straight, smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges, or
depressions. Keep joints between plywood sections to a minimum and make tight
and strongly backed so that adjoining edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint
marks will not be permitted. Cover joints on exposed surfaces with smooth-faced fibre
reinforced tape or other equal and approved of a proprietary brand to be approved by
the Engineer.
C. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the
manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations are followed and the system
has been approved by the Engineer. Joints between sections of prefabricated forms shall
be taped unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and provided always, in
the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and mortar-tight to the Engineer's
approval.
D. For all exposed white concrete surfaces other than exposed aggregates, use
fiberglass lining in the formwork system (e.g. where custom fiberglass formwork is

20th October 2021
specified in drawing). To ensure the intended smooth finish, Contractor to submit

mock-up and details of the fiber glass lining including joints, chamfers, form release
etc. for Engineer’s approval.
2.02 FORM TIES:
A. Factory fabricated adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form tie designed to
prevent form deflection. Use snap off ties for water retaining structures.
B. For surfaces exposed in finished work use tie screws with removable plastic cones,
removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or Series 300 stainless steel snap
ties.
C. For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used. Use ties of such type that when
forms are removed, no metal is closer than 40 mm from the finished concrete surface.
2.03 FILLET AND CHAMFER MOULDING STRIPS:
A. PVC or timber to the approval of the Engineer.
2.04 TAPES:
A. Tapes for sealing joints of formwork panels for smooth finished concrete shall be
plastic faced adhesive type to the approval of the Engineer.
2.05 FORM COATING:
A. Kuwait National Petroleum Company product of a type which does not impart any
stain to concrete nor interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, or
waterproofing material applied to concrete surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions
with Drawings.
B. Execute formwork so that no discernible imperfection is in evidence in finished

concrete surface due to deformation, bulging, jointing or leakage of forms.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Formwork - General:
1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical
to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated
that top forms can be omitted.
2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and

of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads
from construction operations.
3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless

otherwise shown on Drawings.
4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned

or misplaced forms before placing concrete.

20th October 2021
5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete.
B. Forms for “Smooth Finish” Concrete:
1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms.
2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free
from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish.
3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets
without springing into place.
4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible.
5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.
6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges.
7. Level and continue horizontal joints.
8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped.
C. Framing, Studding and Bracing:
1. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient

strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from
construction operations.
2. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected.
3. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or

accidental impact.
D. Erect formwork, propping and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance

with requirements of ACI 301.
E. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage
concrete during stripping.
F. Obtain Engineer’s Representative’s approval before framing openings in structural

members that are not indicated on Drawings.
G. Install fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns etc.
H. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Install products related to other sections like sleeves, conduits etc. as per approved
drawings.
3.03 APPLICATION - FORM COATING
A. Apply form coating on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded

items.
C. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

20th October 2021
D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating
before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or
edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. General:
1. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings,

slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and
components of other Work.
B. Form Ties:
1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms.
2. Place ties at least 25 mm away from finished surface of concrete.
3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped.
4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and

horizontally unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
C. Arrangement:
1. Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form

removal without damage to concrete.
D. Construction Joints:
1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed

surfaces to provide straight line at joints.
2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms
to conceal shrinkage.
3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same

appearance as butted plywood joints.
4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp.
E. Embedded Items:
1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots,
nailers, water stops, and other features.
2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete.
3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished

under other Specification sections.
4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to

placing concrete.
5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet
requirements of ACI 318, Section 6.3.

20th October 2021
F. Water stops
1. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal

joints watertight.
G. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete:
1. Frame openings in concrete where shown on Drawings. Establish exact

locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment
of work specified under other sections.
2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement.
3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as a result of failure to

provide required openings.
H. Supports for Leveling Screeds
1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor barrier membranes, use
cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane.
2. Staking through membrane will not be permitted.
I. Cleanouts and Access Panels:
1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to

permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste
material.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Notify Engineer’s Representative for inspection of erected formwork, propping, and

bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports,
fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Notify Engineer’s Representative after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but

prior to placing concrete.
C. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete.
3.06 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure
that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
3.07 STRIKING
A. Forms for beams shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side without
shock to the partially set concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion of the
form or its supports.
B. Where finished surfaces have re-entrant angles, remove formwork as early as

possible to avoid shrinkage cracks.

20th October 2021
C. Where re-propping is required to implement early striking whilst minimizing sag or

creep, the capacity and spacing of such props shall be adequate for the purpose and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative and shall be carried out
immediately after striking the original formwork.
D. Subject to the attaining of at least 75% of the specified strength and subject to wet
curing arrangements prior to striking of formwork, the minimum periods before
striking formwork are as follows:
1. To columns and walls 24-48 hours*

2. To soffits of slab up to 3m clear span 8 days
3. To soffits of slabs over 3m clear span 12 days
4. To soffits of slabs joints 12 days
5. Props to slabs 15 days
6. Props to beams 21 days
The periods above are to be considered after the day of casting.
* Depending on the temperature and as per approval of Engineer.
E. Mass concrete, concrete made with type II or type V cements, concrete containing
pozzolanic materials, concrete containing ice for hot weather concreting and concrete
containing retarders or other admixtures that affect setting, may require longer
periods before formwork striking.
F. Evaluation of concrete strength may be achieved by field cured cylinders or other

methods approved by the Engineers, such as:
- Test of cast in place cylinders, ASTM C 873, for slabs and beams with depth
less than 300mm.
- Penetration resistance, ASTM C 803
- Pullout strength, ASTM C 900
- Maturity factor measurement, ASTM C 1074
G. Shores and re-shores or backshores should be designed to carry all loads

transmitted to them. A rational analysis should be used to determine the number of
floors to be shored, re-shored, or back-shored and to determine the loads transmitted
to the floors, shores, and re-shores or backshores as a result of the construction
sequence. Load cells can be placed under selected shores to monitor actual shore
loads to guide the shoring and re-shoring during construction, ACI 347.
3.08 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
B. Tolerances: Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces within

construction tolerances specified in ACI 117.
C. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoist-way in accordance with ASME A17.1.
D. Camber slabs and beams 2 mm in accordance with ACI 301.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this Section consists of furnishing labor, materials, plant,
equipment and services necessary to perform all operations but not limited to the
following:
1. All operations in connection with reinforcing steel bars, welded wire fabric
and Accessories.
1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forms and Accessories
1.02 REFERENCE
1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
3. ACI 318M - Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
4. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.
5. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
6. ACI 309R – Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
7. ACI 308.1 – Specification for Curing Concrete
8. ACI 117 – Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials and Commentary.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel

Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,

Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.
Gulf Consult Concrete Reinforcement III-2/03 20 00 - 1

20th October 2021
4. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
5. ASTM A616/A616M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and

Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
6. ASTM A617/A617M - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and

Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
7. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Carbon Steel Wire.
8. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or

Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
9. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed

and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

11. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn steel wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
12. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
13. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing

Steel Bars.
14. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire

and Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement.
15. ASTM A934/A934M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated

Steel Reinforcing Bars.
16. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite

Handling of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
C. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:
1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, ACI 318M, ACI 315 and ACI SP-
66.
1.04 CO-ORDINATION
A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.

20th October 2021
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Before any order is placed by the Contractor, he shall notify the Engineer’s
Representative of the prime source of supply where the reinforcement is drawn or
rolled. The Contractor shall ensure that all steel delivered to the site shall come from
the source accepted by the Engineer’s Representative. Merchants and stockholders
will not be an acceptable source unless it can be shown to the satisfaction of the
Engineer’s Representative that the whole of the reinforcement applied to the Contract
complies with this Specification.
B. All batches of reinforcement in which unacceptable material has been mixed with
acceptable material shall be rejected and shall be removed from the site forthwith.
C. Reinforcement shall be protected at all times from contamination and corrosion from
the ground and atmosphere during all storage, bending and handling operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with ASTM A615 Grade 60
deformation having a characteristic strength not less than 4200 Kg/cm2.
Should bars of less than the specified diameter be allowed to be used, then the total
area of such bars placed shall be equal to or more than the area of the actual number
of bars shown in the drawings.
B. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 with minimum
yield strength of 5000 kg/cm2.
C. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting,

transporting, storing and placing at the Site.
D. Epoxy coated bars, if approved by the Engineer, should follow ACI 315 and ASTM A
775 requirements. Design Provisions for Epoxy coated bars in ACI 318 should be
followed.
E. For cooling towers, sacrificial zinc anodes should be attached to steel reinforcements
to reduce corrosion. The anode consists of a block of zinc in a mortar and is
connected to bars by wires. Follow manufacturer recommendations regarding
distribution and installation. Materials and manufacturers include:
1. Renderoc Galvashield XP (Fosroc)
2. Sika Galvashield XP+ (Sika)
3. Emaco Cp Intact Galvanic ANODES (BASF)
2.02 SPACER BLOCKS ETC.
A. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used for support of the bottom layer of
reinforcing in the foundations and slab on grade only. The blocks shall be of minimum
size and made from cement, sand and small aggregate mix to match surrounding
concrete strength, and durability.
B. Other spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to
corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover. The
acceptable types of spacers are:

20th October 2021
1. High density plastic, or
2. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet
3. Stainless steel.
2.03 TIE WIRE
A. Shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 20 B.W. gauge 3 to 4 strands held
together as per the diameter of the re-bar and to the approval of the Engineer’s
Representative or approved fasteners, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
2.04 COUPLING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Splicing of reinforcement bars shall preferably be done with mechanical couplers.

Couplers shall be sourced only from reliable suppliers approved by the Engineer.
These couplers shall be isometric parallel-threaded type in the case of preplanned
splices.
B. Mechanical splices shall be (type 2) complying with ACI-318, Article 21.1.6 and
12.14.3 developing the specified tension capacity of the rebar. Suppliers should
provide the following tests to certify that couplers are type 2:
• Static tension test
• Static compression test
• Cyclic tension & compression tests
The coupler itself shall not break or fracture during the test.
C. Quality Control: Manufacturers of couplers shall be registered members of the

CARES quality assurance scheme or The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME). The quality control management system should be audited and certified by
an internationally recognized agency which provides International Accreditation
Service (IAS). Suppliers who fail to provide such accreditation shall be rejected.
D. Threading quality control gages should be available in the threading workshop

location. Those gages are used to:
• control the threads pitches size/threads profile
• active thread length
This is to guarantee consistency of threads and reliability of the joint produced.
No production of threads is permitted without threading quality control manual is

submitted and quality control tools are provided.
E. Full traceability is required for the couplers. Traceability shall guarantee tracing of
production batches and raw materials of the couplers. Each coupler should be
marked with traceability number which is relevant to the mill test certificate provided.
F. Certificate of Compliance must be submitted for the Engineer for each couplers batch
delivered to the site.
G. Preparation of the test samples should be in compliance with ASTM A1034/ A 1034
M. Mill test certificates for the tested couplers shall be provided prior to the test based

20th October 2021
on the traceability marking. All mechanical properties, manufacturer & product’s

name and traceability number shall be documented.
2.05 TESTING OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL
A. Tests will be required by the Engineer’s Representative on steel reinforcement and

they shall be carried out in strict accordance with the provisions of the relevant
standards at a laboratory approved by Engineer’s Representative.
B. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain
curve will be required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also
be required of cross-sectional area and deformation/ bond characteristics of deformed
bars.
C. The Contractor is to allow for tensile and bond tests, at his own cost, for each source
as well as for each batch delivered at site; for each size of bar to be used in the
concrete construction.
D. Test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer’s Representative
three (3) weeks before concrete work commences on Site. Further tests will be
carried out at the discretion of the Engineer’s Representative from time to time.
E. When any test results do not conform to the relevant standard the reinforcement steel
shall be removed from the Site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial
work shall also be borne by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall supply and incorporate in the work all such steel reinforcement
including tie wire, support and spacer bars and the like whether shown or not shown
on the drawings which are necessary to complete the work, all to the satisfaction of
B. The Contractor shall check his bending schedules against the latest drawings and
any discrepancy must be immediately referred to the Engineer’s Representative. The
Contractor is responsible for ordering all materials required to complete the job
according to normal good practice and to the approval of the Engineer.
C. All reinforcement will be properly stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground,
moisture, dust and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage
will be sufficient cause for rejection of reinforcement.
D. All steel, before being placed in position, shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose rust,
scale and any other coating that will destroy or reduce bond. If reinforcement has
been badly rusted or pitted it will be rejected. Mechanical brushes shall be used in
cleaning the steel bars.
E. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after the placement of the reinforcement,
the Contractor shall restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory condition before
concreting.
F. Ends of bars which are to be left projecting for any period exceeding 2 weeks shall be
painted with a heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to
continuation of concreting.

20th October 2021
G. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the allowable
tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 318.
H. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be used in the
work.
I. Epoxy coated bars, if approved by the engineer, should be handled with care to avoid
scratching. Scratched bars will increase corrosion risks.
3.02 CUTTING AND BENDING
A. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the contract drawings or
the approved shop drawing/bar bending schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing
the corresponding bar number as shown on the relevant Bar Bending Schedule.
B. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with ACI 315 & ACI SP-66
C. Reinforcement projecting from concrete shall not be bent without prior written
approval from the Engineer’s Representative.
Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be

taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in ACI SP-66.
D. No welding (including spot welding) will be permitted unless specifically shown on the
Drawings.
3.03 SPLICES
A. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall be as shown
on the Drawings.
B. Splices are to be staggered to the approval of the Engineer’s Representative, and the
fabric is to be securely tied layer to layer.
C. Bars shall have minimum anchorage and lap lengths in accordance with ACI 318
requirements unless otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents.
3.04 ERECTION
A. Give the Engineer’s Representative at least 24 hours notice before commencing

fixing reinforcement to allow inspection of formwork.
B. Ensure that spaces to receive reinforcement are clean and free from debris.
C. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place
to prevent displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure that the protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings
is obtained by the use of approved plastic tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement
and cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be securely tied together at
every alternate intersection, or as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
D. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 5, Para. 5.5. Reinforcement to be secured
against displacement outside the specified limits unless specified otherwise. All cover
shall be clear.
E. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on the Drawings, together with such other
supports as may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its
correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links,

20th October 2021
spacers between the links and formwork shall be of the same dimension as the
nominal cover. Spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not
lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover.
Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with

steel wire, tying devices or by welding. Care should be taken to ensure that the
projecting ends of ties or clips do not encroach into concrete cover.
The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting,

particular attention being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever
sections.
F. Surface Condition of Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by

concrete unless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose rust, loose mill scale,
grease or any other substance which may adversely affect the steel or concrete
chemically or reduce the bond.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
specified herein, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, plant, equipment and
services necessary to complete but not limited to the following:
1. Perform all operations in connection with cast-in-place concrete
2. This Specification Section shall govern all Cast- in-place concrete work for
the complete contract except where more stringent or specialised
requirements are indicated elsewhere. All work shall be performed to secure
for the entire contract homogeneous concrete having the required strength,
surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without
planes of weakness or other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air
pockets, voids, projections, offsets of plane and other defacements of
concrete.
3. Section 03 41 00 - Structure Pre-Cast Concrete
4. Section 03 60 00 - Grouting
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, of their latest publications:
1. ACI 301M - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2. ACI 303 - Guide to Cast-in- Place Architectural

Concrete Practice
3. ACI 305.1 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting

and ACI 305R Guide to Hot Weather
Concreting.
4. ACI 308R Guide to Curing of Concrete and 308.1for

standard specifications for hot weather
concreting.
5. ACI 318M - Metric Building Code Requirements for

Structural Concrete.
6. ACI 116R - Cement and Concrete Terminology
Gulf Consult Cast in Place Concrete III-2/03 30 00 - 1

20th October 2021
7. ACI 211 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions

for Normal Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
8. ACI 207.1R - Guide to Mass Concreting.
9. ACI207.2R - Effect of Restraint, Volume Change, and

Reinforcement on Cracking of Mass
Concrete
10. ACI 207.4R - Cooling and Insulation Systems for mass

Concrete
11. ACI 304 - Guide for measuring, mixing, Transporting

and Placing Concrete
12. ACI 214R - Evaluation of strength Test Results of

Concrete.
13. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete

Reinforcement.
14. ACI 546 - Concrete Repair Guide
15. ACI 562 - Code Requirements For assessment,

Repair, and Rehabilitation of concrete
buildings and Commentary.
16. ACI 211.4R - Guide for selecting Proportions for High

Strength Concrete using Portland Cement
and other Cementitious materials
17. ACI 363.2R - Guide to Quality Control and Testing of High

– Strength Concrete.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials: Latest Editions to be referred to:
1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes.
2. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates.
4. ASTM C42/C42M - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and

Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete.
5. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed

Concrete
6. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield

and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
7. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic Cement Concrete

20th October 2021
8. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland cement.
9. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials

for Curing Concrete.
10. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly

Mixed Concrete
11. ASTM C192/C192M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
12. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining

Admixtures for Concrete.
13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Concrete.
14. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic

Cements.
15. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and
Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Portland cement
Concrete.
16. ASTM C1017/ C 1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete.
17. ASTM C1064/ C 1064M - Standard Test Methods for Temperature of

Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete
18. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,

Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink).
19. ASTM C1218/ C 1218M - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble

Chloride in Mortar and Concrete
20. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed

Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Non-extruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types).
21. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed

Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
22. ASTM C114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical

Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
23. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Transmission of Materials
24. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground
Cover

20th October 2021
25. ASTM C 88 - Test on Soundness of Aggregate Using

Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
26. ASTM C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-

Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
27. ASTM C 125 - Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete

and Concrete Aggregates
28. ASTM C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and
Friable Particles in Aggregates
29. ASTM C 295 - Standard Guide for Petrographic

Examination of Aggregates for Concrete
30. ASTM C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities

in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
31. ASTM C 117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer

than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
32. ASTM C 989 - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for

Use in Concrete and Mortars
33. ASTM C 1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used

in Cementations Mixtures
34. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and

Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
35. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded

Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
36. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
37. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of

Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
38. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
39. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design,

Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor
Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs
40. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for

Integrally Colored Concrete.
41. ASTM E1745 - Specification for Water Vapor Retarders

Used In Contact with Soils or Granular fill
under Concrete Slabs.

20th October 2021
42. ASTM C1582 - Standard Specification for Admixtures to

Inhibit Chloride-Induced Corrosion of
Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
43. ASTM G109 - Standard Test Method for Determining

Effects of Chemical Admixtures on Corrosion
of Embedded Steel Reinforcement in
Concrete Exposed to Chloride Environments
44. STM 1611/C1611M - Standard Test method for Slump Flow of

Self-consolidating concrete.
C. Others:
1. CRSI-WCRSI : Placing Reinforcing Bars
2. AWS D1.4 : Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel
3. International Building Code (IBC) 2018 edition
4. KSS 94/2002 Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Water/cement ratio: The ratio of water to cementitious material in a mix, expressed as

a decimal number. Water being that which is free to combine with cementitious
material, including free water in aggregate but excluding that absorbed by aggregate.
B. Hot weather: A shade air temperature of 35 Deg.C or above.
C. Mass Concrete:: Mass concrete is defined in ACI 207.1R- and ACI 116R as “any
volume of concrete with dimensions large enough to require that measures be taken
to cope with generation of heat from hydration of the cement and attendant volume
change to minimize cracking.” For this project raft foundation, slabs on grade and
other structures with width or depth equals or exceeding (1) m are considered mass
concrete structures.
D. High Strength Concrete: Concrete that has a specified cube compressive strength
greater than 550 kg/cm2 (44MPa cylinder strength)
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Supervisory Staff: The Contractor shall provide details of his supervisory staff and
supervisors for the approval of the Engineer before commencement of Concrete
Work:
The Engineer retains the right to reject any Supervisory Staff who in his opinion do
not have sufficient experience for the requirements of the Contract.
The supervisory staff including the Site Engineer shall be present on site at all times
when concrete work is being carried out
B. Testing Authority: All Tests required and/or specified herein and/or elsewhere shall
be carried out at the Site Laboratory or at the State Research Station Laboratories –
MPW (MPW Laboratory) or other approved Agency.

20th October 2021
C. Preliminary Test (Trial Tests)
1. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, unless
specified otherwise, make preliminary tests and prepare engineering detail
mixes, in accordance with ACI-301 and ACI 211 at the site/MPW/other
approved laboratory. Number of trial test specimens for each mix engineering
detail should be large enough to allow for testing at 3,7,14, 28, 56 and 90
days (3 specimens each time are recommended).
2. Slump/Slump flow tests should be run at time intervals 0, 30,60,90 and 120
Minutes to show loss of slump/slump flow with time.
3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make

one test for each engineering detail mix to verify that the total Chloride (Cl)
Ion content and the total Sulphate (SO3) content of each mix is within the
specified limits as in ACI 318 and ACI 301. Perform Chloride tests in
accordance with ASTM C1218. Perform Sulphate (SO3) tests in accordance
with ASTM C114 and ASTM C33. Verify that the total chloride ion and sulfate
content of each mix is within the specified limits.
4. Test cylinder - specimens of concrete to verify strength as per ACI 318, ACI
214 and other related ACI specifications. Standard cubes may also be used.
Since there is a variation between the strength of Cylinder and cube, and the
strength of Cylinder is fairly lower than that of Cube, for normal concrete
Cylinder strength shall be taken as 0.8 of the corresponding cube strength.
Cubes should be 150mm and specimens should be prepared according B.S.
1881. Acceptance will be based on cylinder strength (or converted cube
strength) as per ACI 318 and other ACI specifications. In case of
discrepancies or disputes, actual cylinder strength will be considered.
5. Verify for air content in accordance with ASTM C231.
6. Whenever a change of brand or source for any of the concrete ingredients

occurs, additional “preliminary tests” will be required and the cost of these
tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
D. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection
Ready mixed concrete plant should have valid certificate from National Ready Mixed
Concrete Association (NRMCA).
1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests at the plant and
in the field. Notify the Engineer one day in advance of concrete work
inspections and tests. Sampling of concrete taken from the job will be carried
out under the direction of the Engineer. Likewise the conducting of tests
carried out by the Contractor in the testing laboratory shall be under the
direction of the Engineer’s Representative.
2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with ACI/ASTM standards.
3. When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified
in ACI/ASTM, i.e.:
a. characteristic compressive strength.
b. specified mix proportions.
c. minimum or maximum cement content.

20th October 2021
d. maximum free-water/cementitious material ratio.
e. workability.
f. air content of concrete.
g. temperature of fresh concrete.
h. density of fully compacted concrete.
i. Any required tests to demonstrate compliance with the performance

requirements
4. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or as directed by the

Engineer. The cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
5. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labour and material as required.

Notify the Engineer when reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any
inspection he deems necessary. Submit checking sheets before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete until these inspections have been completed
and all deficiencies reported by the Engineer have been corrected to the
Engineer’s Representative satisfaction.
6. Supply all moulds required for tests as described below, using moulds of the
same type and manufacturer for making all test specimens. If field tests show
excessive slumps or other violations of the Contract Documents, the entire
batch of concrete from which the sample in question was taken will be
rejected and shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. The
Engineer will inspect all concrete operations in the plant and in the field.
7. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall
be accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to checking by the
Engineer at the plant and which shall contain the following information:
a. The type and strength of the mix of concrete being delivered.
b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the
delivery truck. If upon reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed
within the time limits stated, or if the type of concrete delivered is
incorrect, the Engineer will reject the load and it shall be removed
from the site at the Contractor's expense.
c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.
8. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer’s, the Contractor will take
specimens as per ASTM C172. Frequency and procedure of tests should
follow ACI 301 and ACI 318.
a. Testing shall conform to ASTM C31 in making, curing and

subsequently handling test specimens, except as modified herein.
Specimens shall be engraved with the date of placing and the serial
number of the Specimen plus a universal serial number representing
the number of the pour.
b. The Specimen shall be placed under moist curing conditions at

approximately 21 Deg. C within 24 hours after molding and
maintained therein until ready for testing.

20th October 2021
To Determine the compressive strengths a total of 8 (Eight)

specimens comprising of the following break ups, shall be collected
for every One hundred meter cube of each class of Concrete.
For 7 days Curing Strength Test = 3 Samples
For 28 days Curing Strength Test = 3 Samples
Reserved = 2 Samples
_________________________________________________
Total = 8 Samples per 100 m3
The specimen number shall be six (6) instead of 8 if the Concrete

volume is a fraction of 100 m3
For 56 days and 90 days curing strength tests of high strength

concrete take additional 3 specimen for each testing age.
c. Slump/Slump Flow will be carried out in accordance with ASTM

C143/ASTM C1611.
d. A minimum of one (1) Slump/Slump Flow test will be performed from

each concrete transit mixer.
e. Unless approved by the Engineer, the maximum allowable slump will

be 200 mm, if super plasticizer has been added.
For high strength concrete minimum allowable slump flow (without

segregation) will be 550mm
f. Two unit weight and yield tests : ASTM C138.
9. Whenever instructed by the Engineer then under the supervision and

direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens of each class of
concrete to Site/MPW or other approved laboratory and perform test to verify
that the total Chloride ion content and the total Sulphate content are each
within the specified limits. As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in
no event more than 24 hours after placement, the laboratory will perform
tests in accordance with the procedures herein specified under Paragraph
1.04.C.2.
10. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a proforma
approved by the Engineer. Such records shall be signed by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer.
E. Evaluation and Acceptance
1. Evaluation and acceptance should follow ACI 318 Latest Edition.
Note that high strength concrete is typically evaluated at later ages such as
56 or 96 days.
2. Enforcement: When the Concrete fails to meet either of the strength

requirements as per ACI 318. The mix proportions of subsequent batches of
concrete shall be modified to increase the strength. The Engineer’s
Representative shall decide as to what action may be taken for concrete that
fail to meet the requirements mentioned. In estimating the quality of the sub-

20th October 2021
standard concrete and in determining the action to be taken the following

shall be considered:
a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen sampling

and testing have been carried out in accordance with ACI/ASTM.
Concrete shall be judged by the strength of specified strength,
together with the cement content in comparison with the specified
minimum cement content.
b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under investigation.
c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test

specimens.
d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the

strength and durability of this section of structure.
F. The Engineer’s Representative may require tests to be carried out on the hardened
concrete in structure. Where tests show that concrete is below specified strength,
remove all, or a part of, the concrete in all of the batches deemed not to comply with
the strength requirement as directed by the Engineer’s Representative. Full cost of
removal of low strength concrete and its replacement with concrete of proper
specified strength shall be borne by the Contractor.
A. Within a reasonable time prior to commencement of Cast-in-place concrete work, the

Contractor shall schedule a meeting at a mutually agreeable time to include the
Engineer and the Contractors Project Manager to discuss materials, methods of work
and forming systems for the concrete work.
B. Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all pertinent
information including written procedural outlines, description of forming systems,
brochures of proposed equipment, sources of all materials and characteristics of all
materials. The above information shall be received by Engineer at least 30 days prior
to the pre-construction meeting.
C. During the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall present an outline plan for
all concrete work to be accomplished. The outline shall include reviews of sources of
materials, commentary on source, source variations during the course of the work,
storage and use of materials, description of all equipment necessary for batching,
mixing, conveying, placing, forming, reinforcing, compacting and finishing of cast-in-
place concrete.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in “Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures” are

required.
B. Samples
1. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories of every type

proposed for use in the concrete works.
C. Certificates and Catalogues
1. All related catalogues, test certificates, brochures, and any requested

technical data must be submitted – of all the printed literature of which at
least one copy must be in original.

20th October 2021
2. Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for reinforcement, cement,
admixtures, additives and the like.
D. Test Reports: Submit preliminary test results at least three weeks prior to the
beginning of the works. In addition to the test reports specified under Section Clause
1.05C, submit the following:
1. Preliminary engineering detail Mix Reports (as per ACI/ASTM standards)
2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88).
3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641).
4. Petrographic Examination Test Reports (ASTM C295).
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit detailed fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and
reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement
techniques and requirements – all as detailed in Sections 03100 and 03200.
2. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing
locations, sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and
accessories. Include on the shop drawing schedules and diagrams to
indicate bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcement steel bars.
3. The drawings shall be in such details as to assure that difficulties in

execution of the work in the field are minimized.
A. Contract Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities

and components concealed from view in finished construction.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. The fire resistance requirements for structural members shall be according to Kuwait
regulations.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and

placement of form accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kuwait British Readymix Concrete.
B. Kuwait Portland Cement Co.
C. National Industries.
D. Or Approved Equal.

20th October 2021
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Cement
1. Alkali Content: Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide or certify that no

alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed cement aggregate
combinations. (ASTM C227).
2. Ordinary Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II, non-staining for all
structural elements except those covered by item below.
3. Sulphate Resisting Cement: ASTM C150, Type V. For all work which is in
contact with soil, water-proofing, vapour barrier or blinding concrete. Type V
cement should not be used in areas where concrete will be subjected to
Chlorides, such as close to sea water. In areas where Sulphates and
Chlorides are both present, pozzolanic cement or Type II (medium Sulphate
resistance) cement should be used.
4. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to the

Engineer and shall be delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement
shall be used for each type of cement. When received at the batching plant,
all bags shall be intact and cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed
to moisture or wetting of any kind during shipment or storage shall not be
used on the job.
5. Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
6. All cement shall be stored in water tight sheds on a floor raised at least 200
mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have labels indicating dates of
manufacture and arrival at the storage site. A maximum of fifteen bags shall
be stacked if the storage period is not more than three months. Any cement
stored for more than three months shall not be used without the explicit
written permission of the Engineer.
7. When tests performed on field samples subsequent to the original approval

tests show that the cement does not comply with the Specifications, the
entire consignment from which the sample was taken shall be rejected.
Rejected cement shall not be permitted in storage areas or on the site and
shall be removed within twenty four hours.
8. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to Sun. Cement temperature

shall not exceed 50 Deg.C.
9. All Type V Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content not exceeding five
per cent (5%) while Type II Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content
not exceeding eight percent (8%).
10. White Cement shall be used for the Concrete Elements where colored
concrete shown in the Drawings.
B. Aggregates
1. In general, aggregate shall comply with ASTM C33, and shall be graded in
accordance with requirements, irrespective of whether concrete is mixed on
site or elsewhere. The Contractor shall nominate the source of supply and
shall provide grading curves of aggregate for approval.

20th October 2021
2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone
or crushed rock or gravel. Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each
size of coarse aggregate gradation shall be used. Each aggregate type shall
be from a single consistent source.
3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has

good drainage. Stock- piles shall have walls separating adjacent materials
and to preserve the gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to
assure placement of concrete at the necessary rate. Use properly
constructed sheds to protect aggregates from direct sun radiation and from
blowing sands.
4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings
and dust and when directed by the Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to
remove deleterious substances.
5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites,
coal, mica, shale or similar particles which may reduce the strength or
durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall not contain any material that may
be chemically active with reinforcement or that may react to cause
efflorescence or that may be alkali reactive.
6. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources
of supply shall be determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests
shall be reported to the Engineer and shall be used to check whether the
gradings are similar to those of the samples used in the establishment of the
batch weight used.
7. Supplier's certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the

source of the aggregates.
8. Aggregates for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for

colour as approved by the Engineer and shall come from a single source.
9. It is recommended that the total chloride content of the concrete mix arising
from the aggregate together with that from any admixtures and any other
source should not exceed the limits, expressed as a percentage relationship
between chloride ion and mass of cement in the ACI 318. the total chloride
content should be calculated from the mix proportions and the measured
chloride contents of each of the constituents.
Further again as per ACI/ASTM, the total acid-soluble sulphate content of the
concrete mix, expressed as SO3, should not exceed 4 % SO3 by mass of the
cement in the mix. The sulphate content should be calculated as the total
from the various constituents of the mix.
10. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed
gravel sand and shall comply with ASTM C125 "Concrete Aggregates from
Natural Sources " having hard and durable particles or other inert materials
having similar characteristics conforming to the following requirements:
a. Fineness Modulus: 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C125
b. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in
establishing mix proportions. If greater deviation, the use of such
aggregates shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in mix
proportions can be made and reviewed.

20th October 2021
c. Sodium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 6 percent loss, ASTM C88, 5

cycles.
d. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C289.
e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of Sieve Opening (Square Openings)
Percentage by weight Passing-ASTM C33,C117
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
No.16 (1.18 mm) 50-85
No.30 (0.60 mm) 25-60
No.50 (0.30 mm) 5-30
No.100 (0.15 mm) 0-10
No.200 (0.075 mm) 0-3.
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be

permitted upon submission of relevant data and review by the
Engineer
g. Gradation requirements for external/exposed C.I.P. and precast

white concrete finish shall be as follows:
Size of Sieve Opening (Square Openings)
Percentage by weight Passing-ASTM C33, C117
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 100
No.16 (1.18 mm) 50-85
No.30 (0.60 mm) 25-60
No.50 (0.30 mm) 15-30
No.100 (0.15 mm) 0-10
h. Fine aggregates shall be washed and free of organic materials

(ASTM C40) and other foreign matter.
11. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed
gravel or crushed stone. The crushing shall be regulated so that, of the
material retained on the No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve, at least 90 percent by weight
shall consist of pieces with at least one fractured face and at least 75 percent

20th October 2021
by weight shall consist of material with at least two fractured faces. In

addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
a. Sodium Sulphate Soundness: Max.12% loss ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
b. Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289.
c. Abrasion: Max. 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 revolutions.
d. Flat and Elongated Particles: 3:1 max. 30% ASTM C125 5:1 max.
10%
e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max.0.5% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Shale: Max. 2% by weight.
g. Materials reactive with alkalies in cement ASTM 295 : Max. 0.5%
h. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min. 2.58 ASTM C125.
i. Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of Sieve Opening Percentage By Weight Passing ASTM C33
(Square Opening) 1.½ " (37.5mm) 1" (25.4mm) ¾" (19.0mm)

Size Size Size
2" (50.0mm) 100 --- ---
1.½ " (37.5mm) 95-100 100 ---
1" (25.4mm) 60-85 95-100 100
¾" (19.0mm) 35-70 60-85 95-100
½ (12.7mm) 20-50 25-60 60-75
3/8" (9.5mm) 10-30 15-45 20-55
No.4 (4.75mm) 0-5 0-10 0-10
No.8 (2.36mm) --- 0-5 0-6
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon
submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.
j. The maximum size of aggregate shall be 1 inch. (25.4 mm) for

columns and walls and 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) for slabs and beams. In
addition, the maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 20 percent of
the narrowest member that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75
percent of the clear spacing between adjacent steel reinforcement or
between reinforcement and adjacent formwork.
C. Water
1. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean,
fresh, potable and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali,
sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall be filtered to

20th October 2021
remove any colour or residues present due to contamination from water

piping or transportation or storage methods.
2. Water shall comply with the requirements of ACI 301
3. Water shall be tested in accordance with ACI/ASTM.
D. Admixtures
1. Suitable admixtures may be incorporated in the concrete only with the prior
written approval of the Engineer.
2. The Engineer shall be advised in advance of the following data:
a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and

over-dosage.
b. Chemical name (s) of the main active ingredient (s) in the admixture.
c. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used.
d. Admixtures submitted for Engineer approval shall be certified in

writing by the manufacturer to be in compliance with ASTM
C494/ASTM C1017.
e. Air-entraining admixtures shall comply with ASTM C260;
f. The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above

mentioned standards must be to the approval of the Engineer. All
admixtures must be mutually compatible.
g. Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from manufacturers

whose products have previously been used successfully 5 years in
Kuwait or on other international projects in countries having similar
climate to Kuwait.
h. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

printed instructions and recommendations and shall be certified by
the manufacturer to be suitable for use during hot weather extremes.
Admixtures shall be stored safe from adverse temperatures in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions or
recommendations.
i. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the

Engineer, shall be verified by trial mixes with the cements,
aggregates and other materials to be used in the works before final
approval is given.
j. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must

allow in his Tender for testing the type of admixture he proposes to
use.
k. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the

manufacturer's recommended dispensers. Adding of admixture by
hand is not allowed.
l. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have

controlled sources of individual components such that the total mix
meets the requirements of the Contract documents. Unless specified

20th October 2021
otherwise, admixture containing calcium chloride or chloride salt

must not be used under any circumstances. They shall not contain
chloride ions in excess of 2% by weight of the admixture or 0.03% by
weight of the cement content of the concrete mix, the total chloride
(Cl) ion content in the entire mix shall not exceed 0.2 percent of the
weight of cement when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC is
used. The total water soluble Sulphate (SO3) content in the entire mix
shall not exceed 4 percent SO3 of the weight of cement in the mix.
m. The total calcium chloride (CaCl2) in the total mix shall not exceed
0.01 percent of the weight of the cement.
n. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na20 equivalent shall
not exceed 3 Kg/m3. All sources of alkali shall be taken into account
for calculating the total alkali content. In particular the contribution of
Sodium Chloride whether from aggregate or from mixing water must
be included.
o. Microsilica shall be added at minimum 5% by weight of cement,

wherever specified.
E. Cement/Sand Screed
1. 1:3 cement/sand screed to be provided wherever shown in the drawing
a. Thickness: As shown in the drawing
b. Slope: As shown in the drawing
2. The cement/sand screed will be laid in panels of 2 x 2 meter panels or as

approved by the Engineer, laid to slopes as specified using minimum amount of
water to achieve the required work ability.
3. The type of cement to be used, will depend, on the location of the screed and will
be as approved by the Engineer.
F. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum 1000guage of approved manufacture

tested in accordance with ASTM E96 and E154.
G. Curing Materials: Use of water is mandatory.
1. Water: Fresh potable water as supplied by MOE-EW, Kuwait shall be allowed for
curing.
2. Burlap: AASHTO M182 and Polythene sheets.
3. Heat insulation materials like Styrofoam when necessary
4. Use of curing compounds is not allowed unless there is exceptional conditions

arise and shall be purely on discretion of the Engineer..
H. Joint Fillers
1. Joint fillers shall be a compressed sheet of wood fibre impregnated with

bitumen emulsion complying with ASTM D1751. The filler may alternatively
be a compressed sheet of cork granules bonded with bitumen or synthetic
resin complying with ASTM D1752.

20th October 2021
The material shall be rot-proof, waterproof, nonabsorbent and non-staining

and shall not extrude under pressure or the weight of poured concrete.
Prior to pointing, the joint shall be cleaned and the edge of the filler tamped
down to ensure that the joint is filled completely and continuous support is
provided for the sealant.
I. Waterstops: Provide at all locations where concrete is in contact with earth, water,
protection board or waterproofing
1. At Construction/Contraction Joints: Extruded PVC Profiles.
2. At Expansion Joints: Extruded PVC Profiles.
3. Minimum Tensile Strength: 14 N/mm2 (MPa)
4. Elongation at break min: 360%
5. Important Note: All waterstops shall be non-swelleble type.
J. Grout: Shall be cementitious for grouting a) baseplates b) Anchor bolts etc. to be

K. Bearing Pads: AASHTO grade chloroprene pads made with 100% chloroprene
(neoprene) conforming to the requirements of AASHTO standard specifications for
High-Way Bridges (1977) sections with shore A hardness of 70 D.
L. Dustproofer: Applied to prevent dusting and to increase durability of concrete

surfaces but not limited to the following:
1. Location / Use:
a. All Concrete surfaces above false ceilings. To be applied prior to

Mechanical / Electrical Fittings, Pipes, Ducts, etc.
b. All Concrete surfaces behind finishes (i.e. stone wall facing, metal
panels, etc.), where liquid application or sealants are NOT directly
applied to the concrete surface (i.e. Paint, Plaster, Waterproofing,
etc.).
c. All exposed Concrete Surfaces behind finishes.
d. Under Slab conditions, columns exposed above false ceilings, etc.
e. Exposed finished work to receive concrete sealer (stronger than

dustproofer).
f. Slabs and toppings to receive carpeting.
g. Beneath Access Flooring
M. Reglets: Shall be 26 GA galvanized steel or PVC from an approved manufacturer.
N. PFA - ASTM C618-17
O. GGBS – ASTM C 989
P. Silica Fume – ASTM C1240 -15

20th October 2021
Q. Metal Reinforcing – ASTM A615M-16Grade Noted on Drawings
R. Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185M (ADJA0185)
S. All Timber used in connection with the concrete construction is to be certified as

originating from sustainably managed sources under the Forest Stewardship Council
(FSC) chain or custody scheme. Species listed in CITES Appendix I, II, and those
categorized as Endangered or Critically Endangered on the IUCN Red List are not to
be used.
2.03 MIXES
A. It is mandatory that all ready-mix Concrete used in the works shall be “Wet Mix” only.
B. Proportioning of Concrete
1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1/211.4 R. Assume full responsibility for the
strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete. Cement,
fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured
by weight.
2. Water/Cement Ratio: Complying with ACI 301 and ACI 211.1 The
water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall not exceed the specified
maximum value by more than 5% of that value. If a maximum water/cement
ratio has been determined the ability to comply with that requirement at a
suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes. Maximum
water/cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by the
Engineer.
3. Cement Content: The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be
less than the specified minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than
the specified maximum value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may
be determined from samples representative of any batch of concrete
provided a suitable test is used to measure the cement content of fresh
concrete to an accuracy of +/-5% of the actual value with a confidence of
95% and approved by the Engineer. Durability requirements for different
types of exposure as specified in ACI 318, regarding water/cement, cement
type, cement content and minimum compressive strength, should be
followed. The reduced minimum cement content shall only be used when trial
mixes have verified that concrete with a maximum free water cement ratio not
greater than that given for a particular condition can be consistently produced
and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer
shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix engineering
detail.
4. Requirements for Fresh Concrete: Workability of concrete shall be such that

the concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after
compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork.
Workability shall be assessed by means of the slump test or Slump Flow test.
An acceptable value for the mean slump for each concrete mix shall be
agreed with the Engineer and a value of 75 mm can be taken as a guide. The
following are the tolerance levels provided as per ASTM C94/C94M.
Specified Slump:
If 75 mm or less If more than 75 mm
Plus tolerance 0 0

20th October 2021
Minus tolerance 40mm 65mm
Tolerance for Traget Slum Flow +/- 50mm.
5. Adjustment to Mix Proportions: During production adjustments of mix

proportions will be made in order to minimize the variability of strength and to
approach more closely the approved target mean strength as part of the
proper control of production. But the specified limits of minimum cement
content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained.
C. Prepare engineering detail mixes prior to the beginning of work in accordance with
ACI 301M Section 4
D. The strength of concrete to be in accordance with the requirements of the Structural

Drawings.
E. Air entrain all concrete exposed to weathering in accordance with ACI 301M Section
4 determined by volume as per ASTM C231M.
F. The following tables contain the required minimum cementitious material content and
maximum water cement ratio for concrete with different 28 days compressive
strengths. Values specified for durability as per ACI 318 and as mentioned before
should be also satisfied.
1. Table for Cylinder Strength:
Specified Compressive Strength of Concrete (MPa)
REQUIREMENT 10 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 >44
Water/Cement ratio (SSD)* (max.) 0.70 0.5 0.45 0.40 0.40** 0.40** 0.35 0.35 0.30
Minimum Cement content Kg./m3 220 300 380 400 425 450 480 500 500
2. Table for Cube Strength
Specified Compressive Strength of Concrete Kg/cm2 at 28 days
REQUIREMENT 125 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 >550
0.40 0.35 0.30

Water/Cement ratio (SSD)* (max.) 0.70 0.5 0.45 0.40 0.40** 0.35
**
Minimum Cement content Kg./m3 220 300 380 400 425 450 480 500 500
Saturated Surface Dry.
** To be limited to 0.35 for Slab on Grade
2.04 FINISH
A. Type Visually Exposed Concrete
1. Use high quality concrete and formwork. The concrete to be thoroughly

compacted and all surfaces to be true, with clean arises. Only minor surface
blemishes to occur and no staining or discoloration from the release agent to
be permitted.

20th October 2021
2. Produce a smooth, even finish with an impervious sheet material (e.g. high-
quality resin film faced plywood), arranged in an accepted regular pattern as
a feature of the surface. This to coincide with the architectural features.
3. Do not replace parts of formwork panels where this may cause a change in
color in the concrete. The layout of features on the Drawings may determine
the number of uses of shuttering.
4. Abrupt irregularities shall not be greater than 1mm. Gradual irregularities,

expressed as maximum permissible deviation from a 1m straightedge, are
not to be greater than 3mm.
5. The surface is to be free from discoloration caused by contamination from a

release agent, grout leakage or other sources.
6. No cover spacers are to be visible, nor cause rust marks.
7. Generally, surfaces are to be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and

other defects. Voids are to be kept to an absolute minimum whilst ensuring
compliance with other requirements of the Specification. The following criteria
are to be observed:
a. No blowholes larger than 5mm in diameter are to be permitted. There

to be no more than 3 such holes in any square meter of surface area.
The surface to be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and
other defects.
b. The concrete shall have a consistent, uniform, matt, colored face

unless otherwise indicated.
c. The concrete is to be free of surface blemishes visible to the eye at

3m.
d. No repairs are to be permitted to the formwork without acceptance of

the Engineer. Damaged panels are to be replaced with material of
the same performance and to be grout washed to blend in with the
existing panels.
e. No water or grout loss to be permitted. Marks not larger than 50mm

in any dimension to be acceptable.
f. Making good: Apart from the making good allowed for in the
Structural Engineer's documentation, making good to be minimal and
consistent to an accepted sample. As far as possible the finished
surface is to be achieved without making good. The improvement of
the surface finish by the Contractor (e.g. filling noticeable surface
blemishes) is to be agreed with the Engineer, prior to any work being
carried out.
g. Blowholes: Blowholes is to be filled and all irregularities stoned off.

After at least three weeks curing, the visible face-work is to be
rubbed down to produce a smooth, even surface. Continuity of
personnel for making good, where required, is to be provided by the
Contractor, to the complete acceptance of the Engineer.
8. Arises are to be as detailed.

20th October 2021
9. Formwork tie holes to be in an accepted regular pattern, or as indicated on

the Lead Details, filled with an exactly matching prepared cement/ fine
aggregate paste to an accepted sample as specified.
10. Where rebates or features are shown these to also be the panel joints. No
other joints to be permissible. The engineering detail of panel joints, rebates,
striking pieces and other elements are the responsibility of the Contractor but
to be subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. Features to be bedded on
mastic, but no mastic to be permitted on the finished face work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete
are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing
concrete.
C. Detail engineering, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301,
to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
D. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
E. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for engineering detail, installation, and
removal of shoring and re-shoring.
F. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Steel reinforcement to comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.
H. Joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
3.02 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Ready Mixed Concrete from approved plant to be used.
1. For materials specifications refer to Part II
2. Comply with ASTM C94
3. Add mixing water only at the ready mix batching plant. In such cases, begin
the mixing operation a maximum of Forty Five (45) minutes after the cement
has been intermingled with the aggregate. In hot weather, reduce this time
limit to the approval of the Engineer.
4. Discharge the concrete completely at the final location into the forms within
two hours maximum after the introduction of the water to the mix. In hot
weather reduce this time limit so, that no stiffening of the concrete shall occur
until after it has been placed.

20th October 2021
5. The supplier's test certificate giving test results for workability and strength
shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at weekly intervals.
6. The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the
works by means that shall be acceptable to the Engineer and which shall
prevent contamination, segregation or loss of ingredients, and ensure that
the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.
B. Batch Mixing at Site: (if permitted by Engineer).
1. Comply with ACI 301.
2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required

consistency will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency which can be
readily placed without segregation.
3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring
and dispensing the admixture.
C. Hand Mixed Concrete: This is not permitted.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Whole area where concrete to be placed shall be checked for levels ,inserts,
embedded items and all dimensions according to approved shop drawing.A check list
approval shall be obtained from Engineer.
B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying
cementitious grouts.
C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing
concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with cementitious grout.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, for preparation before placing Notify the Engineer’s
Representative 24 hours before each pour so that the forms and reinforcement may
be examined. Do not place concrete until inspection has been made or waived.
B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature above 42⁰ C. or at a
shade air temperature below 3⁰ C.
C. For hot weather concreting, see 3.05.
D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened
concrete and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure
reinforcement, sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water
and debris. Sprinkle with water any porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water
shall be removed from excavations before depositing concrete, such water shall not
be allowed to wash over newly formed concrete.
E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, for conveying concrete. Concrete shall be
transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods
which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the
required workability. Concrete shall normally be placed and compacted without
addition of water. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or
movement of formwork and damage to faces of formwork.

20th October 2021
F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing

the forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas elephant
trunking only, equipped with suitable hopper heads. Trunking shall be of variable
lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one metre
and a sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is
approximately level at all times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are
acceptable to the Engineer’s Representative, then low slump concrete can be
dropped vertically through heights greater than one metre.
G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration as described in 3.09.
H. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall
not be placed in the forms.
I. Concrete topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and
brushed over with a coat of neat cement grout. The topping shall be placed before
the grout has started to set.
J. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on Drawings.
K. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 150mm.
L. For slabs on grade, separate vertical surfaces with joint filler.
M. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air

temperature, and test samples taken.
N. Foam Concrete: Provide lightweight concrete in thickness and slopes as shown on

drawings. Before applying lightweight concrete thoroughly clean the surface and wet
with a coat of neat cement grout.
3.05 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER:
A. In hot weather condition, in general, the recommendations of “CIRIA guide to

concrete construction in the gulf region “ACI 305 –recommended practice for hot
weather concrete in and ACI 308 –recommended practice for curing concrete shall
be followed.
B. The Contractor shall obtain daily temperature forecasts from Kuwait Meteorological
Department and concreting shall be programmed accordingly.
C. When hot weather conditions as defined earlier exist, then the following steps shall
be taken:
1. The water for concreting shall be cooled to a temperature between 0 Deg. C.

and 15 Deg. C (by refrigeration, liquid Nitrogen or use of ice). Adequate
water storage should be available. Where ice is introduced to a mix this shall
be taken into account in computing water/cement ratios and care shall be
taken to ensure that all ice has melted before concrete leaves the mixer.
2. Aggregates shall be cooled (by refrigeration, cold water or fog spray) and be
protected from direct sunlight by heat reflecting covers.
3. All formwork and reinforcement shall be cooled by sprinkling of water and

shall be protected from direct sun.
4. Wet concrete or concrete carrying vehicles shall not be exposed to the hot
sun for more than 90 minutes starting from the batching plant with the use of
approved retarders. The rotating drum of the mixer shall be insulated

20th October 2021
externally to avoid over heating of the drum metal and excessive heat
transfer. Minimum amount of mixing and agitation is recommended.
ENSURE THAT NO WATER IS ADDED TO THE MIXER AT SITE OR
DURING TRANSPORTATION.
5. Concrete temperature should not be more than 32oC when it is placed and
should stay below 35oC until the initial setting of concrete.
6. When the concrete is placed the ambient air temperature in shade should not
be higher than 42oC
7. To avoid plastic shrinkage cracking, the following are recommended:
Comply with ACI 305 and ACI 308 (Latest Editions)
• Damping subgrade and forms
• Placing concrete at lowest practicable temperature
• Erecting wind breaks and sunshades
• Reducing time between placing and curing
• Ensure the rate of bleeding is greater than the rate of evaporation by

keeping concrete surface wet and covered by plastic sheets.
• Avoid rapid Cooling or heating by proper insulation of concrete body

when necessary
8. Other hot weather concreting recommendations include:
• Preparation to transport, place, consolidate and finish at fastest rate
• Proper location and preparation for construction joints
• Availability of spare equipment and fog spray kits
• Shaded belts and pump lines
• Speeding up of placement and finishing
• Preparation of prompt curing of all exposed surfaces
3.06 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Construction and Control Joints
1. Comply with ACI 301, ACI 223 and ACI 224.3R. (Latest Editions)
2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept
to a minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and detail
engineering consideration. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to
locations of construction joints.
3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration

shall be given to their exact location. Location of construction joints shall be
as shown on contract drawings or as approved by the Engineer’s
Representative. The location of construction joints shall be subject to

20th October 2021
agreement between Engineer’s Representative and the Contractor before the

work commences.
4. Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle third of spans
of slabs, beams and girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum
distance of two times the width of intersecting beams.
5. Beams, girders, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithically as

part of the slab system
6. Provision shall be made for the transfer of shear and other forces through
construction joints. Shear keys, diagonal dowels or other methods may be
used as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
7. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical joints shall
be formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall
be level and reasonably flat unless engineering detail considerations make
this undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with
features of the finished work.
8. Kickers (i.e. a starter stub) shall be at least 70 mm high and carefully

constructed and shall be cast along with the main concrete.
9. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of

the concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from
laitance and shall be roughened to the extent that the largest aggregate is
exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken that the joint surface is
cleaned immediately before the fresh concrete is placed against it.
10. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of 1:1.5
cement-sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial
set. Clean horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar
over joints in walls to a depth of 25 mm before depositing concrete. In walls,
do not space construction joints more than 15 meters apart, unless otherwise
shown.
11. Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the
joint. This concrete shall be particularly well compacted and vibrated.
B. Embedded Items
1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.4 and 6.5 and ACI 117.
2. Accurately set anchorage devices by line and transit, and coordinate the
locating of all anchorage devices to be set for the accommodation of the work
of other trades.
3. Locate anchor bolts and/or threaded type inserts and bars as shown on the
Drawings and on shop drawings. Obtain necessary templates from the other
trades as required for the proper setting of anchor bolts and other items for
equipment, as required.
4. Assist other trades in the installation of piping, pipe sleeves, conduit and
similar items where such items are to be installed in concrete. Provide frames
to securely hold anchor bolts and anchorage devices in place during
construction, and take care that no displacement occurs during the pouring of
concrete. Under this Section furnish and set items not furnished by other
trades using approved standard type items suitable for their intended
purpose.

20th October 2021
5. Install seating angles for removable trench covers properly anchored into
concrete as shown on drawings.
6. Install reglets to receive waterproofing sheet or flashing in face of concrete

walls or parapets as shown on drawings.
C. Levels and Slopes
1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for
finish on slabs.
2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings.
3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by

concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water.
3.07 CURING
A. General
1. Comply with ACI Standard 308R-01 Guide to Curing Concrete, Only water
shall be used for curing.
2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will
have satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a
minimum distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by
its shrinkage undue cracking in the structure. To achieve these objectives, it
may be necessary to insulate the concrete so that it is maintained at a
suitable temperature so that the rates of evaporation of moisture from the
surfaces are kept to appropriate values.
3. Providing proper temperature and moisture conditions for curing of concrete

is much more critical and important in hot weather (such as that encountered
in Kuwait), than under normal temperatures. It is therefore of first importance
that curing be promptly commenced, ample in coverage and continued
without interruption.
B. Curing Material and Methods
1. Comply with ACI Standard 301 and ACI 308 and ACI 207.4R for mass
concrete ( Latest Editions )
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,

excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury.
2. When concrete must be placed in cold weather as defined by ACI 306R, or

hot weather as defined in this specification, the Contractor must develop a
detailed “Cold-Weather Implementation Plan” / “Hot-Weather Implementation
Plan” (as applicable) and obtain the engineer’s approval. This approval shall
account for those recommendations addressed in ACI 305R or 306R and ACI
308 (curing) as appropriate and any elements required for worker safety. This
cold-weather plan shall cover:
a. The production,
b. Transportation,
c. Placement,

20th October 2021
d. Protection,
e. curing (ACI 308) and
f. Temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather; in the

Submittal, include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt
changes in weather conditions or equipment failures.
g. Calculations of Heat of hydration and fresh concrete temperature:
3. Do not begin hot or cold weather concreting until these procedures have
been approved by the Engineer.
4. Note: ACI 301 applies for any conditions not specifically addressed by one of
the standards / guides noted.
5. For mass concrete casts as defined in this specification, the above plans
should comply with ACI 207 as well. The following conditions should be
complied:
a. Fresh concrete temperature at pour should not exceed 25 oC.
b. Peak temperature of placed concrete should not exceed 75 oC
c. Differential temperature should not exceed 25 oC.
d. Temperature monitoring by use of proper thermocouples.
e. Avoid rapid cooling; use proper insulation of concrete surfaces
6. Only water shall be used for curing. All water used for curing shall meet the
requirements for water used in concrete as specified herein.
7. Ponding with Water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall not be
more than 11 Deg.C. cooler than the concrete to prevent cracking and shall
be free of substances that may stain or discolor concrete.
8. Wet Saturated Material: Wet saturated material shall be held in close contact
with concrete surfaces and maintained continuously in damp and moist
condition so that a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout
the curing period. Wet saturated materials shall be kept wet at all times for a
minimum of seven days after stripping.
9. Intermittent Spraying with Water: Care must be taken that newly finished
concrete is not damaged by water erosion. If sprinkling is done at intervals,
care must be taken to prevent the concrete from drying between applications
of water, particularly on Fridays & Holidays. Timber formwork covering the
concrete shall be covered and moistened with water at frequent intervals to
keep it from drying out during the curing period.
10. When curing concrete with water other than ponding, do not allow the surface
to dry.
11. Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon as
formwork is loosened water curing shall be applied to sides of columns and
walls, and shall continue uninterrupted for a minimum of seven days.
12. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured only by flooding. Flat concrete surfaces
shall be covered immediately after concrete is placed, tamped and levelled,

20th October 2021
with polyethylene sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial hardening of
concrete occurs. Covering surface shall follow progress of concrete
placement until the whole surface is covered and flooded. Polyethylene sheet
may be removed after 24 hours and regular flooding maintained for a
minimum of 7 days.
C. Normal Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for all cast-in-
place concrete under normal weather conditions (temperatures around 24⁰ C. and
normal wind speed). This period shall be extended to a minimum of ten (10) to
fourteen (14) days under hot weather or drying wind conditions.
D. Mixes containing Pozzolanic materials will require prolonged curing. The extended
curing depends on the amounts and types of used materials and should be based on
the Engineer’s advice.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with ACI Standard 117 unless noted otherwise.
1. Plumb (allowable variation)
a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers walls, and in arises:
In any 3m 6mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 25mm
b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves and other

conspicuous lines:
In any 6m 6mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 12mm
2. Exposed slab soffits, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of
supporting shores:
In any 3m +/- 3mm
In any bay or in any 6 mm length +/- 5mm
Maximum for the total length of the structure +/-10mm
3.09 COMPACTING CONCRETE
A. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration (ACI 301 and ACI 309),
pressure, shock or other means during the operations of placing and shall be
thoroughly worked around reinforcement, duct formers, embedded fixtures, and into
corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids and having the required
surface finish when the formwork is removed.
When directed by the Engineer’s Representative the Contractor shall demonstrate

the efficiency of the proposed method of compaction on a trial section prior to the
commencement of the permanent works.
When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied
continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air
has practically ceased.

20th October 2021
The number and size of the vibrators shall be such as to ensure vibration throughout
the entire volume of the concrete. They shall be either the immersion type with a
frequency of not less than 100 Hz when operating submerged in concrete or the
exterior type with a frequency of not less than 50 Hz. The vibrators shall be applied
systematically and at such intervals that the zones of influence overlap. The vibrator
shall be applied at any point only for a period that the concrete is properly compacted
and not for so long that segregation occurs.
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the engineering detail of formwork

and disposition of vibrators shall receive special consideration to ensure efficient
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Except where specifically required by the Engineer’s Representative, all reinforced

concrete shall be compacted by vibration with plunger (poker) type vibrators.
3.10 FINISHING OF SURFACES
A. General
All visible concrete surfaces shall be fair faced unless (1) another kind of finish is
specified or (2) no particular finish is specified.
Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. (All latest Editions)
1. Finishes shall meet the requirements of ACI 301 section 5.3.4.2.
2. Tolerances for floors, slabs, and floor finishes shall be confirmed by

measuring in conformance with ACI 301 section 5.3.4.3.
B. Fair-face Concrete
All formwork joints and tie rod holes for exposed surface of concrete finish shall form
a regular pattern with horizontal and vertical lines continuous through each structure
and all construction joints where permitted shall coincide with these horizontal or
vertical lines. The surface shall be treated with two coats of water repellant.
C. General Requirements for Flatwork
Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic slabs true and level within a
tolerance of 3 mm in 3m as measured with a 3m straightedge placed in any direction
at any location. Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately and
sufficiently rigid to support screeds and so that proper surface elevations and
concrete thicknesses are achieved allowing for dead load deflection and camber of
formwork. Take measurements and control tolerances by the use of transit
instrument. Upon completion of leveling, remove screeds and fill spaces with
concrete.
D. Monolithic Floor Finish
Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding, and preliminary
wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material
will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the disc
type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second troweling
after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge of the
trowel, and exert heavy pressure to thoroughly compact the surface. Leave floors
with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to a maximum tolerance of 3
mm in 3m. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:
1. Adhesive-set ceramic tile.

20th October 2021
2. Carpeting.
3. Where no other finish is specified.
E. Rough/Broom Finish
Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away from the surface,
then screed with straightedge to produce a reasonably true and uniform surface.
Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:
1. Mortar Set Ceramic Tile
2. Marble and Granite Flooring.
3. Composite flooring
4. Insulation.
5. Terrazzo.
Provide medium broom finish to ramp slabs.
F. Exposed Interior Concrete Surfaces of Ceilings, Columns and Walls
Unless otherwise shown, leave with a smooth finish, even textured and free of
blemishes. Repair or replace defective areas, as directed. As soon as the face forms
are removed, remove all fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind
where necessary. Repairing, replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to
the Engineer’s Representative satisfaction. Patch as specified under paragraph
"Patching".
G. Sealed Finish
Provide sealed concrete finish to parking area slabs.
3.11 FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE:
A. Cover sub-base with vapor barrier of polyethylene sheeting. Do not lay sheeting until
immediately prior to placing of reinforcing mesh and concrete, in order to prevent
damage to the film. Seal seams as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Do not place concrete over vapor barrier until all breaks have been patched and
sealed.
C. Delayed Ettringite Formation: To reduce the risk of DEF, temperature in concrete

should be kept below 75o C provided the Cement contains at least 20% by mass of fly
ash or at least 40% by mass of ground granulated blast furnace slag. For thick slabs
on grade and other thick sections, temperature in concrete shall be monitored
through the use of proper thermocouples.
D. Avoid rapid cooling and keep temperature differential below 25o C.
3.12 FOUNDATIONS AND STRUCTURES EXPOSED TO EARTH
A. All structures exposed to earth shall receive waterproof treatment as specified or as

required to ensure water tightness.

20th October 2021
3.13 DUSTPROOFER
A. Apply two coats of dust-proofer in accordance with the approved manufacturer's

printed instructions, on the following concrete surfaces:
1. Procurement and Application is included in the Contractor’s pricing for

Concrete and does not allow for a variation.
2. Contractor is responsible to apply the dustproofing in sequence with

schedule and installations. The Contractor will receive clearance from the
Architect to proceed with installation of MEP works.
3. This item must be installed by the Contractor to preserve Health and Safety
standards while the buildings is in use.
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Fill-in
Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix,
place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
B. Curbs
Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,
and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations
Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set
anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying
with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and
equipment.
Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout.
Use non-metallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Comply with ACI 301, ACI 546r and ACI 562 (latest editions)
No repair shall start unless method statement is submitted and approved by the engineer.
A. Patching Defective Areas:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removal of forms, when acceptable to Engineer’s Representative.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 6mm in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a
depth of less than 25mm. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete
surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen, and brush-coat the area to be patched
with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound
has dried or as recommended by the Manufacturer.

20th October 2021
3. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard

Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color
surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place
and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of formed Surfaces
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be

repaired to satisfaction of Engineer’s Representative. Surface defects, as
such, including colour and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains
and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form
tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that
affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and
replace concrete.
3. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 25mm in diameter
by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound
concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned
concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of
one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16
mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture
in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
4. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer’s Representative

for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
5. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of

3.16 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
A. In the event that efflorescence, stains, oils, grease or any unsightly accumulation of
foreign materials are visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished
concrete, the Engineer’s Representative may require remedial action to be taken to
remove these blemishes. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when
irregular lapping can be avoided, only such parts aware affected by the stains or
other unsightly appearances. No such remedial action is allowed unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION ALL ASTM EDITIONS SHALL
BE THE LATEST ONE.
A. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the
following, as directed by Owner.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94.
a. Slump/Slump Flow: ASTM C 143/ASTM C1611; one test at point of

discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional
tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

20th October 2021
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or

normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal
weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air entrained
concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air

temperature is 4 deg C and below, when 27 deg C and above, and
one test for each set of compressive strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31/ BS 1881 part 108; one

set of four standard cylinders/cubes for each compressive strength
test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders/cubes for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field cured test
specimens are required.
e. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/BS 1881; one set for each
day's pour exceeding 5 cu. m. plus additional sets for each 50 cubic
m more than the first 25 cubic m of each concrete class placed in
any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested
at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a
given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 5 cubic m, the
Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
4. When strength of field cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in place concrete.
5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets

of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified
compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 3.5 MPa or 10%* of (specified
strength) when specified strength is more than 43 MPa. (Cylinder).
B. Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer within 24 hours after tests.
Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete
type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, engineering detail’s
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day
tests.
C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, ultrasonic, or other nondestructive device

may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
D. Additional Tests: The Engineer may make additional tests of in place concrete when
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not
been attained in the structure. This may include tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 41 00
STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
specified herein, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services
1. Perform structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete works.
4. Section 03 52 00 - Light Weight Concrete Fill
6. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
A. The Work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies as
further cited herein:
Comply with the applicable Standards and Codes listed Section 03 10 00, Section 03
20 00 and Section 03 30 00.
In addition comply with the applicable codes and standards of the following:-
1. American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.
b. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
c. ACI 318M - Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials:
a. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural

Steel.
b. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-

Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
Gulf Consult Structural Precast Concrete III-2/03 41 00 - 1

20th October 2021
c. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,

Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
d. ASTM A283 – Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars
e. ASTM A416/A416M - Standard Specification for Steel Strand,

Uncoated Seven-Wire for Pre-stressed Concrete.
f. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,

Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.
g. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
h. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
i. ASTM C42 – Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
j. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. American Welding Society:
a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
b. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
4. Precast/Pre-stressed Concrete Institute:
a. PCI – Manual on Design of Connections for Precast and Pre-

stressed Concrete.
b. PCI – Design Hand Book – Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete.
c. PCI MNL-116S - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and

Production of cast and Pre-stressed Concrete Products.
d. MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Pre-stressed

Concrete.
e. MNL-123 - Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast

and Pre-stressed Concrete.
f. PCI – Architectural Precast Concrete
B. This Specification Section shall govern all structural precast and precast pre-stressed
concrete work for the contract except where more stringent or specialized
requirements are indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the contract
homogeneous concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials,
durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or other structural
defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offset of plane and
other defacements of concrete. Be fully responsible for any defects or damage in the
building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the costs of remedial
measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the Contract
Documents.

20th October 2021
C. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract

Documents. No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the
Drawings are permitted unless otherwise specified.
D. Supervise and co-ordinate all phases of the structural precast and precast pre-
stressed concrete construction process and be responsible for the complete
manufacturing process. All methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw
materials and manufactured concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer’s
Representative prior to execution of the structural precast and precast pre-stressed
concrete work.
E. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall
be properly selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineer’s Representative
before use, and maintained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems
and techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineer’s
Representative before use, and maintained throughout the complete structural
precast and precast pre-stressed concrete construction phase. Adequate spare
equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be available for all
tools and equipment.
F. Regardless of approvals by the Engineer’s Representative, be responsible for all

materials, methods of structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete work, and
if any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement removal,
replacement or remedial work and revise procedures or materials to prevent
recurrence of unacceptable work at no increase in Contract Price.
A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL-116S, PCI MNL-123 and
PCI MNL-120.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. The fire resistance requirements for structural members, according to Kuwaiti

regulations, are 4 hrs. for outside walls and structural load bearing frames; 3 hrs. for
load bearing internal walls; 2 hrs. for beams, floor and ceiling slabs and roof structure
; and 1 hr. for permanent internal partitions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit in accordance with requirements of the Contract

Documents, copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each
item of proprietary material used, showing compliance with these Specifications.
C. Should the Contractor wish to follow alternative design then he shall submit complete
design parameters and calculations and shall not proceed until and unless a written
approval is granted.
D. Design Mixes: Submit copies of mix designs with support material, as required by
Contract Documents.
E. Mill Certificates: Submit copies of manufacturer's certificates of mill tests of all

cement, reinforcing steel, pre-stressing steel and anchorage devices, and typical
stress-strain curves for pre-stressing steel.

20th October 2021
1. Pre-stressing steel shall be tested for tensile strength and elongation at rupture
and also for relaxation. One (1) test shall be made for each reel or lot number
and shall be tagged for identification purposes. Each tendon to be shipped to the
casting site shall be assigned an individual lot number and shall be tagged
accordingly.
F. Product Design Criteria
1. Loadings for design:
a. Initial handling and erection stresses.
b. All dead and live loads as specified on the contract drawings or as

required.
c. All other loads specified for member where they are applicable.
G. Product Design Calculations:
1. The Design calculations shall be performed by a Structural Company

licensed in the State of Kuwait experienced in precast pre-stressed concrete
design.
2. Calculations for the design of any precast or pre-stressed member shall be

supported by a statement explaining the principle of design and type of analysis
adopted. The influence of any member in achieving the overall stability of the
structure should be considered.
3. Any computer programs used in the designs shall be fully described and
details of input and print out shall be presented in a manner which can be
readily understood. Program manuals and any instruction to program users
shall be made available to the Engineer’s Representative upon request.
Where any such program cannot be demonstrated by the Contractor to have

been fully checked or where the Engineer’s Representative considers it
necessary, the Contractor shall run such test examples as the Engineer’s
Representative may choose, in order to verify the completeness and
accuracy of the program.
4. Design members exposed to the weather to provide for movement of

components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners
or other detrimental effects, when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night
temperature ranges.
5. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other

building structural members and clearance of intended openings.
6. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with ACI 301,

ACI 318.
H. Shop Drawings: Submit in the manner prescribed in the Contract Documents, layout
plans and detailed fabrication and placement drawings for each structural precast
and precast pre-stressed element. The shop drawings are to include the following
information.
1. Size, grade, profile and dimensions of all materials used.
2. Connection and anchorage details.

20th October 2021
3. Lifting devices, locations and handling limitations.
4. Steel reinforcement details.
5. Tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons in horizontal plane at all

points. Detail horizontal curvatures of tendons at block-outs and anchorages.
6. Tendon profiles showing any required placement support devices. Show

clearly the location of each tendon and the method of tendon support.
7. All openings, sleeves, inserts and other provisions in full co-ordination with all
trades in the Contract.
8. Provide structural calculations and written descriptions of procedures

covering the following items:
a. Jacking force and jacking pressure.
b. Maximum temporary jacking force and jacking pressures.
c. Certified jack calibrations and method of identification. Submit

certificates of calibration from an acceptable testing laboratory to the
Engineer’s Representative for all jacks used.
d. Sequence of tendon jacking for each different tendon layout.
e. Method of determining tendon slack, if any.
f. Method of determining anchor force, or force remaining in tendons

after anchorage is completed.
g. Method of sealing tendons.
9. Identification marks.
I. Erection Procedures:
1. Submit a detailed outline of sequence and methods of erection.
J. Fabrication Records:
A record shall be kept for every piece of precast element produced showing the
following:
1. Type and No.
2. Date of pour
3. Concrete test results
4. Ref. Shop drawing No.
5. Type and duration of curing
6. Date of delivery to site
7. Date of fixing in position

20th October 2021
K. Test Reports:
Submit copies of all testing and Inspection Reports required under Clause 1.08
"TESTING".
A. Precast elements shall be designed to withstand all loading conditions against which
strength and serviceability must be measured.
B. Vertical loads shall include own weight of precast elements, slabs, floor covering and
live loads indicated on the Contract drawings.
C. Wind pressure shall be calculated in accordance with IBC-2000/UBC97 "wind loads"

using basic wind speed of not less than 45 m per second
D. Account must be taken of the loads and deformation caused by temperature and time
dependant deformations. For such purpose 55 degrees centigrade temperature
variation and 90% relative humidity should be considered for all members, except
o
exterior elements & facade elements shall consider exposure to temperature of 84 C.
E. Floor systems are assumed to function as rigid diaphragm with respect to in plane
forces. Forces due to lateral loads should be considered to achieve this assumed
condition when designing peripheral beams and continuity ties etc.
F. Pre-stressed and precast elements shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318. The
design tensile stresses should not exceed the design flexure tensile stress of concrete.
G. Nominal cover to steel including links must meet the durability requirement of severe
condition of exposure and to meet requirement for 2 hour period of fire resistance.
H. Total deflection of any precast element should be limited to 1/350 of the span of this
element. Camber of pre-stressed beams should not exceed 1/300 of the span.
I. Plan & Design for openings for building services, where required or necessary.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Pre-stressing shall be done by methods and with related equipment that are in
conformance with an accepted system of pre-stressing and shall be to the approval of
B. Structural precast and pre-stressed concrete work shall be executed by an approved

specialist Sub- Contractor with minimum of 10 years experience unless the
Contractor can satisfy the Engineer’s Representative that he (the Contractor) has
sufficient experience and expertise in this field to execute this work himself in which
case his tradesmen and his supervisory personnel engaged in such work must have
successful experience with work comparable to that shown and specified including
organized quality control and testing procedures.
C. All pre-stressing work shall be under the immediate control of a person experienced
in this type of work. He shall exercise rigid control of all operations as necessary for
full compliance with all requirements. He shall be available at the casting site at all
times during placement of tendons, reinforcing, stressing operations and concreting.

20th October 2021
D. Welder: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4.
1.07 TESTING
A. Concrete shall be tested. Refer to Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-place Concrete" Clause

for 'Quality Control' for testing requirements.
B. Conduct load tests in accordance with ACI 318 after erection and casting of topping
slab/slab to substantiate the performance characteristics of structural precast and
precast pre-stressed elements where instructed by the Engineer.
1. Review itinerary with the Engineer’s Representative prior to testing.
2. Provide calibrated instrumentation for measuring and recording loads,

deflections, stresses and strains.
C. The Engineer’s Representative will evaluate the adequacy of the Contractor's quality
control. In addition to the requirements hereinafter specified under Paragraph "MIX
DESIGN", the Contractor shall:
1. Furnish labor required to facilitate testing.
2. Inform the Engineer’s Representative with at least one day's advance notice
when concrete is to be placed.
3. Provide storage facilities for concrete test cubes.
4. Provide material samples and access to materials as required for testing.
D. Be responsible for the expense of testing or inspection resulting as a consequence to

the following:
1. Work not evidencing compliance with this Specification.
2. Additional testing such as additional cubes for early breaks, etc., for
construction purposes.
3. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, without
proper supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice.
4. Providing additional tests as specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete".
E. The Engineer’s Representative may station a qualified inspector at the batch plant
during the entire time of batching, and shall continuously test, inspect, and report on
the following; should the plant be located more than 500 meters away from the site
offices, the Contractor shall provide suitable transport, for the sole use of the
Engineer’s Representative staff.
1. The batching equipment and procedures.
2. The conformance of the materials (cement, aggregates, water and

admixtures) to the approved materials.
3. The proportioning of the concrete.
4. Mix transport equipment.
F. The Engineer’s Representative will station a qualified inspector at the casting site to
continuously test, inspect and report on the following: should the plant be located

20th October 2021
more than 500 meters away from the site offices, the Contractor shall provide suitable
transport, for the sole use of the Engineer’s Representative staff.
1. For each 100 cubic meter of each different concrete type or portion thereof
cast per day, the following tests will be performed in accordance with the
applicable standards.
a. Six strength tests using 150 x 300 mm cylinders made from a mix
selected at random. Break 3 cylinders at age 7 days and three
cylinders at age 28 days. Additional test specimens may be cast for
construction progress control purposes.
b. Two Slump Tests: ASTM C143.
c. Two Temperature Tests: Use thermometer calibrated to +/- 0.5%

accuracy. Immerse the thermometer probe into concrete batches
selected at random at time of placement. Stabilized temperature of
concrete shall be less than the specified 30 Deg. C. limit.
2. Check all reinforcing, strands, de-bonding and jacking installations to verify

conformance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.
3. Check all embedded items to verify conformance with Contract documents

and approved shop drawings.
4. Check all formwork to verify conformance with Contract Documents and

approved shop drawings.
5. Check all openings and provisions for full co-ordination with all trades in the
Contract, as shown on approved shop drawings.
G. The Contractor shall provide facilities and equipment for the conducting of all tests
specified herein except for the strength test which should be carried out by an
independent testing agency. Test specimens may be cured by immersion.
H. All welding of steel supports, anchorages, connections and attachments will be

visually inspected and measured by the Engineer’s Representative.
A. The Contractor shall prepare and provide his quality control program for structural
precast and precast pre-stressed concrete work with particular attention to details,
pre-checking processes, procedures and close supervision. In order to assure that
proper work is performed to prevent later corrective actions, the Contractor shall
provide at least one man full time to provide quality control for structural precast and
precast pre-stressed concrete work. This assignment will not relieve the Contractor's
other quality control personnel of their duties relative to the quality control of the
structural requirements and surface finish of the structural precast and precast pre-
stressed concrete work.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the training of his quality control personnel who will
perform quality control of structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete work.
Training shall include but is not limited to materials, evaluation, special mix design
techniques, mix placement, vibrator selection and use, formwork details, formwork
protection and release agent use, reinforcing steel, tendons, de-bonding, inserts and
jacking detailing and installation, finishing equipment and techniques, corrective
procedures and protection of completed work.

20th October 2021
C. The Contractor's quality control personnel shall be responsible for verifying all details
necessary to produce the final structural design objectives. The Contractor's quality
control personnel shall also verify the quality of the structural precast and precast
pre-stressed concrete work and guide the production of results which will be within
acceptable physical tolerances
A. Within a reasonable time prior to commencement of structural precast and precast

pre-stressed concrete work, the Contractor shall schedule a pre-construction meeting
at a mutually agreeable time with the Engineer’s Representative and his designated
Representatives, to discuss design, materials, methods of work and forming systems
for structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete work.
B. Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer’s Representative all
pertinent information including written procedural outlines, description of forming
systems, brochures of proposed equipment, sources of all materials and
characteristics of all materials. The above information shall be received by the
Engineer’s Representative at least 30 days prior to the pre-construction meeting.
C. During the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall present an outline plan for
all concrete work to be accomplished and indicating special procedures relative to the
structural precast pre-stressed concrete work. The outline shall include reviews of
sources of materials commentary on source, source variations during the course of
the work, storage and use of materials, description of all equipment necessary for
batching, mixing, conveying, placing, forming, reinforcing, pre-stressing, compacting,
and finishing of structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete.
A. Remove the structural precast and precast pre-stressed elements from the form
without damaging or over stressing and store or place for transportation on a stable
bed that will not allow further distortion of the member. Separate stacked members
with suitable battens and bracing.
B. Coat all exposed tendon ends and exposed metal inserts with rust preventive paint as
indicated on the Drawings.
C. Mark each member with an identifying reference or piece mark, and the date of
casting. All piece marks are to be correlated with test reports and plan layouts or
erection drawings.
D. Transport the structural precast and precast pre-stressed element with sufficient
battens, bracing, and supports so as not to over-stress by vibration or impact
loadings.
E. Transport, store and handle structural precast and precast pre-stressed units in a
manner to avoid undue strains, hair cracks, staining, or other damage. Deliver units
from casting site to contract site in accordance with schedule and proper setting
sequence. Store structural precast and precast pre-stressed units free of the ground
and protected from wind or rain splashes. Cover units, secure covers firmly, and
protect the units from dust, dirt or other staining materials.
F. During fabrication, construction and after erection, protect castings to avoid possibility of
any damage.

20th October 2021
1.11 CO-ORDINATION
A. The Work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other
sections. Verify dimensions and Work of other trades which adjoin or pass through
materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators:
1. Index, Kuwait
2. Recafco, Kuwait
3. Alamiah Building Co. Kuwait
4. IBC, Kuwait
5. High Slant Contracting and Trading Co. Kuwait
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Obtain cement, aggregates and water from single source, sufficient to
complete the entire structural precast and precast pre-stressed concrete work and to
assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of color. Provide all materials in
accordance with and meet all applicable requirements of Section 03300 "Cast-In-
Place-Concrete".
B. Reinforcing Bars ASTM A 615, Grade 60 in general and as required, Grade 40

where welding is utilized, epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A 775 M-00 B.
C. Pre-stressing Tendons:
1. Strand: Strands used in pre-tensioning tendons shall be as per requirements

shown on drawings and as specified. Strands shall conform to ASTM A416-
99 "Specification for steel Strands Uncoated Seven-Wire for Pre-stressed
Concrete" Grade 270,
2. Coating: Un-bonded parts of tendons shall have the pre-stressing steel for
that part permanently protected against corrosion by a properly applied
coating of epoxy material. The coating shall remain free from cracks and
shall not become fluid over the entire operating or anticipated range of
temperatures. The coating shall be chemically stable and be non-reactive to
material used for sheathing. The coating material shall adhere to and be
continuous over the entire tendon length to be un-bonded.
3. Sheathing: The sheathing for un-bonded tendons in case of pre-tensioning

shall have sufficient tensile strength and water-resistance to resist un-
repairable damage and deterioration during transport, storage and
installation. The sheathing shall be continuous over the tendon length to be
un-bonded. The sheathing shall prevent the intrusion of cement paste and
the escape of coating material.
D. Inserts, Embedment And Anchorages in Pre-stressed Work: These shall be proprietary

as required for compliance with performance characteristics indicated and as follows:

20th October 2021
1. All pre-stressing steel shall be secured at the ends by acceptable anchoring

devices which shall be of such nature that wires will not kink, break down, or
otherwise be damaged.
2. Anchorage devices shall hold the pre-stressing steel without slip of more than
3 mm at a load equal to the applied load on the wire at pre-stressing.
3. Distribution plates shall consist of welded steel or cast steel bearing assemblies
that will permanently support and distribute the load from the anchoring devices
as follows:
a. Materials shall meet requirements of ASTM A 36 for structural

shapes, or ASTM A 148 for cast steel, or higher quality materials as
required to meet stress requirements.
b. Bending stresses in the plates induced by the pull of the pre-

stressing steel shall not exceed 1400 kg/cm2 for structural steel and
1050 kg/cm2 for cast steel, except if acceptable test data indicates
that higher stresses are satisfactory. For high strength steel,
correspondingly higher stresses may be permitted.
c. Materials shall meet requirements of ASTM A 36 for structural

shapes, or ASTM A 148 for cast steel, or higher quality materials as
required to meet stress requirements.
d. Design, fabrication and erection shall meet the latest AISC Standards,
Welding AWS Standards including Qualification Test of Welders.
e. Bolts and nuts shall be high-tensile steel and shall conform to ASTM A 325.
4. Hot dipped galvanized dowels, inserts, bolts and welds shall conform to ASTM
A123 and A316.
5. Stainless steel dowels, inserts, bolts and welds shall conform to ASTM A276,
A316.
E. De-bonding Compound for Dowel Bars: De-bonding compound shall consist of 66%
of 200 pen bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote oil and, when cold, brought
to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha or other approved
compound meeting the following requirements:
1. It shall not retard or in any other way affect the setting of concrete.
2. The average bond stress on bars coated with the compound with half their
length, as shown on the Drawings, cast into concrete specimens and subject
to pull out tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1380 N/m2 and the total
movement of the dowel bar relative to the concrete shall be not less than
0.25 mm at that stress. The concrete specimens shall be 150 x 150 mm in
section and 450 mm long and made with the same mix proportions as used
in the Works.
2.03 MIX DESIGN
A. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mixes as required to obtain the strength specified.
1. Compressive Strength
a. Structural Precast Concrete shall be as follows unless otherwise stated:

20th October 2021
i. For Pre-tensioning or non-pre-stressed : 40 MPa ( 500

Kg/sq.cm cube strength) minimum at 28 days and 28 MPa (
350 Kg/sq. cm) at the time of transfer.
ii. For Post-tensioning : 40 MPa ( 500 Kg/sq.cm cube strength)

minimum at 28 days.
2. Slump: 50 mm +/- 12 mm
3. Air Entrainment: 5% minimum, 7% maximum
2.04 FORMWORK
A. ACI 347: As required to constantly maintain dimensional and surface finish controls
specified in Sub-Clause 3.03 “Tolerances ". Formed surfaces of the structural precast
and precast pre-stressed elements are to be at least as smooth, flat and joint free as
19 mm plywood formed finished.
B. Construct forms of non-staining metal, fiber glass reinforced polyester, or other approved
material. Fabricate and reinforce for close control of dimensions, shapes, profiles,
curvatures, smooth and perfect edge, and corner finishes and details. Make forms
sufficiently rigid so that precast units will meet the casting tolerances. Construct forms
tightly to prevent leakage of water or mortar. Form joints will not be permitted on faces
exposed to view in the finished work.
C. Form release agent shall be non-staining type.
2.05 CLEANING OF STRANDS
A. - strands, re-bars and embedded items.
2.06 BEARING PADS
A. Elastomeric neoprene, conforming to Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (Section

14 Division 1 - Design and Section 18 Division 2 – Construction) adopted by the American
Association of State Highway Transportation Officials.
1. Use un-factored loads for design
2. Maximum compressive stress = 70 kg/sq. cm
3. Maximum shear stress = 7 kg/sq. cm
4. Maximum shear deformation = 1/2 thickness
5. Maximum compressive strain = 15 %
2.07 GROUT
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place

Concrete".
B. Epoxy Grout: Manufacturers are listed below or approved equal:
1. "Expocrete GP" (Expandite Ltd).

20th October 2021
2. "Hypol Epoxy Grout" (HBM Polymer Products Ltd)
3. "Sikadur 42" (Sika Ltd).
2.08 EMBEDDED STEEL
A. All embedded items shall be of hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM A 123.
2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Testing and analyzing stressing tendons.
B. Check cube strength of the members in accordance with ASTM C31.
C. Conduct slump test in accordance with ASTM C143.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown
on shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare support equipment for erection procedure, temporary bracing, and induced
loads during erection.
3.03 FORMING
A. General: Forms and casting beds are to be firmly seated so as not to deflect or be
displaced under concreting or tensioning loads. Correct for thermally induced strains
or forces.
1. For member penetrations larger than 150 mm coring or field cutting is not
permitted unless prearranged with and approved by the Engineer’s
Representative.
2. Clean and coat forms with release agent prior to installation or reinforcing or
embedment.
B. Refer to Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for materials and other

requirements of formwork.
C. Tolerances: Permissible deviations of formed surfaces are not to exceed tolerances

outlined in PCI Manual 116, summarized and /or modified as follows:
1. Dimensions
a. Length : +/- 5mm.
b. Width : +/- 3mm
c. Thickness : Stem +/- 3mm; Flange +/- 2.0mm.
d. Embedment or Penetration Location : +/- 0.2%
2. Straightness : +/- 3mm. for 300 cm

20th October 2021
3. End Squareness : +/- 3mm.
3.04 STEEL PLACEMENT
A. Place mild steel and pre-stressing steel in accordance with properly executed
placement drawings.
B. Embedment, inserts and lifting devices are to be firmly anchored to resist

misplacement during concreting.
C. Tolerances: Maximum permissible deviation from detailed placement.
1. Mild Steel Reinforcing : Surface clearance +/- 6 mm.
2. Pre-stressing Tendons and Anchorages : +/- 3 mm.
3. Embedment
a. In Plane : +/- 1/200
b. In Position : +/- 6 mm
D. Broken strands and strands showing severe fabrication defects shall be removed and
replaced.
E. Un-bonded part of tendons shall be coated with rust preventive, lubricating mastic
and enclosed in a sheath that will permit the tendons for that part to return to their
natural length.
F. Each tendon shall be marked and clearly identified for its location in the work.
Tendons may be handled mechanically or manually. Care should be exercised in
unloading and handling the tendons. Belt or webbed slings are recommended when
tendons are handled mechanically.
G. Tendon placement shall not vary more than 3 mm vertically from the points dimensioned.
Tendons may not be moved laterally to clear openings and/or sleeves.
H. Concrete between tendons and openings in slabs shall be at least 150 mm.
Reinforcing steel shall be required at corners of all openings.
I. Profiles are maintained by tying tendons to reinforcing steel, clips or other supports
with wire ties. Tendons should be supported at a maximum spacing of 1.2 m centre to
centre.
J. When welding or burning near tendons, care should be exercised to prevent tendon
from over-heating, or molten slag coming in contact with the tendon. Grounding of
welding equipment to tendon will not be allowed.
K. See Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Reinforcement" for additional requirements for all

reinforcing bars.
3.05 TENSIONING THE TENDONS
A. Pre-tensioning: When pre-tensioning, the tension shall be fully maintained by some

positive means during the period between tensioning and transfer. The transfer of
stress shall take place slowly to minimize shock which will adversely affect the
transmission length.
1. Straight Tendons:

20th October 2021
a. In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient locator plates

shall be distributed throughout the length of the bed to ensure that
the wires or strands are maintained in their proper position during
concreting. Where a number of units are made in line, they shall be
free to slide in the direction of their length and thus permit transfer of
the pre-stressing force to the concrete along the whole line.
b. In the individual mould system, the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid

to provide the reaction to the pre-stressing force without distortion.
2. Deflected Tendons:
a. Where possible, the mechanisms for holding- down or holding-up

tendons shall ensure that the part in contact with the tendon is free to
move in the line of the tendon so that frictional losses are nullified. If,
however, a system is used which develops a frictional force, this
force shall be determined by test and due allowance made.
b. For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon shall have
a radius of not less than five (5) times the tendon diameter for wire or
ten (10) times the tendon diameter for a strand and the total angle of
deflection shall not exceed 15 D.
c. The transfer of the pre-stressing force to the concrete shall be

effected in conjunction with the release of hold-down and hold-up
forces, so that any tensile stresses in the concrete resulting during
the process do not exceed permissible limits.
B. All tendons shall be stressed by means of hydraulic jacks, equipped with accurate
reading calibrated hydraulic pressure gauges to permit the stress in the pre-stressing
steel to be computed at any time. A certified calibrated curve from a recognized
testing laboratory shall accompany each jack. If inconsistencies between the
measured elongation and the jack gauge reading occur, the jack gauges shall
immediately be re-calibrated.
C. Tendon force measured by gauge pressure must be within 5% with the tendon force
calculated by elongation measurement.
D. Individual tendon elongations shall be within 5% of that calculated. The total tendon
elongation sum of any structural member or system shall be equal to the average
calculated elongation of all tendons required by the member or system +/- 2%. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for re-tensioning of all elements until such
criteria is satisfied.
E. In no case shall the steel be tensioned above 80% of the ultimate strength of the
strand. The anchor force shall not exceed 70% of the ultimate strength of the strand.
F. No pre-stressing tendon shall be cut until reviewed by the Engineer’s Representative.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Batch, transport, deposit, consolidate and strike off the concrete to produce dense
homogeneous concrete elements.
B. Surface Finishes:
1. Tee Beams

20th October 2021
a. To Receive Bonded Topping: Broomed perpendicular to axis with stiff

brush just sufficient to remove the outer mortar skin and expose the
larger aggregate without disturbing the aggregate.
b. Exposed: Hand troweled.
c. Concealed: Floated.
C. Curing: Retain moisture to ensure complete hydration of the Cement.
1. Membrane forming curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to which

topping is eventually to be bonded.
2. Steam curing:
a. Do not apply steam until concrete under- goes initial set (2 to 4

hours).
b. Heat Gain in Enclosure: Maximum 4 Deg. C per hour.
c. Maximum Heat in Enclosure: 65 Deg. C.
3.07 SURFACE TREATMENT AND REPAIR
A. General: Minor cracks and spalls not affecting the structural integrity of the element
can be patched with epoxy type bonding agents and patching compounds:
1. Cracks and honeycomb, in anchorages, bearings or otherwise critical zones will

be unacceptable unless repair can be effected and substantiating testing
performed.
2. Structural repair without the Engineer’s Representative knowledge is strictly

prohibited.
3.08 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erection responsibilities include the safe and proper placing, aligning, and
leveling of the structural precast and precast pre-stressed elements on the accepted
bearing surfaces and affecting their proper securement.
B. Survey: Before placement of structural precast and precast pre-stressed elements

survey and maintain all temporary supports shown or required to control alignment,
deflection, and stress levels. Retain temporary supports until framing elements braced
thereby have attained integral stability in accordance with the design.
C. Guying, Bracing and Shoring: Install in proper sequence and maintain all temporary
supports shown or required to control alignment, deflection and stress levels. Retain
temporary supports until framing elements braced thereby have attained integral
stability in accordance with the design.
D. Adjustment and Correction: Compensate and correct for mis-aligning effect of

temperature, draw from welding, bolting or erection sequence or grouting.
E. Welding: In accordance with AWS recommendations:
1. Do not weld until all adjacent elements to be connected have been aligned,
firmly seated and braced.

20th October 2021
2. Control heat build-up by limiting voltage, electrode size, and rate. Spalled or
heat damaged concrete around weldment is not acceptable.
F. Grouting: Complete joints, gaps and connections by filling with grout as shown on
Drawings and as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
3.09 FIELD CUTTING
A. Field cutting of holes may be done only with the Engineer’s Representative
concurrence, and only with power saws or core drills.
1. Maximum hole size is 150 mm diameter or as limited by member size or

strand location.
2. Cracks, spalls and sharp corners created by field cutting are to be ground,
eased, and patched with epoxy type bonding and patching compounds.
A. Erect member’s level and plumb within allowable tolerances.
B. Conform to PCI MNL-116S.
C. Erection Tolerances: Comply with the following erection tolerances:
1. Variations from Plumb: 6mm in any 6m run; 12mm total in any 12m or longer run.
2. Variation from Level or Elevation: 6mm in any run; 12mm in any 12m run;
total 12mm at any location.
3. Variation from Position in Plan: +/- 12mm maximum at any location.
4. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members at Any Joint: 1.5mm in any 3m

run; 6mm maximum.
3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations.
B. Use non-combustible shields during welding operations to protect adjacent Work.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean weld marks, dirt, or blemishes from surface of exposed members.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 52 00
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work covered by this Section as indicated on drawings and

specified herein, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services
1. Perform all operations in connection with the placement of lightweight

concrete fill.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete.
3. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for

Concrete.
5. ASTM C332 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for

Insulating Concrete.
6. ASTM C495 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Lightweight Insulating Concrete.
A. Materials shall be:
1. Approved by Engineer.
B. Installer: Approved by the Engineer.
C. Comply with recommendations of materials manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required.
Gulf Consult Lightweight Concrete Fill III-2/03 52 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed literature describing all materials and
installations requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide roof plans showing all roof elements including all mechanical
and electrical items.
1. Slope: Show amount of slope in millimeters per meter and total rise in
millimeters above substrate.
A. Lightweight concrete is applied to structural concrete slab with all other components
located above this.
B. Roofing system is conventional type with lightweight concrete located below the
cement screed below waterproofing membrane.
C. 1. Slope: Minimum 2%
2. Thickness: Minimum 50 mm
D. Deck Fill Assembly:
1. Structure: Concrete deck with no slope.
2. Lightweight concrete above concrete deck provided with slope.
3. Mortar screed applied to cementitious fill (Light Weight Concrete)
4. Membrane waterproofing, specified elsewhere, applied to mortar screed.
5. Insulation: Rigid board, specified elsewhere.
6. Filter fabric laid over rigid insulation.
7. Surfacing as specified in the drawings and enclosure.
E. Light Weight Concrete: Required at all roofs for proper slope and drainage.
F. Performance Criteria:
1. Wind Rating: Equivalent to that specified elsewhere for membrane roofing.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Conditions: Install lightweight concrete only when satisfactory

conditions prevail.
1. Do not apply when excessive moisture is present on roof deck.
2. Temperature: Lightweight concrete shall not be placed when temperatures is

42 degrees C and rising.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Roofing system, including lightweight concrete, is subject to terms of

warranty specified in Section 07 55 00 Composite Roofing System.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE
A. Mix Design: Design for concrete mix should produce the following physical properties.
1. Dry Density: 350 - 500 kg/m3
2. Compressive Strength: 25 kg/cm2
3. Use minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
4. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install deck fill in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and approved
shop drawings to insure proper drainage.
B. Mixing and Placing:
1. Mix lightweight concrete in Manufacturer approved equipment and pump into

place.
2. Slurry coats double casting, and two-density casting are acceptable methods
of installation.
C. Finishing: Screed lightweight concrete to the proper thickness and slope with a surface
free of ridges and sharp projections prior to installation of the roofing membrane.
A. Testing:
1. Check the cast density on the roof deck and adjust the mix to obtain the
required cast density.
2. Sample minimum of 4 test specimens (75 x 150 mm cylinders) the point of

placement daily or for each 60 m3 of material placed.
3. Protect samples from damage and temperature extremes and test

accordingly to ASTM C495.
4. Do not oven-dry samples prior to compressive testing.
5. Testing shall be conducted and reported by an independent agency.
3.03 CLEAN-UP AND WORK STOPPAGE PROCEDURES
A. Completion: Begin roofing when the lightweight concrete roof system can withstand
construction traffic.
1. This is usually 2 to 5 days after the deck has been placed. The roof deck
should not be left exposed for longer than 5 to 7 days.

20th October 2021
2. Provide temporary tarpaulins as needed to protect insulating concrete from

rain entering the roof deck after the deck is cast and finished.
B. Provide water cut-offs at perimeters, sealed to substrate with suitable mastic;

Remove cut-offs when subsequent work starts.
C. Clean-up: Remove unused building materials from jobsite and leave completed roof
deck ready to receive membrane roofing specified elsewhere.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 53 05
CONCRETE SCREED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Architectural floor screed as a sub-base required for floor finishes like tile
(Ceramic, Stone/marble, Terrazzo and the like) and sealed concrete surface
etc.
2. Concrete screed as a sub-base to receive self-leveling screed base under

carpet, vinyl and similar finishes.
1. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcements
2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
4. Division 9 – All sections related to floor finishes
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following (latest editions):
1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete
2. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, mixing, Transporting and

Placing Concrete
3. ACI 305.1 - Specifications for Hot Weather Concreting and ACI

305R Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
4. ACI 214R-02 - Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete
5. ASTM C94/C94M- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
6. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate
7. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
9. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Hydraulic Cement Mortars
Gulf Consult Concrete Screed III-2/03 53 05 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include sizes, performances, finishes and similar information.
B. Pre-contract Samples:
1. Literature only.
C. Post Contract Samples:
1. In accordance with Submittal Procedures, samples of all materials and

products to be provided following contract award. Samples to be a minimum
size of 600mm x 600mm or minimum 1000mm length as appropriate.
A. Concrete screed, shall be laid to thickness as shown on drawing or as implied by the

situation.
B. The minimum cylinder strength of concrete must be 30N/mm2.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
other components, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Lay concrete screed/topping for an area of 10-15 square metres, along with control
joints at places as directed. Co-ordinate work along with other disciplines, to have a
final finish. Approved mock-up can remain as part of final work.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: All Tests required and/or specified herein and/or
elsewhere shall be carried out at the Site Laboratory or at the State Research Station
Laboratories – MPW (MPW Laboratory) or other approved Agency.
B. Testing:
1. Provide technical reports recording test results as required by the Engineer

or where specified laboratory mock-up testing is required, prior to
commencement of installation.
2. Undertake on-Site and off-Site testing as required to demonstrate compliance

with the performance requirements. Testing to include, but not be limited to:
a. Slip resistance testing of walk-able surfaces (dry and wet conditions).
b. Impact and Strength.
c. Adhesion.
3. These reports to state compliance with the requirements of the Specification

20th October 2021
and include, where appropriate, test certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates from a single source for
exposed concrete. Aggregates shall be hard, durable and free of material that reacts
with cement or causes staining.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: Two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding o damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
E. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi - rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with
a Compressive strength of 60 MPa as per ASTM C579.
F. Ready mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94.
G. Mesh reinforcement: Shall conform to ASTM A185.
H. Bonding Agent: Mastercast 141 by BASF, Nitobond SBR by Fosroc, SikaLatex by

SIKA
2.02 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1,

Type 1, Class A.
2.03 SCREED
A. Comply with ACI standard 211.1 Assume responsibility for strength, consistency,
water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete cement fine aggregate and various
sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.
1. 28-day compressive strength of cylinders shall be 30N/mm2.
B. Grout: Cement and water mixed with bonding agent as approved to make stiff slurry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, for conditions affecting performance of screed. Proceed with

application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

20th October 2021
B. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by the plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and

unsound concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified
surface profile with amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base
slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair

bond of screed.
3. Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of 13 mm
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
screed surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where joint

sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than

one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer’s written

instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of (1.6 to 3 mm), without
puddling. Place floor topping while adhesive is still tacky.
B. Place screed continuously, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with
bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane free of humps or hollows.
C. Apply the screed to such thickness that the total of the work measured from substrate
to finished surface shall be as shown less only thickness of finish covering.
D. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as screed can

support equipment and operator. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
spots. Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and
consolidate screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue
troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is smooth and uniform in
texture.

20th October 2021
a. Tolerance in surfaces for finishes shall not exceed 3mm in 3 meters

in any direction.
E. Surface finish of screed:
1. Rough finish for the area to receive sand cement mortar bed
2. Power float finish (smooth) for the area to receive self-leveling screed
F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of screed, at locations indicated or as approved.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed
is placed against hardened or partially hardened screed.
G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws

equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut (3-mm-) wide
joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before screed develops random contraction cracks.
1. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness,

but not less than 13 mm deep.
3.04 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to screed surfaces in hot, dry, or

windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying screed, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the
following methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven
days with water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously
wet. Cover screed surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with
sides and ends lapped at least 300 mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing and sealing compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous

operations by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.

20th October 2021
3.05 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler
flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.06 REPAIRS
A. Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not bonded to
concrete substrate.
A. A. Testing: All Tests required and/or specified herein and/or elsewhere shall be
carried out at the Site Laboratory or at the State Research Station Laboratories –
MPW (MPW Laboratory) or other approved Agency.
B. Fabricated Mockups: Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical

joints, surface finish, bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups approximately in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as

directed by Engineer.
2. If Engineer determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish

and remove them from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.
C. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
D. Quality Benchmark:
1. First structural bay for concrete floor toppings including typical trims and cast
in fixings accepted by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 54 00
SELF-LEVELING SCREED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Complete supply and installation of self-leveling underlayment for interior

finish flooring, like carpets and vinyl flooring etc...
1. Section 03 53 05 - Concrete Screed
2. Section 09 65 19 - Resilient Flooring
3. Section 09 68 00 - Carpeting
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals, as defined in Submittal Procedures, are required:
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Submit cured samples to be used.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to

manufacturer, and with minimum 5 years proven experience in cement-based
underlayment applications similar in material and extent to that required for this
Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturer of both the self-leveling screed and floor

covering shall certify in writing that products are compatible.
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

Gulf Consult Self-Leveling Screed III-2/03 54 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for

substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.
B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate cement-based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products,

including adhesives, specified in the sections of Division 9.
manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. BASF Construction Chemicals UAE
B. Ardex, UK
C. FOSROC, Kuwait
2.02 SELF LEVELLING SCREED
A. Self-leveling screed is a blend of specially selected cements, graded aggregates,

polymers and set control additives, supplied as a dry powder mix, which requires
water to be added to produce a smooth free flowing and self-leveling material applied
in minimum uniform thickness of 4 mm and that can be laid to a featheredge.
B. Water: Potable.
C. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of

underlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

20th October 2021
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions

for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment
application.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing

(reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing

compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that
might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with
underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's

written instructions.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-

substrate and intercoat adhesion.
2. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same
width to continue through underlayment.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading

rate.
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. Feather edges to match

adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

contamination during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of

construction period.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 03 60 00
GROUTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
equipment and services necessary to complete supply and installation of, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Cementitious Grouts.
2. Anchoring Grouts
3. Bedding Mortars
A. Control Sample: Complete a sample of the premixed and site mixed work in an
approved location and obtain approval before proceeding. Additive Manufacturer's
representative to be present to supervise control sample.
B. Standards:
1. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive strength of hydraulic
cement mortars.
2. ASTM C 579 – Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of
Chemical resistant grout.
3. ASTM C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin – Base bonding
system for concrete.
4. ASTM C 1107 – Standard specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic cement
Grout (Non-Shrink).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to works or phrases as utilized in this Section.
1. “Cementitious Grout” is a mixture of cementitious materials and water,
proportioned to produce a pourable (fluid) consistency without segregation of
the constituents.
2. “Anchoring Grouts” are grouts specifically materials designed for anchoring
purposes.
3. “Mortars” are cementitious or chemical materials proportioned to produce a
trowelable consistence for vertical and overhead repairs or bedding
purposes.
A. Product manufacturer, testing and installation shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise approved:
1. Cementitious grout shall typically be used where it is necessary to eliminate
shrinkage when filling the void between a base plate and a substrate such as
the grouting of stanchion bases.
2. Anchoring grouts shall be used to secure anchor bolts, rebar, or fill in tie rod
holes.
Gulf Consult Grouting III-2/03 60 00 - 1

20th October 2021
3. Grout manufacturer shall operate under a certified ISO 9000 Quality System.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, are
required:
A. Samples:
1. Submit sample of any proposed additives before delivery of material
generally.
2. Submit sample of any proposed premixed grout before delivery of material
generally.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit name of manufacturer of premixed grout and additives and specific
brand name.
2. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data.
3. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended mixing and placing
instructions.
C. Methods:
1. Prior to commencing work submit details of methods and techniques
proposed for the design and execution of the work.
A. Storage:
1. Store grout bags as per recommendations of the grout manufacturers.
2. Store out of direct sunlight, clear of the ground on pallets protected from
rainfall.
B. Handling:
1. Grout: Use grout within 30 minutes of mixing or in the time recommended by
the manufacturer of the additives.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to the compliance with the requirements as set with the basis of the design
provide the products by one of the following:
1. IBS MAPEI
2. BASF Construction Chemicals
3. FOSROC
4. SIKA
2.02 CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS
A. Cementitious grout shall comply with the following requirements.
1. Cementitious grout shall be a single pack special purpose product, which
requires only the addition of water at site and shall comply with the following:

20th October 2021
a. Non-shrink
b. Non-metallic
c. Chloride free
d. Minimum Compressive Strength (flowable consistency).
i. 48 N/mm2 at 7 days.
ii. 60 N/mm2 at 28 days.
2. Cementitious grouts shall comply with the following Standards:
a. ASTM C1107 for workability.
b. ASTM C232 for bleed water.
c. ASTM C878 for expansion.
2.03 EPOXY
A. Grout for anchoring rebar, bolts or other anchors shall be a pre-measured two or
epoxy resin specifically developed for anchoring purposes.
1. The resin must be non-expansive and tolerant to wet or damp surfaces.
2. Minimum compressive strength: 90 N/mm2 (7 days)
3. Minimum flexural strength 30 N/mm2 (7 days), ASTM C580-74
4. Minimum tensile strength: 14N/mm2 (7 days)
2.04 BEDDING MORTARS
A. Bedding mortars for pre-cast elements shall be pre-bagged cementitious products
requiring only the addition of water at site.
1. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 60 N/mm².
2. Site mixed sand / cement mortars are not allowed.
3. Bonding Agent: As recommended by the Manufacturer.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Additives: Subject to approval.
B. Water: As specified in Section 03 30 00 for Concrete.
1. In hot weather, use cold water to bring the mixed grout temperature to less
than 30oC.
2.06 MIXES
A. Mixing to be done as per recommendation of the manufacturer.
2.07 FORMWORK
A. As specified in Section 03 10 00: Concrete Forms and Accessories.
B. For smaller areas to manufacturer's instructions.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the work of this Section is to be applied to
ensure that they are adequate to provide a satisfactory application.
B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Scrabble concrete surfaces to provide key.
B. Ensure spaces to receive grout are clean and free from debris.
C. Thoroughly wet surfaces and allow free water to disperse prior to application of grout.
3.03 FORMWORK:
A. Fix edge formwork where necessary.
B. Ensure formwork is secure and watertight to prevent movement and leaking during
the placing and curing of the grout.
C. Edge formwork to baseplates to be to the level of the plate.
D. Strike formwork within 24 hours of filling.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Place grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in relationship to
temperature and workability conditions.
B. Strike edges clean and compress to conditions as indicated on the drawings.
C. Materials shall be applied in position within one hour of mixing (unless manufacturer's
literature states otherwise). After half an hour discard any grout mix that shows signs
of stiffening.
D. As soon as grout sets, cure exposed surfaces with curing compound applied in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. Promptly, as the Work proceeds and upon completion, scrape off and remove all
grout materials from adjacent surfaces. Clean up and remove any surplus material
and rubbish resulting from the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 4
Masonry
SECTION 04 22 00
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry unit construction as back up for exterior cladding and for
interior walls and partitions.
2. AAC lightweight insulated block.
3. Reinforcing, ties, anchors, and other metal accessories, for anchoring unit
masonry together and to other materials.
4. Compressible joint fillers for joints with structural steel.
5. Compressible joint filler between joints at top of masonry wall units and soffits
of the structure.
6. Built-in masonry flashing.
1. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
2. Section 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing
3. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A153/A153M - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
2. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-


Carbon Steel Wire.
4. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
5. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry

Units.
6. ASTM C126 - Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay

Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units.
Gulf Consult Concrete Unit Masonry III-2/04 22 00 - 1

20th October 2021
7. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry

Units.
8. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete

Masonry Units.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 - “Specifications for Masonry Structures”
1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 - “Specifications for Masonry Structures” to exclude

Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2 and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3,
2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement
for installing vent pipes and conduits built into masonry.
2. "TEK" Information Series, Published by the National Concrete Masonry

Association (NCMA).
3. ASTM A 82 - Steel Web, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products.
5. ASTM C 5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
6. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
7. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
8. ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
9. ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
10. ASTM C 404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
11. ASTM C 476 - Grout for Masonry.
12. ASTM C 595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
13. ASTM C 780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for

Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
14. ASTM C 1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
15. ASTM C 1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength
16. ASTM C 1093 - Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
17. ASTM C 1386 - Standard Covers Physical Requirements of Loadbearing

Compression and Non-Loadbearing AAC Units.
18. ASTM C 1555-03 - Standard covers workmanship of AAC, thin bed mortars,
and exterior and interior finishes.
19. ASTM ASTM E 90-97, E 413-87 and C 423-99a Sound Transmission Loss
Test (STC) - Airborne Sound Transmission Test on Walls.
20. ASTM C-469 Modulus of Elasticity - Stress Strain Curve of AAC in

Compression.

20th October 2021
21. ASTM E-78 Flexural Strength - Flexural Test of AAC Units to Determine
Flexural Strength.
22. ASTM E-518 Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry - Assembly of Masonry

Units Constructed as Beams.
23. ASTM E-519 Diagonal Tension Test of Masonry Assemblies - Full Scale AAC
Walls To Determine Shear Strength.
24. ASTM E-514 Test for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry -
Full Scale Wall Assemblies Subjected to Water Under Pressure Exposure.
25. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
26. ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products.
27. ASTM D 2287 - Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds.
28. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
29. IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather
Masonry Construction
C. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference
thereto:
1. UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2. IMI: Masonry Construction Guide Manual.
3. PCA, “Concrete Masonry Handbook”.
4. NCMA applicable TEK Bulletins.
D. Where the language in any document referred to herein is in the form of a

recommendation or suggestion, such recommendations or suggestions shall be
deemed mandatory under this Contract. In the event of conflict between referenced
standards, this specification or within themselves, the more stringent standard or
requirement shall govern.
A. Approved, preferably single-source for concrete masonry units: Obtain concrete

masonry units for the project from an approved, preferably single manufacturer.
B. Pre-construction testing: Subject to Engineer’s approval, the Contractor will employ

and pay a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform the following
preconstruction testing indicated as well as other inspecting and testing services
required by referenced unit masonry standard or indicated herein for source and field
quality control:
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each different concrete masonry unit
indicated, units will be tested for strength, absorption, and moisture content
as per ASTM C 140.

20th October 2021
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required:
1. Literature: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications, performance

data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder.
2. Material certificates: Provide for the following, signed by manufacturer and

Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements.
a. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout,

including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time
of delivery.
b. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
c. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
d. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
3. Material test reports from a qualified independent laboratory employed and

paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to
compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements
indicated:
a. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
b. Grout mixes: Include description of type and proportions of grout

ingredients.
c. Masonry units; report for tests performed within the previous six
months.
4. Samples:
a. Samples of each masonry accessory or anchorage item required.
5. Fire Ratings: Furnish data acceptable to governing agencies that concrete

unit masonry is manufactured to comply with fire ratings as shown and as
specified.
6. Concrete Masonry Units: Submit test data in accordance with ACI 530.1,
Article 1.4.B.2.b.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Work shall be done by skilled workmen, fully instructed as to the

requirements of this Specification and adequately supervised during the work.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a masonry wall mockup, 6m long, soffit high at a location where most of the
accessories can be used.
B. Incorporate mockup as part of Work if approved by Engineer’s Representative.

20th October 2021
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and

construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been
determined as per ASTM E 119 and ACI 216.1 by a testing and inspecting
organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this

section.
A. General: Do not deliver cement, lime, and similar perishable materials to the site until
suitable storage is available. Store such materials in weatherproof structures, and
ensure that materials are in perfectly fresh condition when brought for use. Protect
masonry units and manufactured products of all types from wetting and keep covered
when not in use.
B. Masonry face units: Handle all masonry units’ carefully in transit and on the site, so
as to keep units whole, with edges sharp, and faces clean and undamaged. Deliver
all masonry units on pallets; or handle units individually, and properly stack same.
C. Aggregates: Deliver, store and handle aggregate materials so as to prevent

contamination with earth or other foreign materials.
1. Store cement, lime and similar products under cover and from direct contact
with earth or floor slabs.
D. Manufactured items: Deliver manufactured products in original containers plainly

marked with product identification and manufacturer’s name.
1. Store metal accessories and the like under cover and from direct contact with
ground, and in manner to prevent rust.
E. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site
immediately, including materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks,
or which show other evidence of damage, unless Engineer’s Representative specifically
authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.
1.10 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate work with that of other trades which require placement and building-in of, as
work progresses, anchor bolts, wood blocking, hollow metal frames, window units, and
anchorage items.
B. Examine all Drawings as to requirements for the accommodation of work of other

trades. Provide all required recesses, chases, slots, and cutouts. Place anchors,
bolts, sleeves and other items occurring in the masonry work. Take every precaution
to minimize future cutting and patching. Closely coordinate the location and
placement of such items.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. National Industries
2. Kuwait Building Materials
3. Aziz Blocks
4. Maseelah Block Factory
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Provide load bearing solid, normal weight concrete masonry units which shall
conform to ASTM C90, Type 1, Class 1, normal weight where indicated and provide
fire resistant construction where indicated.
1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal

190 mm by 390 mm face dimension with light gray color and uniform
medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and line, and free from chips,
cracks, and other defects.
2. Aggregate: sand and gravel: conform to ASTM C 33.
3. Minimum allowable compressive strength for an individual unit of not less

than 100 Kg/cm2 (net area); and not less than 110 Kg/cm2 (net area) for
average of 3 units; when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
4. Oven dry density: 2000 kg/m3
5. Moisture content for average of 3 units, when delivered, not exceeding 35

percent of the total absorption, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
6. Provide units clearly labeled as “Load Bearing”.
B. Generally provide non-load bearing concrete masonry units: Conform to ASTM C129,
Type 1. Provide fire resistant construction where indicated.
1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal

190 mm by 390 mm face dimension with light gray color and uniform
medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and line, and free from chips,
cracks, and other defects.
2. Aggregate: sand and gravel, conform to ASTM C 33.
3. Minimum allowable compressive strength for an individual unit of not less

than 50 Kg/cm2 (net area); and not less than 55 Kg/cm2 (net area) for
average of 3 units; when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
4. Oven dry density:
a. Normal weight units: 2000 Kg/m3
5. Moisture content for average of 3 units, when delivered, not exceeding 35

percent of the total absorption, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.

20th October 2021
6. Provide units clearly labeled as “non-load-bearing” if “load bearing” units are

also being used.
C. Fire Resistant Masonry Units:
1. Fire resistant units shall fulfill all the requirements of the Kuwait Fire Service
Department.
2. Fire-resistant units shall be labeled accordingly.
D. Units not labeled or not properly labeled, will be considered as “non load bearing”
and “non fire-resistant”.
2.03 AAC BLOCK
A. Light Insulated Block Properties
1. Density 450 kg/m3 to 650 kg/m3 or Less density for better insulation.
2. Compressive Strength - > 3 - 4.5 ( IS 2185 ) N / Mm 2.
3. Normal Dry Density - 450 – 650 Kg / M 3.
4. Sound Absorption – Up to 42 De.
5. Fire Resistance – 4 Hr or required by AHJ.
6. Thermal Conductivity "K" - 0.16 - 0.18 W / Mk.
7. Thermal Resistance - 0.46 K-M2 / W.
8. Heat Transmission Coefficient 'U' - 2.17 W / M2k.
9. Drying Shrinkage - 0.04 % ( Size Of Block )
2.04 MASONRY MORTAR
A. The compressive strength of mortar at 28 days shall be not less than 12 N/mm2.
1. Prepare the specimens in the laboratory in accordance with the procedures

described in ASTM C270.
2. Prepare the specimens in the field as described in ASTM C780.
3. Carry out the compressive strength test in accordance with ASTM C109.
4. Cement content of the mortar shall be determined in accordance with ASTM

C780.
B. Cement/sand mortar ratio shall be 1:3 (by volume)
C. Mix all cementitious materials and aggregates for between 3 and 5 minutes in a
mechanical batch mixer, with sufficient amount of water to produce a workable
consistency. When only small quantities are required, the Engineer’s Representative
may permit hand mixing on a clean dry platform.
D. Aggregates for masonry mortar shall comply with ASTM C144

20th October 2021
1. Aggregate shall consist of natural sand or crushed sand as approved by the

2. The requirements shall be as follows, unless otherwise approved by the

a. Sieve Analysis
Sieve Size (mm) Natural Sand Crushed Sand
4.75 100 100
2.36 95 - 100 95 - 100
1.18 70 - 100 70 - 100
0.600 40 - 75 40 - 75
0.300 10 - 35 20 - 40
0.150 2 - 15 10 - 25
0.075 0-5 0 - 10
b. The aggregates shall not have more than 50% retained between two
consecutive sieves, nor more than 25% between 0.300mm and
0.150mm.
c. The fineness modules shall not vary more than 0.20 from the
approved value.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 1.0%
e. Light weight particles shall not exceed 0.5% .
f. For organic impurities tested to ASTM C40, the colour of the

supernatant solution shall not be darker than the reference standard
colour.
g. Tests for MgS04 soundness shall not exceed 12% loss.
E. Partially used mortar shall not be tempered with water, unless approved by the
Engineer’s Representative. All mortar which is unused within 45 minutes of mixing
shall be removed from the site, or otherwise disposed of.
F. Where plasticizers are permitted, they shall be used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
G. The mixer should be charged to its full design capacity for each batch and completely
emptied, before charging the next batch.
H. Volume boxes shall be used to proportion each mix.
1. Shovel measuring will not be permitted.
I. Add enough water to obtain the desired workability.
J. Smooth surfaces shall be roughed, to provide a key, prior to the application of mortar.

20th October 2021
2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES:
A. Provide steel fabrications for the reinforcement of masonry and for attachment of
masonry work to supports and construction by others. Provide reinforcement and
anchorages fabricated in hot-dipped heavily galvanized steel in accordance with
ASTM A 123.
1. Joint Reinforcement
a. Joint Reinforcement for concrete block work shall consist of parallel

No. 9 gauge diameter side rods and 3.9 mm butt welded truss or
ladder bars, conforming to ASTM A82 for cold drawn steel wire.
Width 38 mm to 50.8 mm (11/2 inches to 2 inches) less than wall
thickness.
b. Joint reinforcement shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication

conforming to ASTM A123.
2. Anchors, Ties & wall Restraints
a. Dovetail Anchor with columns: Minimum 1.6 mm by 25.4 mm wide by

length required to suit condition, corrugated hot-dipped galvanized
steel.
b. Adjustable Wall Ties for cavity walls : Composed of 1.9 mm by 25.4

mm by 177.8 mm with 7.1 mm hole corrugated hot-dipped galvanized
anchor and 4.8 mm diameter mill galvanized ASTM 82 OR B.S. 4482
cold drawn steel wire of proper length required for embedment in
with of masonry.
c. Wall Restraints shall be confirming to BS 1243 or DD 140: Part 2 and

shall be primed and painted angles/plates as shown in the drawings.
2.06 MANUFACTURERS
A. Catnic
B. Exmet
C. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge NY.
2.07 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT FILLERS
A. Bond Breaker Strips at top: Bitumen impregnated compressible filler 20mm thick of
width equal to 80% of wall width.
2.08 MASONRY WALL FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashings: Provide metal flashings as specified in section for “Sheet Metal
Flashings”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive the work of this
Section.

20th October 2021
B. Verify built-in and other items provided by separate Sections of the work are properly sized
and located.
C. Verify foundation walls supporting masonry is constructed within tolerances required by

code.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.
B. Supporting Structure (S.S.)
1. Do not commence installation until supporting structures are clean, rough,

and level.
2. Sandblast the supporting structure tops, if necessary, and remove all laitance
and foreign material.
3. Verify that the supporting structure elevation is such that the bed joint
thickness shall not vary from specified thickness, and that the edge is true to
line with masonry not projecting over more than 6 mm.
C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
D. Protect surfaces of windows, door frames, louvers and vents as well as similar finish
products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings and stains.
E. Hot Weather:
1. If the temperature is in excess of 38oC at time of installation, lightly moisten

contact surfaces of masonry units by brushing with water.
2. Implement item 4 and 5 when the ambient air temperature exceeds:
3. A.32oC with a wind velocity greater than 13 Km/hr.
4. Do not spread mortar beds more than 1.2m ahead of masonry.
5. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
3.03 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortar in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 270, ASTM C 94, and
ASTM C 476 as applicable. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions
by measuring materials by volume. Amount of mixing water and mortar consistency
shall be controlled by mason.
B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before mixing process.
C. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
D. Re-tempering will be permitted only within the first two hours of initial mix. Discard
mortar that has partially set.

20th October 2021
3.04 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true surface level for exposed to view walls and partitions:
1. Unit-to-unit tolerance: 2 mm.
2. Surface, overall tolerance: 6 mm in 3000 mm in any direction and 12 mm in

6000 mm or more.
a. Where both faces of single wythe wall or partition will be exposed to

view, request and obtain decision from the Engineer’s
Representative as to which face will be required to conform to the
specified surface level tolerance.
B. Maximum variation from plumb: For lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed 6 mm
in 3000 mm, 9 mm in any story up to 6000 mm maximum. At expansion joints and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6 mm in 3000 mm.
C. Maximum variation from level: For lines of sills, tops of walls and other conspicuous
lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 900 mm, 6 mm in 3000 mm and 12 mm in 900 mm.
D. Maximum variation of linear building line: For position shown in plan relating to
columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 12 mm in 6000 mm or 19 mm in 1200
mm.
E. Maximum variation in specified height: 12 mm per story.
F. Maximum variation of joint thickness: 3 mm in 75 mm.
G. Maximum horizontally projected unsupported masonry unit: 28 mm.
3.05 COURSING, BONDS AND JOINTS
A. Coursing, joints and bond pattern: Running bond except as otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
1. Exposed to view masonry: except as specified below, fill all joints with mortar,
strike off flush, and when mortar is thumb print hard tool joints with a non-
staining tool. Joints shall be free of drying crack.
a. Horizontal joints
1. Exterior joints at concrete masonry units: Rake

joints, brush clean, point with mortar to a flat cut
joint. When thumbprint hard, the joints and beds
shall be tooled with a round jointer having a diameter
3 mm larger than the width of the joint
2. Interior joints (all): Tool joints flush.
b. Vertical joints (all): Tool joints flush.
2. Concealed from view masonry, including masonry which will be concealed by

flashings and similar materials: Fill joints with mortar and strike joints flush.
Concave tool exterior joints below grade.

20th October 2021
3.06 LAYING MASONRY - GENERAL
A. Build the masonry walls and partitions in various combinations and thickness as
indicated on the Drawings. Maintain uniform thickness for all joints.
B. Erect all masonry work in compliance with the line and level tolerances specified
herein. Correct, or replace, as directed by the Engineer’s Representative, non-
conforming masonry work at no increase in Contract Price.
C. Lay out coursing before setting to minimize cutting closures or jumping bond. Less-
than-half-size units shall not be permitted.
D. Laying masonry units:
1. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints; uniformly joint with
other work.
2. Do not spread any more mortar than can be covered before surface of mortar
has begun to dry.
3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not

permitted.
4. Interlock intersections and external corners.
5. Cut all exposed masonry with a motor-driven carborundum blade saw to

ensure straight and clean, unchipped edges. Lay no unit having chipped
edges or face defects where such unit would be exposed to view.
6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove entirely, clean off mortar, and reset with fresh
mortar.
7. Except for cleaning down and pointing, finish all masonry as the walls and
partitions are carried up.
8. Where steel reinforcing rods have been cast into concrete slabs, and left with
upturned ends, carefully place masonry units down over the upturned ends of
the rods.
E. Except as indicated otherwise, isolate masonry from structural members :-
1. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a

compressible filler installed continuously so as to leave no gap and recessed
from each face by 20mm.
2. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing

members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler, also etc. as above.
F. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in

this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 200 mm of
masonry between chase recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases
and recesses.
G. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After

installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately
adjacent to the opening.

20th October 2021
H. Provide complete protection against breakage and weather damage to all masonry
work, including substantial wood boxing around door jambs, over the tops of walls
and wherever necessary to protect work at all stages of completion. Protect masonry
when not roofed over, at all times when masons are not working on the walls. Apply
tarpaulins or waterproof paper, properly weighted, or nailed, to assure their remaining
in place to protect masonry from all possible hazards.
I. Point and fill all holes and cracks in new mortar joints with additional fresh mortar; do
not merely spread adjacent mortar over defect or use dead mortar droppings.
J. Provide Fire sealant as per the section for sealants on both faces at top of perimeter
wall of fire zones.
K. Provide Acoustic sealant as per the section for sealants on both faces of all partition
walls.
3.07 FLASHING
A. Provide flashing where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and all
conditions which may be considered similar to those indicated on the Drawings.
3.08 CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION
A. Build inner wythe of cavity walls ahead of outer wythe to receive insulation and
air/vapor barrier adhesive.
B. Install 4 No butterfly tie for every sq. m. of wall staggered.
C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. Do not permit mortar to drop or

accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps.
A. Ensure proper material delivery, storage and handling.
B. Inspect surfaces to receive masonry and correct any deficiencies.
C. Examine masonry units (color, texture and size) required for installation against
approved sample and reject non-confirming units.
D. Check reinforcement, ties and accessories for correct size and configuration.
E. Check ingredients for mortar for compliance with specification.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 5
Metals
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, plant,
1. Perform all operations in connection with Structural Steelwork at locations shown

on the drawings.
2. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
3. Section 09 91 00 - Painting
A. American Institute of Steel Construction:

1. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware.
5. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel.
6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength.
7. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
8. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints (Metric).
9. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts
and Studs.
10. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
11. ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes
10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric).
12. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
13. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
Gulf Consult Structural Steel III-2/05 12 00 - 1

20th October 2021
14. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,

Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding.
15. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-
Manganese Steel of Structural Quality.
16. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
17. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(Metric).
18. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and
High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements
for.
19. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.
B. American Welding Society:

1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
C. Research Council on Structural Connections:

1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:

1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC S303.
B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC S303, Section 10.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 10

years documented experience and holding current AISC Certification.
E. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum10

years documented experience.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer for approval shop drawings including structural
calculations for all structural steel components and their connection all in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents showing the following:
1. Shop fabrication drawings which show type of material, size and weight of
members and other information necessary for the fabrication of each member
and for shop assembly of members of the structure. The drawings shall include
the type, size, location and extent of all welds and bolts. The drawings shall
clearly distinguish between shop and field, bolts and welds.
2. Field assembly and erection drawings which show all field assembly prior to
erection and after erection. The drawings shall indicate all details, schedules,
procedures and diagrams showing field assembly and sequence of erection.

20th October 2021
The information shall indicate locations of shorings and how shoring is

stabilized and controlled. The drawings shall indicate elevations of shored
points and splice locations. The procedures shall indicate step by step erection
sequences including intermediate surveys and allowances for temperature.
Diagrams shall indicate erection equipment size and weight and additional
elements which may be required to support or stabilize elements during
erection.
3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written procedures for
fabrication of the steel work. The procedure shall describe the complete
welding process including machine, current, voltage, preheat, filler metal,
welding system (manual, semi-automatic or automatic), positions of welding,
number of passes for each weld size, preparation of surfaces prior to welding,
etc. These procedures shall indicate the Contractor's quality control measures,
monitoring and repair procedures.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the arrangement of all joints and their
load carrying capacities. The connection may or may not be shown on the
Contract Drawings. Submit all details along with calculations to the Engineer
prior to fabrication for approval.
B. Manufacturer's Literature
1. Submit to the Engineer, manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for the following products, including laboratory test reports and
such other data to show compliance with these Specifications (including
specified standards):
a. Structural steel, (each type) including certified copies of mill reports
covering the chemical and physical properties, country and rolling mill
of origin, and including a statement indicating that the steel is new
billet steel and that testing has been performed in accordance with
ASTM or equivalent standards.
b. High strength bolts (each type) including nuts and washers.
c. Welding electrodes (each type).
d. Shop coat primer paint, field touch-up paint.
e. Intermediate and Finish Coat
f. Bearing materials or assemblies.
C. Testing Reports
1. The following reports shall be submitted in triplicate directly to the Engineer by
the Testing Laboratory, with copy to the Contractor.
a. Shop Welders Certification.
b. Field Welders Certification.
c. Magnetic particle tests, shop welds and field welds.
d. Ultra-sonic tests, shop welds and field welds.
e. High strength bolted connection tests, shop and field.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Structural steel work shall be executed by an approved well-experienced specialist

Sub-Contractor.
B. Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in

Kuwait to design and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the
performance requirements specified in this section and as required by applicable local
and international codes.

20th October 2021
1.06 TESTING
A. The Contractor shall engage, at his own expense, an independent certified 3rd Party
Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer to inspect all bolted
connections and welds, and to perform all tests and submit test reports to the Engineer
as herein specified.
B. The Contractor shall submit evidence regarding qualification of the proposed 3rd Party
Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory.
C. The Contractor shall provide the 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory with
the following:
1. A complete set of shop fabrication and erection drawings.
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills and mill test reports.
Provide certified copies of mill test reports of bolts, nuts and washers, including
names and locations of mills and shops and analyses of chemical and physical
properties.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to
shops.
4. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting
facilities, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
D. Bolted connections shall be inspected in accordance with AISC Specifications for

"Structural Joints Using ASTM F3125 / F3125M.
E. Welding shall be inspected and tested at the Contractor’s cost during fabrication and
erection of structural steel by the 3rd Party Inspection Company as follows:
1. All tests and inspections shall be as required by “Structural Welding
Code”/American Welding Society (AWS). Certify all welders in accordance
with AWS and make inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of all defects found in the work, and measures required and
performed to correct such defects.
2. In addition to visual inspection of all welds, magnetic particle and ultra-sonic
inspection shall be made for all welds indicated on the Drawings or as
instructed by Engineer. Magnetic particle inspection shall be made on the root
pass and finished weld.
3. The method of magnetic particle inspection shall be in accordance with ASTM
E109. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove
welds made from both sides, after back gouging or chipping, will be examined
by magnetic particle inspection (or dye penetration if magnetic particle
inspection is not feasible).
4. The edges of material to be welded will be ultrasonically examined for
evidence of laminations, inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to which
such defects will be permitted and the extent of repair permitted shall be
determined by the Inspector and made in accordance with ASTM A6,
Paragraph 9. Repairs made by welding shall be done in compliance with the
requirements of AWS D1.1 and the accepted welding procedures.
5. All welding should be carried out as per ANSI/AWS D1.1-2000 of American
Welding Society. All shop and field welds shall be tested as stated on
drawings.

20th October 2021
F. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all
shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the inspector can refer back to
the crew or person making the connection.
G. All shop and field welds shall be listed as stated on Drawings.
H. The technique of radiographic inspection will be in accordance with the requirements of

AWS D1.1. A double film technique will be used. One copy of each film will be sent to
the Engineer, the other will be retained by the Inspector.
I. Where inspection reveals defects, the extent of inspection will be increased as much
as necessary to ensure that the full extent of the defects in a joint has been found and
to ensure that the same defects are not present in welds made on similar parts or
under similar circumstances.
J. Work that is not acceptable will be designated by "Repair" or "Reject", as applicable.
K. Shop welds will be inspected in the shop before the work painted or approved for
shipment.
L. The Inspector will maintain a daily record of the work he has inspected and its
disposition. Reports of tests will be made in form prescribed in AWS D1.1. One copy of
each of the reports will be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis.
M. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections of high strength bolt connections as
required by AISC 348.
N. The 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for

conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each report whether or not the test
specimens conform to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall
specifically note any deviations therefrom.
O. Access to places where material for this Contract is being fabricated or produced shall
be provided to the Engineer and the 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory
for the purpose of inspection and testing. All costs relating to the Engineer and his staff
travel, lodging, and board etc. shall be paid for by the contractor.
P. The Engineer and the 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory may inspect
structural steel at the plant before shipment, however, the Engineer reserves the right
to reject any such material, which does not conform to all of the requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications, at any time before incorporation into the works at site.
Q. The 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory shall perform specified tests and
submit reports to the Engineer. Corrective measures, including additional and more
complete testing, which may result from these tests shall be the Contractor's
responsibility; all costs of which shall be paid for by the Contractor.
R. The Contractor shall coordinate and allow for necessary time for the 3rd Party
Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory to complete all testing and inspections prior to
shop painting.
S. The 3rd Party Inspection Company/Testing Laboratory shall prepare test specimen from
steel samples cut from delivered material and shall conduct tension tests in
accordance with ASTM. The Contractor shall mill order 1.0 metre extra length for the
members noted on the Drawings to provide the steel for testing.

20th October 2021
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall fabricate and erect the structural steelwork as shown on the
drawings and specifications.
B. Substitutions of the structural system shown or member sizes of similar steel strengths
will be permitted subject to Engineer approval provided the architecture is not changed
and the structural strength and deflections are maintained. No reduction in member
sizes shall be permitted even if steel strength exceeds the specified strength.
A. Do not handle structural steel until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be exercised
to avoid abrasions and other damage.
B. Stack material above ground out of mud and dirt and provide for proper drainage.
Protect from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations.
C. Do not deliver material to the project site until the proposed method and sequence of
erection has been reviewed by the Engineer. Method and sequence shall be planned
so as to avoid delay or damage to the work of other trades.
D. Storage of fabricated steel at the job site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Material stored at the job site shall not exceed design loads on existing or newly-
constructed structures so that members will not be distorted or otherwise damaged;
and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. All structural steel shall conform to as shown on the drawings.
2.02 BOLTS
A. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of F3125/F3125M. All
bolts shall be cold forged with rolled threads.
2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES
A. All welding electrodes shall be E71XX and shall comply with the provisions of AWS
Specifications A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20.
B. All welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds using not less than the minimum
size based on thickness of the thinner part jointed.
1. Thickness to 12mm - min. size 5mm
2. Over 12mm to 20mm - min. size 7mm
2.04 PAINT
A. Surface Preparation :
1. All surfaces shall be free of dirt, dust, grease or other foreign matter, before
coating.
2. Surface shall be cleaned to Engineer’s satisfaction.
3. Weld surfaces and rough edges shall be ground and weld splatter removed.

20th October 2021
B. Coating:
1. Unless fireproofing is specified for the surfaces, apply as recommended below.
For surfaces to be fireproofed apply primer only. Application shall be in strict
conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. All sharp edges, nuts, bolts or other items difficult to coat, shall receive a
brush-applied coat of the specified coating, prior to the application of each
coat.
3. Coating Thickness:
Minimum Dry Film Component

Thickness
Primer 50 microns 2 pack zinc phosphate epoxy
primer
Intermediate Coat 100 microns 2 pack epoxy based
Finish Coat 50 microns 2 pack polyurethane
C. Time between coatings:
1. A minimum time of 12 hours is required, before additional coats are applied to
the prime coat.
2. Two hours for the intermediate coat.
3. Two hours for the finish coat.
D. Use spray application for painting. The minimum thickness shall be maintained on all
corners, edges and ends of pieces. The surface to be painted shall be dry and above
2oC; the temperature of the air shall be over 5oC. Do not paint outdoors in rainy and
dusty weather.
2.05 BEARINGS
A. Bearings shall be elastomeric and consist of individual layers of rubber with steel plates
inserted between them, both being bonded by vulcanisation process. Further, the steel
plates shall be surrounded by the rubber to prevent corrosion.
Rubber shall be synthetic and of polychloroprene, resistant to oils, solvents and

chemicals products contained in concrete, and of shore hardness 60 +5, with tensile
strength 175 kg/cm2 and the ultimate elongation: 450%. The steel used in the plates
shall be mild steel to ASTM A36.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and inspection of structural steel will be performed by 3rd Party Inspection
Company/an independent structural steel testing agency engaged by the Contractor, at
his own expense and approved by the Engineer. Provide the testing agency with the
following:
1. A complete set of accepted documents required under Paragraph "Submittals".
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, materials bills and shipping bills.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipments of materials to
shops.
4. Representative sample pieces as requested by the testing agency.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.

20th October 2021
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for

inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
B. The inspector will perform his duties in such a way that fabrication and erection are not
unnecessarily delayed or impeded, and as follows:
1. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections as required by "Structural
Welding Code".
2. The edges of material to be welded will be ultrasonically examined for
evidence of laminations, inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to which
such defects will be permitted and the extent of repair permitted shall be
determined by the Inspector and made in accordance with ASTM A6,
Paragraph 9. Repairs made by welding shall be done in compliance with the
requirements of AWS D1.1 and the accepted welding procedures.
3. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove welds
made from both sides, after back gouging or chipping, will be examined by
magnetic particle inspection (or dye penetration if magnetic particle inspection
is not feasible).
4. All shop and field welds shall be listed as stated on Drawings.
5. The technique of radiographic inspection will be in accordance with the
requirements of AWS D1.1. A double film technique will be used. One copy of
each film will be sent to the Engineer, the other will be retained by the
Inspector.
6. Where inspection reveals defects, the extent of inspection will be increased as
much as necessary to ensure that the full extent of the defects in a joint has
been found and to ensure that the same defects are not present in welds made
on similar parts or under similar circumstances.
7. Work that is not acceptable will be designated by "Repair" or "Reject", as
applicable.
8. Shop welds will be inspected in the shop before the work painted or approved for
shipment.
9. The Inspector will maintain a daily record of the work he has inspected and its
disposition. Reports of tests will be made in form prescribed in AWS D1.1. One
copy of each of the reports will be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly
basis.
10. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections of high strength bolt
connections as required by AISC S314.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BENCH MARKS
A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a registered professional Engineer, in

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, who shall establish
permanent bench marks, field check all elevations of concrete on which structural steel
is to be placed and locations of anchor bolts, reporting any discrepancies to the
Engineer and obtaining the Engineer's approval before the work proceeds.
3.02 ERECTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting and levelling of all bearing
plates or setting plates. Bearing plates or setting plates shall be levelled on steel
wedges or shims or as otherwise detailed. Bearing and setting plates shall be grouted
as specified.
B. Furnish templates for accurate setting of all anchor bolts. Furnish shim plates or
developed fills where required to obtain proper fit and alignment.

20th October 2021
C. Oxygen cutting of structural steel in excess of 3mm for "fitting-up" purposes shall not
be done except with the prior approval of the Engineer.
D. The use of an oxygen cutting torch for correcting fabrication errors will be permitted
only when the member is not under load, and only after prior written approval of the
Engineer to the procedures to be followed in the event corrective work is necessary.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCE
A. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all structural
members and for the elevation and alignment of the finished structure. Any
adjustments necessary in the steel work because of discrepancies in elevations and
alignment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Unless otherwise noted, the structure shall be leveled and plumbed to accuracy of 1 to
1000, but not to exceed 12mm. The actual centerlines of truss chords shall not vary
from theoretical centerlines by more than 12 mm at any point. The difference between
offsets to the actual centerlines of truss chords at adjacent panel points shall not
exceed 3mm. All leveling and plumbing shall be done based on the mean operating
temperature of the structure. Allowances shall be made for the difference in
temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be
when completed and in service.
C. All measurements relating to the above shall be on the theoretical centerlines of the
members.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. No welding or bolting shall be done until as much of the structure as will be stiffened by
the welding or bolting has been properly aligned.
B. Drift pins shall not be used to enlarge unfair holes in main material. Holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed. Burning and drifting may be used to align
unfair holes in secondary bracing members only, when acceptable to the Engineer.
C. When high strength bolts or high strength bearing bolts are used, the AISC
specifications shall apply including values as noted therein, and installation by either
"turn of nut tightening" or with torque wrenches. In using manual torque wrenches, the
required torque can be read from the wrench dial. Care should be taken that the
wrench is properly calibrated. Nuts shall be in motion when torque is measured. In
using power wrenches, the recommendations of the wrench manufacturer shall be
followed. Use Hardened washer under bolt head or nut whichever is turned in
tightening, unless the specified standards require hardened washer under both head
and nut.
All bolts shall be kept in dry storage until needed for installation. A325 bolts 1-1/8 inch
(28mm) and 1-1/4 inch (32mm) diameter and A490 bolts 1 inch (25mm) diameter and
over shall first have Johnson's Stick Wax No. 140 applied to their threads before being
assembled in the work. If bolts have been left out and have become rusty before use,
they shall be rejected and shall not be used until they have been cleaned and waxed
with Johnson's Stick Wax No. 140.
D. Bolted connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para.

TESTING and as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Welded connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para.

TESTING and as indicated on the Drawings.

20th October 2021
3.05 SURVEY
A. Make an accurate survey of actual locations of steel members immediately upon the
completion of erection of steel but before removal of shoring and promptly submit same
to the Engineer. Should locations vary beyond the allowable tolerances, take
necessary corrective measures and modify details and/or procedure as required.
B. Survey the final erected structural steel after release of shoring but prior to removal of
shoring elements and prior to the application of any other work, reporting any
discrepancies from Contract requirements to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. General: Provide cold-formed metal framing in accordance with requirements of the

Contract Documents.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Exterior wall panel systems as specified in Section 07 46 44 "WPC Wall

Panel."
1.02 REFERENCES
A. General: Comply with the applicable provisions of the referenced standards except as
modified by governing codes and the contract documents. All reference to Kuwaiti,
American, European and other International standards, regulations and requirements
of statutory bodies and shall mean the latest published editions at the time of
contract. Where such standards, regulations and requirements are amended and
affect the contractor's responsibilities during the course of the works, the Contractor
shall immediately inform the Engineer and the Employer of his intentions in respect of
the revisions. Where a recommendation or suggestion occurs in the referenced
standards, such recommendation or suggestion shall be considered mandatory. In
the event of conflict between referenced standards, this specification or within
themselves, the more stringent standard or requirement shall govern.
B. Governing Codes
1. Gulf Construction Code, 2018 ICC International Building Code, with the more
stringent governing.
C. Reference Standards
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
a. AISC "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members".
b. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of

Structural Steel for Buildings".
c. AISC "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General

Provisions."
2. American Welding Society (AWS)
a. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
b. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".
3. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI)
Gulf Consult Cold Formed Metal Framing III-2/05 40 00 - 1

20th October 2021
a. "Inch Fastener Standards".
4. Steel Recycling Institute (SRI).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed

framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness
used in the cold-formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at
bends due to cold forming.
B. Manufacturer or Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-
formed members.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated Design Submittals, General: Submittals for cold-formed metal framing

indicated shall comply with performance criteria, including analysis data signed by the
Contractor's qualified Professional Engineer registered by the authority having
jurisdiction responsible for their preparation.
B. Combined Submittals: In addition to requirements specified herein, see special

procedure for combined submittals involving cold-formed framing work specified in
other related Sections.
C. Product Data: Submit for Engineer’s action. Submit manufacturer’s literature,

specifications and installation instructions describing the general properties of each
material and accessory to be used in the Work
D. Shop Drawings: Submit for Engineer’s action. Provide shop drawings prepared under
supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, for cold formed metal framing
components. Shop drawings shall be submitted in complete packages so that
individual parts and the assembled unit may be reviewed together. This Section and
the applicable drawings used in the development of the shop drawings shall be
referenced on each shop drawing to facilitate checking. Shop drawings shall contain
the seal of Contractor's qualified Professional Engineer as part of Delegated Design.
Provide information showing the following:
1. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage
designations, number, type, location, and spacing. Indicate supplemental
strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for
proper installation.
2. Location, types and details of connections, schedules, fabrication and

erection tolerances, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard
AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Openings and the provisions for the connection of other work.
4. Shop Drawing Review: The review of connection design and the review of
shop drawings by the Structural Engineer or Engineer of Record shall be for
general conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the
information given in the Contract Documents only and will not in any way
relieve the Contractor or the Contractor's Professional Engineer from:
a. Responsibility for the adequacy of the design of those connections

designed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer,
b. Responsibility for required detailing,

20th October 2021
c. Responsibility for the proper fitting of construction work in strict

conformance with the Contract requirements or
d. Necessity of furnishing material and workmanship required by

Contract Documents which may not be indicated on the shop
drawings.
5. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings and templates for the location of
items that are to be embedded in or anchored to concrete and masonry.
E. Calculations: Submit for Engineer’s information. Calculations shall be prepared by

and contain the seal of Contractor's qualified Professional Engineer as part of
Delegated Design. Prepare calculations as specified herein for elements of cold
formed steel framing. Coordinate calculations with calculations required in other
sections of work. Provide the following:
1. Description of design criteria.
2. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection (stiffness) requirements

for each framing application.
3. Selection of framing components, accessories and welded connection

requirements.
4. Verification of attachments to structure and adjacent framing components.
5. Engineering calculations to show that maximum deflections do not exceed

specified performance requirements under full design loading and that
selected components comply with specified requirements for wall and ceiling
systems specified in other related Sections.
F. Quality Control Submittals: Submit for Engineer’s information. Submit the following:
1. Test Reports
a. Submit product test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating

that each of the following complies with requirements, based on
comprehensive testing of current products:
i. Expansion anchors.
ii. Power-actuated anchors.
iii. Mechanical fasteners.
iv. Vertical deflection clips.
v. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
2. Certificates
a. Document Review: Before commencing work, submit a written

statement signed by the Contractor and the Installer certifying that
the Contract Documents, shop drawings and product data have been
reviewed with material manufacturers' qualified technical
representatives and that they agree the selected materials are
proper, compatible with contiguous materials and adequate for the
application shown.

20th October 2021
b. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a

qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies
with requirements.
c. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures

and personnel.
A. Qualified Installer: The cold-formed metal framing work shall be performed by a firm
having 5 years' experience in the installation of specified materials on comparable
projects. The firm shall have the approval of the cold-formed metal framing materials
manufacturer. The installer shall provide evidence of successful completion of work of
similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project using similar cold-formed
metal framing systems.
B. Sole Source Responsibility: Obtain cold-formed metal framing from one source of a
single manufacturer. Obtain accessory products used in conjunction with cold-formed
metal framing from the cold-formed metal framing manufacturer or from sources
acceptable to the cold-formed metal framing manufacturer. The manufacturer shall
furnish evidence that the specified materials have been manufactured by the same
source and successfully utilized on a yearly basis for a minimum of 5 years on
projects of a similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Engage the services of a qualified Professional Engineer

who is licensed to practice by the authority having jurisdiction and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated to prepare or supervise the
preparation of data for cold-formed metal framing systems, including drawings,
testing program development, test-result interpretation, and comprehensive
engineering analysis that show the systems' compliance with the specified
requirements. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes,

ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having
jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities
1. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed

metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Pre-Installation Meetings: Prior to the start of the Work, meet at the Project site to
review methods and sequence of cold-formed metal framing installation, special
details and conditions, standard of workmanship, testing and quality control
requirements, job organization and other pertinent topics related to the Work.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Provide in accordance with manufacturer and fabricator's recommendations

and by methods or sequence as required to prevent damage or delay.
B. Storage: Store materials off the ground, in a dry location, protected against damage,
corrosion and deterioration and in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
identification. Provide for proper drainage. Do not store materials on structure in a
manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures.
Store packaged materials in unopened containers.

20th October 2021
C. Handling: Handle materials in a manner so as to protect surfaces and to prevent

distortion of, or damage to components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE RQUIREMENTS
A. Design Requirements
1. Delegated Design: Contractor shall engage a qualified professional engineer

registered in Kuwait by the authority having jurisdiction to design cold-formed
metal framing (CFMF) in compliance with performance requirements.
B. Performance Requirements
1. General: Comply with the performance requirements and criteria as specified

in other related Sections for where cold-formed metal framing is required.
2. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of

withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated and as
follows, and in accordance with Section 01 83 16 "Exterior Enclosure
Performance Requirements":
a. Dead Loads
b. Live Loads
c. Earthquake Loads
3. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

deflections greater than the following:
a. Exterior Walls: Design framing system to maintain clearances at

openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate
live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:
i. Upward and downward movement of 12.7 mm.
b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of

the wall height.
c. Ceiling and Exterior Soffit Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240

of the span.
4. Design Modifications: Make design modifications of work shown only as may

be necessary to meet performance requirements and coordinate the work.
Variations in details and materials which do not adversely affect appearance,
durability or strength shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Maintain
the general design concept without altering profiles and alignments shown.
2.02 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard steel studs of type, size, shape, and
gage as indicated or if not indicated as required to comply with performance criteria.
With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard, steel
runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and

20th October 2021
accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal

framing system.
B. Steel Studs, Runners, Furring, Bracing and/or Bridging: ASTM C955; hot dipped
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A1003 Structural Grade 33 Type H for
20 gauge and below 227.5 MPa yield point, Structural Grade 37 Type H for 18 gauge
to 20 gauge 255 MPa yield point and Structural Grade 50 Type H for 16 gauge and
greater 344.7 MPa yield point, Coating Designation G90.
C. Clip Angles, Flat Straps, Web Stiffeners, Hole Reinforcement Plates, and Clips:
ASTM C955; hot dipped galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A1003
Structural Grade 33 Type H for 20 gauge and below 227.5 MPa yield point, Structural
Grade 37 Type H for 18 gauge to 20 gauge 255 MPa yield point and Structural Grade
50 Type H for 16 gauge and greater 344.7 MPa yield point, Coating Designation G90.
D. Fasteners: Provide self-drilling, self-tapping screws; Steel, complying with ASTM

C1002; Galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM
B633 as needed for required corrosion resistance.
E. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud
manufacturer.
F. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and
repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies before erection.

Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line, and braced against racking with joints
welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated units to prevent damage or distortion.
Fabricate units in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and
to assure consistent component placement. Cut framing members by sawing or
shearing; do not torch cut
B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3

requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work Attach dissimilar components by welding,
bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. Wire tying of framing
components is not permitted.
C. Reinforcement: Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand

handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent
damage or permanent distortion
D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate units to a maximum allowable tolerance variation

from plumb, level, and true to line of 3.2mm in 3m and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus

3.2mm from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum
fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a

maximum out-of-square tolerance of 3.2mm.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor’s Quality Control Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for

quality control of the Work.

20th October 2021
B. Shop Inspection of Connections: Perform 100 percent visual inspection at bolted and
welded connections in the Work. Examine the size, quality and placement of each
connection to verify installation in accordance with Contract Documents and actioned
shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare substrates and erect the work of this Section,
including components, and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and
where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory
performance of the Work
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions
under which the Work would be performed. Contractor shall remedy conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.03 COORDINATION
A. Consult and cooperate with Contractors for other trades whose work affects or is
affected by cold-formed metal framing Work under this Section in order that phases of
the work are properly coordinated to avoid delays, errors, omissions, or damage to
any part of the work.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Substrate Acceptability: Commencement of installation shall constitute acceptance of

substrate conditions by the Installer.
B. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles,

supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed
fire-resistive materials.
C. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these

materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance
rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance ASTM C1007 and with
manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations. Set framing
accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true, within
tolerances indicated by accepted shop drawings, as measured from established
building lines and from other Work already in place.
B. Erection Tolerances: Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and

securely anchor to supporting structure. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and
vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in
plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1.6mm Handle and
lift prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member

20th October 2021
C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,
and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written
recommendations and requirements in this Section. Cut framing members by sawing
or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding
or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work
D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated
for track or tension members. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure
framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was
designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated
supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are
secured. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal
framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over
web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.
E. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately
to layout at base and tops of studs. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting
pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt-weld or splice them together.
Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction
involved, except do not exceed 610mm o.c. spacing for power-driven fasteners or
406mm o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of
tracks. Provide a sill sealer or integrity gasket barrier between concrete and steel
connections.
F. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either
welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges.
1. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-
plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. Where stud
system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.
2. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system

wherever walls are indicated or are required to support fixtures, equipment,
services, and heavy trim, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall.
Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with
stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case,
considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. Where indicated
in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a vertical slide
clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not

more than 137 cm o.c. Weld at each intersection. Attach wall stud bridging in
a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Contractor’s Quality Control Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for

quality control of the Work.
B. Connection Identification: Assign each bolting crew and welder an identifying symbol,
and require them to mark every connection, so that an inspector may identify the
person(s) making each connection.
C. Qualification for Field Welding: Qualify the welding operators and welding procedures
in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3 requirements.

20th October 2021
D. Field Inspection of Connections: Perform 100 percent visual inspection at bolted and
welded connections in the Work. Examine the size, quality and placement of each
connection to verify installation in accordance with Contract Documents and actioned
shop drawings.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Procedures for Cleaning, Painting and Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, clean
field welds, bolted connections, marred and abraded surfaces. Paint and touch-up
paint with the specified paint system. Touch up galvanized surfaces in accordance
with ASTM A780
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work of this section, as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, pertains to
the fabricating, furnishing and installing of miscellaneous metal components and
metal fabrications.
B. Definitions: Work of this section shall include but is not restricted to all labor,
materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the following:
1. Erection drawings complete with calculations and detailed drawings.
2. Painted steel pipe railings, handrails – cat ladders etc.
3. Miscellaneous framing, supports, masonry wall restraints and fasteners.
4. Loose lintels, light steel frames and sleeves at penetrations of walls.
5. Trench Covers – Gratings – Bollards – miscellaneous steel trim, edge angles.
6. Prime painting, painting touch-up and galvanizing.
A. All sections affected by this section and all sections affecting this section shall be
considered “Related Sections”
A. Aluminum Association:
1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels.
3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions
and Panels.

Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
Gulf Consult Metal Fabrications III-2/05 50 00 - 1

20th October 2021
2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

4. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on

Iron and Steel Hardware.
5. ASTM A283/283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60
000 PSI Tensile Strength.
7. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
8. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural

Steel Joints (Metric).
9. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
10. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
11. ASTM B26/B26M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand

Castings.
12. ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings.
13. ASTM B177 - Standard Guide for Chromium Electroplating on Steel for
Engineering Use.
14. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate.
15. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate (Metric).

Drawn Seamless Tubes.

Drawn Seamless Tubes (Metric).
18. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar,
Rod, and Wire.

Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric).

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric).

20th October 2021
D. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive

Examination.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
2. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
3. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
4. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint.
5. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employ only experienced tradesmen for both fabrication and installation, who are
capable of producing work of the highest standards of quality in the industry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 33 00: Submittals are required:
1. Detailed drawings and calculations developed to show layout and structural

adequacy. Coordination details of related and adjacent work, including
attachments which fully illustrate assembly and erection requirements.
2. Shop drawings for fabrication, assembly, erection and installation as follows:
a. Show locations, layouts, materials thickness, finishes, dimensions,

construction, relation to adjoining construction, erection details,
profiles, jointing and all other details to fully illustrate the work of this
Section.
3. Product Data: Submit manufacturers, fabricators and finisher’s specifications

and installation instructions for products used in metal fabrications, including
finishing materials and methods.
4. Samples: Submit fabricated samples (of sufficient size to fully show

construction, materials and finishes) of all items of work as described in this
section.
A. Accept metal fabrications on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS METAL
A. All materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or
appearance and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. Unless
specifically called for otherwise, work shall be fabricated from the following:
1. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM Designation A 36.
2. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, seamless pipe, black finish unless otherwise
noted.
3. Structural steel tubing, square and rectangular shapes; ASTM A500, Grade
B.
4. Steel tubular shapes: ASTM A 501.
5. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C.
6. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36.
7. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108.
8. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336.
9. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A525.
10. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 167, Type 304.
11. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS
A. General: Fasteners provided for exterior use, or where embedded in exterior walls,
floors or roofs shall be zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153.
B. Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws: ASTM F 593, Type 304.
C. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Type 304.
D. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM A325.
E. Machine Screws: ASTM A545.
F. Expansion Bolts: Toothed steel or lead shield expansion devices of the type and size
shown, with galvanized bolts, except do not use lead shield bolts for overhead
anchorage.
G. Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561, type and grade as required.
H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, type and class as required.
I. Washers: Carbon steel; plain, round complying with FS FF-W-92; locking, helical
spring complying with FS FF-W-84.

20th October 2021
J. Concrete Inserts: Furnish unit-type inserts of the type and size shown, of cast iron,
malleable iron or hot-dip zinc-coated steel.
K. Power Driven Anchors: Type and size as shown or, if not shown, comply with
manufacturer's standards. Use only devices and tools, which comply with ANSI
A10.3. Do not use as suspension member anchor.
L. Non-shrink, Nonferrous Grout: Por-Rok Anchoring Cement, Lehn and Fink Industrial
Products Div. of Sterling Drug or equal and approved.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout: Ready mixed, non-metallic high strength controlled expansion grout of

flowable consistency, conforming to ASTM C 1107 with minimum compressive
strength of 8,000 pounds per square inch (55.2 MPa) at 28 days.
B. Metal paste filler: 2 component epoxy, high strength, structural adhesive putty:
C. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized
steel: Galvanic Zinc-rich coating containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight in the
dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter’s Laboratories,
Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-21035A
(formally MIL-P-21035A) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the
requirements of MIL-P-26915A USAF Specification for Zinc-Rich Paints. Acceptable
products include:
2.04 FABRICATION- GENERAL
A. For the manufacture of metal fabrications which will be exposed to view, use only
materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of
finishes including zinc coatings.
B. Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required size
and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished product for
the intended use. Work to the dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings,
using proven details of fabrication and support. Use the type of materials shown or
specified for the various components of work.
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless
otherwise shown. Form bent metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
D. Verify dimensions by accurate field measurement before fabrication wherever work

adjoins other work that precedes it in construction. However, do not delay job
progress; allow for trimming and fitting of metal fabrication work wherever the taking
of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. On shop drawings
note which dimensions have been verified by field measurement.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the recommendations
of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining
surfaces.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or
if not shown, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

20th October 2021
G. Pre-drill bolt and/or screw holes as shown and as required for attachment of metal
fabrication work and for the attachment of adjacent materials.
H. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into
masonry for the installation of metal fabrication work. Co-ordinate delivery of such
devices with other work so as to avoid any delay. See Concrete and Masonry
Sections of these Specifications for installation of such inserts and anchoring devices.
I. Provide for anchorage of the type shown, co-ordinated with the supporting structure
and the construction programme. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown
and as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.
J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrication work as may be required to receive finish
hardware and similar items of work.
K. Use hot-rolled steel bar for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work is shown or
specified to be fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled stock.
L. Pre-assemble work at shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimise field

splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent
necessary to comply with shipping limitations. Mark units clearly for reassembly and
proper installation.
M. Where shown as galvanized, complete the shop fabrication prior to application of the
coating. Remove mill scale and rust, clean and pickle the units as required for
coating. Apply hot-dip zinc coating of 0.6 kg/m2 in accordance with ASTM A 123.
2.05 FABRICATION-SPECIFIC ITEMS
A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: The Contractor shall provide steel framing and
supports for applications indicated or which is not a part of structural steel framework,
as required completing work. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated
and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports.
Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction
using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into
concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after
concrete is placed. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm on center
and the Contractor shall provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps
32mm wide x 6mm thick x 200mm long. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and
supports in exterior locations.
B. Lintels:
1. Provide lintels 300 mm (12 inches) longer than masonry openings. Where
lintel abuts column, provide structural clip connection.
2. Lintels occurring in exterior walls shall be galvanized in conformance with the

requirements of ASTM A 123.
C. Trench Cover: Provide trench cover in 6mm thick galvanized chequered plate and its
frames and sub frames fabricated in hot dip galvanized steel angles and channels
etc.
D. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: The Contractor shall provide shapes and sizes indicated
for profiles shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from
structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and
smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. The

20th October 2021
Contractor shall provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination
of assembly and installation with other work. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.
E. Edge Angles: The Contractor shall provide hot dip galvanized steel edge angles of
size as shown on the drawings, with welded-on strap anchors 600 mm on centers.
The Contractor shall provide angles in as long lengths as possible. Miter and weld
corners and provide splice plates for alignment between sections.
F. Gratings The Contractor shall provide gratings, including supplementary framing and
supports. The Contractor shall provide gratings of electro-pressure welded type
construction, rectangular pattern accurately fabricated free from warps, twists or
other defects affecting their serviceability or appearance. Fabricate gratings from hot
rolled carbon steel sheet and strip and structural steel bars. The Contractor shall
provide saddle clip fasteners as required to fasten gratings to each steel support.
Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 50.94 gram per
.0929 m2 of coated surface.
2.06 SHOP PAINTING, GENERAL
A. Clean, treat and paint metal fabrications work in the shop prior to delivery to the
project site, except for work which has been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Include all surfaces, inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the
construction.
2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean by "Solvent Cleaning" method specified in SSPC-SP 1-63, followed by "Hand

Tool Cleaning" by method specified in SSPC-SP 2-63 or "Power Tool Cleaning" by
method specified in SSPC-SP 3-63 to remove loose mill scale and rust. "Pickle" by
methods specified in SSPC-SP 8-63 to remove all remaining mill scale and rust.
Grind rough surfaces as may be necessary to provide smooth metal surfaces. Tool
cleaning and pickling may be omitted for work fabricated from cold-rolled or cold-
finished stock and from castings, provided the surfaces are not heavily rusted.
B. Apply pre-treatment to inhibit corrosion and improve paint adhesion, by methods

specified in SSPC-PT 2-64 for "Cold Phosphate" treatment.
2.08 COATINGS
A. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Coating Thickness:
Minimum Dry Film Component

Thickness
Primer 50 microns 2 pack zinc phosphate epoxy

primer
Intermediate Coat 100 microns 2 pack epoxy based
Finish Coat 50 microns 2 pack polyurethane
C. Time between coatings:
1. A minimum time of 12 hours is required, before additional coats are applied

to the prime coat.
2. Two hours for the intermediate coat.

20th October 2021
3. Two hours for the finish coat.
D. Use spray application for painting. The minimum thickness shall be maintained on all
corners, edges and ends of pieces. The surface to be painted shall be dry and above
2oC; the temperature of the air shall be over 5oC. Do not paint outdoors in rainy and
dusty weather.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which the work is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer’s Representative.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set metal fabrication work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
B. Anchor securely as shown or as required for the intended use, using concealed
anchors wherever possible. Fastenings to wooden plugs will not be permitted. Drill
holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt, using a rotary drill for concrete and a
percussion drill for masonry.
C. Where pipe sleeves are used to support miscellaneous iron work, anchor sleeve
securely to supporting concrete or structure to provide rigid support.
1. Pipe sleeves shall be of galvanized steel of size shown and adequate to

meet the requirements.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch up shop paint
coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units, which have been hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field
connections.
E. Deliver items, which are to be built into the work of other sections in time so as not to
delay the progress of work.
F. Leave work exposed to view clean, smooth and neatly finished.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 05 52 13
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
equipment and services necessary to complete but not limited to the following
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

2. Steel pipe guardrail.
sections with the work of this section. Related work to be coordinated and used in con-
junction with this specification includes but is not limited to:
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity

loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Gulf Consult Pipe and Tube Railings III-2/05 52 13 - 1

20th October 2021
C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat
loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg C, material surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
A Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes on stainless steel.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

20th October 2021
A Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction

contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field
measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
C. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.06 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or
required by structural loads.
2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
E. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).
1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13.
F. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 50-mm woven-wire mesh,

made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510
(ASTM A 510M).

20th October 2021
2.03 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
for electrodeposited zinc coating.
2. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,

grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to
other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for

attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with MPI#79.
C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming
zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and
complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled

expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable
anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant

to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or
waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less
than that required to support structural loads.

20th October 2021
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use

fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
I. Non-welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners

and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline
joints.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work,
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide

fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads
through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation
and crushing of substrate.

20th October 2021
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed
by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with
inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
steel plate forming bottom closure.
Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from tube or pipe whose ID is
sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at
top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and
fabricated to resist being dislodged.
R. Expanded-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from expanded metal made from
same metal as railings in which they are installed.
1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as
expanded metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick.
S. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped
into 25-by-13-by-3-mm metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same
metal as railings in which they are installed.
T. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at
edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details
indicated.
2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
2.07 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanizes exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

20th October 2021
C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous components.
D. For non-galvanized steel railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings,

brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior
concrete or masonry.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
F. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications
and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:
1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast
Cleaning."
G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field,
and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to
surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors,
to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for
Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated
or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical
or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in
3 m.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place
construction.

20th October 2021
3.03 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently

connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to
railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using
plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
3.04 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required
by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting
surfaces.
2. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
D. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.
3.05 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS
A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing
ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
3.06 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.
C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

20th October 2021
3. For steel-framed gypsum board plaster partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into
fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud
installation to locate backing members.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 05 73 00
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
equipment and services necessary to complete but not limited to the following
1. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.
2. Glass-supported/Glass in-fill railing.
3. Stainless-steel sheet for water wall/basin and used elsewhere.
4. Section 06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others
referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Section 01 40 60 – REFERENCE AND
STANDARDS.
1. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2. ASTM B 221 - Specification for Aluminum Extrusions.
3. NAAMM, applicable publications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's complete product data and specifications for all

prefabricated items, and hydraulic cements, to be furnished hereunder.
2. Shop drawings:
a. Include large scale details of items of all railings to be furnished

hereunder, showing proposed methods of anchorage to surrounding
structure and conditions.
b. Include large scale details of railings.
Gulf Consult Decorative Metal Railings III-2/05 73 00 - 1

20th October 2021
3. Quality standards sample: Fabricate a sample showing a typical handrail

section demonstrating component connections. Sample section shall be
minimum 450 mm in horizontal length and 300 mm in height and include a
corner post. Provide a shop primed finish.
a. Accepted sample will be used to establish the quality standard for

handrail and guardrail fabrication and workmanship.
4. Verification samples: 300 mm length samples of cap rail and base rail,
finished.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating

previously successful work of the type specified herein.
A. Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in

Kuwait; design and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the
performance requirements specified in this section and as required by local Code.
1. Prepare Shop Drawings for handrails, and handrail brackets under direct
supervision of a same Engineer experienced in design of this work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Be responsible for establishing locations and levels for all work of this Section, except
such parts as may be delivered to others and set by them. In such cases, assist them
in properly locating said parts.
A. All materials under this Section shall be carefully prepared for delivery, and handled
and stored under cover in a manner to prevent defacement, deformation, or other
damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent the accumulation of
foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to
erection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RAILING SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers :
B. Railing system shall be factory-engineered component based.
C. Stainless-Steel Ornamental and Glass - Supported Railings:
1. IMCCK.
2. Dubai Metal Industries.
3. AIC Group.
4. Or Approved Equal.

20th October 2021
D. Stainless Steel:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 301, 302 or 304.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
4. Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 301, 302 or 304.
5. Finish: AISI No. 4, bright directional polish.
E. Auxiliary Materials:
1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: CE CRD-C621.
2. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: AWS specifications.
3. Fasteners, Anchors, and Inserts: Non-corrosive.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Base: 64 mm by 102 mm (2-1/2 inch by 4 inch) aluminum alloy 6063-T5, Livers

model number 810A.
1. Cap base with 1.5 mm (16 gage) satin finish stainless steel.
B. Handrail: 40mm φ 2mm thick satin finish stainless steel handrail at 900 mm height
from floor level with 10mm φ stainless steel bracket fixed on glass.
C. Glass: Nominal 17.5 mm thick, 1100mm high from floor level, tempered, laminated
glass, complying with ASTM C 1048 FT with ceramic frit (20% of glass area), Class 1
clear, quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI Z97.1. Complying with
requirements of Section 08 80 00. Ceramic frit pattern will be selected by
Engineer/Architect.
1. Heat Soaking of Tempered Glass: Provide "heat checking" of all glass

incorporated as part of the Work of this Section 05700, prior to delivery to job
site. Provide s shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength,
durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended
purpose.
2. Fabricate glass with the following edge treatments.
a. Exposed edges: Polished-finished radiused (penciled).
b. Concealed edges: Cut edges with minimum edge work.
c. Glass-to-glass joint edges: Polished-finished radiused (penciled).
2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well
formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines, and
angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be to true radii. Exposed sheared
edges shall be eased.

20th October 2021
B. Shop fabricate items wherever practicable, accurately fitting all parts and making all
joints tight. Do not fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been
submitted to, and approved by, the Engineer.
C. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of anchor bolts
and other hardware and for attachment of work by other trades. All such work shall
be done prior to hot-dip galvanizing of the various components.
D. Carefully coordinate the installation of railing system with the work of trades
responsible for the installation of interfacing work, and for the installation of work into
the various assemblies furnished hereunder, and permit the installation of the related
materials to be made at the appropriate times.
2.04 FABRICATION - HANDRAILS
A. Refer to the Drawings for location and details of handrails to be furnished and
installed hereunder.
B. Verify heights shown in Drawings, comply with local codes and regulations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Accurately set all work to established lines and elevations, and rigidly fasten in place
with suitable attachments to the construction of the building. At the completion of the
work, check all work, re-adjust as required, and leave in perfect condition. Grind all
exposed to view welds smooth to the touch.
B. Construct and install railing system in strict accordance with the details, the approved
shop drawings, and requirements of all codes, laws, and ordinances bearing on the
work.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 6
Wood, Plastics, and Composites
SECTION 06 05 24
DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Supply and installation of High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL).
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrication

2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry
3. Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodworks
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: In addition to requirements, comply with applicable provisions of

following for design, materials, fabrication, and installation of component parts:
1. ANSI / NEMA LD-3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
2. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
3. ASTM E 162: Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
4. ASTM E 662: Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated
by Solid Materials.
5. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute.
6. AWS: Architectural Woodwork Standards.
7. NEMA LD-3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
8. SCAQMD Rule 1168: Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
9. UL 723: Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Gulf Consult Decorative Plastic Laminate Finishes III-2/06 05 24 - 1

20th October 2021
1. Product data for each specified product. Include manufacturer’s technical data
sheets and published instruction instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Each installation.
1. Anchorages to other construction, including requirements for concealed supports.
2. Use same unit designations used on Drawings.
C. Samples for Selection:
1. Available standard framing finish colors.
D. Verification Samples: 12-inch length of typical framing member in specified finish.
1. Plastic-laminate-clad panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for
each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced
panel product used for core.
2. Thermoset decorative-overlay-surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by

250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.
B. Product Certificates: For the following:
1. Thermoset decorative panels.

2. High-pressure decorative laminate.
3. Adhesives.
A. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s written maintenance instructions.
B. Manufacturer warranties transferrable to Owner.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating and installing decorative plastic

laminate finished work with a minimum 3 years experience.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in- service performance with a minimum 3 years experience.

20th October 2021
C. Mock-Ups:
1. Build mockups to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, set quality for materials and construction, set quality standard for
fabrication and installation.
2. Acceptable mock-ups may remain as part of the Work if undamaged at time of

3. Acceptable mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work.
A. Package and ready materials according to manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Do not deliver components until Project is fully enclosed.
C. Store products inside building protected from light, heat and moisture and never store in
contact with floor or outside wall surfaces. Do not expose to continuous direct sunlight.
D. Store horizontally, face-to-face and back-to-back with the top sheet turned face down.
E. Sheets must be handled by sliding when possible.
F. Stored at a temperature not less than 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and a relative humidity
not less than 40 percent.
G. Provide protective coverings of suitable material. Take special precautions at corners.
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of cut-outs and other related Work specified in other
Sections to ensure that interior laminate construction can be supported and installed as
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
1. Formica Corporation.
2. Wilsonart
3. Laminart

20th October 2021
A. Laminate Composition: Decorative surface papers impregnated with melamine resins and
pressed over kraft paper core sheets impregnated with phenolic resin. Sheets then bonded
together under pressures greater than 1,000 lbs. per sq. in. and high temperatures
approaching 300 deg F (149 deg C). Finished sheets trimmed and backs sanded to
facilitate bonding to substrate
B. DecoMetal laminate shall be real metal foil laminated to a phenolic core to combine the
practicality of a high-pressure laminate with the beauty of real metal. Solid metals shall be
solid aluminum sheets with polished-anodized or brushed lacquer finished surfaces for
vertical interior applications.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide decorative plastic laminate with the following

surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Surfaces Subject to Food Contact: Comply with NSF Standard 35.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain decorative plastic laminate materials through one source from a
single manufacturer.
2.3 LAMINATE ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Decorative Edging:
1. Grade: 12, HGP.
2. Profile thickness: 1.25 - inch Ogee and Bullnose.

3. Size/Profile:
a. A12, Ogee
b. B12, Bullnose.
4. Colors, Finish and Patterns:
a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s available range.
B. Edge Banding:
1. Laminate Grade:
a. Grade HGS.

20th October 2021
C. Backing sheets:
1. Provide where recommended by manufacturer to minimize lamination warpage.
D. Adhesives:
1. Bonding Laminate: Provide type recommended by manufacturer.

2. Bonding Edge Molding: Provide type recommended by manufacturer.
2.4 LAMINATE FABRICATION
A. Conform to manufacturer standard practices, procedures, conditions including

preconditioning, panel balancing, material recommendations, machining, equipment and
workmanship.
B. Laminate with low sheen surfaces are subject to marring. Fabricating with peel coat on
surface (if applicable) is recommended. Router base should be clean and free of burrs and
debris. Table saws should be clean, flat, and free of burrs.
C. Do not adhere laminates directly to plaster, gypsum board or concrete construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install decorative plastic laminate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions, approved submittals and requirements of:
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.
C. Accessory Materials: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation

instructions.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean decorative plastic laminate surfaces and edge moldings or aluminum trims in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Protection:
1. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
equipment and services necessary to complete all types of rough carpentry work, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and backing.
2. Wood furring.
3. Anchors, fasteners and rough hardware required to erect, apply and install
the work of this section.
2. Section 06 40 00 - Architectural Wood works
3. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Door
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 38 mm actual or greater but less than 114 mm actual
in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
Gulf Consult Rough Carpentry III-2/06 10 00 - 1

20th October 2021
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered
wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application
details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of
preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on
testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type,

include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure
to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing
agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that

moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before
shipment to Project site
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each

type of treatment.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum

allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design
values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building

code in effect for Project:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Powder-actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any
rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded
by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber
under the rules indicated.
1. Factory marks each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS
20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are
minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1 & T1, except that lumber
that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water
may be treated according to AWPA U1 & T1 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not

use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping,

and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed

members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA U1-07 & T1-07 (lumber)
and (plywood).
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Concealed blocking.

20th October 2021
2. Plywood backing panels.
2.04 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or

attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with
19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3
grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to
eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other
work.
E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no
knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.06 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D

Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than
13-mm nominal thickness.
B. Plywood Blocking Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant

treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 13-mm nominal
thickness.

20th October 2021
2.07 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners
with hot dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with ASTM A
563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line,
cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed
for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to
comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing

materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for
fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 406 mm o.c.
3.02 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work.
Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush
with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled

lumber not less than 38 mm wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to
exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer
required.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,
despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered
label.

20th October 2021
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry
becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 06 40 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide architectural woodwork as shown on Drawings and specified herein. Work of

this Section includes all related millwork, without limitation, the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior frames and jambs.
3. Interior ornamental work.
4. Wood casework, including cabinets, counters and reception desks.
5. Closet and utility shelving.
6. Wall mounted shelving and shelving hardware.
2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
4. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
A. Source: For each material type required for work of this Section, provide primary
materials which are product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory
materials which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three years’ experience in type of work required by
this Section and which is acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard

details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each
material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified
requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop Drawings for fabrication, installation and
erection of parts of work. Provide plans, elevations, and details of anchorages,
connections and accessory items. Provide installation templates for work installed by
others. Show interfaces and relationships to work of other trades.
Gulf Consult Architectural Wood Work III-2/06 40 00 - 1

20th October 2021
C. Field Measurements: Take necessary field measurements before preparation of shop

Drawings and fabrication. Do not delay progress of job. If field measurements are not
possible prior to fabrication, allow for field cutting and fitting.
D. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples showing complete range of colors,

textures, and finishes available for each material used.
E. Verification Samples: Submit representative samples of each material that is to be

exposed in completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected.
Provide samples having minimum size of 144 sq. in.
A. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration
work is complete.
B. Wet Work: Proceed with work of this Section after wet work has been complete and
fully dry or cured. Wet work is defined as plaster, gypsum drywall, paint, concrete,
etc.
C. Conditioning: Advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for

woodwork installation. Do not install work of this Section until required temperature
and relative humidity in areas of installation has been stabilized and will be
maintained.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Upon substantial handover, provide Owner with a copy of the manufacturers standard
five (5) years limited warranty against any defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
1. Kuwait Carpentry workshops
2. Wooden House
3. Ogab Al-Khateeb for Furniture Factory & Decoration Co.
2.02 FLUSH WOOD PANELWORK
A. Scope: Panel work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Transparent finish panel work.
B. Quality Standard: Provide AWI Section 500, Premium Grade materials and
workmanship.
C. Wood Species and Cuts: Provide as follows:
1. Transparent Finished Work: Provide solid pieces and the veneers that they
match each other.
D. Matching Grain pattern to run vertical.

20th October 2021
1. Individual Veneer Pieces: Book matched and sequenced matched.
2. Assembly of Pieces on Panel: Balance matched.
3. Panel Matching: Sequence matched.
E. Preparation for Related Work: Prepare panel work for related electrical, telephone,
mechanical, and plumbing work
F. Joinery: Do not use any exposed fasteners, including finish nails or staples.
G. Panel Hanging: Install panel work with interlocking metal clips or wood cleats.
H. Fire Retardant Ratings: Provide UL labeled fire-retardant treated core materials.
2.03 CUSTOM FABRICATED WOOD HANDRAILS
A. Wood Species and Cuts: Provide as follows:
1. Transparent Finished Work: Provide solid wood handrails that match the
veneers.
B. Joinery: Do not use any exposed fasteners.
2.04 CASEWORK AND CABINETS
A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Provide solid pieces that match one
another.
B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any wood complying with AWI Premium Grade.
C. Composite Wood Products: Made without urea formaldehyde.
D. Cabinet Hardware:
1. Hinges: Frameless, concealed.
2. Pulls: Hafele Silver Colored Anodized 124.02.920.
3. Locks: Door and Drawer
4. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Satin Stainless steel.
E. Veneer Matching: Book match veneer leaves and balance match within panel face.
1. Cabinet veneers in each space from a single flitch.
2. Blueprint match with paneling.
3. Cabinet Interior: Compatible species stained to match exterior.
F. Casework: AWI Section 400, Premium Grade.
1. Cabinet Construction (AWI 400-G-7): "Flush Overlay.
2. All casework material is 20 mm thick, excluding facing thickness, unless

otherwise detailed, specified, or required for stability.
3. Drawers Thickness:

20th October 2021
a. Sides: 12 mm.
b. Front and Back: 20 mm.
c. Bottom: 6 mm.
2.05 ADJUSTABLE SHELVING AND HARDWARE
A. Scope: Shelving work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Plastic Laminate Shelves: Provide 19 mm formaldehyde-free MDF with

horizontal grade plastic laminate veneer and matching edge bands on all six
sides.
2. Stained Wood Shelves: Provide 19 mm formaldehyde-free MDF veneered

with FSC Certified Quarter Sawn Select Medium Cherry with solid matching
hardwood edge.
3. Hardware: Provide the following, or Engineer approved equal:
a. Wall Standards: Rakks M Style Wall Mounted Standard, finished in

manufacturer's standard clear anodized finish.
b. Shelf Brackets: Rakks Style Brackets, finished in manufacturer's

standard clear anodized finish.
2.06 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH:
A. Grade: AWI Premium Grade.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Provide veneers in a complete match with solid pieces.
2.07 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH:
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood complying with AWI Premium Grade.
2.08 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH:
B. Species: Provide solid pieces that match the veneers.
C. Fire-Rated Frames and Jambs: 20-minute rating.
2.09 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH:
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood complying with AWI Premium Grade.
2.10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Cabinet Interior: Plastic laminate

20th October 2021
2.11 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS:
B. Edge Treatment: Self-edged.
2.12 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS:
B. Thickness: 13 mm.
C. Colors: As selected by Engineer.
2.13 SHOP FINISHING
A. Scope: Shop finishing work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Transparent Finished Work: Provide complete shop finishing of work

indicated for transparent finish, including necessary field touch up after
installation.
2. Quality Standard: Provide AWI Premium Grade for finishing, complying with
AWI Quality Standards.
3. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with AWI Quality Standards for sanding,
filling, countersinking, sealing of concealed surfaces, and similar preparation
requirements for finishing of work of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP - GENERAL
A. Work of this Section shall conform to design and detail indicated. All works shall be
finished and assembled at architectural millwork shop.
B. Work shall be finished smooth and free from machine or tool marks that will telescope
through finish.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Grade of Timber or Lumber needs to be carefully checked. Materials shall be

stamped with the specified grade as in the drawings and specifications. The
Workmanship inspector shall familiarize himself with all rules for grading of lumber to
be used so that he may check grading by appearance only if it looks incorrect.
B. Imperfections that may have occurred after grading, such as broken fibers due to
transportation, decay, unspecified moisture content etc. shall have to be checked.
Wood species that are brought for the production – purpose must be checked by the
Quality Certification Program (QCP) of AWI (Architectural Woodworks Institute (AWI)
standards.
C. Loose knots and wrapping due to unsatisfactory seasoning shall be checked and
rejected. With the appearance – sqaureness shape and size shall be checked so as
to conform to the required measurement.
D. During the long time storage of lumber in godown carefully seal the lumber-ends
because the ends dry faster than the sides.

20th October 2021
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish

procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and coordinate this work with
related and adjacent work. Require architectural woodwork manufacturer, Installer,
Contractor, and Engineer to attend.
B. The Installer shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this
work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to
the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation work means Installer's acceptance
of substrates and conditions.
C. All manufactured and custom made items shall be new, of first quality and conform to
the Drawings and Specifications. Factory records will not be accepted. Installation
shall be as per instructions in the drawings. Each item must have an embossed /
engraved label identifying the manufacturer. It must be fixed in an inconspicuous
location unseen to the Public when fixed / placed in the final location.
D. All works relating to woodworks is to be fully coordinated with all other construction
work including scheduling, dimensional compatibility, coordination with Telephone
data and electrical system, finish color systems for the like items etc. which may be
procured at different times during the Contract.
E. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas

prior to installation.
F. Proceed with installation only when required ambient conditions have been properly
maintained, as determined by all attending pre-installation conference.
1. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on approved shop
drawings.
2. Install work to comply with quality standards and tolerances specified for
shop work.
3. Color match wood at joints and seams to minimize expression of joints and
seams in transparent finished work.
G. Install architectural woodwork plumb, level, true and straight. Shim as required using
concealed shims.
H. Scribe and cut architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work. Refinish cut surfaces if
required at an unavoidable circumstances, but with the approval of the Engineer.
I. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary
or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices identical to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
J. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrates with concealed panel hanger

clips. Do not face nail paneling to supports.
3.04 REPAIRING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work,
which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
B. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at

time of final acceptance. Remove protections and re-clean as necessary immediately
before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 7
Thermal and Moisture Protection
SECTION 07 11 13
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this Section as indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
for performing all operations in connection with fluid bituminous damp proofing.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to the following:
1. Protective and water repellent coating applied to the concrete elements

contact in soil and to the exterior concrete, masonry or other wall surfaces
including in all other locations as shown.
C. Related Sections: The Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the work of other
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place Concrete
2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry
1.02 REFERENCES

1. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Damp proofing, and Waterproofing.
2. ASTM D43 - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing,
3. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Damp proofing and
Waterproofing.
4. ASTM D450 - Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing,

5. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a

Protective Coating for Roofing.
B. National Roofing Contractors Association:

1. NRCA - The NRCA Waterproofing and Damp proofing Manual.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials have
been successfully utilized on work of a similar scope to that shown and specified for
this Contract. The system examples cited shall have been completed and in use for
a minimum five (5) years without any evidence of failure.
Gulf Consult Bituminous Dampproofing III-2/07 11 13 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Fluid applied bituminous damp proofing shall be executed by workers who are
familiar with this type of work for a minimum of two years.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance
data, physical properties for damp proofing.
2. Manufacturer's application instructions including, joint and crack treatment,

application temperature range, and any special procedures.
B. Manufacturers’ Data: Submit to the Engineer, Manufacturers’ specifications and

installation instructions for the fluid applied damp proofing system and other data to
show compliance with the Contract Documents.
A. The Contractor shall deliver the approved products to the job site in their original
unopened containers clearly labeled with the manufacturer’s name, brand,
designation, type and class as applicable, and the date of manufacture and expiration
(if any).
B. Products shall be stored in an approved dry area and protected from contact with soil
and from exposure to the elements. Products shall be kept dry at all times.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply Bituminous Damp proofing during inclement weather or when air
temperature is outside the range recommended by the manufacturer.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect Bituminous Damp proofing from damage during construction period so that it
will be without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion of covering
with other materials.
B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of
materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during Bituminous Damp proofing
operations.
C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.
D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,
storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local
ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or
required under this section.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Contractor and
Installer against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification
of any leak within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements
as directed by the Engineer including the removal and replacement of work

20th October 2021
superimposed over the waterproofing, at the convenience of the Employer and to the
complete works in accordance with Contract Documents and approval of the
Engineer.
B. The warranty period for Waterproofing shall be Ten (10) years from the date of
Substantial Completion of the Works.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rubberized Bitumen Paint
The rubber bitumen emulsion shall comply with the following standards and shall be a
water bound emulsion with minimum 58% total solids content by volume, comprising
bitumen with fine particles of rubber. Not less than 6% or more than 20% of the total
solids shall be rubber. Specific gravity 0.98 + 0.02, Visconsity 4,000 – 6,000 cps.
The consistency shall be such that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal
temperature.
B. Crack filler: As recommended by the damp proofing manufacturer.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
1. BITUMAT, Kuwait
2. FOSROC, Dubai
3. Awazel Kuwait Co. Ltd.
4. Dermabit, KSA.
5. SIKA Kuwait
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of
this Section.
1. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive damp proofing are rigidly
installed.
2. Verify surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves, or projections which
may be detrimental to successful installation.
B. Do not apply damp proofing to damp, frozen, dirty, and dusty or surfaces
unacceptable to Engineer.
C. Do not apply damp proofing unless curing of concrete is complete and approved by
the Engineer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces of debris and deleterious material and surfaces are clean, dry, free
from oil, grease or loosely adhering particles such as mortar, laitance etc.

20th October 2021
B. Do not proceed with Bituminous Damp proofing until all drains, piping, conduit, vents,
ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install Bituminous Damp proofing in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions except as hereinafter specified.
B. Apply a first coat of bituminous damp proofing and allow drying. Coverage rate
should be approximately 2m2/Ltr.
C. The second coat shall be applied as soon as the first coat is dry at right angles to the
fist coat, and at the same rate as the first coat.
D. The third coat shall be applied as soon as the second coat is dry at right angles to the
second coat, and at the same rate as the second coat.
E. The emulsion shall be applied by brush, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. It shall not be applied during, or when rain or dust storms are to be
expected.
F. Backfilling shall not be commenced until the third coat of emulsion is quite dry.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 13 13
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this section, as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein, pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of sheet waterproofing to
roofing system and other locations as shown.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application
of:
1. Sheet membrane waterproofing
2. Leveling and protection screed to horizontal surfaces.
3. Protection board to vertical waterproofing within the site (if any).
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place concrete
2. Section 07 55 00 - Composite Roofing System

1. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension.
2. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Damp proofing and
Waterproofing.

4. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional

Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
5. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics

and Elastomers by Impact.
6. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related
Coatings and Materials Using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposure
Apparatus.
Gulf Consult Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing III-2/07 13 13 - 1

20th October 2021
7. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic
Film and Sheeting.
8. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer

Hardness.
9. ASTM D2581 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastics Molding

and Extrusion Materials.
10. ASTM D4068 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE)

Sheeting for Concealed Water-Containment Membrane.
11. ASTM D4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane.
12. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply
Roof Membrane.
13. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.

A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual.
B. Test material samples in accordance with ASTM D449 and ASTM D450.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 30 00: Submittal are required:

1. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications, installation
instructions and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Samples: Submit samples of membrane waterproofing. Samples shall be

300 mm square.
3. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions

of interface with other materials
4. Product Data: Submit data for membrane primer, protection board and joint
and crack sealants.
5. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and

perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Sheet membrane waterproofing shall be executed by an approved

specialist Sub-Contractor having a minimum of 10 years successful experience in the
installation of the specified material. Employ only tradesmen experienced with the
installation of the materials specified.

20th October 2021
B. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials to be
used have been successfully utilized on work of similar scope to that shown and
specified for this Works. The waterproofing system examples cited shall have been
completed and in use for a minimum five (5) years without evidence of failure.
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION
A. Pre-waterproofing Conference:
1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a Pre-Waterproofing

conference shall be held at job site. In attendance shall be representatives of
(1) the Engineer (2) the Contractor, (3) Sub-Contractor and (4)
Manufacturer's representative.
2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved materials.

Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements.
Examine job site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and
methods of storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and edges are provided
and correctly installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and
temperature requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof
from other trades.
1.07 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative

of the material manufacturer in order to ascertain that the system has been properly
installed. Should there be any deviation from this specification without the prior
written consent of the material manufacturer; the manufacturer shall have the option
of refusing the guarantee.
A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened

packages, all clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and number
and batch number of the material where appropriate. Materials and equipment shall
be stored as directed in a neat and safe manner. Storage area shall be shaded,
ventilated and maintained at a temperature between (10oC) and (40oC), and shall be
located away from all sources of excess heat, sparks or open flame. Containers of
liquid material shall not be left open at any time in the storage area.
B. Materials not conforming to these requirements will be rejected by the Engineer and
shall be removed from the site by this applicator and replaced with approved
materials, at no increase in Contract Price.
D. Deliver materials to site in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and at such
times as to permit proper co-ordination of the various parts.
1.09 WARRANTY
Installer against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification of
any leak within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements as
directed by the Engineer including the removal and replacement of work superimposed
over the membrane waterproofing, at the convenience of the Employer and to the
complete works in accordance with Contract Documents and approval of the Engineer.

20th October 2021
B. The warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be Ten (10) years from the
date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect waterproofing system installation from damage during construction period so

that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at the time of completion.
B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping, and dropping of
materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing membrane
operations.
required under this section.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the material manufacturer's
latest published manual for the type of substrate shown.
B. Sheet Membrane: Single-ply membrane, 4 (+/-0.2) mm thick
1. BITUMAT, Kuwait
2. FOSROC, Dubai
3. Awazel Kuwait Co. Ltd.
4. Dermabit, KSA.
5. SIKA Kuwait
Two layers to be provided, if none is mentioned in the drawings.
C. Ensure the properties of approved membrane fulfill the requirement of the tests
conducted in accordance with the specified standards:
Requirement
S.No. Properties Unit of Standards
Properties
1. Roll Size m 10 x 1
2. Nominal Thickness mm 4.0
3. Nominal Unit Weight Kg/m2 4.0
4. Carrier (Polyester) Unit Weight g/m2 200
Tensile Longitudinal N/5 cm 950 ASTM D 5147

5.
Strength Transversal N/5 cm 750 @23±2°C
Elongation at Longitudinal % 50 ASTM D 5147

6.
Break Transversal % 55 @23±2°C
Tear Longitudinal N 450 ASTM D 5147

7.
Resistance Transversal N 350 ASTM D 4073
Puncture Static L4 UEATC 5.1.9

8.
Resistance Dynamic I3 UEATC 5.1.4
Lap joint
9. Longitudinal N/5 cm 950
strength UEATC 5.1.9
CGSB-37-GP
Transversal N/5 cm 750
10. Water Absorption % <0.5 ASTM D 5147

20th October 2021
D. Primer for Sheet Membrane:
Provide one of the following, preferably manufactured by the Sheet Membrane

Producer
1. “Concrete Primer” by BITUMAT
2. “Awazel Primer D41”
3. Primer of Proofex Torchseal – 4P; FOSROC, Dubai
4. Polyprime SB- Bitu Gulf
5. "Impertene Primer", Imper, Italy.
E. Leveling and Protection Screeds

1:4 cement sand screeds, using sulphate resisting cement type V.
F. Protection Board: Provide one of the following or as recommended by the

manufacturer of waterproofing membrane.
1. “Bituflex” by BITUMAT.
2. “BituBoard”, Polybit Industries Ltd.
3. “Cartonal” Beirut – Lebanon;
4. MS60 –6mm – Awazel
5. Bitu Bond – Bitu Gulf
6. "Elastoboard", The Celotex Corp
Thickness of the protection board to be as per the drawings or 6mm if none is
mentioned therein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACE
A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the
Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare the substrates in all areas and locations in accordance with each
of the respective manufacturer's instructions. Grind and fill concrete surfaces as
required to meet tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
B. Provide leveling screed in the thickness shown on the drawing or minimum 3mm if
none is shown as well as provide additional thickness so as to prepare a level
surface for applying the waterproofing membrane.
C. Co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing membrane with floor drains, equipment
bases and other adjacent work. Mask adjacent work to prevent soil marks.
3.03 LOCATION
A. As Shown in Drawings
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE
A. Comply with the membrane manufacturer's directions for the installation.

20th October 2021
B. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system
occurs.
C. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses provide the
services of the manufacturer's technical representative at the job site as often as
deemed necessary by the manufacturer and/or the Engineer to advise on all phases
of this work.
D. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where
more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
E. Install cant strips where shown or recommended by the waterproofing materials
manufacturer.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD TO VERTICAL SURFACES WITHIN THE SITE
A. Areas where waterproofing is applied shall be protected from all traffic and backfilling.
All damage to finished portions of the waterproofing membrane by other trades shall
be either repaired or replaced, or both, in an acceptable manner and the cost of such
corrective work shall be paid by the trade responsible for the damage.
B. Upon completion of waterproofing and water test inspection, immediately install a
protective course over membrane surfaces. Protection course shall consist of
protection board, or where indicated protection board shall be applied in "dry" method
over horizontal sections of membrane waterproofing. At vertical sections of
membrane waterproofing, protection board shall be adhered to membrane with
membrane manufacturer's approved adhesive.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION SCREED TO HORIZONTAL WATERPROOFING
A. Install the above, all as leveling screed as shown in the drawings or 50mm thick if
none is shown.
3.07 TESTING
A. On completion of membrane installation all areas (other than basement walls and
floors) shall be tested against leaks with 10cm standing water for 48 hours or as per
manufacturers recommendations if the latter are more stringent.
B. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired, and then
fully re-tested.
C. Installation of mortar beds, where shown on drawings, applied over the waterproofing
shall not start until such time as the membrane is leak free and has been accepted by
the Engineer.
3.08 CLEAN UP
The applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials and debris
from the work and storage areas and leave those areas in clean, undamaged and
acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 13 54
THERMOPLASTIC (PVC) SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with PVC membrane
waterproofing to basement raft slab, basement walls, and basement roof including
landscape areas.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application of:
1. 2.2mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane along with complete system as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations to basement roof slabs and basement walls.
2. Geo-textile below and above the membrane waterproofing
3. Protection screed to horizontal surfaces.
4. Water stops on raft slab and walls.
C. Related sections
The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work of other sections with the work of
this section. Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this specification
includes but is not restricted to:
1. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension.
2. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and

Waterproofing.

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
4. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized
Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
5. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact.
Gulf Consult Thermoplastic (PVC) Sheet Waterproofing III-2/07 13 54 - 1

20th October 2021
Apparatus.
7. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film
and Sheeting.
8. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
9. ASTM D2581 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastics Molding and
Extrusion Materials.
10. ASTM D4068 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE)

Sheeting for Concealed Water-Containment Membrane.
11. ASTM D4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane.
12. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane.
13. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual.
B. Test material samples in accordance with ASTM D449 and ASTM D450.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 33 00 : Submittal Procedures are required :
1. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications, installation

instructions and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Samples: Submit samples of membrane waterproofing. Samples shall be 300 mm

square.
3. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of

interface with other materials
4. Product Data: Submit data for membrane primer, protection board and joint and
crack sealants.
5. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.

20th October 2021
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: PVC sheet membrane waterproofing shall be executed by an approved

specialist Sub-Contractor having a minimum of 10 years successful experience in the
installation of the specified material. Employ only trades men experienced with the
installation of the materials specified.
B. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials to be used
have been successfully utilized on work of similar scope to that shown and specified for
this Works.
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION
A. Pre-waterproofing Conference:
1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a Pre-Waterproofing

conference shall be held at job site. In attendance shall be representatives of (1)
the Engineer (2) the Contractor, (3) Sub-Contractor and (4) Manufacturer's
representative.
2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved materials. Correct
conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements. Examine job
site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and methods of
storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and edges are provided and correctly
installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and temperature
requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof from other trades.
A. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative of the

material manufacturer in order to ascertain that the system has been properly installed. If
the system installed is defective, the contractor shall rectify the system to the Engineer’s
approval.
A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened

packages, all clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and number and
batch number of the material where appropriate. Materials and equipment shall be stored
as directed in a neat and safe manner. Storage area shall be shaded, ventilated and
maintained at a temperature between (10oC) and (40oC), and shall be located away from
all sources of excess heat, sparks or open flame. Containers of liquid material shall not be
left open at any time in the storage area.
B. Materials not conforming to these requirements will be rejected by the Engineer’s

Representative and shall be removed from the site by this applicator and replaced with
approved materials, at no increase in Contract Price.
C. Deliver materials to site in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and at such times as
to permit proper co-ordination of the various parts.

20th October 2021
1.09 WARRANTY / GUARANTEE
A. Submit a written guarantee executed by the Contractor and Installer against materials and
workmanship like leaks occurring in waterproofing work. Upon notification of any leak within
the guarantee period, make necessary repairs and replacements as directed by the Engineer
including the removal and replacement of work superimposed over the waterproofing system,
at the convenience of the Employer and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
all as per and approval of the Engineer.
B. The Warranty period for PVC Membrane Waterproofing system shall be Ten (10) years
from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works by the sub-contractor.
C. Special warranty from the material supplier: The material supplier for the PVC
waterproofing system shall provide twenty (20) years materials warranty.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect waterproofing system installation from damage during construction period so that it
will be without any indication of abuse or damage at the time of completion.
materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing membrane operations.
D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and
installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire
regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or required under this
section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the material manufacturer's latest
published manual for the type of substrate shown.
B. PVC Sheet Membrane: Types of PVC sheet membranes for basement raft slab walls,
basement roof and landscape areas over basement roof shall be as follows:
1. Basement Raft Slab, Basement Walls: This shall be synthetic and plasticized
PVC twin color membrane manufactured by co-extrusion in a UNIEN ISO 9001
certified plan complying with EN 13967.
2. Manufacturer:
a. POLYMAT, Bitumat
b. SIKA.
c. MAPEI
d. Or Other Equal and Approved

20th October 2021
C. Properties: The physical chemical properties of 2.2rnm thick shall be s below:

Test Method
Straightness ≤ 75mm / 10 m EN 1848-2
Elongation at break (%) >300 EN ISO 527
Tensile Strength 15 Mpa EN ISO 527
MD ≤ 20 N/mm2 EN ISO 527
Elastic Modulus
CD≤ 20 N/mm2
Hydrostatic pressure Waterproof EN 1928
resistance (6 hours at 5 bar)
Resistance to Tear ≥ 500 N EN 12310
Static Puncture 2.35 KN EN ISO 12336
Resistance to Static Load ≥ 20 Kg EN 12730
Low Temperature ≤ -20°C ASTM D696-91
Behavior
Weathering Elongation ≥65% EN 12224
Chemical Resistance Change in elongation ≤ 10% EN 14414: 2004-08
Watertightness to liquid Pass EN 1928 B
water (24h/60Kpa)
Durability of water Pass EN1296 (12 weeks)
tightness against ageing
Accelerated ageing in Pass EN 12311-2
alkaline environment,
Water Vapour 18000 µ EN 1931
Transmission
Resistance to Root Pass EN 14416:2002
Penetration
Reaction to Fire Class E EN ISO 11925-2
The membrane shall be of a twin color co extrusion to give a visual indication when damage
occurs.
The membrane shall be double seam welded which shall be subject to a pneumatic test
at 2 bar pressures. The pressure loss shall not exceed 10% over a period of 120 seconds and
20% over 300 seconds.
The material shall be capable of being welded to the water bar with welding fins, to
compartmentalize the structure at the construction joints.
The slip membrane under the membrane shall be a geotextile manufactured from virgin
polypropylene with a specific weight of 370 gm/m2
D. Geotextile
The vertical protection product acceptable after Engineer’s approval, with a specific weight of
370 gm/m2 and the horizontal protection shall be screed of thickness as shown on the drawings
to the complete system. Properties of geotextile as below

20th October 2021
Test Method Value Tolerance

Mechanical properties
Tensile strength MD 25,9 kN/m - 3,4 kN/m -

EN ISO 10319
Tensile strength CD 27,9 kN/m 3,2 kN/m
Elongation MD 55% +/- 12,65%

EN/ISO 10319
Elongation CD 60% +/-13,80%
Static puncture resistance - CBR EN ISO 12236 4.6 kN - 0,92 kN
Dynamic perforation resistance -
EN 918 7 mm + 1,40 mm
cone drop
Protection efficiency Wl 189066 443 N -89N
Hydraulic properties
Water permeability normal to the 70x10-3 m/s -21 x10-3 m/s
EN ISO 11058
plane Water flow normal to the 70 l/m2.s - 21 l/ma.s
Water flow capacity in the plane 20 EN ISO 12958 8,5x10-6 m /s
2
-10% log g
kPa
Characteristic opening size EN ISO 12956 < 70 urn +/-21,00 um
Physical properties
Thickness under 2 kPa (*) EN 964/1 2,9 mm +/- 0,58 mm
Weight (") EN 965 370 g/m2 +/- 37,0 q/m2
Composition 100 % polypropylene non-woven geotextile
Durability: Geotextile shall have to be covered within 2 weeks after installation. Durability shall be
for a period of 25 years in natural soil with pH value between 4 & 9 and soil temperature < 25oC
F. Miscellaneous Components of System:
All below grade construction joints shall incorporate which shall be capable of performance in
the following manner:
 The hose should be of a re-injectable nature and be capable of re-injection several times
over the life of the structure. The hose shall be cleaned by vacuuming and not flushing.
 Installation should be seamless and without cuts and joints when installed at multiple
bends / corners / circular paths in congested heavily reinforced concrete.
 The hose shall be capable of following infinite changes in direction and turn corners with
ease.
 Valves shall be enclosed in a retaining mesh to avoid displacement of these during
pressure testing and injection.
 The injection resin re-swellable type made of an acrylate hydrogel, capable of being
vacuumed out of the hose with water (not flushed), before it gels.
 The injection resin should be of a low viscosity 50 CPS to enable maximum penetration of
very narrow fissures.
The system shall be placed in 10-12 meter lengths with entry port and vent ends terminating
in a junction box and shall offer the user the option of vacuuming and re-injection (should this
be necessary). The junction box shall be placed in vertical elements adjacent to the joint.
Should this not be possible the junction box and its cover should be installed flush with the
floor level and should be able to tolerate vehicular traffic.

20th October 2021
The system should be used to seal off the construction joints permanently thus providing
protection to the steel reinforcement. If need be, the re-injectable nature of the hose shall be
demonstrated in live situation until the engineer is satisfied and job references of at least
three projects with contact details of the consultants shall be provided.
2.02 COMPARTMENTALISATION
All Construction joints in the substrate shall be compartmentalised as shown in the section
drawing. A strip shall be fixed on the joint by bedding on either side with adhesive. The
geotextile membrane shall stop short of this strip on either side. The main layer shall be welded
to this compartmentalization strip to ensure that water does not travel from one side of the
compartment to the other.
The details of the installation shall be as shown on the section drawings and as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The contractor shall examine substrate surfaces to receive Works of this Section and ensure
that Works done as part of the Works of other Sections is complete and that there are no
conditions which will adversely affect the performance of the Works of this Section. Notify
the Engineer of any unsatisfactory conditions. Works of this Section must not be
commenced until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of Works
of this Section implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
B. The contractor shall verify that substrates to receive waterproofing are clean sound,
smooth, free of fins and sharp edges and free of curing agents, loose and foreign matter, oil
and grease detrimental to waterproofing membrane adhesion. Pitted or honeycombed
surfaces must be repaired before membrane application.
C. Prior to commencing Works of this Section, contractor will verify that service and other
protrusions, through the waterproofing membrane, are installed.
3.02 LOCATIONS
A. Install the synthetic waterproofing membrane system to horizontal and vertical faces below
raft slabs, basement walls, basement, and roof including landscape areas all as indicated on
the drawings.
B. The membrane shall be terminated at the grade level by welding against the W4 water bar
which has been cast into the concrete.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Before commencing Works of this Section and as Works of this Section proceeds, sweep
surfaces clean and remove debris, irregularities, moisture, water and any adhering materials
which would impair works of this section
B. Maintain weather tightness at all times.

20th October 2021
C. Install the synthetic waterproofing membrane system in accordance with relevant codes and
standards in addition to manufacturer's written instructions and recommended standard
details.
D. Provide adequate protection and backing to existing waterproofing systems of adjacent

structures.
E. Provide levelling screed in the thickness shown on the drawing or minimum 3mm if none is
shown as well as provide additional thickness so as to prepare a level surface for applying
the waterproofing membrane.
F. Co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing membrane with floor drains, equipment bases
and other adjacent work. Mask adjacent work to prevent soil marks.
3.04 PREPARATION - SLIP MEMBRANE
A. Apply slip membrane to all surfaces to receive the waterproofing membrane system.
This ensures surface evenness of the substrate, providing protection to the waterproofing
membrane.
B. Apply slip membrane to the recommendations of the manufacturer to suit the waterproofing
system and application.
C. The slip membrane is to be laid with 50mm laps at the edges.
D. The slip membrane should be spot bonded at the overlap with a hot air gun.
3.05 PREPARATION - WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Apply the waterproofing membrane laid loose and compartmentalized by welding to the
Bitustop water bar, to the requirements of the manufacturer and approval of Engineer.
B. Thoroughly inspect the completed membrane at the end of each day's work as well as
before the placement of concrete.
C. Subject the double seam welds to pneumatic testing. The test is to be carried out by an
approved tester.
D. Membrane repairs are to be carried out and tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
3.06 APPLICATION - PROTECTION LAYERS
A. Apply geotextile membrane to horizontal and vertical surfaces.
B Use sand cement screed for horizontal surfaces.
C. Membranes are to be fully inspected and tested prior to the application of the protection
screed.

20th October 2021
3.07 PREPARATION - FASTENING ELEMENT "RONDELS
A. Support the waterproof geotextile slip membrane with Rondels during installation.
B. Support composed of PVC Rondels (washers) fixed in place by shot fixing onto the shoring or
wall.
C. The Contractor shall propose to the Engineer suitable fixing details for the geotextile slip
membrane support on the backing board to be provided at the adjacent structure interface.
3.08 PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC.
A. Preformed collars: Recommended for the purpose by membrane manufacturer.
 Sealing: Fully bond to penetrations and sheeting.

 Completed junctions: impervious
3.09 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION SCREED TO HORIZONTAL WATERPROOFING
A. Install the above, all as levelling screed as shown in the drawings or 50mm thick if none is
shown.
3.10 CLEANUP
A. The applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials and debris from
the work and storage areas and leave those areas in clean, undamaged and acceptable
conditions.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 14 00
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Work in this section includes furnishing all plant, labor, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all in connection with Fluid Applied
Waterproofing.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application of:
1. Fluid Applied waterproofing for wet areas (Toilets, Kitchen, Pantries, Janitors,
Central Plant Room, Mechanical Rooms, AHU Rooms and Fountain Pools).
2. Fluid Applied Waterproofing for Water Tanks.
3. Leveling and protection screed to horizontal surfaces.
2. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-
Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate
Wearing Course.
2. ASTM D429 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid
Substrates.
Apparatus.
4. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic
Film and Sheeting.
5. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer

Hardness.
6. ASTM D3468 - Standard Specification for Liquid-Applied Neoprene and

Chlorosulfonated Polyethylene Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
7. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of

Materials.
Gulf Consult Fluid Applied Wateproofing III-2/07 14 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished
hereunder.
2. Manufacturer’s instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions indicating

special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
3. Warranty: Provide sample copies of manufacturers' actual warranties for all

materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms,
conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof.
4. Qualifications Statement: Evidence indicating that the proposed applicators are

qualified to perform the work and are approved by the waterproofing
manufacturer.
5. Shop Drawings: Provide details for all change-in-plane conditions.
A. The work under this Section must be performed by an applicator approved by the
membrane manufacturer. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely
familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.
B. Prior to commencing work, the manufacturer of the fluid applied waterproofing

membrane shall submit the following:
1. Certification from an independent testing laboratory that their material meets

the CGSB 37-GP-50M standard for rubberized asphalt membranes.
2. Certification showing full time quality control of their production facilities and
that each batch of material is tested to insure conformance with the
manufacturers published physical properties.
C. Upon completion of the work the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the roof
assembly.
D. Upon completion of the work, furnish the owner with a single source, Five-Year water
tightness Warranty from the manufacturer.
1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All surfaces shall be clean, free of dampness, frost, dust, laitance or loose concrete,
films of oil, grease, curing compounds, lacquers or other substances which would
affect the application of membrane waterproofing.
B. Protect all adjacent work from damage by work performed under this section.

20th October 2021
C. Deliver materials in original unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with

manufacturer's name, brand name, Instruction for use, all Identifying numbers, and
U.L. Labels.
D. Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight.
E. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 60 degrees Fahrenheit and 80 degrees

Fahrenheit if exposed to lower temperatures, restore materials to 60 degrees
Fahrenheit minimum temperature before using.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Application of the membrane shall not commence nor proceed during inclement
weather. All surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost,
snow and ice.
B. Application of membrane shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient
temperature is below 0 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Preparation and application of membrane must be conducted in well ventilated areas.
D. Over its service life, do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant

temperature in excess of 180 degrees Fahrenheit. (I.e. hot pipes and vents or direct
steam venting, etc...).
E. Adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flammable. Do not breathe
vapors or use near an open fire. Do not use in confined areas without adequate
ventilation. Consult container or packaging labels and Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) for specific safety information.
F. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral
oil, animal fat, etc.) to come in contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any
exposure to foreign materials or chemical discharges must be presented to
membrane manufacturer for evaluation to determine any impact on the membrane
assembly performance.
1.07 WARRANTY
Installer against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification
of any leak within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements
as directed by the Engineer’s Representative including the removal and replacement
of work superimposed over the membrane waterproofing, at the convenience of the
Employer and to the complete works in accordance with Contract Documents and
approval of the Engineer’s Representative.
B. The warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be Ten (10) years after the
date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
C. The warranty shall be supported by a bank guarantee of the same duration obtained
from a bank approved by the Employer and shall be for the minimum amount of the
value of the works established by a final measurement of the same at the Unit Rates
contained in the Bills of Quantities.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
Subject to compliance with the requirement and as approved by the Engineer.
A. For Wet Area (Toilets, Janitors, Ablutions, Kitchen, Pantries, Plant room,
mechanical room, AHU room, and shaft floors).
1. Mapei
2. BASF
3. Fosroc (Boodai)
4. Al Ghanim Specialties Co.
5. Or approved equal.
B. For Potable Concrete Water Tanks.
1. Product: CIM 1061
Al-Bahar & Bardawil, Specialties Co.
2. Kut Dura Coat
Al Ghanim Specialties
3. Or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. For Wet Area (Toilets, Kitchen, Pantries, Janitors, Central Plant Room,
Mechanical Rooms, AHU Rooms and Fountain Pools)
Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Manufacturer's proprietary blend of dry

cementitious and other ingredients for mixing with polymer admixture to produce a
waterproof coating that is suitable for vertical and horizontal applications below or
above grade, is breathable, resists negative-side hydrostatic pressure, and has
properties complying with or exceeding the criteria specified below:
1. Water Permeability:
No Penetration for Positive Water Pressure at 7.0 bar to DIN 1048 Part 5:7.6:
1991 and No Penetration at 150 KPa to EN 14891 A.7
No Penetration for Negative Water Pressure at after 24 hours at 1.50 atm.

(1.52 bar).
2. Elongation:
Tested to EN ISO 527 Pt 3 at 28 days
Air Cured : > 40%
Immersed and dried to constant mass : > 40%

20th October 2021
3. Tensile Strength:
Tested to EN ISO 527 Pt 3 at 28 days
Air Cured 28 : > 0.4MPa
Immersed and dried to constant mass : > 0.6MPa
4. Crack Bridging:
Ability to bridge cracks > 0.6 mm when tested to EN14891 A.8.2
Ability to bridge cracks > 1.5 mm with reinforcing mesh when tested to ASTM
C836 / C1305
5. Color : White or Grey
B. For Fluid Applied Waterproofing for water tanks.
Product should be a tough, abrasion, corrosion and chemical resistant, fluid applied
liner specifically for use in water and waste water applications including those which
require ANSI/NSF 61 potable water certification. Typical application for this two
component urethane elastomeric coating includes tank and reservoir liners, joint
seals, tank repairs and chemical containment.
1. Typical Properties for Potable Water Tanks:
a. Abrasion Resistance – Wt. Loss Taber Abraser CS-17 Wheel 1000

g/1000 rev.
b. ASTM D4060: 1.2 mg loss.
c. Adhesion to Concrete - Elcometer: 350 psi.
d. Deflection Temperature – ASTM D648: Below -60° F.
e. Density (Approx.) - Premix: 8.0 lbs/gal, Activator: 10.1 lbs/gal, Mixed

& Cured: 8.3 lbs/gal.
f. Elastomeric Waterproofing - ASTM C836: Exceeds all criteria, ASTM

C957: Exceeds all criteria.
g. Extension to Break - ASTM D412: 300%.
h. Hardness Shore A - ASTM 2240@77° F: 65.
i. Liner Performance – Crack Bridging - 10 Cycles @ -1.5° F: greater

than 1/8”, after heat aging: greater than ¼”.
j. Liner Weight - (60 mils wet film thickness): 31lbs/ 100 sq.ft.
k. Mix Ratio - Weight: 6.2:1, Volume: 7.8:1.
l. Mullen Burst Strength - ASTM D751, 50 mil : 150 psi.
m. Permeability to Water Vapor - ASTM E 96 Method E, 100° F, 100 mil

sheet: 0.03 perms.

20th October 2021
n. Potable Water Service - ANSI/NSF 61 Approved: to 180° F.
o. Recovery from 100% Extension - after 5 minutes : 98%, after 24

hours : 100%.
p. Service Temperature – (-60° F to 220° F).
q. Softening Point, Ring & Ball - ASTM D36 : >325° F.
r. Tear Strength - ASTM D624 (Die C) : 180 lbs/in.
s. Tensile Strength - ASTM D412, 100 mil sheet: 1000 psi.
t. Weathering - ASTM D822: 5000 hrs.
2. Typical Properties for Potable Water Tanks:
a. Abrasion Resistance, Wt. Loss Taber Abraser CS-17 Wheel 1000

g/1000 rev. - ASTM D4060 : 1.2 mg loss.
b. Adhesion to Concrete - Elcometer: 350 psi.
c. Deflection Temperature – ASTM D648: Below -60° F.
d. Density (Approx.) - Premix: 8.0 lbs/gal, Activator: 10.1 lbs/gal, Mixed

& Cured: 8.3 lbs/gal.
e. Elastomeric Waterproofing - ASTM C836: Exceeds all criteria, ASTM

C957: Exceeds all criteria.
f. Extension to Break - ASTM D412: 400%.
g. Flammability - ASTM D2859: Pass / Combustible Substrate, UL790:

Class A.
h. Hardness Shore A - ASTM D2240@77° F : 60.
i. Jet Fuel Resistance - FS SS-S-200D: Pass for Joints.
j. Liner Performance – Crack Bridging - 10 Cycles @ -1.5° F: greater

than 1/8”, After heat aging: greater than ¼”.
k. Liner Weight - (60 mils wet film thickness): 31lbs/ 100 sq.ft.
l. Mix Ratio - Weight: 7:1, Volume: 9:1.
m. Mullen Burst Strength - ASTM D751, 50 mil: 150 psi.
n. Permeability to Water Vapor - ASTM E 96 Method E, 100° F, 100-mil

sheet: 0.03 perms.
o. Recovery from 100% Extension - after 5 minutes: 98%, after 24

hours: 100%.
p. Salt Spray - ASTM B117: Pass 2000 hrs.
q. Service Temperature: -60° F to 220° F.

20th October 2021
r. Softening Point, Ring & Ball - ASTM D36 : >325° F.
s. Tear Strength - ASTM D624 (Die C): 150 lbs/in.
t. Tensile Strength - ASTM D412, 100 mil sheet: 900 psi.
u. Weathering - ASTM D822: 5000 hrs.
C. ACCESSORIES MATERIAL
1. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack

filler, or sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and
patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections and
compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
2. Insert patching-compound manufacturers and products and tested product

properties here to suit Project if required; verify availability of tested
performance with manufacturers.
3. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with

hydrophobic properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer;
resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard
applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to
vehicular traffic); and compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
4. Insert plugging-compound manufacturers and products and tested product

properties here to suit Project if required; verify availability of tested
performance with manufacturers.
5. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
6. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and

admixture designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and to not
create a vapor barrier.
7. Water: Potable.
D. MIXES
1. Prepackaged, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add prepackaged

dry ingredients to mixing liquid according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand to required
consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrates adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work
is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until satisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

20th October 2021
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Grind and fill concrete surfaces as required to meet tolerances specified by the
manufacturer.
B. Apply waterproofing to substrate in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing with adjacent work. Mask adjacent work to
prevent soil marks.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with waterproofing manufacturer’s directions for the installation.
B. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system
occurs.
C. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses provide the service
of the manufacturer’s technical representative at the job site as often as deemed
necessary by the manufacturer to advise on all phases of the Work.
D. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, except where
requirements that are more stringent are shown or specified.
E. Install cant strips where shown or recommended by the waterproofing materials

manufacturer.
F. Allow waterproofing to cure properly. During this period block off all traffic and protect
waterproofing from physical damage.
3.04 TESTING
A. Test all areas receiving fluid applied waterproofing such as toilet and kitchen floors
against leaks after 48 hours (or more if manufacturer so recommends) from
completion of application.
B. Fill water tanks full. Fill with 10cm standing water in toilets and other wet rooms. If
leaks occur, drain tank, allow tank to thoroughly dry, repair waterproofing and re test.
Repeat process as often as required until no leaks occur.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. Applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials and debris from
the work and storage areas and leave those areas in clean, undamaged and in
acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. General: Provide thermal insulation in accordance with requirements of the Contract

Documents.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
2. Refer to applicable Division 07 Roofing Section(s) for insulation types used in

roofing system(s).
a. Section 07 55 00 "Composite Roofing."
3. Blanket (batt) insulation types used for interior gypsum board assemblies as
specified in Section 09 21 16 "Gypsum Board Assemblies."
1.02 REFERENCES
A. TypeTYPE
General: Comply with the applicable provisions of the referenced standards except as
modified by governing codes and the contract documents. All reference to Kuwaiti,
The Standardization Organization for the Arab States of the Gulf Cooperation Council
(GSO), American, European and other International standards, regulations and
requirements of statutory bodies and shall mean the latest published editions at the
time of contract. Where such standards, regulations and requirements are amended
and affect the contractor's responsibilities during the course of the works, the
Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer and the Employer of his intentions
in respect of the revisions. Where a recommendation or suggestion occurs in the
referenced standards, such recommendation or suggestion shall be considered
mandatory. In the event of conflict between referenced standards, this specification or
within themselves, the more stringent standard or requirement shall govern.
B. Governing Codes
1. Gulf Construction Code, 2018 ICC International Building Code, with the more
stringent governing
2. Energy Code: Provisions in Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW) Code of

Practice of the State of Kuwait, GCC, and International Energy Conservation
Code (IECC) 2018, with the more stringent governing.
C. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C165, "Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive

Properties of Thermal Insulations."
Gulf Consult Thermal Insulation III-2/07 21 00 - 1

20th October 2021
b. ASTM C356, "Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage of

Preformed High-Temperature Thermal Insulation Subjected to
Soaking Heat."
c. ASTM C411, "Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of

High-Temperature Thermal Insulation."
d. ASTM C518, "Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter
Apparatus."
e. ASTM C578, "Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene

Thermal Insulation."
f. ASTM C612, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and

Board Thermal Insulation."
g. ASTM C665, "Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket

Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing."
h. ASTM C795, "Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use

in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel."
i. ASTM C1104, "Standard Test Method for Determining the Water

Vapor Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation."
j. ASTM C1338, "Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi

Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings."
k. ASTM E84, "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials."
l. ASTM E96, "Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission

of Materials."
m. ASTM E119, "Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building

Construction and Materials."
n. ASTM E136, "Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a

Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C."
2. Factory Mutual Global Inc. (FM):
a. FM 4473, "Specification Test Standard for Impact Resistance Testing

of Rigid Roofing Materials by Impacting with Freezer Ice Balls."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for Engineer's action. Submit manufacturer's literature

specifications, and installation instructions describing the general properties of each
material and accessory to be used in the Work.
B. Samples: Submit for Engineer's action. Label samples to indicate product,

characteristics, and location in the Work. Samples will be reviewed for color and
appearance only. Furnish sufficient samples to establish the full range of colors and
textures for materials exposed in the finished work. Compliance with other
requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.

20th October 2021
1. Furnish samples of each type of insulation, not less than 300mm x 300mm
2. Furnish samples of each auxiliary material exposed to view or as requested

by Engineer.
C. Closeout Submittals Submit for Employer's documentation.
1. Warranties: Special warranties as specified.
A. Basis of Design: When particular manufacturers' materials, products or processes are

specified for an item of Work, any one thereof is acceptable for the Contractor to
choose. An alternative material, product or process will be considered if the
Contractor submits a written substitution request together with such information as
may be necessary to assist the Engineer in determining whether the proposed
substitution is acceptable; the burden of proof rests solely upon the Contractor.
B. Sole-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building

insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with
requirements indicated without delaying the Work.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes,

ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having
jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fie-test-response characteristics, as per test method indicated below by UL

or another testing and inspecting agency.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.
b. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.
c. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
d. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the start of the Work, meet at the Project site to
review methods and sequence of building insulation installation, special details and
conditions, standard of workmanship, quality control requirements, job organization
and other pertinent topics related to the Work.
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver insulation materials in

manufacturer's unopened containers or packages, fully identified with trade name,
type, class, and other identifying information.
B. Storage and Protection: Store above grade and protect from weather and damage.
Do not allow insulation to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Protect
insulation from exposure to high temperatures, excessive exposure to sunlight, and
contact with hot surfaces in excess of the safe temperature indicated by the
manufacturer
C. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Exposure: Prohibit exposure of extruded polystyrene

board insulation to sunlight except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment. Protect against ignition at all times.

20th October 2021
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties and guaranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties
and guaranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Special Warranty, Molded Polystyrene Rigid Board Insulation: Upon

completion of the work, provide the molded polystyrene insulation
manufacturer's fifteen (15) years warranty stating that the thermal resistance
of the molded polystyrene insulation will not vary more than 10 percent from
its published value.
2. Special Warranty, Extruded Polystyrene Rigid Board Insulation: Upon

completion of the work, provide the extruded polystyrene insulation
manufacturer's fifteen (15) year warranty stating that the thermal resistance
of the extruded polystyrene insulation will not vary more than 10 percent from
its published value.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. “Isoboard” by Isofoam Insulating Material Plants W.L.L., Kuwait
B. “Esscofoam” by Gulf Insulating Materials Manufacturing and Trading Co. WLL.,

Kuwait
C. KIMMCO, Kuwait
D. Saudi Rockwool Products KSA
E. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Fire Resistive Rating: Identify materials with appropriate markings of

applicable testing and inspecting agency.
a. Where materials are required by law or are specified to have a fire

resistive rating, provide materials, accessories and application
procedures which have been listed by UL or tested according to
ASTM E814/UL 1479 to achieve the rating required.
b. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. Where specified or

required provide the following maximum flame spread and smoke
developed ratings when materials are tested in accordance with
ASTM E84:
i. Unfaced material will have a maximum flame spread and

smoke-developed of 0.
ii. Faced material will have maximum flame spread and smoke-
developed of 25 and 0 respectively.

20th October 2021
c. Combustibility: Glass, slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulations shall

be rated as non-combustible as defined by NFPA standard 220 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E136.
2. Fungi Resistance: Blanket and/or Batt Insulation and facing shall be fungi
resistant when tested in accordance with ASTM C1338 "Standard Test
Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and
Facings".
3. Plenum Rating: Provide glass, slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation

where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as
follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per
"Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or
on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of

cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct
assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 13 m/s air velocity.
b. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no

evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to
the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium
globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent
relative humidity in the dark.
c. Unfaced fiberglass batt insulation shall not be used above

suspended ceilings. If used in plenums and shafts, fiberglass batt
insulation must be encapsulated and formaldehyde-free. Fiberglass
board products used in plenums shafts or for insulating ductwork
must be wrapped or enclosed.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Semi-Rigid Glass Fiber Board Insulation with Vapor Barrier: Glass fibers and
thermosetting resins complying with ASTM C612, Type IA and IB; density not less
than 48kg/m348 kg/m3); minimum R-Value of 4.3 per 25mm thickness at 24 deg.
C29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C); vapor barrier facing laminate of aluminum foil, and glass
scrim reinforcement, with water vapor permeance rating of 5.7 ng/Pa•s•m2; Class A;
flame spread of 25 or less, manufacturer's standard sizes; thickness shown.
B. Semi-Rigid Insulation Mineral Wool Board for Use in Vertical Cavities or as shown on
the drawings: Water repellant unfaced mineral wool fiber insulation made from basalt
rock and slag and thermo-setting resins for specific use as continuous cavity wall
insulation, complying with ASTM C612, Type IVA; density not less than 96 kg/m3;
minimum R-Value of 4.2 per 25mm thickness at 24 deg.C29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C;
non-corrosive to steel, fungi resistant, flame spread rating of 0; smoke developed 0 or
less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; a moisture absorption by volume of
0.07% when tested in accordance with ASTM C1104; manufacturer's standard sizes;
thickness shown.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and

having fire resistance characteristics similar to that of the insulation.
B. Sealer and Tape: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and having perm
rating and fire resistance characteristics similar to that of the insulation.

20th October 2021
C. Welded or Adhesively Attached Mechanical Fasteners: Zinc coated steel or nylon

fasteners consisting of a perforated galvanized carbon steel plate and copper coated
steel prongs or spindles and self-locking washer; length to suit depth of insulation
shown; Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect
ends with capped self-locking washers.
D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over
spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space between face of insulation and
substrate to which anchor is attached.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare substrates, apply primers and apply the work of
this Section, including components, and accessories in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified, and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to
ensure satisfactory performance of the Work.
B. Markings: Manufacturer's identification tags or marks are not acceptable on surfaces

where products are considered to be finish material. Evidence of patching after
removal of tags or marks is not acceptable.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions
under which the Work would be performed. Remedy conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Extent of Insulation: Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be insulated.
Install in single layer unless otherwise shown or recommended by manufacturer. Cut
and fit insulation tightly around obstructions and against each other. Neatly finish
insulation exposed to view without broken corners or open joints. Use insulation
where no other specific type is shown.
B. Installation of Perimeter Foundation and Below-Grade Insulation: On surfaces

indicated to receive below grade insulation, set extruded polystyrene insulation units,
in thicknesses as noted, using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to
manufacturer's written instructions and press into place so that entire board is
bonded. Support insulation temporarily until adhesive bond is sufficient to hold weight
of insulation. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 900mm below
exterior grade line.
1. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut
insulation units.
2. Installation on Vertical Surfaces: On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive

applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive
recommended by manufacturer of insulation. Protect insulation on vertical
surfaces from damage during backfilling by application of protection board.
Set in adhesive in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer of
insulation.

20th October 2021
C. Installation over Waterproofing: Lay rigid insulation over waterproofing with beveled
edges down and with slightly open joints. Seal edges of other board insulation with
sealer to form a tight seal between units.
D. Installation of Cavity Wall Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive

spaced approximately 600mm o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended
by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between ties, anchors, supports and other
obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against
inside substrates.
E. Installation of Insulation for Framed Construction: Apply insulation units to substrates

by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific
method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
1. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by

framing members according to the following requirements:
2. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide
lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
3. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction

fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
4. Maintain 19mm clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not

rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 2.4m, support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges
of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
6. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material
is installed over it.
7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder

facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight
installation.
8. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction as
indicated on Drawings unless otherwise shown or required by manufacturer.
F. Installation of Insulation for Concrete Substrates: Verify, with manufacturer, methods

of installation of insulation for concrete substrates.
1. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by mechanically attached,

spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:
2. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with mechanical fasteners

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors
according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type,
thickness, and application indicated.
3. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle and install board insulation by

pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place
with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation
below indicated thickness.

20th October 2021
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply

capped washers to tips of spindles.
G. Installation on Overhead Surfaces: Apply insulation to overhead surfaces with

mechanical fasteners. Apply other insulation mechanical fasteners as recommended
by the manufacturer. When mechanical fasteners are used, cut pins 3mm beyond
face of board and apply self-locking cap after coating around pin with sealer.
1. Installation on Concrete and Masonry Overhead Surfaces: Install board

insulation on concrete and masonry substrates by mechanically attached,
spindle-type insulation anchors according to anchor manufacturer's written
instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. If shown
apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated
between concrete substrate and insulation. Install board insulation by
pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place
with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation
below indicated thickness. Where insulation will not be covered by other
building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.
H. Installation of Curtain-Wall Insulation: Install board insulation in curtain-wall

construction where indicated on Drawings according to curtain-wall manufacturer's
1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets
within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by
insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching
spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between
insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to

prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-
containment system.
I. CMU Insulation: Pour granular insulation into cavities where shown to fill void spaces
completely. Maintain inspection ports to show the presence of insulation at the
extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after complete coverage has been
confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to 1 story in height, but not to exceed 6m.
J. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Place vapor retarders on side of construction

indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from
vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other
anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids
in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than
two studs.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal

framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and
window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-
retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions.
Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with
vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

20th October 2021
K. Maintenance of Vapor Barrier: Maintain integrity of vapor barriers of insulation by

taping and sealing joints, ruptures and edges of units adjoining other surfaces. Seal
joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor
barriers to create an air-tight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barrier.
Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by
other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor barrier
L. Metal Furring Strips: Apply furring members to rigid insulation at 610mm. on center.
Use fasteners recommended by the furring strip manufacturer. Coordinate with the
gypsum drywall applicator for location and spacing of furring strips, detailing of
internal and external corners, openings and other areas of special consideration.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation, vapor barriers and accessories from harmful
weather exposures and during construction activity. Do not allow to become wet,
soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Protect insulation from humid conditions.
Exposure not to exceed time period per manufacturer. Replace insulation if damaged,
exhibiting damage from mold or moisture, or otherwise unsuitable for use.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 24 20
EXTERNAL INSULATED FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this section shall include all plant, labour, material etc. for
fabricating, furnishing, installing of External Insulated and Finish System (EIFS) as
defined by EIFS Industry Members Association. (EIMA)
B. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board.
C. Provide all materials, labor, and equipment to install the Exterior Insulation and Finish
System (EIFS).
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete
4. Section 07 62 00 - Aluminium Flashing & Trim
6. Div 08 - Section related Doors & Windows
1.03 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. Construction Standards
1. ACI – American Concrete Institute
2. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
3. APA – American Plywood Association
4. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials
5. EIMA – EIFS Industry Members Association
B. Code Jurisdictions
1. ICBO AC 24
2. IBC and IRC Building Codes
3. ESR 1936
1.04 TERMS / DEFINITIONS
A. Applicator – The contractor that applies the EIFS.
B. Adhesive – A Cementitious material used to attach the insulation board to the

substrate and for embedding mesh. A non-Cementitious material for attaching the
insulation board to wood substrates.
Gulf Consult External Insulated Finishing System (EIFS) III-2/07 24 20 - 1

20th October 2021
C. Aesthetic Joint – A groove in the EPS designed to create aesthetics and used to
provide starting and stopping points during the application of the finish coat. A
minimum 3/4” thickness of EPS shall remain below the deepest point in the aesthetic
groove. Aesthetic joints are not expansion or control joints nor should they be used in
lieu of expansion or control joints.
D. Back wrapping – The application of the reinforced base coat on the exposed edge of
the EPS insulation board and a minimum of 2 1/2” on the face of the EPS. Also
referred to as embedding the details mesh.
E. Base Coat – The material applied to the face of the insulation board and reinforced
with one or more layers of mesh to function as the weather barrier.
F. Base Coat Mixture – A field mixed blend of base coat and Portland cement.
G. Building Expansion Joint – A joint through the entire building structure designed to
accommodate structural movement.
H. Class PB System – A polymer-based EIF system where the base coat varies in
thickness depending upon the number of layers, or thickness, of reinforcing material.
The reinforcing material is glass fiber mesh, which is embedded into the base coat
per manufacturer’s instruction and with no mesh color visible. Protective finish coats,
of various thicknesses, in a variety of textures and colors, are applied over base coat.
I. Aesthetic Joint-a grove or inset detail cut into the face of the EPS insulation board..
J. Design Professional – The person or firm that is responsible to create the plans and
specifications for the entire project.
K. EIFS – Exterior Insulation and Finish System
L. EIMA – EIFS Industry Members Association
M. Finish Coat – An acrylic based, factory mixed decorative and protective coating that is
applied to the base coat.
N. EPS insulation Board – Expanded Polystyrene Board, manufactured in accordance

with the EIFS manufacturer’s specifications, attached to the substrate and covered
with the reinforced base coat and finish.
O. Reinforcing Mesh – Balanced, open weave, basic glass fiber mesh(es) supplied by
the manufacturer of the EIFS, treated for compatibility with other materials of the
system, which functions to strengthen the system and adds impact resistance.
The 2 meter from ground level will be covered with double layer fiber mesh to attain
better impact resistance.

20th October 2021
P. Mechanical Fastener – Typically, a plastic washer and a mechanical fastener utilized

to attach the insulation board to the substrate.
Q. Sheathing – A substrate in a sheet form.
R. Substrate – The material to which the EIFS is attached.
A. Special Inspections
1. Special inspections of this system are required in accordance with the
International Building Code/2000, Sections 1403.2 and 1704.12 when the
system is applied over non-masonry (sheathed) substrates. Follow the
guidelines of the local jurisdictional building authority to ensure that all the
necessary inspections have been accomplished.
2. The general contractor will be responsible for inspecting the project to ensure
that all the exclusions (flashing and sealants for example) specifically listed in
the accepted project bid have been completed prior to the starting the EIFS
application.
B. Design and Detailing

1. General
a. Manufacturer’s Current published details, specifications, data sheets,
technical bulletins and other literature/information are minimum
standards and guidelines that shall be followed when designing and
detailing a project with the EIFS System.
b. Design details shall conform to manufacturer’s details and shall be
consistent with the project requirements.
c. The design professional or the engineer should determine where the
dew point would occur in relationship to the wall assembly and the
project location during summer and winter conditions.
d. Drip details shall be specified in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published details.
e. All of the EPS insulation board must be completely encapsulated with
the base coat and reinforcing mesh.
f. The use of dark colors must be considered in relation to wall surface
temperature as a function of local climatic conditions.
g. The EPS shall be separated from the interior of the building by a 15-
minute thermal barrier.
h. The use and maximum thickness of EPS shall be in accordance with
the applicable building codes.

20th October 2021
i. The EIF System shall be recognized by IBC and IRC Model Code
Organizations.
2. Substrate
a. The maximum deflection under full flexural design loads of the
substrate system shall not exceed L/240.
b. Acceptable substrates include unpainted brick, unit masonry,
concrete, stucco brown coat, exterior grade gypsum sheathing
(ASTM C-79 or ASTM C-1177), and plywood and approved
cementitious sheathings.
c. The engineer shall approve the substrate with regard to the required
structural performance.
3. Expansion joints
a. Control /Expansion joints shall be installed in the EIFS a maximum of
every 75 lineal feet. Reference construction documents for specific
locations.
b. Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion
joints, at prefabricated panel joints, where substrates change, at floor
lines in wood framed construction, and where structural movement is
anticipated. Reference construction documents for exact locations.
4. Aesthetic Joints
a. Aesthetic joints may be installed to provide sufficient break points in
the EIF System to prevent cold joints from occurring in the finish coat.
b. Aesthetic joints shall not be used in lieu of an expansion or control
joint.
5. Joint Sealants (Section 07 92 00)

a. Sealants and backer rod, as required at expansion joints and
dissimilar substrates, shall provide a complete watertight system.
b. The sealants in an EIFS expansion joint, or any sealant joint that
anticipates significant movement, shall be bonded to the reinforced
base coat, not the finish coat. The color of the mesh shall not be
visible and the texture of the mesh shall not be exposed within base
coat at these locations.
c. All penetrations through the system such as hose bibs, dryer vents,
lighting fixtures, air- conditioning hoses, etc. must be properly sealed
at the substrate prior to the system application to insure the integrity
of the system.
d. A secondary sealant installed by others is used at all penetrations
through the wall system after the system installation has been
completed.

20th October 2021
e. Reference Section 07 92 00 for specific joint sealant instructions.

6. Flashings/Secondary Seals (Sections 07 62 00 and 07 92 00)
a. Expandable Foam Seal may be used under and around windows,
doors and at all penetrations. Plan this seal to block any air or water
infiltration at any opening in the wall system and to protect the
sheathing from any primary seal failure or failure in a wall penetration
component.
b. Metal flashing may be installed at heads of openings if required by
the product manufacturer.
c. Continuous metal or other approved flashing shall be installed at
heads of ganged windows.
d. Flashing shall be installed at rooflines in a manner to prevent any
intrusion of water behind the EIFS. This shall include the use of roof
kickout flashing at roof terminations and other details promoted by
the N RCA.
e. Seals for electrical and plumbing installations shall conform to the
recommendations of NEC and the locally recognized plumbing code.
f. Wooden decks must be flashed before the EIF system is installed.
7. Surface Mounted Objects
a. Surface mounted objects are those items that are mounted on the
surface of the EIF system.
b. Objects mounted on the surface include but are not limited to signs,
handrails, downspouts, etc..
c. The mounting bolts or screws must be inserted through a
compression sleeve filled with sealant.
d. The compression sleeve should be equal to the thickness of the EIF
system (from the substrate to the finish) to prevent any compression
or indentation of the EIF system.
e. The diameter of the compression sleeve should be 1/8” greater than
the mounting bolts or screws.
f. The compression sleeves must be of a non-corrosive material.
C. Qualifications
1. The EIFS Manufacturer shall have manufactured Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems for at least 10 years.
2. The Applicator shall be knowledgeable in the proper installation of the EIF
System.
3. The Applicator shall have demonstrated the ability to install the system on
projects of similar size and complexity.

20th October 2021
4. The Applicator shall provide the proper equipment, manpower and

supervision on the job site to install the system in compliance with project
plans and specifications.
5. The Insulation Board Manufacturer shall be approved to produce EPS in
accordance with standard specifications.
6. The sealant contractor shall be experienced in the installation of high
performance industrial and commercial sealants (Section 07 92 00).
7. When specified erect a sample wall mock-up of the class PB EIF system
using materials and joint details required for final work. Provide special
features as directed for sealant and contiguous work. Build mock-up at the
site where directed of full thickness, indicating the proposed color, texture,
and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Obtain Engineer’s
acceptance of the mock-up in regard to aesthetic quality before start of work.
Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed
work. Do not alter, move, or destroy mock-up until work is completed, and
until final acceptance of the project by Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The Applicator shall submit a list of completed projects of like size and complexity.
B. The Applicator shall submit a certificate of training indicating that they have been
given instructions on the proper installation of the EIF System.
C. On request, the Applicator shall submit EIFS Manufacturer’s current literature,

brochures, specifications, and details.
D. On request, the Applicator shall submit sufficient samples of each finish texture and
color selected. The samples shall be prepared with the same tools and techniques
required for the actual project. Color and texture should be approved based on the
job site mock-up samples.
E. On request, the Applicator shall provide any shop drawings that may be applicable to
the project for approval by the Engineer.
F. On request, the applicator shall receive one sample each of any wall penetrations
(e.g. light box, exterior electrical box, plumbing fixtures, pipe penetration sizes, coping
cap sizes, etc.).
A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages with labels intact. Verify all
quantities, colors, and textures against bill of lading.
B. Store all materials protected from direct exposure to weather conditions and at
temperatures within the range as set by the manufacturer.

20th October 2021
C. Stack insulation board flat, fully supported off the ground and protected from direct
exposure to the sun.
D. On request material safety data sheets (MSDS) shall be supplied for the components
of the EIFS and be available at the job site.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Supplemental heat and protection shall be provided as required when the

temperature and conditions are not in accordance with installation requirements.
Sufficient ventilation and time shall be provided to ensure that materials have
sufficiently dried prior to removing supplemental heat.
B. Adequate protection shall be provided to prevent weather conditions (humidity,

temperature, and precipitation) from having an affect on the curing or drying time.
C. Adjacent materials and the EIF system shall be protected during installation and while
curing from weather and shall be protected from site damage.
D. Coordinate installation of the EIF system with related work specified in other sections
to ensure that the wall assembly is protected to prevent water from getting behind the
system. The cap flashing and backer rod and sealant shall be installed as soon as
possible after the finish coat has been properly cured. When this is not possible,
temporary protection shall be provided immediately in this area.
E. All sealants shall be installed in a timely manner. Protect open joints from water
intrusion during construction with backer rod, or temporary covering, until
permanently sealed.
F. Sufficient manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous

operation, free of cold joints, scaffolding lines, and texture variations, etc.
1.09 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to specific repair and maintenance manual of the manufacturer.
B. The property owner or their designated representative shall inspect the Sealants and
Flashings annually to verify that the products are not allowing water intrusion. If any
sealant and/or flashing needs repair it should be done immediately.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide Warranty for Ten (10) years from the date of substantial
completion. Defects, damage or failure occurring within the Warranty period shall be
repaired /replaced by the Contractor up to the satisfaction of the Engineer at Contractor’s
own expense.

20th October 2021
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All components of the EIF system shall be obtained from a single manufacturer or its
authorized distributors. No addition to or combination with the brands of the approved
manufacturer shall be allowed without prior written permission from the manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Adhesives
1. An acrylic-based product mixed one-to-one by weight with Portland cement
for use as the adhesive to bond insulation board to an approved substrate.
2. A polymer based cementitious product mixed with 5 to 6 quarts of water for
use as an adhesive.
3. Acrylic Adhesive: A ready mixed 100% polymer based noncementitious
adhesive primarily for use over wood substrates.
B. Mechanical Fasteners and Plastic Washers

1. The mechanical fastener washer should be a 2 1/8”d with a recessed void to
receive the appropriate non-corrosive fastener. The appropriate fastener shall
be used to meet the requirements of the substrate being used on the project,
local building code and the anticipated wind loads.
C. Insulation Board
1. Insulation Board shall meet or exceed ASTM C-578.
2. Nominal 1.0 pf² aged expanded polystyrene.
3. Flame spread and smoke development shall be 25 and 450 or less
respectively per ASTM E-84.
4. Maximum size 2’x4’x4” (.6m x 1.2m x .1m). Refer to actual contract
documents to determine actual insulation board thickness.
D. Reinforcing Mesh - Open weave glass fiber fabric, treated for alkaline resistance, and
conforming ASTM D-76, D-579, D-5035, MIL-Y-1140 and meeting a minimum
Medium Impact Resistance (50-89 in-lbs) when tested to EIMA 101.86 Impact
Resistance Standards.
1. Detail Mesh – nominal 4.5 oz./sq. yd.
2. # 4 Standard Mesh – nominal 4.5 oz./sq. yd.
3. # 10 Intermediate Mesh – nominal 10.4 oz./sq. yd.
4. # 20 High Impact Mesh – nominal 21 oz./sq. yd.

20th October 2021
E. Base Coats
1. WB: An acrylic-based product mixed one-to-one by weight with Portland
cement designed for use with reinforcing mesh as the base coating over the
insulation board as an adhesive to adhere the EPS insulation board.
2. DB: A polymer based cementitious product mixed with 5 to 6 quarts of water
for use as an adhesive adhere the EPS insulation board and with reinforcing
mesh as the base coating over the insulation board.
F. Finishes are acrylic-based or elastomeric-based wall coatings available in a variety of

colors and textures. The following textures are available:
1. Swirl texture - The traditional rill texture
2. Fine Texture – A very fine aggregate for a smooth sand texture
3. Medium Texture – A slightly larger smooth sand texture
4. Course Texture – A larger sand aggregate for a heavy defined sand texture.
G. Expanding Foam Sealant (for sheathed substrates): Reference Interior Sealant

Specification, Section 07 92 00.
H. Water: Shall be clear, clean and potable without any foreign matter that may affect
the color and setting qualities of the cement, adhesive, base or finish coat.
I. Cement: Type I or I-II Portland cement meeting ASTM C-150.
J. Metal Flashing Components: Complying with SMACNA Recommendations.
K. Sealant Systems: Reference Sealant Specification, Section 07 92 00.
L. Window & Door Systems: Detailed by the design professional and suitable for EIFS.
2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
1. KIMMCO, Kuwait
2. STYRO – Al Qatami Insulation Material, Kuwait
3. Kingspan, U.A.E.
4. M/s Dryvit Systems Inc., USA,
5. STO USA
6. DMC
7. Obtain all components of the External Insulated Finishing System from
manufacturer or its authorized distributors.

20th October 2021
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to the application of the EIF System, the substrate shall be examined for
compliance with the contract documents and specifications. The substrate shall have
no planar irregularities greater than 1/4” in 10’. The Engineer shall be advised in
writing of any discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3.02 MIXING
A. Mix at a weight ratio of 1 to 1 with Portland Type I or I/II, white or grey cement. Mix
using a 1/2”, 400-500 RPM drill motor and paddle mixer or equivalent. Let stand for 3-
5 minutes and remix until the desired consistency is achieved. Small amounts of
clean water can be added for workability. Do not over mix.
B. Add 5 to 6 quarts of water with the 50-lb. bag in a clean bucket for mixing. Mix with a
paddle mixer or equivalent using a 1/2”, 400-500 RPM drill motor. Let stand for 3-5
minutes and remix until the desired consistency is achieved. Small amounts of clean
water can be added for workability. Do not over mix.
C. Acrylic adhesive is a ready mixed material that that only needs to be mixed to a
homogenous consistency. No additives allowed.
D. Equal Finish: Mix the finish coat with a paddle mixer using a 1/2”, 400-500 RPM drill
motor. Small amounts of water, up to 16oz (.43l) can be added for workability. Mix
until reaching a uniform consistency. (It is important that the same amount of water
be added to each pail to ensure a consistent color.)
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from damage during application of the EIF System.
Temporary covering may be required to prevent over spray or splattering of exterior
finish coatings on other work.
B. Protect substrate from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of

moisture behind the system that may affect the substrate or the adhesion of the
insulation board to the substrate.
C. Sufficient scaffolding, manpower and tools shall be provided to prevent cold joints.
D. The substrate shall be clean to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive
used to attach insulation board.
E. Flashings shall be installed as required by construction documents and the details

prescribed by manufacturer in a manner to prevent the intrusion of water behind the

20th October 2021
insulation board. All flashing materials should direct the water to the exterior face of
the finished system.
A. Reference architectural details for full wall system requirements.
B. Comply with the manufacturers’ current published instructions, (specifications, details,

product information guides and technical bulletins) for the installation of the
manufacturer’s EIF System.
C. Comply with local building codes.
3.05 INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer’s written instructions have to be followed strictly in a very accurate and

precise process.
3.06 BASE COAT PREPARATION
A. Inspect adhered insulation board to ensure the installation meets the requirements
set forth in manufacturer’s specification, details, product information guides, technical
bulletins and the construction documents. Make necessary repairs to ensure the
installation meets the requirements prior to commencement of the base coat
application.
B. If the foam is yellowed or has developed a powdery film due to sun exposure the
foam must be rasped and cleaned prior to the base coat application.
C. Complete the back wrapping at all system terminations by embedding the reinforcing
mesh as described in section 3.05 of this specification.
D. Install minimum 9 1/2” x 12” diagonal reinforcement at all windows, doors, louvers, or
other penetration corners. Apply field mesh as soon as possible after diagonal mesh
application.
E. Reference architectural documents for locations of designed impact classifications.
3.07 BASE COAT APPLICATION
A. Apply the base coat to the entire surface of the insulation board to the thickness
required for the specified reinforcing mesh to be applied. The thickness of the mesh
will dictate the thickness of the basecoat.
B. Apply the Standard Mesh base coat continuous over the entire surface of the EPS
insulation board with all edges lapped a minimum of 2 ½” (64mm) on all sides.

20th October 2021
C. Standard Reinforcing Mesh shall be continuous through all interior and exterior
corners extending beyond the corner a minimum of 12” from both directions creating
a minimum of two layers of standard reinforcing mesh on all interior and exterior
corners.
D. Apply the base coat adhesive over the EPS surface in a width consistent with the
width of the mesh being used and immediately embed reinforcing mesh into wet base
coat with a trowel, working from the center toward the edges, until the mesh is fully
covered and a smooth surface is achieved. The color of the mesh shall not be visible
but a slight mesh pattern may be visible.
E. Intermediate mesh may be applied in a single layer but an additional layer of base
coat adhesive may be required to smooth out the lap lines prior to the finish
application.
F. Medium and High Impact Mesh should not be overlapped or wrapped around corners.
Carefully end butt all joints and allow the base coat adhesive to cure prior to applying
a complete layer of standard mesh over the entire surface including corners.
G. All EPS shapes shall be completely covered with standard reinforcing mesh
embedded into the base coat.
H. Allow the base coat to cure a minimum of 12 to 24 hours prior to additional base coat
or finish coat applications.
3.08 FINISH COAT APPLICTION
A. Surface irregularities in the base coat, such as trowel marks, insulation board lines
and reinforcing mesh laps shall be corrected prior to the finish application.
B. Apply the Finish in the color and texture as approved by the project owner or the
project architect with sufficient manpower and equipment to insure a continuous
operation without cold joints, scaffolding lines etc. Texture finish shall match
approved jobsite samples. Thickness and coverage will vary depending on the
specified final appearance.
C. Apply the finish in accordance with the manufacturer’s details. Specifically the finish
should not be applied inside any expansion or sealant joints.
D. Trowel Application
1. Apply the Finish to the clean, dry and cured base coat with a stainless steel
trowel.
2. Apply the finish to a uniform thickness. The final thickness should be the size
of the largest aggregate in the finish.
3. Float the Finish with a plastic float in a uniform motion to achieve the desired
texture. (Refinish cannot be floated. A second application of the Refinish shall
be applied to create the desired texture.)

20th October 2021
E. Spray Application
1. Apply ShurPrime tinted to match the selected finish color. Allow to cure a
minimum of 12 hours prior to finish coat application.
2. Using a conventional plaster hopper gun or a proven pump, spray finish over
the primed base coat to achieve desired texture using a circular overlapping
pattern keeping the spray gun at a 90° angle to the surface and maintaining
the same distance to the wall at all times.
3. Be cautious of flooding an area with too much finish because it may appear
shinier when it dries.
F. Provide protection from rain for a minimum of 24 hours after application. Longer
protection may be necessary during lower temperatures and/or higher humidity
conditions.
3.09 JOB SITE CLEANUP
A. Clean work area in accordance with contract documents removing all excess
materials, droppings and debris. Clean adjacent surfaces.
B. Other trades may now install their work – Sheet Metal (Section 07 62 00), Sealants
(Section 07 92 00), Mechanical (Division 22, 23), Electrical (Division 26).
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 46 40
WPC WALL CLADDING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Wooden, Plastic Composite Siding.
B. Accessories.
A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing.
B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
C. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM D2395 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Wood and Wood-Based
Materials.
2. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a
Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C.
3. ASTM G154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
B. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA E1-09 - Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to
Subterranean Termites.
2. AWPA E10-11 - Standard Method of Testing Wood Preservatives by Laboratory Soil-
Block Cultures.
C. California Building Code (CBC):

1. SFM Standard 7A-Materials and Construction Methods for Exterior Wildfire Exposure.
a. Section 701A Scope, Purpose and Application
b. Section 707A - Exterior Covering.
1) Section 707A.3 Exterior Walls.
D. California Residential Code (CRC):

1. CRC Section R337 - Materials and Construction Methods for Exterior Wildlife Exposure.
a. CRC Section R337.7 - Exterior Covering.
b. CRC Section R337.7.3 - Exterior Walls.
Gulf Consult WPC Wall Cladding III-2/07 46 40 - 1

20th October 2021
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
a. Includes but not limited to:
1) Spec-Data product information sheets,
2) Catalog cut-sheets.
3) Color charts.
4) Safety Data Sheets (SDS).
5) Building code evaluation reports.
6) Sample warranty forms.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Typical installation methods.
C. Verification Samples: Two representative units of each type, size, pattern and color.
D. Shop Drawings: Include details of materials, construction and finish. Include relationship with
adjacent construction and graphic information specifically prepared for this Project, including:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and construction details indicating full extent of
composite decking work complete with substrate construction, decking patterns,
attachments, accessories, conditions at adjacent materials, perimeters and penetrations.
2. Verified field dimensions.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in
this section with a minimum five years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum two years documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity.
1. Manufacturer's authorized dealer-installer.
C. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to
ensure uniformity.
D. Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's review
and to not delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect and
provide temporary foundations and support.
1. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate quality of workmanship and visual appearance.
2. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved.
3. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for comparison with completed work.
4. Do not alter or remove mock-up until work is completed or removal is authorized.

20th October 2021
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of the

Work. Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and trades involved. Agenda shall
include schedule, responsibilities, critical path items and approvals.
A. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Commercial Product Warranties: Manufacturer's commercial series of prorated limited

warranties including; 10-years against manufacturing defects of composite siding, 10-years
against manufacturing defects of metal clips, 10-years against manufacturing defects of
plastic clips, and 10-years against staining and fading of composite siding.
B. Residential Product Warranties: Manufacturer's residential series of prorated limited

warranties including; 25-years against manufacturing defects of composite siding, 20-years
against manufacturing defects of metal clips, 15-years against manufacturing defects of
plastic clips, and 25-years against staining and fading of composite siding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. NewTechWood America Inc. – Local Supplier - Woodpecker
B. Anhui Guofeng Wood-Plastic Composite Co,Ltd.
C. Therra Wood.
A. Density (ASTM D2395): 7.2 lb/cu ft (115.3 kg/cu m).

B. California Wildland Urban Interface: Complies with CBC Section 707A.3 or CRC Section
R337.7.3. Requires using a noncombustible exterior wall complying with one of the following:
1. Exterior Wall Covering: ASTM E136, ignition resistant complying with SFM Standard 12-
7A-5.
2. Exterior Wall Assembly: SFM Standard 12-7A-1.
a. CBC Section 707A.3 or 2016 CRC Section R337.7.3 allows use of one layer of
5/8-inch-thick, Type X gypsum sheathing applied behind the exterior covering or
cladding on the exterior side of the framing assembly to comply with SFM
Standard 12-7A-1.

20th October 2021
2.3 COMPOSITE SIDING

A. Basis of Design: Ultra shield Naturale Composite Siding; as manufactured by
NewTechWood America Incorporated.
1. Description: Composite siding boards composed of a recycled hardwood fiber and high-
density polyethylene (HDPE) core encased in 1/64 inch (0.5 mm) to 1/32 inch (0.7 mm)
thick UV and stain resistant plastic shell with core to shell co-extruded under high
temperature forming a single combined product.
2. Profile Style: US09; All-weather.
a. Board Size: 5-1/2 inches (138 mm) wide by 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick by 16 feet
(4877 mm) long.
b. Trim: Fabricated from same material as siding boards; match siding color.
1) End Fascia: 1.8 x 1.7 inch (46.2 x x 44.2 mm) by 96 inches (2438 mm)
long; F-shaped; for wall openings, perimeters, and penetrations.
2) Joint Fascia: 3.1 x 1.0 inch (79 x 26.7 mm) by 96 inches (2438 mm) long;
I-shaped; for vertical joints between adjacent rows of boards.
3) Outside Corner: 2.2 x 2.2 inch (58.2 x 58.2 mm) by 96 inches (2438 mm)
long.
4) Inside corner: 2.8 x 2.8 inch (71.5 x 71.5 mm) by 96 inches (2438 mm)
long.
5) L-Shaped Fascia: 1.5 x 1.5 inch (38 x 38 mm)
3. Profile: Flush, tongue and groove.
4. Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Profile: As selected by the Engineer from Manufacturers range.
6. Texture: Embossed wood grain one side, smooth one side.
7. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
8. Color: To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's selection.
9. Finish: Matte.
10. Installation Method: Rain screen; offset 1 inch (25.4 mm) from face of substrate;
installed on furring with metal clips.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Starter Strips: Extruded aluminum, for attachment of bottom course of siding board to
substrate.
1. Length: 36 inches (914 mm).
2. Length: 108 inches (2743 mm).
B. Siding Clips: Extruded aluminum for attachment of siding boards to substrate.
C. End Plugs: 11/16 inch (18 mm) diameter by 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick, rubber spacers for
providing 1 inch (25.4 mm) offset behind top course of siding board.
D. Fasteners: Type and size furnished or recommended by manufacturer.

20th October 2021
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed and prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and in proper

relationship with adjacent construction.
A. Field Inspection: Coordinate field inspection in accordance with appropriate sections in

Division 01.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 55 00
COMPOSITE ROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials
for performing all operations in connection with Protected Membrane Roofing system.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application
of:
1. 50mm Levelling Screed.
2. Sheet membrane waterproofing.
3. Rigid Polystyrene Insulation,
4. Vapour barrier, Filter Fabric
5. Polyurethane System
6. Sealant, Flashing and Trim etc.
7. Precast Terrazzo or Precast Concrete Tiles.
1. Section 03 52 00 - Lightweight Concrete Fill
2. Section 07 13 13 - Bituminous Sheet Water proofing
4. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1. ASTM C79/C79M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.
2. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux

Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
Gulf Consult Composite Roofing System III-2/07 55 00 - 1

20th October 2021
3. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation.
4. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

5. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt

Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
6. ASTM D312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt used in Roofing.
7. ASTM D448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and
Bridge Construction.
8. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a

Protective Coating for Roofing.
9. ASTM D2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing.
10. ASTM D2626 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated

Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing.
11. ASTM D3909 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt)
Surfaced with Mineral Granules.
12. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-
Free.
13. ASTM D4601 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base
Sheet Used in Roofing.
B. Factory Mutual System:

1. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement.
C. National Roofing Contractors Association:

1. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
D. National Roofing Contractors Association:

1. SPRI RP-4 - Wind Design Standard for Ballasted Single-Ply Roofing
Systems.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

F. Warnock Hersey:
1. WH - Certification Listings.
G. General Specifications for Building and Engineering Works of the Ministry of Public
Works of the Government of Kuwait, latest edition.

20th October 2021
A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of NRCA.
B. All membrane roofing, flashing, sheet metal and insulation materials furnished and
installed under this Section shall be the product of single manufacturer, or shall be
specifically approved for use with his materials by the manufacturer whose roofing
specification is used. Furnish a written affidavit stating that this requirement has been
complied with.
C. All roofing and flashing work shall be applied in strict accordance with the roofing
manufacturer's written requirements and specifications applicable to roof conditions.
D. Where additional work or materials, or greater quantities of materials than required by

roofing manufacturer are specified herein, these Project Specifications shall govern.
E. The roofing material manufacturer's representative shall inspect the work during roof
installation and furnish a copy of his inspection reports to the Engineer. Reports shall
be on roofing manufacturer's standard inspection report form, dated and signed. This
inspection shall be provided at no increase in Contract Price.
F. Do not proceed with roofing work during inclement weather. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for application and curing under specific climatic
conditions.
G. Comply with Statutory Authorities (having jurisdictions) for their standards, code,
directives and recommendations
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required:
1. Manufacturers' Literature: Submit manufacturers' specifications and
installation instructions for roofing membrane and accessory items and for
each item of proprietary material used, showing compliance with these
Specifications.
2. Design Mixes: Submit copies of mix designs with support material, for all
mortars.
3. Mill Certificates: Submit copies of manufacturer's certificate of mill tests of all

cement, reinforcing steel and embedment.
4. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing details, dimensions,

locations and installation methods of roofing system including membrane,
insulation, precast pavers, flashings and all accessories
5. Erection Procedures: Submit a detailed outline of sequence and methods of

erection.
6. Samples: Submit samples of membrane, insulation, plain concrete tiles.

20th October 2021
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up (4 x 4 m inclusive of parapet and perimeter line and one bay) of
roofing system. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects
indicating joint conditions and all other features as will be used in the final work.
Mock-up assembly will be used as a standard for judging acceptability of work on
project and may be used in the finished work.
1.06 QUALIFICATION
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum five years documented experience
B. Installer: Roofing and flashing shall be executed by a specialist roofing Sub-

Contractor licensed, franchised or approved by the roofing materials manufacturer,
using experienced skilled roofers, having a minimum of five (5) years experience in
the installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Contract.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Pre-Roofing Conference:
1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a pre-roofing
conference shall be held at the job site. In attendance shall be (1) Engineer
(2) General Contractor, (3) Roofing Sub-Contractor and (4) Manufacturer's
representative.
2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved materials.

Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements.
Examine job site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and
methods of storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and edges are provided
and correctly installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and
temperature requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof
from other trades.
A. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative

of the roofing material manufacturer in order to ascertain that the Roofing System has
been properly installed. Should there be any deviation from this specification without
the prior written consent of the roofing material manufacturer; the manufacturer shall
have the option of refusing the guarantee.
A. Deliver roofing materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles fully

identified with brand, type, grade, class and all other qualifying information.
B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the name,
type and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load
(or furnish manufacturer's blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the work.
C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of

foreign matter. Conspicuously mark "Rejected" on materials which have once been
wet or damaged and remove from job site.

20th October 2021
D. Transport, store and handle precast units in a manner to avoid undue strains, hair
cracks, staining, or other damage. Deliver units from plant to project site in
accordance with schedule and proper setting sequence. Store precast units free of
the ground and protected from mud or rain splashes. Cover units, secure covers
firmly and protect the units from dust, dirt or other staining materials.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated roof penetrations and counter
flashings installed by other sections as the Work of this section proceeds.
1.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect Waterproofing system installation from damage during construction period so

that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at the time of completion.
materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing membrane
operations.
required under this Section.
1.12 WARRANTY/GURANTEE
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty/guarantee executed by the

Contractor and Installer against leaks occurring in Composite Roofing system and
membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification of any leak within the warranty
period, make the necessary repairs and replacements as directed by the Engineer
including the removal and replacement of work superimposed over the membrane
waterproofing, at the convenience of the Employer and to the complete works in
accordance with Contract Documents and approval of the Engineer.
B. The warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be Ten (10) years from the
date of Substantial Completion of the Works. The Warranty/Guarantee shall be for
the Composite Roofing System irrespective of individual product’s warranty
(mentioned in the individual specification sections) used for this composite roofing
system.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCREED
A. 50 mm thick screed including 20mm leveling screed.
2.02 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Refer Section 07 13 13: Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing.

20th October 2021
2.03 ROOF INSULATION
A. Refer Section 07 21 00: Thermal Insulation.
2.04 FILTER FABRIC/POLYETHYNELE SHEET
A. Refer Section 33 46 22 – Geotextile Filter fabric.
2.05 SEALANT
A. Refer Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
2.06 ALUMINUM FLASHING
A. Refer Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
2.07 Precast Terrazzo & Concrete Pavers
A. Refer Section 09 66 16 – Precast Terrazzo

B. Refer Section 32 14 13 – Precast Concrete Unit Paving
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A Surfaces to receive membrane roofing shall be free of projections, voids,

depressions, scale efflorescence, loose material, laitence, oil grease and other
foreign contaminants. Before starting work, inspect all surfaces to receive membrane
and report in writing to the Engineer, any surfaces that are not suitable for correct
application of the membrane.
B. If any surfaces are unsuitable to receive membrane, the Contractor shall see that
same are corrected by the respective trade prior to application of his work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. All preparation of surfaces, including construction joints shall be completed before

membrane waterproofing is installed. Commencement of application of membrane
waterproofing to any surface will be construed as acceptance of that surface as
proper to receive the waterproofing and any defects in the work thereafter shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor without additional cost to the Employer.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE ROOFING.
A. On completion of screed over the light weight concrete, laid to required slopes and
falls, the membrane roofing will proceed.
B. At the start of the installation, and periodically as work progresses, provide the
services of the manufacturer's technical representative at the job site as often as
deemed necessary by the manufacturer to advise on all phases of this work. The
waterproofing membrane shall be in two layers.
C. Install roofing system along with all fixing accessories, in strict accordance with
manufacturer's direction for conditions of each application.

20th October 2021
D. Prime all surfaces receiving roofing membrane. Use products and methods
recommended by the roofing membrane materials manufacturers.
E. Apply cant strips at all edges and around any penetrations in the roofing, as shown
on Drawings.
F. Apply roofing membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations. Overlap joints a minimum of 100 mm.
G. Flash all roof outlets, pipes, sleeves, and other projections through roof deck and
provide tight construction throughout.
H. Provide one additional reinforcing layer of the waterproofing membrane at all

perimeters, junctions, rainwater drain/fulboras, at the edges, at up stands etc. and as
directed.
3.04 FLOOD TESTING
A. The horizontal areas of waterproofing shall be tested prior to the installation of

protection board or insulation as applicable.
B. Such testing shall be by flooding sections of the waterproofed area with a minimum 2"
head of water for 72 (Seventy-two) hours. Flooding shall include proper damming of
areas as required. This applicator shall provide his own hoses. Mark any leaks and
repair when the membrane is dry. Before flood testing, ascertain from the Engineer
that the structure will withstand the dead load of the water.
C. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired, and then re-
tested.
D. At satisfactory completion of flood testing, remove all dams to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
E. Installation of mortar beds, fill materials or concrete which are applied over the
waterproofing shall not start until such time as the membrane is leak free and has
been accepted by the Engineer.
3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Set polystyrene insulation in thickness indicated, using "dry method" (without the use
of adhesive or bitumen) as shown on drawings, with long joints continuous and short
joints staggered, butting each panel tightly to adjoining panel.
B. Discard all damaged insulation boards. Neatly cut and shape insulation at all
projections through roof and at all other vertical projections allowing at least 12mm
clearance.
C. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with ballast on the same day. Under no
circumstances allow insulation to remain uncovered in damp, wet weather, overnight
or exposed to sunlight for prolonged periods of time.
D. Immediately after insulation is applied, apply polyester filter fabric directly on top of
insulation.

20th October 2021
3.06 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONCRETE OR TERRAZZO TILES
A. Lay precast pavers of thickness 40-50mm or terrazzo tile in slope, all as shown on
the drawings.
B. Lay pavers firmly on the filter fabric, without mortar bed.
C. Laying of pavers shall be uniformly straight, in line and level.
3.07 GRAVEL IN FILL
A. Install and lay gravel around at locations as shown in the drawings
3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Make well, all damage to the building resulting from this work or operations. Particular
care shall be taken to avoid staining any part of the exposed structural or finished
work. Hoisting of materials shall be done with extreme care. Use approved means to
protect exposed surfaces.
B. At completion of work under this Section, remove from the site and legally dispose of
packaging, containers and other accumulated materials, and leave the work in a
clean and satisfactory condition.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work of this section, as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein, pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of:
1. Flashings and running sheet metal work, for all locations in conjunction with
the roofs.
2. Cap flashings, in conjunction with roofing system sheet membrane base flashings.
3. Sealant in conjunction with sheet metal work specified herein.
1. Section 07 55 00 - Composite Roofing System
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels.
3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions
and Panels.

Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels.

Process.
2. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
3. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
Gulf Consult Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim III-2/07 62 00 - 1

20th October 2021
4. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
5. ASTM B101 - Standard Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and

Strip for Building Construction.

Sheet and Plate.

Sheet and Plate (Metric).
8. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for

Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
C. Copper Development Association Inc.:
1. CDA - Copper in Architecture - Handbook.
D. Federal Specification Unit:
1. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid

Resistant.
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
A. Sheet Metal Flashings: Conform to SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
B. Gutter and Downspout Components: Conform to SMACNA Manual, CDA Handbook,

SSINA Standard Practice and NRCA Details for sizing components for rainfall
intensity determined by storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years, 1 in 10 years and 1 in 100
years.
C. Gutter and Downspout Components: Conform to applicable code for size and method
of rain water discharge.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
A. Company specializing in fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing work with
minimum 2 years documented experience.
B. Flashing and sheet metal applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented

experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein,
and approved by product manufacturer.
1.05 SUBMITTALS

required
1. Literature: Manufacturer's data sheets for each metal type and accessories
furnished hereunder include material specifications, performance data,
physical properties and finishes.

20th October 2021
2. Certification: Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with

the specified requirements for the use indicated.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Fully dimensioned large scale design details showing material

profiles, splices, flashing terminations and other jointing details,
fastening methods and installation details. Indicate material type,
sizes, and weights or gages. Indicate extent of adjacent work
specified under other Sections of the Specifications.
A. Store preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion,

and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration,
staining, or damage.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the installation of flashings and sheet metal work with the various trades
responsible for installing interfacing materials, and install the work at appropriate
times so as not to delay the progress of related work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal Thickness:
1. Exposed to weather flashings and trim: 1.3 mm thick.
2. Apron flashing, 0.8 mm thick.
3. Base flashing, 0.8 mm thick.
4. Coping covers, cap flashings, 1.3 - 4 mm thick.
5. Roof penetrations: 0.8 mm thick.
6. Gutters: 1.5mm thick
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 3003-H14 // except alloy used for color anodized
aluminum shall be as required to produce specified color. Alloy required to produce
specified color shall have the same structural properties as alloy 3003-H14//.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 302B, dead soft temper.
D. Copper ASTM B370, cold-rolled temper.
E. Galvanized Sheet: ASTM, A653.
2.02 FLASHING FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Form flashings as required, or to profiles indicated on the Drawings, to protect

materials from physical damage and shed water.

20th October 2021
B. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. To the greatest
extent applicable, fabricate sheet metal components in shop, and thoroughly clean all
joints on both sides of the sheet metal work.
C. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet.
D. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, with flat lock seams. Hem exposed edges on
underside 6mm, miter and seam corners.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 450 mm long legs solder for rigidity,
seal with sealant.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Factory Finish: as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
B. Primer Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with primer compatible with finish
system, as recommended by finish system manufacturer.
C. Aluminum components not indicated for enamel or color finish: Mill finish.
D. Sealant in conjunction with Metal work: Sealant Type “SE” as specified under section
for Joint Sealants 07 92 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly
set, cant strips and reglets in place and nailing strips located.
B. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to

which this work is to be applied.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabrication.
B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with
sealant.
D. Cleat and seam all joints. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings
and felt flashings, asphalt shingle roofing or asphalt roll roofing.
E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes,
and lines accurate to profiles.
F. Seal all metal joints watertight.
G. During the installation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against
undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions.
Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.

20th October 2021
3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise shown on the reviewed shop drawings or specified herein, the
workmanship of sheet metal work, method for forming joints anchoring, cleating,
provisions for thermal movement, etc., shall conform to the standard details and
recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer organizations
and research institutions and associations concerning the sheet metal used, in
addition to the standards and details set forth in the referenced materials specified in
this Section.
B. Face nailing will not be permitted; concealed cleating or other concealed method
must be used to attach sheet metal work to structure.
C. Ensure that fastenings do not exceed 20 cm on centers. Use flat head fasteners
throughout, and seal all fastener heads after installation thereof.
D. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant
material, removing all excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces
immediately, to prevent staining the finish.
A. Inspection will involve surveillance of Work during installation to ascertain compliance

with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
specified herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and
materials for performing all operations in connection with but not limited to the
following:
1. Fireproof fire stopping, fire saving materials, smoke seals and related
accessories required for this Project for all penetrations through fire
resistance rated construction, including, but not limited to, penetrations for
elevators, plumbing, fire suppression, heating, ventilating and air
conditioning, electrical systems, and specialized equipment.
2. Fire stopping/smoke seals at construction joints occurring at tops of fire

resistance rated partitions, smoke partitions, and temporary partitions
between top of partition and underside of deck above.
3. Fire stopping, fire saving, and smoke seals at perimeter of floor/roof

construction and exterior wall systems, as indicated and where required by
applicable codes.
4. Fire stopping, fire saving, and smoke seals at expansion joints in chase walls
where expansion joints are not exposed to view.
2. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers
3. Section 08 44 13 – Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
4. Div 15 - Related sections in Mechanical Works
5. Div 16 - Related Sections in Electrical Works
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration

Fire Stops.
Gulf Consult Fire Stopping III-2/07 84 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire stops.
C. Warnock Hersey:
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.03 DEFINITION
A. Fire stopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or

assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to
arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
A. Provide materials and work to conform to Building Code Requirements in fire

resistant wall and floor assemblies.
B. Manufacturer’s certified product test requirements:
1. All fire stop/smoke seal material shall be tested by a recognized, independent

testing agency and shall conform to both Flame (F-rating) and Temperature
(T-rating) requirements of ASTM E-814.
2. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements.
3. Tested and classified non-combustible per ASTM E-84.
C. Fire stops in place shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire
resistance rating at least equal to the floor, wall, or partition construction into which it
is installed.
D. Non-combustible dams shall be constructed:
1. As necessary to achieve fire rating as tested and rated.
2. In conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and

partition construction.
3. As recommended by fire stop/smoke seal manufacturer.
E. Combustible damming materials, if used, must be removed after proper curing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS

required :

data, and physical properties.

20th October 2021
a. Indicate requirements for manufacturer’s descriptive data for

products and related materials with FM, UL or Warnock-Hersey
illustrations showing systems and approval of materials in systems.
2. Certification: Manufacturer's written certification stating that fire stopping

materials, meet or exceed the requirements specified under this Section and
that all fire-resistive requirements for the indicated combustibility, Flame
(Frating) and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings have been met.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Test reports: Submit fire test reports from recognized, independent testing
agent(s) indicating the following:
a. Fire test report of fire stop material applied to substrate and

penetration materials similar to project conditions. Tests to indicate
both Flame (Frating) and Temperature (T-rating) Ratings.
b. Test reports of products to be used shall indicate conformance to

ASTM E-814.
5. On-site sample installation to be included in Work: Minimum thirty days prior

to application in any area, provide samples of fire stop and smoke seal
materials and installation in accordance with the following requirements.
a. Apply one sample of appropriate fire stop and smoke seal material
for each different penetration and fire rating required for the work.
b. Sample areas will comply with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and
finished appearance of the project and applicable fire code.
c. Acceptance samples will constitute standard of acceptance for

method of application, thickness, and finished appearance for fire
stop and smoke seal application. The sample(s) shall remain visible
during completion of the work and shall remain as part of the
completed work.
6. Shop drawings indicating requirements for penetrations in wall/deck

intersections, change of planes, control joints, expansion joints and blank
openings.
A. Obtain fire stop and smoke seal products from a single manufacturer, except as
otherwise approved by Engineer.
B. Notify the Engineer where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing
materials, and existing methods of construction.
C. Special Inspections: Allow for 3 percent of each type of fire stopping system to be
removed and inspected for conformance with approved submittals.
1. All fire stopping shall be inspected prior to installation of suspended ceilings

or concealed by other materials.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer, a specialized subcontractor having not less than 3 years documented

experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.

20th October 2021
1. The manufacturer of the fire stop material shall submit written certification
that the firm to be used for the fire stop products has been trained in the
application of the products by the manufacturer.
A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning
characteristics.
B. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval

of combustibility.
1.09 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-ups under provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements for

purpose of verifying quality of fire stop installation
B. Provide fire stop samples and locate as directed. Accepted samples may remain as
part of the work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide ten (10) years warranty for the products and their installation
under this Section from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include
coverage of installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and
watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
A. Deliver and store fire stopping materials in original, sealed, packages showing
manufacturer’s identification and date of packaging.
B. Store and handle materials following manufacturer's recommended procedures, and

in accordance with material safety data sheets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the requirements specified herein, manufacturers offering

products which may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1. Bio Fireshield, Inc.
2. Dow Corning Corporation
3. 3M Company
4. Hilti, Kuwait
B. Incorporation of all materials listed below shall be subject to Kuwait Fire Department
approval.

20th October 2021
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fire stop mortar: asbestos free, cementitious mortar, U.L. classified as a "fill, void, or
cavity material" for through penetration fire stop system when tested in accordance
with ASTM/UL1479.
B. Silicone Firestop sealant: Single component, non-combustible silicone elastomer fire

stop sealant, U.L. classified as a "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration
fire stop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479.
C. Intumescent fire stop sealant and caulks: Acrylic based, water resistant sealant,
which will not re-emulsify after drying.
D. Fire stop putty: sticks or pads.
E. Fire stop collars: Pre-manufactured fire protective pipe sleeve, UL classified as "fill,
void, or cavity material" for through penetration firestop system when tested in
accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479.
1. Provide separated (two piece) firestop collar for application when plastic pipe
system is already in place. Provide non-separated firestop collar for
application prior to installation of plastic pipe system.
F. Fire stop pillows: UL Classified as "fill, void, or cavity material" for through penetration
fire stop system when tested in accordance with ASTM E-814/UL1479.
G. Mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing): Provide US

Gypsum Company product “Thermafiber” having a minimum density of 64 Kgcm (4
pounds per cubic foot), Fibrex product “FBX Safing Insulation” having a minimum
density of 64 Kgcm (4 pounds per cubic foot), or provide Manville Corporation
product “Ceramic Fiber Insulation” having a minimum density of 96 Kgcm (6 pounds
per cubic foot), product to suit conditions and complying with firestop manufacturer's
requirements.
1. Provide galvanized steel safing clips as required for installation of insulation.
2. Material shall be classified non-combustible per ASTM E-814.
H. Elastomeric Fire stopping: Non halogenated latex based elastomeric coating applied
by airless spray, Specified Technologies, Inc., product “Spec Seal Elastomeric Fire
stop Spray”.
I. Fire rating shall be compatible for all adjoining surfaces (i.e. walls, floors).
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Forming and damming materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type as recommended

by fire stopping manufacturer.
B. Primer, sealant and solvents: As recommended by manufacturer.
C. Woven wire mesh: Galvanized 0.91 mm (20 gage) woven wire mesh “chicken wire”
or “poultry fencing”, 25 mm (1 inch) spacing.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where fire stops are to be installed and notify the
Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface to receive fire stops shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release
agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the fire stop material to the
substrate or penetrating item(s).
B. Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projection removed
prior to installation of fire stops.
C. All penetrating items shall be permanently installed prior to fire stop installation.
D. Substrate shall be frost, free and, when applicable, dry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Installation of fire stops shall be performed by applicators/installers qualified

and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures.
2. Apply fire stops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance
requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's
recommendations. Meet building code requirements.
3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and other trades to assure

that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire rated
construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of fire stops,
schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other
construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the
installation of fire stops.
a. Ensure that all fire stopping is inspected prior to installation of

suspended ceilings or concealed by other finished materials.
B. Dam construction
1. Install dams when required to properly contain fire stopping materials within
openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating.
Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing.
Incombustible damming material may be left as a permanent component of
the fire stop system.
2. Placement of dams shall not interfere with function or adversely affect the
appearance of adjacent construction.
C. Installation of single component silicone fire stop
1. Apply with manual or powered caulking gun.

20th October 2021
2. Apply minimum 13 mm thickness for 3 hour rating. Apply 13 mm to both sides

of wall penetrations; one side only in floor penetrations.
3. Use incombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating.
4. Surface of gun grade silicone fire stop may be tooled using clean, potable
water.
5. Clean excess material off of adjacent surfaces and tools within 10 minutes
using either water or Xylol where the use of such would not be hazardous.
D. Installation of cementitious fire stop mortar.
1. Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools
as recommended by fire stop mortar manufacturer. Allow an average mixing
time of 3 minutes and provide an average wet density of 1121 Kg/m3, plus or
minus 80.1 Kg/m3.
2. Wet all surfaces prior to application of fire stop mortar.
3. Mortar may be hand applied or pumped into the opening.
4. Exposed surfaces shall be finished using conventional plastering tools prior

to curing.
5. When installation around layered cables, it is recommended to increase the

fluidity of the fire stop mortar to provide a better fill around the cables. Vibrate
or move the cables slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables.
6. Allow 48 hours for initial cure prior to form removal. For full cure allow 27
days.
7. Wet material may be cleaned with water. Dry material may require scraping
or chipping.
E. Installation of fire stop collars (plastic pipe only)
1. Fire stop collars may be surface mounted to a slab or wall or embedded in

Fire stop Mortar to a maximum depth of 50 mm.
2. For wall penetrations with ABS pipe fire stop collars must be installed on both
sides of the penetration to provide a 3 hour F and T Rating. All other
applications required installation on one side only to provide a 3 hour F and T
Rating.
F. Fire safing insulation: Install fire stopping safing insulation on safing clips spaced as
needed between each stud and floor slab, leaving no voids. Secure safing clips to
slab using fasteners recommended by insulation manufacturer. Install sealant over
mineral wool in accordance with test requirements.
A. Inspect installed fire stopping for compliance with specifications and submitted
schedule.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials.

20th October 2021
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.07 SCHEDULE
A. General: Typical penetrations are indicated below with list of standard fire stopping
approaches. Actual fire stopping materials and combination of materials will vary with
size of penetration and with individual fire stopping manufacturer’s approved UL
Design System Requirements. Use only UL Design System materials for each
penetration that best matches the wall and floor construction.
1. Where penetrations occur for which no listed UL or WH Design System test

exists, obtain from the fire stop system manufacturer an engineered system
acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for fire stopping such
penetrations. Engineered system from manufacturer shall include a detail
drawing showing the engineered system and shall contain no disclaimers.
B. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through floors:
1. Fire stop mortar.
2. Silicone Fire stop sealant.
3. Intumescent fire stop sealant.
4. Fire stop putty, sticks or pads.
5. Mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) in

conjunction with a fire stop sealant.
C. Single metal pipe (non-insulated) and conduit penetrations through walls:
1. (masonry and concrete walls only) Fire stop mortar and putty.
2. Intumescent fire stop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-
combustible insulation (fire safing).
3. Intumescent fire stop sealant with wrap strips.
D. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through floors:
1. Fire stop mortar and wrap strips.
E. Multiple metal pipe and conduit penetrations through walls:
1. Fire stop mortar and putty.
2. (through masonry walls only) Fire stop pillows with woven wire mesh.
3. Silicone Fire stop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible
insulation (fire safing).
F. Insulated metal pipe penetrations through floors:

20th October 2021
4. Silicone Fire stop sealant over wrap strip
5. Mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) in

conjunction with a fire stop sealant.
G. Insulated metal pipe penetrations (single and multiple) through walls:
1. Fire stop mortar with wrap strips.
combustible insulation (fire safing) and Wrap strips.
4. (multiple penetrations through masonry walls only) Fire stop pillows with
woven wire mesh.
H. Duct penetrations through floors or walls:
1. Rectangular and square ducts: Intumescent fire stop sealant over mineral
fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing), and steel flanges
provided under Division 15.
2. Round ducts: Intumescent fire stop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool
non-combustible insulation (fire safing).
I. Combustible plastic pipe and conduit penetrations through floors:
1. Fire stop mortar with wrap strips.
2. Fire stop mortar with fire stop putty and fire stop collars.
3. Silicone fire stop sealant over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible
4. Silicone fire stop sealant and fire stop collars.
5. Intumescent fire stop sealant and fire stop collars.
combustible insulation (fire safing) with fire stop collars.
7. (maximum pipe size 50mm (2 inches) Intumescent fire stop sealant over
mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation (fire safing) with wrap
strips.
J. Combustible plastic pipe and conduit penetrations through walls:

20th October 2021
2. Intumescent fire stop sealant with fire stop collars.
K. Cable penetrations through floors:
L. Cable penetrations through walls:
3. (single penetrations only) Fire stop putty.
4. (electrical boxes) Fire stop pads.
5. Fire stop putty over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible insulation
(fire safing).
M. Cable tray penetrations:
1. (floors only) Fire stop mortar.
2. Fire stop pillows with woven wire mesh containment, and Fire stop putty,
sticks or pads for filling voids.
3. Fire stop pillows with woven wire mesh containment, and Fire stop mortar at
perimeter and fire stop putty, sticks or pads for filling voids.
N. Bus ducts through floors:
combustible insulation (fire safing) and 0.38 mm minimum (28 gage
minimum) steel cover plate.
O. Blank openings:
1. Fire stop mortar.
P. Fire rated joints:
1. Silicone Fire stop sealant over backer rod or bond breaker.
Q. Floor to curtain wall assemblies:
1. UL approved fire stop joint spray over mineral fiber/ceramic wool.

20th October 2021
R. Construction joints at head of wall/floor assemblies:
1. Silicone Fire stop sealant/mastic over mineral fiber / ceramic wool

noncombustible insulation (fire safing).
2. Elastomeric spray over mineral fiber / ceramic wool non-combustible

S. Smoke barrier sealant for dampers, fire door frames:
1. Silicone Fire stop sealant.
T. Temporary sealing of openings and penetrations:
1. Fire stop putty, sticks or pads.
2. Fire stop pillows.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including but not
limited to those specified by reference this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic

surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
e. Joints between metal panels.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,

curtain walls and louvers.
h. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
i. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
e. Tile control and expansion joints.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic

surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior

walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Gulf Consult Joint Sealants III-2/07 92 00 - 1

20th October 2021
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior

doors.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and

counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
d. Other joints as indicated.
e. Related Sections: The Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the

work of all other sections related with the application of Sealant
materials with the work of this section. All related works to be
coordinated and used in conjunction with this specification.
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or

licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant

manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or
affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and

other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid,
optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint
substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and
miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying
the Work.

20th October 2021
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written

instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated
primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint

preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant
products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other
materials matching those submitted.
D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified

according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by

reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test
methods.
3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by

referencing standard specifications and test methods.
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field

test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints
will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical

representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-

Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in
ASTM C 1193.
i. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying
adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite
side.
5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to

adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance
used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not

evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of

20th October 2021
noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use

sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections

made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution:
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated

to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this
Section.
2. Mock-ups of exterior wall assemblies as specified in Section 01410, MOCK-

UPS.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint
sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by

SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been

tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
G. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations

performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with
requirements.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits

permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 5 deg C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.

20th October 2021
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer
for applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to

repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and
other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of

elastomeric joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding

sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and
compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design

specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full

range.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and
joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be

non-staining to porous substrates such as natural stone, provide products such as
Mapesil LM neutral cure, mould resistant 100% solids silicone sealant that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint
substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for
Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products such as

20th October 2021
Mapesil AC solvent free 100% solids acetic cure, mildew resistant silicone sealant
that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of
exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for
testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints
that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with
21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Sealant: Mapesil LM
1. Available Products:
a. Mapei Construction Chemicals LLC, CMTC Kuwait.
b. Dow Corning Corporation.
c. Tremco.
d. Pecora Corporation.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50 or 100/50.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint

substrates indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum,

aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel,
granite, ceramic tile.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per

ASTM C 1248.
F. =Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Mapesil AC
a. Mapei
b. Pecora Corporation; 898.
c. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White.
d. Dow Corning Corporation.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).


20th October 2021
G. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Mapeflex PU35 CR
a. Mapei
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
c. Kut Durathane 920
d. Tremco; Vulkem 922.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50.
4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated

with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, granite, ceramic
tile.
H. Multicomponent Nonsag Immersible Urethane Sealant: Mapeflex PU 45 FT
a. Mapei
b. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II (Gun Grade).
c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
d. Tremco; Vulkem 227.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and I (immersible).

I. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: Mapeflex PU50 SL)
a. Mapei
b. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
c. Kut Durathane 920
d. Tremco; THC-900.

20th October 2021
e. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR 300, Type H.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.
J. Multicomponent Pourable Immersible Urethane Sealant: Mapesil AC, 100% solids,

gun grade, solvent free, single component silicone sealant.
a. Mapei
b. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II (Self Leveling).
c. Tremco; Vulkem 245.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and I (immersible).

2.03 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311 or FS TT-S-

00230.
a. Schnee-Moorehead, Inc.; Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant.
b. Tremco; Mono 555.
2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

20th October 2021
2.05 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard

nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the
following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter

joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
c. Approved Equal.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints]: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying,

nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound
transmission.
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of

precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated,
combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.
c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-

cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated
with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes
in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-
sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping; develops a watertight and
airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complies
with the following:
a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600.
c. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite B.

20th October 2021
d. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.
2.07 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant

with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with
nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape
manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper
backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated
below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated
with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting
adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead
of liquid sealant.
2.08 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C closed-cell material with a

surface skin, and of size and density typically 30% greater in diameter that joint width
to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape, siliconized tape or other plastic tape

recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid,
inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion
would result in three-sided adhesion and sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape
where applicable.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in
any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent,
protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants.
Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint
substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion
of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such

20th October 2021
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for

use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in

ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to
materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the
same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths

that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before

skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless

otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in

ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations

indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.

20th October 2021
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled

joints.
H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following

requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by

sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size

complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written
instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 10 mm. Hold edge
of sealant bead 6 mm inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant

to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and
ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in

vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut
silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately

after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material,
producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at
low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to
produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each type of
elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per
each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied

Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying
adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration
complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test
log.
4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to

adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull

20th October 2021
distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate.

Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with

specified requirements.
5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants

were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test
locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent
elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following
same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant
surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or
to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove
sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 8
Openings
SECTION 08 11 00
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following
1. Flush steel doors, complete with internal reinforcing, hardware cutouts; and
provided with glazing openings, where so indicated.
2. Hollow metal frames for doors, complete with hardware cutouts and
reinforcements.
3. Related Sections:
The Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the work of other sections

with the work of this section. Related work to be coordinated and used in
a. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place Concrete
b. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry
c. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
d. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
e. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
f. Section 08 80 00 - Glass and Glazing
g. Section 09 91 00 - Painting
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards:
1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities accessible

to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
2. ANSI/SDI 100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
3. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies.
4. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
5. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Carbon and high Strength Low Alloy Hot Rolled Strip,
and Cold Rolled Sheet.
6. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot -Dip Process
7. ASTM A 526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (galvanized) by Hot Dip process
8. KFSD Certified and Labelled, Fire Doors and Windows.
Gulf Consult Steel Doors and Frames III-2/08 11 00 - 1

20th October 2021
9. All applicable, state Fire Brigade & municipal codes, laws and regulations for
exits.
10. Stainless steel Sheet - Stainless steel grade 304, No. 4 finish or brush finish
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1: General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications, for doors,

frames and shop applied finishes.
2. Certifications: Manufacturer’s written certification stating that doors, frames,

and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet or exceed the
requirements specified under this section: that specified galvanized and shop
priming has been performed: and fire –resistive requirements for the
indicated Labels (KFSD) have been met.
3. Shop drawings: A complete schedule of doors and frames, to be furnished

hereunder, coordinated with the door and frame schedule contained in the
Contract Drawings. Large scale details of each type door and frame
construction. Indicating all gages, cut outs for glazing in doors, reinforcing and
anchorage.
A. Fire Rated door construction shall conform to KFSD.
B. Install fire rated door assemblies in compliance with NFPA 80 and KFSD.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Co-ordinate the work of this section with the respective trades responsible for
furnishing hardware and installing doors and frames.
B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued templates
authorized by the hardware supplier.
C. Do not fabricate doors or frames before receiving a copy of the approved hardware
Schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by the Contractor and
accepted by the Engineer. Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the
approved schedule: immediately notify the Engineer, in writing, of any conflicts.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide five (5) years of warranty start from the substation
completion of the project for the products including their installation and painting
under this Section.
A. Deliver doors and frames boxed or crated to provide protection during and job
storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired
provided the refinished items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the
Engineer, otherwise remove and replace damaged items.

20th October 2021
C. Store doors and frames at the building site upright and under cover . Place the units
on wood dunnage and cover in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anwaar Al Kuwait Factory Co., Kuwait.
B. Metalco Steel Doors, K.S.A. Local Distributor – Fluid Pipe System - FPS
C. CECO – Local Agent – Al Sabbil National Company Gen. Trad & Cont.
2.02 DOORS
A. General: Refer to the Drawings for design of doors, sizes, glazing cut-outs in doors
and details.
B. Construction: Full flush commercial type 45 mm thick, unless noted otherwise,

meeting or exceeding the materials, gauges, construction and testing requirements of
the referenced ANSI and SDI publications.
Construction of doors shall be as follows:
1. Standard Doors shall be filled with polyurethane insulation foam with a

density of 40 Kg/m3 as per SDI standards or polystyrene insulation.
2. Fire Rated doors shall be filled with mineral fibre wool with a density 40
Kg/m3 as per SDI standard and KFSD requirements.
C. Interior Steel Doors: ANSI/SDI 100, grade II, heavy-duty (level B), Model 2
(seamless), 1.2 mm (18 Gage) Steel faces, with a minimum STC rating of 32.
D. Fire-rated doors: Modify specified construction to meet all construction requirements

required for fire-resistive rating.
1. Affix appropriate KFSD labels to each rated door, indicating applicable rating.
E. Exterior Steel Doors: ANSI/SDI 100, Grade III, extra heavy duty (Level A), Model2
(Seamless), 1.5 mm (16 Gauge) galvanized steel faces, with a minimum R factor of
14 (US).
F. Hardware reinforcing: Welded in place in steel reinforcement, hot rolled pickled and
oiled steel per ASTM A 569, with the following minimum gauges:
1. Hinges 5.0 mm (7 gauge)
2. Kick plates, 1.2 mm (18 gauge)
3. Closers, locks and all other hardware: 2 mm (16 gauge)
4. Locations for reinforcing shall be determined from information and templates

provided under section for Hardware.
G. Provide KFSD approved welded steel astragal at each pair of fire doors.

20th October 2021
H. Fabrication
1. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
2. Attach fire rated label to each door unit.
3. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with flush end closure. Seal
joints watertight.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL/STAINLESS STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Refer to the Door Schedule for various types of frames, sizes and profiles.
KFSD resistive Label frames and other characteristics of frames and related items.
1. Frame type: shop welded frames with mitered joints arc-welded reinforced
and ground smooth, with neoprene rubber gasket acoustical and smoke seal,
inserted in built-in grove or (Silicone Gasket).
B. Materials for frames, reinforcement, anchors, anchor clips and related items.
Commercial grade cold-rolled steel or Stainless steel grade 304, No. 4 finish or brush
finish as per Item-1, conforming to ASTM A 366 or commercial grade hot-rolled and
pickled steel conforming to ASTM A 569.
1. Frame gauge:
a. Steel frames: 1.5 mm (16 gauge), except as otherwise required for

specific KFSD labeling.
2. Hinge, lock and strike reinforcement: 5 mm, 2mm each
3. Door closer reinforcement: 2.7 mm (12 gauge)
4. Floor clips: 5 mm thick.
5. Splice plates or channels: same gauge as door frame.
6. Glazing stops: 1.5 mm (16 gauge), except as otherwise required for specific U
7. Plaster guards: 0.45 mm (26 gauge).
8. Mortar guards; 0.45 mm (26 gauge)
C. Frame construction:
1. Fire-rated frame assemblies: Modify specified construction to meet all

construction requirements required for fire-resistive rating.
a. Affix appropriate KFSD labels to each rated frame assembly,

indicating applicable rating.
2. Shop fabricate frames as whole single units per door opening, except when
frame size is too large to ship as a single unit .Oversized frames may be
shipped in large sections as practicable for field assembly with concealed
splice plates or channels.
3. Frame corner construction: As specified in paragraph A, above.

20th October 2021
4. Reinforcements, stiffeners, and base angle clips: welded to interior surfaces

of frames to provide a stable base and so as to not interfere with installation
of hardware.
5. Provide plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of

hardware cut-outs where mortar or other materials may obstruct hardware
operation.
6. Appearance of finished frames: Strong, rigid, completely free from warp and
buckle, with miters well-formed and in true alignment, and with surfaces
smooth and free from defects of any kind.
7. Silencer holes: Punch three holes in stop of strike jamb of door frames for
application of silencers.
8. Glazing beads: Carefully place to properly accommodate the various

thickness of glass and glazing materials, and loosely attach to frames with
flathead galvanized steel screws through predrilled holes having
countersunk depressions.
D. Anchorage:
1. Anchor clips for frames in metal screw stud partitions: 1.5 mm (16 Gauge)
steel Z- shaped clips , 44 mm upturned and down turned legs, or equivalent
type standard with the manufacturer, contained within the frames, for screw
attachment to metal studs under section for Metal Support Assemblies.
2. Anchor clips for frames in wood stud partitions: 18 - gauge steel with 19mm
high bendable straps or equivalent type standard with the manufacturer,
contained, for screw attachment to wood studs.
3. Anchors for frames in masonry walls: Adjustable T- Shaped positively

engaging the retainers on both flanges of each jamb member, when placed
.The stem of the anchors shall be 50 mm wide by 2.7 mm (12 gauge)
minimum, corrugated or perforated for mortar bond, and extend 250 mm into
the masonry, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Anchors for frames in existing masonry walls : Counter - sunk bolts of

minimum 6 mm diameter, set into masonry expansion shields of 10 mm
diameter.
5. Anchors for fire-resistive rated frames: Conform to all KFSD requirements for
the specific fire - resistive ratings, and grout accordingly.
6. Provide not less than 3 anchors, clips, or bolts per jambs upto 2200mm
height, as applicable.
2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation for doors and frames: Maximum diagonal distortion 2 mm

measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Preparation: Clean all surfaces of all doors, frames, accessory items, anchors and
related items, to remove blemishes and foreign matter and provide paint grip. Spot-fill
imperfections with metallic filler, and sand smooth. Thoroughly clean the surfaces by
applying hot or cold phosphate treatment standard with the manufacturer.

20th October 2021
B. Following cleaning apply one dip or spray coat of rust - inhibitive metallic oxide , zinc
phosphate, or synthetic resin primer to all surfaces, including those which will be
concealed after erection. Bake or oven dry, the primer at time and temperature
abrasion or as per manufacturers standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and in compliance with these
specifications and applicable codes.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Install frames and doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. ANSI/SDI – 100, SDI 105, add the Door Hardware Institute
recommendations .Install with a maximum diagonal distortion of 2 mm measured with
a straight edge, corner to corner
B. Place in position all steel frames, in accordance with the approved shop drawings
and frame schedule.
1. Co-ordinate installation of frames with the various trades installing abutting

wall construction for anchor placement.
2. Provide rigid temporary bracing for frames as required to ensure

maintenance of positioning, and remove only after frames have been
permanently anchored.
3. Secure frames, occurring in existing masonry, with expansion bolts and

sleeves.
4. Where exposed fastener heads occur in frames, fill with automotive body
filler and sand smooth.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work includes: Wok of this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
1. Flush solid core wood doors, complete with internal reinforcing, hardware
cutouts: and provided with openings for glazing where so indicated.
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-place Concrete
2. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry
5. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
6. Section 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others
referenced in this Section, under the provisions of Clause for References.
1. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible

to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
2. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. AWI Quality Standards, Seventh Edition, version 1.0, for the following:
a. Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors.
b. Section 1500, Factory Finishing.
4. NFPA publication 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. WDMA Industry Standard IS 1-A-97.
6. UBC 43.2 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
7. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Gulf Consult Flush Wood Doors III-2/08 14 16 - 1

20th October 2021
8. Warnock-Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors.
9. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations for
exits.
10. National Wood Window & Door Association (NWWDA) IS-I-87.
11. Commercial Standard CS 171-58 Premium Grade.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1: General Requirements
1. Literature: Fabricator’s product data sheets, specifications, and performance

data.
2. Certification: Fabricator’s written certification stating that doors, meet or

exceed the requirements specified under this Section; that specified shop
finishing has been performed; and that all fire-resistive requirements for the
indicated Labels have been met.
a. Provide signed certification by agent of door manufacturer stating

that machining, glazing and finishing of doors shall be performed by
only the manufacturer in its facilities.
3. Door schedule: All doors specified under this Section, coordinated with the
schedule contained in the Contract Drawings.
4. Shop drawings: Elevations, and large scale sections and details of door
construction, indicating profiles, joinery and cut-outs for hardware and
glazing.
5. Samples:
a. Corner section of specified flush type door, showing core

construction and joinery.
b. For transparent finishes: submit two 300 mm by 300 mm mounted

finished samples of each species of veneer specified.
A. All materials and workmanship shall conform in all respects to the specified grades of
the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standards, except as modified
herein.
A. Fire rated door construction shall conform to UL 10B.
B. Install doors in compliance with NFPA publication 80.
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for
furnishing hardware and installing wood doors.
B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued templates
authorized by the hardware supplier.

20th October 2021
C. Do not fabricate doors before receiving a copy of the approved hardware schedule,
submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the approved schedule;
immediately notify the Engineer, in writing, of any conflicts.
A. The Contractor is responsible to make certain that wood doors are not delivered until
the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the doors will not be
damaged by excessive changes in ambient humidity and relative moisture content.
B. Deliver wood doors in resilient non-staining moisture proof packaging, provide

protection during transit and job storage. Clearly identify doors with door opening
number, matching those indicated on the approved Door Schedule.
C. Inspect doors upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the
refinished items are equal in respects to new work and acceptable to the Engineer;
otherwise remove and replace damaged items.
D. Store doors flat on a level surface, in protected, elevated, dry areas; protect from
exposure from all sources of light and moisture. Seal top and bottom edges if stored
more than one week. Break packaging seal on-site to permit ventilation.
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide Five (5) years of warranty for the products including their
installation and polishing/painting under this Section from the date of Substantial
Completion of Works.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metalco
B. Kuwait Carpentry
C. Hasan Abul
D. Jassim Al Khors
2.02 FLUSH FACED DOORS
A. General requirements: Conform to the requirements set forth in the designated

Sections of the Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards, and the
applicable requirements of U.S. Commercial Standard CS 171, as amended. Refer to
the Drawings for sizes, locations of each type door, glazing cut-outs in doors, and
other characteristics of doors to be furnished hereunder.
1. Door facing: AWI Quality Standards, 6th edition, A Grade veneer, 0.8 to 0.62
mm thick, mechanically splice Beech wood, plain sawn with book matched
grain, end matched transoms.

20th October 2021
2.03 FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED 90 MINUTE LABEL DOORS
A. General Construction: AWI Quality Standard, Section 1300, Type FD
1. Door thickness: 44 mm, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Models: Comply with the following AWI Quality Standard construction:
1. 90 minute “B” label doors: Type “FD-1-1/2”.
C. Door facing:
1. Face veneer: As specified herein above under Article – “Flush Faced Doors”.
2. Cross banding: Hardwood veneer at least 2 mm.
D. Core construction:
1. Core: Non-combustible mineral sections.
2. Stiles: multiple-ply stiles with 6 mm solid hardwood outer ply matching face
veneers for species and color.
3. Top and bottom rails: Beech, Structural Composite Lumber (SCL) or UL

approved composite material to meet label requirements.
4. Blocking:
a. For doors scheduled to receive screw-mounted surface closers,

provide adequate top rail blocking.
b. Where recommended by the lock manufacturer, provide lock block

for both mortise and cylindrical locks.
c. For doors scheduled to receive surface mounted fire exit devices or

vertical rods, provide top, intermediate and bottom rail blocking for
screw mounting.
d. Provide additional blocking where recommended by the lock

manufacturer.
E. Adhesives:
1. Face assembly: Type 1 (waterproof)
2. Core assembly: Type II (water resistant).
F. Accessories: For all fire-rated doors installed in pairs with both leaves active, provide
0.91 mm (20-guage) formed steel edges, without astragal, wrapped with veneer
matching faces of doors.
2.04 NON-RATED SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. General Construction: AWI Quality Standard, Type Particleboard PC-5.
1. Door thickness: 44mm, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Door facing:

20th October 2021
1. Face veneer: As specified herein above under Article – “Flush Faced Doors”.
2. Cross banding: Hardwood veneer at least 2 mm.
C. Core construction:
1. Core: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208 Type 1, Grade 1-LD-2 having
a density of 320 kg/m3 to 512 kg/ m3.
2. Stiles: Laminated strand lumber or hardwood mill option for inner ply of
styles, minimum of 35 mm after trimming, with 6 mm solid hardwood outer ply
matching face veneer, or visually compatible hardwood species.
3. Top and bottom rails: Beech or birch in order to produce a smooth surface
after finish has been applied.
D. Adhesives: Type 1 (waterproof) for both face and core assembly.
2.05 DOOR FRAMES
A. Wood Frames shall be of solid Beech wood, 50mm thick, width equal to wall with
EPDM bubble gasket and 100 x 12 mm architrave.
B. Stainless Steel Frame shall be as specified in the Section 08 11 00 –Steel Doors and
Frames.
2.06 BEADS
A. Glazing beads for fire rated doors shall be wood veneered clad steel bead having a
sight line not greater than 12.7 mm.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with specified manufacturer’s requirements. Fabricate

rated doors in compliance with UL requirements.
B. Laminate door facing, cross banding and assembled core in a hot press.
C. Bond stiles and rails to cores, sand for uniform thickness. Sand assemble door leaf in
factory.
D. Machine doors to receive hardware from templates furnished under section for
DOOR HARDWARE in factory. Do not machine for surface hardware.
E. Provide cut lite openings where scheduled in factory.
F. Provide inner blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer hardware reinforcement.
G. Fabricate doors for undercut where scheduled in factory.
H. Fabrication tolerances: Maximum diagonal distortion (warp): 6 mm measured with

straight edge from corner to corner over a maximum 1050mm by 2100mm surface
area.

20th October 2021
A. Transparent finish: AWI Premium Grade Factory Finish System No TR-6 “Conversion
Polyurethane” system, having a Satin sheen of 30° to 50° gloss units per ASTM
D523. Finish system shall not substantially increase flame spread.
1. Colorant, apply as required to match accepted sample: Dye stain.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect frames and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this
Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of frames.
C. Concrete work, masonry work, tile and marble setting and polishing shall be
completed and dry before installation of wood doors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, ANSI/SDI-100,

SDI-105 and NFPA-80
B. Do not install doors until concrete, masonry, plaster, tile and other wet work is
completed and dried in the areas to receive doors.
C. Doors shall be conditioned to the average prevailing moisture (humidity) of the

locality before hanging. Doors shall not be subjected to abnormal heat, dryness, or
humidity. Avoid sudden changes such as forced heat.
D. Cutting, trimming, fitting and machining of prefinished doors will not be permitted.
E. Install doors in required openings as shown. Install flush panels with concealed
fasteners.
F. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions. Adjust door

installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops
uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed or
otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames.
G. Remove hardware before painting and refix after painting of doors is completed.
Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation at completion.
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation of doors, clean all exposed surfaces as

recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protect doors and hardware during construction. Replace damaged

components as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
B. Fire resistive, rated and non-rated access panels and frames, as specified under this
Section, furnished by Sections requiring the same and installed under sections
responsible for wall construction.
5. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications and installation

instructions.
2. Schedule: Submit Schedule of all access panels to be furnished hereunder,

indicating locations for each size and type of access door.
a. The Contractor is responsible to ensure that all of the types/styles of

panels and frames specified herein can be furnished by the
manufacturer submitted.
b. Prior to submitting schedule, coordinate with the work of Division 21,

22, 23 & 25, MECHANICAL and Division 26, 27 & 28, ELECTRICAL
and meet with the Engineer to determine exact quantities and
locations required for the installation of access panels.
3. Shop drawings: Large scale details of access doors, indicating all sizes,
gages and thickness; provide complete installation details, coordinated to the
specific receiving conditions.
A. Do not deliver access doors to the site, until all specified submittals have been
submitted to, and approved by the Engineer.
Gulf Consult Access Doors and Panels III-2/08 31 13 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Store access door units inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry,
protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and
damage from construction traffic and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

similar products include the following, or equal:
1. Al Sabbil National Co.
2. Acudor Middle East
3. Williams Brothers Corporation of America
B. All work of this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise
2.02 ACCESS PANELS - GENERAL
A. General: Access panels scheduled for placement in cast in place concrete or

masonry shall be furnished with concrete or masonry anchors, as applicable,
attached to unit frames at factory.
2.03 ACCESS PANELS - FOR FIRE RESISTANCE RATED CONSTRUCTION
A. For fire-resistance rated wall and ceiling surfaces: Standard flush panel door meeting
the following requirements:
1. Panel and frame rating: UL “B” label for 90 minutes.
2. Frame type:
a. For ceramic tile walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) Type 304 stainless steel
flanged frame, with flange exposed to view 25 mm (1 inch) or less.
b. For masonry and concrete walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized

bonderized steel flanged frame, with flange exposed to view 25 mm
(1 inch) or less.
c. For gypsum board walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized
bonderized steel frame, with 0.68 mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel
drywall bead.
d. For plastered walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized

plaster bead.
3. Door: Insulated Flush panel door as follows:
a. Typical wall types: Flush door, Sandwich construction with 2 inch

thick mineral wool fiber insulation between two layers of 20 gauge
galvanized bonderized steel.

20th October 2021
b. For ceramic tile walls only: Flush door, Sandwich construction with 2
inch thick mineral wool fiber insulation between two layers of 20
gauge Type 304 stainless steel.
4. Hinge: Flush continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
5. Closer: Spring closer.
6. Latch: Flush cam latch, operated by Allen or Torx head screwdriver.
2.04 ACCESS PANELS - FOR NON- RATED CONSTRUCTION
A. For non-rated wall and ceiling surfaces (service and non-public areas): Flush panel
door type meeting the following requirements:
1. Frame type:
a. For tiled walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) Type 304 stainless steel flanged
frame, with flange exposed to view 25 mm (1 inch) or less:
b. For masonry and concrete walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized

bonderized steel flanged frame, with flange exposed to view 25 mm
(1 inch) or less.
c. For gypsum board walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized
drywall bead.
d. For plastered walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized

plaster bead.
2. Door: Flush panel door as follows:
a. Typical all wall types, except tile: 1.9 mm (14 gauge) galvanized
bonderized steel.
b. For tiled walls: 1.9 mm (14 gauge) type 304 stainless steel.
3. Hinge:
a. Typical: Concealed spring hinge enabling door to open 175 degrees

and permit removal of door from frame.
b. Panels greater than 600 by 900 mm (24 by 36 inches): Flush

continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
4. Latch: Flush cam latch, operated by Allen or Torx head screwdriver.
B. For non-rated Gypsum board walls and ceilings (Public areas): Recessed door type
meeting the following requirements
1. Frame type: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 0.68
mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel drywall bead.
2. Door: Recessed 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel door. with
0.68 mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel drywall bead.
3. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod hinge.

20th October 2021
4. Latch: Flush cam latch, (operated by Allen or Torx head screwdriver) with
steel grommet welded to door.
C. For non-rated plastered walls and ceilings (Public areas): Recessed door type
meeting the following requirements
1. Frame type: 1.5 mm (16 gage) galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 0.68
mm (22 gage) galvanized steel plaster bead with expanded lath.
2. Door: Recessed: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel door, with
self-furring 3.4 pound galvanized steel lath welded to door.
3. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod hinge.
4. Latch: Flush cam latch, (operated by Allen or Torx head screwdriver) with
steel grommet welded to door.
A. Panels fabricated from stainless steel: No. 4 satin finish.
B. Panels fabricated from cold rolled steel: Phosphate dipped with baked on rust
inhibitive gray primer finish.
C. Panels fabricated from galvanized bonderized steel: Baked on rust inhibitive gray
primer finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
this Section. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive the work of this
Section and opening dimensions are as indicated on the shop drawings. Verify that
all blocking is set in place and secure.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing project conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install access panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and direction

from authorities having jurisdiction. Install miscellaneous specialties absolutely level
and in true line, with units securely anchored to the surrounding construction.
B. Test each door and latching device, and make adjustments required to ensure a
bind-free operation and proper latching.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 42 27
INTERNAL GLASS PARTITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work includes: Wok of this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment
and services necessary to complete the interior glass partition with aluminium frame
including all fittings and accessories.
2. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminium Doors and Windows
4. Section 08 80 00 - Glass and Glazing
5. Section 08 81 13 - Decorative Glass
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1. FGMA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual".
2. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual".
3. NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual".
4. AWS "Structural Welding Code".
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Award the work to a single firm specializing in this type of work so that there will be
undivided responsibility for such work. The firm shall have a minimum of 5 years
successful experience in the fabrication and erection of similar systems as used for this
Project.
A. Design, fabricate and install components so that the completed partition system provides
for anticipated movement of the supporting structure due to live loads, dead loads,
temperature change and building tolerance.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide warranty for a period of Ten (10) years from the date of
substantial completion, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Gulf Consult Internal Glass Partition III-2 / 08 42 27 - 1

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dorma
B. Modern Fold
C. Nana Wall Systems, Inc
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Frame and Panels: from Manufacturer’s standard profiles, provide head jamb, side jambs,
and panels with dimensions shown on the drawings. Provide glass wall mullion at top and
bottom only.
B. Aluminium: Extrusions with normal thickness of 2.5mm. Alloy specified as AlMgSi 0.5
with strength rated as 6063-T5 or F-22 (European Standard)
C. Finish: Anodized conforming to AAMA604.2 or 607.1 clear, E6,EV1.
D. Glass: Provide Manufacturer’s standard glass and glazing, glass as specified in drawing
or elsewhere and specification section 08 80 00. Exact glass dimensions to be provided
by manufacturer. Provide APTK or EPDM gaskets and extruded aluminium snap-in
glazing bead for dry glazing per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.03 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Drawing for Glass types and Specification Section 08 80 00 –Glazing and 08 81
13 Decorative Glass.
2.04 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of

profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Provide bulb gaskets and
custom shaped gaskets at window wall. Bulb gaskets shall be capable of being
watertight and airtight utilizing bulb gasket, without pressure plate gasket.
B. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed cell,

integral-skinned neoprene of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal;
complying with ASTM C509, Type II; black.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces

contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene blocks, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
D. Edge Blocks: Neoprene blocks of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement
(side-walking) of glass.
E. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors by
spot application, certified as compatible with glass coating by organic protective coating
manufacturer.

20th October 2021
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge
clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass and gasket
manufacturers. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated.
B. Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass to fit each
opening with edge clearances and bite on glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut heavy plate or float glass (13 mm and above).
Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at manufacturer's option. For glass to be
cut at site, provide glass larger than required so as to obtain, clean cut edges without
seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade glass after heat-tempering or
laminating.
C. Edgework: Provide flat ground glass edges having a satin finished flat edge with eased
arise corners.
D. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified. Fit and assemble all work in
the shop insofar as practicable. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and
design, using rigidly secured joints with hairline contact, unless otherwise shown.
Reinforce members and joints with plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as
needed. Use concealed stainless steel fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded.
Reinforce, cut, drill and tap as required for attachment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the Project site to
review material selections, methods and sequence of interior clear anodized aluminum
and glass partition installation, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship,
job organization, coordination with other trades, and other pertinent topics related to the
Work. The meeting shall include the Engineer, the Engineer’s Representative, the
Contractor, the Contractor's project superintendent, subcontractor superintendent,
manufacturer's representatives, primary component materials suppliers, and any other
subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this Work.
3.02 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to
be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements so that the Work will be
accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.
B. Coordinate the work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed
during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in the work. Place
such items, including anchors, accurately in relation to the final location of components.
C. Erect all component parts in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
D. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer

20th October 2021
or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing
members. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of
cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has
impaired strength or appearance.
E. Do not erect members which are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged to
such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members
damaged in the process of erection.
F. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of 21

deg. C. Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient
temperature range at the time of the respective operations.
G. Erection Tolerances
1. Set metal work, plumb, level and true to line with uniform joints. Comply with the
following erection tolerances:
a. Variation From Plumb: 3mm in 3m, non-cumulative.
b. Joint Alignment: +/- 1.6mm.
c. Joint Width: +/- 1.6mm - 0.0 in.
d. Surface Alignment Across Joints: /- 1/6mm.
H. Furnish and install anchoring devices required to secure partitions using concealed
fasteners.
I. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a dielectric separator or

provide other separation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
allow coating to be exposed on finish surfaces.
J. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being

welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS. Use only
methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind exposed
welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron or iron
compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding and grinding.
K. Glass Installation: Install glass and glazing in accordance with requirements in Section
08 80 00, "Glass and Glazing" and written instruction of the glass manufacturer and
fabricator.
A. Repair damaged or defaced work or replace with new work, as acceptable to Engineer’s
Representative and the Engineer. Completely refinish defaced partition components with
factory-finish materials or replace defaced components at no extra cost to the Engineer.
B. Clean interior clear anodized aluminum and glass components in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation and referenced standards.
C. Clean glass in accordance with requirements in Section 08 80 00, "Glass and Glazing".
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 42 29
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The section includes: Work includes in this section is to furnish all labor, materials,
tools, and equipment and perform all services and operations necessary for the
complete supply and installation of automatic glazed/wood entrance door assemblies
including the manually operable side doors indicated on drawings.
B. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this
1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
2. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
3. Section 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing.
4. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, including conduit and wiring.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ZH 1/494 Germany– Guidelines on power-operated doors, windows, and gates.
B. Manufacture and Test Code of Practice for Automatic doors in Emergency Rescue
Routes, Issue 10/1984 Germany.
C. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE:

1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test.
D. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS:

1. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes.
E. THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION:

1. AA Aluminum Finishes Manual.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative
of the automatic entrance door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of
units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Doors connected to fire alarm panel: Comply with requirements of local authorities.
Provide necessary electrical control/mechanisms for the doors to remain open in case
of fire/smoke in the zone.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals, as defined in section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, are required:
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrance doors.
B. Shop drawings for each automatic entrance required, including:
1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
Gulf Consult Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors III-2/08 42 29 - 1

20th October 2021
2. Elevations at 1:50 scale.

3. Detail sections of typical members.
4. Anchors and reinforcement.
5. Hardware mounting heights.
6. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
7. Glazing details.
8. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Hardware Schedule: Organize schedule into sets based on hardware required.
Include name of item and manufacturer, and complete designation of every item
required for each automatic entrance door.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes
involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full
range of variations expected.
E. Size: 300-mm long sections of extrusions.
F. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems to include in maintenance
manuals. Include instructions on how to perform safety tests, and the name, address,
and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative.
A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding
structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25
cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
A. Field Measurements: Verify automatic entrance door openings by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
A. Deliver components in the manufacturer’s original protective packaging.
B. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as
needed to prevent damage to glass.
C. Store components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by Contractor and Manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace components of the automatic entrance door system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but
are not limited to, the following:

20th October 2021
1. Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/175 of their length or

75mm, whichever is less.
2. Excessive air leakage.
3. Faulty operation of operators and hardware.
4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dorma, Gulf FZE
B. Blasi Automatic Doors
C. Gilgen
D. Horton Automatics.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
1. Extruded: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209).
B. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C. Wood Door: As per specification section 08 14 16 Wood Doors.
D. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joints at
perimeter of entrance system.
E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, non-corrosive, non-
staining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for application.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.76-mm)
thickness per coat.
2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS – DORMA ES200 T -2D
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door system, complete
with doors, operators, controls, activation devices, safety devices, and accessories as
indicated and required.
B. Automatic sliding door(s) furnished and installed shall be Dorma ES200 T -2D
Automatic sliding door operator system with redundant drive, including ST-FLEX
profiles and Double glazing glass and as indicated on plans and door schedule and
shall be manufactured by Dorma GmbH, Germany.
2.03.1 COMPONENTS
A. MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: Shall include operator, header and track, jambs,
sliding door panels, and sidelites. Units can be mounted within rough opening with
sliding panels sliding along sidelite. The system should be complete with door leaves
up to 3000mm passage height and all glass profiles for ST-FLEX profile (with finger
protection) double glazing with interlocking side seals and top and bottom seals with

20th October 2021
good insulation quality. Use of silicon is not allowed in the assembly.Safety photocell
barriers for monitoring the opening zone, are recessed into the side seal sections.
The outer sections are designed not to trap limbs or objects, with brush seals.
B. OPERATOR: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be ES 200 T heavy duty

operator unit. The operators are electromechanical in operation and are
microprocessor controlled. The TST telescopic operators shall be used in areas
which need larger clear openings under limited structural dimensions. The operator
shall be ES200 T with load bearing capacity of 2x75kg or 4x75kg. The telescopic
panels shall be with rugged profiles and with interlocking side seals to control
draughts.
The system should be complete with door leaves up to 3000mm passage height and
all glass profiles for ST-FLEX profile (with finger protection) double glazing with
interlocking side seals and top and bottom seals. Use of silicon is not allowed in the
assembly.The components to be modular in design, consisting of track and fixing
profiles, adjustable carrier heads, control board/power pack, additional control unit for
safety, toothed belt, rechargeable battery package, return pulley with integral lock and
belt tensioning device, end stopper, junction box, power cable to control board, self
diagnostics of microprocessor control and integrated additional component for
redundant power supply and the system to be of protection class IP 20.It should be
self-learning with adjustable parameters. Sensor shall be ÌXIO-L-DT1 Combination
Sensor` non directional and combination of presence & motion detection, tested for
continuous monitoring before every cycle. IXIO-ST/SO Infrared safety Sensor shall be
provided to protect the secondary edge area of the door as per (DIN 18650 and EN
16005)., 5 position program switch,lockable by electronic code, for flush installation,
emergency push button with green light for escape routes, flush mounted, all in
System 55 format, and electro mechanical hook locks. The power supply is to be 230
volts 50/60 Hz. The carriers should have brush profiles to self clean the track out of
dust and dirt.The installation of the operator should be of modular construction to
allow the track to be fixed at an earlier stage, and the operator later.
The sliding door assembly is to be complete with double glazing 5/12/5 mm, weather
stripping with interlocking side and middle seals, and bottom seals with glazing
gaskets.The gap between the interlocking profiles of sliding and fixed panels not to
exceed 8mm for safety reasons. The finish of the aluminium profiles to be Duraner
coated , shade as per consultant’s approval.
Where card readers are used for access control, a signal from the card reader will
unlock the lock and set the door in automatic motion for access.
C. OPERATOR PARAMETERS: The automatic sliding door operator is to be of modular

construction. The microprocessor control unit is to monitor the opening and closing
force . In the event of power failure, the door will automatically come to the open or
closed positions as pre selected. The following functions are to be integral with the
system.
Off-Automatic- Permanent open, Partial opening, Night bank control, Pharmacy

Locking, exit only, Emergency Off, adjustable opening speed for each leaf 10-75
cm/sec, closing speed 10-50cm/sec, adjustable hold open time 0-180 secs,
adjustable reverse cycle, self learning, electro mechanical locking, light barriers (self
testing), battery pack (monitored).
2.04 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS – DORMA ES200 -2D
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door system, complete
with doors, operators, controls, activation devices, safety devices, and accessories as
indicated and required.
B. Automatic sliding door(s) furnished and installed shall be Dorma ES200 T -2D
Automatic sliding door operator system with redundant drive, including ST-FLEX

20th October 2021
profiles and Double glazing glass and as indicated on plans and door schedule and
shall be manufactured by Dorma GmbH, Germany.
2.04.1 COMPONENTS
A. MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: Shall include operator, header and track, jambs,
sliding door panels, and sidelites. Units can be mounted within rough opening with sliding
panels sliding along sidelite. The system should be complete with door leaves up to
3000mm passage height and all glass profiles for ST-FLEX profile (with finger protection)
double glazing with interlocking side seals and top and bottom seals with good insulation
quality. Use of silicon is not allowed in the assembly. The outer sections are designed not
to trap limbs or objects, with brush seals
B. OPERATOR: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be ES 200-2D Dual Drive

technology, heavy duty operator unit, for doors with load bearing capacity to be 2 x 130
Kg. The operators are electromechanical in operation and are microprocessor controlled.
The operator shall be of compact contour design with 100mm height and 180mm depth.
The system should be complete with door leaves up to 3000mm passage height and all
glass profiles for ST-FLEX profile (with finger protection) double glazing with interlocking
side seals and top and bottom seals. Use of silicon is not allowed in the assembly. The
components to be modular in design, consisting of track and fixing profiles, adjustable
carrier heads, control board/power pack, additional control unit for safety, toothed belt,
rechargeable battery package, return pulley with integral lock and belt tensioning device,
end stopper, junction box, power cable to control board, self diagnostics of
microprocessor control and integrated additional component for redundant power supply
and the system to be of protection class IP 20.It should be self-learning with adjustable
parameters. Sensor from inside shall be ÌXIO DT3` non directional movement detection
and safety scan for emergency exit sliding doors. It shall be on continuous current circuit
with FST module connection. Sensor from outside shall be ÌXIO-L-DT1` non directional
and combination of presence & motion detection, tested for continuous monitoring before
every cycle. IXIO-ST/SO Infrared safety sensors shall be provided to protect the
secondary edge area of the door as per (DIN 18650 and EN 16005). The locking shall be
electro mechanical locks. 5 position program switch,lockable by electronic code, for flush
installation, emergency push button with green light for escape routes, flush mounted, all
in System 55 format, and electro mechanical hook locks. The power supply is to be 230
volts 50/60 Hz. The carriers should have brush profiles to self clean the track out of dust
and dirt.The installation of the operator should be of modular construction to allow the
track to be fixed at an earlier stage, and the operator later.
The sliding door assembly is to be complete with double glazing 5/12/5 mm,
weatherstripping with interlocking side and middle seals, and bottom seals with glazing
gaskets. The gap between the interlocking profiles of sliding and fixed panels not to
exceed 8mm for safety reasons. The finish of the aluminium profiles to be Duraner
coated, shade as per consultant’s approval.
Where card readers are used for access control, a signal from the card reader will unlock
the lock and set the door in automatic motion for access.
C. OPERATOR PARAMETERS: The automatic sliding door operator is to be of modular

construction. The microprocessor control unit dual drive,with self-diagnostics, redundant
monitoring of entire system including opening safety devices. In the event of power
failure ot failure of any component in the system, the door will automatically come to the
open position. The following functions are to be integral with the system.
Off-Automatic - Permanent open, Partial opening, Night bank control, Pharmacy Locking,
exit only, Emergency Off, adjustable opening speed for each leaf 10-75 cm/sec, closing
speed 10-50cm/sec, adjustable hold open time 0-120 secs, adjustable reverse cycle, self
learning, electro mechanical locking, rechargeable battery pack (monitored).

20th October 2021
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Provide heavy-duty hardware units in size, number and type recommended by
manufacturer for entrance type required. Finish exposed parts to match door finish,
B. Compression Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable, compressible
gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying
with ASTM D 2287. Include bumper-type gaskets at door stops and laps.
C. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping of
wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing,
complying with AAMA 701. Sliding weather stripping includes stripping at jamb, head,
and meeting rails where there is no stop or lap to receive compression weather
stripping.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate automatic entrance door system components to designs and sizes
indicated.
B. Prefabrication: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work
before shipment to Project site.
C. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at
Project site.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and
grinding of metalwork in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations before applying finishes.
2. Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
3. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and
connection devices.
4. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered
to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
D. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before
finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to
greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld
spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
E. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass
indicated according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
G. Hardware: Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at fabrication plant.
Remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and
installation at Project site.
H. Doors: Fabricate doors in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed
loads and for installing hardware. Factory assemble door and frame units.
1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At
locations without fixed stops, provide sliding weather stripping retained in
adjustable strip mortised into the door edge.

20th October 2021
I. Framing: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration indicated,

with welded or mechanical joints according to manufacturer's standards. Provide sub
frames and reinforcement of types indicated or, if not indicated, as needed for a
complete system to support required loads.
2.07 FINISHES
A. PVDF finish: High-performance organic finish:
1. Finish shall be applied by an applicator licensed by coating manufacturer and
in strict compliance with manufacturer’s specification for cleaning, priming,
coating application and quality control.
2. Three coats of polyvinyl dine fluoride (PVDF) resin for high performance
thermoplastic organic coating system containing a minimum 70% Kynar 500
resin by weight combined with proprietary pigments for spray system.
Thickness of coating 1.6 mils minimum.
3. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surface to comply with
AAMA 2605.
4. All Aluminum shall be cladded with 316 satin finish stainless steel sheet.
B. Concealed Aluminum Surfaces: Any aluminum sections which are completely
concealed and therefore do not require the facing color shall be clear (silver)
anodized to a minimum standard of BS 1615: AA10, unless a possibility exists of
these sections being wetted in which case the full standard of BS 1615: AA25 if
required.
C. Identification marks shall not appear on finished surfaces.
D. Adhesion: No removal of finish after 1.5mm cross-hatching to the base metal, impact
to the point of metal rupture, and subject to application and quick removal of
cellophane tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting the
performance of automatic entrance doors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and other data to fabricators
and installers of related work, as necessary for coordinating automatic entrance door
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with automatic entrance door manufacturer's written installation
instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Do not install
damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact
concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous paint.

20th October 2021
C. Entrances: Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and
grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest
extent possible.
2. Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, and guides level and true
to location with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
D. Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as follows:
1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution
system.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install control devices and wiring, including
connections to door operators.
F. Infrared-Scanner Presence Detectors: Install scanners on interior sides of each
sliding automatic entrance door.
1. Photoelectric Beams: Install beams on each sliding automatic entrance door
jamb.
G. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless
H. Seal frame perimeter with sealant to provide weather tight construction, unless
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weather tight closure.
B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed
installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.
A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing
and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and
maintaining glass.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, including limiting construction traffic,
that ensure automatic entrance doors are without damage or deterioration at time of
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 44 13
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
B. Glazed aluminum curtain wall, structural glazed system installation with concealed
windows; projecting outside punched windows and sunshades as shown on the
architectural drawings.
2. Section 07 11 13 - Bituminous Damp proofing
4. Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping
Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the following capabilities
A. Based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those

indicated for this Project:
B. Based on preconstruction testing:
1. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements

indicated without failure. Failure includes the following:
a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
b. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by

thermal and structural movement, to glazing units.
C. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members.
D. System is pressure equalized at its interior face.
E. Curtain wall system shall be re-glazable from the exterior. The punched windows
shall be re-glazed from the interior.
F. Design Wind Speed shall be 100 miles/hr (160 km/hr), 3 seconds gust wind speed,
Exposure C and as per IBC standard for flexible building.
Gulf Consult Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall III-2/08 44 13 - 1

20th October 2021
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to

1/175 of clear span or 20 mm, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise
indicated. (L/240 + 6mm @ lengths over 4.1 meters)
2. Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does
not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation
of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested
according to ASTM E 330.
a. Test Pressure: 100 percent of inward and outward wind-load design

pressures except as noted in ‘G’ below
G. Curtain Wall Wind Load Studies
1. Study Building Test Model: For determining the wind pressure on curtain
wall, a model at suitable scale of the building will be constructed including all
surface details measuring greater than 0.3 meters as a full scale and
subjected to wind tunnel tests. Taps for measuring wind pressures on the
model will be installed on the exposed surfaces of the external glazing in
addition to the exterior surface of the walls for the associated steel elements.
The distribution of taps on the model will take into consideration the overall
net wind loads normal to the structure’s surface, as well as possible regions
of high localized wind loading.
2. Meteorological Data: Long term meteorological data for the Kuwait City area
will be used to determine design information from the wind tunnel results.
This information along with information on the terrain surrounding the wind
instrument will be used to establish reference wind speeds for the area and
to develop a mathematical model of the joint probability of wind speed and
direction.
3. Wind Simulation: The mean velocity and turbulence profiles of the natural
wind will be simulated in the wind tunnel by means of roughness on the wind
tunnel floor combined with turbulence generating spires at the start of the
working section. These devices produce a floor boundary layer in the wind
tunnel similar to the earth’s planetary boundary layer in strong wind
conditions.
4. Wind Pressure Testing: The model will be tested in an approved laboratory that
has boundary layer wind tunnel to determine the instantaneous wind pressure
tap for 36 wind azimuths in 10 degree increments. The mean, RMS (root-mean-
square) and the peak maximum and minimum pressure coefficients, based on
the dynamic pressure above the boundary layer, will then be determined from
the wind tunnel data. The net pressures between inner and outer surfaces of the
curtain walls will be evaluated. Where the curtain walls enclose internal space
estimates of internal pressure will be combined with measured external
pressures to develop the net wind pressures.
5. Structural Wind Loads: The structural loads on the main structural systems,
from the area averaging tests, will be determined for the 25 year return
period from the mean and RMS pressure coefficients measured in the wind
pressure study utilizing a basic wind speed of 80mph. The loads will be
provided in the form of block diagrams.
6. Design Peak Wind Loads: As a by-product of the tests, peak local wind loads
on the exterior walls will be determined. These loads would be used for the
design of local elements such as two ends of the curved curtain wall and
supporting steel structure. These loads will be also provided in block diagram
form.

20th October 2021
7. Report: Interim information will be sent as soon as it is available and a

detailed final report will be submitted upon completion of the study.
H. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do not
deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design
dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 3.18 mm clearance
between members and top of fixed panels, glazing. Provide a minimum 1.59 mm
clearance between members and operable windows and doors.
I. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage that
accommodates supporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads of 3mm without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
J. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with permanent
resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.3 L/s/sq. m of fixed wall
area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 299
Pa.
1. Provide operable windows with permanent resistance to air leakage

complying with the overall requirements of the curtain wall.
K. Water Penetration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not
evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum
differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as
defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but
not less than 700 Pa.
L. Water leakage is defined as follows:
1. According to AAMA 501.1.
2. Uncontrolled water infiltrating system or appearing on system's normally

exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water
controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and
cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
M. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including

anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting
elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint
sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental
effects.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material

surfaces.
N. Provide glazed aluminium curtain wall system with condensation-resistance factor

(CRF) not less than 57 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1
O. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with an
average U-value of not more than 3.30 W/sq. m x K when tested according to AAMA
1503.1.
P. Sound Transmission: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with average
sound transmission loss through system of not less than 34 decibels (dB) when
tested according to ASTM E 90.

20th October 2021
Q. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including

anchorage that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other
adjacent construction.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency

must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-
submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and
capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering

responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing
glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar to those required for this Project with
not less than 10 years’ experience and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to

prepare or supervise the preparation of data for glazed aluminum curtain wall
systems, including drawings, testing program development, test-result
interpretation, and comprehensive engineering analysis that shows systems'
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glazed aluminum curtain wall

systems, including drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
C. The manufacturer will supply a site instructor to demonstrate to the installer the
correct methods and procedures relating to the assemble and installation of the
aluminum products.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed aluminum curtain wall system from
one source and by a single manufacturer.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

glazed aluminum curtain wall system and are based on the specific system indicated.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,

except with Architect's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with
performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
F. Preconstruction Testing: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent

testing agency to perform the preconstruction testing indicated.
2. Test glazed aluminum curtain wall system for compliance with requirements
specified for performance and test methods. Conduct tests using specimen
representative of proposed materials and construction including perimeter
components according to AAMA 501 recommendations.
G. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural

Welding Code--Aluminum."
1. Engage welders who have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and who are currently certified for these
processes.

20th October 2021
H. Mockups: Prior to procurement of glazed aluminum curtain wall system, construct

mockups as per attached sketches for each form of construction and finish required
to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before procurement.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition

as a standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Delete above or below. Below is applicable only where mockups are

erected as part of the building rather than separately.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and
procedures related to glazed aluminum curtain wall system including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work

performed by other trades.
2. Review structural loading limitations.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
4. Review required inspecting, testing, and certifying procedures.
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for

coping with unfavorable conditions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Contractor has to submit detailed calculations and shop drawings for the approval of
the Engineer. The design wind load to be considered as per UBC 1997 for a wind
speed of 80 mph with exposure C.
D. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed aluminum curtain wall
system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments
to other units of Work.

20th October 2021
1. For products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include

structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full
range of colors available for components with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Cutaway Sample of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of system, made from

300-mm lengths of full-size components.
G. Welder certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified in

"Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
I. Pre-construction test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating

and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of
glazed aluminum curtain wall system.
This test requirement may be waived if the manufacturer can supply independent test
reports demonstrating that the product can meet the specified criteria.
A. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, the
Contractor must guarantee dimensions on the shop drawings to allow fabrication to
proceed without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written supply warranty executed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace components of a glazed aluminum curtain wall system
that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
3. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.

weathering.
5. Failure of operating components to function normally.
6. Water leakage.
C. Warranty Period: 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion of Works.
D. The warranty must be issued by the manufacturer and be transferable to the Owner.
The warranty must cover the design, engineering, extruding, finishing and fabrication.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. SCHUCO, GERMANY
2. WICONA, GERMANY
3. TECHNAL, FRANCE
4. AL ABBAR, DUBAI
5. CNYD, CHINA
B. Fabricators and Installers
1. ALUMACO, SAUDI ARABIA
2. HASSAN ABUL, KUWAIT
3. AL KHALID ALUMINIUM, KUWAIT
4. AL ABBAR, DUBAI
5. CNYD, CHINA
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B317 / B317M.
4. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and
bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A1011 (ASTM A1011M)
for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glazing and spandrel panel as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of

black, resilient elastomeric silicone compatible glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and
shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by manufacturer.
E. Glazing sealants and fillers as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Framing system gaskets and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint
type.

20th October 2021
G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminum curtain wall system as
specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Fire safing materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
I. Insulating materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
J. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per
coat.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Structural glazing curtain walls as shown on drawing.
B. Structure: Should be extruded aluminium profiles composed of mullions and

transoms anchored by rails and adjustable brackets.
C. Glazing frames: Frame assembly shall be by crimping corner cleats. Glazing as per
glazing schedule. Frame shall not be fixed into structure and should facilitate bonding
and ventilation. Windows shall be concealed and projecting. Visible distance between
panels shall be 14mm with corner safety device.
D. Weather Proofing: Use triple EPDM gaskets with sealant for joints.
E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high-strength

aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide non-staining, nonferrous shims for
aligning system components.
F. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-

staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminum curtain wall.
1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material

and type recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 3.2 mm thick, provide
reinforcement to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk screw heads finished to match

framing members, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation

tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron,

steel inserts or Halfen inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153
requirements.
H. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-

bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by
manufacturer.
I. Galvanized steel tubes shall be inserted into Aluminium profile, if required to suit
structural calculations to be submitted by manufacturer.

20th October 2021
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate glazed aluminum curtain wall system according to Shop

Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted
joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in
Project according to Shop Drawings.
B. The design, engineering, extruding, finishing, and fabrication must be done by the
manufacturer in the country of origin.
C. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or
deformations, before finishing.
D. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection

devices.
E. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in

glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to the exterior.
F. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop Drawings,
unless otherwise indicated. Weld before finishing components. Weld in concealed
locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
G. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass
indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
H. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of plastic sheet
indicated according to plastic sheet manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
bituminous paint.
J. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to greatest
extent possible. Rigidly secure non movement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless
otherwise indicated. Assemble components to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior.
1. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of

Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.

20th October 2021
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
D. Finish: Corro-coat PE-SDF super durable powder coating in colour “satin aluminium”
or selected by Engineer.
2.06 STEEL PRIMING
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.
B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove

dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill
scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.
C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after

surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of glazed aluminum
curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Architect have been made.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and
installing glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non
movement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to
drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against
bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing

channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating
within the system to the exterior.
D. Install framing members plumb and true in alignment with established lines and
grades.
E. Install factory-assembled frame units plumb and true in alignment with established
lines and grades.
F. Install column covers plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
G. Install operable windows plumb and level, securely anchored, and without distortion.
Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to provide specified
performance and proper operation.

20th October 2021
H. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building

structure as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
I. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop Drawings,
unless otherwise indicated. Weld in concealed locations to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
J. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8

Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.
L. Install insulation materials in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of

Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install firesafing in locations indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7

Section "Building Insulation," unless otherwise indicated.
N. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain wall system to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1.5
mm; where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less
than 50.8 mm, limit offset to 12.7 mm.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 3

mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
testing indicated.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform testing

indicated.
C. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 783.
D. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for

compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at
minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design
pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," but not less than 299 Pa.
E. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23-m by-2-story minimum area
of glazed aluminum curtain wall system, test system for water penetration according
to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Architect.
F. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by
testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.

20th October 2021
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 51 13
ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work includes: Work of this section includes furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Aluminium
doors and windows.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following:-
1. Hinged doors.
2. Hinged windows
3. Fixed windows.
4. Operable hardware in conjunction with the above items.
5. Glass and glazing in conjunction with the above items.
6. Sealants, caulking, joint fillers and gaskets in conjunction with the above
items.
7. Testing
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer's specifications and

installations and other data to show compliance with these Specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all components for review by the Engineer.
Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned elevations, anchors and
other accessories required. Show glass thickness and glazing details for approval.
C. Number all doors in accordance with a plan agreed with the Engineer.
D. Samples:
1. Match with sample/colour etc.
Gulf Consult Aluminium Doors and Windows III-2/08 51 13 - 1

20th October 2021
2. Submit to the Engineer sets of samples for each type, finish and colour
required. Submit sample of the specified alloy on 300 mm lengths of
extrusion; show the maximum range or variation in colour and shade. Sample
Submittal and approval shall be for colour, texture, and gloss only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
3. Submit sample corners of door and window units with hardware,

representative of fabrication techniques and workmanship of the final
products.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Provide aluminium doors and windows manufactured by a firm specializing in their

production. Installation shall be carried out by workmen experienced in the type of
installation required.
1.04 TESTING
A. Units shall be suitable for a design wind load of 120KM/HR and shall be tested up to
severe exposure for water and air filtration or ASTM E 283, ASTM E 783, ASTM E
331 and ASTM E 1105 and certification of testing shall be provided.
B. Doors and Window units shall meet or exceed the following values. Test reports
indicating compliance shall be submitted prior to approval.
1. Air Infiltration: shall not exceed 0.046 1/Sec./lin. m of ventilator perimeter

when subjected to a static pressure drop of 30.46 kg/sq.m (80 miles/hr.).
2. Water Infiltration: No leakage shall occur during 15 minute application of 204

litres per sq. meter of window area under a static pressure of 30.46 kg/sq. m
(80 miles/hr).
3. Performance Test: The maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed
1/175 of its span when tested for performance under uniform loading in
accordance with ASTM E 330 and when the load is removed there shall be
no evidence of permanent deformation or damage.
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements including air
infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable load tests specified in
ANSI/AAMA 302.9 classification "PA-3 HP60".
B. Design, fabricate and install aluminium doors and windows so that the total, installed,
glazed unit will withstand the gravity loads and wind pressure as shown on Drawing.
C. Maximum full load deflections, normal to the plane of the wall for any member of the
door and window frame shall not exceed 1/175 of the span of the glass. Submit
engineering calculations to show maximum deflections based on full panel loads, on
installed glazed door and window units, uniformly distributed.
D. Permanent deformation, disengagement or breakage of frame members and weld or

fastener damage or failure shall not occur under loading equal to 1.5 times the design
load and pressure, positive or negative. Permanent deformation is defined as
deflection without recovery exceeding length 1000.
E. Anchorage disengagement or breakage shall not occur when installed unit is

subjected to a force equal to 2.5 times the design load.

20th October 2021
F. Make provisions at sill to drain water and condensation to exterior face of the frames.
G. Provide tight joints and effectively seal windows against water leakage and air
infiltration. Water leakage is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water, other
than condensation, on any inboard part of window, either during testing or under
actual weather conditions.
H. Design Modification: Make design modification of work shown only as may be

necessary to meet performance requirements and co-ordinate the work. Variations in
details and materials which do not adversely affect appearance, durability or strength
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
A. Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour range samples for
use in comparing against production material. Mark and code extremes of the colour
range so that these will not be installed adjacent to one another in any one unit.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Submit a warranty for a period of Ten (10) years from the date of substantial
completion that the powder coating will not develop fading or non-uniformity of colour
or shade and will not crack, peel or corrode.
B. Should the coating fail in any of the above respects, the Contractor will replace these
elements at no cost to the Company. Further the warranty shall also cover all
aluminium work of this section and its installation.
A. Before dispatch from the Works all exposed surfaces shall be protected with a
suitable low tack tape, or other means of protection recommended by the
manufacturer. The adhesion, resistance to atmospheric conditions and elasticity of
the tape shall be suited to the purpose intended.
B. If during fixing or glazing any protection is removed it must be refitted or replaced

immediately afterwards.
C. Deliver all components to project site completely identified. Store in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, above grade on dunnage, properly protected from the
weather, construction activities and other possibility of damage or loss.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified

for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality
to, or better than those specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer's
approval.
1. System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
a. SCHUCO.
b. WICONA.

20th October 2021
c. TECHNAL.
d. Or Approved Equal.
2. Fabricators and Installers
a. ALUMACO.
b. HASSAN ABUL.
c. AL KHALID ALUMINIU.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Extrusions: Shapes as shown and as required fulfilling performance

requirements, but not less than 2 mm thick and not less than 5 cm. wide, unless
otherwise shown. Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with
adequate structural characteristics, and suitable controlled alloy and temper as
recommended by aluminium manufacturer to provide required colour and colour
matching.
B. Aluminium Sheets and Plates: Sizes and minimum 2 mm thick or as required to fulfill
performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and
fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as
required.
C. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories Required to join or
Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM A36 and ASTM A283,
galvanized or, if galvanizing is not compatible with alloy or component parts, shop
painted with zinc chromate primer after cutting to size.
D. Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members required to Join or
Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: Alloys recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator to develop required strength of assembly.
E. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action with
the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval-head
countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match adjacent surfaces.
F. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation

tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized steel inserts or Halfen

inserts complying with ASTM A 123 requirements.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-

bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by
manufacturer.
H. Weather Stripping: EPDM gaskets, moulded expanded neoprene gaskets or moulded

neoprene gaskets, factory applied in an integral dovetail self-locking groove.
I. Hardware:
1. Provide hardware as indicated on the Hardware Schedule.

20th October 2021
2. All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer's Representative.
J. Glass and Glazing: See Section for GLAZING, for Specifications applicable to Glass
and Glazing system.
2.03 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS:
A. Generally:
1. Construct aluminium door, window units to the sizes and dimensions shown
on the Drawings and as specified. Doors and openable parts of the window
shall be complete with all necessary hardware including bolts.
B. Unit Construction:
1. Glazed Doors and Windows:
a. Provide framed members, fabricated with mitred joints, with corner

cleats, and reinforcing inserts to develop the full strength of the metal
and maximum rigidity in the frame assembly.
b. Fabricate doors of thickness indicated on drawings and of sections

which shall allow replacement of glass from inside without
disassembly of door stile and rails. Provide snap on extruded
aluminium glazing stops with exterior stops anchored for non-
removal.
c. Provide sound deadening filler material on inside of stiles and rails.

Clearances for door shall be 2.0 mm at jambs and heads and 6 mm
clearance above finish floor except for carpet, where the clearance
shall be 15 mm.
d. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors to receive hardware in

accordance with hardware schedule.
2. Frames, Mullions and Transoms: Mitred, Sealed rigidly and permanently

joined. Frames to be in one piece of largest size possible. Provide
intermediate support members where shown on Drawings or as required.
2.04 ALUMINIUM FINISHES:
A. Generally: Remove die markings prior to finishing operations. Where necessary to

remove die markings from any part of the work, all members must be finished by the
same process, whether or not die marking exists. Perform this work in addition to the
finish specified. Scratches, abrasions, dents and similar defects are unacceptable.
B. All aluminium works shall be corro-coat PE-SDF super durable powder coating in
colour similar to satin aluminium or as selected by the Engineer.
2.05 ALUMINIUM & GLASS (EXTERNAL) COLOURS
A. Colour of Glass: Refer Section 08 80 00.
B. It may also be noted that the Engineer will require mock-ups of different colours to be
made in order to make a final selection of the colours.

20th October 2021
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Complete the cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Use only methods
which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind weld areas smooth
before proceeding with other treatment.
B. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified.
C. Fit and assemble all work in the shop insofar as practicable. Mark and disassemble
units which are too large for shipment to project site, retaining units in sizes as large
as possible for shipment and erection.
D. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using rigidly
secured joints with hairline contact, mitred corners, unless otherwise shown.
E. Reinforce members and joints with steel or aluminium plates, bars, rods or angles for
rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance requirements. Use concealed
fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded.
F. Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous paint or other
suitable permanent separation as required to prevent galvanic action.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which the
work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so that aluminium doors and

windows will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.
B. Co-ordinate aluminium doors and windows, with the work of other trades and provide
items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the location of such
items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the final location of
doors and windows.
C. Erect the doors and windows, in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.
D. Erection Tolerances: Erect aluminium doors and windows within the following
tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb: 8 mm maximum.
2. Variation from level: 8 mm maximum.
E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the
manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut
through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material and
remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where
cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.

20th October 2021
F. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed or

otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance.
Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection, as directed.
G. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal shims
and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to
supporting structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers,
shims and other items during erection which will not stain or mark the finish of units.
H. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating of

bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
I. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material

being welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS.
Use only methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind
exposed welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of
iron or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding and grinding.
J. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed, with zinc
chromate paint.
K. Seal joints in concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.
L. Adjust ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weather
stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
A. In addition to specific protection and cleaning methods required for each component
part by the respective Sections of these Specifications and recommended by the
respective manufacturers, maintain the work throughout the construction period in a
clean and properly protected condition so that it will not be damaged at the time of
completion of the Works.
B. Carefully remove protective material and clean down aluminium doors and windows.
C. Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied and maintained
so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise impaired as a result of unequal
exposure to light and weathering conditions.
D. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
A. Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and normal curing of
sealant and glazing compounds, test for water leaks. Conduct tests in the presence
of the Engineer. Repair or replace any component, which leaks, and retest as
directed.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
B. Door Hardware, Thresholds, Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets.
1. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames
3. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames
4. Division 21 - Fire Suppression System
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) - A156 series.
B. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows.
C. NFPA 101 (National Fire Protection Association)-Life Safety Code from Fire in
Buildings and Structures.
D. NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Safety Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. UL 305 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Safety Panic Hardware.
G. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Building Materials Directory.
H. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products.
I. SID. Steel Door Institute
J. British Standard Institution (BSI):
K. BSI BS 476-31.1, Fire Tests on building Materials and structures part 31: Methods of
penetration through door sets and shutters assemblies section 31.1: Method of
measurement under Ambient Temperature Conditions (AMD 8366).
L. British Standards (BS)
BS 8300:2001 Building and Facilities –Providing Accessibility and Usability

for Handicapped People
BS EN 1935:2002 Building Hardware – Single Axis Hinges-concealed hinges
Gulf Consult Door Hardware III-2/08 71 00 - 1

20th October 2021
BS EN 12209:2003 Mechanically Operated Locks & Latches
BS EN 1125:1997 Panic Exit Devices Operated by a Horizontal Bar
BS EN 179:1998 Emergency Exit Devices Operated by a Lever handle or Push

Pad
BS EN 1154:1997 Controlled Door Closing Devices
BS EN 1303:2005 Cylinders for Locks Requirements and Test Methods
BS EN 1906:2002 Lever handles & Knob Furniture
BS 5499-5:2002 Graphic symbol and Sign – Safety signs, Inc. Fire Safety
signs.
BS 7036-1/5:1996 Safety of Power operated Doors for Pedestrian Use.
BS EN 1527:1998 Sliding & Folding Door Hardware
BS EN 1155:1997 Electrically Powered Hold Open Devices – Requirements &

Tests Methods
BS 8424:2004 Pull Handles – Requirements & Test Methods
BS EN 1158:1997 Door Coordinating Devices
BS EN 12051:2000 Door and Window Bolts
BS EN 12320:2001 Padlocks & Padlock fittings
M. Door and Hardware Federation (DHF) / Guild of Architectural Ironmongers (GAI),

Standards and regulations for Ironmongery.
N. British Wood working Federation (BWF):
1990 Edition Recommended locations for Builder’s Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1976 Edition Recommended location for Builder’s Hardware for Custom

Steel Doors and Frames
O. CE Marked, BS EN1155, BS EN1634, BS476, BS EN 1125, BS EN179, BS EN1935
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules,

catalog cuts, [electrical characteristics and connection requirements].
2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.
B. Samples:
1. Submit one sample of typical hinge, latch set, lockset, and closer, illustrating
style, color, and finish.

20th October 2021
2. Approved samples may be incorporated into Work.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication

requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Hardware Supplier: A Company specializing in supplying commercial, institutional,

type finishing door hardware with minimum 10 years’ experience
B. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employs a Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant

(AHC) to assist in the work of this section.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by [Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc.,] [testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction] as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
B. Include persons involved with installation of doors, frames, and hardware.
A. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and

installation templates, if necessary label and identify each package with door opening
code to match hardware schedule.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or

fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.
1. Provide templates or actual hardware as required to ensure proper

preparation of doors and frames.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and

expeditious manner.
C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. All hardware shall be guaranteed in writing for a minimum period of Ten (10) years
from the date of substantial completion of the Works.
B. The guarantees shall state that each and every item of hardware is guaranteed to be
free from defects in the materials and operation for the stated period and that any
defective item or items of hardware shall be replaced immediately upon notification
that any item is defective.

20th October 2021
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable for each different and for each special
hardware component.
B. Provide 3 nos. copies of catalogues for all hardware used for incorporation into
maintenance manual. Only original catalogues shall be used.
C. As per the requirement of NFPA 80, Chapter 5: Care and Maintenance, Section 5.2
Inspections, all fire rated doors, and as per the requirement of NFPA 101 Life Safety
Code, section 7.2.1.15 all egress doors to be inspected by an individual who can
demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the door,
for example the FDAI (Fire and egress Door Assembly Inspectors) citified by DHI
(Door and Hardware Institute) or other equivalent and as approved by the engineer.
Such inspection to be executed and a written record of the inspections and testing
shall be a part of maintenance instructions while handover of the completed project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers:
Item Specified Alternative-1 Alternative-2 Alternative-3
Mortise Lock Allegion & Tesa – Spain dormakaba Sargent

ECO Schulte Group
Local Agent –
Local Agent - Penta Link
ARCHMS
Door Closers Allegion & Tesa – Spain dormakaba Sargent

ECO Schulte Group
Local Agent –
ARCHMS
Exit Devices Allegion & Tesa – Spain dormakaba Sargent

ECO Schulte Group
Local Agent –
ARCHMS
Hinges Allegion & Tesa – Spain dormakaba Mc kenney

ECO Schulte Group
Local Agent –
ARCHMS
Accessories Allegion & Tesa – Spain dormakaba Pemko

ECO Schulte Group
Local Agent –
Local Agent – Penta Link
ARCHMS

20th October 2021
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners:
1. Provide concealed fastenings where ever possible. The use of self-tapping or

sheet metal screws is prohibited except for the application of flush mounted
push and kick plates.
a. Concealed Fasteners: Furnish hardware items with appropriate type

and length of screws or other fastenings suitable to ensure permanent
anchorage.
b. Exposed fasteners: Furnish hardware with countersunk Philips oval

head type screws where concealed fastening is not possible. The finish
or colour of these screws is to match that of the hardware item being
fastened.
B. Hinges:
1. General: Hinges must be installed with appropriate fixing screws. Where door
jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the width of leaf specified will not
allow the door to clear such frame or trim; furnish hinges with leaves of sufficient
width to clear. Furnish template hinges in accordance with door and frame
material required.
a. All hinges to be stainless steel minimum grade 304, unless otherwise

specified.
b. Hinge pins, except as otherwise indicated, shall be as follows:
i. Stainless steel pins.
ii. Non-rising pins.
iii. Tips: Flat button.
c. Provide sufficient hinge width to allow door to clear the trim, if the
projection of door trim prevents desired degree of opening.
d. Furnish hinges complying to BS EN Standards, equipped with two ball

bearing units and five knuckles, with CE markings / UL listed.
e. The supplier should provide the third-party grade certificate for the
hinges.
f. Concealed Hinges, as per the manufacturer.
i. Hinge Size:
1. 102 x 102 x 3 mm CE, BS EN1935
2. 102 x 89 x 3 mm CE, BS EN1935
3. 114 x 102 x 3 / 3.4 mm EN/UL listed.
2. BS EN 1935: 2002, the standard classifies hinges using the 8 digit coding
system. Each digit relates to a particular feature of the product measured
against the standard performance requirements.

20th October 2021
a. Digit 1 – Category of use, Grade 3 or 4: Heavy duty & severe duty,

hinges for use on doors as per the location which are subject to
frequent moderate & violent use. Minimum Grade 4 to be used.
b. Digit 2 – Durability, three possible grades:
Grade 3 – 10,000 test cycles
Grade 4 – 25,000 test cycles
Grade 7 – 200,000 test cycle
Minimum Grade 7 to be used.
c. Digit 3 – Door size / mass, 7 grades identified for:
Grade 1 – 20 kg
Grade 2 – 40 kg
Grade 3 – 60 kg
Grade 4 – 80 kg
Grade 5 – 100 kg
Grade 6 – 120 kg
Grade 7 – 160 kg
d. Digit 4 – Fire Resistance, two grades of fire resistance are identified:
Grade 0: not approved for use on fire/smoke door assemblies
Grade 1: suitable for use on fire/smoke door assemblies.
e. Digit 5 – Safety, all hinges are required to satisfy the essential

requirement of safety in use. Therefore, only grade 1 is identified.
f. Digit 6 – Corrosion resistance
Grade 0 - none
Grade 1 - mild
Grade 2 - moderate
Grade 3 - high
Grade 4 - very high
Grade 5 - extremely high
Minimum Grade 3 or 4 to be used.
g. Digit 7 – Security – Burglar resistance, Grade 0-1: Suitable for use on

burglar-resistant door assemblies, subject to satisfactory assessment.

20th October 2021
Grade 0 could be used if it is not a must to use on doors with high

security.
h. Digit 8 – Overall Hinge Grade, the standard identifies 14 grades based

on Usage, Test cycles and Door mass.
3. Hinge series should have demonstrated its suitability for the intended purpose,
by inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476: Part 22: 1987, on timber door
sets and steel door sets to the respective fire resistance duration required,
where the failure is clearly not due to the hinges. This evidence should be
provided by an approved third-party certification or testing body.
4. Hinges should be Warrington Certifier Certified or equivalent for 120minutes

Fire Rated on Timber door and Metal door.
C. Mortise Locksets:
1. All locks and latches:
 Shall be mortise locksets.
 Shall have cases of 1.5mm galvanized steel.
 Shall have faceplates and strike plates of 2.5mm 304 Stainless Steel.
 Shall be standardized to one size template to allow interchange of

function.
 Shall be standardized to 55 mm back set.
 Shall be standardized to 72 mm centre to centre.
 Shall have easy field reversible latches.
 With dead bolts, shall have a double throw of total 20 mm.
 With dead bolt and latch, shall have a panic function from the egress
side of a Fire door.
 With dead bolt and latch, latch to be retractable with key.
 With dead bolt and latch, lever handle only from egress side, shall
have anti-card mechanism.
2. The supplier should provide the grade certificate for the Locks.
3. BS EN 12209:2016 the standard classifies lock and latches using a 11-digit

coding system. Each digit relates to a particular feature of the product
measured against the standard performance requirements. 8 digits to be
considered positively.
a. Digit 1 – Category of use, three grades identified:
Grade 1: low frequency use – e.g. internal residential doors.
Grade 2: medium frequency of use – e.g. internal office doors.

20th October 2021
Grade 3: high frequency of use – e.g. public doors
b. Digit 2 – Durability, 12 grades identified with minimum test cycles with

or without side load of the test procedure.
Grade A = 50,000 test cycles; no load on latch.
Grade B = 100,000 test cycles; no load on latch.
Grade C = 200,000 test cycles; no load on latch.
Grade F = 50,000 test cycles; 10 N load on latch.
Grade G = 100,000 test cycles; 10 N load on latch.
Grade H = 200,000 test cycles; 10 N load on latch.
Grade L = 100,000 test cycles; 25 N load on latch.
Grade M = 200,000 test cycles; 25 N load on latch.
Grade R = 100,000 test cycles; 50 N load on latch.
Grade S = 200,000 test cycles; 50 N load on latch.
Grade W = 100,000 test cycles; 120 N load on latch.
Grade X = 200,000 test cycles; 120 N load on latch.
Minimum Grade M to be used.
c. Digit 3 – Door mass & closing force, Nine grades are identified with
maximum figures for closing force at various door masses:
Grade 1 = up to 100kg door mass; 50 N maximum closing force.
Grade 3 = above 200kg door mass or specified by the manufacturer;

50N maximum closing force.



20th October 2021
d. Digit 4 – Fire Resistance, two grades of fire resistance are identified: -
e. Digit 5 – Safety, no safety identified & grade specified, hence grade 0 is

accepted.
f. Digit 6 – Corrosion resistance & temperature, eight grades are

identified with neutral salt-spray (NSS) corrosion resistance grades,
with and without temperature resistance:
Grade 0 = no defined corrosion resistance, no temperature

requirement.
Grade A = low corrosion resistance, no temperature requirement.
Grade B = moderate corrosion resistance, no temperature

requirement.
Grade C = high corrosion resistance, no temperature requirement.
Grade D = very high corrosion resistance, no temperature

requirement.
Grade E = moderate corrosion resistance, temperature requirement

from -20ºC to +18ºC.
Grade F = high corrosion resistance, temperature requirement from -

20ºC to +18ºC.
Grade G = very high corrosion resistance, temperature requirement

from -20ºC to +18ºC.
Minimum Grade C to be used.
g. Digit 7 – Security & drill resistance, seven grades are identified with
minimum figures for requirements relating to physical attack, with or
without drilling of the lock case.
Grade 1 = minimum security and no drill resistance.
Grade 2 = low security and no drill resistance.
Grade 3 = medium security and no drill resistance.
Grade 4 = high security and no drill resistance.
Grade 5 = high security with drill resistance.
Grade 6 = very high security and no drill resistance.
Grade 7 = very high security with drill resistance.
Minimum Grade 3 to be used for internal doors.
External doors with Grade 7 to be used.

20th October 2021
h. Digit 8 – Field of application, grades of door application are identified

based on Lock Type and Door Type.
Grade B or C to be used,
i. Digit 9 – Type of key operation & locking, nine grades are identified for
differing types of key operation. The grading determines how the lock is
assessed for deadlocking requirement as shown. In addition, there is a
maximum key torque operating requirement of 1.5 Nm and a minimum
key strength requirement of 2.5 Nm.
Grade 0 = not applicable.
Grade A = cylinder lock or latch, manually locking.
Grade B = cylinder lock or latch, automatically locking.
Grade C = cylinder lock or latch, manually locking with intermediate

locking.
Grade D = lever lock or latch, manually locking.
Grade E = lever lock or latch, automatically locking.
Grade F = lever lock or latch, manually locking with intermediate

locking.
Grade G = lock or latch without key operation, manually locking
Grade H = lock without key operation, automatically locking.
Grade C to be used.
j. Digit 10 - Type of spindle operation, Five grades are identified.
Grade 0 = lock or latch without follower.
Grade 1 = lock or latch for knob or sprung lever handle operation.
Grade 2 = lock or latch for unsprung lever handle operation.
Grade 3 = lock or latch for heavy duty unsprung lever handle

operation.
Grade 4 = lock or latch for heavy duty unsprung lever handle

operation specified by the manufacturer.
Grade 2 to be used.
k. Digit 11: Key identification requirement, nine grades are identified

relating to the number of differs and levers.
Grade 0 = no requirements.
Grade A = minimum three detaining elements.
Grade B = minimum five detaining elements.

20th October 2021
Grade C = minimum five detaining elements, extended number of

differs.
Grade D = minimum six detaining elements.
Grade E = minimum six detaining elements, extended number of

effective differs.
Grade F = minimum seven detaining elements.
Grade G = minimum seven detaining elements extended number of

effective differs.
Grade H = minimum eight detaining elements, extended number of

effective differs
Grade 0 to be used.
4. Lock series should have demonstrated its suitability for the intended purpose, by
inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476:22, on timber door sets and steel
door sets to the respective fire resistance duration required, where the failure is
clearly not due to the lockset. This evidence should be provided by an approved
third-party certification or testing body.
5. Locks should be Warrington Certifire Certified or equivalent for 120minutes Fire

Rated on Timber door and Metal door.
D. Lever handles:
1. All Lever trim shall be thru-bolted for greater strength and security and more
accurate installation and comply with BS EN 1906:2012
2. All lever trim shall be Grade 304 stainless steel.
3. BS EN 1906:2016, European standard specifies the performance requirements

and test methods (i.e. durability, static strength, operating torque, corrosion,
safety, etc) for sprung and unsprung lever handles and knobs for doors on back
plates and roses. The standard has additional graded safety requirements
where a high risk of failing exists. The standard classifies door furniture by using
an 8 digit coding system.
a. Digit 1 – Category of use, Four Grades identified:
Grade 1: medium frequency, e.g. internal residential doors;
Grade 2: medium frequency e.g. internal office doors;
Grade 3: high frequency, e.g. public office doors;
Grade 4: high frequency of use on doors which are subject to

frequent violent use, e.g. football stadiums, oil rigs, barracks, public
toilets, etc.
b. Digit 2 – Durability, the tests undertaken to achieve these grades

involve the application of additional forces to the door furniture in order
to simulate the conditions of use likely to be experienced in the field.
Two grades of durability are identified:

20th October 2021
Grade 6: medium use - 100 000 cycles
Grade 7: high use - 200 000 cycles
c. Digit 3 – Test door mass, No requirement.
d. Digit 4 – Fire Resistance, four grades of fire resistance are identified: -
Grade A, A1: B, B1: C, C1 are specified and approved for fire test
certificates: Should have minimum A1 grade.
e. Digit 5 – Safety, two grades of safety are identified: -
Grade 0: normal use
Grade 1: safety application - to qualify for this grade, handles must

have high strength handle-to-plate and plate-to-door fixing and/or
handle-to-spindle fixing, such that they would withstand a person
grabbing in order to prevent falling.
f. Digit 6 – Corrosion resistance, five grades are identified according to

EN 1670:
Grade 0: no defined corrosion resistance
Grade 1: mild resistance - minimum requirement for internal use
Grade 2: moderate resistance
Grade 3: high resistance - minimum requirement for external use
Grade 4: very high resistance - recommended for use in exposed

marine atmospheres or much polluted industrial environments.
Minimum Grade 3 or 4 to be used for external doors.
Minimum Grade 2 to be used on other area.
Note: Products intended to develop a natural patina (such as bronze

or brass) are not required to comply with any requirements.
g. Digit 7 – Security, four grades are identified: -
Grade 0: not approved for use on burglary resistant doors
Grade 1: mild burglary resistance
Grade 2: moderate burglary resistance
Grade 3: high burglary resistance
Grade 4: extra high burglary resistance
Note: The main requirements include resistance to drilling, close

fitting plates or escutcheons to help protect the lock and support the
cylinder. They must be resistant to removal from the outside of the

20th October 2021
door and make provision to minimise the cylinder projection to a

maximum of 3mm.
h. Digit 8 – Type of operation, three operation types are identified: -
Type A: spring assisted furniture
Type B: spring loaded furniture
Type U: unsprung furniture
4. Lever handle type (NOT design) should have demonstrated its suitability for the
intended purpose, by inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476:22, on timber
door sets and steel door sets to the respective fire resistance duration required,
where the failure is clearly not due to the Lever handle. This evidence should be
provided by an approved third-party certification or testing body.
E. Cylinders for Locks
1. Cylinders to be:
a. Patent protected cylinder systems to be provided.
b. Patent security system should be based on non-removable security pin

imbedded directly onto the key.
c. Minimum 5 (master key) pin cylinders to be used.
d. Proposed cylinders should have the possibility to expand the number of

master key pins to at least up to 20, to allow for future expansion.
e. Proposed cylinders system should be available in both profiles Euro

and ANSI, so that the same master key system can incorporate ANSI
lock if required in future.
f. Cylinder system to have at least two hardened anti-drill pins, one in the
cylinder body and one in the cylinder plug.
g. Cylinder plug to have special PULL pins for anti-extraction.
h. Cylinder pins to have special grooves for anti-bumping and anti-picking.
i. Key to have provision for colour points to differentiate master key

levels.
j. Master keying design upon final confirmation and requirement from the
consultant/client and as per his requirement only.
2. BS EN 1303: 2015, the standard classifies cylinders using an 8-digit coding

system. Each digit refers to a particular feature of the product measured against
the Standards performance requirements.
a. Digit 1 – Category of use, one category identified:
Grade 1: keys shall resist a torque of 2.5Nm and still be usable.
b. Digit 2 – Durability, three grades are identified according to the number

of test cycles achieved:

20th October 2021
Grade 4: 25 000 cycles
c. Digit 3 – Door mass, No requirement.
d. Digit 4 – Fire Resistance, two grades of fire resistance are identified: -
e. Digit 5 – safety, No requirement.
f. Digit 6 – Corrosion and temperature resistance, four grades are

identified as follows: -
Grade 0: no corrosion or temperature resistance requirements
Grade A: BS EN 1670 Grade 3 corrosion resistance (96 hours NSS):

no temperature resistance requirement
Grade B: No corrosion resistance requirement: resistance to -

20/+80°C temperature extremes
Grade C: BS EN 1670 Grade 3 corrosion resistance (96 hours NSS):

resistance to -20/+80°C temperature extremes
Minimum Grade C to be used.
Note: No distinction is made between the inside and the outside of

either the cylinder and/or the door. On completion of the test, the
cylinder must operate using a maximum 1.5 Nm torque on the key.
g. Digit 7 – Key Security, Cylinders are classified in grades 1 to 6, where 6

is the highest.
Grade
1 2 3 4 5 6
Min. no. of effective

100 300 15,000 30,000 30,000 100,000
differs
Min. no. of movable

2 3 5 5 6 6
levers, pins, discs, etc
Coding on key could

Yes Yes No No No No
disclose combination
Torque resistance of plug 2.5 Nm 5 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm

20th October 2021
h. Digit 8 – Attack resistance grade 0, 1 & 2, where 2 is the highest
Grade
0 1 2
Resistance to drilling (net drilling time) - 3 mins 5 mins
Resistance to chisel attack (number of defined

- 30 40
blows)
Resistance to twisting attack (number of defined

- 20 30
twists)
Resistance to plug / cylinder extraction (pull

- 15 kN 15 kN
load)
Torque resistance of plug/cylinder - 20 Nm 30 Nm
i. Cylinder series should have demonstrated its suitability for the intended
purpose, by inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476:22, on timber
door sets and steel door sets to the respective fire resistance duration
required, where the failure is clearly not due to the cylinder. This
evidence should be provided by an approved third party certification or
testing body.
F. Panic Devices:
1. Furnish exit devices as indicated in the Hardware Set Schedule with utilized
installation feature to suit various door widths.
a. Proposed panic exit devices to have been cycle tested beyond the
scope of BS EN 1125-2008, requirements for a minimum for 500,000
cycles for Horizontal Configuration. This evidence should be provided
by an approved third party certification or testing body.
b. Only Touch Pad Panic Exit Device to be provided, push bars are not
acceptable.
c. Touch pad of the Panic Exit Device should extend to at least 65% of the
full length, so as to maximize the contact area for the push release
mechanism.
d. Panic Exit Device latch to have a dead latch mechanism to prevent

forcible retraction.
e. Panic Exit Device to have an orbital latching mechanism where the

latch swings open opposite to the pushing force, so as to prevent the
possibility of the latch jamming in an extreme panic situation.
2. BS EN 1125: 2008, the standard provides details on product types, classification

by use, test cycles, door mass, corrosion resistance, as well as definitions,
product performance requirements, test apparatus, test methods and marking
of products. The emphasis for products covered by this standard is on safe exit
rather than security.

20th October 2021
a. The main purpose of the performance requirements of this standard

is to give safe and effective escape through a doorway with minimum
effort and without prior knowledge of the device, i.e. for locked doors
on escape routes where panic situations can be foreseen.
b. The standard classifies panic exit devices by using a 10-digit coding

system. Each digit refers to a particular feature of the product
measured against the standards performance requirements.
c. Digit 1 – Category of use, only one category is identified:
Grade 3: high frequency of use
d. Digit 2 – Number of test cycles, two categories of durability are defined:
Minimum Grade 7 to use
e. Digit 3 – Test door mass, three categories of test door mass are
identified:
Grade 5: up to 100 kg
Grade 6: up to 200 kg
Grade 7: over 200 kg
Minimum Grade 6 to used.
f. Digit 4 – Fire resistance, three categories of fire door resistance are

identified:
Grade 0: Not approved for use on fire/smoke door assemblies
Grade A: Suitable for use on smoke door assemblies
Grade B: Suitable for use on fire/smoke door assemblies
Minimum Grade B to used.
g. Digit 5 – Safety, all panic and emergency devices have a critical safety
function therefore only the top grade - 1 - is identified.
h. Digit 6 – Corrosion resistance, two grades of corrosion resistance are

identified according to EN 1670:
Grade 3: high resistance (96 salt spray hours)
Grade 4: very high resistance (240 salt spray hours)
Minimum Grade 3 to used.
i. Digit 7 – Security, only one category of security is identified:
j. Digit 8 – Projection of device, two grades are identified relating to the

projection of the device from the door face:

20th October 2021
Grade 1: projection up to 150 mm (large projection)
Grade 2: projection up to 100 mm (standard projection)
k. Digit 9 – Type of device, two categories are identified:
Type A: panic device with push bar operation
Type B: panic device with touch bar operation
Type A or B could be used.
l. Digit 10 – Field of application, two categories are identified:
A: Outward opening - Single & double exit doors; active & inactive
leaf
B: Outward opening - Single exit door only
C: Outward opening - Double exit door; inactive door
Minimum Type A to be used.
Panic Exit Device series should have demonstrated its suitability for the
intended purpose, by inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476:22, on timber
door sets and steel door sets to the respective fire resistance duration required,
where the failure is clearly not due to Panic Exit Device. This evidence should
be provided by an approved third party certification or testing body.
Panic device should be Warrington Certifire Certified for 120minutes Fire Rated
on Timber door and Metal door.
G. Door Closers and Floor Springs:
1. Provide door closers and floor springs as indicated in the Hardware Set
schedule. Hold open arms / parallel arms to be provided as per the requirement.
a. The spring power of the closer shall permit adjustment to suit any width
of door.
b. Furnish floor door springs with statically controlled closing speed with
back check. Spindles of floor springs should be interchangeable with
extensions to meet the required tolerances on bottom of doors.
i. Floor springs shall be listed for fire rated door and confirm to
BS standard.
ii. Provide stainless steel cover to the body of door closers and
floor springs as shown to the Hardware Schedule.
2. Furnish Door Closers and floor springs complying to BS EN 1154: 1997, the
standard includes a wide range of products than BS 6459 and covers all
controlled surface mounted, concealed, transom mounted closers as well as
both single and double action floor springs.

20th October 2021
a. The standard classifies door closers using the 6-digit coding system.
Each digit relates to a particular feature of the product measured
against the standards performance requirements.
b. Digit 1 – Category of use, for all internal and external doors for use by
the public:
Grade 3: For closing doors from at least 105° open
Grade 4: For closing doors from 180° open
c. Digit 2 – Number of test cycles, Grade 8: 500 000 test cycles. Only one
test duration is identified for door closing devices manufactured to this
standard.
d. Digit 3 – Test door mass/size, 7 test door mass grades and related
door closer power sizes are identified. Where a door closer provides a
range of power sizes both the minimum and the maximum sizes shall
be identified.
Door Closer Recommended door leaf Test door mass kg

power size width max. ( mm )
1 <750 20
2 850 40
3 950 60
4 1100 80
5 1250 100
6 1400 120
7 1600 160
Note 1: The door widths given are for standard installations. In the
case of unusually high or heavy doors, windy or draughty conditions,
or special installations, a larger power size of door closer should be
used.
Note 2: The test door masses shown are only related to door closer
power sizes for the purpose of the test procedure. These test door
masses are not intended to indicate maximum values for actual use.
i. Digit 4 – Fire resistance, two grades of fire behaviour are

identified for door closing devices manufactured to this
standard:
Grade 0: Not suitable for use on fire/smoke door assemblies
Grade 1: Suitable for use on fire/smoke door assemblies
ii. Digit 5 – Safety, Grade 1: All door closers are required to

satisfy the essential requirement of safety in use contained in

20th October 2021
the Construction products directive issued by the EU.

Therefore, only grade 1 is identified.
iii. Digit 6 – Corrosion resistance, five grades of corrosion

resistance are identified according to EN 1670:
Grade 0: No defined corrosion resistance
Grade 1: Mild resistance
Grade 2: Moderate resistance
Grade 3: High resistance
Grade 4: Very high resistance
e. Door Closer series should have demonstrated its suitability for the
intended purpose, by inclusion in satisfactory fire tests to BS 476:22, on
timber door sets and steel door sets to the respective fire resistance
duration required, where the failure is clearly not due to Door Closer.
This evidence should be provided by an approved third-party
certification or testing body.
f. Door Closers should be Warrington Certifire Certified for 120minutes

Fire Rated on Timber door and Metal door.
3. Flush Bolts: BS EN-12051-2000
a. All flush bolts are to be furnished in pairs. Furnish extension flush bolts
with minimum length of 300mm for all rods except where any door is
higher than 2100, furnish the top bolt to a length sufficient to locate the
flush bolt operator no more than 1800mm above the finished floor.
Furnish “dust-proof sockets” for bottom bolts.
b. Furnish flush bolts as indicated in the Hardware sets schedule and

complying to British Standard as follows:
i. Flush Bolt: BS EN 12051:2000
ii. Dust Proof Strike: BS EN 12051:2000
4. Door Stop:
a. Furnish door stops as indicated in the Hardware set schedule and

complying with British Standard.
5. Pull Handles:
a. Furnish door pull bars as indicated in the hardware set schedule and
complying with BS 8424:2003 and material to be of anti-corrosive high
grade stainless steel Grade 304.
6. Kick Plates and Mop Plates:
a. Kick plates and Mop plates as indicated in the hardware set schedule
and complying to British Standard. The thickness will be 1.5mm.

20th October 2021
7. Toilet Sign:
a. Furnish stainless steel finish sex indicator male/female/handicap, size

150 x 100mm or 76 mm dia Or 100 MM dia, in material and finish as
indicated in the hardware set schedule and complying with British
Standard.
8. Automatic Drop Seals, Smoke Seals, Weather strips, Silencer:
a. Door manufacturer to furnish concealed automatic drop seals to bottom

edge of doors equal approved for fire, sound proof and external doors,
complying with British standard, and in compliance with their door test
certificates.
b. Furnish Smoke Seals to Perimeter and Meeting Stiles complying to BS

476 Part 20, 22 or BS EN 1634-1.
c. Furnish door hinges locks and door closers with intumescent fire
protection kits for the smoke stop & fire rated doors, if as an additional
requirement, which is not mandatory. The installation must comply with
specifications and must be independently tested by recognized
laboratories and comply with EN 1634-1, BS 476 part 22-1987 and
smoke element seals comply with the requirement of BS 476 part 31.
d. Concealed and Surface mounted door bottoms to be used for the Fire
rated doors and as required by the engineer as a variation.
e. Weather Strips, Smoke seals, Astragals etc has to be provided as per

the requirement, by the door manufacturer.
f. Door Silencers to be fixed on all metal frames, to be supplied by the

door manufacturer.
9. Door Coordinator-BS-EN 1158:1997, to be added on the doors as per the

requirement and upon requested by the site engineer as a variation.
H. HARDWARE FINISHES
1. Hardware shall be of the best grade satin stainless steel grade 304 where
possible, unless indicated otherwise.
2. All sizes of material given in the hardware sets are only for guidance. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the exact size and weight of
hardware items to ensure proper function in each case.
3. Produce finishes to exactly matching with Engineer’s selected sample(s).

Reduce variance in hue in the colour of each finish, as much as possible,
whether the base material is cast, forged or stamped, or when plating is
applied over steel, brass or bronze. Finishes of the same designation that
comes from 2 or more sources shall match when the items are viewed at arm
length and approximately 600 mm apart. Unless otherwise specified, match
the finish of each item of hardware with the finish selected for lock sets &
latches.
I. HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS
1. Mounting heights shall generally be in accordance with the “Recommended

Locations for Builders Hardware” published by the Doors and Hardware
Institute (DHI) and to the approval of the Engineer.

20th October 2021
2. The following mounting heights shall apply throughout the work, unless
otherwise shown. The same could be accepted as per the site requirements.
a. Lock Sets and Latches: 950mm to centre of handle from floor.
b. Butt Hinges: 305mm to center of lowest hinge from floor, 184mm to

center of upper hinge from top of door, space other hinges equally
between lower and upper hinges.
c. Door Pulls: 1120mm finished floor to centre of pull, centre line in

125mm from edge of flush doors, and centered on stile of narrow stile
glass doors.
d. Deadlocks: Centre line of cylinder to align with centre line of cylinder for
lock sets, unless indicated otherwise.
e. Push Bar: 1050mm finished floor to centre of push bar.
f. Push Plate: 1120mm finished floor to centre of plate through mounted

to pulls.
g. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 1650 to 1800mm above

finished floor, bottom bolt 250 to 300mm above finished floor.
J. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Coordinate the application of hardware items with door and frame details and
with methods of fastening as hereinafter specified.
2. Adaptation of Hardware Items: Where the type of hardware specified is not

adaptable to the finished size of members requiring hardware; submit an item
having a similar operation and quality to the Engineer for review.
3. Templates: Make finish hardware to templates, with wood and/or machine

screws as applicable to door and frame details. Furnish templates and
schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other trades requiring same,
so that doors and frames can be cut, reinforced and prepared in the shop to
receive hardware. Use template hinges conforming to BS standards to
establish location of holes for each size of hinge.
4. Try to avoid the names of the manufacturers on exposed parts of the

hardware, as a part of publicity.
5. Single Source: Try to use only the products of one manufacturer for each type
of hardware specified.
6. The Contractor should be responsible for the accuracy of the quantities,

sizes, finish and proper hardware to be furnished whether specifically
mentioned or not and shall be responsible for determining all details such as
hand of doors, type of locks, standards required etc.
K. LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING SYSTEM
1. Provide 5 change keys per cylinder for keyed individual cylinders.
2. Number of Change keys for keyed alike cylinders to be minimized for the
ease of key management.

20th October 2021
3. A master key system has to cover all door types such as wood, hollow metal,
glass doors and aluminum doors. The system has to be designed by the
manufacturer in accordance with the Employer’s and Engineer’s requirement.
4. Master keyed lock cylinders shall be 8 pin under the same source euro profile
type or equal and approved quality.
5. Provide keys of nickel silver or other equal and approved material.
6. Provide 3 keys for each master key level.
7. Provide temporary cylinders or construction keys as necessary for use during

construction period only.
8. After completion of installation and prior to handing over to the Employer’s

representative, call the manufacturers' local authorized representative who
shall organize the installation of the approved master key system. The master
keys must be handed over direct to the Employer’s representative by the
manufacturer's local authorized representative and a receipt obtained.
Furnish the receipt to the Contractor as evidence of completing the obligation.
9. Provide steel key cabinet with cabinet lock having a capacity of 25 percent in
excess of the total quantity of master keyed cylinders.
10. On handing over, each key shall be fitted to a colored nylon key tag with clear
labeling of cylinder/key marking. On handing over, all individual keys shall be
placed on the hooks inside the key cabinet except the master keys, which
shall be handed over in a sealed envelope.
2.03 FINISHING
A. Finish shall be as specified in the Hardware Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify electric power is available to power operated devices and is of correct

characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the
applicable hardware portions of these specifications. Store the hardware items in a
locked space to prevent loss.
B. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit locks

and latch in their respective doors and remove before painting. Reinstall after painting
of doors in completed. Upon completion, adjust and lubricate hardware for proper
operation.
C. Instruct Employer’s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware as

per the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

20th October 2021
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
ssubstrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect the installation and certify the
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 80 00
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Glazing materials for exterior and interior openings
2. Unframed mirrors.
1. Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames
C. Glass included in work of other Sections, but specified for continuity
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. C 162 Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products.
2. C 509-94 Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing

Material
3. C 1036 Standard Specifications for Flat Glass
4. C 1048 Heat Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated

& Uncoated Glass
5. C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural

Flat Glass
6. C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
7. C 1281 Standard Specification for Performed Tape Sealants

for Glazing Applications
8. C 1294 Standard Test Method for Compatibility of Insulating

Glass Edge Sealants with Liquid Applied Glazing
Materials.
9. C 1503 Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror
10. E 119-98 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction &

Materials
11. E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air

Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
Gulf Consult Glass and Glazing III-2/08 80 00 - 1

20th October 2021
and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences

Across the Specimen
12. E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of

Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, Doors and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
13. E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
14. E 546-88 (1995) Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units in Vertical Position
15. E 773 Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units
16. E 774-97 Sealed Insulating Glass Units
17. E 1332 Standard Classification for Determination of

Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class
18. E 1996 Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact
Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris
in Hurricanes.
19. E 2112 Standard Practice for installation of Exterior

Windows, Doors and Skylights.
20. E 2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit

Performance and Evaluation.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. Z 97.1-84 (1994) Glazing Material
C. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):
1. 16 CRF 1201 Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials
D. Glass Association of North America (GANA)
1. Glazing Manual, 1997 or latest edition
E. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
F. UL 9 Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
G. UL 10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests for Door Assemblies
H. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA)
1. AAMA/NWWDA 101 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminium, Vinyl (PVC)

and Wood Windows and Glass Doors
2. AAMA 501 Methods of Test for Exterior Walls

20th October 2021
3. AAMA 502 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing, Windows,

and Sliding Glass Doors.
4. AAMA 503 Voluntary Specification for Field-testing and Metal

Storefronts Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing
Systems.
5. AAMA 1600 Voluntary Specification for Skylights
6. AAMA JS-1 Joint Sealants
7. AAMA CW-11 Design Wind Loads and Boundary Layer Wind

Tunnel Testing
8. AAMA CW-12 Structural Properties of Glass
9. AAMA GAG-1 Glass and Glazing
10. AAMA TSGG Structural Glazing Guidelines for Aluminium Framed

Skylights
A. Glass Statistical Factor (Safety Factor): Glass thicknesses are indicated for
convenience of detailing only and shall be confirmed by the Contractor and glass
manufacturer. Provide glass thicknesses required for size openings shown so the
probability of breakage at the design wind pressure and other Code loads will not be
less stringent than the ratios and safety factors (S.F.) listed below. Glass
manufacturer to provide, on request, data substantiating glass breakage if such data
is not available as manufacturer’s published data. Lower Safety Factors will not be
considered unless glass manufacturer specifically recommends, in writing, a lower
S.F.
1. Vertical Glass: Glass other than “Sloped Glass”. Not to exceed 8 lights per
1,000 lights (S.F. = 2.5 minimum)
B. Design wind speed shall be 100 miles/hr (160 km/h), 3 seconds gust wind speed,
exposure D and as per IBC standard for flexible building.
C. Glass shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1036, quality q3 unless otherwise
specified. Heat treated glass shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM C1048.
Tempered glass shall confirm to ANSI Z97.1-984. All heat treating shall be by the
horizontal process, and processed in such a manner as installed on the building.
D. Insulating glass shall comply to the following standards:
1. E773 test method for seal durability of sealed insulating glass units.
2. E774 specification for seal insulating glass units
3. E546 test method for frost point of sealed insulating glass units
4. E576 test method for Dew / Frost of sealed insulating glass units vertical
position.
E. Deflection: At design live load, glass deflection at center of pane not to exceed the
lessor of either:
1. 19mm or as required by the glass manufacturer

20th October 2021
A. Qualifications: Glazier must be experienced in cutting and installation of glass: must

have plant, equipment, and personnel capable of performing the work; must be
approved by Engineer.
B. Allowable Tolerances: Thicknesses of glass specified are nominal; provide glass

manufactured to tolerances listed in GANA manual.
C. Safety Glass: Product complying with ANSI A97.1 and testing requirements of 16
CFR part 1201 for Category II materials. Conforming products to be permanently
marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or other agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Such markings to be located with the
lower 50 mm of lites.
D. Suitability of Products: Glass thickness and physical properties indicated are to be

confirmed by Contractor as being adequate and structurally substantial for the
conditions and locations of their intended use as determined by the Code(s)
governing the Work references listed herein. Any glass considered inadequate,
lacking sufficient physical qualities, or other reasons, which may pose a hazardous
condition, should be upgraded as required and as approved by the Engineer.
E. Component Compatibility: Contractor to confirm chemical compatibility of all glazing

components to the extent that the various sealants used in the manufacturing and
installation processes do not adversely affect any of the following:
1. Seal of insulating glass units
2. Finish on aluminum framing specified elsewhere
3. Setting blocks, shims, and accessories
4. Coatings on glass
F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the following
1. Code
2. CPSC 16 CFR 120l
3. ANSI Z97.1
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Contractor to guarantee work under this Section against defects of materials,

fabrication and installation. Defects include, but not limited to:
1. Edge separation, discoloration, or loss of transparency
2. Loss of seal in the insulating units
3. Loss of weather tightness in exterior glazing
4. Peeling, cracking or deterioration of coatings or films
5. Silver spoilage on mirrors
B. Defective units to be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner

20th October 2021
C. Warranty Periods: Ten (10) years warranty from the date of substantial completion of
Works for all double glazing units including 10 years warranties for:
1. Reflective and Low-E Coating
2. Laminated Glass.
3. Unframed Mirrors.
4. Seals on insulating units.
5. Weather tightness.
D. Original Glass Certificate of origin: Submit original glass certificate of origin for all
glasses in this Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Primary glass product from one of the following:
1. Intraco U.A.E. Limited
2. Glastrosch
3. Pilkington
4. Cardinal
5. Saint Gobian
B. Glass coaters and processors
1. Gulf Glass Industries
2. Zamil Glass
C. Manufacturers themselves are also eligible for coating and processing the specified
glass.
D. Fire Rated Glass Manufacturers:
1. Asahi Glass Co.
2. Central Glass Co., Ltd
3. Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.
4. Pilkington Glass Ltd.
E. Laminated Safety Glass Manufacturers:
1. Vetrotech – Saint Gobain

20th October 2021
2.02 GLASS PROPERTIES
A. General:
1. Thickness: 6mm unless thicker glass is specified or a thicker glass is

recommended by glass manufacturer.
2. Types: Glass as indicated here and by “type” on drawings. See GLAZING

SCHEDULE and WINDOW SCHEDULE as detailed in drawings and
elsewhere.
Description Detail
CHARACTERISTICS 6MM GLASTROSCH
SILVERSTAR
COMBI NEUTRAL 51/28 T ON
CLEAR (#2)
16MM AIRSPACE
6MM CLEAR
16MM AIRSPACE
6MM GLASTROSCH
SILVERSTAR
ZERO NG T ON CLEAR (#5)
VISIBLE LIGHT
TRANSMISSION (%) 43
REFLECTION - OUT (%) 18
REFLECTION - IN (%) 22
SOLAR ENERGY
TRANSMISSION (%) 17
REFLECTION - OUT (%) 38
U-VALUE
SUMMER (BTU/HR/SQ.FT/F) 0.14
(W/SQ.M/K) 0.80
SOLAR HEAT GAIN CO - 0.21
EFFICIENT
SHADING CO - EFFICIENT 0.24
3. All glass to be suitable for conditions. See QUALITY ASSURANCE in Part 1

above.
4. Clear Glass: Must comply with ASTM C-1036
5. Laminated Glass: Must comply with ASTM C 1172
6. Tempered Glass: Must comply with ASTM C 1048
7. Insulated Glass: Must comply with ASTM E 2190
8. Translucent Glass: U-Valve 0.30 W/ m2 K; Light Transmission 20%;
• ASTM E 1886 and E 1996 Hurricane Standard
• ASTM E 331 Water Absorption

20th October 2021
• ASTM E 283 Air Leakage
• ASTM E 330 Structural Performance
9. Fritted Glass: Must Comply with ASTM C 824; Ceramic frit roller coatings on
two (2) surfaces.
10. Glass with PVB Interlayer: Must meet requirements for ASTM F 1233: Forced
Entry Testing and UL 972. PVB (Polyvinyl Butyral) thickness – 1.50 mm;
Colour Blue and /or others as indicated.
11. Frosted Glass: Glass produced by using high velocity air to spray a stream of
hard, abrasive particles against glass-surface giving a frosted appearance,
with silk screen 80.
12. Mirror Glass: Must comply with the standard specification for silvered Flat
Glass Mirror, ASTM C 1503.
13. Plain White Glass: Pilkington Optiwhite – Low Iron Glass or equivalent
meeting the requirements.
14. Laminated Safety Glass: Must comply with EN-14449
2.03 GLAZING MATERIALS & ACCESSORIES
A. Provide the following materials for setting glass in openings as indicated on drawings.
B. Setting Accessories:
1. Blocks: Resilient neoprene or EDPM blocks designed for setting glass and
must be compatible with the secondary seal of the IG unit. Chemically
compatible w/sealant used. Durometer hardness as follows unless otherwise
recommended by glass manufacturer or GANA.
a. Setting Blocks: 85 +/- 5, Shore A durometer
b. Edge Blocks: 65 +/- 5, Shore A durometer
c. Spacers: Resilient accessories designed for positioning glass in

rabbets; closed cell neoprene conforming to requirements of ASTM
C509, Grade 4, chemically compatible with sealant used.
C. Gaskets and Tape:
1. Continuous black neoprene or clastomeric glazing gasketing compatible with

framing system and suitable for exterior use.
2. Glazing tape as recommended by manufacturer
D. Glazing Sealants: Provide the following glazing sealants. Color as selected by

Engineer
1. Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning “999” or GE Silglaze 2400
2. Acrylic Sealant: DAP “One-Part Acrylic”, Pecora “60+Unicrylic”, “Mono”, or

approved. Self-priming, one-part, nonsag acrylic sealant, except that sealant
for heel bead of insulating glass, shall be as recommended by the glass
manufacturer

20th October 2021
3. Structural Glazing: One-part rubber silicone by Dow or GE as recommended

by the glass manufacturer and suitable for application, including wind
loading.
a. Translucent or black as selected by Engineer.
E. Mirror Supports:
1. Clips: Satin finish stainless steel

a. Top: No.318
b. Bottom: No. 306 typical: No. 309 if required
2. Mastic: “Mirro-Mastic”
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Cut glass to accurate sizes and shapes as indicated on drawings; allow edge
clearance and tolerances in accordance with GANA recommendations, unless
B. Edges: Factory-cut and factory-form edges for butt-glazed, heat tempered, and
insulating glass; provide ground edges for exposed glass edges including unframed
mirrors; provide drilled holes, notches, and other special fabrication of finishing
techniques, unless otherwise approved. Cut and form edges of other glass carefully
to furnish clean accurate edges.
1. Butt-Glazed (Structural Sealant) Systems: All work in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Edges exposed to air: Polished finish
b. Edges receiving sealant: “Suede” finish
c. Concealed edges: Factory option
d. Joint width: 10 mm minimum; 11 mm maximum at staggered glass
and 13 mm maximum at straight glass
C. Labels:
1. Permanent: Except as required by code for identification or fire-rated or

safety glass, no permanent labels shall occur on visible portions of glass.
2. Temporary: Provide labels for installation and product identification purposes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install glass in openings where noted on drawings in accordance with GANA

recommendations, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
B. Preparation: Verify that frames to receive glazing are square and true, that perimeter
Clearances are sufficient to prevent “point loading”, and that surfaces are clean, dry,
and ready to receive glazing materials. Verify that sash corners are weather tight and
that sills are weeped to the outdoors. Remove all protective coatings from framing
surfaces.

20th October 2021
1. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass; place at
quarter points, or if approved equidistant from center to within 6” of edges.
Size neoprene blocks to limit load from glass weight of 103 kPa but in no
case shorter than 101 mm.
2. Corner Seal: Apply bead of sealant at exterior sill frame corners completely
sealing frame corners.
C. Glass Positioning: Center glass in rabbets and position so as to maintain clearances

on all sides, indoors and out in accordance with GANA recommendations; shim as
required to position against fixed stops and frame bars. Provide edge blocks
permanently fixed to framing at locations recommended by GANA; allow nominal
3mm clearance between blocks and glass.
D. Butt-Glazing: All work in accordance with manufacturer’s written specifications and

recommendations.
E. Mirrors:
1. Provide minimum 2 clips both top and bottom of each mirror, securely fasten
to wall.
2. Provide intermediate support with mastic spots.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 81 13
DECORATIVE GLASS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Decorative glass including the following:
1. Interior Dichroic Glass
2. Laminated glass with color interlayer.
A. Section 08 80 00 - Glass and Glazing.
B. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealant.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International
1. ASTM C 1036 Specification for Flat Glass
2. ASTM C 1048 Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
3. ASTM C 1172 Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
4. ASTM E-774-Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units where insulating
glass is specified.
5. ASTM C1172–Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
augmented by Vivid Glass inspection guidelines for laminated glass, and
level CBA rated in accordance with ASTM E-773–Test Method for Seal
Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units
B. ANSl - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI Z-97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test Used in
Buildings
2. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials,
Category I and II.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each product specified, including but
not limited to:
1. Performance characteristics.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
5. Cleaning methods.
B. Shop Drawings: For decorative glass. Show fabrication and installation details.
C. Fabricator's Certification: Submit fabricator's certification acceptable to glass
manufacturer.
Gulf Consult Decorative Glass III-2/08 81 13–1

20th October 2021
D. Verification Samples: For each glass product specified except clear uncoated glass,
two 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300 mm) samples representing actual product types,
thicknesses and coatings specified.
A. Obtain all products in this section from a single Manufacturer with a minimum of 5
years’ experience.
B. Installer: Installation shall be performed by a trained and qualified installer,
specialized and experienced in work required for this project.
A. Delivery: Deliver glass in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage: Store glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Store glass in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
Protect from damage.
C. Handling: Handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall provide warranty for a period of Ten (10) years from the
date of substantial completion, against any defect or damage of work. Any
such detection within the warranty period shall oblige the Contractor to repair
and /or replace the work up to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Forms+Surfaces
B. Mirodec Gulf Glass Industries L.L.C
C. 3M Company – Commercial Solutions Division [CSD].
D. Gold Ray Glass.
2.02 GLASS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.

20th October 2021
2.03 DICHROIC GLASS

1. Dichroic glass shall be 6 mm thick or as shown on the drawings/finishing
schedule.
2. Item/Collection – Orange Dichroic Glass.
3. Reflectance – 30.07% (Coating Film Side) and 27.68% (Glass Side).
4. Transmittance - 68.82%.
5. Technical Data:
a. Glass shall be as per ANSI 97.1
b. Glass shall be as per 16 CFR 1 20 1
6. Product Reference Codes:
COLOUR CODE DESIGN ELEMENT
Orange Dichroic 6mm D1-GL Tempered
2.04 LAMINATED GLASS WITH COLOUR INTERLAYER

A. Material - ViviChrome Chromis Laminated Glass
1. Configuration: View double side
2. Color: Mirror Mist
3. Finish: Opalex
4. Processing: polished edges
5. Overall Nominal Thickness: 8.0 mm
6. Fire rating: ViviChrome Chromis glass is Class A fire rated in accordance
with ASTM designation E84-09, standard test method of surface burning
characteristics of building materials. The foregoing test procedure is
comparable to UL 723, ANSI/NFPA No. 255, and UBC No. 8-1.
B. Associated Components
1. Top Lite
a. Type: Annealed
b. Thickness: 3.0 mm
c. Class: Low Iron
C. Bottom Lite
a. Type: Annealed
b. Thickness: 3.0 mm
c. Class: Low Iron
D. Interlayer
a. Design: Manufactured by VividGlass, a Forms+Surfaces company.
b. Thickness: 2 mm.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
1. Prepare openings and substrates using the methods recommended by the
manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project
conditions.
2. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer in
writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation
tolerances and conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set decorative-glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern,
draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
B. Set decorative glass in locations indicated on Drawings. Install glass with hardware
and accessories according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions. Attach
hardware securely to mounting surfaces and building structure.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean glass promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove labels from glass surface.
C. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed glass from damage during construction.
B. Protect installed glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and
vandalism.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 08 91 00
LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Louvers: Fixed, extruded-aluminum wall louvers
B. Related Sections
3. Division 23 - HVAC Works
4. Division 26 - Electrical Works
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA
501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are
horizontal. C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades; i.e., the axes of the
blades are vertical.
C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and
drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away
from opening.
D. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain
performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color
finish.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation
procedures.
D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-
operated louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable
NEMA standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages
showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
Gulf Consult Louvers III-2/08 91 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles,
angles, and spacing.
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of
preventing water intrusion.
2. Show mullion profiles and locations.
3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for motorized
adjustable louvers.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and
seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing
compliance with performance requirements specified.
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue
caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and
anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the
building.
1. Wind Loads: As prescribed by Latest Standards Code.
C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg C.
E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements
specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to
those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum ten (10) years of documented experience.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field
measurements before fabrication.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Schuco, Germany
B. Wicona Genrmany
C. Al-Abrar, Dubai
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319.
D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless
2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel
fasteners.
3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of
louvers.
E. Post installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion
anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6
times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and
handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-
fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting
blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.
2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous
vertical assemblies are indicated.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and
frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Exterior flange unless otherwise indicated.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than
recommended by manufacturer, or 1830 mm o.c., whichever is less.

20th October 2021
1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully

recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds
fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade
splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded
blades.
G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.
H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly
makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: Match Engineer’s sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment
with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted
to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint
fillers, as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore
finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be
refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire
unit or provide new units.

20th October 2021
F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in

contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and
galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating
surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver
installation progresses, where weather tight louver joints are required. Comply
with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver
installation.
A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully
functioning units that comply with requirements.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil
accumulate during construction period.
C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no
evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as
determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches
color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 9
Finishes
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes : Work of this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
1. Metal stud wall framing.
2. Framing for suspended ceiling
3. Fire rated area separation walls and ceilings.
4. Acoustic insulation (Sound attenuation Blanket).
5. Joint treatment and accessories.
6. Gypsum ceilings Plain and Decorative.
7. Moisture resistant gypsum board for wet area ceilings.
sections with the work of this section. Related works to be coordinated and used in
conjunction and used in conjunction with this specification includes but is not limited
to:
2. Section 07 84 00 - Fire stopping
4. Section 08 31 13 - Access Door and Panel
5. Section 09 22 16 - Non Structural Metal Framing
7. Division 23 - Related Sections for HVAC
8. Division 26 - Related Sections for Electrical Light Fittings

etc.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 423 - Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
B. ASTM C 523 - Test Method for Light Reflectance of Acoustical Materials by

the Integrating Sphere Reflectomer.
C. ASTM C 635 - Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
Gulf Consult Gypsum Board Assemblies III-2/09 21 16 - 1

20th October 2021
D. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.
E. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Air-Borne Sound

Transmission loss of Building Partitions.
F. BS CP 290 - Suspended ceiling and linings of Dry Construction using

metal fixing systems.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according
to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 9

sq. m in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed

locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall

coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 300-mm- long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Do not install
interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

20th October 2021
B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that
are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARDS
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum

board indicated and whichever is more stringent. For details, follow Legend of
Finishes and Drawings. Obtain gypsum boards, trim accessories, adhesives and joint
treatment products from a single manufacturer or from the manufacturers
recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. For all sizes, color,
finishes etc. refer to drawings and legend of finishes.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS FOR CEILING
A. Grid: ASTM C635, light, intermediate, heavy duty, non-fire rated exposed T / one
direction concealed T and concealed H and T paired access downward access
removable T concealed Z concealed T metal pan T; components: die cut and
interlocking.
B. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate, fire rated to 1½ hour assembly two directional
concealed components die cut and interlocking.
C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars clips splice edge moulding, hold down clips required
for suspended grid system.
D. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating.
E. Grid Finish: Color as selected.
F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized primed steel; size and type to suit
application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and
electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.
2.03 GYPSUM BOARD WALL & CEILING MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board: conforming to the following:
1. Size and Composition : Gypsum board, plane and decorated as

shown in the drawings:
i. Conforming to ASTM C-36 hour min.

fire rating.
ii. Conforming to ASTM C630 water

resistant gypsum board.
2. Surface Finish : as shown on the drawings and schedule or

as approved by the Engineer.

20th October 2021
3. Thickness : 12.5 mm thick gypsum board panel.
4. Light reflectance : 75 percent
5. Fire Hazard Clarification : Non-combustible
6. Surface Colour : White or as selected
7. Grid : For joint less gypsum board wall & ceiling

use-concealed grid as per Engineer’s
approval.
2.04 MANUFACTURERS AND FABRICATORS
A. Gypsum Board Manufacturers :
1. Styloffice
2. Kanuf
3. Kuwait Gypsum Manufacturing Co., Shuwaikh Industrial Area
4. National Gypsum Co., Saudi Arabia
B. Fabricators :
1. Sadeer Trading and Contracting Co., Kuwait
2. Al Sayer Trading & Contracting, Kuwait
3. Al Intisar Trading & Contracting Co., Kuwait
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Corner bead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint

compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

20th October 2021
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish

materials specified.
2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound

and setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing

panel manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation

standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel
members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.

20th October 2021
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane

facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured
from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements

of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-
metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install runner channels at floor (or top of wall) and ceiling accurately align according
to partition layout.
C. Install steel studs vertically at 400mm to centers indicated on drawings and fix studs
to runners by screwing or crimping.
D. Splice studs where necessary by nesting and lap a minimum of 200mm, fix with
minimum of one (1) screw per stud flange.
E. Where openings occur in metal stud walls, reinforce and frame openings to
adequately carry loads. Studs on each side of openings shall be extended from the
floor to ceiling. Erect track at head (also sills, if required) to accommodate
intermediate studs. At end of each horizontal trim track, cut out flanges, turn up web
and screw to studs. Provide and install double steel studs at door openings, double
steel studs shall be replaced by steel U channel as indicated on drawing for Doors
2600m and higher.
F. Deflection spaces between drywall partitions and the structural framing components
are essential to allow for deflection of the framing components. Such spaces shall be
provided in drywall partitions at top at underside of structural members, by use of
movement joints.

20th October 2021
G. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
H. Co-ordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in

or behind partition framing.
I. Stiffen stud walls over 2100 mm in height at a maximum 1200mm (or equal spacing
otherwise) with one (1) horizontal 19mm bracing channel wire tied inside to each
metal stud or secured as recommended by stud manufacturer
3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
B. Suspended ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling
suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions
and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counters playing, or other
equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards.
3. Secure hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eyes crews, or other

devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacing indicated, but not
less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Hangers: 800mm o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners):800mm o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 400mm o.c.
D. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.
E. Provide additional framing and blocking at openings and to support built-in anchorage
and attachment devices for other work.
3.04 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

20th October 2021
3.05 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with
same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Engineer for visual effect.
3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound
from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits,
furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits,

etc.).
1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
2. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards:
1. ASTM A 653 / A653M-20 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A 641 “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire”.
3. ASTM C 645 - Non-Load Bearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
4. ASTM C 646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet
Material to Light Gage Steel Studs.
5. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-

Attached Gypsum Wallboard.
6. ASTM E 90 - Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
7. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
8. GA 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive

Gypsum board.
A. Installer, with a minimum of three (3) years documented experience demonstrating

previously successful work of the type specified herein
B. Obtain products required for the Work of this Section from a single manufacturer.
Gulf Consult Non Structural Metal Framing III-2/09 22 16 - 1

20th October 2021
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1.05 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERICS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that

incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
A. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval

of specified products.
B. Fire resistance ratings: Where gypsum board systems with fire-resistance ratings are
indicated, provide materials and assemblies of the rating required, tested per ASTM E
119, which are identical to those indicated by reference to Gypsum Association file
numbers in "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designation in the
Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing
agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and to the Engineer.
A. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from
weather, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
A. Work of this Section shall be closely coordinated with the work of Section 09 21 16 -
Gypsum Board Assembles to assure the steady progress of the Contract.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for
installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is
acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. S&S International, Kuwait.
2. UNITECH
3. Clark Steel Framing Systems.
4. Dale/Incor
B. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories:

20th October 2021
1. Same manufacturer as framing.
2. The Steel Network Inc:
2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet

steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing
indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 240 Pa except no
studs less than 0.91mm.
1. Studs: C shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
a. Provide minimum 1.5 mm studs at doorjambs and heavy equipment

locations.
3. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage

devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-
friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural
performance of partition.
a. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical

movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in
accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
b. Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50, with

G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating.
c. Acceptable Products: VertiClip(r) or VertiTrack(tm) manufactured by

The Steel Network Inc.
4. Tracks and Runners: Same material and thickness as studs.
5. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; thickness to suit

purpose; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 754.
6. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002 self-piercing tapping screws
2.03 SUSPENDED CEILING MATERIAL
A. Galvanized steel framing hooked onto channel edges, using Z-profiles connecting to
wall or freely suspended (HILITI HKD push in anchor). Fire rated class o.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-
metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

20th October 2021
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with

installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for
anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing
required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for
installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates
or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-
resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide
continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 600 mm o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing
indicated.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841

that apply to framing installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840

that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,

heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel
framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.04 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings,

but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly
types and other assembly components indicated.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

20th October 2021
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension
system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset

resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counters playing, or other
equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures
or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members,

by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are
secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not
cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place

hanger inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid
suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-
furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in

3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.05 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals
at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 406 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 406 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
c. Tile backing panels: 406 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions

20th October 2021
are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts

penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural

supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent
axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to

underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the
same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install
framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make
partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are
tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs
equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at
ends of arcs, place studs 150 mm o.c.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 610 mm o.c.
E. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically

and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 610 mm o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members

to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 600 mm o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short
flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short
flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners,

20th October 2021
space second member no more than 300 mm from corner and cut insulation
to fit.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 3 mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 24 00
CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
for performing all operations in connection with two-coat portland cement plaster
applied to CMU or concrete partitions, with steel trowel surface finish applied directly
over concrete masonry units.
B. Related sections
1. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrication
2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
2. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland cement.
3. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
4. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry

Purposes.
5. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
6. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
7. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland

Cement-Based Plasters.
8. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-

Based Plaster.
9. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Agents for

Exterior Plastering.
10. ASTM C933 - Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath.
11. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
Gulf Consult Cement Plaster III-2/09 24 00 - 1

20th October 2021
12. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.
13. ASTM C1032 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base.
14. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring
to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
15. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and

Shotcrete.
16. ASTM C1328 - Standard Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement.
17. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
A. Applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating

previously successful work of the type specified herein
B. Perform work in accordance with PCA Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required :
1. Literature: product data sheets, physical properties and limitations for plaster
materials.
2. Verification Sample: Two samples 600 by 600 mm in size illustrating finish, color
and texture.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Work of this Section shall be closely coordinated with the work of section for Unit
Masonry Assemblies to assure the steady progress of the Contract.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name

and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from
construction traffic and other causes.
C. Protect metal trim accessories, plaster screeds and corner beads from being bent or
damaged.
1.07 ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Comply with ASTM C926, BS 5262 and BS 5492.
B. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
hydration of plaster. Being ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and
continue till it sets.

20th October 2021
C. Maintain continuous adequate ventilation commencing one week before starting

plastering and continuing until plasters cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s
Representative.
D. Illumination internal surfaces during the work and inspection to closely resemble that
provided by the permanent installation.\
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01 PLASTER BASE MATERRIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Portland.
B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S.
C. Aggregate: Graded silica sand to
Sieve size No % Retaining by weight
4 (4.75mm) 0
8 (2.36mm) 0
16 (1.18mm) 40
30 (600 um) 65
50 (300 um) 90
100 (150 um) 100
200 (75 um) 100
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932 and as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, portable and free of mineral or organic matter, which can affect
plaster.
2.02 PLASTER BASE MATERRIALS
A. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat.
B. Lime as specified for plaster base coat
C. Water: Clean fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affected
plaster
2.03 PLASTER LATH & ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads: Not less than 26 gauge (0.45 mm) galvanized steel, formed with a
bead not exceeding 5 mm, with expansion flanges 65 mm wide. Angle bead shall be
manufactured in accordance with BS 6452: Part I: 1984 using galvanized steel, to BS
EN 10142 – DX51D+Z275.

20th October 2021
B. Casing and Stop beads: Not less than 26 gauge (0.45 mm) galvanized steel. Stop
bead shall be manufactured in accordance with be 6452: Part I: 1984 using
galvanized steel, to BS EN 10142 – DX51D+Z275. Type PS10, PS13, PS16 & PS19.
C. Control Joints – Two Piece Type: Pair of galvanized steel stop beads with back
flanges & PVC extension to provide a movement bead to allow movement between
surfaces.
D. Strip Lath/Metal Lath. Expanded metal lath shall be manufactured in accordance with
BSEN 10142-DX51D+Z275). With weight 1.11 kg/m2.
E. Manufacturer:
1. Exmat, Kuwait
2. Kumex / Alghanim Specialties.
3. XPA Building Material.
4. ATLAS.
2.04 MIXES
A. Mix cement plaster in accordance with PCA, Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco)
Manual.
1. Scratch coat: Proportion and mix cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C
926, Type C with the following proportions: One volume portland cement, up
to ½ volume hydrated lime, and sand equal to 2-1/2 to 4 times the sum of
cement and lime.
2. Finish coat: Proportion and mix cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C
926, Type C with the following proportions: One volume Portland cement, up
to ½ volume hydrate lime, and sand equal to 3 to 5 times the sum of cement
and lime.
B. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
C. Mix materials dry, to uniform consistency, before adding water.
D. Product mixture from freezing, frost, contamination and evaporation.
E. Do not retemper mixes after initial set ha occurred.
F. Mechanical Mixers:
1. Do not allow batches to remain in mixer longer than 3 minutes.
2. Wash out mixer four times daily if in continuous use, and after each batch if
mixer used intermittently or if a different constituent is used.
G. Initial Set:
1. Do not use plaster after initial set has taken place.
2. Do not retemper or reconstitute mixes.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that all items, which are to be enclosed by Work of this Section, have been
permanently installed, inspected and approved.
B. Verify masonry joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this
Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surfaces.
C. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive
work of this Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on
concrete surfaces, or form release agents, which are detrimental to plaster.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and project

conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect other Work against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable
care and precautions. Clean, repair, or replace any work so damaged and soiled to
the acceptance of the Engineer’s Representative.
B. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
C. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions,
solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
D. Rough smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads: Provide on all external corners and arrisses and in single lengths
where the length of a corner or arris does not exceed the standard stock lengths.
Mitre or cope the beads at corners and fasten securely with tie wires, hardened
galvanized nails, staples or offset head or hook head lath nails spaced not more than
200 mm staggered.
B. Casing or Stop Beads: Provide where plastering terminates and is not covered by
other finish. Provide sheet metal closures at reveals. Set the beads level, plumb and
true to line. Install in lengths as long as is practicable and align joints with concealed
splice or tie plates. Secure beads with tie wire, hardened galvanized nails or other
accepted methods. Space fastening not more than 200 mm apart.
C. Strip Lath: Where plaster is to be applied across differing backgrounds and over
chases provide strip lath 300 mm wide located centrally over joint; except that where
small widths of one material are involved completely bridge the one material with
mesh wide enough to extend 75 mm each side. Insert an isolating membrane of
building paper under lath to separate plaster from base material, and bed lath in
undercoat.
D. Metal Lath: Provide where plaster is applied over smooth concrete substrate. Space
fastening not more than 300mm staggered.
3.04 PLASTERING - TWO COAT APPLICATION
A. Apply plaster coats in accordance with ASTM C 926.

20th October 2021
B. The first (scratch) coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to
ensure tight contact and complete coverage of the solid base, to the nominal
thickness of 17 mm. As soon as the first (scratch) coat becomes firm, the entire
surface shall be scored in one direction only. The vertical surfaces shall be scored
horizontally
C. The second (finish) coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to
ensure tight contact with, and complete coverage of the base coat and to the nominal
total thickness of 20 mm.
3.05 BONDING AGENT WHERE REQUIRED
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
A. Maximum variation from true flatness of 3mm per 3m, non-cumulative.
A. Plaster Sampling: Samples may be taken from work in place at any time. Areas
represented by samples which shown over sanding or wrong aggregate proportion
will be rejected.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Remove damaged or defective plaster by cutting and replace with specified materials
to match adjacent plaster.
3.09 PATCHING
A. Work containing cracks, blisters, pits check, or discoloration will not be accepted.
Remove such work, including rejected work, and replace with new. Patching of
defected work permitted only with the Engineer’s Representative approval.
B. Perform cutting, patching, repairing and pointing-up operations neatly and thoroughly.
Repair the cracks and indented surfaces by moistening the plaster and filling with
new material, troweled or tamped flush with adjoining surfaces. Point-up and finish
surfaces around fixtures, outlet boxes piping, fittings, tile and other work flush with
adjacent plaster. Where new plaster adjoins plater, which has been installed more
the 48 hours, cut existing plaster at an angle of approximately 45 Deg. With the
surface before installing new plaster
3.10 CLEANING
A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris and plaster deposits.
B. After completion of the work of this Section, remove equipment, and clean all wall,
partition, and floor areas free from deposits of plaster and other materials installed
under this Section
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
for performing all operations in connection with the installation of:
1. Flooring tile.
2. Interior wall tile.
3. Tile base and associated trim.
4. Threads with non skid-fill and Risers.
5. Cementitious waterproofing at wet areas, floors and walls.
6. Installation systems, adhesives, mortars and grouts.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 07 14 00 - Fluid Applied Waterproofing
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile, A collection.
2. ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.
3. ANSI A108.1A - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set

Method with Portland Cement Mortar.
4. ANSI A108.1B - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured

Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
Mortar.
5. ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile

in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar -or- Installation of Ceramic
Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
6. ANSI A108.4 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic

Adhesives or Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
Gulf Consult Tiling III-2 / 09 30 00 - 1

20th October 2021
7. ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland
Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
8. ANSI A108.6 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-

Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.
9. ANSI A108.7 - Specifications for Electrically Conductive Ceramic Tile Installed

with Conductive Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
10. ANSI A108.8 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-
Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout.
11. ANSI A108.9 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy
Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
12. ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
13. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -

Grouting Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
14. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
15. ANSI A118.5 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout.
16. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts.
17. ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
18. ANSI A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer
Units.
19. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
20. ANSI A137.1 - Ceramic Tile.
B. Tile Council of America
1. TCA – Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
A. Conform to ANSI A-108 Series/A118 series/A136.1 – American National Standard

Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tiles.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required.
B. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data,

physical properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.
1. Include maintenance data and recommended cleaning materials, and

cleaning and stain removal methods.
C. Selection samples:
1. Manufacturer's sample boards for each type and color group of tile specified,
and grout colors, for selections.

20th October 2021
D. Verification samples:
1. Mount tile and apply grout on one 600 by 600 mm cement backerboard, for
each tile type and selected color, to indicate color and texture variations, tile
flatness and joint size variations.
2. Trim shapes and base, in selected colors in types and shapes indicated for
project conditions.
3. Stone threshold, 300 mm long samples in shaped profile.
E. Shop Drawing
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously

successful work of the type specified herein and approved by manufacturer.
B. Tiles delivered to the job or installed in the work which do not fall within the accepted
color and texture range demonstrated by the samples shall be removed from the site
and replaced with acceptable materials.
1.06 MOCKUP
A. Construct 3m x 3m mock-up.
B. Incorporate approved mockup if accepted by Engineer.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning methods, cleaning

materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.
A. Deliver tile in manufacturer's sealed cartons, grade-sealed by the manufacturer in

accordance with ANSI A 108 and clearly marked as to contents, color, and quantity.
B. Store and protect containers above floor level, keep dry until ready for use.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Store epoxy mortar and epoxy grouts at 21 degrees Celsius (70 degrees
Fahrenheit) temperature for 24 hours prior to use.
A. Do not install setting or grouting materials in a closed, unventilated environment..
B. Shade work areas in direct sunlight during installation to prevent rapid evaporation
caused by excessive heat.

20th October 2021
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing
interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such
trades for the installation of their work.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) years warranty for cracking, breakage or failure of tile due to defective
workmanship or any other mean, from the date of substantial completion of the
project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN BASIS
A. The following brands have been based to attain a standard quality and sustainable
design. The products other than these but fulfilling the requirements as set forth in the
design-basis may be chosen subject to the approval by the Engineer.
B. Design basis highlights are as follows. Refer to the drawings and Finishes Schedule
for details.
S. # Code Item Manufacturer Size Type/Code

FLOOR:
1 CT-01 PORCELAIN TILE Matières de 1200 x 600MM
rex 10MM THICK
2 CT -02 PORCELAIN TILE AGROB 125 x 250 mm, 553034-
BUCHTAL 8mm Thk 38110H
3 CT -03 PORCELAIN TILE IMOLA 600 x 300 mm, KOSHI 36CE
9 MM Thk
4 CT -04 PORCELAIN TILE IMOLA 300 X 600 MM HABITAT36A
10MM THICK
WALL:
1 CTW -01 PORCELAIN WALL TILE AGROB 125 x 250 cm 552003-
BUCHTAL 6MM THICK 18120H
2 CTW -02 PORCELAIN WALL TILE ARIOSTEA 300 X 150 MM
6MM THICK
3 CTW -03 PORCELAIN WALL TILE IMOLA 300 X 600 MM HABITAT
9MM THICK 63W
4 TYP4-01 GLASS MOSAIC WALL BISAZZA 10 x 10 x 4MM OUR SEA -
TILE MOSIAC
TILE
BASE:
1 CB-01 PORCELIAN TILE - AGROB 100x100mm, 763-2034H
COVE SKIRTING BUCHTAL
2 CB-02 PORCELIAN TILE - To IMOLA 100 MM HIGH HABITAT36A
coordinate with floor tile
CT04

20th October 2021
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. The manufacturers as shown in 2.01 A above, are specified to reflect the design
intent. The manufacturers shown below may be acceptable as per Engineer’s
approval.
1. CE.SI.
2. Ceramiche Keope, Italy;
3. Mirage, Italy.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement
1. ASTM C 150 Type I, white, where required.
B. Pigments
1. Pure mineral pigments.
2. Resistant to alkalis.
3. Non-fading.
4. Weatherproof.
5. Colours as required and approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
C. Water
1. Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work.
D. Sand
1. Conform to ASTM C897.
E. Glass Mosial Tile - Glass mosaic, consisting of 10x10 mm. (3/8”x3/8”) bevelled
square tiles, mounted on paper or on a mesh, according to the item and format
(10x10 mm only on paper). The Smalto (SM) collection is made by adding coloured
enamel grit to the molten glass. The Le Gemme (GM) collection is made by adding
coloured enamel grit and "Avventurina" to the molten glass.
2.04 ADHESIVES AND GROUTS
A. Manufacturers :
1. BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC
2. Alghanim Specialties
3. Mapei Corporation
4. Technokolla System

20th October 2021
B. Tile Adhesive
1. Impermeable to water and liquids.
2. Resistant to corrosion, chemicals.
3. Resistant to abrasion and mechanical loads.
4. Pre-bagged cementitious material, specifically manufactured for tile setting.
C. Tile Grout
1. Impermeable to water and liquids.
2. Resistant to corrosion and chemicals.
3. Resistant to abrasion and mechanical loads.
4. Resistant to bacteria.
5. Pre-bagged material specifically manufactured for tile.
2.05 SEALANT
A. As specified in section for Joint Sealants.
B. Colour to match adjoining tile colour.
2.06 METAL CORNER STRIPS
A. Square edge profile made of stainless steel or stainless steel with high gloss finish, as
approved by the Engineer. Resistance to mechanical loading, high point loads and are
resistant against chemical substances occurring during tile fixing. Length 100cm-
250cm, Height – 2-30mm as required.
B. Manufacturer:
1. DENPLEX - Dural
2. SPECOM
3. JECA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section and notify the
Engineer’s Representative in writing of all conditions, which could adversely affect this
work.
B. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has
been sent to the Engineer’s Representative, until corrective work has been completed,
or waived.

20th October 2021
C. Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice would constitute
acceptance of conditions in the area, by the applicator.
1. The Applicator shall be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work.
2. Any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected, without additional cost to

the Ministry.
D. Allow slabs to dry adequately, before applying materials.
1. At the direction of the Engineer’s Representative, perform simple “moisture

meter” test to ensure concrete surfaces are free of contained moisture.
E. Fill all cracks in sub-surfaces using approved crack-filler, in accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. Clean subfloors of all remaining dirt and loose particles, before application of flooring
materials.
G. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels
1. Mortar Set Floors:
a. 1/500 distance or 9mm total maximum variation from levels shown.
2. Mortar Set Walls:
a. 1/400 distance or 6mm total maximum variation from planes shown.
H. Thin-Set Work
1. Same as allowable variation in finished work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Etch Substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid, as may be required to remove curing
compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of specified mortar
for tiles.
B. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.
C. Seal substrate with sealer, as recommended by the manufacturer of the mortar.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions
1. Comply with the manufacturers' instructions for the installation of each

material required.
B. Tiles shall be applied to full wall areas, where mirrors and surface mounted
accessories are to be installed.
C. Surfaces to receive tile finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter detrimental
to the bond.
D. Room temperatures at areas in which tile materials are being installed shall be
maintained at not less than 5oC, for a period of twenty-four hours prior to
commencement of work, during work and afterwards, until completion of construction.

20th October 2021
1. Areas in which tile work is in progress shall be closed to traffic, until the
installation has set.
E. Lay out work so that no tile of less than half size occurs.
1. Align joints in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with wall, to
conform to patterns selected.
2. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile.
3. Co-ordinate with plumbing and other trades.
F. Lay out tile work in pattern shown on drawings, using field tile and trim shapes as
shown.
1. Centre tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area and
adjust to minimise tile cutting.
2. Use uniform joint widths for tiles as agreed with the Engineer’s
Representative.
a. All tiles will be laid with suitable joint spacers.
G. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures, in the spaces
shown, or scheduled to receive tiles.
1. Form a complete covering without interruptions, except for control and

expansion joints and as required to comply with requirements.
2. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners, without disruption

of pattern or joint alignments.
H. Adhesive Installation
1. Use appropriate adhesive for setting tiles, where adhesive installation is

shown.
I. Non-Slip Tile Installation
1. Use non-slip floor tiles in all floor areas.
2. Install as specified for normal ceramic tiles, of the same type and class.
J. Expansion Joints
1. Floor tiling
a. Expansion joints shall be formed between tiles as shown on

drawings.
b. Joints shall be to the full depth of the floor tiles, bedding and screed X
10 mm wide.
c. Joints shall be primed with two coats of approved primer when dry,
filled to within 6mm of the tile finish with polyethylene compressible
foam strip.
d. Approved joint sealant shall then be gun applied and tooled, to a

slightly concave smooth even finish.

20th October 2021
e. Where joints are subject to heavy mechanical loads, the edges shall
be provided with stainless steel Grade 316L angles.
2. Wall tiling
a. Expansion joints shall be formed between tiles as shown on the

drawings, to the full depth of tiles, bedding and render.
b. Joints are to be 10mm wide and are to be filled to within 8 mm of

surface with invert filler and finished with approved sealant, in colour
to match tile jointing.
A. Allowable Variations in Finished Work
1. Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb and from
elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown:
a. Floors: 1/1000 run, any direction; +/- 3mm at any location; 0.8mm
offset at any location.
b. Walls: 1/800 run, any direction; +/- 3mm at any location; 0.8mm offset
at any location.
c. Joints: +/-0.8mm joint with variation at any location; 1/600 run for
deviation from plumb and true and for other variations in alignment of
joints.
3.05 GROUTING
A. Do not commence grouting for at least 24-hours after placing of tiles.
B. Follow specific instructions of listed standards.
C. Mix and apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Grout wall and floor tiles with indicated grout, mixed to a workable stiff consistency in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
E. Force maximum grout into joints, with trowel or squeegee.
F. Before grout sets, strike or tool joints to base of cushion and fill all skips and gaps.
G. Do not permit setting bed materials to show through grouted joints.
H. Cure grout joints by maintaining damp condition.
3.06 SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Apply sealant in joints where ceramic tile terminates at thresholds, floor drains,
expansion joints and other areas indicated.
B. Co-ordinate with trades affecting these items.
C. Application of sealant shall conform to applicable requirements set forth under Section
for Sealants.

20th October 2021
1. Requirements therein shall become a part of the work under this Section, as
though written out in full herein.
D. Corner should be sealed with silicon as approved by the Engineer.
3.07 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide 2% of extra spare tiles of each type including the necessary accessories,
adhesives, grout etc.
A. After tile has thoroughly set, sponge and wash tile thoroughly and diagonally across
joints.
B. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage tiles or adjacent materials.
C. Do not use acid cleaners.
D. Finally, clean all tiles using dry cloths.
E. Remove from the site and legally dispose of, at the end of each day, all cartons,
rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Section.
F. Protect tiles after cleaning, with non-staining heavy Kraft paper, or other approved
coverage.
G. Replace torn or worn paper, until acceptance of the building by the Engineer’s
Representative.
3.09 MAINTENANCE LITERATURE
A. Upon completion of all work specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer’s Representative, literature on the “Care of Ceramic Tiles”, for future
maintenance use.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 65 16
RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Section includes:
1. Rubber Sheet Flooring
2. Rubber Base for Sheet Flooring
3. Rubber Stair Nosing, Risers and Treads
B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified
under the designated Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete

substrate; slab surface tolerances; vapor retarder for
applications on or below grade; requirement for
83/90 degree riser and tread edge angle for stair
tread and nosings.
2. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication.
3. Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY for plywood substrate and

surface tolerances.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. References (Industry Standards):
1. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC):
a. AATCC 134 Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. ANSI ESD S97.2 Floor Materials and Footwear – Voltage

Measurement on a Person
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady State Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
b. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension
c. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property –

Durometer Hardness
d. ASTM D3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion

Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double Head Abrader)
Gulf Consult Rubber Sheet Flooring III-2 / 09 65 16 - 1

20th October 2021
e. ASTM D6499 Standard Test Method for the Immunological

Measurement of Antigenic Protein in Natural Rubber and its Products
f. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials
g. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of

Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
h. ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of

Smoke Generated by Solid Materials
i. ASTM E2179 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement

of the Effectiveness of Floor Coverings in Reducing Impact Sound
Transmission Through Concrete Floors
j. ASTM F150 Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring
k. ASTM F386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient

Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces
l. ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to

Receive Resilient Flooring
m. ASTM F925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals

of Resilient Flooring
n. ASTM F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit
o. ASTM F1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile
p. ASTM F1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of

Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring
q. ASTM F1514 Standard Test Method for Measuring Heat Stability

of Resilient Flooring by Color
r. ASTM F1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability

of Resilient Flooring by Color Change
s. ASTM F1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor

Covering Without Backing
t. ASTM F1860 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor

Covering With Backing
u. ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base
v. ASTM F2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads
w. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative

Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
x. ASTM F2199 Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensional

Stability of Resilient Floor Tile after Exposure to Heat

20th October 2021
y. ASTM F3010 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based

Membrane-Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under
Resilient Floor Coverings
z. ASTM G21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of

Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
4. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a. ISO 140 Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of

building elements
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor

Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source
b. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid Materials
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation guide and

maintenance guide for each material and accessory proposed for use.
B. Samples: Submit three representative samples of each product specified for

verification.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide resilient flooring manufactured by a firm with a

minimum of 5 years’ experience with resilient flooring of type equivalent to those
specified.
1. Provide resilient flooring products, including wall base, accessories and

subfloor preparation products from one manufacturer to ensure color
matching and compatibility.
B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer of resilient flooring or INSTALL

(International Standards & Training Alliance) resilient certified for the requirements of
the project.
C. Sustainable Design Requirements:
1. ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems certification.
2. Flooring surfaces that are easily cleaned and do not require coatings and
stripping, or use chemicals that may be hazardous to human health.
3. Supply all required products that are CA 01350 compliant.
4. Flooring that is free of materials known to be teratogenic, mutagenic or

carcinogenic.
5. Flooring that contains no polyvinyl chloride or plasticizers.
6. Flooring that contains no halogens.
7. Flooring that contains no asbestos.

20th October 2021
A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive
temperatures, and construction operations.
B. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to the

required temperature for 48-hours prior to installation.
A. The installation area must be fully enclosed, weather tight, and climate controlled
between 63°F and 75°F and 40% to 60% ambient relative humidity (RH) for at least
48 hours prior, during and 72 hours after installation (do not use gas fueled blowers).
Dew point must be avoided. The substrate must be at least 5°F above dew point to
be considered acceptable.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard limited warranty for wear, defect, bond and
conductivity for no less than a minimum of 10 years after the date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis-of-Design: NORA by Interface. and ARTIGO.
2.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING FOR COMMERCIAL TRAFFIC
A. Rubber Floor Tile: RF-01, RF-02, RB-01, RB-02.
1. RF-01: RUBBER FLOOR,
a. Type: Granito.
b. Colour: G378.
c. Manufacturer: ARTIGO.
2. RF-02: RUBBER FLOOR TILE,
a. Type: NCS S 4000-N
b. Clour: Col.7036
c. Manufacturer: NORA by Interface.
3. RB-01: RUBBER STRAIGHT COVE SKIRTING
a. Type: Art. 7731 10LM/ROLL.
b. Clour: Neutral

20th October 2021
4. RB-02: RUBBER SIT ON SKIRTINGS
a. Type: Art. 713 10LM/ROLL.
b. Clour: As selected by the Engineer with matching floor colour.
d. Technical Detail
1 ASTM Specification: Type IB and Grade 2

ASTM F1344 Standard
Specification for Rubber
Floor Tile
2 Material: Vulcanized rubber compound

with environmentally
compatible color pigments that
are free of toxic heavy metals
like lead, cadmium or mercury
3 Composition: Homogeneous rubber

compound with a random
scattered design
4 Color: 32 standard colors
5 Surface: Hammered
6 Back of Tile: Double-sanded smooth
7 Material Size (ASTM 39.53 inches by 39.53 inches

F2055): (1004mm by 1004mm)
± 0.02 inches (± 0.5mm)
is required
8 Squareness (ASTM Meets requirements

F2055):
± 0.010 inches (±
0.254mm) is required
9 Thickness(ASTM F386): 0.14 inches (3.5mm)

+ 0.015/-0.005 inches (+
0.381/- 0.127mm) is
required
10 Dimensional Stability Meets requirements

(ASTM F2199):
≤ 0.15% in both
directions is required
11 Flammability(E648/NFPA NBSIR 75 950, 0.92

253):
≥ 0.45 watts/sq. cm for
Class 1 is required
12 Smoke Density(ASTM NBS, 267 (flaming) and 130

E662/NFPA 258): (non-flaming)

20th October 2021
< 450 is required
13 CAN/ULC-S102.2: Surface Burning, FSC1 of 70

and SD of 470
14 Burn Resistance: Resistant to cigarette and

solder burns
15 Slip Resistance (ASTM Static coefficient of friction,

D2047): Neolite dry 0.99, Neolite wet
≥ 0.5 is required 0.95 (not recommended for
ramps)
16 Bacteria Resistant to bacteria, fungi,

Resistance(ASTM and micro-organism activity
E2180/ASTM G21):
17 VOC’s: This flooring is

GREENGUARD Gold Certified
for Low VOC Emissions, Blue
Angel Certified & CA 01350
compliant
18 Latex Allergies(ASTM Inhibition Elisa, results are

D6499): below detection level
19 Sound Absorption(ASTM ∆ IIC 11, ∆ Lw 11 dB

E2179/ISO 140): (compare only ∆ values)
20 Sound Generation: 66.3 dBA, 68.5 dBC and 19.6

Sones, Independently tested
21 Hardness(ASTM D2240): Shore type “A”, 82

≥ 70 is required
22 Static Load(ASTM F970): Residual compression of

≤ 0.005 inches with 250 0.005 inches with 800 lbs.
lbs. is required
23 Rolling Load Limit: ≤ 850 lbs. / sq. inch; for fork lift
traffic polyurethane adhesive
is required
24 Abrasion 1.1 lbs. (500g) load on H-18

Resistance(ASTM wheel with 1000 cycles, 0.002
D3389): oz. (0.05g) weight loss
≤ 0.035 oz. (1.0g) is
required
25 Oil & Grease Resistance: Yes
26 Heat Resistance(ASTM Easily achieved with all

F1514): batches and regular
Avg. ∆E ≤ 8.0 is required maintenance
27 Static Generation(AATCC < 2000 Volts at 20% RH

134):

20th October 2021
28 Thermal Transmission R-value of -0.90

(ASTM C518):
29 Cleaning: Cleaned and maintained

effectively using water, pads
and a suitable cleaning
machine, without the use of
any factory and/or field-
applied coatings. Also without
using any chemicals that may
be hazardous or containing
any teratogenic, mutagenic or
any other ingredients known
to be carcinogenic.
30 Shine: Higher shine achieved by

buffing without any artificial
topical applied coatings.
31 Stain Removal: Samples of the product must

be provided for stain removal
testing by the owner. Sample
size should be ~ 1 m2, pre-
cleaned by manufacture per
published recommendations.
Samples must have no
coatings, sealers, floor finish
or other manually or
mechanically applied finish on
the surface of the product.
Stain testing must consist of
application of common
healthcare related
disinfectants and chemicals to
include, but not limited to,
Betadine, Methylene Blue,
Silver Nitrate and alcohol
based hand sanitizer. Duration
of test period must be no less
than one week. Removal of
chemicals must be in
accordance with
manufacturers published
cleaning and maintenance
recommendations.
32 Substrate Preparation: Per ASTM F710
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. A subfloor that meets the requirements of ASTM F710 Standard Practice for
Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring is required.
B. A secure storage area that is fully enclosed, weather tight, and climate controlled
between 63°F and 75°F and 40% to 60% ambient relative humidity (RH) for at least

20th October 2021
48-hours prior and during the installation, so the flooring contractor can acclimate all
materials.
C. An installation area that is fully enclosed, weather tight, and climate controlled
between 63°F and 75° and 40% to 60% ambient relative humidity (RH) for at least
48-hours prior, during, and 72-hours after installation (do not use gas fueled blowers
or as prescribed the manufacturer.
D. Areas with direct prolonged exposure to sunlight should be protected with the use of
Low E glass doors, windows or facades that reduce the UV transmissions to less
than 1%.
E. Areas of the flooring subjected to direct sunlight, for example through doors or
windows, must be covered using blind, curtains, cardboard or similar materials for 24-
hours before, during, and for a period of 72-hours after the installation to allow “wet”
adhesives to cure. Do not allow traffic when using wet set adhesives for a minimum
of 12-hours and prohibit rolling loads for 72-hours. All flooring must be protected from
damage during construction operations using Masonite, plywood or a similar product.
Before laying the panels the flooring surface must be free of all debris. Lay panels so
that they are edge to edge and tape the joints to prevent movement and debris
entrapment. Inspect the flooring before covering and after removal for final
acceptance.
F. Conduct post-installation cleaning after 72-hours for wet set adhesives. Conduct
post-installation cleaning immediately for installations. Refer to the manufacturer
Maintenance Guide for product specific details.
3.02 FLOORING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITES
A. Provide trained installers that have at least one of the following:
1. Approved by manufacturer or INSTALL (International Standards & Training

Alliance) certified for the requirements of the project all as approved by the
Engineer.
2. An effective installation manager to manage the project, installers, and

ensure that all of the required procedures followed as detailed in the
manufacturer Installation Guide.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 65 19
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Resilient flooring of Vinyl sheet, Vinyl composition floor tile, etc.
2. Reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles.
1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrication
2. Section 07 92 00- Joint Sealants
1.02 RERERENCE AND STANDARDS (Latest Publications)
A. ASTM Standards:
1. F150 Standard test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive

and static Dissative Resilient Flooring.
2. F1066 Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
3. F1303 Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing
4. F1344 Specification for Rubber Floor Tile
5. F1700 Specification for Solid Vinyl floor tile
6. F1859 Specification for Rubber Sheet Flooring Covering without

Backing
7. F1860 Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering With Backing
8. F1913 Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering without Backing
9. F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive

Resilient Flooring
10. F1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type
Underlayment to Receive Resilient Flooring
11. F 2419 Standard Practice Concrete Underlayments and Preparation of

the Surface to Receive resilient Flooring.
12. F 1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
13. F 1303 Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with
Backing
Gulf Consult Resilient Flooring III-2/09 65 19 - 1

20th October 2021
14. F1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile
15. F1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile
16. F1859 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering

Without Backing
17. F1860 Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering With
Backing
18. F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base
19. F510 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient

Floor Coverings using an Abrader with a Grit Feed Method
20. F 924 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Puncture of Cushioned

Resilient Floor Coverings
21. F925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient

Flooring
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a

single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling
compounds.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section

who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide materials that have been tested and comply with the
following fire test performance criteria as determined by an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Tests shall include backing materials.
1. Resilient Flooring: Comply with the following performance criteria:
a. A minimum radiant flux of 0.22 watts/sq. cm for the full duration of the
test when tested in accordance with ASTM E648, based on the average
of three replicate tests.
b. A specific optical density in either the flaming or non-flaming mode not

exceeding 300 within the first 4 minutes of the test when tested in
accordance with ASTM E662.
2. Resilient Base: A flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating
of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty executed by the Contractor and Installer against any defect in
the system. Upon notification of any such defect, make the necessary repair and
replacements including the removal and replacement of work as per approval of the
Engineer
B. The warranty period for the system shall be Ten (10) years from the date of substantial
completion.

20th October 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT FLOOR MATERIAL CODE: AS PER FINISHES SCHEDULE
A. VF-01:VINYL FLOOR SHEET,
1. Type: TARALAY IMPRESSION COMFORT - An acoustic multilayered vinyl

sheet, with a group T wear rating.
2. Size: 25ml X 2m X 3.35 THICK
3. Colour: '0755 KUBES, WHITE.
4. Manufacturer: Gerflor.
B. VF-02: INYL FLOOR SHEET,
1. Type: TARALAY IMPRESSION COMFORT - An acoustic multilayered vinyl

sheet, with a group T wear rating.
3. Colour: 0763 Rice Greige.
C. VF-03: VINYL FLOOR SHEET,
1. Type: ACCENT FLOOR COLOUR.
3. Colour: 45162 Soft Rainbow.
4. Manufacturer: Forbo.
D. IVB-01: PVC Flexible full cove former,
1. Type: Combination of cove former and the capping strip into a single product, for
ease of installation
2. Size: 10 cm height.
3. Colour: As selected by the Engineer.
E. Technical Details for Vinyl Floor Sheet:
Product Description: Resilient vinyl sheet floor covering with backing complying with
ASTM F1303
1. Overall Thickness: (2.0 mm)
2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Not less than 28 mil

20th October 2021
3. Meets ASTM 970 standards
4. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
5. Adhesive Method:
a. Full-spread adhesive to completely adhere flooring to substrate.
b. Complete adhesive coverage to eliminate the possibility of gaps or

space between the slab and flooring material where moisture could
accumulate and create an environment conducive to mold growth.
c. Flooring to be adhered to the concrete slab in all locations eliminating

the possibility of waves or wrinkles forming caused by the floor shifting,
moving or by rolling loads displacing it.
6. 100% REACH Compliant.
7. Applied Finish: Manufacturer's, factory-applied & permanent surface treatment.

Laser and UV cured Protecsol 2 providing best chemical & stain resistance and a
no wax for life maintenance.
8. Field-Applied Finishes: None required.
9. Color and Pattern:
a. As selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns.
10. Performance Criteria:
a. ASTM F1303 for vinyl sheet floor covering with backing
11. Provide test certificate to show compliance with ASTM F1303
a. Static Load Limit/ Maximum Static Load:
12. ASTM F970 (175 PSI): -0.002 or better
a. Chemical & Stain Resistance: ASTM F925; Excellent, results on request
b. Fire Performance: ASTM E 648; Class 1
c. Surface Maintenance Requirements: No-wax surface requiring only

cleaning and rinsing.
d. Slab Moisture Design Tolerance: See type of adhesives at 2.2

Accessories.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. The manufacturers against each type of resilient flooring shown in 2.01 A above, are
specified to reflect the design intent. The manufacturers shown below may be
acceptable as per Engineer’s approval.
1. Armstrong
2. Altro

20th October 2021
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring

manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex Portland cement type as recommended by

flooring manufacturer. Do not use gypsum-based products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this
Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's requirements for preparation of substrate to

receive resilient flooring.
B. Remove, by light sanding and grinding, all protruding edges, high spots. Ensure that
substrate is free from paint, varnish, wax, oil, or other foreign matter.
C. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.
Apply, trowel and float finish subfloor filler and leave a smooth, level, hard surface.
Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate, and ensure that substrate is dry, clean and smooth prior to
application of flooring.
E. Apply primers as recommended by adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install all products in strict accordance with each manufacturer's written installation
procedures and other provisions specified herein and attached.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the
flooring. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until they have been cured
and are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOOR
A. Mix tile to ensure that concentration of surface patterns is uniform throughout. Use tile
from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered.

20th October 2021
B. Lay flooring in a square grid pattern, with joints and seams parallel to building lines. Lay
tile flooring in pattern as indicated on the drawings with pattern-grain running in singular
direction. Lay tile with joints straight and continuous in both directions and with border tile
not less than 1/2 the width of the tile.
C. Neatly fit resilient materials to all intersecting surfaces, and make joints as inconspicuous
as possible.
D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door in closed position where adjacent floor finish is of
different material or color.
E. Apply resilient materials to have uniform contact with receiving surfaces throughout, with
tight joints, and with all finish surfaces smooth, in true plane, free from buckles, waves,
and other imperfections.
F. Extend resilient flooring to wall lines beneath all movable equipment and movable
casework. Fit resilient flooring onto breaks and recesses, against non-resilient bases,
around pipes and other protrusions, under saddles, and to and around other fixed
surfaces, making neat cuts in the flooring and minimizing joints.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient edge and transition strips:
1. Install edge strips at all edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive
recommended by the edge strip manufacturer.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on finished floor areas until flooring adhesive has fully set.
B. Prohibit washing, scrubbing or other similar ‘wet’ operations to occur on finished floor
areas for a minimum period of five (5) calendar days after installation.
C. Provide protection of completed flooring areas from construction traffic until Substantial
Completion of the Contract. Cover the all resilient tile floor surfaces with non-staining
heavyweight Kraft paper and overlay with red-rosin paper, taping the edges to maintain
position of the protection paper. Reapply papers as required to maintain floor protection.
3.07 CLEANING
A. As installation progresses, continually remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall
surfaces without damage.
1. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against

damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and
furnishings.
B. Sweep floors to remove all loose dirt and debris.
C. Not sooner than five days after installation, clean all materials installed hereunder with a
non-abrasive commercial detergent approved by the material manufacturers, and
thoroughly rinse with clear water.
D. Special cleaning for vinyl composition tile floors, not before four (4) days prior to the End
User's intended occupancy date.

20th October 2021
1. Wash floors with non-abrasive commercial detergent with floor machine

equipped with green or blue pad. Apply manufacturer's recommended stripping
solution when floors are badly soiled.
2. Apply a minimum of two coats of high quality acrylic floor polish to protect
flooring until regular maintenance procedures can be started.
3. After application and curing of floor polish, ensure that polished floors are
protected with heavy kraft paper.
E. After cleaning and polishing, ensure that the flooring is be protected with heavy kraft
paper.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 65 66
RESILIENT SPORT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Resilient Sheet Vinyl Multi-purpose / Sport Flooring
2. Integrated Cove Base
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Laboratory Test Results:
1. Provide certification of testing per ASTM F2772-11 and the product being
furnished complies with the ASTM Indoor Sport Floor Classification specified
for this project. Third-party certification required.
B. Shop Drawings: Showing installation details and locations of borders, patterns, game
lines, locations of floor inserts and seams.
C. Samples:
1. Manufacturer's color chart for selection of available colors.
D. Samples:
1. Color Chart: Manufacturer's color chart for selection of available colors.
2. Product Samples: Sample of each type, color, and pattern of flooring

indicated, Provide samples of same thickness and material specified.
Minimum sample size: 6 inches by 8 inches.
E. Closeout Submittals
1. Submit three copies of the following:
a. Manufacturer maintenance instructions.
b. Manufacturer warranty for a minimum period of no less than 5 years

after the date of Substantial Completion
i. Manufacturer warranty for material defects.
ii. Manufacturer warranty for material defects, high moisture

tolerance and not promoting mold growth on, within and
directly under the installed flooring.
c. Installer installation warranty for a period of 5 years start from the

date of Substantial Completion of project.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
Gulf Consult Resilient Sport Flooring III-2 / 09 65 66 - 1

20th October 2021
1. At least ten years active experience in the manufacture and marketing of

indoor resilient multi-purpose flooring.
2. A provider of authorized installer training.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. At least five years experience in the installation of resilient multi-purpose

flooring.
2. Experience on at least five projects of similar size, type and complexity as

this project.
3. Employer of workers for this Project who are competent in techniques

required by manufacturer for resilient multi-purpose flooring installation
indicated.
C. Fire Test Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 648, Class 1, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Safety and Performance Properties: Comply with ASTM F 2772-11 Performance

Level Class 2 for force reduction, ball bounce, vertical deformation and surface
friction.
A. Store flooring and installation materials in protected dry spaces, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 55 deg F (13 deg C) nor more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).
B. Store the indoor resilient surfacing rolls in an upright position on a smooth flat surface
immediately upon delivery to Project.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Product Installation:
1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) in spaces to receive
flooring 48 hours prior, during and 48 hours after installation.
2. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F
(29 deg C).
3. Prohibit traffic during flooring installation and for at least 48 hours after
flooring installation.
B. Install flooring only after other finishing work, including painting and overhead work,
has been completed.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Limited Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace sports flooring that fails within specified warranty period.
1. Material warranty must be direct from the product manufacturer.

20th October 2021
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Material manufacturing defects.
b. Failure due to substrate moisture exposure:
c. Not to exceed 95% relative humidity (RH) when tested according to

ASTM F 2170.
d. In addition, it is warranted not to promote mold growth on, within and

directly under the installed flooring.
3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Limited Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair
or replace flooring that fails due to poor workmanship or faulty installation within the
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.07 ENVIRONMENT AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY
A. Indoor Air Quality Certification:
a. Manufacturer’s certification of factory applied permanent

Bacteriostatic and Fungicidal Treatment throughout the flooring
material, not only on its surface, designed to improve indoor air
quality and reduce asthma and allergy risks associated with bacterial
and mold growth.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with other gymnasium equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Gerflor (Basic of Design)
B. Armstrong
C. Altro
2.02 SHEET VINYL MULTI-PURPOSE FLOORING
A. Gerflor - Taraflex Evolution, Type VSF-01, 02, 03.
B. Product Description: ASTM Class 2 Foam-backed sheet vinyl flooring designed for
fully adhered multi-purpose applications.
1. Overall Thickness: Not less than 0.24 inch (6.0 to 7.5 mm).
2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Not less than 0.06 inch (1.5 mm)

20th October 2021
3. Backing: closed cell foam with reinforced fiberglass grid.
4. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
5. Adhesive Method:
a. Full-spread adhesive coverage to completely adhere flooring to

substrate.
b. Complete adhesive coverage to eliminate the possibility of gaps or

space between the slab and flooring material where moisture could
accumulate and create an environment conducive to mold growth.
c. Flooring to be fully adhered to the concrete slab in all locations

eliminating the possibility of waves or wrinkles forming caused by the
floor shifting, moving or by rolling loads displacing it.
6. Traffic-Surface Texture: Wood visual shall have wood grain embossed

texture for a genuine wood appearance and Solid colors to have “pebbled”
embossed texture for an attractive appearance.
7. Bacteriostatic and Fungicidal Treatment: Manufacturer’s factory-applied

permanent treatment throughout the flooring material which can improve
indoor air quality and reduce asthma and allergy risks associated with
bacterial and mold growth.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Gerflor taraflex evolution
8. Applied Finish: Manufacturer's, factory-applied, permanent and UV-cured.
a. No-Wax finish: Published product literature identifying factory applied

finish as, “No-Wax-Just clean and rinse”
b. Basis-of-Design Product: PUR Protect.
9. Field-Applied Finishes: None required and not allowed.
10. Color and Pattern:
a. As selected by Owner/Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors

and patterns.
b. Wood pattern shall accurately simulate the true visual appearance of

natural wood strip flooring.
i. Pattern shall replicate random-length stock by simulating

non-uniform board lengths.
ii. Wood pattern shall not include a dark line simulating edges
or ends of individual boards.
iii. Surface texture shall simulate realistic wood grain and not be
raised or "pebbled" embossing.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. ASTM F 2772-11 Indoor Sport Floor Standard:

20th October 2021
a. Provide certification of compliance for the four ASTM F2772 Indoor

Sport Floor Standard performance categories:
i. Shock Absorption/Force Reduction: Class C2 (22%-

33%). Pass
ii. Ball Bounce: Minimum 90%: Pass
iii. Surface effect/Coefficient of Friction: Between 80-110:

Pass
iv. Vertical deformation: Maximum 3.5mm:

Pass
v. Static Load Limit/Residual Indentation: ASTM F1303; Pass

Static Load Resistance requirement of less than 0.005 inch
of residual indentation as tested per ASTM F 970 at
prescribed test load of 175 p.s.i.
vi. Sound Insulation: EN ISO 717; 19 dB.
vii. Fire Performance: ASTM E 648; Greater than 0.45 W/cm2,

Class 1.
viii. Surface Maintenance Requirements: No-wax surface

requiring only cleaning and rinsing.
ix. Slab Moisture Design Tolerance:
1. Maximum relative humidity (RH) of 95% when tested

according to ASTM F 2170.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable patching compound for standard slab surface preparation: Latex-

modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by flooring manufacturer.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: GerPatch, Gerflor’s patching compound.
B. Adhesive: Water-resistant type recommended by athletic flooring manufacturer for

substrate and conditions indicated. Coverage Type: Full-spread application.
1. Adhesive to comply:
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Gerflor Gerfix Spray adhesive.
b. Coverage: Full-spread application for 100% coverage.
c. Moisture Resistance: 95% relative humidity (RH) when tested

according to ASTM F 2170.
C. Heat Welding Rod: As supplied by indoor resilient flooring manufacturer. Color shall
blend with resilient flooring color.
D. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Complete system including primer, compatible with
flooring and recommended by flooring and paint manufacturers.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the Following:
1. The area in which the indoor resilient flooring will be installed is dry, weather-
tight and in compliance with specified requirements.
2. Permanent heat, lighting and ventilation systems are installed and operable.
3. Other work, including overhead work, that could cause damage, dirt, dust or
otherwise interrupt installation has been completed or suspended.
4. No foreign materials or objects are present on the substrate and that it is

clean and ready for preparation and installation.
5. Tests to verify that the moisture evaporative rate or substrate relative

humidity is within the specified ranges.
6. The concrete slab surface pH level is within the specified range.
7. The concrete slab surface deviation is no greater than 3/16 inch within 10
feet (3.2 mm within 3 m) when measured according to ASTM E 1155.
8. The concrete slab complies with ACI 302.2R for concrete design including
use of a low-permeance vapor barrier directly beneath the concrete subfloor
with sealed penetrations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure

proper adhesion of resilient flooring system.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of sealers, curing compounds and
other additives. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed

with installation only if pH readings are between 7.0 and 8.5.
C. Moisture Testing: Perform ASTM F 2170 relative humidity test and proceed with
installation only after substrates have relative humidity levels below the maximum
allowed.
D. Use Gerflor’s GerPatch trowelable concrete based patching compound with the same
moisture vapor tolerance as the adhesive to fill depressions, holes, cracks, grooves
or other irregularities in substrate.
E. Place flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours before installation. Install flooring materials only after they have
reached the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
F. Sand the surface of the concrete slab.

20th October 2021
G. Sweep and then vacuum substrates immediately before installation. After cleaning,
examine substrate for moisture, alkaline salts, grit, dust or other contamination.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 SHEET MULTI-PURPOSE FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Take necessary precautions to minimize noise, odors, dust and

inconvenience during installation.
3. Fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor
outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.
4. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings
B. Lay out flooring as follows:
1. Minimize number of seams and place them inconspicuous areas.
2. Locate seams as shown on approved Shop Drawings
C. Adhered Flooring: Attach products to substrates using a full-spread of adhesive

applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturer instructions.
D. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Seams: Finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining
flooring surfaces. Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use heat welding rod to
permanently and seamlessly fuse sections together.
3.04 GAME LINES AND LOGOS
A. Lay out game lines and logos to comply with rules and diagrams published by
National Federation of State High School Association for the sports activities
indicated and the Kuwait Local Code.
B. Mask flooring at game lines and logos, and apply paint of color indicated to produce
clean, sharp and distinct edges.
A. Perform the following operations after completing resilient flooring installation:
1. Remove marks and blemishes from flooring surfaces.
2. Sweep and then vacuum flooring.
3. Damp-mop flooring to remove soiling.
B. Protect flooring from abrasions, indentations, and other damage from subsequent
operations and placement of equipment, during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 67 00
EPOXY COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
for performing all operations in connection with the application of epoxy coating.
2. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers
1.02 SUBMITTALS

required.
B. Submit the following:

data, physical properties, material compositions, and application instructions
for all finishing products to be applied hereunder
a. Include certification of data indicating Volatile Organic Compound

(VOC) content of all coatings.
2. Manufacturer’s instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions indicating

special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
a. The manufacturer's recommended methods of installation, when

approved, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or
rejecting actual installation methods used on the Work.
3. Selection samples:
a. Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors available

for selection.
b. Provide additional samples for initial selection of colors and finishes.
4. Verification samples:
a. Samples of each level of slip resistance, aggregate, and pattern

available in the specified products from the proposed manufacturer.
b. 300 by 300 mm samples of finished surface illustrating material color,

texture and finish.
5. Manufacturer’s field quality control reports of field inspections, including,

revised “as-built” shop drawings and manufacturer’s final punch list.
Gulf Consult Epoxy Coating III-2/09 67 00 -1

20th October 2021
6. Manufacturer’s warranties: Include coverage of materials and installation and

resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture.
7. Color chips: After final approval of all colors and tints, submit color chips of all
coatings used, with manufacturer's name and mix designation of the coating
for the purpose of future re-ordering of coatings. Color chips shall be at least
150 by 150 mm in size, for each color and tint.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performance of the work of this Section with 5

years minimum documented experience and trained by manufacturer.
A. Single source responsibility: Provide sealers and other undercoat materials

produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only sealers approved by
coatings manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
1.05 MOCKUP
A. Provide mock-ups as directed by the Engineer.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; container labeling shall
include manufacturer's name, type of paint, color mix designation, expected
coverage, surface preparation instructions, instructions for mixing and reducing,
drying time, and clean-up recommendations.
B. Store materials, conforming to applicable codes and fire regulations, in designated

spaces. Keep storage area secure when direct access is not required or when not
performing work under this Section. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire
hazards and spontaneous combustion, maintain a dry-chemical type fire extinguisher
in all areas where materials of this Section are being stored or used.
C. Store materials in a well ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45

degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
D. Do not use the sanitary system for mixing or disposal of refuse material. Carry water
to mixing rooms and dump waste material in a suitable refuse receptacle. Remove
oily rags and waste each day.
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 10oC for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application
of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply coatings and primers within temperature and humidity range specified by
coating manufacturer.
C. Provide sufficient lighting to maintain 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate

surface.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Immediately notify the Engineer in writing of conditions which may require a change
in the specifications of this Section before proceeding with the work. Failure to do so,

20th October 2021
in a timely fashion, so as not to interfere with the schedule of work of this Contract,
shall be construed as acceptance of the coatings specified. Perform all corrective
measures, at no cost to the Employer, for any defects in the work, resulting from the
use of such materials.
B. Do not order materials until all required schedules have been properly submitted,
reviewed by the Contractor and approved by Engineer’s Representative. Refer to
drawings and Legend of the Finishes-Materials for information.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide Ten (10) years warranty from the date of substantial
completion for the works against cracking, peeling and any other emerging defects.
Defects, damage or failure occurring within the Warranty period shall be
repaired/replaced by the Contractor up to the satisfaction of the Engineer at
Contractor’s own expense
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. BASF Construction Chemicals
B. SIKA
C. Jotun
D. Fosroc
E. Or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
Item Properties
Flexural Strength: 40 N/mm2
Density: 1.6 g/cm3

Epoxy Floor Coating, epoxy resin coating non
slip aggregate over concrete flooring
Solid Content by Volume : Min 99 %
Tensile Strength : 20 N/mm2
A. Application shall be as per manufacturer’s guidelines.
B. Accessory materials: Provide all accessory materials not specifically indicated, but
are required to achieve the finishes specified.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this
Section. Notify Contractor of any condition that may potentially affect proper application
of coatings.
B. Measure moisture content of surfaces, do not apply finishes unless moisture content
of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Masonry or concrete: 7 percent.
C. Beginning of Work of this Section means acceptance of existing substrate surfaces

and site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION - GENERAL
A. Mix and prepare coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Thoroughly mix to ensure uniformity of color and mass, unless otherwise directed by the
manufacturer of the specific coating used. Dispose of materials which have begun to set.
3.03 APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. Apply all materials in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed
instruction, and in accordance with the best trade practices. Each coat shall be
reviewed and approved by the Engineer’s Representative before succeeding coats
are applied.
B. Do not apply successive coating until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, except as
otherwise specified, and in no case in less than minimum period of time
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Upon acceptance of completed existing surfaces, thoroughly remove all dust and
debris by sweeping or by vacuum cleaning.
B. Remove laitance, curing sealers, existing adhesives and other foreign matter from
concrete surfaces with necessary techniques such as shot blasting, muriatic acid
etching, surface freezing and power scarification, high pressure detergent wash,
sweating or burning out.
C. Remove all resulting dust and debris by sweeping or vacuum cleaning.
D. Perform a test application of a square foot in three locations, such as beneath case work.
Allow to set for 72 hours and test adhesion as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.05 FLOOR SURFACING
A. Work shall be done only under optimum conditions as recommended by

manufacturer. Surfaces over which matrix is to be applied shall be completely dry
and thoroughly clean. Substrate and ambient temperature shall be 10 degrees C or
above; if below 15 degrees C, temperature must be stable or rising.
B. Allow surfacing to set undisturbed for a minimum period of 24 hours. Maintain

temperature at 10 degrees C minimum until floor surfacing has completely cured.

20th October 2021
C. Finished surfaces shall be uniform in texture and pattern, and level within a degree of
tolerance of 6 mm in 3 m in any direction.
3.06 INSTALLATION
A. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply epoxy system all in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Allow surfacing to set undisturbed for a minimum period of 24 hours. Maintain

temperature at 10 degrees C minimum until floor surfacing has completely cured.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work in each area, remove all coating splatters from glass,
prefinished surfaces, bright metals, and from other surfaces that have not been painted
or finished hereunder. Do not use abrasive paper or abrasive cleaner on any
prefinished surface or bright metal. Remove all materials and debris; leave work area
in a clean condition.
3.08 PROTECTION AND TOUCH-UP
A. During application of coatings, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage
and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Properly clean,
repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.
B. Protect all finished surfaces against damage until the date of final acceptance of the
work. The Engineer’s Representative will conduct a final review of all work performed.
Re-coat or touch-up, all scratches and other blemishes on surfaces, and as directed
by the Engineer’s Representative, any areas found which do not comply with the
requirements of this Section, and bear all costs therefor.
C. Any re-coating or touch-up work, required after the work of this Section has been
reviewed and accepted by the Engineer’s Representative, will be paid for by the
Contractor.
3.09 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Wear protective gloves at all times when handling materials.
B. Follow manufacturer's advice on health and safety aspects of handling, using and
disposing of materials.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Work included in this section is to preparation of substrates and

fixation of under layment, following carpets (i) Carpet Tiles (ii) Broadloom Carpet
including accessories in the locations shown or indicated on the drawings.
1. Section 03 54 00 - Self-Leveling Screed
2. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrication
3. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive
requirements shall govern.
1. ASTM D 2859 - Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials.
2. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. ASTM E 648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a

Radiant Heat Energy Source.
4. FS DDD-C-95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic.
5. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic,

Polyester, Polypropylene.
6. NFPA: Publication 253 - Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems.
7. All applicable federal, state and municipal codes, laws and regulations
regarding flammability and smoke generation of interior finishes.
A. Manufacturer: Mill specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with a minimum of

three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in carpet installation of the type specified herein

with a minimum of three years documented experience, and approved by carpet
manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following.
Gulf Consult Carpeting III-2/09 68 00 - 1

20th October 2021

data, physical properties, for each item furnished hereunder, including carpet,
accessories, adhesives, and leveling materials.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Provide manufacturer's application

methods or installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.
Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special
attention.
3. Manufacturer's sample warranties.
4. Manufacturer's certificate: Provide certificate stating that the carpet, and

other related materials to be supplied hereunder meet all requirements
specified herein.
5. Shop drawings: 3mm scale plans of all carpeted areas indicating direction of
carpet, location of seams and method of joining seams.
a. Sample containing manufacturer's full color and blend range.
b. Vinyl edge strip sample illustrating manufacturer's full color range.
7. Verification samples:
a. 30 cm long samples of edge strip.
b. After initial selection of carpet and color blends has been made by the
Engineer, submit 100 cm by 100 cm sample of selected carpet for final
approval of the Engineer. Approved samples shall be used as the
standard of quality and colors for materials furnished under this
Contract.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve

temperature and humidity stability.
B. Maintain a temperature of at least 15 degrees Celsius (60 degrees Fahrenheit), with

a relative humidity of between 15 and 60 percent, for a period of 48 hours before,
during, and after installation.
C. Ventilate spaces where work of this Section occurs, during and for a period of 72
hours after completion of curing. Ventilate to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of fumes, vapors, and gases. Provide temporary fan units and ducting
as required to for venting operations
A. Store all carpeting material under cover in dry, well-ventilated spaces as soon as
delivered. Protect carpeting from damage, dirt, stain, moisture, and mildew.
A. Sequence work to ensure carpet is not installed until building is enclosed, appropriate
temperature is maintained, dust generating activities have terminated and work
overhead is completed.

20th October 2021
B. Install carpet after interior wet work is complete and fully cured.
1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Requirements: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity." Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated
for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Substrate Requirements: Do not install carpeting over concrete substrate until

concrete has cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs
have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on

top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties and guaranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties
and guaranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Special Warranty: Furnish 10 year written warranty, signed by the Contractor

and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace carpeting Work which has failed
as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Failure shall include
excessive wear (no more than 10 percent face fiber loss), fading, tearing,
cracking, separation, secondary back delamination, deterioration, loosening
or delamination from substrate (for glue-down method, delamination will not
occur without use of chair pads), seam failure, ripples, scallops, pilling or
puckering. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period,
make necessary repairs, re-stretching, or replacement, at the convenience of
the Employer.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver unused carpet and large scraps (over 0.18m² in area and
over 305mm wide) to the Employer. Store where directed on the Site.
B. Extra Stock
C. Provide extra stock equal to 5 percent of each carpet type specified packaged in
manufacturer's original packaging, labeled as to contents. Store where directed by
Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET
A. General requirements: Carpet, shall conform with or pass tests of the following
Standards:
1. ASTM D-2859 (Methenamine Reagent Pill Test).
2. ASTM E-648 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): Class I (Minimum Average CRF
of 0.48).

20th October 2021
3. NBS Smoke Chamber Test: Maximum average of 450.
4. AATCC-134 (Electrostatic Propensity): Maximum electrostatic generation

below level of human sensitivity.
B. Carpet: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, specifications

have been based on (1) Modulyss. Products of other manufacturers shall conform to
the criteria specified herein below. Specified carpet model is tentative and “Colour and
Pattern” of the carpets shall be selected by the Engineer/Architect from the
manufacturer’s full range of specified product.
S. No. Code Item Manufacturer Type
1 CPTT-01 CARPET TILE FLOR MOD CAFÉ,
Colour - Natural
21-1447-06
Monolithic
Installation
2 CPTT-02 CARPET TILE INTERFACE Isolation,
Colour -
4274002 Wave
Tufted Patterned
Structured Loop
Pile
3 CPTB -01 BROADLOOM EGE THE MOSQUE

COLLECTION
2019
Colour -
RF55001708
Tufted cut pile
Material: 100%
regenerated
Econyl PA6
coloration: Millitron
dyed
Woven Textile
Backing
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the criteria specified herein,

manufacturers offering products which shall be acceptable for the work
include the following:
a. Milliken (Local agent - De Zine Group)
b. Interface

20th October 2021
c. Shaw Industries Inc.
2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Tackless Strip: Water-resistant 3-ply beveled edged plywood in strips, thickness to

match cushion thickness, suitable for commercial installations and in compliance with
CRI 104, 12.2, with 2 rows or 3 rows of angular pins protruding from the top designed
to grip and hold stretched carpet at backing. Adhesives:
1. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining, release-type as

recommended by the carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability
requirements for installed carpet.
2. Cushion Adhesive: Release-type, mildew resistant as recommended by the

cushion manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and cushion and expressly produced for use with specified carpet
cushion on substrate.
B. Metal Edge Strip: Anodized aluminum strip with fold down edge and concealed carpet
gripper teeth, minimum 38mm wide punched anchorage flange and minimum
15.8mm wide fold flange.
C. Rubber Edge Strip: Extruded or molded heavy duty rubber, of sizes, shapes and
height as best suited for the respective purposes intended; colors as selected by
Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color range.
D. Anti-Static Fiber: Metallic carpet fiber; of non-corrosive metal; of sufficient flexibility

and low denier as to be unnoticeable when blended with carpet fiber; effective in
controlling static build-up to 3000 volts with ambient conditions of 15 percent relative
humidity and 22.2 deg. C. in persons with oak-tanned leather soled shoes.
E. Anti-Static Spray: As recommended by carpet manufacturer.
F. Primary Backing, Secondary Backing and Back Coating: As recommended by the

carpet manufacturer for the conditions of installation and use.
G. Seaming Tape: Hot-Melt adhesive tape specifically manufactured for taping seams
and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at
seams.
H. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Type recommended by carpet and/or cushion

manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds.
I. All Other Materials: Manufacturer's standard for the product specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
this Section.
B. Ensure that newly placed concrete has cured for a minimum period of 30 days and
that moisture content of concrete is within range specified by adhesive manufacturer.

20th October 2021
C. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with a maximum variation of 6 mm in
3000mm, and are ready to receive work.
D. Request correction of defects in receiving surfaces which are not correctable by the
methods specified herein. Do not commence work until such defects are entirely
corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges, and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other
defects with sub-floor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat and hard surface, as required to
ensure that carpeted surfaces will be level to within 3 mm tolerance in 3000mm in
any direction.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Thoroughly sweep and vacuum substrate and remove all foreign matter.
E. Measure all areas to receive materials to be furnished and installed hereunder, and
verify in the field their actual dimensions, including wall-to-wall dimensions, offsets,
door locations, and details, fixed equipment, and all other installed items. Extra
charges will not be allowed because of lack of familiarity with actual project
conditions. Use largest carpet widths to produce minimum number of seams. Small
pieces of carpet will not be acceptable.
F. Unroll carpet for adjustment to environmental conditions at least 24 hours prior to

installation.
3.03 TACKLESS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 11 "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip" and as follows:
1. Install tackless strip at perimeter of carpeting, at obstructions and cutouts in

accordance with manufacturer's directions. Maintain uniform spacing from
stripping to wall so that cut carpet edge will turn down to substrate in a tight
slot.
2. Install carpet cushion in the largest possible size over the entire area to be
carpeted. Place cushion with face in direction recommended by the
manufacturer. Butt cushion tight against tackless strip. Lay out cushion
seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams and so as not to occur under
carpet seams. Butt edges of cushion and adhere cushion to substrate with
daubs of adhesive approximately 4 in. in diameter, spaced approximately 2 ft.
apart at all edges.
3. Stretch, adjust and trim carpet in accordance with recognized industry

practice. Use power stretcher of a type recommended by the carpet
manufacturer. Secure edges to tackless strip.
4. Make seams so that pile of adjoining pieces has the same directional run and
so as to be practically invisible. Install carpet with seams heat bond taped
using permanent type construction which is of sufficient strength for
stretching and wear without failure during the life of the carpet. Utilize
equipment and methods for seaming as recommended by the tape
manufacturer. Maintain straight seams running true with the lines of the
building.

20th October 2021
3.04 CLEANING
A. Daily clean work areas by disposing of carpet scraps.
B. After completion of the work of this Section, remove equipment, and clean all wall,
partition, and floor areas free from deposits of adhesives and other materials installed
under this Section.
C. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces upon completion of the installation.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed carpet with polyethylene sheet of sufficient thickness.
B. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this Section, as indicated on the drawings, comprises of

furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials for performing all
operations in connection with the application of painting work in general but not
limited to :
B. Related Sections
3. Section 09 24 00 - Cement Plaster
1.02 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and

Related Products.
2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content

Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.
B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America:
1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
C. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains,

sealers and fillers, and other applied materials specified herein, whether used as
prime, intermediate or finish coats.
A. Single source responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by
same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint
manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
Gulf Consult Painting III-2/09 91 00 - 1

20th October 2021
B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable

manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years.
Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Regulations: Compliance with environmental regulations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS

required :

data, physical properties, material compositions, and application instructions
for all finishing products to be applied hereunder.
2. Samples:
a. Manufacturer's color selector for custom mixed colors for color

scheduling.
b. Opaque coatings: Two 229 mm x 300 mm finished samples on

hardboard of each color scheduled in each finish for review and
approval. Identify boards with finish type, color mix number and
scheduled substrate surfaces or materials.
c. Transparent finishes and stains: Two 229 mm x 300 mm finished

samples on same species of solid wood to be furnished under
section for FINISH CARPENTRY, of each color scheduled in each finish
for review and approval. Identify boards with finish type, color mix
number and scheduled substrate surfaces or materials.
3. Color chips: After final approval of all colors and tints, submit color chips of all
coatings used, with manufacturer's name and mix designation of the coating
for the purpose of future re-ordering of coatings. Color chips shall be at least
150 square mm in size, for each color and tint.
1.06 QUALIFICATION
A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 3 years

minimum documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship.
1. Provide 2m by 2m mock-ups of each type of surface.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; container labeling shall
include manufacturer's name, type of paint, color mix designation, expected
coverage, surface preparation instructions, instructions for mixing and reducing,
drying time, and clean-up recommendations.
B. Store materials, conforming with applicable codes and fire regulations, in designated
spaces. Keep storage area secure when direct access is not required or when not
performing work under this Section. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire

20th October 2021
hazards and spontaneous combustion, maintain a dry-chemical type fire extinguisher

in all areas where materials of this Section are being stored or used.
C. Do not use the sanitary system for mixing or disposal of refuse material. Carry water
to mixing rooms and dump waste material in a suitable refuse receptacle. Remove
oily rags and waste each day.
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain, or when relative humidity is above 50
percent unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Apply paints and finishes above minimum temperature conditions in strict accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide sufficient lighting to maintain 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at

substrate surface.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. The applicator of work specified herein is responsible to ensure that all paints,
enamels, and coatings, proposed to be applied hereunder, are compatible with
coatings used for shop-primed items and items which have been prime-coated under
the work of other trades.
B. Immediately notify the Engineer’s Representative in writing of conditions which may

require a change in the specifications of this Section before proceeding with the work.
Failure to do so, in a timely fashion, so as not to interfere with the schedule of work of
this Contract, shall be construed as acceptance of the coatings specified. Perform all
corrective measures, at no increase in Contract Price for any defects in the work,
resulting from the use of such materials.
C. Painting work should be scheduled so as to minimize touch-ups. Interior painting is to

be without flashmarks. Should flashmarks occur due to touch-ups, the Contractor
shall be required to redo the entire surrounding wall surface.
D. Do not order materials until all required schedules have been properly submitted,
reviewed by the Contractor and Approved by Engineer’s Representative.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide five years warranty from the date of substantial completion for the works
against warping, cracking, peeking and any other emerging defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

products which shall be incorporated in the work include, are:
1. Paints and general finishes:

20th October 2021
a. BENJAMIN MOORE
b. GTC Paint Company, Kuwait
c. Hempel, Kuwait
d. Jotun, Kuwait
2. Interior stains and clear finishes for wood
a. BENJAMIN MOORE
b. GTC Paints, Kuwait
c. Hempel, Kuwait
d. Jotun, Kuwait
e. Sigma Paints, Saudi Arabia
3. Clear wood preservatives (Clear water repellant):
a. Samuel Cabot, Inc., Boston MA.
c. Hempel, Kuwait
4. Cold galvanizing touch-up paint:
a. Z.R.C. Products Company, Quincy MA.
c. Hempel, Kuwait
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except for field catalyzed coatings with good flow and
brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Color
pigments shall be processed to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. Provide best quality grade, where
manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified.
B. Liquid zinc coating for recoating depleted zinc on galvanized steel, and for touch-up
of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Galvanic Zinc-rich coating
containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the
Component Program of Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip
galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-21035A (formally MIL-P-21035A) for repair of
hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements of MIL-P-26915A USAF
Specification for Zinc-Rich Paints. Acceptable products include:
1. Z.R.C. Chemical Products Company, Quincy MA., product: “Z.R.C.”
2. Duncan Galvanizing, Everett Ma., product: “ZIRP”.

20th October 2021
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessory materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other
materials not specifically indicated, but are required to achieve the finishes specified
of commercial quality.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
this Section. Notify Engineer’s Representative of any condition that may potentially
affect proper application of coatings.
B. Measure moisture content of surfaces, do not apply finishes unless moisture content
of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum board and joint treatment: 12 percent.
2. Gypsum plaster: 12 percent.
3. Portland Cement plaster: 15 percent.
4. Masonry or concrete: 12 percent.
5. Interior wood: 15 percent.
C. Beginning Work of this Section means acceptance of existing substrate surfaces and
site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in all areas where coating work is being done to
protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during the work. Protect adjoining
surfaces with painters mask tape.
B. Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove all finish hardware for painting doors
and frames, except hinges and locks on exterior door; remove electrical plates, light
fixture trim and fittings. Re-install hardware and other removed items after painted
surfaces are thoroughly dry.
C. Mix coatings thoroughly, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of the

specific coating used, to ensure uniformity of color and mass. Strain previously
opened coatings to remove skins, lumps, and other foreign matter prior to painting.
D. Thin or reduce materials only as recommended by the specific material manufacturer,

and only with the approval of the Engineer’s Representative.
E. Impervious surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium

phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to thoroughly dry.
F. Concrete and unit masonry surfaces scheduled to receive paint finish:
1. Remove all loose scale and mortar, dirt, salt or alkali powder and any other
surface contaminate, using a detergent expressly formulated for cleaning of
concrete and masonry.

20th October 2021
2. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate.
3. Remove stains caused by weathering corroding metals with a solution of

sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.
4. Thoroughly rinse the cleaned surfaces with clear water, and allow the
surfaces to completely dry, allow a minimum of 4 hours before commencing
application of coatings.
G. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces:
1. Remove grease, scale, dirt, rust, and all foreign materials, down to bright
metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or sandblasting where heavy
coatings of scale are evident.
2. Wash steel with solvent, apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,

ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned.
3. Spot prime after repairs with alkyd base metal primer product of the finish
H. Shop primed steel surfaces:
1. Remove rust, blistered and defective shop prime paint, and all foreign
materials, down to bright metal by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or
commercial paint remover. Feather edges to make touch-up patches
inconspicuous.
2. Remove all grease or dirt with mineral spirits.
3. Spot prime bare metal with alkyd base metal primer product of the finish
coating manufacturer. Seal top and bottom edges of metals doors with
primer.
I. Previously painted steel surfaces:
1. Remove rust, blistered and defective paint, down to bright metal by wire
brushing, scraping, or sanding. Feather edges to make touch-up patches
inconspicuous as possible
2. Remove grease, dirt and all foreign materials.
3. Spot prime bare metal with alkyd base metal primer product of the finish
J. New galvanized surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
K. Aluminum surfaces scheduled for paint finish:
1. Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water.
2. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing.
3. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.
L. New interior wood items scheduled to receive paint finish.

20th October 2021
1. Smooth minor defects and remove all foreign matter by sanding, and if
necessary, steel wool.
2. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch up knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with commercial stain sealer.
3. Fill up nail holes and cracks with wood putty or plastic wood after primer of
first coat of finish is dry, and sand smooth.
M. Gypsum board surfaces: Fill minor defects with latex based spackle. Spot-seal all
compound surfaces and repair areas in gypsum board, with specified first coat
material before application of the first coat.
N. Plaster surfaces:
1. Fill minor defects with joint compound or spackle and seal with alkyd primer.
2. Cracks in plaster: Gouge minor cracks to 2 mm in width and depth and fill
with type “AP” sealant as specified under Section for JOINT SEALERS.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply all materials in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed
instruction, and in accordance with the best trade practices. Each coat shall be
reviewed and approved by the Engineer’s Representative before succeeding coats
are applied.
B. Do not apply successive coating until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry, and in no
case in less than 24 hours after the preceeding coat.
C. Apply each coat to a uniform finish; Apply primer and first coat of slightly lighter in
color tint than the scheduled color of the final coat.
D. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish and remove sanding dust prior
to applying succeeding coat.
E. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
F. Prime back surfaces of all interior and exterior woodwork scheduled for painted finish
with primer.
G. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work in each area, remove all coating splatters from glass,
prefinished surfaces, bright metals, and from other surfaces that have not been
painted or finished hereunder. Do not use abrasive paper or abrasive cleaner on any
prefinished surface or bright metal. Remove all materials and debris; leave work area
in a clean condition.
3.05 PROTECTION AND TOUCH-UP
A. During painting work, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and
damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Properly clean, repair or
replace any work so damaged and soiled.

20th October 2021
B. Protect all painted and finished surfaces against damage until the date of final
acceptance of the work. The Engineer’s Representative will conduct a final review of
all work performed hereunder. Re-coat or touch-up, all scratches and other
blemishes on surfaces, and as directed by the Engineer’s Representative, any areas
found which do not comply with the requirements of this Section, and bear all costs
therefor.
C. Any re-coating or touch-up work, required after the work of this Section has been
reviewed and accepted by the Engineer’s Representative, will be paid for by the
Contractor.
3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE - GENERAL FINISHES AND COLORS
A. General: Number of coats scheduled herein below is minimum required, refer to

Article entitled “APPLICATION” regarding coverage.
B. Tinting and matching shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative. No

limit is placed on the number of colors that may be required, or the number of colors
in any one room, area, or surface. Premium paints of deep-hued, bright, pigment
intensive, accent and primary colors may be scheduled for up to 25 percent of all
interior and exterior surfaces without additional cost.
C. Colors of priming coats (and body coats where specified) shall be lighter in tint than
those of finish coat.
D. A. Colorants shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof, ultra-violet resistant,

finely ground in approved medium; and be limeproof, when used in coatings to be
applied on masonry, concrete, plaster, and gypsum board surfaces.
3.07 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Interior CONCRETE walls and partitions:
1. One coat alkyd primer.
2. Two coats latex eggshell paint:
B. Interior CONCRETE MASONRY walls and partitions:
1. One coat block filler:
C. Interior GYPSUM BOARD (drywall) and GRG partitions:
1. One coat latex primer.
D. Interior GYPSUM BOARD (drywall) ceilings, and underside of soffits:
1. One coat latex primer.
2. Two coats latex flat paint:
E. Interior GYPSUM BOARD (drywall) partitions, and ceilings, at toilet rooms, janitor’s
closets, food preparation and dishwashing areas for epoxy finish:
1. One coat of sealer,

20th October 2021
2. Two coats of semi-gloss Water Based Acrylic-Epoxy Coatings (3 mils DFT

each coat).
F. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER/CEMENT PLASTER to partitions:
1. One coat primer.
G. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER/CEMENT PLASTER, ceilings, and underside of soffits:
1. One coat primer.
2. Two coats latex flat paint:
H. Interior GYPSUM PLASTER/CEMENT PLASTER/CONCRETE partitions, and

ceilings, at mechanical rooms, driveway, loading dock, janitor’s closets, food
preparation and dishwashing areas for epoxy finish:
1. One coat of sealer,
2. Two coats of semi-gloss Water Based Acrylic-Epoxy Coatings (3 mils DFT

each coat).
I. Interior METAL, ALUMINUM, shop primed :
1. Touch up bare metal with latex metal primer.
2. Two coats acrylic semi-gloss enamel:
J. Interior METAL, FERROUS, excluding railings, to receive semi-gloss finish: (includes

galvanized metal doors and frames):
1. Preparation: SSPC - SP6 “Commercial Blast Clean
2. Finish: Hi-Build Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel finish system
a. Primer: Zinc-rich primer (at surfaces previously primed, touch up

bare steel):
i. Tnemec product “37H-78- Primer, Gray”, at 2.0 to 3.0 mils

DFT.
b. First coat:
i. Tnemec “Series 66 Color High-Build Epoxoline II”, at 4.0 to

6.0 mils DFT.
c. Second coat:
i. Tnemec “Series 73 Endura Shield”, at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
K. Interior WOOD DOORS, shop primed to receive painted (opaque) finish:
1. Touch up bare wood with alkyd enamel primer-sealer (undercoater):.

20th October 2021
L. Interior WOOD TRIM, unfinished, to receive painted (opaque) finish:
1. One coat alkyd enamel primer-sealer (undercoater):.
M. Interior WOOD DOORS, LEAVES, FRAMES, WINDOWS AND TRIMS, unfinished, to

receive clear polyurethane (water-based) finish.
1. One coat paste wood filler for open-grained woods.
2. Two coats of satin-gloss (low luster) finish clear water-based polyurethane
3.08 PAINTING SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets
that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black enamel.
B. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard
cabinets to match face panels.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers and access panels on and paint as
scheduled above.
D. Plywood backboards for electrical panels and other equipment. Paint both front and
back surfaces and all edges of plywood backboards before backboards are installed.
1. One coat alkyd enamel primer-sealer (undercoater).
2. Two coats of gloss alkyd enamel paint.
E. Prime and paint insulated and exposed cold pipes, conduit, electrical boxes, insulated
and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are
located in storage, mechanical or equipment spaces or those items which are factory
prefinished.
F. Exposed to view un-insulated hot pipes within finished painted areas: Two coats
heat-resistant enamel conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-496, Type I, applied
when surfaces are less than 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.09 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Fairface Concrete Walls :
1. Manufacturers : GTC, Hempel, Jotun
2. System similar to :
a. One coat alkali resistant primer
b. One coat texture paint
c. Two coats semi gloss colored acrylic paint
B. Exterior WOOD DOOR LEAVES, FRAME, WINDOWS AND TRIMS, scheduled to

receive transparent finish:
1. Strip previous coatings and stained surfaces to bare wood.

20th October 2021
2. One coat of varnish-sealer. (Thin specified varnish with one pint mineral
spirits per gallon of varnish, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer).
3. Two coats of gloss varnish.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 10
Specialties
SECTION 10 14 53
TRAFFIC SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: The work covered by this section as indicated on the drawings and
as specified herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment appliances for
materials and performing all operations in connection with the installation of Traffic
Signs
B. Related Sections: The Contractor shall be required to coordinate the work of other
conjunction with this specification includes but is not restricted to:
1. Section 32 16 14 - Precast Concrete Kerb
2. Section 32 17 23 - Roadway and Parking Marking
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Comply with the relevant schedules and requirements stated in the following manuals
in respect of the layout, legend, dimensions and colours of signs to be used for this
Works.
1. “Traffic Signs Manual” Volumes 1 and 2 of September, 1988 by Kuwait

Municipality or as per the latest edition if available.
B. Unless otherwise stated, the design, materials, construction and erection of signs
shall comply with the standards in the General Specifications for the Traffic Signs
Manual prepared by the Kuwait Municipality.
C. Sign plates employing any method of construction, irrespective of their size and
shape, shall be capable of passing the rigidity tests stated in the relevant standards.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Provide traffic sign work fabricated by a firm specializing in the fabrication of traffic
and similar signs and who are capable of producing work of the highest standard of
quality in the industry.
1.04 SUBMITTALS

required:
1. Manufacturers Data: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative manufacturer’s

specifications and installation instructions and other data to show compliance
with these Specifications.
2. Shop Drawing: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of
traffic sign work. Include details of sections and connections at not less than
1:4 scale as approved by the Engineer’s Representative. Show anchorage
and accessories items and finishes.
3. Samples: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative samples as follows:
Gulf Consult Traffic Signs III-2/10 14 53-1

20th October 2021
a. 150 x 150 mm Samples of each metal plate and metal frames

required.
b. Graphics, full size.
A. Deliver all components to work site completely identified. Store in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, protected from the weather, construction activities and
other possibility of damage or loss.
1.06 LOCATION OF SIGNS
A. Locate all signs as shown on the Drawings. However, the final arrangement and
number of signs shall be subject to the approval of the Kuwait Municipality Traffic
Studies Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Kuwait Supplier, Kuwait
B. Saad Murshed, Kuwait
C. Alam-al-Tasmeem, Kuwait
2.02 METALS
A. Materials and Surfaces: For the fabrication of metal work which will be exposed to
view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes. Do not use
materials which have stains and dis-colourations including welds which do not match
the materials.
B. Flatness and Edges: For exposed work provide materials which have been cold-
rolled, cold-finished, cold-drawn, extruded, stretcher leveled, machine cut and
otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with edges and
corners sharp and true to angle or curvature as required.
C. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide the alloy and type required for strength,
workability, compatibility and colour match after grinding smooth and finishing the
fabricated product.
D. Ferrous Metal (Steel): Provide the alloy and type required for strength, workability,
compatibility and colour match after grinding smooth and finishing the fabricated
product.
1. Cold-RoIled Sheet Steel: ASTM A366 and ASTM A568, commercial quality
with type E matt finish.
2. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40), galvanized, type as
required to meet the assigned performance.
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM AS 12, sunk drown, butt welded, cold-finished and
stress relieved.

20th October 2021
4. Base Plates, Anchor Bolts, etc. : Non-corrosive, zinc coated of the type and
sizes approved and required to withstand the imposed load.
E. Fasteners: Manufactured from the following and as approved by the Engineer’s

Representative.
1. Brackets: Strip aluminium alloy.
2. Clips: Aluminium extruded sections.
3. Screws, bolts, nuts and washers shall be of steel, stainless steel, aluminium
alloy or of a high tensile non-corroding metal. Steel screws, bolts, nuts and
washers which are in contract with aluminium shall be coated wit zinc or
cadmium.
F. Sign Plate and Stiffening Frame
1. Sign Plate
a. Steel Construction: Sheet steel not less than 1.25 mm thick.
b. Aluminium Construction: Aluminium sheet not less than 3 mm thick.
2. Stiffening Frame: Manufactured from approved aluminium sections. Provide

stiffening frames for plate signs having the following:
a. The horizontal or vertical dimension of the sign exceeds 1000 mm.
b. The maximum dimensions is greater than 600 mm and the ratio W/D
or D/W is equal to or greater than 2.5; where D is the depth and W is
the width of the sign.
G. All steel used for the complete work shall be of hot dipped galvanized and all
aluminium shall be of anodized finished, as approved.
2.03 GRAPHIC IMAGE PROCESS
A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy to comply with requirements indicated
for sizes, styles, spacing, content, positions, materials, finishes and colours of letters,
numbers, symbols and other graphic devices.
B. Sign Face Design: Comply with relevant standards in the ‘Traffic Signs Manual’
prepared by the Kuwait Municipality or ‘Kuwait Car Park Signs Schedule’ as
appropriate.
C. Reflectorisatlon: Provide unlit signs with approved reflective sheeting material applied
to all parts of the sign face except any coloured black, to ensure that these signs
have the same appearance after dark as during daylight. The reflective sheeting
material shall embody minute glass spheres within a waterproof plastic film so as to
produce a retroreflective type of reflectivity when illuminated by a vehicle headlamp.
2.04 EARTHWORK, FOUNDATION, ETC.
A. Earthwork for foundations for height gauge structure, where required, shall be
specified in the Section “Earthwork”.
B. Concrete foundations, where required, shall be provided in concrete grade 300

Kg/cm2, all as specified in the Section “Cast-In-Place-Concrete”.

20th October 2021
2.05 FINISH
A. Plate Signs
1. Exposed Surfaces: Painted as shown on Drawings
2. Unexposed Surfaces: Painted
B. Colours of paints and other finishes on signs, posts, fittings etc., shall be as per BS
381 NO. 537 or equivalent standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All traffic signs shall be executed as per “Traffic Signs Manual” Latest Edition by Kuwait
Municipality.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 10 26 13
CORNER GUARDS AND CRASH RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide impact-resistant corner guards and crash railing protection, complete in place,
and as indicated on the drawings and specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading,

and flame resistance, for each item in this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each corner guard
and wall railing protection system component, including photoluminescent inserts.
Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of color and
texture variations expected in each system component. Prepare Samples from the
same material to be used for the Work.
1. Corner Guards: Submit 300 mm Samples of each type of corner guard. Include
examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.
2. Crash Railings: Submit a minimum 600 mm long Sample of the complete

railing system.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system

vinyl components with the following surface-burning characteristics, as determined by
testing materials identical to those required in this Section per ASTM E84 by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify each system components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
B. Impact Strength: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with a

minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of width when tested according
to ASTM D256, Test Method A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CORNER GUARDS
A. By Construction Specialties, Inc. and available from Construction Specialties

International, Dubai, United Arab Emirates, or equal, vinyl/acrylic of Acrovyn, color
scheduled or selected by the Engineer, matte pebblette grain finish. Exposed aluminum
shall have a clear anodized finish. Vinyl/acrylic plastic used in the units shall have color
for full thickness of material, integral anti-bacterial agent, and flame spread of 25 or less
Gulf Consult Corner Guards and Crash Railings III-3 / 10 26 13 - 1

20th October 2021
when tested per ASTM E84. Units shall be C/S Model SFC-20, complete including
aluminum retainers, heat shields, fire barriers, and stainless steel spring clips. Install in
1-piece heights from top of wall base to ceiling unless otherwise indicated. Detail in
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
1. Construction Specialties Inc. (C/S Architectural Products);
2. Korogard;
3. InPro Corporation;
4. Or Other Equal and Approved.
2.02 CRASH RAIL SYSTEM
A. By Construction Specialties, Inc. and available from Construction Specialties

International, Dubai, United Arab Emirates, or equal, models as indicated or scheduled
on the Drawings, complete with retainers, matching end caps, mounting brackets,
continuous center bumper cushions, photoluminescent inserts, and attachment
hardware as required. Install in continuous runs with 6.4 mm bolts and toggles placed
through the cushions and drilled holes in steel backing plates or stud flanges; direct
toggle attachment to veneer plaster system or gypsum wallboard is not permitted.
Mount at heights shown or directed. Detail in Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
Samples.
1. Construction Specialties Inc. (C/S Architectural Products);
2. Korogard;
3. Inpro Corporation;
B. Photoluminescence shall be achieved by chemical (non-radioactive) processes to

produce a glow in the dark effect. The photoluminescence shall be IBC and NFPA
approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the Work of this Section. Install the Work of this
Section in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and recommendations of
manufacturers as approved by the Engineer, anchoring all components firmly into
position in true alignment within a tolerance of one in 1000 vertically and horizontally.
END OF SECTION
Gulf Consult Corner Guards and Crash Railings III-3 / 10 26 13 - 2

20th October 2021
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET ACCESORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work of this section includes installations and fixing in position of Toilet Accessories
complete with all components and fittings as shown in the schedule / drawings but
not limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install toilet, bath and custodial accessories.
2. Furnish toilet and bath accessory templates, to locate anchorage

reinforcement, to trades responsible.
B. Related Sections
specification includes but is not restricted to :
4. Division 22 – Mechanical Works
1.02 REFERENCES

2. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic

Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

Process.
4. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
5. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of

Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.
6. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
7. Federal Specification Unit:
a. FS A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass.
Gulf Consult Toilet Accessories III-2/10 28 00 - 1

20th October 2021
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01 33 00 : Submittal Procedures are

required :
1. Literature : Manufacturer’s product data sheets, for each item furnished

hereunder.
2. Schedule: Complete schedule, indicating types, quantity, and model numbers

of accessories for each location in which the accessories will be installed.
3. Selection samples : Sample color chips indicating each manufacturer’s full

range of colors available for selection.
4. Verification samples: Complete units, as requested.
A. Conform to applicable codes and handicap regulations for installation work, and in
conformance with ANSI A 117.1.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name,

identification of manufacturer or supplier and item identification number
corresponding with approved schedule.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from
weather, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and
other causes.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with placement of internal wall reinforcement and
reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide 5 years of warranty for all products and their installations
under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Clifton Park NY.
B. American Specialties, Inc. Yonkers. NY
C. Bradley Corporation / Washroom Accessories Division, Menomonee Falls, WI.
D. A & J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY USA
E. D Line International, Denmark.

20th October 2021
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless steel sheet : ASTM A 167, Type 304.
B. Tubing : ASTM A 269 stainless steel.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Refer Architectural drawings for schedule of accessories.
2.04 LOCKS
A. General : All locks shall be keyed alike. Provide four (4) keys, for lockable
accessories, to the Engineer’s Representative.
2.05 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof.
B. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Type 304 stainless, tamperproof.
C. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory

manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Form exposed surfaces from single of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without
distortion, scratches or dents. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated
components.
B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent
electrolysis.
C. Shop assembles components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Hot
dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. Provide steel
anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
A. Ferrous metals: Clean and treat, spray apply one coat of baked-on rust and moisture-
resistant primer, followed by two coats of baked-on synthetic enamel, in selected
colors. Ensure that finish coating is uniform in color intensity and degree of gloss,
throughout.
B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM 456, Type SC2, satin finish.
C. Stainless steel: Number 4 satin finish, except as otherwise specified above under the
Article entitled “Toilet Accessories”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide Templates and rough-in measurements as required. Deliver inserts and

rough in frames to site at appropriate times for building – in by other trades.

20th October 2021
B. Coordinate with trade responsible for providing receiving surfaces on which

accessories will be installed.
C. Exact locations of accessories within each room or area shall be as directed by the
Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation works in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the
manufacturer’s installation instruction.
B. Install Toilet accessories absolutely level and in true line , securely and rigidly
anchored with theft proof fasteners of the size and type most appropriate for the
specific receiving surface, concealing the fasteners as far as practicable.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Replace Units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended
for the application made.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove all protective films and coverings from accessories, clean and polish each
piece. Remove all rubbish, packing materials and debris, caused by the work of this
section.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
GLW-01
%XLOGLQJV All Washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Surface mounted mirror with LED

lighting
6SHFLILFDWLRQV "good" - version, IP 44, LED dual

light fields, external switch,
LED (lifespan > 30.000 hours), LED
module fixed install, Energy
class: A++, LED module 4000 kelvin
light colour, 20 W
on/off function only with external

wall switch possible, only mains
voltage 220V -240V possible
'LPHQVLRQV 34W x 600L x 700H mm
Duravit
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
LM7865
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-01
%XLOGLQJV All washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Toilet paper dispenser
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Circular toilet paper dispenser for 1

industrial roll 400m or 3 standard
rolls, surface mounted.
Manual dispensing.
Robust and vandal-proof.
Suitable for very high traffic facilities.
Model suitable for public use with

high strength and durability.
Stainless steel satin finish.
'LPHQVLRQV 300 diameter x 123 depth mm
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
PR0789CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-02
'HVFULSWLRQ Soap dispenser
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Automatic wall-mounted liquid soap

dispenser of 1 L capacity,
manufactured in stainless steel AISI
304, 0.8 mm thick.
Suitable for high traffic and public

use.
Level display located in the front part

of the soap dispenser. It constantly
indicates the level of soap available
inside the soap dispenser.
'LPHQVLRQV 110W X 240H X 120D MM
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
DJ0037ACS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-03
%XLOGLQJV All disabled washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Automatic faucet
6SHFLILFDWLRQV • Reliable Infrared Activation

• Adjustable Operating Modes
• Vandal Resistant
• Above-Deck Water-Tight
Electronics
• 6V Lithium Battery Operation
(Battery Included)
• 12V AC Transformer Available (Not
Included)
Bradley
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
S53-326
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-03A
%XLOGLQJV All in-patient washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Automatic faucet
6SHFLILFDWLRQV • 0.5 gpm (1.9 lpm) maximum flow

rate.
• Factory set 30 second max.
continual run cycle.
• Vandal-resistant aerator.
• 24" (610 mm) flexible supply hoses
for easy installation.
• 6-3/16" (157 mm) spout reach.
• Less drain.
Electric Sensor technology.
Polished Chrome finish.
Kohler
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
K-13472
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-03B
%XLOGLQJV All public washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ The single piece WashBar Duo allows

users to access soap and water
without leaving the hand washing
station. The unit handles washroom
traffic quickly and economically,
while providing each user with
personal space.
6SHFLILFDWLRQV -Chrome plated cast alloy WashBar®

Duo includes touch-free soap and
water.
-WashBar technology intuitively
guides user and eliminates
simultaneous activations
-Available with foam or liquid soap
-WashBar Duo comes complete with

supply hoses and soap dispenser
components
-Polished Chrome finish.
Bradley
0DQXIDFWXUHU
WashBar Duo
3URGXFW
WBD1
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-04A
%XLOGLQJV All public washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Paper towel dispenser, hand dryer,

and trash bin combined unit
6SHFLILFDWLRQV -Recessed combination towel

dispenser, hand dryer and waste
-receptacle made of stainless steel
AISI 304, with exposed surfaces in
satin finish.
-Warp-free door equipped with
piano hinge and secured by two
tumbler locks
-Robust and vandal-resistant,
suitable for high traffic facilities.
Model suitable for public use.
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
DTES0060CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-04B
%XLOGLQJV All disabled washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Paper towel dispenser
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Robust and vandal-resistant, these

dispensers are designed to be
installed in any type of public
washroom.
Models for a more efficient use of
the paper and suitable for different
washroom environments: hospitals
and health centers.
Models suitable for C/Z folded paper
towels; in this category, products are
available that allow amounts ranging
between 400 and 600 towels.
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
3URGXFW&RGH DT2106CS
TA-05
'HVFULSWLRQ Concealed Water closet flush sensor
6SHFLILFDWLRQV -Fixed volume piston with filtered

O-ring bypass
-Front access wall plate requires no
rear access plumbing chase
-Sensor activated, hands-free
operation
-Battery operated with hardwired
option
-Electronic override button
-Low battery indicator light
-Vandal resistant wall plate
-Adjustable flush connection
Stainless steel brushed finish.
'LPHQVLRQV
Sloan
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
CX 8158
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-06
'HVFULSWLRQ Toilet hand spray
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Flexible 1.2 meter hose.
Chrome plated zinc construction to

avoid rust.
Operating pressure 1-7 bars. High

pressure spray.
Polished chrome finish.
Angle Valve accessory.
'LPHQVLRQV
Sloan
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
3701100IN
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-07
'HVFULSWLRQ Sanitary bag dispenser
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Sanitary bag dispenser with front and

rear plate welded, made in stainless
steel AISI 304.
Model suitable for collectivities.
Without removable components.
'LPHQVLRQV
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
AI0920CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-08
%XLOGLQJV All Washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Wall mounted trash bin
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Wall mounted trash bin.
Stainless Steel Construction, satin

finish.
25 Litre capacity.
'LPHQVLRQV 353W x 460L x 155H mm
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
PPA0279CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-09A
%XLOGLQJV All Disabled Washrooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Wall mounted grab bar
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Stainless steel satin finish grab

bar for accessibility.
'LPHQVLRQV 70 MM depth, length according to

size required.
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
BR0300CS, BR0400CS, BR0600CS,

3URGXFW&RGH BR00750CS, BR0900CS & BR1200CS
TA-09B
'HVFULSWLRQ Wall mounted swing up grab bar
6SHFLILFDWLRQV The grab bar consists of a "U" shape

tube with a crosspiece that
incorporates a roll holder for toilet
paper, welded to the crossbar and a
3 mm hick wall plate, which has six
6.5 mm diameter holes for fixing the
bar to the wall. Long lasting
performance. It incorporates a
progressive friction brake system
that allows placing the bar in 3
different positions. This system
prevents the accidental collapse of
the bar, helping keep bathrooms
safer and barrier-free.
'LPHQVLRQV 738L x 300W x 100D MM
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
BG0900CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-09C
'HVFULSWLRQ 90º angled wall mounted bar
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Grab bar, 90º angle to the right

(BAD090C & BAD090CS) or to the left
(BAI090C & BAI090CS) with snap
flange cover, made of stainless steel
AISI 304, for showers, baths and
changing rooms.
Concealed screw mounting flanges.
Highest durability and rusting
resistance.
Mounting hardware for brick wall is
included for easy installation. Satin
finish.
'LPHQVLRQV 866L x 457W x 82D MM
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
BAI090C-CS
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-010
%XLOGLQJV All diaper changing rooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Baby diaper changing platform
6SHFLILFDWLRQV BabyMedi changing stations offer a

very high level of safety and
cleanliness being the ideal solution for
public spaces. Models suitable for high
traffic facilities with high strength and
durability. Biocote® antimicrobial
additive, based on ion silver
technology, is embedded into its own
surface, promoting an easy cleaning
and reducing the growth of odor
causing and staining microbes. They
supplied (inside the packing box) with
child protection straps made of nylon.
A pair of bag hooks (one at the right
side and the other one at the left) help
to keep personal belongings close and
at hand.
'LPHQVLRQV 550W X 890H X 480D (when

opened) MM
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
BabyMedi
3URGXFW
CP0016V
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-11
'HVFULSWLRQ floor drain
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Floor drains with square top plate

and vertical outlet removable Total
Hygienic cup shaped odor trap and
filter basket.
Stainless steel AISI 304
Inoxsystems
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
75 V 308 TH
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-12
%XLOGLQJV All janitor closets
'HVFULSWLRQ utility sink faucet
6SHFLILFDWLRQV -8" (203 mm) centers.

-Swivel/rigid gooseneck spout.
-8-3/16" (208 mm) spout reach.
-1/4-turn full brass ceramic valve.
-Vandal-resistant aerator.
-4-1/16" vandal-proof metal
-wristblade lever handles.
-Polished chrome finish.
Kohler
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
K-820T70-5AFA
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-13
%XLOGLQJV All locker rooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Locker
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Tough, attractive, solid plastic never

needs painting; resists dents and
scratches
Impervious to moisture, lockers will
not rust or delaminate
Made from 30% pre-consumer
recycled HDPE plastic
Durable, vandal resistant all-welded
construction
Wide range of sizes, colors and
options
ADA compliant handle operation
20-year warranty against rust,
delamination or breakage under
normal use*
'LPHQVLRQV 15W X 72H X 15D inches
Bradley
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
72" Z Locker
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-14
%XLOGLQJV All shower rooms
'HVFULSWLRQ Shower Tray
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Shower tray with antislip
Duravit
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
720120000000001
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-15
'HVFULSWLRQ Shower mixer
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Thermostatic shower trim for

concealed installation
'LPHQVLRQV 160 Diameter X 94 Depth MM
Duravit
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
C14200016U10
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-15A
'HVFULSWLRQ Shower head
6SHFLILFDWLRQV connection thread 1/2", silicon nubs

for easy cleaning, 1 spray mode,
with air function, Chrome finish
UV0610004
twist free hose 63 inches

long
'LPHQVLRQV 152 W X 105 Diameter MM
Duravit
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
UV0650010
3URGXFW&RGH
TA-16
'HVFULSWLRQ Foldable shower seat
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Folding seat with floor support made

of stainless steel AISI 304, satin or
bright finish.
Suitable to achieve barrier-free
accessibility in bathrooms and public
spaces. It can be installed inside the
shower.
Highest durability and rusting
resistance. Easy cleaning.
Designed to withstand a maximum
load of 120 kg, provided it is properly
mounted to the wall.
Opening system that unfolds the seat
support by swinging the seat down.
'LPHQVLRQV 450W x 410L x 509H MM
Mediclinics
0DQXIDFWXUHU
3URGXFW
AM0251CS
3URGXFW&RGH
SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers
b. Fire hose reels/valves
c. Dry riser inlet
d. Wet riser inlet
e. Fire Brigade Breaching Inlet
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers.
2. Division 21 Fire-Suppression
1.03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc:
1. UL- Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
protection cabinets.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing

mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction,
door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
Gulf Consult Fire Protection Cabinets III - 2 / 10 44 13 - 1

20th October 2021
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below:
1. Size: 150 by 150 mm square.
E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet
schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function
A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements
in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B. Cabinets shall be LPCB certified.
C. Product and material Specifications shall comply with the following:
1. Ministry of Public Works (MPW), Kuwait - General specifications for Buildings

and Engineering Works, Volumes I and II, 1990
2. Kuwait Fire Force (KFF)
3. Kuwait Standard Specifications (KSS)
4. British Standards Institute (BSI)
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Inc.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7. NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
8. FM listing and labeling.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses,
hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
Employer of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

20th October 2021
B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer,

and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace fire
extinguisher cabinets that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

weathering.
2. Failure to function as specified in this section.
3. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
4. Adhesive or cohesive adhesive/ sealant failures.
C. Warranty Period: As per manufacturer standard warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1. Potter-Roemer Tri-Star, Santa Ana, CA 92704, (800) 366-3473.
2. SFFECO, KSA
3. NAFFCO, UAE
4. Or other equal and approved under provisions of the General Conditions of

Contract.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Powder Coated Galvanized Mild Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh m1 (diamond),
6 mm thick.
2.03 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Material: Stainless Steel
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
B. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated.
1. Trim less with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush
with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping
trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box,
attached to box to act as plaster stop drywall bead.
20th October 2021
C. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with
no trim. Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for semi recessed cabinet
installation.
D. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
E. Door Material: Stainless Steel
F. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame
G. Door Glazing: Wire glass (Clear tempered safety glass)
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide [either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed

door pull and friction latch
2. Provide [continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim or concealed

hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
I. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities
of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handles with the word "FIRE"
embossed into face.
3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by
pulling sharply on door handle
4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter

style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Engineer.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
HOSE CABINET
i. Location: Applied to cabinet door.
ii. Application Process: Decals
iii. Lettering Color: Red.
iv. Orientation: Horizontal.
J. Finishes:
1. Galvanized Steel powder coated.
2. Stainless steel.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

20th October 2021
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
4. Install door locks at factory.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials

indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,
minimum 13 mm thick.
2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
2.05 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from

damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.06 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8,
"Pickling" After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be
applied over it.
B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-
free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,

apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of0.05 mm.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
cabinets will be installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated
or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets.
D. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and
plumb.
E. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection
cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces
as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract,

apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers
2. Wheeled fire extinguishers
3. Fire-protection accessories
1.03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc:
1. UL- Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for
each type of cabinet finish indicated.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM Global.
Gulf Consult Fire Extinguishers III - 2 / 10 44 16 – 1

20th October 2021
D. Product and material Specifications shall comply with the following:
1. Ministry of Public Works (MPW), Kuwait - General specifications for Buildings

and Engineering Works, Volumes I and II, 1990
2. Kuwait Fire Force (KFF)
3. Kuwait Standard Specifications (KSS)
4. British Standards Institute (BSI)
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Inc.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7. NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
8. NFPA 70
9. ASTM E 814
10. FM listing and labeling.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated and provided by Employer under separate Contract are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1. Potter-Roemer Tri-Star, Santa Ana, CA 92704, (800) 366-3473.
2. Kidde, USA
3. Angus, USA
4. SFFECO, KSA
5. NAFFCO, UAE
6. Or other equal and approved under provisions of the General Conditions of

Contract.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
commercial steel (CS) Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer

for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

20th October 2021
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209M.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221M.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type SS304 / SS316.
2.03 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Portable extinguishers shall have Stainless steel tank with polished and clear coated
finish shells with floor stand (injection moulded plastic shells shall be considered for
approval, when contents are not stored under pressure - i.e. those with pressure
cartridges) internal lining of polypropylene or similar material and external enamel
finish over rust proofing. Colour of finishing shall be coded as follows:
1. Carbon Dioxide Black
2. Water Red
3. BCF Green
4. Dry Powder Blue
B. Extinguishers shall have labels attached, which states the date of last inspection, next
due date and the name and address of the inspection agency.
1. Water pressure: 9 litres (2 gallons) capacity, stainless steel tank/copper tank

with polished and clear coated finish, pressurized with granular soda, flexible
discharge pipe with nozzle, trigger valve, controllable discharge
2. CO2: 6 Kg capacity, stainless steel /cast steel tank with pressure gage;
flexible discharge hose and long, plastic horn, trigger type operating lever
and safety locking pin
3. Dry powder: 5 kg capacity, stainless steel/cast steel tank with pressure gage,
flexible discharge hose and nozzle / fixed nozzle, trigger type operating lever,
safety locking pin, wall mounting bracket and integral mounting hook
2.04 WHEELED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Powder
1. Large extinguisher with 25 / 50 kg powder, external nitrogen cylinder for

propelling the charge, 7.5 / 15 m long flexible hose with suitable discharge
nozzle etc., all mounted on a trolley with handle, brackets for winding the
hose and solid rubber tires
2. Suitable protective covers shall be provided for units exposed to the

elements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher,

of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or
baked-enamel finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
2. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets.

20th October 2021
B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Engineer.
1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface.
2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"

applied to door.
a. Application Process: Engraved.
b. Lettering Color: Red.
c. Orientation: Horizontal.
2.06 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range for
these characteristics.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
2.08 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below
immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and

chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish
paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for
field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
D. Polyester Powder Coating: Approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 603 or
BS 6496 and BS EN 13438, consisting of powder particles of resinous material and
additives to improve performance. The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on to

20th October 2021
produce a hard, durable coating.
1. Minimum dry film thickness: [60][80] microns.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
3. Surface finish: [gloss][satin][matt].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
and semi recessed cabinets are to be installed.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection

specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
Division 12
Furnishings
SECTION 12 24 13
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Supply and installation of Roller shades, motorized operation and accessories.
1. Intelligent encoded electronic drive system
2. Motor controls, interfaces, and accessories.
B. Shade fabric.
A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Metal stud blocking for mounting roller shades
and accessories, such as pockets.
B. Section 09 21 00 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board

assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.
C. Electrical power requirements and controls for motorized roller window shades.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi.
B. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority

Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. Information required with Submittal of

Bid:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,

profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions.
c. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
d. Mounting details and installation methods.
Gulf Consult Roller Window Shades III-2/12 24 13 - 1

20th October 2021
2. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation

details, operational clearances, etc.
3. Prepare shop drawings on AutoCAD
4. Window Treatment Schedule: For all shades. Use same room designations
as indicated on the Drawings and Project Window Schedule include opening
sizes and key to typical mounting details.
5. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions

regarding cleaning materials and methods.
6. Motorized Shades: Power requirements. Typical wiring diagrams including

integration of EDU controllers with building management system, audiovisual
and lighting control systems as applicable.
7. Prepare control wiring diagrams based on zones, switching and operational

requirements provided by the Architect in electronic format.
8. Include one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical

dimensions of each item.
9. Provide location plan showing all switch and control zones as per the
performance requirements of the specifications. All switches, sensors and
other control accessories must clearly be shown and called out in a bill of
materials.
10. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room
designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and
key to typical mounting details.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single
manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing products
comparable to those specified in this section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer must be trained with a minimum of 5 years

experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
Installer to submit current documentation from the manufacturer certifying their
status.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale

vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of one roller shade assembly of each Shade Type for
evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories.
1. Locate mock-ups in windows designated by the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Engineer.
3. Full size mock-up may become part of the final installation.
E. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or
other testing agency ACCEPTABLE to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for

20th October 2021
intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be
acceptable in lieu of system testing.
F. Shade Cloth Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for
fungi ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645.
G. Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized

roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized
roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring
specified in this Section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer.
The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control
wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power
wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in
accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the
following with the roller shade installer/dealer:
H. Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate
roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and
electrical drawings.
I. Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before

inaccessible areas are constructed.
J. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of
sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in
locations designated by roller shade dealer.
K. Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas, which might not be
accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or
schedule.
A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product

name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room
designations indicated on Drawings and in the Project Window Treatment Schedule.
A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is
complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shade cloth: 10-year warranty from the date of
substantial completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer, as basis of design, performance and warranty:
1. MechoShade Systems, Inc.

20th October 2021
2. Hunter Douglas, Middle East, UAE
3. Luton GL. Ltd. UAE.
4. Or Approved Equal
2.02 ROLLER SHADES, MOTORIZED OPERATION AND ACCESSORIES
A. Shade System; General:
1. Motorized Shades: Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Components capable of being removed or adjusted without removing

mounted shade brackets, cassette support channel,
3. Operates smoothly when raising or lowering shades.
4. Cradle-to-Cradle certified and listed in C2C (DIR).
5. Electrical Components: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for intended

purpose. Test as total system. Individual component testing is acceptable.
a. Components: FCC compliant where applicable.
B. Basis of Design: Motor operated fabric window shade system complete with mounting
brackets, roller tubes, hem bars, hardware, and accessories.
1. Description: Single roller.
2. Drop Position: Reverse roll.
3. Mounting: Ceiling mounted.
4. Size: As indicated on drawings.
5. Fabric: As indicated under Shade Fabric article.
6. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for

mounting indicated and to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight.
a. Material: Steel, (3 mm) thick.
b. Double Roller Brackets: Configured for light-filtering and room-

darkening shades in one opening.
Light-Filtering Fabric: Room-side of opening.
Room-Darkening Fabric: Glass-side of opening.
c. Multiple Shade Operation: Provide hardware as necessary to operate

more than one shade using a single motor.
d. Radiuses Center Support Brackets: Provide brackets and connectors

for radiused window applications.
Maximum Offset: 22.5 degrees on each side for a 45 degree total

offset.

20th October 2021
Maximum Offset: 8 degrees on each side for a 16 degree total offset.
7. Roller Tubes:
a. Material: Extruded aluminum.
b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer; selected for suitability for

installation conditions, span, and weight of shades.
c. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl

spline welded to fabric edge. Shade band to be removable and
replaceable without removing roller tube from brackets or inserting
spline from the side of the roller tube.
8. Hem bars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat.
a. Style: Full wrap fabric covered bottom bar, flat profile with heat
sealed closed ends.
b. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar with matching finials.
i. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard color

selection.
c. Room-Darkening Shades: Provide a slot in bottom bar with wool-pile

light seal.
9. Accessories:
a. Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia, size as required to

conceal shade mounting, attachable to brackets without exposed
fasteners.
i. Finish: Clear anodized.
ii. Profile: Square.
iii. Configuration: Captured and continuous, as indicated on

drawings.
b. Ceiling Pockets: Premanufactured metal shade pocket with

removable closure panel, for recess mounting in acoustical tile or
drywall ceilings; size and configuration as indicated on drawings.
c. Ceiling Pockets with Prewired Raceway:
i. Basis of Design: ElectroPocket; MUL 325 listed, extruded

aluminum shade pocket for recess mounting in acoustical tile
or drywall ceilings; size and configuration as indicated on
drawings.
1. Removable closure panel.
2. Ceiling tile support.

20th October 2021
ii. Designed to accommodate installation of motor control and

wiring accessories within pocket including, but not limited to,
line voltage disconnect modular connector,
iii. Light-Filtering Fabric: Room-side of opening.
iv. Room-Darkening Fabric: Glass-side of opening.
10. Roller Tubes: Extruded aluminum. Capable of being removed and reinstalled
without affecting roller shade limit adjustments.
a. Size: As recommended by manufacturer; for installation conditions,

span, and weight of shades.
b. Fabric Attachment: Extruded channel in tube accepts vinyl spline

welded to fabric edge.
i. Shade Band: Removable and replaceable without removing

roller tube from brackets or inserting spline from the side of
the roller tube.
11. Hem bars: Maintains bottom of shade straight and flat.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard coordinated with shade fabric

selected.
b. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard color selection.
i. Room-Darkening Shades: Slotted bottom bar
C. Modes of Operation:
1. Normal Mode: Shades move to defined intermediate stop positions and any
position between defined upper and lower limits.
2. Maintenance Mode: Prevents shade from moving via dry contact or network
control commands mode has been cleared/disabled.
D. Control Methods: Local isolated dry contact input and network control.
1. Local Isolated Dry Contact Inputs:
a. Local switch control, third party system integration without separate

interface.
b. Switch Personalities: Configuration of dry contact control port over

network such that any type of dry contact keypad/third-party interface
and actuation Dry Contact Control Connection Options to Include:
i. One-button.
2.03 SHADE FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb,
unless specifically indicated otherwise.

20th October 2021
B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-
sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided
shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18
mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or
weave design. Fabricate hem as follows:
1. Bottom hem weights.
C. Provide battens in standard shades as required assuring proper tracking and uniform
rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-
height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such
standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure
proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall
be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Access and Material Requirements:
1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from
brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end
or center supports to be removed.
2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the
shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating
support brackets.
2.05 SHADE FABRIC
A. Basis of Design: Shade fabric as manufactured by MechoShade Systems LLC.
1. Solar Shade cloths: As shown on the finishing schedule and as approved by

the Engineer.
Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Blackout Shade cloths:
Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings as
indicated on the Drawings. Where drywall pocket exists, provide closure assembly.
1. Provide either extruded aluminum #4133 and formed steel shade pocket,
sized to accommodate single or double roller shades, with exposed extruded
aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable closure panel to provide
access to shades.

20th October 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install window shades level, plumb, square, true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to
interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.
B. Adjust and balance window shades to function smoothly, easily, safely, and free from
binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
C. Clean window shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and

maintain window shade systems.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021
SECTION 12 36 62
SOLID POLYMER VANITY COUNTER TOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Work of this section includes fabrications, installations and fixing in
position of Solid Polymer Vanity Countertops complete with all accessories as per
shown in the drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications, performance

data. Identify available colors, shades and gloss.
2. Shop drawings: Large-scale design details of minimum 1:5 (1-1/2 inch-to-1

foot) scale, showing abutting materials, installation conditions, clearances.
Show profiles, jointing and fastening methods.
a. Solid polymer samples for initial color selection by Engineer.
b. Sealant material: Manufacturer’s standard strips of sealant, in all

available colors, for selections by the Engineer.
c. Provide additional samples as requested by Engineer for initial

selection of material colors and finishes.
4. Verification Samples:
a. 300mm by 300mm (12 by 12) inch samples of solid polymer

materials.
A. Concrete, masonry, plaster, tile and marble setting and polishing and other wet work
shall be completed and dry before delivery, storage and installation of polymer items.
B. Ship and handle all materials and fabricated items in a manner, which will prevent
damage thereto, and store all materials and fabricated items at a dry, elevated,
ventilated and protected interior location.
C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays and to minimize on-site storage.
Gulf Consult Solid Polymer Vanity Counter Tops III-2/12 36 62 - 1

20th October 2021
A. Maintain ambient temperature above 13 degrees C. (55 degrees F.) for 5 calendar
days before, during and after installation of polymer fabrications; maintain
temperature until Employer’s Final Acceptance.
A. Field dimensions: The fabricator is responsible for details and dimensions not
controlled by Project conditions and shall shown on his shop drawings all required
field measurements beyond his control.
B. The Contractor shall acknowledge the fabricator’s need for accurate field dimensions
prior to custom fabrication.
C. The Contractor and the fabricator shall cooperate to establish and maintain these
field dimensions.
A. Coordinate the work of this section with the respective trades responsible for
installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is
acceptance to such trades for the installation of their work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

products which may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1. E.I. du Pont Nemours and Co. Inc., Wilmington DE, 001-302-774-1000,

product, “Corian”.
Tele: +971 50 4521511
2. Techno Smart
Kuwait. Tele/Fax: - (965) 24317303 Mobile: 99447860
Email: info@technosmartkwt.com
Website: www.technosmartkwt.com
3. Formica Corporation, Cincinnati, OH, 001-513-786-3400, product “Surell”.
2.02 SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS
A. Solid surfacing material: Non-porous surfacing material homogeneously composed of

natural minerals and high-performance polymer, fabricated sizes and profiles as
shown on the Drawings, in colors and finishes as selected by Engineer.
1. Solid surfacing material shall be NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) listed

under publication 51 – Plastic Materials and Components used in Food
Equipment and bear the “component” mark.

20th October 2021
2. Colors and patterns shall be selected by the Engineer/Architect
B. Sheet thickness shall be as specified below or as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Countertops: One piece monolithic design 13mm thick.
2. Countertop edges: Double rounded edges, using 13mm build-up strip

adhered to counter top with joint adhesive. Top and bottom edges shall be
formed to profile indicated.
3. Backsplashes: 13mm thick and 100mm height, if not shown on the drawings.
C. Adhesive for build-up of polymer sheets: color matched two-component seam

adhesive as provided by polymer manufacturer.
D. Adhesive for installation of trim components, neoprene panel adhesive or structural

silicone glazing sealant as recommended by polymer manufacturer.
E. Type: Corian or approved by the Engineer.
F. Performance Characteristics:
PROPERTY REQUIREMENT (min/max) TEST

PROCEDURE
Tensile Strength 5000 psi min ASTM D638
Tensile Modulus 1.0 x 106 psi min ASTM D638
Flexural Strength 7000 psi min ASTM D790
Flexural Modulus 1.0 x 106 psi min ASTM D790
Elongation 0.3% min. ASTM D638
Strain at Break 0.8% min. ASTM D638
Hardness 90-Rockwell "M" scale ASTM D758
52-Barcol Impressor min.
Thermal Expansion 3.5 x 10-6 in/in/deg C max ASTM D696
1.95 x 10-6 in/in/deg F max
Color Stability No change,min. 100 hours NEMA LD3-3.10
Wear and Clean ability Passes ANSI Z124.3
Abrasion Resistance No loss of pattern Weight loss (1000 NEMA LD3-3.01

cycles) =0.9 g. max. ANSI Z124.3
Boiling water Surface No Change NEMA LD3-3.05

Resistance
High Temperature No Change NEMA LD3-3.06

Resistance

20th October 2021
Conductive Heat No Change NEMA LD3-3.08

Resistance
Impact Resistance 0.24 ft.-lbs./in. of notch min ASTM D256,

Method A
Gardner 9.0 ft-lbs min.
ASTM D3029
Ball drop
36" min. with 1/2 lb ball, no failure NEMA LD3-303
1/2" sheet 140" min. with 1/2 lb ball, no failure
3/4" sheet 200" min. with 1/2 lb ball, no failure
Bowls (point impact) No cracks or chips ANSI Z124.3 and

124.6
Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z124.3
Weatherability No change, ASTM D1499-84
min. 1000 hours
Fungi and Bacteria No Attack ASTM G21,

ASTM G22
Specific Gravity 1.6 min.
Water Absorption 24 hrs. Long Term ASTM D570
Weight 0.05 (1/4") max. 0.50 (1/4") max.
(% max.) 0.10 (3/4") max. 0.90 (3/4") max.
Flammability ASTM E84
Solid Colors 1/4" 1/2" 3/4"
Flame spread 25 max 25 max 25 max
Smoke developed 30 max 30 max 30 max
Class 1 1 1
Particulate Patterns
1/4" 1/2" 3/4"
Flame spread 25 max 25 max 25 max
Smoke Developed 30 max 30 max 30 max

20th October 2021
Class 1 1 1
Solids-80 grams min.
Pittsburgh Protocol "LC50" Test
particulate patterns-65
Toxicity (as used by NY
grams min.
state)
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant, for joints between countertops and dissimilar materials: Joint Sealer Type M
as specified in Section 07900 – JOINT SEALERS.
B. Bolts, nuts, washers, lags, pins and screws: Of size and type to suit application
chrome finish in exposed-to-view locations.
C. 20mm thick marine plywood for backing.
D. Concealed supports for edge and corner backing shall be kiln dried birch or popular.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Coordinate the fabrication of solid surfacing products with that of the various trades
responsible for installing materials and items, which will be inserted into, or applied
to, the countertop surfaces. Obtain and verify templates, dimensions and instructions
from the respective trades before making cutouts, holes, slots and other cutting in the
countertops.
B. Shop fabricate all solid surfacing items in strict accordance with the details on the
Drawings, the approved shop drawings and recommendations of the polymer
manufacturer.
1. Prepare polymer fabrications for installation of plumbing fixtures.
C. Fit corners and joints hairline. Make all field joints and miters tight, secure with
concealed fasteners.
D. Provide shop fabricated counters, shop mitered components, closure trims with
ample allowance for field cutting and fitting. Provide additional trim as required for
scribing and site cutting.
E. Route all edges to be butted for a smooth, clean, fit. Sand edges to rough up
surfaces for adhesive bonding. Clean with denatured alcohol.
F. Prepare and apply adhesive in compliance with manufacturer’s written instruction.

Clamp all components using manufacturer’s approved clamping methods at all joints
and build-up laminations, maintain clamping until adhesive is set. Avoid over-
tightening clamps and squeezing out adhesive.
G. Remove excess adhesive when dry with router. Follow with belt sander using,
diagonal to joint after adhesive is leveled and smooth with surface proceed with final
shaping and finishing.
H. After shaping, bring finish of all surfaces equal to manufacturer’s original satin finish.
Sand surfaces smooth with wet and dry sandpaper. Remove superficial scratches
and sander markings, buff with nylon buffing pads as recommended by polymer
manufacturer. Wipe surfaces clean and dry with cloths.
I. Finished work shall be free from visible adhesive and layout marks.

20th October 2021
J. Field touch-up: Shall be the responsibility of the installer and shall include the filling
and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes, refinishing of surfaces
resulting from job fitting, repair of job inflicted scratches and marks and final cleaning
up of the finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 JOB MOCK-UP
A. Prior to final approval of shop drawings, erect at project site one full size mock-up of
each component required, for Engineer’s review.
B. Should mock-up not be approved, re-fabricate and reinstall until approval is secured.
Remove rejected units from project site.
C. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General: Install work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Solid surfacing shall be installed plumb, level, true and straight without distortions:
1. Use concealed shims a required.
2. Work shall be installed to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and
levelness, including tops.
3. There shall be no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
C. Tops and trim shall be scribed and trimmed to fit adjoining work.
1. Where cuts occur, refinish surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
D. Secure polymer fabrications to blocking directly attached to substrates.
1. Secure fabrications using concealed fasteners.
2. Anchor tops securely to base units and to other support systems as required.
E. After installation and leveling of polymer fabrications has been completed; apply a
continuous bead of specified sealant to all joints which abutt walls or partitions. Tool
the sealant to a uniformly dense surface, level with the edges of the casework.
Immediately remove all excess sealant from polymer surfaces.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true position 2mm (1/16 inch) with a maximum of 1mm
(1/32) inch offset from true alignment with adjoining surfaces intended to be flush.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of scraps.
B. Clean excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable
to sealant and polymer manufacturers.

20th October 2021
C. Wash down polymer surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied
with soft clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces
clean.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed fabrications in a manner acceptable to fabricator and installer, which

shall ensure no damage or deterioration at the time of Final acceptance of Project by
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

20th October 2021

Document III-2 - Volume 1 of 3 (Division 1 To Division 12)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Document III-2 - Volume 1 of 3 (Division 1 To Division 12)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ministry of Health

Construction, Completion and Maintenance of

20th October, 2021

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

DOCUMENT III-1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Page III-1/1

DOCUMENT III-2 : PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 10 09 Special Notes, Priority of Documents Overriding Clauses etc. 01 10 09–1 – 2

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-i

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Section 01 88 70 Product Warranties/Guarantees 01 88 70–1 – 4

DIVISION 2 – EXISITING CONDITIONS

Section 02 02 00 Site Preparation 02 02 00 –1 – 3

Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03 10 00 – 1 – 10

Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 – 1 – 13

Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 12 00 – 1 – 10

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-ii

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

Section 06 05 24 Decorative Plastic Laminate Finishes 06 05 24 – 1 – 5

DIVISION 7– THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Damp-proofing 07 11 13 – 1 – 4

Section 08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 00 – 1 – 6

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-iii

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 – 1 – 8

Section 10 14 53 Traffic Signs 10 14 53 – 1 – 4

DIVISION 12 – FURNITURE & FURNISHINGS

Section 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 24 13 – 1 – 8

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-iv

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

Section 14 00 00 Conveying Equipment 14 00 00 – 1 – 16

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPRESSION

Section 21 00 00 Fire Suppression 21 00 00 – 1 – 9

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-v

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Section 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16 – 1 – 10

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Section 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 00 00 – 1 – 17

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-vi

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units 23 36 00 – 1 – 7

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls 25 50 00 – 1 – 44

Section 26 00 00 General Provision for Electrical Installation 26 00 00-1 – 18

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-vii

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Section 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch 26 36 23-1 – 10

Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling System (Category 6A) 27 10 00-1 – 35

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Section 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 11 00– 1 – 6

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-viii

DIVISION NO./ DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Section 32 01 95 Landscape Maintenance 32 01 95– 1 – 11

Section 33 31 01 Reinforced/Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings 33 31 01– 1 – 8

Gulf Consult Table of Contents III-2 / TOC-ix

DOCUMENTIII-1: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

4. For Telephone Works, the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS of Ministry of

Gulf Consult General Specifications Page III-1/1

SPECIAL NOTES, PRIORITY OF DOCUMENTS ETC.

In absence of Statutory Authorities Specifications, requisite Standard Specifications (following